Ds \ X > Weay
es > & SO »

ac oo * a) we oN >, yeh Osx
) \’ ny » Mi
2 cy) »% OX

: »» OK) >»

K x BS
ey, > a
# . aK »» % ee Os

gehrssitiess rst titerets

x
SZ
Se
———
Sieeseeinnnciie
ES
Hisense

es

ry) ye co
2 : i A », a
; 4 K | i i
y’ * “ oi » » »: /
‘ Nye
Ris aa a XH \ \r\
ne : ISX me, 4 & ‘ e |

KK) ON OO:

SN oe HAS »s Bees & a

ee we ‘ oo » %; . . NG
" cs ae
‘ be ae Ake re x

.,
i
ss,

yy?

ne
Xe

NL Vay

ee CORN :
BAN TDs, uae _y
\ ue 3) ‘ +, rae . Ne Ms XS NY
) 4a BE) Ss . ‘

PX DOD
> a yey

yD Ste %N SA
a8

r 7 »)
« nx Sy Rae es
. A Nag ‘ o ON AG i a
Ah Bas oe

Dy BN ho NN Nea Nag
its : PONE NGM ; i
oy XA
dey) CAUN cans
, { du
»» & His hh hy Nis madi i !
nS a 9 na »? WANG \ NY ANN! i
5 aN NY x ue @
“ , r aN y yy rh WANA . Us
: Tara , \ a ¢ i ASD GAG
; NAN LONEN CO
WENO ANE

— <

gessiereteassssts

terete tasssscecsesegeripsistrs stresses
giosesaastescesetgatetatesitat or ete is iecesgeisiat:
SiTSTs tres terete * iS Seperate

pacsptsece
saizcet
Resisice es

Sarees
beseistyajsetetsSes
“Ss o*:

sists
sare

aepbe teres 23
iejécecscee + =e

See tidicis

223305!

ie ssseE

ss tecasvsitises
Wises
« “Syete-e-

“SESE eee

LIBRARY

OF THE

FW Popuiavt 3

~

ae
. 7
az

~ Evanston, |Ifnobe

ave

>)

ay

. wate tes!
\ Y

ASTATIC RESE/ 8CHES;

OR

>

TRANSACTIONS

~ OF THE

SOCIETY INSTITUTED IN BENGAL,

For inquiring into the
History and Antiquities,
THE

ARTS, SCIENCES, AND LITERATURE,

OF

ASIA.

VOLUME THE NINTH.

PRINTED VERBATIM FROM THE CALCUTTA EDITION,

LONDON :

PRINTED FOR VERNOR, HOOD, AND SHARPE; CUTHELL AND MARTIN Zz
J. WALKER ; LACKINGTON, ALLEN, AND CO.; OTRIDGE AND SON ; LONGMAN,
HURST, REES, AND ORME; R. FAULDER; SCATCHERD AND LETTERMAN ;

a R. LEA; J. MAWMAN; J. MURRAY; J. ASPERNE; BLACK, PARRY, AND
KINGSBURY; AND E. LLOYD;

At the Union Printing-Office, St. John’s Square, by W. Wilson. i
:

ql 1809.

~
’
7
$
. '
’
‘
.
‘
,
44
, > i
a ne n
7
7 bel
p- Oa am
+ -
b
Se ¥
*
.

it <a * >
‘ -
e ’
- = le
» wow h
7 7
Me. 3 pe
-
. ,
4 a F: =
1
-
- T *
-
ors ed q
é oy a
: >t
a t.< Cae
= . ;
“er 9
. is 120% \ Po a
im A ;
BRT Og hss
) )
ot 12. Meee sR
, .)
4 te em bog in igh
€ .
* =
= :
- > . “
y «
.
i
- <<
- a

‘arrtt| Biblical twat
Rana Evanston, Htnole

.

hee

tw UY vj

Bs SR te

e)
0)

Ms

-)
>
“|.

ie CONTENTS.

¢ PAGE

J. An account of experiments made in the Mysore country,
in the year 1804, to investigate the effects of terres-
trial refraction, By LIEUTENANT WARREN -->-

II. Description of a very sensible Hygrometer. By LIEv-
TENANT KATER cee cece cccecescsacecccses

JIT. An Essay on the Sacred Isles in the West, with other
Essays connected with that Work. By CapTaiNn
WILFORD ccccccce cccces ananassae earat

Essay II. Anu Gangam, or the Gangetic Provinces, and
more particularly of Magad’ha + -+++++++eseseeee

Essay IIT. Of the Kings of baa ‘ha; their -Chrono-

logy eoceeeoeeeroaeeereeeeeeeeeeees ecoeeveseeeenes

Essay IV. VicRAMADITYA and SALIVAHANA; their
respective Eras, with an account of the Bala-Rayas,
or Balhar Emperors | +++++eeseeeees P haeiaiava cen

IV. Account of the Jains, collected from a Priest of this
sect; at Mudgeri: Translated by CAVELLY Borta,
Brahmen ; for Major C. MACKENZIE +++++eeees

V. Observations on the seet of ecg PY H. T. Co.e-

BROOKE, Esq. +++++++++ees eee e err esercece cee
VI. On the Indian and Arabian Divisions of the ZODIAC.
By H. T. COLEBROOKE, Esq: «+++++-+ee- veces

VII. On Olibanum, or Frankincense. By H. T. Coue-
BROOKE, Esq. eseseseecsccceencesecacenesece

VIII. Remarks on the species of Pepper which are found on
Prince of Wales’s Island. By Wm. HuNTER, M.D.

1X. Description of an improved Hygrometer. By LiEv-
TENANT KATER CI AICI SI TMS uF CC CU ORL ES

X. On ancient Monuments, containing Sanscrit Inscriptions.
By H. T. COLEBROOKE, Esq. +++++eseseeeeeee

XI. On the Grémas, or Musical Scales of the Hindis. By
J.D. PATERSON, Esq. -+++++++: i ebisgaeaes cee 3

APPENDIX, @eeesesvooveseeoe8¢eeee Fees ern 8Seeese ease

32

82 -

117

Bf Seb Men, dol tia a

#4 “Wie Mee

¢ 4
wir i ,
We D AS
. P
f
te
« } oO
Whe h 4 dha ke. f
; eu Ye as
‘ SWC sii Pu Bl |
we U9 eee
. pee ss
, ‘ 2" {
es
A i
Cu
i Uap fee 7
. “4
PTO Te
' 7
vi ry : Deena
\ ia
\ ; A
¢ t ,
Ace af
’ 7 j
ve war) | ee ay ' .
’ SF , ,
. gt m6: : . Nee AY ies
A) Lo RAIL RE RIC Se SR hE

mess at sik Rhee

a ul : . . / a
; i Ry a,
‘ a ’ ‘
é' . . an
, ; > 4 ‘ }
¥ r Ar Ghia “1
' ola a ay
i ' * ba. MN M4
‘ 4

MEMBERS
OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY,
1807.

PATRONS.

Tue Honovurasrie Sir G. H. BARLOW, Baronet,
GovERNOR GENERAL.

Tue Ricgut HonovrasBLe GENERAL GERARD LORD
LAKE, ComMAnDER IN CHIEF.

GEORGE UDNY, Esq. rene Members of the Supreme
JOHN LUMSDEN, Eso. Council.

Presipent, H. T. COLEBROOKE, Eso.

ist Vick Prestpent, J. H. HARINGTON, Eso.

2d Vice Prestpent, Docror JOHN FLEMING.

Siz JOHN ROYDS, Knicenur. >

H., P. FORSTER,, Eso.

ne eG. pein eo Committee of Papers,
J - BENTLEY Feo ay with the President,
R. P. SM ITH Eso: f Vice Presidents, and
JAMES HARE, Junior, M.D. | Secretary.

W. L. GIBBONS, Eso. |
Reverenp W. CAREY, . if

Secretary, WILLIAM HUNTER, M. D.
TREASURERS, Messrs. TRAIL, PALMER, anv CO.

Acent 1n Evrore, Lirurenant Coroner MICHAEL

SYMES.

MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

MEMBERS.

James Alexander, Esq.
David Anderson, Esq.
Doctor James Anderson.
Lieutenant J. Anderson.
Richard Anster, Esq.
St. George Ardley, Esq.

Capt. John Baillie.

Lt. Co]. Lamington Baillie.
P. C. Baird, Esq.

Francis Balfour, M. D.
James Barton, Esq.

W. B. Payley, Esq.

John Bebb, Esq.

Reverend J. Bell.

John Belli, Esq.

Andrew Berry, M. D.
Robert Biddulph, Esq.
Richard Comyn Birch, Esq.
Robert Blake, Esq.

Richard Blechynden, Esq.
William Boag, Esq.

Charles Boddam, Esq.

R. H. Boddam, Esq.

Lieut. Col. Joseph Boden.
Captain G. Bristow.
Thomas Brooke, Esq.
Ralph Broome, Esq.

Rey. David Brown.
Honourable C. A. Bruce.
Rev.Claudius Buchanan, D.D.
Francis Buchanan, M.D.
Sir William Burroughs, Bart.

Major W. Burton.

Captain B. Camac.

Alexander Campbell, M. D.
Mumford Campbell, Esq.
Lieut. John Canning.

Sir Codring. E. Carrington, Kt.
Thomas Casement, Esq.
Charles Chapman, Esq.

Hon. John Cochrane.

J. E. Colebrooke, Esq.

Lt. Col. R. H. Colebrooke.
Col. John Collins.

H. Compton, Esq.
William Cowper, Esq.
Burrish Crisp, Esq.

John Crisp, Esq.

Thomas Daniel, Esq.
George Davidson, Esq.
Samuel Davis, Esq.

W.A. Devis, Esq.

John Dickens, Esq.
James Dinwiddie, L. L. D.
G. Dowdeswell, Esq.

C. D’Oyly, Esq.

Hon. Jonathan Duncan.

N. B. Edmonstone, Esq.
John Ehiot, Esq.
Francis Ehlis, Esq.
Walter Ewer, Esq.

Captain G. H. Fagan.
Robert Farquhar, Esq.
Leopold Fichtell, Esq.
John Fombelle, Esq.
Nicholas Fontana, Esq.
Francis Fowke, Esq.
Capt. William Francklin.
Lt. Col, Charles Fraser.
Rey. N. G. Fuglsang.

Lt. Col. John Garstin.
J. Borthwick Gilchrist, LL.D. ~
Francis Gladwin, Esq.

J. Goldingham, Esq.

R.T. Goodwin, Esq.

F. D. Gordon, Esq. ;
Lt. Col. H. M. Gordon.
C. Gowan, Esq.

mee.

as §

MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

‘Thomas Graham, sq.

Charles Grant, Esq.
James Grant, Esq.
William Grant, Esq.

Lt.Col. Henry Haldane.

Alexander Hamilton, Esq. -

Lt. Col. Thomas Hardwicke,
James Hare, Esq. M. D.
Herbert Harris, Esq.
Warren Hastings, Esq.
Francis Hawkins, Esq.
W.N. W. Hewitt, Esq.
Benjamin Heyne, M. D.
W. Hickey, Esq.

Henry Hodgson, Esq.
D. Hopkins, Esq.
Francis Horsley, Esq.
Lieut. Col. Houghton.
James Howison, Esq.
Osias Humphries, Esq.
John Hunter, Esq.

James Irwin, Esq.
Richard Johnson, Esq.

_ A.H. Kelso, Esq.

Sir John Kennaway, Bart.
Richard Kennaway, Esq.
Colonel W. Kirkpatrick.
Colonel Alexander Kyd.

Major William Lambton.
Thomas Law, Esq.
Rev. Francis Lee, A. M.

J.C. Leyden, M.D.

Charles Lloyd, Esq.
Lieut. Col. Herbert Lloyd.

Lieut. Col. Colin Macauley.

Lieut. Alexander Macdonald.

Lieut. W. Macdougal.
Lt. Gen. Hay Macdowal.
Major Colin Mackenzie.

Andrew Macklew, Esq.

a

,

Donald Macnabb, Esq.
Francis Macnaghten, Esq.
Col. Allen Macpherson.

Sir John Macpherson, Bart.
Lieut. Col. John Malcolm.
Sir Charles W. Malet, Bart.
William Marsden, Esq.
Bartholomew Marsh, Esq.
Groeme Mercer, Esq.
Nathaniel Middleton, Esq.
Major Edward Moore.
Edmund Morris, Esq.
Capt. James Mouat.

Sir John Murray, Bart.
Thomas Myers, Esq.

} The Hon. Frederick North.

Gore Ousley, Esq.

Major Gen. William Palmer.
Thomas Parr, Esq.
George Parry, Esq.

| John David Paterson, Esq.
4 Col. William Paterson.

Capt. Thomas Preston.

Thomas Raban, Esq.
Henry Ramus, Esq.

John Rawlins, Esq. .

Lt. Col. D. T. Richardson.

} Col. R. E. Roberts.

Capt. Thomas Robertson.
George Robinson, Esq.
John Romer, Esq.

j James Ross, Esq.
j Alexander Russell, Esq.
| Sir Henry Russell, Knight.

Robert Saunders, Esq.
Helenus Scott, Esq.
Lieut. Col. Richard Scott.
Thomas Scott, Esq.

Daniel Seton, Esq.

J. W. Sherer, Esq.

MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC gecrery.

John Shoolbred, Esq. Charles Wilkins, Esq.
Peter Speke, Esq. John Lloyd Williams, Esq.
Captain Charles Stewart. Lieut. Col. H. Worsley.
Sir Thomas Strange, Knight. |
John Zoffany, Esq.

James Stuart, Esq. |
Captain B. Sydenham.
Lieut, Col. M. Symes.
John Taylor, Esq. ;
Rt. Hon. Lord Teignmouth,
Rev. William Tennant.
George Thompson, Esq.
Isaac Titsing, Esq.
~ Henry Trail, Esq.

H. St. G. Tucker, Esq.

-
HONORARY MEMBERS.

M. Carpentier de Cossigny.
Rev. D. John. —

Rev. Thomas Maurice.

| M. Volney.

| Sir William Ouseley, Bart. |
| Major L. Dundas Campbell.

Lord Viscount Valentia.

Lieut. John Warren.
Captain Francis Wilford.

\

\ ;

TRANSACTIONS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

wv,
ti 3

An account of Experiments made in the Mysorz
Country, im the year 1804, to investigate the
effects of Terrestrial Refraction. “

BY LIEUTENANT JOHN WARREN,
Of H. M. 33d Regiment of Fuot.

ee
INTRODUCTION.

Norwirusranprxe the various theories which
have been advanced, at different times, to account
for the effects of refraction*; and the numerous ex-
periments which have been made by the most eminent
philosophers of our times, with a view to discover
some law by which its effects might be reduced to
certain narrow limits, applicable to practice, nothing
sufficiently satisfactory has yet occurred to set the
question finally to rest. ;

The late Genarat Roy was the first among us,
who availed himself of the favorable opportunity
which his survey presented, to pay some minute at-

* Particularly by De CarreEs, LEIBNITZ, the two BERNOUIL-
Lis, and lastly by Sir Isaac NEWTON, whose hypothesis, ground-.

ed on the laws of attraction, now generally obtains among physical
writers.

Vou. IX. B

3

2 EXPERIMENTS ON

tention to the effects of terrestrial refraction. After
him Coroner Wititams and Mr. Daxsy resumed
the investigation, as far as the service on which they
were employed conveniently allowed: but as this
was but a secondary object with them, little addi-
tional information is to be gathered from their la-
bours. Masor Munpeae has, indeed, made a number
of experiments since that time; but the result has
fallen so far short of his expectations, that he promises,
in_ his latest publication, to resume and pay particular
attention tothe subject: and we have nodoubt every
right to expect something very valuable from that
quarter. But, may not the laws of refraction be so
materially affected by gravity, and other unknown
causes, as to vary in different parts of the globe, and
that theory which obtains in high northern latitudes
fail in tropical regions? indeed, the irregularities
which of late have been detected in the declinations
of certain stars *, which, though unobserved in Eng-

land, are powerfully felt in these climates, sufficient-

ly show how much we have reason to suspect an

* Mason LAMBTON, ina postscript to one Of his late reports-to
government, has this observation. ‘ We find here, that different stars
** vive very different latitudes after being corrected for aberration,

“ patation, &c. At Trivandeporum, the latitude of that station by
«« Aldebaran was 11° 44’ 52” 59. The latitude by Regulus was
“ 11° 44’ 47” 84, and the latitude by «Orionis, 11° 44 40” 91. I had
““ made observations by the same three starsat Paudree station, where
“ those by Regulus and aOrionis were often interrupted on accountof
*« the bad weather, and consequently left doubtful: but the differences
“ notwithstanding were nearly the same, &c. Though these obser-
“ vations have been set aside, they serve sufficiently to prove that the
“ declinations, as Jai! down in Europe, are irregular here, and this
“« may probably arise from the uncertainty we labour under with re-
* spect to the laws of refraction; and in consequence of erring in
“ that, the difference of the corrected zenith distances of two stars
“observed in Europe, will mot be the same as the difference which
“* the same stars will give in thislatitude. I am, however, hazarding
‘* an opinion, but as I intend, being more satisfied as to the fact, I
“ hope I shall be able to say more on the subject hereafter.”

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. 3

effect of the sort, and must evince the expediency of
obtaining: corresponding experiments in different lati-
tudes; for, it is obvious, that even to ascertain any
deviation in a system, perhaps too generalised,
might be attended with incalculable advantages to
science.

It must be owned, that to render experiments on
terrestrial refraction pointedly useful, it would be ne-
cessary to shew how discoveries in this province
might apply and be extended to refraction in general.
Hitherto, on this recondite subject, nothing which
would immediately apply has reached my knowledge ;
but as so much is still to be done whenever refrac-
tion is concerned, we may argue, that, in the present
stage of our information, observations confined to
terrestrial objects may be deemed sufficient,

It has been stated on experiments*, that the refrac-
tive power of the air is proportional to its density;
and this is’ as its weight directly, and heat in-
versely. It would then appear, were our barometers
and thermometers, sufficiently accurate, that by com-
paring them at any given time, the ratio of its density
might be had. But it has been found, on trial, that
in the present unimproved state of these instruments,
changes, not very minute, in the density of the at-
mosphere, escape our notice, when a reference is made
to them alone.

Now, since we have every reason to suppose, that
whatever share, heat, cold, or electricity, may have
separately on the refractive powers of the air 7, their

* By HALLEY.

+ EULER, after a number of experiments on the immediate effects
of heat and cold, on the refractive powers of media, concludes, “ that,
“ in all translucent substances, the focal distances diminish with the
* heat, which diminution, he conceives, is owing to a change in the

; Ba

A EXPERIMENTS ON

effect is extremely inconsiderable, when compared
with that caused by the bulk of water contained in
dissolution in the atmosphere: we may, therefore,
in the present inquiry, consider them merely as
agents, composing and decomposing perpetually the
air; and neglect the consideration of that immediate
effect which SmitH and Evurer have ascribed to
them. Should we'then succeed, in ascertaining, with
any degree of accuracy, the relative degree of mois-
ture and dryness, at the different times of observa-
tion, we shall (without neglecting other considera-
tions) lay more stress on these results, than on what |
might be deduced separately. from observations of the
barometer and thermometer.

Before entering into the subject of experiments, it
will be proper to preface a few words on the motives
which induced me to attend particularly to the ef
fects of terrestrial refraction, at the time that I did;
as it will afford an oppor analy. of giving an account
of the data on which I chiefly proceeded.

Having received directions from Masor Lams-
TON *, to measure a line near Bangalore, to serve as
a base of verification to the trigonometrical operations
which were then carried on “under his superintend-
ance, it occurred to me, when this service was com-
pleted, that so favourable an opportunity was not
likely to recur, for entering minutely into the sub-
ject; for every possible means had been taken, to in-
sure as accurate a measurement as could be effected :
and this line, together with the elevation of one of

Tan en a a a re

* refractive power of the substance itself; which probably increases
“« by heat, and diminisies by cold.”

But this applies chiefly to hard media, such as glass lenses, &c. &e.
and may be deemed (for the present) too inconsiderable to require
particular notice, where air is the medium,

* Whose assistant I then was.

\

i
ie
*

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. 3

its extremities above the other, (ascertained in the
course of the measurement) afforded every necessary
datum to proceed on in this investigation.

As the detailed account of the abovementioned
operation will appear at full length in Masor Lams-
TON’s reports, and cannot with propriety be given in
this paper, I hope that its being known to form a
part of the trigonometrical operations, carried on in
the peninsula of India, will appear a sufficient pledge
of its accuracy.

ACCOUNT OF INSTRUMENTS.

The elevations and depressions were taken with
the great theodolite, used by Major Lampton, for
carrying on his series of primary triangles across the
peninsula. This instrument, having been formerly
described by himself, need not be any further parti-
cularised. The angles were invariably taken with
the micrometer in the focus of the telescope.

A barometer and thermometer were also procured*;
but from the reasons above given, the want of an
hygrometer was likely to deprive me of what I
considered to be an essential means of investiga-
tion (though I cannot find that such an instru-
ment was ever applied’ to a similar purpose) when
Lirutenant Karen, of H. M. 12th regiment, com-
municated to me his observation, on the bearded
seeds of a wild grass, called in the Malabar tongue
Panimooloo (the Andropogon contortum of Linn aus)
which grows in abundance in this part of the penin-
sula, and which he thought was likely to answer for
an instrument of this sort f.

* The barometer was a common one, the property of Dr. HEYNE,
the company’s naturalist. The thermometer, one of Fahrenheit’s
division.

+ The beards of the wild oats have been used in England fora
similar purpose (see Hurron’s Dictionary, ait. Hygrometer).

f B 3

6 EXPERIMENTS ON

~ Although I understand it to be this gentleman’s

intention to give an account of his. experiments on
these fibres to the public; yet, as his official calls
prevented him from going minutely into the subject,
at the period when I had occasion for an hygrome-
ter, I was under the necessity of anticipating his
intended investigation ; and the experiments detailed
in the appendix will shew, that after an ample trial,
the beards of the Panimooloo grass were found per-
fectly competent to the construction of an hygro-

meter. Three of these instruments were therefore

constructed, and the mean of their readings noticed
in the annexed tables. |

EXPLANATION OF THE TABLES.

The detail of experiments on the effects of terres-
trial refraction, together with the immediate results
deduced from them, appear in these tables, under
the appropriate columns; and a reference to them
will best explain their arrangements.

It is however necessary to explain the meaning of
certain marks, which appear at various places under
the figures, and which have been adopted both for
the sake of perspicuity and brevity. ;

I soon perceived, after collecting a certain num-
ber of observations, the prevailing agreement _be-
tween the motions of the hygrometer, and the varia-
tions, which occurred in the observed angles of ele-
vation and depression.

This being a novel and interesting fact (of which
I had still more reason to be convinced, after I
had succeeded in regulating the hygrometers) I
was desirous to draw the attention on this coinci-
dence, and with this view the marks alluded to were
affixed.

f Ps,
& *
« 7

-

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. 7

Taking it for granted (as perhaps the present ex-
periments will be deemed to allow) that where the
moisture of the atmosphere is greatest, the refraction
at that moment is also greatest (and’ vice versa)
wherever, in the annexed tables, the observation
rigorously agrees with this theory, the mark (§) is
placed underneath*; where the coincidence of mois-
ture and refraction is not absolutely exact, the ap-
proximation is pointed out by a cross { {, shewing,
by the number of its bars, how near it comes to

perfect consistency. ,

With a view to,draw the attention still closer»to
the effects of moisture on refraction, two columns
of differences, which were kept at the time of obser-
vation, have been preserved. The column which
relates to the angles being marked +, according as
these have been measured greater or less, at the two
nearest observations ; and that of the contempora-
neous relative moisture being marked M, or D, ac-
cording as the atmosphere had changed from a
moister to a drier state, and wice versa.

As this coincidence has been very general, I found,

* Tt is to be noticed, however, that morning and evening obser-
vations are compared separately, neglecting those taken in the
middle of the day; for these, from the great motion which then
disturbs the atmosphere, must necessarily be very imperfect. The
only reason why these observations are not left out altogether, is,
that however imperfect they may be, as to a second or two, they
contribute nevertheless to establish the proof of the relation of mots~
ture to refraction ; for it is to be observed, that (when the weather is
perfectly clear of rainy clouds) the refraction is never so inconsicer-
able as in the heat of noon, when the sun shines brightest, and when
the tremor of the atmosphere, is most cousiderable: and the reason
of this seems to be, “ because the atmosphere, however disturbed,
“ is then generally in its driest state.” There was so little refraction
at that hour, that the elevations of the Muntapum frequently bring
it out negative; an absurdity which arises both from the impossibi-

lity of taking the angles accurately, and the very small refraction
then prevailing.

f

8 EXPERIMENTS ON

the shortest way was to mark with an asterisk (*)
those cases where it had failed; and by inspecting
the tables, it will appear that the number of these
1s comparatively small.

The quantity of refraction, as entered in the ap-
propriate columns, has been computed, according to
those respective cases of depression or elevation,
founded on reasonings, too generally known to Te-
quire any } minute explanation,

.
It will only be necessar y to state, that) with regard
to the measured line, the formula 1d—D+a*

has been used in preference to th t of pase @tDe ae

for the obvious reason, that a greater reliance was to
be placed on the perpendicular depression, obtained
during the process of measurement, than on corres-
ponding angular depressions, taken at the $. end of
the base line, even though an equal number of ob-
servations had been taken at each end.

The refraction, affecting the elevation of the
Muntapumt, was necessarily computed by means of
the elevations and depressions, taken at both places re-
spectively, r= —*’ being the appropr iate formula,

where Z expresses the station and is less than D.

An example of each will suffice to render the sub- _

ject perfectly clear.

* Where r= Refraction.
4 A= One half the contained arc.
D= The greater depression.
D’= The less depression.
And a= The angle subtended by the perpendicular depres-
sion of S. end of measured line.

+ A small stone building, on a very conspicuous rising ground,
about four miles N. of Bangalore.

a

TERKESTRIAL REFRACTION. 9

EXAMPLE I.

The length of the measured line (Banswary dni
Beygoor ) being converted into an arc of a great circle,
gives 6’ 34,” 67=A*.

Again, the depression of the south extremity of
the line (near Beygoor) below the level of the north-
ern one, is 39. 7 feet, and using the proportion of
radius to tangent, we have for “the angle which it
subtends 3 95.” 75 =a.

Lastly, on the 7th of August, at 6": 30’ A. M. the
depression of the foot of the flag-staff near Beygoor,
was observed at Banswary, 6' 42” 66.

%

But the height of the observer's eye above the
ground was 5. 67 feet (that of the instrument) which
a reduce to the ground, will require 29° 39 to sub-
tract : consequently, the corrected depression will be
6 13°.27=D (the quantity entered in the tables).
Whence

4 A=3' V7 ga”
AME 3 I AON FS

—EEE

6 43 09

+ D=6"' 13?" 27
g—' 429°) 52

|

The refraction entered in the tables.

* The horizontal length of the measured line is 39799, 31 feet ;
and when reduced to the level of the sea,=39795, 7. This length
has been used, in this particular case, to obtain the contained arc;
because the tables, by means of which the operation was performed,
were calculated to that distance from the centre of the earth.

10 EXPERIMENTS ON

EXAMPLE II.

At the same hour, the top of the flag-staff was
observed 4 37.’ 82; which, corrected for the height
of the instrument, as above, gives the depression
4/07 93=D. Again, the length of the flag-staff
being 24 feet, this subtracted from 39.7, leaves the
perpendicular depression below the line of the level
15. 7 feet; and the angle which it auppcmisesb ay’
36=a.

Hence we have,

1 A=3 17” $4
hea OT SG
is

A 38 ae

— D=4 FM bs"
PaO SO Te

ey

The refraction entered in the tables.

EXAMPLE III.

ist. The distance from the N. extremity of the line
(Banswary ) to the Muntapum is 26327. 3, which, con-
verted into an arc of a great circle, 1s 418° 7=A.

ad. Again, the elevation of the Muntapum was
taken at Banswar ‘'y (on the same day 8" 17” A. M.)
9 21” 84, and this corrected for the height of the
instrument (by adding: 44” 43),. makes the elevation
10-6” a7=E.

$d. Lastly, in the oe ing of aA during the
afternoon, being at the Jd untapum, the depression of
N. end of line was observed, on a mean of four ober

Nat 4

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. 1h

vations, to be 15’.19”5, and the instrument (in the
Muntapum) being 8, 5 feet above the ground, we
have to subtract 1’ 6’ 59, which reduces the depres-
sion to 14 12° 91=D, a constant quantity in com-
puting the third coiumn of refraction.

Hence we have,
D214; 12° "91
—E=10 06 27

4 06 64

A= Arn, 1 Sina
8)0 12 06
; 06 03

The refraction entered in the tables.

The absolute degree of moisture was deduced as:
follows:

As I knew of no standard, by which I might set
the hygrometer, when I was about observing, the:
least degree of moisture noticed during the day was
assumed as zero. ‘This arrangement had this advan-
tage, that the refraction and moisture had a similar
direction, and their coincidence met the eye more
easily. :

The column which shews the absolute density of
the atmosphere was computed by this formula: .

ee

D=(- BB’) x28002! xe = es
(C )Ro8ee = * 1- = .* founded on rea,

* Where D expresses the increase of density, B the height of
barometer at the time of observation, B’ the state of the same when
lowest of. all, n. the difference of temperature in theair, and d the

«lifference of temperature in the mercury.

,

19, EXPERIMENTS ON

sonings sufficiently known. An example, however,
may not be deemed superfluous.

EXAMPLE.

The lowest degree to which the barometer de-
scended during the course of these experiments, was
26. 85 inches=B’, when the temperature also least
of all was 69°. “These two quantities are used as.
constant in the computations. \

he
Now, on the 7th of August, at 6° 39’ A.M. the

barometer was oberved to be at 97=B

from which deduct | 26 3625 .

there remains, 0 15=B—B’
Again, the thermometer at the. same time

was pigsty .

from which deduct 69

and we have 6=n ; and as no difference

of temperature was noticed in “the atmosphere and

mercury, the same quantity (6) will also be ex-
pressed by d. ’

Hence it is that having found, i.
B—B=0. 15; son0nd 4 09, 99, ‘eo and 458— —"=0.
98, &c. we have 0. 15 x 0.99 x 0.98 =0. 145530; —
which to reduce i iaecrs of B (the least density) we

have 2688 — the increase of density.
0°145530 184

~f

Lastly, to obtain an expression. in absolute num-
bers, we have, as 26. 85 : 26. 85+-=1,::1000 : 1000.
202, the quantity entered in the tables.

The remaining columns are sufficiently explicit > ae
require no explanation,

r 6
8
g | UPr
9 "
r og ¢
O00},
+9 ¢
508 O00!
ee s
30 000].
¢ !
’
’ | ot
IT
j -
1 oF 6
6
CFL
rs tr} 9 {met
14% 000\__|}___ on
1 =
= GO 4 8 w Z 3 =
a1 = oO ond Ss 3 =
28 Si 3 s A =
Fos eis if] 8] s
P38) 13) 2 [aig] =
esi | ee |e
E.3 Ss} & | &
a! =

lapateu: syuaus.
em em,

4vo0;Luuu ZUZ] 7 ZZ }
31611000 209] 14 x - tere very still.
412|1000 209] 13 13\| 4. UY;
Pres 1000 271 ye +|
5¥0}1000 271} 9 os}
115|1000 271] 0 91|| sphere.
ai 1000 271 pe |
80]1000 voz} O 91 e very great.

| ‘
-__tining occasionally.
|

0 11000 131] 9 08

§ |
12 74)) —
__eavy clonds all about.

§
70|1000 902

250|1000 202} 40 67

Elecation of Foot of Muntapun. Refractinns compared, Ratio of Reraction to the
é ess S) S| + contained Arc.
A ltesst alls 3 lap 2 i pulses Ta lie ecb lecoe sD ele
EE IE «|| = = | 33 23 & eS |B 143 E s2 |= S 5
s ee co pes ; Z5| 53 > a 7 = £ 2 _ ET EY pee rs = ae = =
e/e ls ]z 2 g (88 (célcee| 2 35] 8 see | 3 3 g l22 (of) ssq)] 2 | Se a: Cee: A REMARKS.
a 3S 12] 2 2 Z_. 2 55 =z e| 3 Ae E gos] 3 fe S |52 |E2 23 3 sé ‘s s = =
2(2H 2 le] 62 | 2 wegkel bse] | se | § g22/ 2 | 58 | & je2alsel Seo) € | gs | s = Sees
S 5] 2 zZ § =F = = = o = re 2
2/2 ld lal 42 | 4 jAggiesi sce) = | Ae | © Sia] | As | A fsles|552)] 2 | es. £2 2 é s
0} 4 75 345|1000 202] 29 8\|1—07 93] + 6 36 34u]1000 203| 30 77 ERG i re .
i as ta 85] § D 85 i | Isai | ae 62 claps:
6 54) 2) 27 (75 260}1000 209] 14 83/414 29} — 8 70) 260/1000 202| £4 44 2 Ditto, ditto.
—7 86D 54 =) Do 54
7 26) 3) 27 «(174 |\6—20 35) ~ * | o6l1000 g09| 22 74]|4—05 59] +22 08) © | 206]1000 202} 53 11 Ditto, ditto.
+ + + i D 43] ¢ t :
8 17] 4] 27 05/73 ae 67] — 7 08 ran 165]1000 271] 11 03/10 6 27 hat 163}1000 Ditto, ditto: a good deal of motion in the atmosphere.
ss =| 1
_ | 10 37] 5] 27 05)76 4—20 59) + 9 49) ae 224/1000 271] 18 4)! 9 48 05) i i nats 4, 224)1000 Ditto, ditto: great motion in the air; flag very indistinct.
12 16] 6) 27 |80 4—50 01] —11 82 29/1000 202) 08 70|| 9 56 31 = * | 29}1000 Liglit clouds: flag very indistinct.
M 93 +5 1/M 95] ;
2 8] 7| 26 9 |B4 4—18 19] + 3 96 12911000 065] 20 5*||L0 01 4: 122]1000 Light clouds: sun shining occasionally.
D 21 —10 44D ¥ P
4 8] 8) 26 9 |55 492 15) —16 44) 101]1000 065} 16 55} 9 50 99} 101|1000 Ditto, ditto.
D 48 +12 78D 48) 7
4 25) 9) 26 9 [85 |/6—28 75] 53/1000 065] 14 54\\4—05 71] + 4 62) u 55/1000 065) 33 00)|10 03 77 os, . 53/1000 Sun shining.
+1 86/D 58 iD 38 — sD 38) A
4 51/10) 26 9 |83 5)]6—SO 61 15/1000 065] 12 48)|4—10 35] + 7 86) 15]1000 065] 28 37|| 9 59 57 15|1000 Sun shining.
+078/D 15) D 15 + +156) 15) + ; inine: Ui
5 7/11) 96 9 [84 |/6—S1 39) © |1000 065} 11 70)\4—18 19) —7 2 0/1000 065) 20 51)/10 1 45} . * 0 }1000 Sun shining: light clouds,
§ —2 8M 70] § € § M 70) ¢ § —- 5 50IM 70} ¢ »
5 25/12) 26 95/83 |]6—19 57) 70}1000 131] 25 53|/4—11 17) —15 00) 70|1000 131) 27 53/|10 6 95) 70} 1000 Ditto, ditto.
i —11 04/M 110 M 110; +11 74)M 110) i r
5 57|15) 26 95}81 |l6—08 53) 180}1000 131) 34 56||3—56 17) +13 56) 180/000 151] 42 53/10 18 67) 180/1000 Ditto, ditto.
+ | +0 78)M 35 ne te * |M 33] + + + 0 8M 33) ena
G 3/14) 26 95)80 |6—09 51 $ * | 218}1000 131) 35 78))4—09 75] * } ¥15]1000 181] 30 77]/10 19 55) 213/1000 Ditto, ditto.
§
Bth.} 5 55) 1] 96 9 70 |\6—00 67 365]1000 065) 42 47 10 26 25) 365/1000 Hazy.
| + | —o sap 52 + —2974/D 59 F
6 20] 2] 26 9 69 |\5—59 85| 1000 065] 43 26||5—41 83 315]1000 065] 56 87||L0 23 51 3153/1000 065] 14 65|| —13 62} 29 61] 42 2s ||- |__| ___| Ditto.
| + 630/D 55 + +15 12)D 35) + + ny D 35) ow 6 93 1766 ed
6 58] 5) 26 9 |69 |/6—06 13 2 & £78|1000 065] 36 96)|\5—56 95 278/000 065) 41 77||/10 23 51 278/1000 065| 14 65) — 4 80] 22 51) 927 11 —_— | — 1 | Sun shining.
i +26 04)M 45) +15 S8)M 45 —7 94) 5 10 68 945 | 17 66
} M 45 1 7 Aa +, cae
8 | 4) 26 95/70 |6—se 17 322]1000 151] 10 92|'4—10 33] 893/1000 065| 98 57||10 15 59} * Sailsesitoqp ucb|tavea|eetriaetiee corse |jeasit oy |= ee | rn shal ent maptiop 2 esa
| + 6 S0}D 138 — 4 61D 158 —10 26)/D 138 . 36 14/1390} 2420) — ?
9 | 5] 26 95/75 |io—25 87 183]1000 131] 17 29l|4—05 74 185]1000 131] 33 90||i0 05 s3| 185l1000 131] 5 s¢l| —15 78] 11 66| 97 44 [+ |—+ _ |__| Ditto, ditto.
+ + +15 66/D 185 —9 43/D 185 #292) 5401] 46°52 as '
10 | 6| 96 95/75 $91 57 o}1000 133] 17 sal] 9 55 91 0 |1000 131] 0 85 16 49 Se TE Ra ae the air.
§ —558/M 88 — 4 99IN 22 76 ts gts A F
ds 7] 26 9 |79 ‘ aera s ee as rlleeaeed M 70 Belong 431 exe ee Sun shining occasionally: motion of the air very great.
ye — 546M 12 +12 78|M 19 z 17 21 i ulageieas
2 | 8) 26 86/78 410 33) 100}1000 065) 28 S7\10 3 77 1001000 131] 4 78 23 60 Gay ravages BEES
18 00 ote
Oth. | 7 15) 1) 26 88)/69 8—54 55] 211]1000 039] 44 15) 1 Ditto, ditte.
4 +10 26\D 125) 893
9 | 2] 26 88/69 |\6—o8 53 1 31]1000 039] 34 56)/4—04 61 81|1000 059] 33 89||10 23 51 81/1000 039} 14 65]| + 19/911) 46/45 )}—— | _1__| Cloudy and hazy,
+ +11 82)D BI) + + +948)D 81 —636\D ea 11 41] 11 64 4
10 12| 3] 26 9 |70 16—20 35 10 |t000 065] 22 74\/4—14 29] 0|1000 039] 24 41]|10 17 15} 0 {1000 039| 11 47|| — 1 68] 11 27] 12 29 J—+_| 3 Blagivery fait.
$14 16|M 315] + + § |—7 92lM sis} 6 § § | +2 40M sis} § ao) nee Cloudy: hygrometers very unstead
12 | 4] 969/72 |[6—34 51, * * | 5151000 065] 08 58)|1—06 37) 315]1000 039] 32 33/10 19 55] * * | 315/1000 039| 19 67|| —23 76] — 4 09} 19 77 Sa oi loudy : hygrometers very unsteady,
—19 12/D 225] aor = a . 22
a El oatssleow || eeaie 30 elke Bean Gr + + LAgrees 7 86/D 225 ean Pee 4ir 9 zt - Heavy clouds: liygromvters very nnsteady.
+416] 0 —0s81 . Gy
4 6) 26 9 |75 ||}6—20 35 mealte 90|1000 065) 22 74) 10 10 85} 90\1000 068) 39 14 42] THES Ditto, ditto.
§ —15 78M 28 +12 66|M R i vers
5 | 7| 269 |73. ||6—04 57 367|1000 065] 38 52 10 85 51 gt ae 14000 065] 11 60 23 89 we Light showers,
— 9 49)M 138) + 4 68]M 129 : ante Cloudy.
5 45| 8} 26 9 |73. |]5--55 415) Fi i 495|1000 065] 47 94 10 28 19) 495|1000 065) 16 99 51796) mr ;
5 491M 15 . —17 58/M 15 5
6 |9%e7 re |le—oo o7| * 510/1000 909] 42 4: 10 10 61 m 7°) s10|1000 vox] 8 21 3421 aio Son Cloudy.
+ + + § 3 3 Sam ania jonally.
mith} 6] A) 27 [6B [599 59) oaal 2 1000 203] 49 S6/5—so 6s] || H56|i000 aoe] 48 05/10 19 a7 a5¢|to00 202] 12 7al| +4 51] 36 82) 35 41 | 55 | gag [a a Fogay : sun shining occasionally.
6) 4 494/D #48) 4 20 3 - aoa - <
a | sfar fro ots 52} | ga] 2e]t000 aoe] #6 7Os—o8 ool 26/1000 202| 35 11/|10 11 79 Atecn mh atalleacdll vest) ca]; gs ae Sun shining: hygrometers extremely unsteady.
2 2 10 26/D 28 4 2 en
9 35] 3] oF o5|73 |6—26 65} ect ass| 0 16 44|]4—15 85] i 0|1000 271] 22 g5||10 07 06 Mfumaent adler cere sel a rg REBUT
= M 239 ) 232 a a ica shite qi
10 37} 4) 97 05|75 |l6—18 79) ta WD's 239|1000 271] 24 30|!4—15 5} ssslittarars pe lb A a abshoad-ars a 245} 16 69] 15 24 | Gss|—ter Cloudy: a good deal of motion in the atmosphere
9) +10 26/D 168) + ey : ion i derate.
AP) 5) 97 05\76 |\6—S9 68 64|L000 971) 3 41|/4—96 11 a git 64/1000 371 Sper 10 09 33) 64\1000 271} 4 06|| —-9 18] — 0 65] 8 A SHEA iat ean Motion in the atmosphere moderat
3 3 1 ton i considerable,
2 | oer jot 1920 EA ee eae heer ee ae a 34/1000 02] Negt.|| + 3 01 aoarall aanicth Motion in the atmosphere very cousiderabe
—18 12/M 102) 1 1 ion i i i : squalls.
4 | 7/97 |s1 |e—29 83 at safer anol 22"|'%0? 22 13 96/410 33 136|1000 202] 28 37/|10 08 64| Selene ed soaleeGulh acellss—lacm isl the air a little abated: squall
—#1 32|M 180 t ; i iN.
5 33} 8) e7 - |75 |/6—08 51) 316|1000 209) 34 58 ‘ 10 24 82 ah 1000 209] 14 31 20 27 aaa) rar Squalls all about; atmosphere very still
: § § 1 ill: ,
isth.| +6 40} 1] 27 |69 |]6—03 03 sapbis 412]1000 208] 40 06|/4—So 65 as 1000 202} 37 85||10 Pi 48) 412|1000 202] 13 13]] + 2 21) 26 95] 2472 ||] GF ea aaa Atmosphere very still: cloudy
4 6 +240) 0 § $ § n ; i
7 | 4) 27 osl69 |\6—06 97 412)1000 #71] 36 1%|/4—08 25 ke 4122000 971] 35 45/10 19 67 419}1000 271] 12 74|] + 0 67} 93 36) 22 71 aes mth 7 Ditto, ditto.
i +14 66)D 42 ie
9 | 3] 27 oslr1 17 41 5 370]1000 971) 91 29|| 0 15 37 5¥0|1000 271) 9 08] 12 91 Pounlenaro Ditto, ditto,
+5 04|D 255] 2 Aan
10 | 4) 97 o5)7s 4-22 45 115]1000 #71| 10 85]| 9 56 03! 1151000 271) 0 91 9 34 |_1_||_1__| Great mation in the atmosphere,
§ |—8 16M a5] ¢ § § § 50/50 |} 28428 1 to, difto, ditto,
12 | 5) 27 o5!76 4—14 29 200]1000 271] 24 4]|10 08 63) 200/1000 271] 2 22! 22 19 ; |e Ete OURO ARCO
i +11 64/D 120 16 16 | 116 5 é
2 [ol e7 |e 5 4—22 95} 80|1000 20x| 15 7|| 9 56 03 g0|1000 20s} 0 91 14 86 2 | 2Y.2* | Motion of the atmosphere very great
a —13 38)D 80 25 02) 264 28 |. . Ff jonally.
4 | 7].97 9582 |ls—32 98) 0 |1000 1934 10 11]/4—09 55) © |1000 151] 29 15||10 13 87| 0 |1000 181] 9 08|] —19 04 1 03) ~20 O7 |]__1__|__*__ 1 | Squalls all about: sun shining occasionally
4 —1r 34\M 0 9 |M 70) § 6} § 3903 | 13 53 J
5 | 8) 27 |79 \6—15 64 Pee 70/1000 202] 27 45||4—09 55 70|1000 202] 29 15]|10 19 67 70}1000 202] 12 74])} — 170) 1471) 16 41 =i aes aoe Ditto, ditto.
¢ —1?2 61/M 180) —11 82/M 180) 14 37 b sil Jicavy
1 6 | 997 {re lo—os o. 250}1000 30%} 40 ai ww 73| 250|100@ 202] 40 74]| @ 27 9: 250]1000 202] 10 67 — 0 91] 93 30] 24 30 J_t__|_4_|_1 laa very still: heavy clouds all about
| | 1 ! 965) 963] 155)

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. 18

REMARKS ON THE RESULTS.
Ist. The most remarkable fact, which calls for

our attention, in the results of the present experi-

ments, is the almost invariable coincidence of the in-
crease of refraction with that of moisture; which will
appear still more forcibly, if we consider the results
of the following eight observations, all taken between
10 and 12 o’clock, P.M. on different nights, when I
was engaged in observing the eastern elongation of
the polar star; the depression of the S. extremity of

the line being taken by means ofa referring lamp.

Days. Depressions. Refraction.
Augt.

(4 As yh Wy aa ss: 1s oes
10 5 36 24 Ae? OPC ea
11 5 40 18 1) 9p1
12 5 49 64 0 53 45
13 SVS 055 S1F38
14 5 54 36 0 48 72
15 5 +23 2.03 TG AG
16 5 40 97 Lewes ke

Mean refraction 1’ 1” 38.

On comparing the hygrometers, as they stood at
the time of these observations, with their position
when last noticed in the day time, it was found that

they had revolved, on a mean, 240° in the direction of

moisture. Now, the mean refraction of 55 observa-
tious, noticed in the tables, is 29° 74; and we have
seen that of the 8 observations taken at night (which,
from the stillness of the air, may be deemed to balance
a superior number) to be 1’ 1” 38. Hence, it will
appear, that the latter is something more than double
the former.

‘ od. We shall next advert to the comparative quan-

—

“i 0 of Refraction to the
Depression of Foot of Elog-Staff S. Ext. of } Depression of Top of Flag-Stuff S. Exct. of Line. Elevation of Foot of Muntapun. R CantMEAGA “APE
: Bt | Fie 2 las z |4 zg] @ | §
SUS He g & {8 3 : | sa = 2 || oe =
2 |e |= ef} = = {5 | 35 E = 7 $./ 23 % & ae | oS é z ‘ REMARKS.
= Zz |= 2 2 a : |l_g 55 8 = o il a S zs f= 3 ep g
SUSrisle | 2 os § 3 3 S sas 5 5 o2) 05 |) 3 | Se | Se | Ss é 2
Ble lel 218i = 5 = gece} eis. | 8 Ze|fea| 2 | s2 | sz / sei] 3] s £
eI o 121 2a os 2 S See Ed |] %22 d <= < ~
eye a eyes | & E 23/4 | 22] § elze=|3 | 32|22| ef 2) 2) 2
S EE] eo) 2 gY = < =5 As ry ie) = & <=! =] S
= Ee iz) & |e |) as a = mse] & AS) Eure Sea = ss ; ssi es
| 71] 37 07||10 27 55) 496]1000 271] 16 67}| +12 49} +32 so}+20 40 j]__ 1 _j__ af
isth,| 6 1{ 27 Oalrt 4961000 1000 271 A 7 Phe ia) 8a : + Fae | 70 os | ar | Cloudy.
g | s a 1 5 *
r |]10 15 73 1001 4] 10 76|| — 15 182) | eS islient 5
7 43 «| 27 oslre $14|1000 1000 271) 26 Os]|1 enc dig 027 6) 3 26] 11 96 2 a7 av | i5a6,| 24 04 light motion in the atmosphere.
$ 4 10 04 70 7/1000 271] 5 24 3 |__1__|__}_| Motion in the atmosphere.
9 | 3} 27 oslrs | too 273) 9 47 Z=aal aa $a a7 | 4937 og
5 : 9 56 05 205|1000 202} 0 91 0 65 —_—t___ |__| Flag very faint: great motion in the atmosphere.
945] 4|97 Irs 5}1000 20x aa I as —13 6/D zo} 5 B5z 99 | 284 23 ip
9 42 40 135|1000 03} Nega-|| 2 Sun shining.
11 5] 27 179 2 +20 siM 15) tive. || § 5 iat i eee
# | 10 05 14 1501000 02] 4 464 eR On Motion in the atmosphere considerable = sun shining.
12 | 6} 27 \79 —23 72|D 95) Sun shining bright: light clond
9 39 4b) 55/1000 209] Negt. in shining bright: light clonds.
2 lean jasaieale ca 4 1 Hazy light clouds: motion in the atmosphere abated.
6 ol1o00 202] 24 41/] 8 45 90 0 }1000 202] Negt.}; — 0 a9 ee eae fazy ligl : i
4 8) 27) 485 6—19 57 0 11000 202 ue 16 § +53 77|/M 15] ¢ 16 78 16 16 sae >
§ |—948/M 15) § § Taos aoa|_ 37 g5||10 19 67 35/1000 vo] 12 74|! — 4 as! 20 g6| 25 11 || —2—|-__»_ _ | + __| Motion in the air much abated.
G] 9) 27 8: 6—10 09) 15}1000 202) 33 00/}4—O00 85) 15}1000 203) 07 Be ei v - etd di 96 10 4u 20 31
5 16) 9 4 ath +158] O 1 1 1 ee h + still
—7 06} 0 =| eee = FOR 15{1000 44 go/t0 2L 25) 45]1000 13 59|| — 3 54] #6 54) 52 39 Sarr Ty Snn shining: atmosphere very still.
5 50}10) 26 85i84 ||6—05 03} 15}1000 40 06/}3—55 80 eaclaenel Y +8 45|M 13] ie i oe) Cit AER
—14 18)M 15 20498) F =| 57 94|\{L0 30 70) 30/1 18 24] 5 97] 33 38 97 || —— |—_——|— + Sun shining.
a Py nels 3—47 4 30}1000 OGa| 57 21 000 065) =
hd he eda ies Ls 4 uae we ie 1¢ =| § 0 § At a 355 HF hin if Ge f BS a Ag) Sun shining occasionally: flag very faint.
> 7 44] 55 93|/10 21 25) 7/1000 134 2 2 ——__- | ’
inh.) 6 A pamsahiro pee “og s6\D 134 aa ey cA 11 8:|D 134 | Flag very faint : sun shining.
E a In "| srsl1000 151} 7 57|{10 09 43) 573)1000 131) 07 61|| + 6 67| 47 63] 19 96
8 30) 2] 26 95/75 |15—48 85) 575]1000 151] 54 24)}4—11 15 eelagiDin ty I —55:|/D 7 | Sun shining.
4 § | +419 78)D 7] § = PAPA bed ed la 366|1000 191] 4 74]/10 03 91 36,1000 131] +85) +53 75] 361] 0 14 ‘
9 Ie] 5] 26 95176 Fie 65 % 1g00151)'38 4 aes: § § | 19 7¢ Dy 4x} 6) NOY *. Great motion in the atmospliere = sun shining.
2 9 48 15 324/1000 902) Negt.
410 aj) 27 76 | | f Z* = male e z a Rope lf | Ditto, ditto. “Ear
—— ed i . | 45 0 T4\1000 40%} 3 ' i Bs NR _ —
12 5] 27 83, | i a i] Sun shining.
7 Range 9 56 83); 39/1000 065} 2 30 |
2 o| 26 9 } —2 art) 27 | Motion in the atmospliere.
salts gaunt ae | 9 54 45 12/1000 065] ~9 12
ia le | atsiedl eee a it Ae Ditto, ditto.
, I ; 1000 065] 7 48 rir
s | 8] 269 lus 5 $155 4] ¢ “$ ; ‘i ete 104 31 Tigi clans.
4 9] 26 9 jaa 2 1000 063] 17 24|/4—97 6S _ 21000 065] 11 03|/!0 00 76 422 ofl? £)1000 065} 3 27] 4+ 6 21 13 95] ———
wl] ¢ § § —19 96\M 7] § § | +22 0F 5 e s Ditto, ditto.
6 30/10] 26 9 a3 9 |1000 151) 52 18||3—57 75 9}1000 151] 40 97||!0 22 85) Per $)1000 181] 14 51)) — 7 79] 17 87 ater
71 —7 08M 71 4 72)! . ape i i
5 So0j1i] 27 = «81 80/1000 202} 58 4: ||\3—50 65! 80}1000 g0¢| 48 05)|/10 27 55 Berl ie 80)1000 g0¢| 16 67)) — 9 AG 21 79) Ditto, ditto.
12 —162\M 1% —1 5i - r °
6 |12| 26 95)81 9:}1000 151] 47 94])3—19 05 92}1000 131] 49 67/|10 i 9 . We 92/1000 131 eee —175| 52 06 Ditto, ditto.
6 § 6 § § 3 5
27 «69 ; 5 HEAL 450/100) vos 10 22 85) 459|1000 go | 14 31 Cloudy.
ith. | 6 1) 27 || o “ID 112
Fees | 6 + 156/D i114] § § | — <8 Gs|D 112) ¢ § Taine
7 Pi La Lo | 3—57 83 54 |1000 209] -0 97)/10 14 15) 5 5i/D 547|1000 20:| 9 97
| +18 19|D 7 -,| — > 51 ' Sun shining:
a |aler rs 4-16) 85 j «| 275}1000 2oe} «2 a5||'0 08 64 Selb tooo 20.] 7 21 Sunt slorane Actua y.
+11 84D 5 — 315) 2 R Paco hae ae Ee
9 4) 27 (75 87 6 2297/1000 202) 1% 01)|10 BS 12) f iy 1000 202 ae Cloudy: sun shining: motion in the atmosphere.
+6 35D 3q 23 | 12.6 ee yin
“4 0576 1-35 9 10}1000 971] 34 71)) 950 5 dk 1000 271} Negt. Sun shining: great motion in the atmosphere.
; § — 07 : ,
12 | 6l27 {ar | : Slo 51 30 22911000 2o:| Negt- Ditto, ditto.
2 =f | 12 63/0 14: |
7| v7 10 05 91 ne 80|1000 09} 4 65 ___1__| Sun shining.
; — 79/0 75) | 3 53 Sa ..
2 8] 26 95/84 | | a ono 131] 4 7ai{l0 03 14 i * 5|1000 13;] 4 45) 0 26 | easroh Fal | Motion in the atmosphere moderate: flag extremely faint:
0 a 13 4¢ ‘ 1 1 g, eer
4 6—10 91 {1000 131] $2 48 5}1oc0 131] 29 26|/10 oe 50) Siew, He 1000 3103 ]| 38.4 | ad ae Sun shining: cloudy.
4+ 548D 5 3 5] eel ert 3D} O10 ‘ © 9 1 1 t
i) 6—16 39 0 |1000 063) 26 70)\3—56 17 p i x © |t000 068} 42 53||10 22 05) tells +! 0 |1000 12 79} 26 62 exatvar | aOR 5a Hygrometers very unsteady.
—234/M 14 —o079 1s a ee “ 1 1 ae.
5 35}11} 26 95/82 6—14 05 141000 065) 29 01/)3—S5 SI 14]1000 65] 43 5: |}'9 21 25) * 14/1000 15 52} 29 80 _——1___| Sun shining.
—sa4slM 20 — 471M 20) | +19 a6] 210 A 13 58} 940 J o19 43
6 18) 27 Od|BL H5—10 94 34)1000 #71) 32 16||3--50 65] 54)1000 271 th 04]| 10 %e 6) 34}1000 2 12 48) 58 35 Ser IE Saeaa: Cloudy.
= 56 cate Al 9 Var 21 25 22 98 7A6) | = ee 1 ito.
15th.) 6 1] 27 tal hee 7 nied Mbyte ae 1000 20% 1000 208 BA go||tO 21 25) 5 5\D 2 687)1000 2 60] 33 apts Cea cer Ditto.
24 ar y 2 ee se
7 |\aler |72 Wle—s4 2 66011000 208 1000 20g] 29 agl\LO 15 73 660)1000 2’ 4 te] 18 53 }—*—}__1 |__| Cloudy: sun shining.
§ § +497\D 50 26 52 5) 47) 34 04
8 s] 27 O5\74 1000 e741] 99 14)}10 00 76) i G610}1000 271) 3 27 25 88 Sais emer Ditto, ditto, t
— 1 58 190) : a 78
9 4} 27 0978 ¥0}1000 271) 16 55)| 9 HA 18) i a 1000 271 Be 14 05 aaah Een Cloudy: sun shining: motion in the atmosphere.
Y § — 4 Gi) 80) 1
410 5] 27 o5|78 1000 #71| 8 05 9 54 45 Ke 640}1000 271) 0 12 8 53 Tases! man Flag extremely faint: sun shining.
§ —6 a|D 210 abe 3
12 uo} e7 (183 5 9 48 15 be 130}1000 203] Negt. Motion in the atmosphere; light clouds.
_— 0} 65) ae
9 a) or [ea | 9 42 65 ad ae 65/1000 202) Negt. Sun shining = cloudy.
} . +28 72|/D 65) bass
4 | 8) 26 95/85 16-10 94 0 |1000 133] 52 18])4—08 85) 0 |1000 181] 37 25)}10 " 4s} 8 ¥ as i 0 |1000 151 a, —5 07} 24 51) 29 65 2 — 2 - =n Cloudy.
+ +45 83)M 95) + + § | —11 90)M 95) ¢ § +12 60] 95) § we te ET) 5 3 3
5 9] 26 95/82 |]6—56 74) . . 95/1000 131) 46 35/\3—56 95) §5]1000 151] 41 7al]}i0 2z 03 95}1000 131] 13 91)) + 4.60) 5244) 97 74 |] os Js |__| Ditto,
—s821|M 10 —10 24/M 10 +11 58)/M 10) 3 é . B51 ie BBS6 Soaldintag: eloda 3
6 10] 26 95/81 [15—55 55) 105]1000 131] 49 50||S—46 51 1095/1000 151] 51 99]|10 ey 61 a 1000 131 ae — 3 43 29 86) 32 29 Sun shining: cloudy.
+ + iP § § § =
| DN EN SR re Se Sf eS Ne ET EE ee ee a

N.B. Where the refraction is said to be negative, as frequently occurs in observations of the Muntapun, it is only meant to state, that, from various causes the angle of elevation was taken too small and from this inaccuracy, a ‘result equally Ye
has ensued. These observations have been preserved, as an instance of the very small quantity of refraction, prevailing, at the time when they were taken.

FOLDOUT BLANK

14 EXPERIMENTS ON

tity of refraction, which seems to haye affected the
observations of the different objects referred to in the
tables;and here, it is perhaps worthy of notice, that out
of 49 contemporaneous observations, of the top and foot
of the flag-staff, at the S. extremity of the line, the
refraction attending those of the foot are 36 repeated
times /ess than those of the top ; and that, in the 13 re-
maining ones, where the contrary occurs, the excess is
seldom above 9” of refraction, and frequently below
unity *. As this circumstance is in opposition to
the general theory, “ that the lower the object, the
greater the refraction,” should the same circumstance
occur again, in future experiments, it will be worth
while to inquire, whether the rays, when passing
through the atmosphere below the line of the level,
may not be refracted differently from what they
are when passing above it. This may perhaps be
thought better than a mere conjecture, if it be
recollected, that Mr. Boueurr, (whilst employed
in measuring a degree of the meridian in South Ame-
rica, and observing on the summit of the Cordeliers)
noticed a sudden increase of refraction, when he
could view the stars below the line of the level.

3d. With regard to any attempt towards estimating
the effects of terrestrial refraction, by an assumed
ratio to the contained arc, as has been hitherto the
practice ; without entering into any discussion of the
subject, I shall only observe, that if, in the foregoing
experiments, we go by the observations taken in the
day time, we shall have (considering the foot of
flag-staff, and preserving the same notation) r=—

oT Ey

* The mean difference of refraction, between the top of the flag-
staff and the Muntapum, (on 38 contemporaneous observations)
is 16”. 44; and that between the top of flag and Muntapum is
22”. 51, where the order is inverted by 6”. 07: and if the top and
foot of flag-staff be compared, in an equal and contemporaneous num-
ber of observations, the mean of their difference is 6’. 08 likewise in yt

-

the inverse order. i

\ PERRRESTRIAL REFRACTION. 15
and if we take those by night, it will be r=—— of ©

the contained arc, from which we can collect no-
thing.

4th. I have now only to add a few words on the
comparative density of the air, at the different times of
observation, such as entered in the tables; and the
evident want of connection, between its changes and
those in the refraction; from which we may infer, that,
although in northern climates (where the mercury
will rise and fall several inches in one day) observa-
tions of the barometer and thermometer may be at-
tended to with advantage, on the contrary, in tropi-
cal countries, where (as appears in the present expe- -
timents) the variations of the mercury are hardly dis-
cernible*, those instruments will prove perfectly in-
efficient. :

APPENDIX,

An account of Experiments on the fibres or beards of

_ the Panimooloo grass ; containing also an account of
the construction of the hygrometers, used in the pre-
ceding Experiments. a

Before I proceed to give an account of the experi-
‘ments, by means of which I satisfied myself of the
competency of the beards of the Panzmooloo grass, to
the object I had in view, it will be necesary to give
a short description of the plant itself, or (since a bo-
tanical account of it is not here intended) of that
part of the plant, which was used in the construction

* At Madras, the greatest alteration was observed 0.75 inches:
and in the mean annual change 0.53. At Banswary, during the
time of attending to the present experiments (that is about twélve
days) the greatest change was 0,2: the latter place being 2970.8

feet above the level of the sea.

16 EXPERIMENTS ON

of the hygrometers, consulted in the preceding expe-
riments on refraction. :

The Panimooloo grass, which grows chiefly on
mountains, and is well known to the natives, from
its beards easily catching and adhering to their
clothes, produces a kind of ear, somewhat resembling
that of wheat. Its seed vessels shoot out long fibres,
of a hardy texture, which entwist one with the
other from left to right, so as to resemble, when in
that state, a diminutive coir rope. ,

These fibres, ot beards, are the part of the plant
used in the construction of the hygrometers, and
consequently deserve particular notice.

Each fibre shoots out, in a straight line, nearly to
the length of an inch, from the seed vessel to which
it adheres; then tapers off, in curls, to a very fine
end, so that the former part of it can alone be used
for the, present purpose.

When viewed through a magnifying glass, it appears
to be made up, like a rope, in broad strands, twisted
from left to right; which, when water is applied
(contrary to its effect ona rope) are gradually unfold-
ed, and cause the motion of which I availed myself.

The twists, in the straight part of the stem, are
from 5 to 7 in number; and these, as I have found
by experiments, nearly mark the number of revolu-
tions, of which the fibre is susceptible, by the appli-
cation of moisture.

When dissected, the stem was found to be made up
of two fibres, connected by a slight membrane, easily
divided, and twisted round each other, until they
‘were united in a common stalk, at the seed vessel at
one end, and above the first curl at the other.

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. a 17

‘This construction readily explains why it should
be easily affected by either moisture or dryness, but
does not evince that heat, or other changes in-the
ambient air, might not likewise operate upon it in
the same direction. The following experiments satis-
fied me, however, that moisture “alone unfolded the
stem.

EXPERIMENT I.

Having fixed a stem, about an inch long, with ©
six twists in it, on a piece of wax, a slit straw was
fastened at its upper end, by way of index: the
whole was then placed clear of any motion of the
air, in such a position as the nature of the experi-
ments required; and a graduated circle of paste-
board was so placed about. it, as to indicate the num-
ber of revolutions and degrees which the index went
over.

Then, on placing my hand within an inch of the
stem, the index generally moved from 5° to 10° of the
circle, from left to right ; and as motion in this direc-
tion was invariably the consequence of moisture, it
was probable (but still it remained to be proved) that
the effiucia arising from perspiration principally al
fected it in this case.

- EXPERIMENT II.

By breathing: violently on the stem, I generally
brought the index round from 70° to 90° in the same
direction ; and it would go back to its original place
as soon as let free.

This was a sufficient proof of its great sensibility ;
but to make sure whether moisture or heat caused it
to move in the two preceding cases, I had recourse
to the following:

Vor. IX. c

18 EXPERIMENTS OY

~

EXPERIMENT III.

I first applied a ret-hot bar of iron, as close to the
stem as could be contrived without burning it, which
moved it uniformly from right to left. |

Again, having prepared another stem, I applied
the steam of hot water, issuing from the spout of a
tea-kettle ; which caused it to move, with great vio-
lence, several revolutions from right to left: which
was a sufficient proof, that heat acted on this grass
only in as much as it deprived it of its moisture.

I then proceeded to ascertain, whether the stem
was any way regularly affected by the changes in the
atmosphere ; a point on which every thing depended.
With this view I made up three hygrometers, on the
following construction: |

Three stalks were taken, of the same length and
number of twists, and, being fixed at one end into
a piece of wax, with an index (as above described)
the whole was fixed at the bottom of so many strong
tin boxes, about 24 inches deep, on the edge of
which was placed a moveable broad pasteboard

circle, graduated every 5°, and divided in the com-

mon way of.360°*. ‘These three hygrometers were
then placed together, and observed, for two succes-
sive days, at every hour of the day, from 7 o'clock
in the morning to 8 in the evening; noticing at the
same time both the barometer and thermometer, as
the annexed tables will shew.

* This graduation will, I trust, appear perfectly sufficient, when
it is considered, that the mere effluvia arising from perspiration
moved the index 88 or 108, as above mentioned.

es

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. 19

Table, shewing the comparative rate of going of three.
Hygrometers. |

2 = HYGROMETERS,

@|“15| 3 | No. 1.| | No.2.) 2

>| il = = =

sS = ~~ =

a = = é'

Light clouds, sunshines,
Ditto, ditto.
Ditto, light breeze.

Cloudy.

8]78}27 05] 360 v
140

_|Cloudy and windy.

6th| 7|71]27 4220 § 240
25 |
-|Ditto, ditto.

8172/27 05/4 200 ? 215
75

ol73la7 05-125 § 150) Ditto, ditto.
110 105

Ditto, ditto.

10|74/27 05/4 at 45
185

tilrsler -|-170 §| |— 90
170
1¢\7}27 | S40 |

Ditto, ditto.

Sun shining occasionally.

il79|27 505 § 510) Ditto, ditto.
) 75

2180/26 75 mt 585
3/81/27 520

S
4\31|27 a " at
j

5}81/27 660

6|80)27 665 ri 675

7\79\27__ | 630 § 645
N.B. In this table Zero is to be taken between the signs + and —,

26 EXPERIMENTS ON

It may, however, be proper to mention, that not-
withstanding the great regularity which appears to
prevail between the rates of going of, these hygro-
meters, whenever the atmosphere was uncommonly
moist, the exquisite sensibility of the stem required
to be checked; for, as it would sometimes, during a
heavy shower, revolve a whole revolution, it was not
to be expected, that the three instruments would
keep pace, whilst moving so briskly. A silk thread
was therefore fastened at each end of the index,
loaded with a thin plate of lead, hanging loose on
the bottom of the box, so as to be dragged by the
straw as it went round. By these means the instru-
ments were easily regulated.

EXPERIMENT IV.

Application of heat, to determine the compass of
the instrument.

Having fixed a stem, of six twists, in such a man-
ner as to admit it, I brought a bar of heated iron as
close to the stem as could be done, without setting
fire to the apparatus; on which the index revolyed,
2 revolutions and 105°, from right to left, when it
became quiescent. That is, the heat of the iron
affected it no longer in that direction, and was
barely sufficient to keep the index from falling back.

The heated bar being withdrawn, the index began
to recede, and became quiescent again (that is in its
natural position) after having returned 290°.

But the three hygrometers, whose rate of going is
given in the preceding table, had moved meanwhile

204° towards it; and therefore this quantity is to be
added to the above.

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. Ql
Namely 290°

+204
Rev.
494=1+4134°.
Whence it willappear, that since the index had moy-
Rev.
ed, by the application of heat, 2+105=825"

and that, by cooling, it only recovered 14+134=494

it follows, that the stem, by being de-
prived of its radical moisture, lost a
power =351°

EXPERIMENT V.
Application of Moisture.

As soon as the index of the same stem gave signs
of proceeding regularly with the hygrometers, a hair
pencil, full of water, was applied, and held to thg

R

stem, when it revolved 6+295° from /ef¢ to right, and
then remained quiescent. On the pencil being with-
drawn, the index began to recede, and resumed the
course of the other hygrometers, after revolving
R

6+300°.

But, during the interval of this experiment, these
had moved 135°, in the same direction with that
under observation, which quantity is therefore to be
subtracted. |

R.
Namely 6+300
—135

64165

Again, we have seen, that by the application of
R

extreme moisture, the index had revolved, 6+295°
Hence, it will appear, that this process, 6+ 165

affected the fibres of the stem by os 130
. €3

29 EXPERIMENTS ON

The thermometer, at the beginning of this opera-
tion, was 77°; and at the end 79°.

From the above experiments, it will appear, that,
since by the application of extreme heat (procuring
extreme dryness) the index had revolved from right

Meet R

to left, 2+ 105°
and, by the application of extreme moisture, |
from left to right, : 64295.

it follows, that the sum of these two quan-
tities, viz. ‘ =9+ 40
is the compass of the stem.

This result evinces, that the mean state of the at-
mosphere does not correspond, nor can it on any oc-
casion, with the mean of the power of this instru-
ment™.

A second stem having been selected, and the same
process, as above related, repeated; it moved by ex-
treme heat 2+290°, and, by extreme moisture,
8+320°; so that the compass of this fibre was
114950" ; which exceeded that of the former by

2+210; but, on examining it closer, after the opera-
tion, it was found that, although taken of the same
length, it contained one twist more than the former ;
which accounts for its greater compass,

EXPERIMENT VI.
Application of Steam.

Three stems having been selected, and being fixed

as usual, the steam of boiling water, issuing from
SSeS

* The stem, which was used for this experiment, was afterwards — Py

compared, when made up, with other hygrometers; and it did not
appear to have lost of its activity, by this process,

TERRESTRIAL REFRACTION. 95

the spout of a tea-kettle, was applied to one of them;
when it moved, from left to right, with violent con-
vulsive motions, (so rapid as hardly to admit of
counting them) 6 revolutions; the 2d, 6; and the
3d, 63; ‘when they remained quiescent.

Now, we have seen above (exp. IV.) that a stem,
of this length, and number of twists, revolved i in that

case 64300"; and, in the present, nearly 6 +180 (on
a mean of three). The application of steam, there-
fore, if we consider the small difference of the two
results, may be conceived to have affected the stem,
only in as much as it moistened it.

Several other experiments were also tried, but be-
ing of the same nature as the foregoing, and the re-
sults nearly similar, they need ‘not be particular-
ized.

€ 4

24 _ EXPERIMENTS ON

if,
Description of a very sensible Hygrometer,
BY LIEUTENANT HENRY KATER,
H. M, 12th Regiment.

IN the Mysoor and Carnatic is found a species of
grass, which the natives call, in the Canarese lan-
guage, Oobeena hooloo, in the Maratta, Guvataa se
cooslee, and, in Tamu, Yerudoovaal pilloo*. tis ‘met
with in the greatest abundance, about the month of
January, on the hills; but may be procured in al-
most every part of the country, and is very gene-
rally known.

Accident led me to remark, that the bearded seed
of this grass possessed an extreme sensibility of mois-
ture; and being then in want of an hygrometer, I
constructed one of this material, which, on trial, far
exceeded my expectations.

I caused a box to be made of brass, four inches in
diameter, and an inch and a half in depth. Within
the box, about a quarter of an inch from the top, was a
flat ring, three-tenths of an inch in breadth, and di-
vided into a certain number of equal parts. A hole
was made, through the centre of the bottom of the
box ; anid a crear plate of brass, about an inch
in diameter, was rivetted to the bottom. On the
outside, a notch was made in the rivet, similar to that
in the head of a common wood screw; so that the
circular plate, within the box,-could be turned round,
at pleasure, by means of a turn-screw, applied to the
notch on the outside. ;

* It is the Andropogon Contorium of LINN RUS, and may be ea-
sily distinguished from all others, by the seeds attaching themselves
to the clothes of those who walk where it grows,

A VERY SENSIBLE HYGROMETER. | 95

A seed being chosen, the top of it was cut off, it
having been found by experiment to be perfectly in-
sensible. A straw, the lightest that could be procured,
two inches and a half in length, and coloured at the
end intended to be the index, was divided longitudi-
nally, in the middle, by the point of a fine pen-knife :
the knife was then turned alittle on one side, till the
opening was wide enough to-admit the beard of
grass; which being inserted, and the point of the
knife withdrawn, the straw closed and held the beard
of grass sufficiently firm.

Not being able to procure workmen, capable of
executing what I wished; the hygrometer, thus pre-
pared, was fixed, in a rude manner, to the circular
plate at the bottom of the box, by means of a piece
of sealing wax, in which a very small hole had been
made, with a hot wire. The beard of grass being
placed in the hole, it was closed, by touching the wax
on one side with a heated wire, taking care to set the
grass as upright as possible. ote

Tt remained now to determine the extremes of
dryness and moisture, and to fix on some mode of
division, by means of which this hygrometer might
be compared with any other. Siebert

A new earthen pot was made very hot, by put-
‘ting fire within, as well as around it; and when it
was supposed to have been sufficiently burnt, to be
perfectly free from moisture, the fire was taken from
the inside, and the pot suffered to cool, till the airin
it was of the temperature of 160°, but not lower. The
hygrometer was then placed in the pot, being kept
from touching the bottom, by means of a piece of dry
wood; and it remained there nearly an hour; lone
before the expiration of which time, the index was
perfectly steady. The hygrometer was then quickly
taken out of the pot, and the circular plate, carrying

66 DESCRIPTION OF

the whole, was turned round, by means of the notch
on the outside, till the index, or coloured end of the
straw, pointed to Zero.

To obtain extreme moisture, it was atfirst thought,
that the best mode would be to fill the box with
water; but, on trial, this was found to disturb the in-
dex too much. The beard of grass was therefore
thoroughly wetted, with a fine hair pencil dipt in
water, and the number of revolutions, made by the
index, observed. Care was taken, to allow sufficient
time, for the water to have its utmost effect ; and, in
this manner, the hygrometer I have at present was
found to make three and a half revolutions, between
extreme dryness and extreme moisture.

As some fixed mode of division is necessary, to ren-
der observations, made by different persons, intelli-
gible to others; I imagine the scale of this hygrome-
ter to be divided into 1000 equal parts, commencing
at extreme dryness.

The sensibility of this instrument is very great.
The effluvia of a finger, applied about a quarter of
an inch from the grass, causes the index imme-
diately to shift eighteen divisions ; and, on withdraw-
ing the finger, it instantly returns to its former situa-
tion. Gently breathing onit, at the distanceof about
a foot, moves the index fifty-sia divisions. It is equal-
ly susceptible of the moisture of the atmosphere ;
scarcely ever remaining steady, for any length of
time, in variable weather.

Such was the construction I at first employed ; but
on applying it to use, so much difficulty occurred, in’
ascertaining the number of revolutions made by the
index, that I was induced to attempt to give the
whole a more convenient form, and to adapt toita —
scale, such as might preclude the possibility of mis-

7:

Vol lt Lage +

A VERY SENSIBLE HYGROMETER. a7

jake, and, at the-same time, leave the Aygrometer in
possession of its extentand sensibility.

ABCD fig. 1. represents a piece of wood, about
fourteen inches long, three inches broad, and one
inch, and two-tenths thick: the upper part is cut
out, as in the figure, to the depth of two inches,
leaving the sides A and B, about three-tenths of an
inch thick: the wood, thus prepared, is morticed
into a square board, which serves as its support.

Vig. 2.is an ivory wheel*, about an inch and two-
tenths diameter, and two-tenths of an inch broad at
the rim. A semicircular groove is made in the cir-
cumference, of such a depth, that the diameter of the
wheel, taken at the bottom of the groove, is one
iach. Through the axis, which projects on one side
four-tenths of an inch, a hole is made, the size of a
common sewing needle ; and, on this, as a centre, the
wheel should be carefully turned ; for, on the truth
of the wheel, the accuracy and sensibility of the in-
strument chiefly depend. From the bottom of the
groove, a small hole is made, obliquely through the
side of the wheel, to admit a fine thread. All the
superfluous ivory should be turned away, that the
wheel may be as light as possible.

Fig. 3. represents a piece of brass. wire, two inches
long; on one end of which a screw is made, an inch
and a half in length; and, in the other, a notch is cut,
with a fine saw, to the depth of half an inch. This
part is tapered off, sothat the notch, which is intend-
ed to hold the beard of grass, in the manner hereafter
described, may be closed, by means of a small brass
ring (a) which slides on the taper part of the wire.

* In my first experiments I used a wheel made of card paper, with
an axis of wood, which answered very well. ;

ee

#8 ‘DESCRIPTION OF

A little below the centres of the semicircles A and
B, (fig. 1.) two holes are made, precisely in the same
direction: one of these is intended to receive the screw
fig. 8, and the other a gold pin, which 1s to project
four-tenths of an inch beyond the inside of the part A.
The pin is made rather smaller than the hole in the
axis of the ivory wheel, and is highly polished; in
order that the motion of the wheel may be the less
impeded by friction.

Two fine threads, about fourteen inches long, are
passed together through the hole in the groove of the
wheel, and are prevented from returning, by a knot
on the outside. To the ends of these threads, two.
weights are attached, evactly similar, and just heavy —

enough to keep the threads extended. oe

One of the threads having been wound on ie cir-
cumterence, the wheel is to be placed on the pin,
about the tenth of an inch from the side A, as in fig. 4.
Two glass tubes, of a sufficient bore to admit the
free motion of the weights, are fixed in grooves, in
such a manner, that each thread should fall exactly
in the axis of the tube. The tubes are solong as nearly
to touch the ivory wheel.

The beard of the Oobeena hooloo being prepared, as
for the circular hygrometer, by cutting off that part
which is useless, is inserted about the tenth of an inch,
in the projecting end of the axis of the wheel, and
confined by a small wooden pin, which is to be bro-
ken off close to the axis; the other end is placed in
the notch of the brass screw, before described, and
secured by means of the sliding ring.

It is evident, that when the grass untwists, the
wheel will turn on the gold pin; and the thread,
which is wound about it, with the weight attached, —

A VERY SENSIBLE HYGROMETER. 289

ae

will descend in the one glass tube; whilst, on the con-
trary, the weight on the opposite tube will ascend,
and vice versa.

The beard of the grass is now to be thoroughly
wetted, with a hair pencil and water, and when the
wheel is stationary, the weights are to be so adjusted,
by turning the brass screw, that the one shall be at
the top, ;and the other at the bottom of the glass
tubes, which points will mark erireme moisture.

.

The instrument must then be exposed to the sun,
or to some heat, not powerful enough to injure it, but
sufficient to obtain a considerable degree of dryness.
The weights will now change situations; and, pro-
bably, on the first trial, will continue to move beyond
the glass tubes. Should this happen, the beard of
grass is to be shortened, by sliding back the ring,
and advancing the brass screw, so as to include a
longer portion in the notch. Cther trials are to be
made, and the length of the grass varied, till the ex-
tremes of dryness and moisture are within the limits
of the glass tubes.

As this instrument cannot conveniently be exposed
to so high a temperature, asis necessary to obtain ex-
treme dryness; this point may be ascertained by
means of a standard circular hygrometer. The point
of extreme moisture has been already determined;
and in the circular hygrometer, the number of revolu-
tions, &c. between the extremes is known. ‘The two
hygrometers are to remain sometime together, that
they may be in the same state with respect to mois-
ture; marks are then made, where the weights rest
in the glass tubes, and the degrees shewn by the in-
dex of the standard hygrometer noted. Lastly, the
distance between these marks and extreme moisture,
is to be divided into the same number of equai parts,
as are indicated by the standard Aygrometer, and the

50 DESCRIPTION OF

divisions continued to the number denoting. extreme
dryness.

If the whole of that part of the Oobeena hooloo, which
possesses the hygroscopic property be used, the scale
will comprize more than twenty-four inches, a length,
which, though perhaps useful on particular occasions,
will not be found convenient for general purposes.

From an idea, that in a high state of moisture, the
grass would:not retain sufficient power to move the
wheel equably, it was thoroughly wetted, till it indi-
cated extreme moisture, and, while in this state, the
wheel was drawn round , by layi ing hold of one of the
threads: on releasing it, it instantly regained its for-
mer situation, with considerable force. The same
experiment was made, in various other states of mois-
ture, and it was always found, that the weights re-
turned immediately to the degree from which they
had been removed.

It would perhaps be an improvement, if a light
wheel, of brass, or any other metal, not liable to rust,
were used instead of the ivory one; the grass having
been found, by experiment, to be capable of moving
a wheel of lead. ‘The axis of the wheel might be
made very small, and supported on Ys, which proba-
bly would add much to the sensibility of the instru-
ment.

I have as yet had no opportunity of comparing this
with any other hygrometer; but it is simple in its
construction, not easily disordered, and should seem,
from the extent of its scale, to be particularly adapted
to experiments, in which small variations of moisture
are to be observed.

The hygrometer has been hitherto an instrument,
rather of curiosity than utility. But from most

;

A VERY SENSIBLE HYGROMETER. $1

accounts that we have, it appears very probable, that
this instrument has more to do with the phenomena
‘ of refraction, than either the barometer or thermometer.
If then we could obtain a number of observations of
apparent altitudes, together with data from which to
calculate the true, noting at the same time the hygro-
meter, barometer, and thermometer, perhaps some law
might be discovered, which might enable us to ascer-
tain the quantity of the effect of moisture on refrac-
tion. It was with this view the hygrometer above
described was constructed; but not having yet had
an opportunity of obtaining the requisite observa-
tions, it is to be hoped, they may be made, by those
who are in possession of time and instruments, equal
to the undertaking.

32

Ill.

An Essay on the Sacnep Isies in-the West, with
other Essays connected with that work.

BY ‘CAPTAIN F. WILFORD.

ESSAY IL.

. . 4
Anu-Ga'ncam, or the Gangetic Provinces, and more
particularly of Macaw Ha.

THe kingdom of Jéagad@hain Anu-Gangam is the
province of south Bahdr, and is acknowledged to be
thus called, from the AdZagas, who came from the
Dwipa ot Nag and settled in that country, which
was called before Cicatd ; from which, its “principal
river, the Fulgo, is called Cacuthis by Arran. Ada-
gad ha, or Magad’ ha, is called Aoktah in the Ayin-
“Acheri* The Chiriese, according to Mr. De Guic-
NES, call it Afokiato, atid Mokito, dnd KEMPFER Says,
that the Japanese call the country, in which S/a’cya
was born, Afagatta-hokf, or country of Aagatta. Ara-
bian and Persian writers and travellers ar it Mabad:
for one of them, according to D'HERBELor, says, that
the Emperors of India resided in that countr y. Mabad,
Mabed, and Tabet, are, I conceive, derived from Mu-
bad, which, according to the Seton Hypk, is a con-
traction froth Mughbad, or the learned among the
Mughs, or Magas; and the author of the Dabistan
dalle a certain sect of Brahmens, if not the whole of
them, Mahbdad. From Magadha they made also
Maiet, and Muiet. These appear generally as two
different countries; but I believe, they are but
one. Thus JMJaiotta, one of the Comorro islands,
is called by former European travellers Jdaiotte,
and A/agotte, answering to Mdaed and Mazad’-
ha. The same is mentioned in the Peutingerian

* Vol. 3d. p. 241. In the original (XXCg and probably should
beread Magata. —

ANUGANGAM, &c. 33
Tables, under the name of EtymarpeE;* which appel-
lation, being probably obtained through the informa-
tion of Arabian travellers, and merchants, seems to
be derived, either from the Arabic Ex-1-marep, the
inhabitants of AMaied ; or from Almaied, inthe same
manner that they say AL-TIBET, AL-stn. Former
_ European travellers mention a country called Mevat,
in the Eastern parts of India, and which can be no
other than Mabat : and instead of Modube in Piiny,
we should, probably, read AZobede, answering to the
Ex-1-matep of Arabian travellers. On the borders
of Elymaide, toward the N. E. are the Lymodi moun-
tains, near which were elephants in great numbers.
Magadtha proper is South-Bahar : but, when its kings
had conquered, according to several Purdz‘as, the
whole of the Gangetic Provinces, (which they consi-
dered afterwards, as their patrimonial demesnes ;)
Magadha became synonymous with dAnu-Gangam,
or countries lying on the banks of the Ganges. The
Gangetic Provinces are called to this day, dnukhenk
or Anonkhek' in Tibet ; and Endcac by the Tartars ;
ie they have extended this appellation to all

ndia.

In Ceylon, according to Capt. Mauony, and in
Ava, according to Mr. Bucuanan, the appellations
of Pali, or Bah, and Magad’hi are considered as
synonymous, at least, when applied to their sacred
language; which I consider, from that circumstance,
to be the old dialect of Magad@ha: which is called
_also the kingdom of Poli by Chinese writers. In
India this name for Magadha is unknown : but its
origin may be traced through the Puranas. Dio-
porus the Sicizran says, that Pali-putra was built
by the Indian Hercutes, whose name, according to
Cicero, was Bexus, and in Sanscrit Bara, or
Batas, the brother of Crisuwa, more generally called
Bata-Ra’maand Bara-peva. Batapeva built three
cities for his sons, which he called after his own

Vor. IX. D

34 ESSAY ON

name, Bala-déva-pattan: but they were better known
under the name of Bdli-pura, and Mahda-Bal-pura,
pronounced JJavelivoram in the Deccan. One was
on the Coast of Coromandel, south of Madras; the
second, in the inland country of Beder, in the Penin-_
sula ; and the third, on the banks of the Ganges : this
is acknowledged to be Raja-griha, or Raya-mahl, the
royal mansion, or city; and which we must not
confound with Rdja-griha, the toyal abode of
old Sanpua. Itis true, that according to some
legends, current in the Deccan, the founder of Maha-
Bal-pura, was Bawt the Darrtya, an antediluvian :
but other legends refer its foundation to Baxa, the
brother of Crisuna: and the principal circumstances
of these legends shew, that it is taken from
the Puranas ; and that it is the story of the wars of
Crisuna, and Bara, or Bata-ra Ma with Bana?
surA, who lived in the countries bordering upon the
Ganges ; and whose place of abode is still shewn
near Purneah: and about whom, many wonderful
_ stories are related by the inhabitants. This Batt
is then the same with Bata, the brother of Crisuna:
and in Lexicons we find a certain ANGADA, said to be
called also BaAxI-PUTRA ina derivative form, or the
son of Baa, or Barr: but in the Purdnas he is said
to be the son of Gana, also a brother of Crisuna,
to whom he gave the district of Ghdzipoor, the true
name of which, is Gddi-pura, from Gapa. The
country of Canouge fell also to his lot: and from him
that city is also denominated Gadipoor, or Gada-pura.
Va ut was also the name of a chief of the monkies,
and his son was equally called ANGaDA. Ba'w’a’sura
built three cities, which Baa took, and destroyed ;
and then rebuilt, for his children, calling them after
his own name Béh-pura ; as Gapa called his own
place of abode Gddi-pura. The children of Bata
are not mentioned in the Purdn‘as, and he is never
called Ba’t1 there: but it is admissible, particularly
in composition. He is also called Hata and Ha‘t1 :

ANUGANGAM, &c. 35

and Sa’La-va‘HANA is more generally denominated
Sa’‘tr-va'HAana. Palipotra, or Pahbothra, according
to Droporus the Sicilian, was built by the Indian
Hercuues; whose real name, according to CicERo,
was Betus from Bata, or Batas. His son was
better known under the name of Bat-puTRa; as the
founder of Patna, under that of Pa’TaLr-puTRA, or
the son of the Goddess Pa’tati’: AncGapa, his sir-
name, was given to him from the country of dnga,
which had been allotted to him. Thus JZagad’*ha
takes its name from the sage Maca, who settled
there. These three cities were to be destroyed by
water, and this is true of Jahd-bah-voram near
Madras, and of Pali-putra on the Ganges: the third
is yet existing in the province of Beder in the Penin-
sula, and its name is Bali-griha, or Bali-pura. It is
more generally known under the name of Muzaffer-
nigar. It is not far from Cundana-pura, where king
Burisumaca resided, and was the father of Rucmant,
Crisuna’s legal wife.’ Cundana-pura is generally
mistaken for Bdli-griha, on account of its vicinity ;
and, of course, supposed to have been built by Bata ;
and it is but lately that I have been able to rectify
this mistake. The descendants of this Hercutes, |
says Droporus, did nothing, which deserved to be
recorded: in this agreeing with the Paurantics.
The kingdom was restored to the posterity of old
Sanp’sa, who ruled there, for a long time, under the
name of the Va‘ruapraTmas, or children of
VriHADRATHA.

These are not then the Ba’ii-putras, or Pa’rt-
BoTHRI kings, who sate on the throne of Alagadha,
in the time of ALEXANDER, and_ his_ successors.
Before the conclusion of the great war, the conquerors
gave various districts to theirfriends. DuryoD’Hana
gave the district, about Bhagulpoor, to his friend
Carna. Crisuna, long before, had given the
country, now called Bhéja-pura, to his friend and re-

D Q

36 _ ESSAY ON

lation Buosa ; and Bata-Ra’ma placed his family
in the country about Raja-mahl: these were of course
Ba'‘t1-puTras : but they could not be the Ba'i1-Pu-
TRAS, or Pa‘Li-BoTHRI kings, in the time of ALE-
ANDER, and his successors. We are informed, in the
| Bhagavata, that king Mana-Nawpa assumed the
title of Bani, and Maua’-sBati : consequently his
offspring, who ruled after him, fora long time, were
Ba‘Li-putras: the kingdom of Magad’ha was called
the kingdom of Bali, Pali, and Poli: the dialect of
that country is, as before observed, iudifferently called
Bali, Pali, and Atagad’hi in Ceylon and the Burman
Empire, according to Carprain Manony, Mr.
JomnviLLe, and Mr. Buenanan. The city, in which
the Ba’tr or Pa’Li-puTras resided, was of course
denominated from them. Bal-putra, or Pali-putra ;
and by the Greeks Pali-bothra, and, in the Peutin-
gerian Tables, Pati-potra. ‘Their patrimonial estate
was called Paliputra-man‘dalam, the circle, or country
of the Pali-putras. This simple and obvious deno-
mination, was strangely disfigured by Proremy, who
calls the city, Pali-bothra of the Mandalas ; instead
of saying that it was in the Man‘dala, or country of
the Pdlibothras, or Bali-putras.

Tradition says, that Mana-satr built a country
seat, on the banks of the Soave; round whicha small
town was soon formed, and called Ma’na-Ba‘LI-PURA,
(or Mawbellypoor in Masor RenneEtv’s Atlas). There
I was looking, at first, for Bali-putra, or Palibothra.
Patna, or at least a town called Cu/sumd-puri, was
built, according to the Brahman‘da, by king Upast,
grand father to Ma‘Ha-xBatt, about 450 B.C. It was
then called Cuw'sumd-puri, or the flowery city, and
Padméa-vati, or the city of the Lotos. Tradition says,
that the old site of this city was at Phulwari, which,
in the spoken dialects, signifies the same with Cuswmna-
puri: but, the Ganges having altered its course,
the city was gradually removed from Phulwari,

ANUGANGAM, &c. 37
to the present site of Patna; which was called also
Patali-putra, from-the son of a form of De'v1, with
the title of Pa’raxtr-pevi, orthe thin Goddess. Her
son was, in general, called Pa’ratr-puTrRa, and the
town Pa’Trari-puTRA-PuRA. I have shewn, in my
essay onthe chronology of the Hindus, that this city is
called Patale by Purny. It was called Patteah
simply, at the time of the invasion of the Musulmans,
as it appears from Fertsura’s translation by CoLonEr
Dow: and the inhabitants are considered there as
robbers, and, of course, ranked with those of Bhojepoor
and Kuttehr. The last district, formerly called
Castere, and now Cuttere, isa Purgunah, a little to
the west of Benares ; and the inhabitants behave very
well now: those of Bhgjepoor are far from being ra-
dically cured of their evil: propensities. When the
Musulmans took possession of Patna, many of the
most obstinate robbers withdrew to Deryapoor,
according to tradition, and were very apt to
‘commit depredations occasionally ; at least for-
merly. }

It is said in the Bhdgavcata, that Mana-Batt re- -
‘sided at Padmavati or Patna: and one of his titles,
in that Purana, is Maua-papma-Pati-Nanpa, or _
Nawpa the great Lord of the Lotos. Like Para’su-
rA™MA, he either destroyed, or drove out of his domi-
nions, the remnant of the CsHeTrris, or Military
tribe, and placed Su’pras in their room. These
were the Barons of the land, who often proved
troublesome. Ra’sa BuLwaAnt SinG, the predecessor
of Curr Since, did the same, in’ the district. of
Benares, with the Zemindars, who represented the
Csuetrris, and even pretended to be really so; from
an idea, that it was impossible to improve the re-
venues, arising from the land-tax, under their ma-
nagement. Mana-papMa, or Baxi, was born of a
woman of the Sudra tribe. According to Proremy,
the country of the Bédli-putras extended from the

pia”

38 ESSAY ON

Soane, beyond Moorsheddbad, as far as Rangdmatty ;
which he places in their Man‘dalam, or country, under
the name of Oreophonta, as I have shewn in my essay
on the chronology of the, Hindus: in the west, he
mentions Sambalaca, now an assemblage of small
huts, on a sandy islet, opposite to Patna, called
Sambulpoor, and Sabelpoor in Major RENNELUW’s Atlas.

I]. The Nusran Geographer, with Renaunor’s
two Musulman travellers, place together the countries
of Hardz (Orissa) Mehrage, and Mabed or Mayed,
Téfek or Tucha (now Dhaca,) and Mougdé, or the
country of the Magas, or Mugs, now Chittagong,
Arracan, &c. ‘The country of Jdehrage, says D’HER-
BELOT, is placed, by some, in the Green Sea, or Gulf
of Bengal; and by others, in the Chinese Seas: and
the Gangetic provinces, at least Bengal, were known
under that name, even as late as the fifteenth cen-
tury; for it is called MWahdra@ia, or Maarascia by
Nicoto DE Contr, who visited that country. There
were two countries of that name, which are occa-
sionally confounded together: the first, at the bottom
of the Green Sea, included Bengal, and other countries
on the banks of the Ganges. The second compre-
hended the Peninsula of Malacca, and some of the
adjacent islands, in the Seas of China. In these
countries the Emperors and Kings always assumed
the title of Mana’-ra’sa’, even to this day. Their
country, in general, was called Zapdge or Zabaja,
which is a corruption from Javed, or Jaba, as it was
called in the west ; and wasalso the name of Swmd-
trad, according to Proremy, who calls it Jéba-diu,
and to Marco Pauxo. In the peninsulaof Malacca
was the famous emporium of Zaba: Zabaja, in San-
scrit, would signify those Zéba. ‘The Empire of Zabdje
was thus called, probably from its metropolis Z4bd,
as well as the principal islands near it. Zabd was a
famous emporium, even as early’as the time of
Protemy. It remained so till the time of the two

ANUGANGAM, &c. 89

Musulman travellers of Renavupot, and probably
much longer. It is now called Batu-Sdbor, upon the
river Johore, which is as large as the Huphrates, ac-
cording to these two travellers ; who add, that the
town of Calabar, onthe coast of Coromandel, and ten
days to the south of Madras, belonged to the Ma-
HA RA‘SA’ of Zabaje. The wars of this Mana‘Raga,
with the King of Al-Comr, or countries near Cape
Comorin, are mentioned by the two Musulman tra-
vellers; in the ninth century: and, it seems, that, at.
that time, the Ma’La’yan Empire was in its greatest
splendor. About two hundred years ago, the Ma-
HA’RA JA Of Bengal sent a powertul fleet to the JZal-
divian islands. ‘The King was killed in the engage-
ment, and the Maua’ra‘ya’s fleet returned in triumph
to Bengal, according to Dretavar’s account. Tra-
dition says, that the King of ZLanca, which implies,
either the country of the Mana’rasa, of Zapdge, or
Ceylon, but more probably the first, invaded the
country of Bengal, witha powerful fleet; and sailed
up the Ganges, as far as Rangdmatty, then called Cu-
sumda-puri, and a considerable place, where the King,
or Mauwa raya’, often resided. ‘The invaders plun-
dered the country, and destroyed the city. This
happened long before the invasion of Bengal by the
Musulmans, and seems to coincide with the time of
the invasion of the Peninsula by the Maua‘ra’sa’ of
Zapage. This information was procured, at my re-

uest, by the late LreurENant Hoare, who was re-
markably fond of inquiries of that sort; and to whom
I am indebted for several curious historical anecdotes,
and other particulars, relating to the geography of
the Gangetic Provinces. It seems that there was
little intercourse, probably none, between India and
China in former times. ‘The first notice we have of
such an intercourse, is, that an Emperor of China,
called Vour1, sent his General Tcuane-x1A0, witha
retinue of a hundred men, to visit the western
countries, such as Khorassan and Meru-al-nahar.

D 4

40 ESSAY ON

There he procured some. information about Persia ;
and seeing rich articles of trade from India, his curio-
sity prompted him to visit also that country. He
began his travels 126 B. C. and returned to China in
115. That there was a constant commercial inter-
course between China and India, and even Ceylon,
about the beginning of the Christian Era, is attested
by Prrxy*. The same passage establishes also De
gular intercourse between the Roman merchants and
China, at that early period. This singular passage I
shall insert here, as corrected by Satmasius: for
Puiny’s style is often obscure, from his fondness for
quaint words and expressions.. A certain King of
Ceylon sent once four ambassadors to the Emperor
Craupivs; and the chiet of this embassy wascalled
Racurtas, who being interrogated, whether he knew
the Serves, or Chinese, answered ‘Ultra montes Emodos
Seras quoque ab ipsis aspici, notos etiam commercio.
Patrem Racn1£ commeasse ed; advenis sibi Seras
occursare.”. Then Puiiny says, “ Cetera eadem que
nostri negotiatores: fluminis ulteriore ripad merces
positas jurta venalia tolli ab his, si placeat permutatio.”
This I shall take the liberty to paraphrase in the
following manner. Racuras sanswered, that the
Seres lived beyond the Haimada, or Snowy mountains,
with regard to Ceylon; that the Seres were often
seen, or visited, by his countrymen; and were
well known to them, through a commercial inter-
course. ‘That his father had been there, and when-
ever caravans from Ceylon (and India 1 should
suppose) went there, the Seres came part of the
way to meet them in a friendly manner; which,
it seems, was not the case with the caravans from
the west, consisting of Roman Merchants. Then ,
Priny adds; as for the rest, and the manner of
disposing of the goods, the Seres behave to them
as they do to our merchants. Rachia is derived ~

* Pliny, lib. 60, Ce 220,

a

f ‘ : ANUGANGAM, &c. 41
from the Sanscrit Racsha, pronounced Racha in
the spoken dialects: and Rdchya, or Rdchia is a
derivative from. It is the name, or rather the
title, of one of the heroes of the Purdnas. Another
derivative form is Racsurira, and is the name of
a priest of Bupp'ua in Ceylon, mentioned in the
sixth vol. of the Asiatic Researches*; where, ac-
cording to the idiom of the spoken dialects, he is
called Ra‘cutra-Bupp HA: and I suppose, that
neither Racsha, nor Racshita, can be properly used,
but in composition. Yarcuas, the name of a
Brahmen, mentioned in the life of Aporttontus,
is probably a corruption from Rachyas. The Em-
eror Craupivus began his reign in the 44th year
of the Christian Era; and the predilection of the
Chinese for the people of India, and Ceylon, was
very natural. ‘Thus we see that the people of
that island traded to China, at the very beginning
of our Era, and by land. There can be no doubt,
that they went first by sea to the country of
Magadha, or the Gangetic provinces; where
their legislator Bupp’Ha was born, and his religion
flourished in the utmost splendor. There they
joined in a body with the caravans of that
country, and went to China, through what Pro-
LeMy, and the author of the Periplus, call the
great route from Palibothra to China. It was in
consequence of this commercial intercourse, that
the religion of Bupp’Ha was introduced into that
vast empire, in‘the year 65 A. C. and from that
Era we may date the constant and regular in-
tercourse between Muagad’ha and China; till the
extirpation of the religion of Bupp’Ha, and the in-
vasion of the Musulmans.

_ The account given by the son of Racuras, has
‘nothing very extraodinary in it, when the whole is

* p, 450,

42 ESSAY ON

considered in a proper light; and it shews the
carelessness of the Greeks and Romans, in inquiries
of that nature. The regard the Hindus have for the
seven Rishis, or the seven stars of the great Bear,
and which they saw so much above the Horizon,
made them often look up to them, as well as to
the Pleiades. From this circumstance, the Ro-
mans foolishly conceived they never saw them be-
fore. They also often mentioned the star Canopus,
for which the Hindus entertain the highest respect.
The ambassadors of Ceylon were surprised, to see
the Romans consider the East and West, as the
right and left of the world; and declared it was
otherwise in their own country; and that the sun
did not rise in the left, nor set in the right, ac-
cording to their mode of reckoning. For the
Hindus say, that the East is before, and the West
behind; and the shadow of bodies must have been
affected in the same manner. With respect to the
moon’s course, there is the bright half, and the
dark half; which, in Jndia, constitutes what is called
the day and night of the Pitris. ‘The day is reck-
oned, from the first quarter to the last; and this
is called the bright half, or the day of the Pitris ;
the dark half is from the last to the first quarter of
the next moon; and this constitutes their night.
When Priny says, that, in their country, the moon
was seen only from the 8th to the 16th, he was
mistaken; he should have said, that the bright half,
or day of the Pitris, began on the eighth day, and
lasted sixteen days, including the eighth: and then
began the dark half, or night of the P7tris; and,
from these expressions misunderstood, the Romans
concluded that the moon was not to be seen, in their
country, during the dark half.

III. According to Mr. Decuieness, the king of
Tientso, or India, seut men by sea to China, carrying
presents to the Emperor, in the years 159 and 161.

ANUGANGAM, &c. 43
The CuineseE called India Shinto, and Jnto, Sind, and
Hind: they call it also Tientso, and divide it mto
five parts: middle Tventso, w ith North, South, East,
and West Tientse. Mr. Dreutcnes says, they
called India Mokiato, and Polomuenkoué, or country
of Polomuen ; Mokiato, the Magatta of the Japanese,
is Magad ha, including all the Gangetic provinces ;
and it was called Polomuen, from the famous Em-
peror Putima’n, or Potoma’n, called by Drcuic-
NES, Houlomien and Holdmiento. The Chinese
gave the name of Magad’ha to all India ; because
their knowledge of that country, and their inter-
course, was for a long time confined to Jlagad‘ha,
which is also called “Anu-Gangam ; distorted, by
those of Tibet, into Anonkhenk, and Andkak by the
Tartars, who have no other name for Jnrdia. ‘Thus,
in the Empire of the Burmahs, they call India Ca-
lingaharit, from Calinga, or the Peninsula’of India,
with which they are better acquainted : Adrit in their
language, and harita in Sanscrit, signifies country ;
and the whole compound the country of Calinga.
The metropolis of Jndea was situated on the banks
of the Kengkia, or Hengho, the Ganges. This river,
says the same author, they call also Azapil, because,
I suppose, it enters India through the pass of Capila,
called, in the life of Traiur, Ku spell.

The name of the Metropolis was Chapoholo-ching
Kiusomopoulo-ching, Potoli-tsching, answering to Pé-
tah, Cusumd-puri, the well known names: of Patna.
Chapoholo answers to Samalla, or Sambala, now Sum-
bulpoor, written also Sabel-poor, and close to Patna:
and is obviously meant for that city, by the Chinese,
as well as by Protemy.

Another Chinese name for it, is Cutukilopoulo,
which I must give up, unable to reduce it to its
original Sanscrit, or Hindu standard.

In the year 408, Yurcnai king of Kiapili, that

44 ESSAY ON

is to say, of the countries bordering on the river
Kiapili, or Ganges, sent ambassadors to China. He
was a follower of Bupp’ua, and his Hindu name
was probably Yagw’a.

In the year 473, the king of the country of Polk
sent also embassadors to China. The kingdom of
Poli is that of Magadha ; tor Alagad’ha, and Pati,
or Bali, are considered as synonymous, by the peo-
ple of Ceylon, Siam, and the Burmahs.

x

In the year 641, the Indian king of the coun-
tries, belonging now to the Great Mogul, and in-
cluded in the Mokiato or Magad’ha Empire, says
DecuiGnes, sent embassadors to China. ‘The fol-
lowing year, the Emperor of China sent embassadors
to him. His name was HouLtomten, PuLtma’n or
Loma, and he was greatly surprised at it. There
the Chinese learned, tiiat the Hindus called their
country MJoho-chintan, for Mahd-china-sthan: in the
Peninsula this word is pronounced ALacachina.

In the year 647, the Emperor of Mohiato, or Ma-
gadha sent again embassadors to China, ‘as well.as
the king of Nipolow or Nepal. In the following
year, TatrsonG sent an embassy to the king of
Mokito, or Magadha. Inthe mean time, Houro-
MIEN died, and the whole country was thrown into
confusion: he was a great warrior, and reduced all
India, in the year 621, under his yoke. ‘The name
of his family was Krexrrie’; which, for a long time,
had been in possession of the throne. PuLima‘n
was the last of the kings of the royal family of
Anpura. This family is considered, in India, as a
spurious branch; which circumstance is fully im-
plied, by the appellation of Caulatéya in Sanscrit,
or the offspring of the unfaithful woman, and from
Caulat'éya is probably derived the Krerrriz’ of the
Chinese. There is a Dynasty of Caulat’éyas barely
mentioned by the Paurdnics; and they are, pro-

ANUGANGAM, &c. 45
bably, the. same with the ANDHRA-JA‘TICAS, and
the Krexitiz of the Chinese Historians.

The Ann ura kings, on the banks of the Ganges,
were famous all over "India, and in the west: for the
Anp’ura tribe, or family, is placed to the.north of
the Ganges, by the compiler of the Peutingerian
Tables, under the name of 4ndré-Indi, or Indians of
the Anv’ars family or tribe. After Purrara’ Nn, the
AND HRA Bhrityas, according to the Puranas, or
the servants of. the Anv'ura kings, usurped the go-
vernment; and the Chinese historians take particular
notice of this circumstance.

It is declared, in several Purdn‘as, that Mana-
NANDA, and his successors resided at Padmévati, or
Cusumapuri, by which Patna is understood. But
these are only epithets, and not the real name of a
city ; and always given by poets to favourite towns.
Thus Burdwan’ was called ‘usumapurt; and Ranga-
matti, near Moorshedabad, likewise, as well as the
town of Hustindpoor. It is remarkable, that of the
cities in India, once famous in the writings of the
Greeks and Romans, few now are known under these
names in India. ‘Thus TaxtLa is a name unknown
inJnda ; and it was only after perusing the Purayas
for many years, that I found it barely mentioned in
one or two of them. It is the case with Tacara,
the name of which is only found in a grant, some
years ago discovered at Bombay.

The kings of Magad@ha certainly resided very often
at Patna, angl latteri ly they forsook intirely Baliputra,
probably owing to the vicinity of Gaur, the Rajahs
of which, when powerful, could not but prove trou-
blesome neighbours ; besides, the continual encroach-
ments of the Ganges, and the gradual but constant
decay of the metropolis, occas} ioned by them, natu-
rally obliged the kings to look ont fer a more agree-

46 ESSAY ON

able situation. Of the time of the total subversion
of Bali-putra, or Raa-griha, we cannot form any
idea; but there is every reason to believe it took
place at a very early period ; for Pdli-bothra is not
mentioned in the Peutingerian tables, and Magadha,
or Patna, is pointed out as a capital city, under the
name of Al-madgad’ha, or Eli-maide, Al-maied.

IV. The trade of Pali-bothra, and of the kingdom
of Magadha, in its days of splendor, was astonishing,
and is attested by Protemy, Arrrayn in his Periplus,
and the Peutingerian tables. The same is attested
by Chinese historians, and the two Mohammedan tra-
vellers. From Pdali-bothra to the Indus there was
the royal road; and the distances all along were
marked with columns. There was another road,
leading from Baroche to Elymaide, Al-maied, Al-
muiet, and Al-muyjiat, or Patna, called also, in S5an-
scrit books, Magad’ha, as well as the country. This
is mentioned in the Peutingerian tables, and the dis-
tance marked 700, which I take to be Brahmemi coss,
equal to 856 British miles. In the Peutingerian
tables, Bdroche is called Paricea, and the road to
Elymaide \eads through a place called Nieilda, the
true name of which I take to be Néla-cunda, the
Blue-pool, or rather the pool-cun‘da, dedicated to N1-
LACANTES WARA or Iswara, with the blue neck.
From d/-maied there is another road, leading through
the Burman empire, Siam, and ending at Calppe,
now Columpé, in the kingdom of Cambedia. Accord-
ing to the Peutingerian tables, this road went from
Patna, first to the country of Colchi, called Chalcitis,
Chalcis, by Proremy, and the distance marked is
625; which, being supposed to be coss, are equal to
742 B. miles. Near the Colcht country, in the tables,
are placed the Sindi, equally mentioned by Protemy,
and also a place called Pisauta, probably the modern
Pitshiai. Then, from Colchi to Thimara, probably
the Tomara of Proremy; and the distance is 450

¢

ANUGANGAM, &c. 47

coss, or 565 B. miles. Then to Calippe, or Columpé,
220 coss, or 270 B. miles. This route was certainly
known to Protemy, from whom we may collect a
few more particulars. From Palibothra this route
went towards the east, to Sagoda, Authina, Salatha
and Randamarcotta. Sagoda is Sagow, on the west-
ern bank of the Burrampooter, and in lat. N. 24°
35’, according to Mr. Burrow, in the fourth volume
of the Asiatic Researches. This I mention, because
it is not noticed in Mayor RennE.v’s Atlas. Sa-
goda is the form of the possessive case in the western
parts of India, and generaily used instead of the first
case, by the Greeks formerly, and modern travellers
of the two last centuries. Athina is Eetenah, to the
westward of Azmerigunge: Nonnus calls it dnthené,
and takes notice of its flowery shrubs*: thence to
Salatha, or Silhet. The next place is Randamarcotta,
which I suppose to be Ava, the real name of which
is Amara-pura: it is called also Rad’hun-pura, ac-
cording to Cot. Symes; and Randamarcotta appears
as a compound of both. Amara signifies the im-
mortal gods ; and Rad’han, or Rad’ha, are rendered in
Lexicons, by (Amalaci) pure, (prapti) complete, per-
fect, resplendent. Thus Radhammara-pura, or Rdd-
hamara-pura, will signify the city of the pure and
immortal gods. Instead of Radhdmra-pura, we may
say Rddhamara cota, or the fort of the pure and im-
mortal gods. Amar-pur, Amar-cote, Amar-ganh, are
generally used, the one for the other, in Zndia, Be-
fore it became the capital of a vast empire, and in
the beginning, it was probably called Amara-cote in
India; but now it would be improper to say Amara-
cote, unless it were sanctioned by usage. The dis-
tance of Randamarcotta from Salatha, in Protemy,
corresponds pretty well; but the proportional dis-
tances seem to point to some place much nearer.
ftandamar-cotta is obviously the name of a city;

a I

® Nonwn. Dionys. lib. 26. vy. 37.

48 ; ESSAY ON

but, from Pro_temy’s context, it was also the name
of an extensive country, the capital of which is
- called Nardos, perhaps from Aniruddha, or from Na-
reda; for there are in India places called Anurodgur,
and Néredcote. Nardos, or Nardon, is perhaps a ‘COr-
ruption only from Rédhén, the old name of Amar-
puri, according to. Cor. Syaurs. As the Spike-nard
does not grow in the countries to the east of the
Burrampooter, according to Mr. Bucnanan’s infor-
mation, no alteration is to be made in this passage
from Prouemy. |

From the metropolis of China, says PToLEmy,
there was a road leadine to Cattigara a, in the same

o
country of Cambodia, in aS. W. direction.

The Royal road, from the banks of the Indus to
Patbothra, may be easily made out from PxLriny’s
account, and from the Peutingerian tables. Accord-
Ing to Dionysius Pex 2IEGETES, it was called also
the Nyss@an road, because it led from Palibothra to
the famous city of Nysa. It had been traced out
with particular care, and at the end of every Jndian
itinerary measure there was a small column erected.
Mrcastueneks does not give the name of this Jndean
measure, but says that ‘it consisted of ten stades.
This, of course, could be no other than the astrono-
mical, or Panjabi coss ; one of which is equal to
4.93 British mile.

Priny’s account of this royal road is, at first
sight, most extravagant, and, of course, inadmissible.
Put on considering the w hole with due attention,
we shall immediately perceive, that in the original,
from which it was extracted, it consisted of two
distinct accounts or reckonings: the first was, that
of the intermediate distances between every
stage; and the second contained the aggregate sum
‘of these distances for every stage. Pliny, whose
inaccuracy is notorious, selected out of them only

ANUGANGAM, &c. 49
a few distances and stages, here and there; and 1
have presumed to present the whole, arranged im the
following manner :— |

From the Indus Pade Peucolais, - Rom. Mil.

To Tavila, - ~ - - 60 4, he
Hydaspes, “? a - omitted 120
Acesines, Shia tee ty) ditto, OIE
Hydraotes, + . - - ditto dittd
Hiphasia - : - - 49 390
There ended ALEXANDER’s conquests, - - -
and a new reckoning begins - - - -
Hesidrus, nee a gh Thi 168 fh
Jomanes, - - - - ~ 168 omitted
Some add 5 miles, - - - - >
Ganges, - - “ - . 112 ditto’
Rodapha, - = + - 119. 325
Calinipava, suey Abes - : 167 500
Some say, “ - 9635
Conflux of a Jomanes with the
Ganges, - stoic ompitted...,.625
They generally add 13 miles (638) - - =
Palibothra, + diss 425 omitted

Here we Aiea first, 390 miles, from the Indus tb
the end of the conquests of ALEXANDER; and thence
638 miles to the conflux of the Jumna with the
Ganges ; making in all 1028 miles, for the distance
from the Indus to Allahabad. 'These distances were
given in the original in stadia, which Prrny reduced
into miles, at the rate of eight to one mile; and, by
turning again his miles into stadia, we may easily
find out the original numbers. Thus, his, 1028 miles
give 8224 stadia, at the tate of eight to one mile.
Again, these 8224. stadia, divided by ten, give 822.4
Cés, or 205.6 ydanas, equal to 1012 British miles ;
and Masor ReENNELL, after a laborious and learned
investigation, finds 1030 ines between the Jndus
and Allahabad, through Delhi. But the royal road,

Vor, IX. & |

50 ESSAY ON

according to Privy, from the context, ae “more
positively, according to the Peutingerian tables,
passed through Hastinapir ; which giv es ‘an increase,
between the Indus and Allahabad, of ten miles nearly,
making in all 1040 miles. :
MEGASTHENES gives twenty thousand stadia for
the distance from the Jndus to Palibothra: ‘some. read
only ten thousand. Doth numbers are obviously
wrong; and Srrazo tells us, that some, as Parro-
‘cLEs, reckoned only 12000: and this was the true
reading. in MEGAsTHENES’ itinerary. ‘These 12000 -
stadia are equal to 1476 British miles. Now, the
distance from Allahabad to Séncri-guli, commonly
called Sacri-gul?, or the narrow pass, and answering
I should suppose, with regard to: its distance from
Allahabad to the western cate of Palibothra, several
miles to the north, is 430 miles; which, added to.
1040, give 1479 mites for the whole distance, from
the Indus. to Palibothra. "The numbers, in Privy,
give only 11624 stadia, instead of 12000; and there
isa deficiency of 376 stadi ia,’ or 46 B. miles ; part of
which must be added to 425, the distance from Alla-
habad to Palibothra, and the rest to the ‘first sum of
390 miles in Pury, which is certainly too short :
and instead of CCORC, in the text, 1 should pro-
pose to read CCCCX, or 410. Such transpositions
of numeral letters are not uncommon in Priny’s
text. This was the extent, says that author, of
ALEXANDER'S conquests, from the Indus towards
the east. We must not suppose that they extended
no further than the Hyphasis, which he crossed ; for
Pueceras, or Purceus, was king of the countr
beyond the Beyah, and as far at least as the Setle,
“Gf not as far as Serhind. We submitted to Atzxay-
DER with a good grace, and was graciously ie
by him. PHrcELAs was probably the name of t
city he lived in, which is called to this day Pi
wardh, or Pag-wité, Phag-ward, and Phag-wald, be-

hy

ANUGANGAM, &c. 51

tween the Beyah and Setle7. Ser-hind is neither a "
Sanscrit nor Hindu denomination; but it is an Indo-
Scythian compound, and signifies ‘the limits or bor-
‘ders of Hind. The Cathrei, or C’hdtdrs, were a Scy-
thian tribe, as we may s safely conclude from their fea-
‘tures and manners in the time of ALEXANDER, and
even to the present day. The word Ser, or Sereh, is
used in that sense in Biducshan, and the adjacent
countries: and Ser-hind was probably the limit of
‘the conquests of ALexanper, though he never was
there himself, as well as of the Persian dominions in
India; that part of which was called Hodu, accord-
ing to the book of Esrirer: and that it was once
so called, is attested by the natives to this day, who
aay that it was formerly called Hud.
As intend to write expressly on the marches of
_ ALExanveEr through India, (having all the materials
ready for that purpose,) I shall now content myself
with exhibiting an attempt toward the correction of
the various accounts. of this famous Royal, or Nys-
stan road, from Priny, the Peutingerian tables,
‘Proemy, and the anonymous geographer of Ra-
wennd.

From the ferry of Tor-Boileh, or Tor-Beilam, fr
| Lake black Beilam,) on the Jndus, to the w estward of
Peucolais, (now Pucauli, or Bir-wélé, called Pirkola,
“in the maps, and Parke in the Peutingerian tables ,)
-to Taxita, on the river Suvarna, (now the Sone, the
Soamus for Soanus of Arrian). It is called in San-
ecrit, Tacshila; and its true name is Zacsha-Sydla,
according to the natives, who call themselves Syddas.
‘Its ruins extend over the vill ages called Rubbaut
and Pekkeh, in Masor RENNELLS map of the coun-
_ tries between Delhi and Candahér. The royal resi-
dence is pointed out by the natives, at a small village
near the river, and is called Sydla to this day; and is
a little to the north of Rubbaut. TZ. ac-Syala haying

E

$2 ESSAY ON

been ruined at an early period by the Musulmans, it
was rebuilt afterwards under the name of Ti urruk-
pehri; and a Perganah of that name is ‘mentioned in
the Ayin-Acberi. But this last has met with the
same fate as the for mer.

’ » »
Vi

Thence to Phe or “Ruytas, called le, by
Nonnus, in his Dionysiacs, who says it was a strong
place. It is called Rages, for Rates, in the P ine
gerian tables, and in the Puranas its name is He ip
‘and that of its inhabitants Hridan. iN

According to the Peutingerian tables, we fet an-,
other route, which ought. to join here. It comes
from Arni, Aornos, or ‘Attock, ‘and goes to Pileiam,
(which appears to be transposed ; or Ec- Bolima, from
Ac-Beila, or Ac-Beilam, or the ‘white Beilam, sands.
or shores, and now called Hazru).

Thence to the ferry over the Jailam | or Béhat, and
Alexandria-Bucephatos, near which is a famous peak,
called the mountain of the elephant, by Prurarcu’.
Its present name is Bal, Bil, or Pil, which, in
Persian, signify an elephant. Tt is famous all over
the western parts of /ndia for its holiness, and its
being the abode of numerous penitents; the chief of.
whom, as well as the deity of the place, is called.
Bat-Na‘tH or Brr-N‘atu. It is generally. called.
Bat-Na’ru-TirLen, or the mountain of the Lord
Ba’L; another name for it is Joghion-di-tibbi, or the
tower of the Joghis. |

Wet '?

Ed eles
Thence to the Acesines or Chandra-bhéga, and the
town of Spatura of the Peutingerian tables, calle
Simtura by the anonymous geographer, ae poly

* Plat. de flum,

ea. fui: ‘a

z | ANUGANGAM, &c. _ i) ae

the same with Sadhora. There appears to be a trans-
position in the numbers expressing the distances.

Thence to the Hydraotes, or Révi, (the Trévati of
the Puran‘as,) and the city of Laboca or Lobaca,
mentioned by Proremy, and which is the present
Lahore. Its true and original name is Lavaca or La-
baca, from Lava or Lapa, the son of Ra’ma; and its’
present name is derived fei) Lava-wara, the place of
Lava or Lapa. Its distance from Saneald i in Pto-
LEMY, with its name, have induced me to guppesc
that it is the same with Lahore, which is 53 miles
to the east of the extensive ruins of Sangala, so
called to this day; and the true pronunciation is
Sangala, not Sangala. ‘There are two places in Pro-
LEMY, one culled Laboca, and the other .Zaboela,.
which I take to be the same place, the true name of
which is Labaca; for the cther 1s not conformable to
the idiom of any of the dialects in India.

Thence to the Hyphasis, and afterwards to the
Zadadrus, (the S'atédara or S‘atadru of the Purtvas,
_or with 100 bellies or channels ;) and to the town of
Tahora, in the Peutingerian tables (now calied, with
a slight alteration, 7 ehaura, and in the Purdyas, Ti-
hotra and Trigarta; there SEMIRAMIS, or Sami-
DEVI, was born).

wrTiehee to Ketrora, in the same tables, for Cshatri-
ward, or C’hetri-wara, the metropolis of a powerful
tribe of Cshetris or C’hetris, who lived in a beautiful
and woody country. The famous Lacki Jungle, or
forest, is what now remains of these charming woods
and groves. ‘They are calied Cetri-boni by Priyy,
with the epithet of Sylvestres, or living in forests;
and Cshatrivana, in Sanscrit, and C’hetri-ban, 1n the
spoken dialects, signify. the forest of the Cyhetris:
Chetriwdra, or Cotrora, is now Thanehsar ; in former
times, the metropolis of these Cshatris.

EG

5A ESSAYON i) rw
Thence to the Jumna at Cunjpoora, and to the
Ganges at Hustinapoor, or Hastina nagara, called in
the West, and in the Ayin-acheri, Wustnaur, for
Hastin-nora. tis the Bacinora of the Peutingerian
tables, the Bactriana of the anonymous geographer, .
and the Sterna of Proremy. In the Greek origi- .
nal it was written BACTINOPA, Bastinora, altered
afterwards into BAC{NOPA, and BACTPIA! a
Basinora, and Bastriana; and the latter was m =
taken for Bactriana. Indeed the Greeks could
hardly write /ustnore, or J¥ustinore, otherwise,
than OY ACTINOPA, or BACTINOPA, Ouastinora,
Wastinora, or Bastinora: they chose the latter.
Hastina-nugara, commonly called Hustind-poor, is

5
about twenty miles 8. W. of Darinagur, on a brancl

of the Ganges, formerly the bed of that river. There
remains only a small place of worship ; and the ex-
tensive site of that ancient city is entirely covered
with large ant-hills; which have induced the in-
habitants of the adjacent country to suppose, that it
had been overturned, or destroyed, by the Termites.
In the Peutingerian tables we are presented with
a route, leading, from Hustindpoor, into Tibet: the.
first stage of which is 4rate, called Heorta by
Protemy, but transposed by him. It is Haridwar,
of Hardwah, as it is corruptly pronounced by many ;.
and in Arate and Heorta, we can retrace the original,
name Hartoa, or Hardwah. The second stage »is
Pharca, called Paraca by Putrostratos, in his life
of Apottontus; and placed by him im the moun-
tains, to the north of the Ganges. Its present name
is Prégh, often pronounced Pardgh, generally with
the epithet of Déva, or Deo, Deo Pragh, or the di-
vine Prégh. It isin the country of Sri-nagar, on
the banks of the Ganges, and is a famous place of
worship. eer sn.

On the road from Hustindpoor to Allahabad,
Priny places the town of Rodapha, called Rapphe by

ANUGANGAM, &c. 55
Provemy. Its present name is Hurdowah, or Hul-
dowah ; for beth are equally in use.

The next stage, according to Pirxy, is Calizipara,
the true name ug which was Célini-basa, implying
its being situated on the Cadini, a river whieh retains
its ancient name to this day: but the town is now
unknown. |

The next stage is Allahabad, called the town of
Ganges, (or Gangapocr,) by Arremiporus. All the
intermediate distances, in Piiny, are erroneous, and
inadmissible: thus he tells us, that from Redapha,
to Calinipava, there are 168 miles: but according to
others 265; whilst some reckon 500. ‘The distance,
assigned by him, between the Sedu and June,
amounts to 336 miles, which is a most eross mistake,
The half, or 168 miles, reckoning from Tuhora to
Cunjpoora, is pretty near the truth. '

From Allahabad to Patibothra, the road, it seems,
did lie along the southern bank of the Ganges: and
in Prorymy we find the following places. Fron.
Allahabad to the river Tuso, now ” she Fonse: and,
eighteen miles from its Honfux with the Ganges, in
aS. W. direction, he places a town’ called Adisdara,
probably the same with Aftersar, or Altersarour in
the same place; and, about one mile and half to the
north of the 7ovse. a Henke to Cindia, now Cauntce,
on the banks of the Ganges, and almost opposite to
Goopygunge. But this ‘place is out of the direct
road: though it might not have been so formerly,
on account of the continual encroachmnents and
shiftings of the Ganges. ;

The next is Sagala, now JAVirzapoor, and con-
nected with another called Siga/a, or rather Sagala,
now AMonghir. The present reco name of the
former is Vind'hn ydcasini, from the Goddess of that

E4,

56 ESSAY ON

name, who is worshipped there, and who resides in
the Vind’ hya, or Bind mountains, as implied by her
name. The common title of this tremendous deity,
is Buapra-ca‘Lr, or the beautiful Ca’ty’; though
she by no means deserves that epithet. This place
is supposed to communicate with the other Saga/a or
Monghir, through subterraneous passages, opened
by lightning ; which sunk under ground at Vind yd-
wasini, and re- appeared at Monghir, at a place dedi-
cated also to the same Dévi, though little frequented,
This accounts for these two laces having the same
name in Protemy; though these names are now en-
tirely unknown to the Hindus. Bat Bu apra-Ca LI
and Su-Ca‘ir are perfectly synonymous: the latt
however, is seldom used as an epithet of that « deity,
except when persons, either male, or female, are
denominated after her; then they never use. Buapra-
Ca't’, but they say Su-Ca‘tr. Mirzapoor i is some-
times called the S¢hdn, or place of Bus mee i!
which appellation is distorted into Patrigally, in ne
voluminous treatise of the religious ceremonies of
different nations, . y get ‘ ne .
The other Sagala, or Monghir, is aed Muilgaly |
in Sanscrit, as Tam told, ina derivative form from |
Mudga, its name in the imperial grant feund there ;
for Mudea-giri significe the hill of Mudga. In the
Deccan, Proemy 1 mentions two places, nearly at the
same digtance from each other, one called Petirg: a,
and the other Afodogulla. Aladighir, or rather ‘|
du-gir, is a very common name for places in the
Peninsula, and also in other parts of India; as Ma-
dugar, near Jaypoor ; Matgar, vear Cotta, &e, The
first part of this compound | is found, in composition,
with pura city, giri hill, griha fort, vana, or ban fo-
rest, &c. thus we have ‘Modu-pura, Modusiri, Modu-
phir, Modu-cana, or Modu-ban, &c. That Monghir
was called AWJudga-giri, Mudgala, and Sagala, is
certain; and that. Mirzapoor was denominated

-

ANUGANGAM, &c. 57.

equally, Buapra-Caxt or Petrigally, and Sagala, is
equally so; like the two places in the Deccan, called
Petir-gala, and Modogulla, by Prozemy. In all
the names of places, in which the word Afodu is in-
troduced, this word is uniformly interpreted pleasing,
charming, from the Sanscrit Moda: thus Afodu-ban
signifies the beautiful grove: Afodwa, the name of
several rivers, implies their being delightful. Thus
Moda-giri, or Modu-gir, in the spoken dialects, sige
nifies the beautiful hill ; Modu-gah, the beautiful
pass: thus Sancri-galt, now Sacrigulley, implies the
narrow pass. ~The word galt is not Sanscrit; but
Sancri is derived from Sancirnia: and innumerable
instances might be produced, of compound names of
places, and even of men, in which one word is San-
> se and the other borrowed from the spoken dia-
_ In this case Modu-gali, Bhadra-gali, and

u sale imply equally the beautiful pass, “between
Fiiicctions of the hills and the Ganges. Several
places in India are denominated Su-golley, Sugouley,
and Sucouley, from their being situated near a pass,
either through mountains, or almost impervious
woods. Puixy seems to suppose, that the Royal, or
Nyssean road passed through Pach, or Peucolais ;
but this is highly improbable. It went directly
through the ferry of Aornos or Atteck-Benares, to
Nysa. Aornos, or Avernus, is probably derived from
the Sanscrit Varan‘asa, pronounced Benares in the
spoken dialects. Father Monserrat, who accom-
panied the Emperor Aczar, in his "exped: tion to
Cabul, says, that that Emperor paid the greatest at-
tention to the measurement of the roads, ‘during his
march; and that, instead of a common rope, he sub-
stiguted Bamboes, joined together by iron Jinks. He
then says, that there were twenty-six and one fourth,’
of these Cos, to one degree: each Cos consisted, of
course, of 13911. 77 feet, or 4637. 26 yards.

V. From China, says Protemy, there were two

5ae ESSAY ON

roads: one leading to Bactra; and the other to Pa-
ibothra. The author of the Periplus has strangely.
disfigured this passage, or a similar one, from some —
other author. He says, that wool (L suppose some,
particular kind of it), and silk, were brought. by land
from Chiza to Baroche, through Bactra, or Balkh;
and then, down the Ganges, to “LAMYRICA.. He « cer-
tainly meant, that the eoods ‘were sent, part > the
west, through Balkh, “and part to Palibothra ; anc |
from the latter they were carried down the Ganges,
and by sea, to Limyrica: this was, I suppose, the
original meaning. The country of LIMYRICA i is that |
of Muru, in the” peninsula; called also, though im-
properly, Aura, Mur, and Muri; which, in a deri-
vative form, becomes AZuruca and “Murica; from
which, Arabian travellers made Adnurica, and the.
Greeks Li-myarca. In Sanscrit, but more particu-_
larly in the spoken dialects, ‘the derivative is a
used for the primitive form. Thus they say, Be 3en=
gdla for Benga: and for Lar, they alte Larica, ‘ae
district in Gan yjarat. With ‘regard to this track,
from Magadha, and Pahbothra, to China, the Pea
tiungerian “tables afford us considerable light. | ae rom
the Palite, the Bolita, and Cabolite of Prot

now Calul, there was a road, leading Hitonet Thy
mountains, ‘north of the Pay jab, and meeting ater
road from Yahora, in the same country, (still re-
taining the same name,) at a place called 4ris, in the
mountains to the north of Hari-dwdr. ‘These two
roads are frequented to this day ; and they meet at a
place called Khama-lang, a little beyond what is called.
the Eyes of Mansarovar ; which are three — small
lakes, and.to the south of Bindu-Sa ‘ovarad, or Lanca
lake. This information I received from several na-
tives, who had travelled that way. The road tl
goes to Aspacora, or Asparaca, a place in Tibet, men-
tioned by Protemy: there it met with another from
the Gangetic Provinces; and passing through Par-
thon, probably now Ker en, orkelten, “with the epithet

OPE ANUGANGAM, &c. 59
of Ponjuling, from which is probably derived the
Paliana of Protemy. This road, in the tables, ends

at Magaris, corruptly for 7’ hogaris, or Ti hogara, in
Proremy; and now Jonker, near Lassa, on the river
Calchew, (called, in the Peutingerian tables, Calincius).
The mountains to the north, are called by Protemy,
Thaguri, and the inhabitants of the country, Itaguri.
These famous mountains still preserve their ancient
name, being called Tingri to this day. The road,
from the "Gangetic provinces, is represented as
coming froma place called Carsania, near the Ganges ;
and probably the Cartasina of Proemy, now called
Carjuna, near Burdwan. Between this, and Aspacora
in Tibet, the tables place a town called Scobaru,
which strange and uncommon name's still preser ved,
in that of ‘Cucshabaru, (in the maps, Cocsabary, )
near Jarbarry, to the north of Dinagepoor. Cucsha-
baru is the epithet of a giant, living in the mountains
to the north of India. ‘His real name was SrHULO-
DARA, and, from his insatiable and’ ravenous voracity,
he is surnamed Cucshabard, and he is often mentioned
in the Purdvas. ‘This was probably the rendezvous
of the caravans, from Tuprobane, or Ceylon ; which,
according to Puin y, went by land to China. Racuia,
the chief embassador of the king of Ceylon, to the
Emperor Ciaunivs, said, that his father had gone by
land to China. .

Asse Groster, in his description of China, says,
that at Pow-eul, a village in Yunnan, on the frontiers
of Assam, Ava, and Laos, people resort from the ad-
jacent countries: but that the entrance is forbidden
to foreigners, who are permitted to approach no
nearer than the bottom of the mountains. There
they exchange their goods for tea, the leaves of
which are lone and thick. They are rolled up into
balis, somewhat like tobacco, and formed into masses,
which are carried into the adjacent countries, and
even to this day to Silhet. °

66 ESSAY ON B08 (4 6th ata 2
This trade was carried on, exactly in the tne
manner, 1600 years ago, according to Ota taste Fe e-
riplus. On the confines of China, says the anthor,
there is a nation of men, of a short stature, with
large forehead, and flat noses. They are called Sesate, 3
(and by Prozesy Basadw). These come, every Eat
to the frontiers ; not being permitted to ente
country. T hey make baskets of certain ‘Teav
large as those of the vine, which they sew se
with the fibres of bambus, called petri ; and fill t a
with the caves of a certain plant, rolled up into balls
which are of three sorts, depending on the quality
and size of the leaves; and are of course desonnaaet
balls of the larger, middle, and smaller size ; and a are:
carried all over India. Petri could not be the name
of the bambus, but of the leaves, called in Hindu
patra. These leaves are probably those of the Dhdc
tree*, used all over India tomake baskets, and nade
fast together, with skewers, from the fibres of the
bambu, or other similar plant. These Basade were,
in my opinion, a wandering tribe, still called Bisdti t, |
who live by selling small wares and trinkets ; for
which purpose they “constantly attended markets, A |
and such places, where they think they can dispose oF
their goods. These Bisati, or Besade, from t ieir
features, must have belonged to some of the tribes.
living on the eastern borders of Bengal, whose fea-
tures are axactly such as described by the author of
the Periplus, Mr. Bucnanan mentions two plac es
called Palé, perhaps Pow-cul, and Palaung, in th
mountains to the N. E. of Avia: where they pickle the
tea leaves, used all over the Burman Empire.

“a *

There is another route, in the Peutingerian tables,
leading from TYahora, (or Tahaura, in Major Ren-

: “
bedi y a eee 9 | ‘ <

* Butea frondosa.
+ Sce Asiat. Researches, Vol. 7th. p. 466.

ANUGANGAM, &&% 61

NELL’s map,) to Elimaide, or Patna. From Tahora to
Palipotra, 250 cos: to the Ganges 500: to Elymaide,
250 : in all 1000 cos, or 1228 B. M. Here we see,
that Palipotra cannot be, either Patna, or Rajamahl :
besides, the distance is too great, in a direct line.
There are three towns, thus called, in India: the first,
or Pali-putra near Cabul, called Palpeter by Dan-
VILLE, is unconnected with this route. The second
is Bali-putra, or Rajamahl, which is too far to the
eastward. The third is Pdli-putra, in the interior
parts of India, and is now called Bo-Pdl, for Bhu-
Pala. tis mentioned by Protemy, under the name
of Siri-Palla for Sri-Palli. This, I conceive to be the
Palipotra, of the Peutingeriax tables, and accordingly
propose the following correction. From Yakora to
Palipotra, or Bopaul, 500 cos, or 639 B. M. ‘Thence
to Elimaide or Patna, 500 cos. also. Between Tahora
and Palipotra, the route passed near the mountains of
Daropanisus, which are those of Dhkdr. Between
Palipotra and Patna, there is a station ad Gangem,
or near the Ganges: this station, [ take to be dda-
habad, called the town of Ganges, in ancient authors:
_but then the distances, either according ta our cor-
rection, or without it, do not agree so well; and pro-
bably there is a transposition. |

Ihave mentioned before, the constant intercourse,
both by sea and by land, between the kingdom of
Magad’ha and Ching, on the authority of Chinese
History ; and their trade, to an island and kingdom,
called Founan, to theeastward of Siam, during the
third and fourth centuries. This was probably a
Malay kingdom: but we cannot ascertain its situa-
tion. It seems that some JZalay emperors, and
kings, as those of Zdpage, and Founan, did what they
could, to introduce trade and learning, into their do-
minions: but their exertions proved ineffectual; at
least they were not attended with much success ;

8: ESSAY ON ~ , :
and their subjects soon relapsed into their forn
mode of life. The Mohammedan ‘tras lers of J \E-
navupot, speak of the power of the kings of JZabed ;
and declare, that they used to send, si. Sea ee
‘Dbassadors to the Emperor of China, with presents :
but that these embassadors were narrowly watched,
on their entrance into the Chinese territories. They
lived in peace with China, but were not subjects of
its monarchs. These. travellers consider | AZébed
and Mujet, or Maied, as distinct countries : and there
‘are some grounds for it; and it was perhaps so

originally. The inhabitants of Asam were divided
formerly, into Cuj and Afwj ; and the appellation of
Mujet may be derived from Mj, whom I suspect,
however, to be the same with the A/agas, or Burmal 8,
who greatly imitate the Chinese manners. Thus, for
Magog, they say Magiuge. After the death of |
LIMAN, the whole country was thrown, ‘into: ¢
fusion, according to the Pwurdvas and Chinese
‘Historians, as we observed before. One of his
chief officers, called OLonacuun, seized upon the
‘kingdom, but was made prisoner by the Chinese
embassador, with the assistance of the Emperor of
Tibet. ! ie ae Ts

ete
dit Pui i

Then, say the Paurézics, the AND'HRA-BHRITY AS,
or servants of the Anp’ura kings, set up for them-
‘selves: but one, more fortunate, surpassed the othe TS
in power: hisname was RrpunJaya, with the title
of Visvyaspuurgt, the thunder of the world. FE
terminated the remnants of the Barons or Cshettr
and filled their places with people of the lox
classes: he drove away also the Bréhmens ;_
raised, to the priesthood, men of the lowest tril
such as the Caivartas, boatmen and fishermen, . atus,
Pulindas, and Madracas: but these Brahmens were
no better than Mlech’has, or impure and base born
men. These boatmen and fishermen, being used to

KV,

° "ANUGANGAM, &c. 63

live upon fish, would never give up their favou-
rite food, when raised to the priesthood : and their
descendants, the Bengal Brahmens live upon fish
even to this day. The same circumstance 1s men-
tioned in the Vishnu-Purdn'a. _ Then, aftewards,’a

Guptacansa, or obscure’ race, will reign all over
Anu-Gangam, or the Gangetic provinces ; some in
Sacéta, (or Oude) others at Padmécati, (or Patna ;)
Praydg, (or Allahabad) Alathuré, (or Aluttra) and
Canti-puri, (now Cutwall, nine cos to the north of
Gwalior). Here no mention is made of Gaur in
Bengal: and indeed, its kings are never noticed by
the / Paurdni ics. | \ |

ba §

*y

“VI. The following towns are placed, obviously,
in the country of Tibet, by Proremy, and in the
“Peutingerian tables. Theis names are Ari is, Orosana,
Aspag ‘ora (or Aspacora,) Pahana (the same with Par-
thona,) Thogara, Abragana, Ottorocoras, Solana, with
the river Bautes (or Bautisus). These are in the
country of the Bate, (or Budtan) seemingly limited
‘to the districts round Lassa; which, it is highly pro-
bable, was originally the case. The situation of
Aris is at the meeting of two roads; one from Za-
hora, and Hardwar (prob: ably the Forta of Pro-
‘LEeMy;) and the other from Cabdul, through the ‘hills,
From the nature of the country, there is every rea-
son to suppose, that the place, where they met, has
not. altered its situation. Jhogara, at the orhet ex-
tremity, and on the river Calncivs, is obviously the:

present Yorker, on the river Calchew, near Lassa,

he distance between Aris and Thogara, in the Peu-
tingerian tables, arising from the intermediate ones,
amounts to 175. But these -cannot be miles, Hos
“even Cos: let us suppose them to be 157 ydjanas, or
‘771. B. miles; which would be sufficiently “accurate,
“From Aris, to Orosana, eu Thubrassene of the ta-
“bles, and now called Ari. jim,) 40 ydjanas, or 196 B.

64 ESSAY ON
miles. Then, leaving Kheiron (the Chiron of the
maps,) to the right; the route proceeds to Aspagora,
of which the present situation is unknown: distance
52 ydjanas, or 255 miles. Thence, to Parthona (pro-
bably Carthona, or Calthona, and, of course, the
town of Ielten or Kerten, on the Sampu:) distance
15 ydjanas, or 73 B. miles. According to Protemy,
the horizontal distance, between Aspdcora and Pa-
liana, is 47 B. miles; which, in a mountainous coun-
try, like this, must be greatly enlarged, to bring it
into computed distance. Kelten is called also Pun-
julin, according to my friend, the late Purancrr,
who aecompanted the Lama to China; and who
greatly assisted me, in ascertaining the true pro-
nunciation of the names of places in Tibet. Pahana
is probably derived from Ponjulin; and Parthona (or
rather Carthona,) from Kelten. From this place to
Thogara, (or Tonker,) 50 ydjanas, or 245 B. miles :
and the horizontal distance, according to Masor
RENNELL’s map, is about 150 B. miles. Accord-
ing to the Peutingerian tables, a route branched out,
from Aspacora, towards India and the Ganges.
About seventeen years ago, I had a long conversa-
tion with Puranai'r, on the subject of Aspagora, or
Aspicora. He told me, that Gor, Khar, and Car,
were frequently used, in composition, in the names
of places; and that dAspa might be a corraption
from Sipd, or Sdpu, which was a very comnfon nanie
of places, in Tibet ; and that Sipd-gor, or Sdpu-gor,
Sipd, or Sapu-khar, were perfectly idiomatical ; though
he did not recollect any place of thatname. It struck
me then, that this was also the vame of a famous river, .
in that part of Jndia, mentioned by Cresras, under
the names of Sipa-choras, Ilyparchos, and Hypo-
barus ; because it came, L suppose, from the country
of Sipa-chor, in Tibet: the same is now called the
Teestah, in Bengal. Portus has given us, in his
Bibliotheca, an extract of this curious passage, from

ANUGANGAM, &c. 65
Cresras, in general true, and correct, with a few
wild and extravagant notions as usual with him.
There is a river in Jrdia, about one furlong broad,
or two stadia, called Hyparcho. Piiny, who had
seen Crrsiass works, long befoie Puorrus, says it
was called Hypobarus, and flowed from the north
into the Eastern sea, (or gulph of Bengal, called, by
the Paurdnics, the eastern, as that, between Africa
and Jndia, is named the /Vestern sea). The moun-
tains abound with trees, hanging over the numerous
streams, which flow through them. Once a year,
during thirty days, tears flow plentifully from them,
which falling into the waters beneath, coagulate into
Amber. These trees the Hindus call Sipa-chora. In
the country, about the sources of this river, there is
a flower of a purple colour, which gives a dye, not
inferior to the Grecian, but even much brighter.
There is also an insect, living upon these Amdber-
bearing trees, the fruit of which they eat; and, with
these insects bruised, they dye stufts, for close ves-
tures, and long gowns, of a purple colour, superior
to the Persian. These mountaineers, having col-
lected the Amber, and the prepared materials of the
purpie dye, carry the whole on board of boats, with
the dried fruit of the tree, which is good to eat;
and then convey their goods, by water, to different
parts of India. A great quantity they carry to the
Emperor (the king of A/faga@ha,) to the amount of
about one thousand talents. In return they take
bread, meal, and coarse cloth. They sell also, their
swords, bows, and arrows. Every fifth year the king
(of Magadha) sends them, as a present, a vast quan-
tity of bows, arrows, swords, and shields,

This Amber of Crestas is obviously the Zndian
Lacca, which has many properties of the Amber or
Electrum. ‘Till very lately, authors differed, as to
the production of this curious drug. Some imagined,
that it was the indurated juice of some trees. Others,

Vor. IX. F

66 ESSAY ON

that it was produced by a sort of insect. This last
opinion is the true one: and these insects, being
bruised, make a powder, as fine as Cochineal. These
two opinions were current, in the time of Cresias,
who, most injudiciously, has blended them to-
gether.

To the trees, he has given the name of Sipa-chora ;
and to the river, that of Hyparcho, or Hypobat*us:
but Hyparc’ho is but a corruption for Sypa-chor. Sype-
bari is the Hindu name, answering to the 7%be¢ one
of Sypa-chor: for Bari or Barry, as it is written in
the maps, is very frequently used at the end of
proper names of places, and signifies a limited spot
of ground, an inclosure, and a garden.

It is more probable, that the river was thus called,
because it came from the country of Sipa-gor, or As-
pacora. CrxEsias says, it wasa Hindu name; and
yet, the meaning of it he attempts to derive from
the Persian, as most of his other Hindu etymologies ;
but, though he had spent seventeen years in Persia,
it seems, he understood that language but very im-

_ perfectly ; and, I think, he was peculiarly fortunate
in not forgetting his own. He accompanied the
younger Cyrus, with the 10,000 Greeks, in the un-
fortunate expedition, in which that prince lost his
life, in the year 401 B.C. Cresias was taken pri-
soner, and being a physician, became a great fa-
vorite with Arraxerxes Mnemon. Sipa-gor was
obviously on the road, between Ari-jun (or Aridsong,
and Lassa; and which, according to P. Grorer,
branches out into three, which reunite again at Lassa,
It is tolerably well delineated in the maps of the
Lamas. The distance between Sipd-chor, and Pon-
julin, as given, either by Protemy, or in the Peuézn-
gerian tables, does not agree, being certainly too —
short. But when we consider that the geography
of that country is yet in its infancy, and the want

ANUGANGAM, &c. 67

of accuracy in Pronemy, and in the geographical
works of the ancients, we shall not be surprised at»
it. It appears, however, that Szba-chor was situated
in the beautiful valley of Zankya, near the streams
which form the Zeestah. There is a place called
Sipa, on the road, from Napali to Lassa: but it is
too near Napal. Protemy places it on the river
Bautes, or Bautisus, now the Bont-su: though
Bot-su, or the water of Bot, or Bud-tan, would bea
very proper name for the Sazpoo. This, I believe,
misled Proremy, who places Aspacora on that river.
The scuthern branch of this river, the real Bautisus,
he derives from the country to the west of Aridsong,
and makes it pass through the valley of Zankya.
The town, called by him Solana, is probably Ujulin,
called Ujuk-link, in the map of the Lamas. Thus
they call Prryjulin, Pusuk-hang: but my friend Pu-
RANGI’R assured me, that the true pronunciation of
it, in Fidet, is Punjulin, witha nasal » at the end.
The name of the country of Ottora-cora, with a.city
of the same name, is pure Hindu: Aétaro-chur, the
eighteen forts, or Rdjaships. It is the country of
Napaul, now called the 24 forts, or Réjaships.. Tam
informed, that Napau proper consisted, originally,
of eight forts, or Rajaships; in Hindu, At-ghur;
perhaps, the détacori of Priny: for the number of
vassal Rajahs, and tributary forts to Napaul, must
have been constantly fluctuating. But, let us re-
turn to Crersras, and his account of the imhabi-
tants of the southern parts of Budtan, which will
be found remarkably accurate, (though received
into Persia 400 years B.C.) a few wild notions ex-
cepted.

These people, says he, inhabit the whole range of
mountains, as far as the Jndus, to the westward.
They are very black, but otherwise remarkable for
their probity, as the other Hindusare in general; and
with whom there is a constant intercourse. They

¥ Q

68> ESSAY ON *

live by hunting, piercing the wild. beasts with their
darts and arrows: but they are also so swift as to
run them down. “They have the head and nails of
a dog, but.their teeth are longer; and they bark
like dogs, having no other language: yet they un-
derstand the Hindu, but express ‘themselves by signs
and barking. They have also tails like dogs, but
longer,, and more bushy. The Hindus call. ‘them
Calystrii, or Dog-faced.

This idle story originates from their being swift- -
paced, and running down their prey like Gre-hounds.
These Dog-/aced Sylvans, are called Swana-muchas, in
the Purdnas ; in which we read also of tribes, with
faces like horses, parrots, &c. in these mountains.
But it was, however, a very appropriate hieroglyph,
by» which to designate these people. Thus the
Lcthyophagi, or fish- -eaters, on the coasts of Persia,
are called in Sanscrit, I am told, Sir-matsyas, or fish-
heads, and in Dersiain romances, Ser-mahi; which
signifies the same thing. Calystrii seems to be de-
rived from the Sanscrit F Cauleyaca-Siras, or eure
Siras, with the heads of Gre-hounds. +

_ They live upon flesh, dried in the sun: (and in
Tibet they thus dry whole sheep, which they place
upon four legs). ‘The men never bathe: women
only once a month. They rub their bodies with oil.
(This is the practice in Tibet, and they use butter
instead of oil). They generally live in caves: (this
is the constant practice of the mountaineers, to this
day, in winter: in summer, they live under tents,
and in arbours). Their clothes are of skins, except
a few of the richest, who wear linen.

Beyond the sources of the Sipa- heme is a tribe
of men, black also; but they have no evacuations.
They however, make a little water occasionally.
Their food is milk alone, which they know how to

/

ANUGANGAM, &Xc. 69

prevent from coagulating in their stomachs. In the
evening they excite a gentle vomiting, and throw
up the whole. This strange narrative is not without
foundation : many religious people in Jndia, in order
to avoid the defilement attending the coarser eva-
cuations, take no other food but milk: and previous
to its turning into f@ces, as they say, they swallow a
small string of cotton, which, on their pulling it
back, brings up the miik, or those parts of it, which
they consider as the Caput mortuum. This they
make the credulous multitude believe: their disciples
are ready to swear to it; and they have even deluded
persons, otherwise of great respectability. I suppose
they conceal themselves, with great address; and
their evacuations cannot be very frequent, nor very
copious; for they really live upon nothing else but-
avery small quantity of milk: but certainly more
(at least I should suppose so) than they do acknow-
ledge: and the ceremony of the string they per-
form occasionally, before a few friends. I have
known many of these people: they are all hermits,
who seldom stir from the place they have fixed upon.
There is one neat the military lines, at Sicrewre, near
Benares, on the banks of the Burna: but, I believe,
he is rather in too good case, for a man living upon so
scanty an allowance. ite

The next place in Protemy, is Abragana, placed
by him to the S. E. or nearly so, of Paliana, and
Aspacora. ‘This I conceive to be the large district of
Bregion, called also Bramahsong ; extending from
Napal, along the borders of Jnrdia, and Asam, to-
ward the east; and the capital city of which was
called, also, by the same name. Protemy places a
famous city, about 350 geographical miles, horizontal
distance, from Thogara, to the eastward, under the
name of Sera, the metropolis: but of what country ?
of the Seres? no surely ; for they are not introduced
into his maps, It was obviously the metropolis of
F 3

TO: ESSAY ON .

Serica, a derivative word, from Ser, the name of
China, to this day, all over 7ibet, and implying a
country subject to Ser. This Serd is, much more
probably, the ancient and famous city called Dszrz,
Siri, and Sera, to the S. E. of Lassa. Its real name
is Cheri, or Tsert, according to several pilgrims who
had visited this famous place of worship. Between
it and Jonker, Protemy places, about half way, a
town called Dac-suta, probably in the kingdom of
Lac-po, between Seri and Tonker. |

There is another Bracmania, or Bragmania, in the
Gangetic provinces mentioned by Pattapius, in his
account, in Greek, of the Bragmans.. Catanus and
Danpamis came from that country ; and the latter
is introduced, reproaching CaLtanus with his deser-
tion, who could not remain satisfied with the pure
waters of the 7iberoboas, or Taberuncus. This river
was, to the eastward of the Ganges ; for Danpamis,
or Dama-pamis, says, how can ALEexanpDeER be
called the conqueror of the world, whilst he has not
yet crossed the Z%beroboas, or Tyberoboas: let him
only go beyond the Ganges, &c. She country of
these sages was probably Tirhoot, in Sanscrit, Tri-
bucta. ‘Vhis word has been distorted various ways,
which have very little resemblance with their primi-
tive and original form. The district of Tirhut con-
sisted originally of three divisions; the first of which
is called to this day Tirhdut, or Tyroot ; the second is
denominated 77-Ru-hut ; and the third, Ru-77-hut.
These.wwords are also pronounced Ti-Ru-buct, Ru-Ti-
buct. Thus Sri-hut, is now called Silhet, and by
Arabian authors, Sarirat. Tribucta is derived from
7ri, three, and Bucta, from a verb implying to
foster; either because there were three Rdas, foster-
ing the whole country, or one Rdja, who alone fos-
tered the three districts, and we may say either Tri-
bucta, or Tribhue. :

ANUGANGAM, &c. 71

Its capital city is Durbungah, by many derived

from Tir-bucta, or Tirbhuc. From Tirubucta, and
Tirbucta, the name of the river Tidereboas, or
Taberuncus, may, possibly, be derived. Some
learned Pandits derive the etymology of Dur-bungah
from Dwdra, or Dewar, and bangah: because the
door, or gate way, of the palace of the king, was. de-
stroyed by the river, during the rains ; and the palace
was in consequence forsaken, as it had been recently
built. From Dwara-bangah, Dewdra-bangah, syno-
nymous with Dewar-béha, is probably derived the
name of the river Tiberoboas, or Tiherobancus : for
thus we should read in the original, instead of 7%be-
rancus. The Bragmania of PALtapius is probably
the same with the Bracmania of the anonymous geo-
erapher: for the greatest part of Tribuct is in the
Indian Serica of that author, and, of course, belongs
to the Rajdship of Napdl. Mr. Danvitte was in-
duced to suppose, that the country of Bramsone
was the Bracmania of the anonymous geographer of
Ravenna ; because the French say, Brames, instead
‘of Bréhmens; Tir-hut, called also A@iPhila, and
Mait hila, is famous, from the most remote antiquity,
for the learning of many Brdhmenical families, re-
siding there even to this day. The appellation of
Bramsong is probably derived from a colony of Bur-
mans, settled there. The language of these moun-
taineers has much affinity with the dialect of the
Burmahs, according to Mr. Bucuanwan’s vocabu-
lary. Their country is called, in the Mahé- Bhérata,
Varma-désa, and placed in the east, seemingly, in op-
position to ‘Sarma-désa, or Ethiopia. The names of
Magadha, or Mabed, have been distorted, by Persian
and Arabian authors, into Mdber, or the passage:
because there is a passage through it to the adjacent
countries: for the same reason, they have altered the
name of Lahaur, ito Rahwer, the road ; because
there is really a road through it. They say also, that
the kings of AMabed were called Birpowar; which

F 4

72 ESSAY ON

may bea corruption from VxrisH-BALa, or Vrisa-
BALA, pronounced in general, BrisBata, and
Birswa'ta. ‘This was also one of the many names
of Barty, the founder of the Dynasties of the,
Andhras, and Andhra-bhrityas.

VU. From Gaudidesa, Gaudi-carsha, or Gaud-
warsha, its inhabitants are called Gadrosi, by ARR1AN :
their country Gandaris, by Diroporus the Sicilian,
and Goryandis, by Nonnus in his Diéonysicas*, and
this last comes nearest to Gauri-désa. This passage
is really curious and interesting. The poet is enu-
merating the various nations which joined Dertapes,
or DuryovD Hana, and Mornrueus, the Aahd-Raja,
in the great war. Then came, says he, those, who
live toward the east of India, im the populous
country of Hncolla, the abode of warlike Aurora,
and in the divine Goryandis, with its well cultivated
fields. After them came those who inhabit the
country of Oeta, the mother of long lived elephants,
ranging through its extensive forests. Encollais the
country of Utcala, now Orissa: formerly inhabited
by a warlike face, at last extirpated by the Carw'as,
or kings of Alagad’ha, according to the inscription
on the pillar at Buddaul. Urt-cara, or Up-cata,
implies the great, and famous country of CaLa: and,
in the spoken dialects, as well as in Latin, Upcara,
may be pronounced Uc-cala, as Ac-currere, for Ad-
currere. Nonnus gives to Gaura-désa the title of
divine, from its capital city, which was originally a
place of worship, in a forest, dedicated to the goddess
Gauri. From this circumstance, it is called Cory-—
gaza, by Protemy, from the Sanscrit Gauri-ghosha.

The country of Oita, or Oéta, is that of Oude, with
forests in the northern parts, still abounding with

* Nonni Dionys. lib. 26. v. 294.

ANUGANGAM, Xc. 73

elephants. The town is situated on the Gagra or
Sarjew, called after it, the river Oédanes, or Oude
river, by Srraso, who represents it-as a large river,
abounding with crocodiles and dolphins, and falling
into the Ganges. The town itself is called Athé-
nagara, or the town of Athe, by Proremy. The
geography of the countries to the north of the
Ganges, in that author, is distorted in a most sur-
prising manner; and every geographer since has been
equally unfortunate, with regard to that country, till
Mayor RENNELL’s time. All the ancient maps of
India, in THEeveNot’s collection of travels, and in
other authors, are equally bad: and Mr. Danvitre’s
description of this tract is by no means superior to
that of Protesy ; for he places Canouge below Alla-
habad. Fortunately, the names of these places in
Pro.emy, being very little disfigured, may be easily
brought again into their proper order and situation.
The town of dthé (or Oeta) is Oude ; Suan-nagura,
for Swan-nagara, is the Nagara or town of Sewan, in
Sircar Sarun: Cassida is Casi, or Benares, with the
mark of the genitive case, according to the idiom of
the western dialects. Thus Tavernisgr calls Sooty,
Soutiki ; and cther travellers use Dacca-ca for Dhaca.
S‘elampura, from the Sanscrit S\ailam-pura, or the
Stone-town or fort ; and in the spoken dialects, Pat-
tar-ghar, is near Hardwar. The kings of Gawda
were not known till the declension of the empire of
Magad’ha: until then they were vassals and tribu-~
taries. They extended, afterward, their dominions
as far as Allahabad, and assumed the titles of Afahd-
ras: and Bengal is called Maarazia, or country of
the Wahd Raja, by Nicoto pr Cont, who visited
it in the fifteenth century.

Tradition says, that Buppua-stnua, emperor of

\ ° - .
Gauda, was in possession of Benares, at the time of
the invasion of the Musulmans; and this is con-

74: ESSAY ON

firmed by an inscription found near Benares some
years ago, and inserted in the fifth volume of the
Asiatic Researches, but without a translation. It
was written in the year of Vicramaditya 1083, an-.
swering to the year 1026 of the Christian era. There
jt is said, that Sroi'rapa‘ca, and his brother Vesan-
TAPA‘LA, the sons of Buura‘ia, king of Gaura, had
erected a most sumptuous monument, still existing,
at a place called Sernath, near Benares. This monu-
ment of Bhaudd’hist kings is mentioned by TAveEr-
wrER, who mistook it for a sepulchral monument of
the kings of Boutan. S'rutrapa'ta is mentioned
under the name of Durrapa‘ta, in the list of the
kings of Bengal, in the Aytn’ AcBErRrI; by which it ap-
pears that they pretended to be descended from Bua-
GADATTA, the son of Naraca, king of Pragyotisha,
now Gauhati,beyoudGualpara, on the borders of Assam.

Naraca was put to death by Crisnna; but he
restored the kingdom to his son Bua’GADATTA.

VILL. The country of Magad’ha was thus called
from the numerous families descended from the sage
Maca, the offspring of the sun, and the grandson
of the venerable Twasura’a in the west. They
came into India in the time of Crisnwa, at the re-
quest of his son Sa’msa. They settled in the pro-
vince of Cicdta, now south Bahar. There are two
tribes of Brahmens in India: those of Canydculja,
or Canoge; and the Sacas.or S-acalas, thus called
because they came from Sdcam, or Saca-dwipa. They
are also called AZagas, from their sire Maca; and
from them are sprung all the Magas (or Mugs) in
the eastern parts of India, the Burman empire, Siam,
and China. I shall give an account of their origin
and emigration to India, when I come to treat of the
White Island. The other Bréhmens in India are
called Canydcubja, because that was their first settle-

ANUGANGAM, &c. ~ 75
ment on their arrival in Zrdia. It is universally ac-
knowledged, that the kings of Magad’ha gave every
possible encouragement to learning, which they en-
deavoured to diffuse through all classes, by encou-
raging learned men to write in the spoken dialect of
the country. Tradition says, that there were trea-
tises on almost every subject in the AZagad’hi, Bait,
or Pali dialect, which are supposed to be still extant.
I could not, however, procure any; and I believe
that they were doomed to oblivion by the Brahmeni-
cal class, who by no means encourage the composing
of books in the vulgar dialects. Should they exist,
however, they are to be found among the followers
of Jina: and Mason Mackenzie says, that these
sectaries are in possession of a great many treatises
on different subjects. That this is the case here, I
am credibly informed: but the Jaiwas are not of a
communicative disposition; and I hope that gentle-
man will find them more tractable in the Peninsula.
From that circumstance the dialect of Magad‘ha is
become the Sanscrit of Ceylon, Siam, and the Burman
empire, where it is called indifferently Batt or Aa-
gad’hi. Captain Manony writes that word JZage-
dee ; > and Mr. Bucnanay, in his learned and inte-
resting Essay on the Religion and Literature of the
Burmahs, calls it Magata. Both say that it is the
same with the Bédi, or Pé/i, which last denomination
prevails through the countries of dva, Stam, and
Ceylon, though hardly known in India, where they
call it Magadhi. According to Capt. J. Towers,
the word Pélii is written in Aracan, Palit, where the
letter T has a very peculiar sound. The country of
Pal, or of the children of Paxi, or Baxt, the same
with Mana- NANDA, according to the Puré mas, in-
cluded all the country to the south of the Ganges,
from the banks of the Soane to the western branch of
the Ganges.

The Bali characters, either. square. or round,. are

76 ESSAY ON

obviously derived from the Senscrit ; but is doubtful
whether, in their-present state, they ever prevaited,
or were used in any part of Jndia. Among the nu-
merous inscriptions in Bahar, only a few in that
character have been found. One was kindly sent to
me by Mr. Dick of the civil service. It was ob-
viously written in the Burmah character, but I could
not decypher it.

The Bards of Maga@ha were in great repute for-
merly, and they are mentioned under the name of
Magad’has. They reckon three sorts of Bards in
India: the Magad’has, or historians, thus called be-
cause those of Alagad’ha were the most esteemed ;
the Sutas, or Genealogists; and the Bandis, whose
duty was to salute, early in the morning, the king
or chief, in selected phrase, and well-chosen words,
wishing him long life and prosperity. ‘The usual
name in Jndia for a Bard is, Bhat, vulgarly pronounced
Bhat. Itis nota Sanscrit appellation, though asserted
to be derived from it. But the original name, as it was
pronounced several hundred years ago, was Bardai or
Bardéhi, though some think it a different name, ap-
plied to the same class of people.

_ Bhat, or Bhat, is derived from the Sanscrit Varta,
or Barta; and which is the same with the English
word and the German wort, a word. In the west,
Bhats were equally called Bardi in Latin, and Bhardh
in /Velsh. They were also called Vates, from far,
fatus sum in Latin, the same with Varta, the letter
R being dropped, as in the vulgar dialects of India.
They were also denominated Eubages, from the San-
scrit verb Vacha or Bacha, to speak, which becomes
Uvdcha and Ubacha, through various moods and
tenses. Vacha, or Bacha, becomes also Baga, or
Vaga; hence the Irish word Bogh, rendered Logos,
or speech, by Genera Vatiancey. ‘The word
Bardai, or Vardai, comes obyiously from the same

ANUGANGAM, &c. 77

root Varitd ; but my learned friends are of opinion,
that it comes from Bhdér-ddnam, which signifies to
burden with ; because they are burdened with the in-
ternal management of the royal household : and this
is the case, to this day, in Gurjardt ; being next to
the Pradhan, or prime Minister (called “Pardon by
Mr. Lorp), though independant of him.

The famous Chandra, or Chanda-Barddi was Bard
to Priruu-Ra’sa, King of Dilli, whose wars’ are the
subject of an Epic Poem, in the spoken dialect of
Canoge, and of some antiquity, since it is mentioned
in the "Ayin- Acberi. He was a favorite of Devi,
and was 77i-Cdla, knowing the past, present, and
future. The title of Bardd is translated musician by
Aput Fazit*. His functions, both in the field, and
at home, were exactly those of the ancient Bards in
the west: except, that, in Jndia, a real Bard sings
only, but does not play upon any instrument; this
being the office of musicians who do not sing.
He tock a most active part in the- bloody war
between Priruu-Ra‘sa, and JAya-Cuan’pra, king
of Canoge, and Maha Rdjd at that time, about a
beautiful damsel given to the latter, by Vi‘rapna-
DRA, king of Ceylon ; when Java-Ci/an’pra went
in person, at the head of a numerous army, to force
him to become tributary, and vassal of the empire ;
giving out, that he was only going to worship at the
place of Cérticéya-Swim, i in the fort of Sancara ghar
in Sinhala, or Ceylon: which place is resorted to,
equally by. orthodox Hindus, Bauddhists, and even
Musulmans. He was accompanied by Carna-Da-.
HARYA, king of Magadha. Priruv-Rasa waged a
long and bloody war against Surran Gorr; but
was defeated, and lost his life, in the year 1192.
Part of the poem, inwhich Prirne- RA‘JA’'S. wars with

* Ayin-Acberi. Vol. 2. p. 120.

738 ESSAY ON

JAYA-CHANDRA, and Suttan Gort, are described, is
in my possession.

The Bards of mortal men are not mentioned in
any Sanscrit book that I ever saw ; only those of
the Gods. The Sid’dhas, the Charan‘as, and the
Cinnaras are the three classes mentioned in the re-
tinue of the Gods, besides the Puréhita, or high
priest: the regent of the planet JupirEer enjoys that
high office, among the Gods; and S'ucra, who pre-
sides over VENUs, among the giants. The Sipp'yas
are priests, and persons-of uncommon learning and
deep knowledge, to whom nothing is impossible. The
Charanas are really the Bards of the Gods : and were
probably the same with theSaron class of Druids, called
also Surontdes. The Cinnaras are historians ; and tie
Chéranas are also acquainted with the genealogies
of the Gods, and of mankind. ‘The bards of
mortal men were also called Chdran‘as, according to
ABUL-FAZIL. Every great man in India, had Bhatsin
his retinue: the practice is still kept up in Gurjardt ;
where they are highly respected to this day, accord-
ing to my Pandit, who is a native of that country.
The Bhats or Bhactas, and Charanas, are mentioned’
by ABUL-FaAzIL, in his description of Subah Gujarat.
Their employment, says he, is to sing hymns, recite
genealogies, and warlike songs in battle, to animate
the troops. They acted also as heralds, as in the
case of Cuanpra-parpar. ABUL-FAzIL makes:
some difference between the Bhats, and Chdramnas :
but my Pandit says, that he never knew of any,
Charava being really the Sanscrit word for Bhat or
Bhacta. Cua’rawna, their ancestor, is said to have
sprung from the sweat of Manape’va, who in-
trusted him with the care of his Ox Nawpr, who
resides in the white Js/and. Butlam told, that, in
the Purawas, it is said, that they were born from the
churning of the right arm of Vena, father of Prirau
or Noau. Bards, in this part of India, being with-

ANUGANGAM, &c. 79

out employ, are become a most despicable race of
men. They are more respected in the Deccan, ac-
cording to Mason Macxernziz, who says, that they
are eenerally called Cavisars, from Cavyéswaras, or
the Lords of the Drama.

The Merchants of Afagad’ha formed not only a pe-
culiar class, but also a particular tribe, called the Ma-
gad ht tribe. It seems, that they were bold, enter-
prising, and at the same time cautious and circum-
spect: hence they are said to he merchants by the
father’s, and warriors by the mother’s side, according
to Mr. CoLesrooxe’s account of the Hindu Classes.
According to the Visunu-pura’n’a, the kings of
Magad ha originally resided-at a place called Giri-
Vraja, or Giri-Brgja. Vraja is synonymous with
Guosua, a herdsman, also the abode of a herdsman:
_and being situated in the hills, it was called Gir-
wrdja. From that circumstance, the kings of Afa-
gadha were, tilla very late period, called Vraja-balas, |
or rather, in the spoken dialects, Vraja-walds, or
Braja-walas, distorted afterwards by Aduszlinan
writers, into Birdaoval, according to Werperot, and
Birdawal according to ABuLYEDA ; who says, that it
was also the name of their metropolis. Giri-Br aja
was situated in the province of South Bakar, among
the mountains of Szvira, now called the Rda-gir, or
the Royal mountains: but more probably the real
name was Ra‘sacrina, from a place of that name,
implying the Royal abode. It is erroneously written,
in Mason ReENNELv’s atlas, Rargiara. ‘This is ac-
knowledged to have been one of their places of -
abode: for they say, that the royal throne was ‘at
a place called Asana, above Gaya, on the river Balga,
now fulgo, called Cacuthis, by ARRIAN, Asana signi-
fies a Royal seat, or throne: and ProLtemy mentions,
also, a place of that name, Asana mara, or the de-
stroyed thione. It is called Pracjyotisha in the
Puraivas, and its remains are near Go-hdéi, on the
frontiers of Assam.

20 FSSAY ON

There, among the Rdja-griha mountains, the un-
fortunate Jarasanpd’'HA hada palace, near some hot
springs, where he generally resided’: some remains of
it are to be seen to this day, and it is considered as a _
place of worship. The Pua is there performed, first
in honor of Crisuna, and the five Pdndavas : then —
with flowers in honor of old Sanp’Ha, and his son
SauaDEvaA. There, in memory of this unfortunate
hero, martial games are annually exhibited. They
are performed with clubs, whilst drums are constantly
beating. Iam informed, that there is a statue of
him, of an ordinary size, and seemingly of great an-
tiquity. Heis represented naked, with a club in his
hand. Formerly the same games were exhibited, in
his honor also, opposite to Patna, ina small island,
called, from that circumstance, Sam-Mallaca, and
Sambalaca by Protemy. ‘They were then celebrated
with great solemnity: people came from distant
parts; and, during the time they lasted, a fair was
held there. The games, the fair, and the place
where it was held, were famous all over Jndia, and
the name of Sam-Alallaca became synonymous with
Patali-putra. It is now called Summalpoor or Swm-
bulpoor, and, in Major Rennetv’s atlas, Sabelpoor.

From the manner in which Jara-SanpD’HA is res
presented there, and also from other circumstances,
he is fully entitled to the epithet of HercuLrs or
Hara-cura, given to him by Nowwnvus in his
Dionysiacs.

The ‘Sinhdlas, according to Cart. Manony, say
that Bupp’HA was born in the country of Mladda-
desa (Magadha-desa) in Dumba-deeva ( Jambu-dwipa, )
at a place called Cumbool-wat-pooree, (Camala-vati-
puri): and that he died at Cooseemapooree (Cusumd-
puri) inthe same country. Camaldvati-puri is the
same with Padmévati-puri, or the city of the Lotos ;
which we have seen is the same with Cusumapuri,
now understood of Patna. It is added, that he

ANUGANGAM, &c, 81

died at the court of king JZallalel, which should be
Maha-ballala, or Ma-vallala, a very common name for
kings. Ihaveshewn before, that Cusumapuri, Pad-
miavati, Camald-vati-purit ate epithets, and not proper
names of places ; and applicable, and generally ap-
plied, to the place of residence of great kings. Pa-
tali-putra is never mentioned in the Puranas, or
Sanscrit books of any antiquity ; and its grammati-
cal name is Patali-pura. As it was the metropolis
of the empire of A/agadha, in latter times, and. had
also the emphatical name of Padmd-vati-puri given
to it; every transaction mentioned, as having hap-
pened at Padmdavati, was of course understood of the
last known place under that name; and indeed, it
was soon forgotten, that there were once several
cities of that name in that country.

The Afagas in Bengal are mentioned by Piixy
under the name of J/acca-Calingas. Itappears from
the context, that the upper part of the Bay of Bengal
was divided into three parts, called in general
Calinga, or the sea-shore in Sanscrit, from its abound-
ing with creeks. West Calingu extended from the
river of Cuttacato the western mouth of the Ganges.
In an island of the Ganges, ample magnitudinis, of
very great magnitude, and of course the Delta, was
a single nation called A/odo-Galica and Modo-Galenca,
from the Sunscrit Madhya-Calinga, or middle Calinga :
then came the Alacco Calingas, or the Magas of
Chittigong, from Alaga-Calinga. The Magas or
Jugs maintained themselves as an independent tribe
in the Delta for along time ; and they were at last
expelled by the AZusudmans and the Rajas of Tipera,
about the beginning of the sixteenth century, as
mentioned by P, Monserrat*. Through the Bur-

* Gens vero Modo-Galica, ti qui vulgo dicuntur Mogi, quamvis
nostra memoria a Patanicis et Tybreris ultra Balsaris rivum pulsi
Arracani consistunt. P. MONSERRAT de legatione Mongolica.
Vol. the Ist. p. 49, a manuscript in my possession.

Vor, IX, G

1

82 ESSAY ON .
manempire, Arracan and in Chittigong the Priests
only are called Alagas according to Cou. Symes -
but in Chittigong and adjacent countries, the name
of Muga is aiso attributed to the whole tribe.

ESSAY, ITI,
Of the Kings of Magadha; their Chronology.

1. AS the kings of Afagad’ha were Lords Para-
mount, and Emperors of Jndia, for above two thou-
sand years; and their country the seat of learning,
civilization, and trade ; a Geographical and Histori-
cal deseription of this once famous country, cannot
but prove both curious and interesting. By Jda-
gad ha proper, South Bahar is understood : but, in a
more extensive sense, it includes all the Gangetic
provinces, and is by far the richest and best part of
the British empire in Asta. It is also famous. for
having given birth to Bupn’Ha, and being, as it
were, the cradle of the religion of one of the most
powerful and extensive sects in the world.

The Chronology of its kings is conneeted with the.
period of the Caliyuga ; which consists of 432,000
years. ‘This, the Hindus haye divided mto six un-
equal portions, or subordinate periods, called ‘Sacas,
because they derived their origin from six Sacas,. or
mighty and glorious monarchs: three of whom have
already made their appearance ; and three more are
expected. This system of the six SSacas, with their
periods, is thus explained in the Jyotirvrdabharéna,
an astronomical treatise. Whatever man _ kills.
550,000,000 ‘Sacas (a mighty tribe of hereties), be-
comes a‘Saca ; and whoever kills this Saea only, be-
comes a ‘Saca also, | nel

The first was Yun’wisu tina, born on the Saba-

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. F

Sringa, or mountain with an hundred peaks, at the
extremities of the world ; beyond which no body can
go; his period lasted 3044 years. Then came the
Era of Vicrama’pitya, the second ‘Saca, which
lasted only 185 years. He was born at Ta@mra-vati-
nagari, or the town abounding with copper. It 1s
called Trambd, or Tamba-vati, in the spoken dialects.
It no longer exists, having been overwhelmed with a
deluge of sand. It was near Cambdt, thus called from
a place of worship, denominated Sthamba-tirtha, or
with a Sthamba or pillar, called, im the spoken dia-
lects, Camba. From Sthamba, the Greeks made
Asta: and from Tamra, (Tramba,) they made Tra-
pera, Campra, and Copra, Copper: and, as these two
places are contiguous, they said Asta-Trapera, Asta-
Capra, Campra, &c. Sometimes they represented
them as two distinct cities.

The third 'Saca was Sartvanawa, born at Sdleya-
Dhara in the Deccan; and his period will last
18,000 years. The fourth ‘Saca will be Visaya’Bur
Nawpawna, who will be born at Su-Chitra-cit‘a: his
period will last 10,000 years. Then, at Rohita (or
Rotas,) will be born Nacarsuna; whose period.
will last 400,000 years. ‘Then will re-appear the an-
tediluvian Bair, whois to be born at Bhrizu-gosha,
Barigaza, or Bareach: his period will last only 821
years ; when a general renovation of the world will
take place.

The Hindus have thought proper to connect their
chronology with an astronomical period of a most
strange nature. Itis that of the seven Rishis, or
seven stars of the wain, which are supposed to go
through the Zodiac, in a retrograed motion in the
space of 2700 years. They are at present in the Lunar
mansion of ‘Swaticd, according to the most famous
astrologers of Benares, who cautioned me against the
erroneous opinion of other astronomers, in various parts
of India, who insist that they are now in Anurddhd.

G Q .

84 ESSAY ON

-E requested an able astronomer to give meé, im
writing, an account of this wonderful revolution.
This period, says he, is not obvious to the sight ;
but it does, however, really exist, being mentioned im
old Sastras, and by holy MJunis; and certainly the
seven Rishis preside in every Lunar mansion, for a
hundred years ; and their presence, or rather influ-
ence, over it, is sufficiently obvious: and, according
to Sa‘cALYA MUNI, their yearly motion is of eight
liptas, or minutes.

In the Vardhi-sanhita, the Vishnu-Purdna, and also
in the Bhdgavata, I believe, it is declared, that, at
the birth of Parrcsnita, the seven Rishis had been.
in Magha for four years, or 4905 years ago; and they
were in Purvashara in the time of Nanpa.

But in the Brahma-Sidd’hanta, it is declared, that
they were then in ‘Sravan‘a, which makes a difference
of fifteen Lunar mansions, or 1500 years: so that,
according to that author, the Cali-yugd began 2405
years ago, or 1600 years B. C. supposing the seven
Rishis to be now in ‘Swatied, in which they are to re-
main ten years more; but, if they are in Anuradhd,
the Cal-yugd began 1400 years B.C. The author
of the Garga-Sanhita, according to Buarrorpa'La
in his commentary, seems to be of that opinion, when
he says, that the seven Iishis were in Adaghd, in the
twilight between the Dwdpar and the Catiyuga. In
the Lalloctad’hi-vridd’hi, it is declared, that they were
then in Abhijit, or in the first of ‘Sravana.

The names of the seven Rishis, shining in the
wain, are Pulaha, or the star«*; Cratu,8; Atri,7 ;
Pulastya,*; Angiras,«; Vasishtha,€; and, close to
itis a small star, representing drundati his wife ;
the seventh is Marichi, ors. My friends insist that
their motion is perceptible ; and they shewed them
plainly tome in Swdticd. Of this they wanted to
convince me, by drawing a line, from that mansion

TIE KINGS OF MAGADHIA. 85

through the stars'¢ and of the great bear. When
they arein A/agha then the line passes through this
asterism and the stars? and «. By these means they
could see them inevery part of the starry heavens.
When Nanpa was born, they were then in Pawrvas-
hadha, ov about 400 years B.C. and he died 327
before the Christian Era. Astrologers watch care-
fully their motion, because their influence is variously
modified through every mansion : and whatever new
married couple see them in a fortunate moment, they
are sure to live happy together for a hundred years.
Hence, says the ingenious Mr. Baitry, we may safely
conclude, that no body ever saw them in that propi-
tious moment.

The period of the seven Rishis begins to be neglected
in the more northern parts of Jidia, because they are
not always to be seen at the lucky moment ; and, in
their stead, they use Daruva, or the polar star :
This star is often mentioned in the sacred books of
the Hindus, and it is connected with their mythe-
logy; but has not long been near enough to the Pok,
to be thus denominated after it: and fora long
series of years, before, there was no Duruva or im-
moveable star. Be this as it may, Daruva, with
his relations, shines in the lesser bear. In the Vantra-
ratna-cdlyam, this ¢onstellation is called the fish of
Dirvuva-BRAHMA’XA’D HICA’RA. Itconsists of thir-
teen stars: Duruva is in the mouth, and Urrana-
pa’DA his father in the tail. The mouth is turned
towards Bharani, and its revolution is the same. .

The wives of the seven Rishis are the PLEIADES, at
least six of them ; for the Hindus do not know that
they were seven formerly. Acwr fell in love with
them ; but his wife, dreading the resentment of the
holy éshis, assumed their shapes and countenances,
and thus personitying them, satisfied her husband’s.
lust. She was however unsuccessful with regard to

6 3

86 ESSAY ON

Arunp H#ATrY, the consort of VAs1s-Ta, on account
of her extraordinary holiness and*sanctity. Soon
after, some scandalous reports prevailed, and the six
other Rishis dismissed their consorts, and drove them
out of their places, within the Arce circle. They
Were intrused with the education of young Ca‘rri-

cr’'ya, who placed them in the Zodiac, after expelling
Abhijit.

The Preraves, according to Mythologists in’ the
west, were intrusted likewise with the education of
Bacenvs, (whe, according to Macronivs, was the
same with Ma ns, or Ca’atice yA); and, on that ac-
count, he tra anslated them inte heaven; According
to those writers, they suffered a real bodily pollution ; :
and the seventh, says Hycinus, left her sisters, and
fled to the region of the heavens withm the Arctic

circle* ; and this is the ARUN DHATY of the Hindus.

I have not been able to ascertain whbue daughters
the consorts of the seven Rishis were: neither did
the western mythologists agree about it; though
they supposed, in general, “that they ' weré the
daughters of Arras: but, as they never existed, it is
a matter of little consequence. Thus we see, ‘that,
according to some, YUDHISHTI‘R, or ‘JupHISHTER,
lived $100 B. C. and began his reign immediately
after the Pralaya, or flood ; like XisuTurvs, or Si-
stsrurus; whilst, according to others, he lived
between the years 1500 and 1370 B. C. like Szsos-
TRIS.

The beginning of the Cadli-yuga, copsidered as an
astronomical period, is fixed and unvariable; 3044
years before VicramapiTyA, or 3100 B. C. But the
beginning of the same, considered either as a civil,
or historical period, is by no means agreed upon.

* Hygin, Poetic, Astronom, p. 471.

THE KINGS OF MAGADHBA. 87

In the Vishnu, Braéhmdnda, and Vayu Puranas, it
is deciared, that from the beginning of the Cali-yuga,
to Maua-Nawnpa’s accession to the throne there
were exactly 1015 years. This emperor reigned 28
years; his sons 12; im all 40; when CHANDRAGUPTA
ascended the throne, $15 years B.C. The Cati-yuga
then began 1370 B. C. or 1314 before Vicra-
mA‘piTya: and this is confirmed by an observation
of the place of the Solstices, made in the time of
Para’saRa, and which, according to Mr. Davis,
happened 1391 years B.C. or nearly so. Para>
sa’rA, the father of Vy’asa, died a little before the
beginning of the Cali-yuga. It is remarkable that
the first observations of the Colwres, in the west,
were made 1353 years before Cunrist, about the same
time nearly, according to Mr. BAariiy.

In the same Purdénas, it is also declared, that, from
the Dynasty of the Nawnpas, to king Puutaa‘n,
there would elapse 836 years. ‘Pouroma’, or Lomapr,
called Poutomren, Outomren, and OULOMIENT®, in
the annals of China, died in the year 648, according
‘to De Gotenes. This passage from the Brahmén‘da
is obscure, being in a prophetical style: the words
are: ‘ From the birth of Paricsuira to Nanpa
(I suppose his accession to the throne) there will be
1015 years: from Nanpa to.Putoma’ and the An-
DHRAS, 836 years.’ Nawpa died 327 years B. C: and
Poutoma in the year 648, according fo the Annals of
China: the difference is 975 years, instead of 836.

If we suppose that the 836 years are to be reck-
oned, from the end of the Dynasty of Nawoa, in-
stead of the ‘death of their primogenitor, the num-
bers will agree perfectly well. This Dynasty lasted,
either 37, or 139 years, according to the Puranas ;
which, added to 836, give exactly 975, the number
of years required.

G4

83 ESSAY ON

The accuracy of the annals of China, and the care-
lessness of the Hindu chronologers, are equally
known; and, of course, the former must be our
guide,

According to the Baupp’uists, the ancient Bup-
puA, Or Duarma-Ra‘sa, probably the same with
Yupuisut1Ra, manifested himself, or began to reign,
1367 years B. C. as mentioned in the Ayin-acheri.
It will appear hereafter, that the Duarma-Ra‘sa,
the subordinate Menu of his Calpa, was really the
Minos of the Greeks: that Crisuna, or Ra’DHA*>
MOHANA, was the same with RHADAMANTHUS, OF
RapHAMANES. M1wnos could not have lived earlier
than 130, or 140 years, before the Trojan war, which
happened 1184 B. C. and the time of his death hap-
pened about 1320 years before the same Lra. If the
taking of Troy happened 1200 B. C. as some suppose,
then Minos died about the year 1350: and admit
ting, that the first year of the Cal-yuga was the 1370
year B. C. Yuputsutr‘ra, of course, died in the 1332;
according to some who assert, that he died 38 years
after the beginning of the Cal-yuga. Others say,
that he lived 28, and even 8 years only, after the —
beginning of that period. The Duarma-Ra‘sa of ©
the Bauddhists lived 120, and Minos 120 also, or 125
years, according to others, Nonnus, in his Diony-
siacs, shews that Jana’-SANDHA, literally old Sannua,
Mahda-rdja, of India, and whom he well describes,
when he says, that Morruevs, the Emperor of Jndia,
who was called SanprEs, was contemporary with
Minos; and his Baccuus is the same with BHAGAVA'N,
in the character of Crisuna, Thus we have two Eras
of the same event, (an inferior, and subordinate Ca-
taclysm, or desolation,) one 1578, and the other 1370
years B.C. This desolation of the world was the
deluge of Devcation, as I have shewn in my Essay
on mount Caucasus: and they made use of the same

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 89

computation nearly with the Paurdnics, for they
say, that it happened 1529 years B. C. according to
Euszgzius and the Parian Chronicle, and other au-
thors: whilst the ablest Chronologers have shewn,
that it could not have happened earlier than the year
1380 B.C. The Greeks had also four ages, like the
Hindus; and the last, or Lron age, answering to the
Cali-yuga, began some time before the Trojan war,
and a little after the expedition of the Argonauts and
Deucatron. HeEsiop laments very much, that he
was born during that age of corruption and wretch-
edness.. Thus the Greeks and the Paurdanics them-
selves, in their more sober moments, agree perfectly
about the beginning of the Cali-yuga, or Iron age.

According to the Institutes of Mrnu, we may
place the beginning of the Cal-yuga about the year
1370, betore Curist. For we read there, that men
in the golden age lived 400 years; 300 in the next,
or silver age: 200 in the brass one; and 100 in the
Cal-yuga. These four ages are obviously to be
_ reckoned from the flood; after which men, as far
down as Exser, lived about 400 years: and then,
regularly decreasing, till the beginning of the Zrox
age, or 1370 B.C. when we find that Yup’utsururra,
Crisuna, Minos, and Juvirer lived about 100
years.

The followers of Ji place the beginning of the
Cali-yuga in the year 1078 B.C. as we shall see here-
after. Their chronological system has of course, |
much affinity with that of Sry Isaac Newton.
Every Pandit will boast, that they have uninter-
rupted lists of kings, from the beginning of the
Cali-yuga, to the Era of Vicrama‘pitya; and even
lower down, for the space of 3044 years: but what
Was my astonishment, to find in perusing the Purd-
mas, that this was by no means the case, as it ap-+
pears from the accompanying table, in which, one |

90 ESSAY ON

list gives only 1718 years, and the other no more
than 1672, from the first year of the Cali-yuga to the
Era of Vicramapitrya. In the third column,
which I have made out of the shortest numbers in
both lists, the sum total amounts only to 1409 years;
from which we must deduct 36 years, for the sup-
posed reign of Pusupamrrra, (for he did not ascend
the throne himself, after having murdered his own
sovereion; but resigned it to his son;) and there re-
main 1373 years: and the highest numbers in both
lists give 1855. The first list is from the Brahmanda,
and the second from the Vayu-purdva. In other
Purdéias, the number of years, during which each
prince reigned, is omitted; but the sum total of the
reigns of each dynasty is recorded. From the first
year of the Cali-yuga, to the death of Puransaya,
they reckon 1000 years, for 22 reigns, or perhaps
generations; which is inadmissible. From the first
year of the Cali-yuga to the birth of Bupp’ua they
reckon also 1002 years, including 23 generations:
now Budd’ha was born 618 B.C. This places the
first year of the Cali-yuga 1564 before the Era of |
VICRAMA’DITYA. pial

Irom the first year of the Cali-yuga to the death
of Puransaya, they reckon 1000 years, as we have
seen before: add to this, ,

From the Bua’cavat, From the Visunu Purana,

for the Sunacas, - 138 - - 128
the Sisunacas, - 360 ¢ J 86a.)
MAHA-NANDA, &c. - - - - -
to CHAND/RAGUPTA’s reign,100 - = 100
1598 1590
before Curisz, : - 315 NOLS
1913 ~ 1905
Subtract, - - 56 - 56

Before Vicr’amMa DITYA, 1857 1849

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 91

Tt appears, that the Sun acasand Si-sunacas were
two branches of the same family: the first sat on
the throne 128 years; but the sum of the reigns, in
both ‘dynasties, ’ amounted to 362. MAWA-NANDA
and the Suma’‘tya‘ricas reigned only 40 years, in-
stead of 100: and the whole may stand thus cor-
rected, from the first year of the Cali-yuga, down to
1000>the accession of CuanpRracupta, or 315

362

40 pyears B.C. “There are 52 generations and
1402 J reigns mixed together, to fill up that space, or
about 31 years for one reign; which calculation is
too large. These different. computations of the erg
of the Cali-yuga from the Purdnas, with the several
corrections which they are susceptible of, I thought
of the greatest importance to lay before the learned.
In the two accompanying lists, the numbers, parti-
cularly in the beginning, are obviously too large,
either for generations or reigns, and of course they
must be rejected. It is remarkable, that these num-
bers are pretty regularly decreasing, from 98 for a
reign, in the begianing down to Vicrama‘prrya, to
three or four years. This regular decrease Is equally
inadmissible.

The first king of Magad’a was JARA-SAND HA;
for that country began to be known under that
name in his time, being before denominated Cicata.
But Jarna-Sanp’ua was not the first kine of Cicata ;
his ancestors had ruled over it for many generations,
at least from the time of Vrinapratua, or VRrinat-
Ratna; from whom the whole dynasty, as far down
as Puransaya, or RrpunsAya, is denominated the
dynasty of the Bdarhadrathas, in a derivative form.
They were descended from Puru, the fifth son of
Yayatr, the son of Nauusua. We are told in
general, that Yayvatr divided his empire, the whole
world, amongst his five sons. To Pyru, the youngest

92 ESSAY ON

and his favourite, he gave India, or the middle
part; to the others, who had incurred his dis-
pleasure, he allotted inferior kingdoms. To,Y anu, the
ancestor of Crisuna, he gave the south, by which
they understand the Deccan or Peninsula. The north
to Anu, the east to Drunya, and the west to
Turvasu: but this division does not agree with
what we read in the Harivansa. Besides, as the
Brahmens acknowledge that they are not natives of
India, but came from the N.W. and that Canove
was their first settlement; their ancestors, at that
early period, surely could not yet have conquered
India, or even made any settlement in it. The off-
spring of Turvasv, so far from settling in the west,
is declared, in the Harivansa, to have settied in the
southern parts of Jndia; and in the tenth generation,
including their sire, four brothers divided the Penin-
sula among themselves. Their names were Panpya,
Cr‘rata, Cora, and Cuo'La; and this division ob-
tains even to this day. Co’ra lived in the northern
parts of the Peninsula, and his descendants are called
Covers and Corters to this day; and they conceive
themselves, with much probability, to be the abori-
gines of India, to which they give the naine of Coller
or Colara. Hence we read in Prurarcnu, that the
Ganges was called formerly the Calaurian river; and
the same author mentions a Calaurian, or Hindu, and
a handsome damsel, called DtopetHusa, who was
also a Calaurian, or native of Jndia, or country bor-
dering upon the Calaurian river™. B

)

In the same manner, we find the posterity of Anu
dividing the eastern parts of Jndia, among them-
selves, under the names of dAnga, Banga, Calinga,
Pundhra (now Tamlook) and Undhra (or Orissa) ; and
we are always reminded, that Crisuna and the Pa’y-
DAVAS came from the west, and their first settle-

* Plutarch. de fluminibus,

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 03
ments were on the banks of the Hydaspes or Vitastd,
the country bordering Ap which is called, by Pro-
LEMY, the country of the Panpovr or Panpavas.
Curisuna had a small estate near Dwaraca, in Gur-
jardt, where he generally lived.

The first kings of the Dynasty of the Barhadrat’has
being omitted in the table, are given here from the
Harivansa. The famous Uparrcuara was the sixth
in lineal descent from Curvu ; and his son was

VrinADRATH A

CusH AGRA

- VrisHaBHa

PusuPava’N

SATYASAHITA

Ursa

SAMBHAVA

. JARA-SAND HA.

Jana-Sann ua, literally old Sanp’HA or SAND HAs,
was the lord paramount of India or Maha Raa, and
in the spoken dialects Afa-Raj. This word was pro-
nounced Morieis by the Greeks ; for Husycutus says,
that Morieis signifies king in India, and in another
place, that mai in the language of that country, signi-
fied great. Nownnus, in his Dionysiacs*, calls the
lord paramount of Jndia, Aforrheus, and says that
his name was Sanves, with the title of Hercunes.
Old Sanp’HA is considered as a hero to this day in
India, and pilgrimages, I am told, are yearly per-
formed to the place of his abode, to the east of Gaya,
in south Bahar. It is called Rasa-Griva, or the
royal mansion, in the low hills of Raja-giri, or the
royal mountains; though their name I suspect to be
derived from Rasa-Grina, The Dionysiacs of Non-
nus are really the history of the Alaha Bharata, or
great war, as we shall see hereafter. A certain Dro-
Nysius wrote also a history of the Mahabharata in

* Nonn, Dionys. lib. 34, v. 197. .

94 Ar ESSAY ON

Greek, which. is lost: but from the few fragments
remaining, it appears that it was neatly the same
with that of Nonnus, and he intitled his work Bas-
sarica. These two poets had no communication
with India; and they compiled’ their respective
works from the records and legendary tales of their
own countries. Nonnus was an Mgyptian, and a
Christian. 'The Dionysiacs supply deficiencies’ in the
Maha-Bhérata in Sanscrit ; such as some’ emigra=
tions from India, which it is highly probable took
place in consequence of this bloody war.

Jara-Sanp Ha erected a Jaya-sthamba or pillar of
victory at Benares. According to tradition, it was
destroyed by the Musulmans, and the capital, the
only remains of it, has been shewn to me. It stood
near the Ganges, at the Gaut, or landing-place of
Jara-Sanp'Ha, as it is called to this day. These
pillars are pretty numerous along the banks of the:
Ganges, and most of them are of very great anti-
quity. They were known to the Greeks, who called
them the pillars of Bacchus.

The accession of Cuan’pra-cuPpta to the throne,
and more particularly the famous expiation of Cua-
NACYA, after the massacre of the Sumdlyas, is a fa-
mous era in the Chronology of the Hindus; and
both may be easily ascertained from the Puranas, and
also from the historians of ALExaANDER. In the year
328 B.C. that conqueror defeated Porus; and as he
advanced*, the son of the brother of that prince, a

etty king in the eastern parts of the Panjab, fled at
a approach, and went to the king of the Gangarida, —
who was at that time king Nanna of the Puranas.
In the M/udra-rachasa, a dramatic poem, and by no
means a rare book, notice is taken of this circum-
.stance. There was, says the author, a petty king of
errr”

* Diodor. Sic. lib. XVII, c. 91, Arrian also, &c.

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 95

Vicatpalli, beyond the Vindhyan mountains, called
Chandra-dasa, who, having been deprived of his king-
dom by the Yavawnas, or Greeks, left his native
country, and assuming the garb of a penitent, with
the name of SuvipHa, came to the metropolis of the
emperor Nanpa, who had been dangerously ill for
some time, He seemingly recovered; but his mind
and. intellects were strangely affected. It was sup-
posed that he was really dead, but that his body was
re-animated by the soul of some enchanter, who had
Jeft his own body in the charge of a trusty friend.
Search was made immediately, and they found the
body of the unfortunate dethroned king, lying as if
dead, and watched by two disciples, on the banks of
the Ganges. They concluded that he was the en-
chanter, burned his body, and flung his two guar-
dians into the Ganges. Perhaps the unfortunate
man was sick, and in a state of lethargy, or other-
wise intoxicated. Then the prince’s minister assassi-
nated the old king soon after, and placed one of. his
sons upon the throne, but retained the whole power
in his own hands. This, however, did not last long;
for the young king, disliking his own situation, and
having been informed that the minister was the mur-
derer of his royal father, had him apprehended, and
put to a most cruel death. After this, the young
king shared the imperial power with seven of his
brothers; but Cuanpracupta was excluded, being
born of a base woman. They agreed, however, to
give him a-handsome allowance, which he refused
with indignation; and from that moment his eight
brothers resolved upon his destruction. Cuanpra-
Gupta fled to distant countries; but was at last
seemingly reconciled to them, and lived in the me-
tropolis: at least it appears that he did so; for he is
represented as being in, or near, the imperial palace,
at the time of the revolution, which took place
twelve years after, Poxus’s relation made his escape

96 ESSAY ON

to Palibothra, in the year 328, B.C. arid in the lat-
ter end of it. Nanna was then assassinated in that
year; and in the following, or 327, B.C. Atexan-
pER encamped on the banks of the Hyphasis. It was
then that Coanpracurta visited’ that conquerors
camp; and, by his loquacity and freedom of speech,
so much offended him, that he would’ have put
Cuanpracupra to death, if he had not made a pre-
cipitate retreat, according to Justin*. ‘The eight
brothers ruled conjointly twelve years, or till 315
years B.C. when CuanpraGuPta was raised to the
throne, by the intrigues of a wicked and revengeful
priest called Cua’nacya. It was CHanpracurtTa
and Cua’nacya, who put the imperial family to
death; and it was CuanpraGuptfa who was said to
be the spurious offspring of a barber, because his
_ mother, who was certainly of a low tribe, was called
Moura, and her son of course Maurya, in a deri-
vative from ; which last signifies also the offspring
of a barber: and it seems that CuanpracupTa
went by that name, particularly in the west; for
he is known to Arabian writers by the name of
Mor, according to the Nubian geographer, who
says that he was defeated and killed by Arrxan-
DER; for these authors supposed that this conqueror
crossed the Ganges: and it is also the opmion of
some ancient historians in the west.

IntheCumdricd-c handa, itis said,that tt wasthe wick=
ed Cua’nacya who caused the eight royal brothers to
be murdered ; and it is added, that Cua’nacy«, after
his paroxism of reyengeful rage was over, was exceed-
ingly troubled m his mind, and so much stung with
remorse for his crime, and the effusion of human blood,
which took place in consequence of it, that he withdrew
to the Sucla-Tirtha, a famous place of worship near
LO ALLO LEAL LL AL ALLIED,

is Lib. xv. ci 4 , ?

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 97

the sea on the bank of the Narmada, and seven
coss to the west of Baroche, to get himself purified,
There, having gone through a most severe course of
religious austerities and expiatory ceremonies, he
was directed to sail upon the river in a boat with
white sails, which, if they turned black, would be to
him a sure sign of the remission of his sins; the
blackness of which would attach itself to the sails.
It happened so, and he joyfully sent the boat adrift,
with his sins, into the sea. .

This ceremony, or another very similar to it, (for
the expense of a boat would be too great), is per-
formed to this day at the Sucla-Tirtha ; but, instead
of a boat, they use a common earthen pot, in which
they light a lamp, and send it adrift with the accu-
mulated load of their sins. ;

In the 63d section of the Agni-purdia, this expia-
tion is represented in a different manner. One day,
says the author, as the gods, with holy men, were
assembled in the presence of Inpra, the sovereign
lord of heaven, and as they were conversing on va-
rious subjects, some took notice of the abominable .
conduct of Cua’nacya, of the atrocity and heinous-
ness of his crimes. Great was the concern and
affliction of the celestial court on the occasion ; and
the heavenly monarc!: observed, that it was hardly
possible that they should ever be expiated.

One of the assembly took the liberty to ask him,
as it was still possible, what mode of expiation was
requisite in the present case? and Inpra answered,
the Carsua’eni. There was present a crow, who,
from her friendly disposition, was surnamed Mirra-
-Ca’ca: she flew immediately to Cua’nacya, and
imparted the welcome news to him. He had applied
in vain to the most learned divines; but they uni-

formly answered him, that his crime was of such a
Vor1X. H

98 ESSAY ON

nature, that no mode of expiation for it could be
found in the ritual. Cua’nacya immediately per-
formed the CarsHa’Gni, and went to heaven. But
the friendly crow was punished for her indiscretion :
she was thenceforth, with all her tribe, forbidden to
ascend to heaven ; and they were doomed on earth
to live upon carrion.

The Carsua’Gnr consists in covering the whole
body with a thick coat of cow-dung, which, when
dry, is set on fire. This mode of expiation, in des-
perate cases, was unknown before; but was occasion-
ally performed afterwards, and particularly by the
famous Sancanas’cua’rya. It seems that CHan-
DRAGUPTA, after he was firmly seated on the impe-
rial throne, accompanied Cua’wacya to the Sucla-
tirtha, in order to get himself purified also.

This happened, according to the Cumdricd-chanda,
after 300 and 10 and 3000 years of the Cali-yuga
were elapsed, which would place this event 210 years
after Curist. The fondness of the Hindus fer quaint
and obscure expressions, is the cause of many mis-
takes. But the ruling epocha of this paragraph is
the following: ‘‘ After three thousand and one hun- ©
dred years of the Cali-yuga are elapsed (or in 3101)
will appear king Saca (or Sa’Liva/HANA) to re-
move wretchedness from the - orld. The first year
of Curist answers to 3101 of the Cali-yuga, and we
may thus correct the above passage: “ Of the Cal-
yuga, 3100 save 300 and 10 years being elapsed (or
2790), then will Cua’nacya go to the ‘Sucla-
tirt ha,”

This is also confirmed in the 63d and last section
of the Agni-purdna, in which the expiation of Cua-
NACYA is placed 312 years before the first year of the
reign of Saca or Sarivauana, but not of his.era.
This places this famous expiation 310, or 812 years

THE KINGS OF MAGADIIAs 99

before Curtsy, cither three or five years after the
massacre of the imperial family.

My Pandit, who is a native of that country, in-
forms me, that Cua’wacya’s crimes, repentance, and
atenement, are the subject of many pretty legendary
tales, in verse, current in the country ; part of some
he repeated to me.

Soon after, Coanpracupta made himself master
of the greatest part of India, and drove the Greeks
out of the Panjab. Tradition says, that he built a
city m the Deccan, which he called after his own
name. It was lately found by the industrious and
active Masor Mackenzir, who says that it was
situated a little below ‘Svi-Sdlam, or Purwutum, on
the bank of the Crishna ; but nothing of it remains,
except the ruins. This accounts for the inhabitants
of the Deccan being so well acquainted with the his-
tory of Cuanpracupra. The authors of the Afu-
dra-Racshasa, and its commentary, were natives of
that country.

in the mean time, Sereucus, ili brooking the loss
of his possessions in Jndia, resolved to wage war, in
order to recover them, and accordingly entered Jndia
at the head of an army; but finding Cuanpracup-
TA ready to receive him, and being at the same time
uneasy at the increasing power of AnTrGonvus and
his son, he made peace with the emperor of India,
relinquished his conquests, and renounced every
claim to them. CHanpracupra made him a pre-
sent of 50 elephants; and, in order to cement their
friendship more strongly, an alliance by marriage
took place between them, according to Srrazo, who
does not say in what manner it was effected. It is
not likely, however, that Sereucus should marry an
Indian princess; besides, CHANDRAGUPTA, who was

H 2

100 ESSAY ON

very young when he visited ALEXANDERS camp,
could have no marriageable daughter at that time.
It is more probable, that Sereucus gave him his na-
tural daughter, born in Persia. From that time, 1
suppose, Cuanpracurta had constantly a large
body of Grecian troops in his service, as mentioned
in the Mudra-Rdcshasa.

It appears, that this affinity between SeLeucrs
and Cuanpracupta took place in the year 302 B.C.
at least the treaty of peace was concluded in that
year. CHanpracupta reigned four-and-twenty
years; and of course died 292 years before our era.

III. After the decline, and. ultimately the fall of
the imperial house of Nanna, and of the Bali-putras,
the most illustrious family that sat afterwards upon
the imperial throne of Indéa, was that of the An-_
pruas. From the Bdéli-putras, the inhabitants of
the Gangetic provinces were denominated Pali-both-
ras and Pdli-potras:; in the same manner they were
called, after the Anp’HRas, the Anp’HRA Indians ;
these are the Anpre-Inp1, which lived along the
banks of the Ganges, according to the Peutingerian
tables. .

The Anp’rua dynasty lasted 456 years: in the
Viyu-purdna, it is said 418; but some copies have
458. Be this as it may, the general opinion is, that
it lasted 456 or 458 years. These deducted from
648, there remains 192, or 190, for the year of the
inauguration of its first king, called Ba’tin, Batiut-
Ta or Ba‘LEYA, CsHESHMACA, SIND HUCA, SIPRACA,
Supraca, and Suraca. In the Cumdrica-charda,
it is declared, that after 3300 years, save 10, of the
Cali-yuga were elapsed, a great king, called Svu-
pRACA, would reign in Charchita: the name of his~
metropolis is, however, omitted im many copies,

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. ; 101

Sounpraca, Sipraca, or Sryp’nuca began then his
reign in the year 191 of the Christian era.

From CHANDRAGUPTA’S accession to the throne,
. 815 B.C. to the year 190 A. C. there are 505 years;
but during this period the chronological particulars,
from the Purdnas, are not to be easily reconciled
with the general outlines which I have traced out.
According to the Purdnas, there were ten Maurya
kings, who ruled 189 years: these were succeeded
by the Sunga dynasty, consisting of ten kings also,
and VickaAMAMITRA was the eighth of that dy-
nasty.

The next was that of the Canwas, consisting of
four kings; then ‘Supraca succeeded to the throne.
in the year 191. ‘Thus we have six reigns, the last
of the Sunga dynasty, and the four Canwas only, to
fill up a space-of 246 years; which is impossible.

These Canwas, are said to have reigned 345
years ; which is still more extravagant. It is ob-
vious, that there is some gross error in the context ;
to rectify which, in a satisfactory manner, can hardly |
be expected. It is my humble opinion, that a dy-
nasty is omitted here; and that dynasty is that of
the seven Ann’nras, mentioned in the Brahmdnda,
Vayu, Bhagavcata, and Vishnu Purdi‘as; but out of
its place. In some Puranas, the AND’'ura dynasty
is made to consist of seven, and in others .of nine,
kings. In one it is said, that they reigned 300
years; in another only 250 years.

- The Annd’HRAs made a most conspicuous figure on

the banks of the Ganges for above 800 years, under

three distinct dynasties. The first was called simply

the Anp'nrRa dynasty; and its kings were considered

as pure and genuine Anp’HRAs. ‘The second dynasty

is that of the AnD’ura-Ja‘TIcas, or of the family
H 3

102 ESSAY ON

or tribe of the Anp'nras, but a spurious branch of
it. The third is that of the AND’ HRA-BHRITYAS, OF
servants of the AND’HRa sovereigns; who, after the
death of Putoma, seized upon the kingdom, and
divided it among themselves. Srpraca, or Suracca,
was the first of the AND’HRAJ ATICAS; and the vene-
rable Putoma was the last. In the Puranas no
place is assigned, in the chronological lists of the
kings of Magad’ha, to the first dynasty of the ge-
nuine AnpD’HRAS: exeept in one, in which they are
placed immediately after Putoma’, who, it is well.
known, was succeeded by the servants of the An-
D’HRAS, not by the seven genuine AnpD’HRAS. In
the Bhdgavata, we read only, that the seven An-
pHRAS Would reign over the land. In the Veshnu-
purava they are not mentioned, unless they be the
same with the Cos'atas or Causaras. In the Brah-
sndnda, they are introduced between Putoma’ and
the AND HRA-BHRITYAS in an obscure manner; and
there the nine Anp'uraAs with the ANDHRA-Ja‘TICAS
are joined together in an immediate order of succes-
sion; and it is added, that there were thirty-six of
them, nine genuine Anp’aRas, and twenty-seven
belonging to a spurious branch of the same family ;
but it is not said which of them ruled first. Now,
it is universally acknowledged, that the Anp’HRA-
BpHRiryas succeeded Putoma’; and the fact being
testified by the annals of China, no doubt can re-
main concerning this circumstance; and the seven
er nine genuine Awp’nRas must of course be ©
placed before the spurious branch, and immediately
after the Canwa dynasty. Thus we shall have either
13 or 15 kings, to fill up a space of 246 years. The
occasion of this omission is, I'believe, that the first
kings of the AnD'urs and AND'HRA-JATICA dy-
nasties, were prime ministers, and both put their
masters to death, and usurped their throne. That
Sisumawn, the last of the Canwa dynasty, was put ta

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA, 103
death by his prime minister, an ANDHRA, is ac-
knowledged_ by every historian; and in the Jahd-
bhrata*, it is declared, that Mana’-carwn’4, or Su-
DRACA, usurped the throne from his master, the king
of Magadha; whom he confined, in a place, amid
waters; from which circumstance, the venerable old
aman was called, by way of ridicule, Ambu-vicha. It
is added, that the old king was blind and deaf.

The famous Srr-cARNNA-DEVA, in his grant,
lately found at Benares, declares that he was of the
Haihaya tribe, who lived originally on the banks of
the Narmadd, in the district of the western Gawda,
or Gaur, in the province of Jddlava. Their residence
was at Chauli-Mahéswara, afamous place of worship
to this day, on the Narmada; and built by one of
his ancestors. The western Gaur was also the native
country of a most respectable tribe of Bréhmens
called SanpixLa; who, for several generations, acted
as prime ministers to the emperors of the ANDHRA
tribe. That this was their native country, is attested
by Major Macxrnzir, in his account of the kings
of Warangal. One of the thirty-six musical modes
in India, and belonging to the superior Ra‘ca, or
mode, called Addlava, is denominated Gawd, from
the country of Gawda, which was part of the pro-
vince of Jddlava.

They afterwards were called AND’HRAs, from the
country of Andhra, on the coast of Coromandel, and
extending from Nellore to the Godaveri; of which
they became kings: but in what manner, and when
this was effected, wedo not know. They were called
Anp Has in the time of the Canwa dynasty, about

* Riéjagrihé nagare Magadhanam Raja AMBUViCHA sa Caranaih
chaeshushadihinah. Tasyamat yé mahé Carni iswary raj4nam aya>
Ananyaté amatoadliina iti carnoctih.

H 4

104 ' ESSAY ON

the beginning of the Christian era. At that time,
says Priny, the Anp’ura, ANDARz kings, were very
powerful in India. They had no less than thirty
fortified cities, with an army of 100,000 men; and
1000 elephants. Their cavalry consisted only of
2000 men. Sri-Carnna-peEva takes the title of
king of Tri-Calinga, or of the three shores, to the
east and west, and to the south of Jndia., .

There was another Carna, mentioned in the

| Maha-Bharata, (section of the Rd@ah-Dharma) to
whom Jara-saANDHA gave the city of AZalini, with
the country round it, now the district of Bhaglepoor,
called from him, the country of Carna. Jalini, in
lexicons, is said to be the same with Champd-nagari;
now Champd-nagar in that country. This Carn‘a
was the son of Canti, the wife of Panp’‘v, who
conceived by the sun; and, of course, Carna is an
incarnation of the sun. ‘Tradition says, that the
little kingdom of Carwa, now the Bhdglepoor dis-
trict remained, for many generations, in the pos-
session of the descendants of Carna. This Canna
is totally unconnected with our Carwna, who like-
wise is of divine extraction, as one of his ancestors, -
Ca‘RTAViRYA, Was conceived in a miraculous man-
ner; and to this day, divine honours are paid to
him, in the west of /rdia. Hence, they all assumed
the titles of ‘Sri and Deva, asin Sri-Carna-Deva,
the fortunate and divine Car/na, and in Sri’ De’va--
Pazia-Deva’, whose original name was Duva-Pa’La,
answering exactly to theGreek T’heo-philos, in which the
word Philosis taken ina passive sense, as wellas Pa’La,
in Sanscrit, in the word Dro-Pa’Lta. In the com-
pound Sri-De'va-pa’La-De'va, the second Der’va, is
no part of the name, but a title. There is a living
instance of such an hereditary divinity, near Poona,
of which an interesting account is given in the se-
venth volume of the Asia¢ic Researches, in the family

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA, 105
of Mcrasacosseyn, whose descendants add the
epithet of Deva to their proper names, and the chief
of the family is considered as a god. ‘Phere is then
“every reason to believe that ‘Sxi-Drva-Pa‘La-Dr'va
claimed equally a divine origin: and as he was origi-
nally from the same country Gawda, in fatwa, it is -
probable that he belonged to the same family.

For by Gawda we must not by any means unders
stand Bengal: which, as far as I can recollect, is
never thus called in any book I ever met with. Its
metropolis is indeed called Gaudi from the goddess
of that name, who was worshipped there: hence it is
with propriety called Gawrigosha ( Corygaza) by Pro-
teEMy. But Gawda, as the name of a country, does
not seem to be in the least connected with that of the
goddess Gawd,

In the names of six kings, mentioned in the grant
found at Mongir, we find the adjunct pdla, which
seems to be characteristic of that branch of the
Harnaya tribe.

The Hatuayra tribe, to which the Ann’ura family
belongs, claims for their ancestor Haruara, the son
of the godlike Yapu, and the grandson of Nanuu-
sua, or NoAH: Manisuma’n, the fourth in descent
from him, built Afahishmati, now Chauli-mahéswara
on the Narmada. The fourth descendant of the last
mentioned was Criravirya, whose son: was the fa-
mous Ca’rtavirya, to whom divine honors are paid
to this day.

‘There is a dynasty of Hatnayas, mentioned. in
the Purdn‘as, who have no connection with the An- —
p#HRA dynasty; and they are introduced as possessed
of some district, the situation and name of which
are omitted; but it was probably the country of An-

106 ESSAY ON /

Thra in the Deccan. A powerful tribe of these
Harnayas, according to the Purdn‘as (as I have been
lately informed,) lived in the countries on the banks
of the Ganges, in the time of king Sacara; but in
consequence of their ill behaviour to him and his son,
he was obliged to drive them out of India, except a
few, who held the conduct of their relations in ab-
horrence, Tradition says, that they withdrew to
western countries, where it is added that they were
better known under the names of Pdrasicas, Asva-
muc’has or horse-faced, and that of Asva pati for the
title of their kings. This traditionary legend origi-
nates probably from their name, Harnaya, implying
horses, or horsemen: Piriny mentions a nation in
Persia called Hyi.

The Carn’a of the Jaha-Bhdrata, to whom
Jan a-SAND HA vave the country of Bhaglepoor, can-
not be the same, who dethroned the king of A/a-
gadha ; for this king was blind and deaf, and the
usurper was his prime minister: but Jara-sanD'Ha
was in the full enjoyment of his bodily faculties,
«when he was put to death by Crisuna, or rather
Buima. The first is called Carw’a, and the usurper
Mauw‘a-Carnr. This last is famous, all over Jndia,
and even as far as Malaca, and the adjacent islands,
according to Mr. Marsprn ; who says, that they
have legends there, mentioning Maua-Carw’a, and
a lion possessing surprising powers, and shooting
arrows at him. ‘This lion they call SrnGa-sacrer,
(Sinua-sacti,) and SInGA-RAJOON (SINHA-RAJA*).
He is mentioned also in the grant of the king of
Tagara, inserted in the first volume of the Asiatic
Researches, and his munificence and liberality are
there highly praised. King Buo’sa, in his address

mr IE

v

:

* Asiat. Researches, Vol. 4, p. 22.

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 107

to Rasa Munya, considers him and VicRAMA’DITYA
as the two most powerful kings that ever existed.
He is, for that reason, called Ap‘1rya, and also
Ra‘sa-Vicrama: and in the Agni-purdn'a Vicra-
MA‘DITyA, the son of GAND’nA-RUPA, is positively
declared to be Ca’rn’a’Nsya, or descended from
Ra’sa-Carn’s. This is, of course, the Vicram‘a-
DITYA mentioned by Ferisutra, as contemporary
with Savor king of Persia, who ascended the throne
in the year 241: and in some lists Suraca is said to
have reigned 56 years. Ferrisuta knew of no other
Vicrama’pitya, but this; and some missionaries,
who have fixed the death of Vicrama and the be-
ginning of his era, in the year 250, must have been
misled by legends wholly relating to this Vicrama™-
DITYA.

He is mentioned in the Vrihat-cathd, under the
of name SupRACA, or SuRACA, among the several wor-
thies, dignified with the title of Vicram’apITYA.
In another section he is introduced as the prime mi-
nister of an emperor of Pétali-putra, or Patna, who
was labouring under various infirmities; when he
was advised, by a mischievous Brahmen, to avail
himself of these circumstances, and usurp the throne;
which he did, according to the Purdnds and the Ma-
habharata.

In the Bhdgavata, he is called Batrurca, or rather
Batrurra; in the Vishnu-purdnd, ‘Sipraca; in the
Brahmdan'da, Cw Hesmaca ; in the Vdyupurand, Sinv’-
HucA: he was the first of the Ann’HRA-sa‘TIYAS.
In the Cumdricd Chan‘da he is called ‘Su'praca, and
in some copies Su’raca; and the first year of his
reign was the 3291 of the Cali-yuga. In the Mahd-
Bhdrata, he is called Mauna’-Carn'i, king of
kings; and the name of his sovereign, whom he de-

{
~

108 ESSAY ON
throned, but did not put to death, was Ameru-vicita.
In his grant, found lately at Benares, he called

himself Sh. Cuitisih n’A-De’va, king of Tri-Calinga,
or India.

A few years ago (in 1801) this grant was aiid at
the bottom of an old well filled with rubbish, in the
old fort of Benares. It is engraven upon two brass
plates, joined by a ring, to which is affixed the im-
perial seal. It is of the same size nearly, and in
the same shape with that found at AZongir. The
writing is also the same, or at least without any
‘material deviation. ‘The imperial seal is about three
inches broad: on it, in bas-relievo, is Pa’nv ati, with
four arms, sittmeg, with her legs crossed: two ele-
phants are represented, one on each side of her, with
their trunks uplifted. Below is the bull, Nanpy,
in a reclining posture, and before him is a basket.
Between Pa‘rvari and the bull is written Sri-.
Carn’n’A-Deva. The grant is dated the second
year of his new era, and “also of his reign, answer-
ing to the Christie year 192. - According to the
Puranas, he reigned twenty-three years, and was
succeeded by his brother Crisuna, who reigned
eighteen; and his son was 'Sri-Sar- Carn’, or ‘Sri-
‘Sar-Carn’a, who reigned 56 years, This surely
could not be his name, as it signifies the prosperous.
seven CARN’IS.

The ancestors of ‘Sri-Carn‘n'a-De'va, mentioned
in the. grant, were, first, his father Ga'ncEya-
Deva, with the title of Visaya-Cantaca: he died
in a loathsome dungeon. He was the son of Co-
CALLA-De’va, whose father was Lacsumana-Rasa-
Deva. Mana-Cakni, according to tradition, re-
sided at a place called Jangirah, near Sultangunj,
and about half way between “Mongtr and Bhdglepoor.

There some remains were shewn to me of his “palace,

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 109

on the site of which an indigo factory now stands.
He is called there Sri-Carw’e’swara, or simply
Carn Eswara, perfectly answering to Sri-Carn s-
Deva... The opposite rocks in the Ganges were
known by the name of Carnagiri, or the hill of
Carna’. There lived the old king of. Magad’ha, blind
and deaf; and in that state of infirmity, this. was
certainly a very comfortable place for him to live in.
It does not appear that Sri-Carwn’a-De'va used him
ill: certainly, the good old man could no longer act,
or appear as a sovereign. Be this as it may, from
that circumstance the old king was nicknamed
Ampu-vicua, or he who resides in the middle of
waters.

There wasalso another king of Magadha, called
Cary‘a with the surname of Dana’ RIYA 3 because
he generally resided at a place called Dahara, be-
tween Mongir and Surujgurh ; and inserted in Major
Rewnvenr’s atlas. This Carn’ A is mentioned in an
Epic Poem, entitled the wars of Prir’uu-Ra‘sa, in the
spoken dialects ; and part of which is in my posses-
sion. Prir’'nu- Ra‘sa waged jvar against SULTAN
Gort, in the year 1192 Of, the Chacon era. ‘The
king of Magadha is called there, Canrn’a Dana‘ra,
and he accompanied the Emperor Java- Cuanpra,
in his expedition against Ceylon, which he undertook,
under pretence of a | pilgrimage to worship the famous
statue of Ca’rtTiceya-SwamMt. At the head of
a numerous army, he marched from Voégini-pura, or
Dilli, for thus the last is spe!led throughout the poem.
The general rendezvous of the vassal kings. was to be
at Gor il-chanda, said to be Gowel- ghur,. near Lilich-
poor. He then sent a message to Vi'ra- BHADRA,
king of Singala, (or Ceylon,) to prepare every thing
for his reception ; being a vassal of the empire.
- ViRA-BHADRA submitted with good grace: and
Jaya-CHAanpra went to Ceylon, worshipped Ca’RTI-

_

110 ESSAY ON

cEYA-SWA'MI, and visited the famous fort of Sun-
cara-griha, near the sea shore, and saw there the
statues of Ra’ma and Ra’vana. I am also informed,
that this Carn‘a had a daughter, who lived in one of
the royal seats near Colgong ; and was seduced by
the poet Cuaupa, whose works are still extant. I
have mentioned before, that the Andhra princes, who
ruled on the banks of the Ganges, are divided into
three classes, the dynasty of the genuine AnD’HRAS,
consisting of nine kings: then the And hra-jdtiyas,
or of the family of the Anp’uras: and lastly the
Andhra-bhrityas, or servants of the Andhra princes,
who seized upon the government. It is not an easy
matter to ascertain, whether the AnD’ura dynasty is
to be placed before, or after the Andhrazdtiyas. I
have placed it before, first to fill up a chasm in the
list of the emperors of India: in the second place, it
is universally agreed, that the Anp’HRA-BuURITYAS
usurped the throne, immediately after the death of
Puroma, the last of the And hra-jdtiyas: and this
last circumstance is corroborated by the testimony of
Chinese historians, according to Mr. Decuienes.
Besides, in the Brakmdn'da, the ANpuRAsS and
Anp'HRA-JA'TIy sare considered but as one dynasty,
consisting of thirty-six kings, from which, sub-
tracing the nine AND'HRAS, remain twenty-seven
kings, which is the exact number of kings in the
dynasty of the Anp’HRA-JjA’TI'Y AS, resulting from
four lists compared together.

Nothing is related of the kings of this dynasty,
except of the last, called Purimaw, Putoma, Lo-
MA’DI, and PuLoma’kcuut, or Putom’a the pious
Risut. He was a great conqueror, and put an end
to his life in the holy stream of the Ganges.

Inaninscription found at Budd*ha-gayd, and in-
serted in the first Volume of the Asiatic Researches,

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. iil

mention is made of three kings of J/agadha, em-
perors of Zrdia. The first called Yasnya-varMa,
was a most religious prince, and, taken up with the
performance of religious duties, he disturbed not
the powerful ocean. His son SarpuLa-varMa,
though religiously inclined, was a great warrior: and
he conquered the world or Zrdia: and he terminated
his brillant career, by the voluntary deed of death,
near the uprising ocean; probably at old Sdgar be- -
hind Fudtdé near Moorgatcha, in Masor Renne rs
atlas. His son was also a pious prince, called
ANANTA-VaRMA’. YAJNYA-VARMA appears to be
the same with Yasnya‘sri in the accompanying lists,
and the great grand-father of Puroma’. His name
YasnyasR1, as mentioned by the Pauranics, implies
that he was fortunate, through the constant perfor-
mance of the Yasnya. YAJNYA-VARMA signifies
the warrior, who delighted in the performance of
the YasnyA: and had he been of the sacerdotal
class, they would have called him Yasnya-Sarma‘
His son conquered the refractory princes through
India, or the world ; he was then entitled to the
epithet of Vijaya, or the great conqueror: and such
is the name of theson of Yasnyasnxi, in the Puranas,
where ANANTA-VarMa’is called CHANDRA'sR'I, be-
cause, being a religious prince, he was probably ad-
dicted to the worship of the moon. The Chinese
historians mention an emperor of India, - called
Yerucnat, which name is the same with Yasnya,
generally pronounced Yacnya. As he lived in the
year 408, the times do not coincide: but this was
probably the title of some other pious prince. Pu-
tiMAN, Putoma’, or Loma’ is called PouLomMueEn,
Houtomren, and Houtomigento, by the Chinese.
According to Mr. Duecurenes, he conquered all
India, in the year 621, and died in 648. From him
India was called Poulomuen-Koué, or the country of
Puriman by the Chinese: and the Andhra princes
were so famous, that the inhabitants of the Gangetic |

.

1i2 ESSAY ON

provinces were called, in the west, the Andhra
fTindus, or André Indi, according to the Peutingerian
tables, in which they are placed — along the banks of
the Ganges. After the death of Putima’y, the whole
country was thrown into confusion, according to
DEGUIGNES. OLon acuuN, one of the chief officers,
(perhaps Catyana- “CHANDRA,) seized upon the
Gangetic provinces, and hearing that the embassa-
dors, from TA1Tsone, Emperor of China, to king
Purrman, were coming with HruEnTse, the chief of
the’ embassy, he sent ‘troops to seize them: and
Hiventse effected his escape, with much difficulty,
to Tibet ; where Yretsoncrexcrsan, king of that
country, gave him an army, with which Hrventsé
re-entered the Gangetic provinces, defeated the
usurper, and took him prisoner.

From the death of Putima‘n we may date the fall
of the empire, though not of the kingdom, of
Magaddha, or south Bahar, in the year 648. There
were Mahéréjas, or Emperors, at Canoge, in Gur-
_jarat, and other parts of India. Anu-Gangam, or the
Gangetic provinces, was parcelled out, among several
petty kings, such as the kings of Mazad ha, (or
south Bahar 3) Mathila (now Tirhoot ;) Saceta
(Oude,) and Benares: the kings of Carna-des‘a for-
merly Anga (Carna-Daua‘kya, in the latter end of
the twelfth century, was one of them). There were also
kings of Tamralipta (or Tamlook in Bengal,) and one of
them sent an embassy to China, in the year 1001:
he is styled king of Tanmouicheou, by the Chinese.

The kings of Gaur became very powerful after-
wards, and even conquered all the Gangetic pro-
vinces, at least as faras Benares. They assumed the
title of Mahda-Rdjds, even as \ate as the 15th century.
It was then, that the town of Gaur (or Gauda)
became the first city of that part of India: and
this certainly accelerated the fall of Pali-putra ; if it

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 113

existed then: and two rival cities, so near, or rather
close to each other, could not exist together; and
the vicinity of Gawda probably induced the:-kings of
Magadha to reside at Patna ; and this, at so early a
period, that even the name of the ancient capital is
almost effaced from every record, and even from the
remembrance of the Hindus.

The emperor Sri-Deva-Pa’ta-De'va boasts of his
having humbled the Hun‘as, a foreign tribe, who
had invaded India, and are occasionally mentioned
in the lists of countries and tribes in Jndia. They
succeeded the Parthians, and seem of course to be the
same with the Afwrundas, whose thirteen kings ruled
in the northern parts of Juda, immediately after the
Tusharas or Parthians. These are the Morunde of
Proremy, who were masters of the whole country
to the north of the Ganges, from Delhi to Gaur in
Bengal. They are declared in the Puranas to be
Miléch’has, impure tribes, and, of course, they were
foreigners. ‘The same are called AZaryanthes by Or-
PIAN in his Cynogetics*, who says that the Ganges
runs through their country. Cosmas calls them
white Huns; and relates, that when he wrote, their
king Gotias besieged a certain city, and that his
elephants and horses drank up the water round it,
and thus forced it to surrender. This has ‘happened
very often in the parched countries of Bicanere and
Jesselmere ; and it does not even require a numerous
army, to drink up the scanty waters of a few wells
round a city: but then the besiegers, far from taking
the town, are obliged to raise the siege in the
greatest distress.

The seven Carn’as, in despite of the Brahmanical
tribes, are still famous all over Jndia; ‘and their me-
mory held in the greatest veneration, and their fame

* Oppian Cynoget. lib. 4. v. 163.
Vor. IX. I

114 ESSAY ON

reached even as far as the Peninsula of Malacca, where’
they have still poems mentioning Carn‘a, the MWaha-
Raja, or emperor of Jndia, according to Mr. Mars-
prmn*. These poems, if procurable, might possibly
throw some light on the history of those kings.
Among the Anp’uka princes of this dynasty, there
is one called Gaurami-purra, or the son of Gau-
TAMA, being supposed to be an incarnation of him.
He appears to be only a Bopni-satwa, a disciple, or
spiritual son ; an appellation of the same import, but
more generally used in the western parts of India,
and by the followers of Bupp’'ua. It is foretold in
the Cumarica-cChan'da, that after the year 3600 of the
Cali-yuga, answering to the year 500 of our era, a
Bupp ua would be king of MJagadha, of the house .
of Hema,, and a Chandra-vanst; and that after
reigning 64 years, he would ascend into heaven.
This Bod@’hi-satwa, or subaltern incarnation of Bup-
PHA, or, in other words, Bupp’HA himself, the
D’HARMA-RAJA, went to China, in the year 515 of
our erd, where he is called D’Harma: at Siam, and
in the Peninsula, he is called Poutr-sat, and Port-
SATU.

We may consider Purrman as the last king of
Magad’ha at the same time emperor of India. After
him appeared a powerful king called VisvaspHati-,
cA, ViISsvVASPHURJI, and Visva-sPpHANI. His real
name was Puransaya. He expelled the Cshettris
or the barons, as being too troublesome ; and exalted
the lowest classes, such as the Catvarttas, boatmen
and fishermen, the Pdtics, the Pulindas, ‘&c. He
was, however, a great and powerful prince, and his
dominions extended all over Anu-Gangam, or the
Gangetic provinces. :

Then came a dynasty of nine kings, called the
nine Wdgds, or Ndcds. These were an obscure tribe,

* Asiat, Researches, Vol. IV. 227.

THE KINGS OF MAGADHA. 113

called for that reason Gupta-vdnsas ; there were nine
families of them, who ruled independent of each
other, over various districts in Anu-Gangam; such as
Padmévati (Patna); Cantipurt (now Cotwall, nine
coss to the north of Gwalior); Magad’ha (or Bahar);
Prayagé (or Allahabad); Sacéta (or Oude); and Be-
nares. There is still a powerful tribe of the Ndcas
on the banks of the Jumnd and the Betwd-nadi, The
Causalas or Pund’hracas ruled in Tamralipta, near
the sea-shore, according to the Vishnu-purand. In
other Purdn'as, we read the Causalas, or And ’hras,
which is inadmissible. The kings of Maz’hila (or
Tirhut) ave often mentioned; but the kings of Gaur
(or Bengal) are never noticed, unless they be the
Bangavas, once mentioned in the Brahmanda. The
kings of Bengal are not mentioned in the book of
the wars of PrirnHwira’sa in the twelfth century ;
whilst those of Oude, Tirhut, Bahar, Napal are no-
ticed, as_well as Buos’a king of Ud'ya-desd, now
Orissa.

; 116

A COMPARATIVE. TABEE
KINGS OF THE ANDHRA DYNASTY,

FROM THE

Bhagavat Vishn Viyu and Brahmdnda.

Balihita «+--+. ‘Sipraca -+-.-... Sin dhuca----++++23|Ch’hismaca --+---- 23
Crishn’a ---++++/Crislnad «-+..---- Crishn’a «+++ +-++-+18|Crishn’a +++--++-1§
‘Sri-‘Sata Carn‘a|‘Sri-Sat-Carn’i---- | ‘Sri-Sat-Carn‘i---..- ‘Sri-'Sat-Carn’} +--+ 10
Paurn‘amasa -- | Purn‘dtsanga ----|Purn/6tsanga --+-18 Purnétsanga -+--18
‘Sata Carn‘i ++... |Séta-Carn’i -.+.-: 56 | Sata Carnii + +++ ++ 56
Lambédara --|Lambédara-.....|Lambédara ------18|Lambédara sess «18
Vivilaca -<-«++ | Vivilaca -++++ee. ‘Apilaca -- ee “Apilaca «++ ae 12
Mégha-Swati - - | Mégha-Swati -- +. Saud4sa --+.+---18
A’‘tamana «--.|Putaman-.......|Putamabi ++ +6 es Q4|A'Dicceseccececs 12
Arishta-Carna-+-- | Némi-Crishna «++. 25 .
Haléya ooo wee BELAIA ve ese ne Sauls | PIAID ss aie alot a | Scanda-Swati 000 98
alaca ‘so.s 0 Pattalaca:¢-++..+]Pulaca «++-++.+.-+5|Bhavaca «ere. es$
Panshbhéru -. | Pravillaséna +... |Puricashen’a -+---21| Pravillasénas----.12
Sunandana. «.- |Sundara Sat-Carn‘a| Séta-Carn’i + +++++1 Sundara Sat Carn’i- - 4
Chacéra---+.-+. |Chacéra Sat-Carni | Chacéra Sat-Carn'i | Chareéra Sat Carn’i 6 |
Vatdca sess. 6 months | Mahéndra Sat Carni 3
be Cuntala Sat Carni--$
Siva Swati --.. | Siva Swati -..... | ‘Siva Swami-++--.98|Swa4tishénas+--+.+-1
G6mati-putra..|G6mati-putra --.. | GAUTAMI-PUTRA21 | Yantraméati -.-.--34
Puriman .-..-|Puliman --«...... ares
Sata Carn’i +++++. Sét-Carmi +--+ ..29ff
Madasis4 «++. |'Sivasri s+s.see. . JADE cece cence eee
‘Siva-scanda --| Siva-scanda ..-. } SivascandaSataCarni &
Yajnasri-+++.. Yajnasri-+ sees. Yajnasri seoceeee DY se
| Sata-Carn’i «+++++60
Vijaya ++++++ |Vijayaseeees sees Yajnasri-Sata Carni 19
Chandravijaya {Chandrafri «-.... }Dan‘dastri «sesees +3 | Dandasri Sata Carni 3
Lomadhi...]Pul6march’hi | Pulémé .......7}Puloma..... ol

"
'

{

BDL SSDS DDD®@ SSSGEG9SSSSOESBVPIGVIPDSISSIGBSSIC®SOGS

; a

002, i
i . ~L—2L (63) ‘O'v 8F9 ‘SaIP NVIWITOAd

/ -§-—g§ --+----- ‘seapueyD

w)
S aa.
pDses
fem 2 Tes
ie ete ‘a a oor
yr go
Sid <j
_- eres , Pes
Alpena tate ll a = Salis
4 : .
ae “‘VHLGNVSVUVE
- ee

A TABLE or truz KINGS or MAGAD’HA, EMPERORS or INDIA.

PSS5S 9205555555585 SSS SSIES SSPSSSSS FESS SSS S950

2B
& Is 228
~ 3 See
3 cee
i= 5resz2
i= oh
38 SoS
& oon => = fod aye eens
Li 3 S328
=P s 208
ze React
33 2 g hse ~
a BS = E Se .5 —t—t (68) “O'v 8t9 Ssa1p NVINITNd
: Zs B
; Rl =: esis —s-—s ------- ‘useiparyg
5S 5
forks 8 SS SM
ries §
; SS 4 (09) 61-65 - - = = ~ “4meQug useofex
Z3E| 8
Es ae —6— = = = = urea ig epuras wag
= Bll os 5
aR. sy = ee ae > Suse] 2
Seelz-73 yup il <S
' Bes| eae : Ss 18 9 voor mtn vrrnemvrove |S
—|— 2 es), <5
§ 008 Ey 225 3 a
i a> 1-8 ---- - - - fumnges | >
BPs
OEE ——O— === ==. *BuuitD YS BRUNO =
F ga iy
eet Ee)
o is ~~ ai = syiuom 9 “me US ORY
Hy
a = = § 5 —___—— ee C7 euanD US wEpUNS
=
Ss
< 2
Ss 3
‘ S> a? >
ae ge
3 ial (ais ae
wie
eae 3
o Beg 2%
SA 3 - = = = = = = Seinpoquiry
232 38
i ean ‘| - = = ‘eue9 ug Bavsoding
zZs>
sl ae g & —_
008 5 = weds 40'VAAG VRUVILUS
Se
= 3 H =
gs 5 5
Poey <= Se
a? 5° 3 Sar = o2
ees 5 ss Sesns
Zee Ss Lee ses
toms lesele a3 2555
Sse 3.3 & ¢
& Rell) Sige fend de ae ck Baz sé Q
i) ey eS hee Aes fe Sie Sea os
4 Se] 32.2 6 22 5 8 2 33 09, =
4 =i:| £28 2 Be s © 2°28 o-oo - = === = > > feuunysng Za
aap SE fae pm ae se ae tl—tl—tr - ee = = = = Ue hEy —<
28 seg Re EN,
Se ee RAZOH A VI—tO—FE - - ~ = = ==. = fermnig, i)
2 @aeaaag as
= — o1— ol—o1 Bagpnst
oI—ol—0r quaad oo
5 sR—to—26 eT
Zz Swit = - = = = =F Mnsnwmsory
= SB S88 = - 2 = = = C SheviyD
= -8 7 4 & tz SQ EA Lace =
E Zz _— « ' S
—| x q° BS y fy wah Se
oor | = =i Sa ' "58 OlS0I—sk = - -
a a ee SE Sao ae oo
. ale? o @ ~ 9 € 2 6 #es-z-1 - - -
“| stlSs 392255 2 = gs
Blyeesloz 23 2% & 3 3 | 22 o-oo - - -
ell soja> oa 22642226
SINGERS 22) oC Ree ie Cy ey ICT ee <
—|5 =f § <2 -2 -2@ —— XN
oo ZI) SSI op baba se Ze
e ei ae
, Selo s Lobb + es = = = eueyp-eaag a)
= Bola § fI—FI—SE - - - “Bonsi[eg so ‘ey mA,
ial eer oe 28 06 — OP Sage Be SO Sire
Ss Ra tagga s B—8—B - - - - © “eIyINDI0 beet
aie Bi Oe—os—96 = = = = ~~ r= he!
—| > SN
008 3 S6—S8—$6_ —— ‘risus Q
| SD RRS 0 AB O'STS ‘VIdN9O-VUCNVHO
5 er ee
9 Cn Ay A ae —ti-tt - - = = SYCNVNOMN UL Se
2 aS &
Zz Ned a 4 ' ' ' ' ’ BI—BR—OS “OA SSE CPUVA POE JO TIVE VAI
4 eget suum er-ti—-sh - - - - - - “purN-ByeN
nD SRS hg ee se wv—th—t = - <= = “eueqnpava-ipueNy
orl IS Ss 3 : Hoe, tee CS TIEN
x At tae g £2 8
es ap EAR UA = so—se—s6 - - - - - - = “corse 08
5 $4944 ¢ 3
5 ey =P aa £8 wn
5 bib ee oh ee E) 24 so—se—s6 - - - - - ‘MULVSVILVIV 3S
Ss ¢ @ 600 0 24 =
: a a
e mn a eas Se Be—BT—RG = = = ~~ = = = BISIUPIA a
boo ie Or—0r—0F ~ “eluBayD4s) 7]
00g . =
la ae ey
£33
S83 ob—or—or‘tueyppararpueN]| eaneyp-em94s)
a>
C) Boes
astz Te—1s—15 = = - “tovly|| a G
Lae =
— | it aS +S)
009 £3 i = os—os—oor ‘educey yy <q
Sige * a
i=) ;
PAG =~ “BOEINA|| 2 ‘ourpoy.ppns
et—so—en - - ‘wiokprry vdefundiyy ‘efvfurg
5 Bs — =
002 arere ss—se—a6 = == = = = = =) Sifeasia “exefuay ey
283
Se s OSD EGE ar) aa ifeades 08 ‘uyusang
=S Sz
wet
mes ; faleh :
mses or—or—0v = = = = = t > SeNZUNS sefamy
ass3 5
AZES o
ga ‘ewueqppng |] ————“‘tuuing,
wel mm OSSe -
‘ofupequa
eo—te-te - - - -- + - = ‘neang a 6
gh—er—A = - - = ~~ = SCUpspeyyA S| “eurzang .
& :
pee es a ee ‘aning orl] Syouruy
006 freeaas a
Ke g z S285 — te =) ES ee “eeqquN, =
=a a
BS> j o—o—o = = = - - - enpyorucya S086 mp vate
<38 8
g =e “ounlng 40 ‘oy140y PIS
px s > fo—to—49_ = = = = - - = iting
0001 Ass Danyeouny
= a
33 es—8a—-8B = - = = = ‘eurYs SCAIPUTL _
£3
Bo—Oe—Be p= =e = ‘png oF Seaneidns *
. ew ee = ‘nnyeq-eqe Ty ‘asmontg *
— ee SS ee
O01} “eq aeanonyg
ss—ot—se - - - - > = - ‘whefimis r
“easeprqua ©
os=on—ote = =~ T=o ‘iqstaeyy 40 11feaos
SB—85—-85 - - - - - - = eA
es eae Rs
0051 :
OS 05 a a es >
ee
nm
059909) = =~ = =) = me = 4
> ‘ewofsnwg
wo-osts = - - e+ - = = fnfeint i=] $
s x ‘ednienea
ies] a —Seokornn
ost
w-19—-19 - = ee ‘caus S
es—96—85 - - = - - = > “fqpsioS
oust wut8 VONATIVO UL "BAN 4YS¥D eM jo uoIsnpUOD “ai0g sr FLINSOIZYG "YATaYETS

AWHLGNVS.VUYE

=

117

ESSAY IV.
“WICRAMADITYA anv SALIVAHANA:

THEIR RESPECTIVE ERAS,

With an Account of the

BALA-RAYAS OR BALHAR EMPERORS.

THE two periods of Vicrama’DiT¥a and ‘Sa'Li-va-
"HANA are intimately connected ; and the accounts
we have of these two extraordinary personages are
‘much confused, teeming with contradictions and ab-
surdities, to a surprising degree. Their history is to
be found in the Vicrama- charitra, the Sinhdsana-Dwé-
trins‘ati, and the Vétdla -panchia- -oins ati, which have
been translated from the Sanscrit into all the dialects
of India ; and the two last tracts are sections of the
Vrihat-catha. ‘The Vicrama-charitra is very scarce
in the Gangetic provinces: but this deficiency is
abundantly supplied, by ample extracts from that
book, communicated to the Society, by Masor ~
MACKENZIE of the JMJadras establishment. In ge-
neral, the Hindus know but of one VicraMa'‘DITYA
but the learned acknowledge four ; and when, at my
request, they produced written authorities, I was
greatly surprised to find no less than eight or nine.
Those who reckon four heroes of that name, agree
only about two. The first Vicrama was he, atter
whom the period is denominated: the second is
Rasa Buoya. Some suppose that ‘Sa’Lrva‘HANA was
one of them, and that the fourth was the son of
Buosa; calls’ others insist that this last was
either Jaya-cHANDRA, or Prirawr-Ra’sa, who fell
in the great war against the Mahébhétadicas, or
Musulmans, in the year 1192. Every VicramaDity4
rs

118 ESSAY ON

ismade to wage war against an antagonist called
‘Sa‘LIVAHANA, SA’LABAN, and often denominated
Nristnua, Na‘eu NDRA, &e. except one, whose oppo-
nent’s name was Maua- BHAT, and that of his tol- !
lowers Mahabhatadicas, that is ta say MoHAMMED
and the Muhammedans. 1
VicRAMADITYA made a desperate fapasya, in
order to obtain power-and a long life from Ca‘rr-
pEvr, and as she seemingly continued deaf to his
intreaties, he was going to cut of his own head,
when she appeared, and granted him undisturbed
sway over all the world for 1000 years, ater which a
divine child, born of a virgin and the son of tlie
great TACSHACA, carpenter of artist, would deprive
him both of his kingdom and of his life. Such are
the words of the Vicrama-charitra : and in the Cumd-
ricd-chanda it is said, that this would happen in the
year of the Cali-yuga 3101, answering to the first
of the Christian era. Thus, VICRAMADITYA
reigned for 1000 years nearly unmolested, in the en-
jovment of every rational pleasure, and never trou-
bling himself about his latter end; till, recollecting
the ‘prophecies about this wonderful child, and that
the time for their being fulfilled was near at hand, he
grew very uneasy, and sent people all over the world,
to find him out, that he might destroy him: and
having discovered the place “of his abode, he ad-
vanced at the head of an immense ar my, but was de-
feated, and lost his life, by the hand of this. divine
child, who was then five years of age. |

The history of these nine worthies, but more par-
ticularly when considered as a single individual, is a
most crude and undigested mass of heterogeneous
legends, taken from ‘the apocryphal gospel of the .
infancy of Cunrist, the tales of the Rabbis and Tal-
mudists concerning SoLomon, with some particulars
about MonamMen; and the whole is jumbled toge-

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 119

ther with some of the principal features of the history
of the Persian Kings of the Sdssdénian dynasty. For
VicrAma is supposed to have waged war with the
Romans, all the time that he lived: that is to say
for 145 years: andto have taken one of their em-
perors prisoner, whom he carried in triumph through
the streets of Ujjayini. One of these Vicramas was
really a Sassanian prince: and the famous SHaBour
or Sapor, of that dynasty, took the Emperor Varz-
RIAN prisoner.

Thus Vicrama is made contemporary with Soxo-
mon ; and, like him, he is said to have found the
great mantra, spell or talisman; through which he
ruled over the elements, and spirits of all denomina-
tions, who obeyed him like slaves: otherwise they
were sure of being severely punished. Like Soro-
MON, he hada most wonderful throne, supported and
adorned with lions, who were endued with reason
and speech: and this wonderful fabric 1s called, in
Sanscrit, Stnhésana, or the seat supported by lions.
We read in the vétala-pancha-vinsati, that it was
through the assistance of the great Vétala, or Devil,
that two Vicrama‘Dityas obtained the empire of
the world, along life, with unlimited sway. They
performed the péjd in his honor, offered sacrifices,
and in short dedicated, or gave themselves up to him.
This is highly reprobated by divines in India, yet
they seem to allow, that when all other means™ail, it
may be done, provided ft be not for wicked and abo-
minable purposes. We read in the Thanurdthnameh*
that the div. ArcenxK had likewise applied to the
devil, to become the Sotomon or Vicrama of his
age. Zonac gave himself up also to the devil, in
order to become the sovereign lord of the world,
and with his assistance he killed his predecessor.

* D’'HEREELOTs’s Bibl. Orient. v. SULEIMAN.
| aes

120 ESSAY ON

But let us return to the extract from the Vicrama- -
charitra, by Mason Macxenzie. Then came Bara-
risut, VicRAMA RCA, Barr and. Buarrrinart, four
brothers, from, four mothers, of the four. different
classes, and sons of a holy Brahmen of Benares. The
last, or BHARTRIBARI, was. of the fourth class,. and
succeeded to the throne. He was learned, pious, and
valiant; and it is believed that he is still alive, as a
Mun, in the wilds above Hart-dwar. He was suc-

ceeded by VicramaRca, who made a sacrifice in
honor of the goddess Cx! LI, and offered his own
head. “The aoddess appeared to him, saying, what is
your boon? ThatI may rule the world for a long
time. The goddess, pleased with his faith and devo-
tion, told him, that at Ujjayini, he should rule, the
terrestrial world for 1000 years, without hindrance or
molestation, and at last that he should be slain by a
child, born ‘ofa virgin one year and a half old., His
brother, being informed of tnis circumstance, said he
would lengthen his lifeto 2000 years, for, as he was
to rule at Ujjayini for 1000 years, he had only to re-
main in that city six months in the year, and the
other six out of it. He then ascended, to heaven, in
his human body, where he was well received by
Inpra, saw, RamBua’ and Urvasr dancing, and
there was presented with the famous Stnhasana, or
seat adorned with hons.

He chastised the Ve'ra’La-pEvA, or the king of
the devils, made him his slave, who then related to
him twenty-five curious stories, to be found in the
Vet éla-pancha-vin'sati. Toward the latter end of his
reign, he sent secret emissaries, through all the werld,
to inquire, whether a child were born of a virgin one
year and a half old. The messengers returned to
Ujjayini, with the news, that a male child was born
of a virgin, the daughter of a potmaker, begot by the
king of Sariakes (cailed Tacsnaca, or the Carpenter,
in the orjginal,) while she was in her cradle. They

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA, 19]

informed him also, that this child, named Sa’ra-
VAHANA, had attained the age of five years; and
that his grandfather had made numberless clay
figures of soldiers to amuse him.

Vicrama’rca marched at the head of an army;
but the protecting snake came to the assistance of
the child, and inspired the figures of clay with life,
who started up as able warriors, attacked Vicra-
ma’rca and his army, and defeated him. ‘Sa‘xa-
VA HANA Cut Off his head, and flung it into Ujjayini,
that his death might be known to all the world.
The queen was delivered in that very month of a
male child ; after which she burned herself with the
head of her lord, who was re-united to the Supreme
Eeing. Whilst the grandees of the ‘state were as-
sembled to place the child upon the imperial throne,
a voice from heaven declared, that as the child was
born after the death of bis father, he could not*suc-
ceed to the empire of India, but only to the throne
ot Malava; and the same voice ordered the Sinhd-
sana, or the imperial throne, to be buried in a secret
piace. ‘Sa’La-va’HANA, who was a learned and
pious man, became a AZuni, and withdrew to desert
places, to give himself up to devout contemplation.
Major Mackenzie informs us, that in the chrono-
logical list, Vicrama’rca is declared to have reigned
only 944 years; and in another, that it was only his
dynasty or empire which is said to have lasted so
long. 7

The learned of the western parts of India, whom
I had an opportunity to consult, assured me, that the
first Afillenium ended about the beginning of the
Chiisiian era, and the second Millenium, when the
Musulmans penetrated into the more inland parts of
India ; probably under Maumeop, about the year
1000 of our era.

122 mSSAY ON

The year 3044 of the Cali-yuga is looked upor by
many as the year of Vicrama‘rca’s death: hence
in the Deccan, they have reduced his supposed reign
to 944; but by others it is looked upon as the first
of his reign, which then must have ended in the
1000th year, answering to the first of the Christian
era. Hence VickaMa is 5 said, in the Tadkerat-Assalatin,
as cited by Bernou ur, to have lived 1100. years,
before he re-appeared and reigned at Dilli.

This Vicramarca, called also VicRAMA-SENA
and VickAMA-SINH, is supposed to be the most an-
cient; yet his brother Buarrrinarr (also named
Suca’piryaor Sucara%Ja), besides a treatise consist-
‘ing of 300 moral sentences, and simply called Buar-
TRIHARI, after him, wrote likewise a collection en-
titled “Sucasaptati, or the 70 tales of the Parrot.
Mention is there made of a more ancient king, V1-
CRAMA-S‘ENA, to whom, and his daughter-in- law Pra-
BH’ATI, the "Parrot relates these amusing stories.
Every Vicrama has either a parrot, a demon, or
statue to entertain him. Another peculiarity of
every one of them is, that upon the least disappoint-
ment, or fit of ill-humour, he is ready to cut off his
own head, and throw it ‘at the feet of the goddess
Ca’1i, who interposes and grants his boon. Hence
it is said, that the first time he cut off his own head,
CaA'Li granted him only one hundred years ; when
cutting it off again, he obtained to live for 100 years
more: ‘and every time, his familiar, the Vetdla, re-
placed it upon his shoulders. This he did ten differ-
ent times, when the Vétdla, or the devil, informed
him that this could be done ten times only, and no
more, as in the case of Ra’vawn’a, as every body knows.

We read, that there was a king of Pdtaliputra-
pura, called Vicrama-tunGa, who was like a lion,
sinha: hence he is called VicrAMA-sinHA through
the whole legend. He happened to be in the holy city

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 193

of Pratishtan'a, when fifty of his relations (the heads
of whom were Mana’sua’ta, and his four confiden-
tial associates, MAnHA’-virna-BA‘HU, or MAHA-BA‘HU,
Su-pa‘Hv, Su-BpHa TA, and Preta’pa’piTya, all maha-
balas, strong and valiant men), surrounded him with
a numerous army ot Mahdbhatadicas, or Aluhamme-
dans. He effected his escape with much difficulty,
aud fled to Ujjayint, where he concealed himself in
the house of a rich merchant, who with his wealth
enabled him to raise another army, when he attacked
the Mahabhatédicas, aud gained a complete victory.
In the mean time, his wife Sa’strec@Ha’,, having
been informed that her lord had been killed in battle,
burned herseif. The merchant’s son having .been
conlined by the king of Ujjayini, VicraMa-siINHa,
at the head of his arniv, set himeat hberty, and then
returned to his own capital Patali-putra-pura, or
Patna. It is sad, in the third story of the V’étdla-
pancha-omsati, that MAnA-BHATA’, or MAHA-RA‘HU,
was from Anangapura, in Ananga-de'sa, or country
of ANANGA; the same with Ca’mMapeEva, which
Pandits suppose to be toward the west. MuHam-
MED is said to be the grandson of a king of India:
hence he is called a relation of VicRAMA’DITYA.

In the seventh section of the Vrihat-ca?hd, we
read, that there was a king of Pdtali-putra-pura,
called Vickama Ditya, who, hearing of the growing
power of Nrisrnua, king of the consecrated city, or
Pratishtav'a, called to his assistance the Gaja-patt,
(lord of the elephants, or king of Tibet), and the 4’sva-
pati (lord of horses or horsemen, or the king of Persia).
The confederates took the field; but were defeated
by Nristnua-nripa or Sa‘tiva’nana, with an in-
credible slaughter. Vrcramapirya fled with the
utmost precipitation to Patali-putra ; but meditating
vengeance, he disguised ‘himself like a carpati, or
man who carries ail over Zndia the holy water of the
Ganges, and went to Pratish'tava. There he was

184 ESsAY ON

kindly received by a rich merchant, in whose house
he remained along time. King Nrisinna, or S'a-
Liva HANA, happening accidentally to call at the
merchant’s house, they recognised each other; and
Nrisinua, admiring his comely appearance, and also
his courage and confidence, acknowledged himself
overcome. by him; when Vicramapirya ad-
vanced, and they embraced each other most cordi-
ally. Nristnua carried him to his palace, where,
having entertained him in a suitable manner, they
parted in peace, and Vicrama returned to Pdatali-
putra-pura, having seemingly settled every thing
concerning their respective eras, at least it is so sup-
posed. ,

In the tenth section of the Vrihat-catha, we read
that VicRAMA-CESARI, Was prime minister to Mri-
ca'ncapatTra, king of Patali-putra. The king used
to wander by himself through the woods, where he
often lost his way, seemingly through some infir-
mity; and his prime minister used to go in search of
him. It happened once that he could not find him,
and, passing near a holy place called Brama-sthala, -
he saw a Brdhmen, sitting under a tree, near a well.
‘VicRAMA-Cr's ari approached the holy man, who for-
bade him to come near, as he had just been bitten
by a venemous snake: but Vicrama, who was well
acquainted with the medical art, soon, cured him.
. The Brahmen, willing to shew his gratitude, asked
him why he did not aspire to power and dominion.
VicRAMA-CES arti seemed willing enough, and asked
him how this could be effected. The priest replied,
perform the pid in honour of the great Vétdla, or
the devil, and you will obtain from him whatever
you wish; and you will become like Vi-samMa-saILa,
with the title of Tri-Vicrama, who had the sidd ‘his,
er power or working miracles.

— At Pratish'tand, says the Brahmen, on the banks

/

--WICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAMANA, 195°
ef the Géddéveri, reigned Tri-VicRaAMA+sENA, the
the son of Vicrama-s'ENA. He was thus called, be-
cause he possessed acrama, pracrama, and vicrama,
three synonymous words, implying energy in a great
degree. A Brahmen used to come very often, and
presented him every time with a flower, in which
was concealed a jewel of great value. The king re-
spectfully received the flower, and afterwards threw
it away into ‘a corner, where they all remained neg-
lected and undisturbed. At last the king accidentally
discovered a jewel, and searching into every flower,
found in every one a gem also. When the priest
came again, he asked the reason of this strange cir-
cumstance, and what he meant by it. The Brahmen
informed him, that, if he would come alone to a cer-
tain place, which he pointed out, he would then re-
veal the whole mystery. The king did not fail to go,
on the appointed day: when the Brahmen informed
him, that before he could unfold this secret, it was:
necessary that he should go into an adjacent grove,
where was a corpse hanging upon a tree: cut the
Tope, says he, and bring the dead body to me. The
king, though very unwilling, was obliged to comply,
and having cut the rope, he placed the dead body
upon his shoulders; and, on the road, a spirit that was
im it, spoke, and related five and twenty stories to
amuse and deceive the king; when, at the end of
each story, the corpse flew back to its tree, and every
time Tri-Vicrama went and brought him back, and,
being at last irritated, he took care he should no
more escape. Then the spirit informed him that the
Brahmen wanted to destroy him, and usurp. his
throne. For this purpose, he was going to perform
some magical rites, in which a dead corpse was ab-
solutely necessary ; and that this was the reason why
he had insisted on the king bringing him a dead
body. Tri-VicraMa-sENA being satisfied with the
truth of this information, put the Brdhmen to death;
aud Mana’DE VA appeared to him, saying, thou wert

126 ESSAY ON

before VicRAMA/DITYA, a portion of my own essence.
I have now generated thee in the character of Tri-
Vicrama to destroy the wicked; and ultimately thou
wilt be Vicrama DiTyA again; and, when thou diest
in that last character, thou wilt be re-united to me.
This alludes, according to the learned, to the two
Millenniums of Vicrama‘pitya. This legend is a
little obscure, and the compiler seems to have jum-
bled together the legends of Vicnama'DITyA and Sa-
LIVA‘HANA; though of the latter no mention, by
name at least, be made.

As VI-sAMA-SILA was at first king of Pratisht’dnd,
he was, of course, the same with Sa Liva’HAN’A;
and the first part of the legend has an obvious refer-
‘ence to him in that character. VicrRaMA-CESARI
appears to be the S’ri’-Carn‘a-pEva-Raya-Vi-
cRAMA, with the title of A’prrya, who dethroned
his sovereign, taking advantage of his infirmities ;
and this VicramMA-cEs ARI, In the third story of the
Vétdla-panchavinsati is declared to be king of Pa-
tali-putra-bhii-mandalam, or country and region of
Patali-putra, as every body knows: and his wife's
name was CHANDRA-PRABHA-MAGADHi, being a na-
tive of AZagadha.

\
,

It is said, in some legends *, that three male
children were born the same day: one, the son of a
Brdhmen, the second, a Cshettri, and, the third, a
Vaisya: some add a fourth of the Sudra tribe. It
was foretold, that one of them would become king,
or, at least, remain so without being molested, if a
king already ; but not before the two others had been
put to death. The Brdhmen, hearing of this, easily
circumvented the Vais‘ya, who was a Taili, or oil-
man, with whose body he wanted afterwards to per-
form a most abominable sacrifice to Vétala, or the

*In the Bhéja-praband ha.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA, 1&7

devil, in order to destroy VickaMa‘DITYA. Mauna-
preva became incarnated in the person of Tri-Vicra-
MA, at Ujjayint, or rather Pratisht‘ana, on the follow-
ing occasion. The gods, that is to say, the Brah-
mens and Hindus, being vexed by the Afléch’has, or
foreign and impure tribes, went in a body to Cailésa,
to Mana-prva, to whom they said, youand Visonu
have destroyed the Asuras, or Daityas, but these are
born again on earth as Mléck’ has. They vex the
Vipras, ov Braéhmens, and will not allow the perform-
ance of religious rites and sacrifices, destroying all
the religious | instruments, and other requisites: they
even carry away the daughters of holy Munis. In
consequence of this remonstrance, Tripura‘RI, or
Maua’-DEvA, was incarnate, in the house of SuRA-
Mane npra pity a-JaGatsaya, at Ujjayini, who was
making 7apasya, to obtaina son. As soon as his wife
had conceived, the heavenly host came down to wor-
ship her. The high-priest and prime minister, who were
also childless, obtained each a son; and young V1-
cramapity a, called also Vi-samas tia in this place,
soon surpassed his: teachers in learning and wisdom.

The old king resigned the throne to him, and then
withdrew to Benares ; and Vicrama’pitya became
king of heaven, hell, and earth: the genii and de-
mons were obedient to him, and his fame reached the
White island in the sea of milk, or Vhite sea. His ge-
neral, VicramMa-s acti, conquered Dacshin'a-patha,
(or the Deckin,) Mad ‘hy ya-desa, (or the inland parts
of India,) Casmir and Saurashtr a, (or Soret, ) and
the countries to the east of the Ganges. He forced
Vira-sENA-SINHA’LESWARA, or the “king of Sinhala,
or Ceylon, to sue for peace, and to give him his
daughter, and Cué‘aca, (or Cuttaca,) was cbliged, at
last, to submit. He extirpated several tribes of
Mlech'has, and others surrendered at discretion. He
“married, at Ujjayini, three wives, Gun‘avati, CHAN-
DRA VaTI, and Mapana-sunpa‘Ri: wishing to marry

‘198 ESSAY ON

a fourth, he saw, in the house of Vis vVAcARMA, @
beatiful damsel, daughter of CaLinca-s‘ENI, king
of Stambhasta, (now Cambit, or Cambay, ) in Calinga-
desa. Ue sent a trusty man to demand her of her
father, who refused his consent: but VicRAMA'DITYA
sent one of his attending spirits, who soon obliged
him to comply.

This is, it seems, the Vicrama’pitya who ob-
tained a famous boon from Inpra, in favour of his
favourite country JJdélava, that it should never be
visited by drought. In his time there had been no
rain for twelve years, owing to San'r, (or SaturRn,)

assing into the house of | ‘SucRA, (or VENUS,) in
| Wises: (or Taurus,) through the §’ acata-bhéda, (or
section of the wain,) in Rohin', (or the stars near
Aldebaran). In the time of Da’saraTHa, SaTuRN,
the offspring of the Sun, attempting to go through
this path, was prevented by Das araT HA, ‘and hurled
down into a country which he set on fire, and it
was, from that circumstance, called Barbara.

In the Stnhasana-dwatrinsati, the twenty-fourth sta-
tue is introduced, giving to king Buosa an account of
Vicrama, and of ‘Sa‘tivaHan’a. There was, in
Purandarpura, a rich merchant, who, before he died,
gave to every one of his four sons an earthen pot,
sealed, with injunctions not to open it till after his
decease. When opened, the first was found to con-
tain nothing but earth; the second, coals; the third,
bones; and the fourth, bran. WVicrama was applied
to for.an explanation, but neither he nor any body
else could explain this enigma. The four sons
went afterwards to Pratisht’ana, and neither the
king ‘nor any body else there could give them an
answer ; but there was a wonderful child who
did. There were two Brdhmens, who had a sister,
who lived with them in a state of widowhood,
her husband having died whilst she was yet very

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 129
young. She conceived by a Néga-cumdra, (or Tac-
shaca ;) and the brothers ashamed of this seeming
disorderly behaviour of their sister, left the country.
The unfortunate young widow, thus deserted, found
an asylum in the humble cottage of a pot-maker,
where she was delivered of a male child, whom she
called ‘Sa’tiva‘HANA. The child, hearing of this
strange case, went to the king’s presence, where the
four sons of the merchant were, with a numerous and
respectable assembly. He spoke without embarrass-
ment, and they were astonished, for his words were
like amrit or ambrosia. ‘The first pot, says he, con-
taining earth, entitles the owner to the landed pro-
perty of his father. The second contains coals, and
of course all the timber and wood become the pro-
perty of the second son. The third is entitled to the
elephants, horses, cattle, and animals of all descrip-
tions belonging to the estate; and the fourth is en-
titled to the corn and grain of all kinds, the property
of his father. Vicrama’pirya, on hearing of this,
sent for the child, who refused to come: go, says he
to the messenger, and tell him that when I have com-
pleted my business, or in other words, when I shall
be perfected, or my time is arrived, he will come to
me of himself. Vicrama‘piTyA, irritated at this an-
swer, wanted to kill him; and advanced, at the head
of a numerous army, against the child, who, making
figures of soldiets with clay, animated them. They
fought on both sides with courage; but the Ndéga-
cumara, or son of the great serpent, stupified Vicra-
mMa’s army; who, finding his soldiers asleep, implored
the assistance of the serpent Vas'uci, who gave him
some amrit, with which he revived his troops; and
‘Sativa HANA, hearing of this, sent two men for
some of it, and Vicrama complied with his request ;
and here ends the legend, which was introduced only
to give an instance of VicraMa’DITYA’s unbounded
generosity.

POL DA... K

130 ESSAY ON

The next Vicrama’pitya, and whose history is
best known all over India, was the son of Garppa-
BHA RUPA, or he with the countenance of an ass;
and an account of him is given in the Vicrama-upa-
Chyana, or first section of the Sizhdsana-dwdtrin-
Sati.

The next Vicrama’pirya was the famous king
Buosa, who recovered the Sinhdsana, and going to
the White island, dived into the infernal regions,
where he saw the apartments of Crisuna, or VISHNU;
and close to them those of Bair, who received him
kindly, and bestowed upon“him the title of Vicra-
MA'DITYA; and his son, called JAya’NANDA, was
stiled also Vicrama’pitya. According to others,
JAYA'NANDA was only either the adopted son, or
the son-in-law of Raya-Budésa, having married his
- daughter Bua‘’nu-MATi.

The principal feature of the history of these Vr-
CRAMADITYAS, as I observed before, at whatever
period they lived, is their quarrels with a certain
king, called Sa’tiva‘Hana, with the title of Nrisrn-
HA, Na’Ga-cuma’ra, Nacrenpra, &c. exeept one,
who is introduced as contemporary with MunamMMeED,
and waging war against him, and _ his followers, the
Mahabhatadicas. Even in the time of Jaya cuan-
DRA, the last emperor of India, we find, in Persian
records; a ‘Sa‘LBa‘HAN, king of Délli: and in the
district of Budhaon, in that province, there is a small
town, the capital of a Pergannah of the same name,
called Cote-Sdlbahan, or the fort of ‘Sa’Lpa’Han, and
said to have been built by him.

The chief authorities, after the Vicrama-charitra,,
and the other books I have mentioned before, are the
last sections, or rather supplements to the Agni and
Bhavishya-purdn‘as, the list of the kings of Mdlwd, in

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 151
the Ayin-Acberi, the Vansévéli, or Rajcodli, written
by Rasa’ Racuuna’tua, of the Cach’hwa tribe, at the
command of the emperor AuRENGzEBE; and, lastly,
a list of the Bala-Rayas, or Balhara emperots, and
of the sovereigns of Afalwd. The last section, or
rather supplement or appendix to the 4gni-purdma, is
the best chronological list that has come to my know-
ledge. It is seldom found annexed to that Purana ;
no more than the appendix to the Bhavishya. I was
however fortunate enough to find it at the end of a
copy of the Agni-purana, at least two hundred years
old; and, though complete, almost worn out. There
I found the beginning of the appendix on futurity,
exactly in the same hand-writing with the body of
that Purdn‘a, and the owner most kindly made me a
present of the last leaf, which contains both the end
of that Purdn‘a, and the beginning of the appendix.
In a copy of that appendix, it is said to be the 63d
and last section of the Agni-purava. The numbers
do not correspond now, though it be acknowledged,
that the division of the Purdn‘as, into sections, has
not been the same, at all times, and in every part of
India.

With regard to the appendix, or section, of the
Bhavishya-purana, it is obvious that it never made
part of that Purdna, at least in its present state:
but, as it treats of futurity (Bhavishya), it was pro«
bably on that account attributed to it; for it appears
that it belonged originally to some astronomical trea-
tise, and it is very much like the preliminary section
to the Jyétirvidébhardna. It is supposed by some,
that it is a short extract from the second part of that
Purana, which either no longer exists, or is not to
be commonly found. In the first part, there is not
a word about futurity, or the times to come.

These lists are the more valuable, as they give us
K 2

132 ESSAY ON

an account of the.emperors of the west in India, of
whom little or no notice is taken in the Purdémas.
The chief object of tle compilers seems to be to esta-
blish the chronology of the western parts of India,
since the expiation of Cua’nacya, down to the death
of Pirnaura’, and Jaya-Cnanpra, in the year
1192. The three first lists are nearly the same, and
probably they were originally so; and as thelist of
the emperors of the west in India, in the Ayin-Acberi,
is one of them, it is obvious, that above two hun-
dred years ago, they were considered, by the Pan-
dits who assisted Aput-Fazit, as authentic docu-
ments.

The fourth list is from a work entitled Vansdcali,
or the genealogies; but more commonly called Rdja-
vali, or reigns and successions of kings. It was.
written in the year 1659, by Ra‘sa RaGHuna’THA,
of the Cach’hwa tribe, at the command of AuRENG-
ZEBE. ‘This has been translated into all the dialects
of India, and new modelled, at least twenty different
ways, according to the whims and pre-conceive
ideas of every individual, who chose to meddle
with it. |

It is, however, the basis and ground-work of mo-
dern history among the Hindus ; as in the Khuldaset-
ul Tuwdric, and the Tadkerdtussalatin. The latter
treatise is a most perfect specimen of the manner of
writing history in India; for, excepting Racuu-
Na’TH’s list, almost every thing else is the production
of the fertile genius of the compiler, who lived
above a hundred years ago. In all these lists the
compilers and revisers seem to have had no other
object in view, but to adjust a ‘certain number of
remarkable epochs. This being once effected, the
intermediate spaces are filled up with names of kings
not to be found any where else, and, most probably,

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 133

fanciful. Otherwise they leave out the names of
those kings of whom nothing is recorded, and attri-
bute the years of their reigns to some among them
better known, and of greater fame. They often do not
scruple to transpose some of those kings, and even
whole dynasties; either in consequence of some pre-
conceived opinion, or owing to their mistaking a fa-
mous king for another of the same name. It was not
uncommon with ancient writers, to pass from a remote
ancestor to a remote descendant; or from a remote
predecessor to a remote successor, by leaving out the
intermediate generations or successions, and sometimes
ascribing the years of their reigns to a remote successor
or predecessor. In this manner the lists of the ancient
kings of Persia, both by oriental writers and others
in the west, have been compiled: and some instances,
of this nature, might be produced from scripture.
I was acquainted lately, at Benares, with a chroni-
cler of that sort; and, in the several conversations I
had with him, he candidly acknowledged, that he
filled up the intermediate spaces between the reigns
of famous kings, with names at a venture; that he
shortened or lengthened their reigns at pleasure; and
that it was understood, that his predecessors had
taken the same liberties. (His lucubrations were
of little use to me; but he had collected various
‘lists of kings, of which he allowed me, with much
difficulty, to take copies.) Through their emenda-
tions and corrections, you see plainly a total want of
historical knowledge and criticism; and sometimes
some disingenuity is but too obvious.

This is, however, the case with the sections on fu-
turity in the Bhagavat, Vayu, Vishnu and Brahmdn'da-
puranas ; which, with the above lists, constitute the
whole stock of historical knowledge among the
Hindus; and the whole might be comprised in a few
quarto pages of print. ‘These I have collected toge-

K 3 |

134 ESSAY ON

ther, with notes, derived from the assistance of fo-—
reign writers; and hereafter they may be corrected,
from a few historical passages in their books, grants,
and inscriptions, which last must be used soberly.
With regard to these lists, their being brought down,
even to our own days, can be no objection; for it is
the case with many of our old chronicles. We have
them in the dyin-Acberi, in the state they were in at
that time. I have some copies, in which their chro-
nology is brought down to the reign of AurENG-
zEBE: and, lastly, some, in which the arrival of the
English is foretold, under the name of Tamra-varn‘a,
foreigners, the offspring of Maya, the engineer of
the giants, and the son of Twasuta. Tamra-varn'a
literally signifies copper-coloured, but is interpreted
Artna-varia, or of the colour of the morning dawn;
and, in lexicons, the Greeks, or Yavanas, are said to
be Tamra-varn'a. In RaGuunatH’s list, it is re-
markable, that no obvious notice is taken, either of
the elder VickRaAMADITYA, or of SA'LIVA'HANA;
they are however concealed under the names of
Apitya, ridiculously written ApHEscuT by Trer-
FENTHALER, and under that of DuHanangaya, which
last is meant for Sa’tiva’HAawa. ‘ApiTyA is obvi-
ously meant here for Vicrama; in some copies he is
called Hara-pua’Ga, or a portion of Hara, the de-
stroyer; because it was necessary that he should de-
stroy 550,000,000 men from among the impure tribes,
before he could obtain the rank of a Sacés‘wara ; and
whatever man kills a Sacéswara only, obtains that
exalted rank, as did Sa’Liva’HANA.

DHANANJAYA, or DHANID‘HARA, as he is called
also, is supposed by ABux Fazix, to have been the
granciather of Sa’Liva‘HANA™*: but, ag there are se-

* Ayin-Acberi, vol. 2d, p. 54.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 135

veral kings and legislators called Vicrama ; in the
same manner we find also several Sa‘Liva’HANAS.
This grandson of Duanansaya is made contempo-
rary with another Vicrama DiTya, who is supposed
to have begun his reign A. D. 191; but, according
to others, either in the year 184 or 200. In Ra-
GHUNA’TH’s lists, current in the western parts of Jn-
dia, which have appeared in print, instead of ‘Sa‘it-
VA HANA, We find SamvpRa-PA La, perhaps a disciple
of his, and thus called, because he came by sea. In
this remarkable instance, tlhiese lists differ, most ma-
terially, from those in use in the Gangetic provinces,
and eastern parts of India. In the latter, in the room
of VicRAMADITYA, we read ‘Suraca, or SUDRACA,
a famous emperor of Jndia, mentioned in the Purd-
was, and of whom it is said, in the Cwmarica-chanda,
that he would ascend the imperial throne, after 3290
years of the Cali-yuga were elapsed, that is to say,
in the year of our Lord 191, and that he would reign
in the city of Charchitd, thus called from the search
(cherche in French,) or inquiries made there into vari-
ous religious opinions, and new dogmas; and thus
it is understood by learned men from the west of
India, and it appears that there were several cities
thus called. This Supraca had also the title of V1-
crAMA, and of A’prrya: but in the eastern lists no
mention is made of SamupDRA-PA LA. TIEFFENTHA-
LER takes notice of him, and BErNouLtt has given
us the whole legend, such as it is in the MSS. co-
pies.

When VicraMa’DITYA was ninety years of age,
then came Samupra-pa’‘LA, or he who was fostered,
or wafted over, by Samudra, or the ocean, because it
is understood, that he came from distant countries by
sea. He appeared in the character of a holy man,
working miracles, and, as it seems, preaching about

K 4

a

136 ESSAY ON

regeneration. He was kindly received by Vicrama~
pitya, who being old and decrepit, wished very
much to be regenerated. SamMuDRA-PALA complied
with his wishes; and, as there was a stout young
man just dead, he directed the old king to send his
own soul into that corpse, and showed him how to
do it. Vicrama’pitya did so, and the young man
revived immediately, to the great astonishment of the
multitude. In the mean time, SAaMUDRA-PA‘LA Con-
veyed his own soul into the body of the king; and,
in that old and decrepit frame, he contrived to main-
tain himself, for the space of 55 years, or more cor-
rectly 54 years, two months, and twenty days; and
thus governed the country, with unlimited sway, in
the shape and character of Vicramapitya. ‘These
55 years being added to the 90 years of Vicrama’s
life or reign, the sum, 145, is exactly the difference
between the eras of Vicrama, and ‘SA’LIVA‘HANA,
in the Dekhin; for, in the northern parts of India,
they reckon only 135 years. This new Saxiva-
HANA, or rather his disciple, or follower, if he ever
existed, died in the year 335; for this second V1-
CRAMA, or ‘SupRaca, as he is called in the Cuma-
rica Chanda, ascended the Imperial throne in the year
of Curtst 191: but in Racsauna‘ry’s list, this
event took place in the year ¢91. ‘That there is an
error of 100 years is obvious, on the authority of the
above section of the Scanda-purdn‘a, and also from
the particulars in the same list. There it is declared,
that the succession of the Hindu princes ended in
the year of the Cali-yuga 4116, answering to that of
Curist 1016; but the particulars give 4216; and,
by retrenching these 100 years, the aggregate sums,

resulting from the subordinate periods, perfectly

agree with the general one, as given at full length in
the list. These subordinate periods become also pro-
portionate to oneanother, from Mawa’BALI’s accession
to the throne, 355 B. C. down to the year 1016 of

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA, 137

our era. The reason why these 100 years, and a few
more in another place, were introduced, is that the
correctors of this list confounded the final overthrow
of the Hindu empire, in the year 1192, by SauzBup-
DEEN, with the mortal wounds given to it by
SepecteGcuin, and his son Maumoup, in the begin-
ning of the eleventh century. In all the copies
which I have seen, of Racuu Na'Tu’s list, an obvious
notice is taken of the famous emperor Buéja: yet
the learned insist that he is concealed there, under
the epithets of Deva-DuaRa’-sinua, as he is called
in some lists, and ‘Sarta-DuHa‘RA-sSINHA in others :
but in many copies these names are written errone-
ously Damo-Duara-s'ENA, and JALA-DHARA-SENA,
In the Bhéja-prabandha the epithet Deva is always
prefixed to his name, thus Dr’va-Buoésa ; and in the
room of these various, surnames, we find in some
copies Diva’yana-sinua. As Buésa was king of
Dhara (now Dhar) he might certainly be denomi-
nated Dua‘ra-sinua. ‘This famous city is called also
‘Siila-dhard, and Buoésa is called ‘Sa‘tLa’prtya, or
VicraMaApiTyva, who resided at ‘Sdila-dhard, in the
Satrujaya-mahatmya ; and in the same manner, ‘Sa‘Lt-
VAHANA is denominated Parran-sinna or ‘SE'NA,
from the town of Pratisthdna (or Pattan) where he
is said to have resided. If so, the new modellers of
these lists have introduced many obscure, or rather |
fictitious names, in order to fill up the space, between
that emperor and the downfal of the empire in 1192,
by SaneBuppeEx, which they have confounded
with the catastrophe under Maumup-BEN-SEBEC-
TEGHIN. In various lists, which I have seen, Se-
BECTEGHIN’S name is written SEBECTEKIN, SANEC-
TEKIN, NecTexin, &c,

As Buoésa is not noticed by any foreign writer, it
is impossible to ascertain the time in which he lived,
from the vague and contradictory data to be found in

138 ESSAY ON

‘Hindu romance, within 100 years at least of the
real time. Such is however the state of the Hindu
chronology, even in modern times: and-from such
wretched materials what can be expected? Western
historians, and those of Chima, have occasionally re-
corded eclipses, which are of great service in chrono-
logy; but they are absolutely disregarded by Hindu
writers ; at least, I have never been able to procure a
single observation upon record, and connected with
any historical fact, or the reign of any well-known
king or emperor.

In these different lists, the principal eras are, the
accession of Mana’-Baxr to the Imperial throne,
355 years B.C. his death in 327, the massacre of the
Imperial family in 315, and finally, the expiation of
Cuawn’acya, 312 years B. C. and of these remarkable
events I took particular notice in my essay on the
Gangetic provinces, it. .

The next remarkable era is that of ‘Sa’Liva Hawa
and the eldest VicraAmapitya: this the compilers
and revisers have wrapt up in such darkness, and I
believe designedly, that it 1s almost impossible to re-
cognise these two famous kings. In some, ‘Sa‘Liva-
HANA is called Parran-sinuaA; in others DHanwan-
gaya, Duanapuara, &c. ‘Saca, Sacri-srnna; and
in the Vrihat-cathd, Sama-sita, and Vi-sAMA-SiLA,
and lastly Ha’ta and Sa‘ta, Has and Sa'x1, Nri-
sINHA and Nara vVAHANA. VICRKAMADITYA is
sometimes called ‘Apitya simply; in other places
VicramMa, VICRAMAMITRA, VICRAMA-TUNGA, VI-
CRAMA-SINHA, VICRAMA-SENA, VICRAMA-CESA‘RI,
VicramaRrca, &c. whilst he is sometimes left out
entirely; which is immaterial, as they say, when Sa-
LIVA'HANA, his antagonist, is mentioned. — ~

The third epoch is that of king Suraca, called

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA, 139

also ‘Apitya, and Rasa-Vicrama, who began his
reign in the year 191.

The fourth era is that of Vicram’apitya the son
of Gawpuarupa, whose reign began in the year 441.

The fifth is the appearance of Mana-puar or
MuuamMep; and the sixth is the accession of
Buosa, called also Vicramapitya, to the imperial
throne.

The seventh era is the defeat and death of P1-
THAURA in 1192, and that of JAYA-cHANDRA, in
the year 1194.

Let us now examine and compare together the lists
in the appendix to the dgni, and to the Bhavishya-
purdnas, and also in the Ayin-Acberi. In the Bha-
wishya, the years are omitted, but it agrees otherwise
with the other lists, as much as can reasonably be
expected.

There are three kings in the appendix to the Agni
purdna, seemingly in a regular order of succession ;
but who are to be rejected from the list; as it ap-
pears, from the context, that they were only in a
collateral line, and seem to have been rebellious vas-
sals, who, taking advantage of the weakness of their
liege, set up for themselves, in their own country.
The first was a rebel of the name of ‘Araca, as seem-
ingly implied by his name, who made himself inde-
pendant, and resided in the town of D’hara. He
lived 190 years; that is to say, his collateral dynasty
lasted so many years, and this dynasty was very
properly omitted in the Ayin-Acberi. ‘Then comes
SUC H-S'ENA, or SUMUC'H-s'ENA, With another king
called Cua’pca or C’uarca; and these resided at
Chitra-cita in Bundelchand, as asserted in that sec-

140 ESSAY ON

tion or appendix, Sumuc’na-s'enA 18 called Keneck-
sEIN in the Ayin-Acberi ; and in that treatise, Chitra-
cuta, their metropolis, is metamorphosed into a king,
to whom a rcign of one year only is allotted. The
names of the three next princes, CHANDRAPALA,
MauneNDRA-PALA and Kurrum-cuunp, in the 4yin-
Acberi, should be written in this manner, Ra‘ma-
CHANDRA, Who did not reign: his son was Cuat-
TRA-PA'LA, who was elected emperor of India after
the death of Jaya-nanpa. His son and successor
was Ma‘HA-cHANDRA-PA'LA; but I conceive that
the true name of the latter was Manr'npra-
PALA. ,

From Cua'wacya’s expiation to the first year of
Vicrama’pitya, the son of Gannua-rupa, the
three lists do not materially differ from each other
with regard to the number of kings, and the order
of succession. The greatest difficulty is, from the
first year of Vicrama’pirya, the son of Ganp-
HA-RUPA, or Harsua-mMeGHA, which last is a ridi-
culous epithet for an ass, to the first of Buésa. The
greatest part of the names of the kings, in this list, are
probably fictitious, except some of the most illustrious.
The first we recognise is Man’aBai, or Nanpa,
who ascended the throne of Jndia 355 years before
Cunrist. From his accession there elapsed 299 years,
according to Racuuna’rn’s list, to the death of
VicramMaDiTya, which happened 56 years B.C.
Then appears Duanansaya, who put to death Apit-
yA: these are Sa‘LIVAHANA and VICRAMADITYA:
the times coincide, and the name of one of them.
DuHANANJAYA is also the name of A’ryunA in the
Maha-bhérat, of whom it is said, that he did not
exult over the ignorant and ill-favoured, but spent
his riches among the needy ; in short, he was the
wonder of all good men. This is the character
given of Sativa nana in the Cumdricd-chanda, and

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 14f

the Agni-purdn'a. This second Duanansaya, called
also DHANANDHARA, is reckoned as an Utpata, or
prodigy; and some account of him is given in the
Ayin-Acberi*, and also in traditionary legends.
He sprang suddenly from tise middle of a temple at-
Prat-shténa in the Dekhin, in a human form, and
with a divine countenance, holding a bright sword.
He attacked A’pirya, or Vicramapitya, whom he
put to death; then, leaving the Dekhin, he made
Ujjayini the seat of his empire. In the grant found
at Monghir, allusion is made to VicraMma’pItya,
under the name of ‘Sacapwisui, the foe of Saca
or SALIVAHANA; and it is not improbable that the
ptime minister, in the inscription on a pillar at Bud-
daul, is compared to ‘Saiva’HaNA, under the name
of Duawan-sayat.

There were undoubtedly many Vicrama‘DITYAS ;
but which of them instituted the era denominated
after him, is by no means obvious: for there is hardly
any instance, I believe, of any sovereign or legis-
lator that ever instituted an era called’ after him,
and beginning with some memorable event, during
the course either of his life or of his reign. Any
one of them might have instituted the era ; but if
does not follow that he lived at the beginning of: it.
The author of the Vansavéli, and in general all those
who have attempted to new model his list, say, that
the era of \VicRaAMADITYA was instituted by his
brother Buarrrinart, or ‘Suca’pitya, who is called
Sacwanra on that account. He reigned fourteen
years ; and after his death, Vicrama’pitya took it
up, made some corrections, and had it called after
his own name. This circumstance is noticed by

* Vol. Il, p. 54.
+ Asiat, Researches, Vol. I.

142 ESSAY ON

Bernovuritt, from the Tadkerat-assalatin; but the .
copy in Mr. Haxrncron’s possession is the most ex-
plicit’on this subject, and I find that it is by no
means a new idea. According to some, these fourteen
years are the difference between the era of Vicra-
MA DITYA in its corrected, and the same in its original
state. This Suca’piTya Is called also Vicrama’DIT-
yA in the Dekhin, and is said to have begun his
reign in the year of the Cali-yuga 3020, and to have
died in the year 3034, from which they reckon the
era of Vicrama: but in the northern parts of India,
they say that he began his reign in the year $030, -
and died in the year 3044. Yet this Buartrrinart,
in the collection of tales attributed to him, alludes
to another VicramA DiTyA, who, from the context,
certainly lived long before him. Such is the uncer-
tainty about this famous emperor, that we are obliged
to distinguish between the years since the time of
VicramMa/pDitya and those of his era. Thus, in the
‘Satrujaya-mahatmya, we read, that after 466 years
of the era are elapsed, then would appear the great
and famous VicrAma’pDITya ; and then, 477 after
him, ‘Sarra’pitya, or Buésa, would reign. In the
Ayin-Acberi, the various dates, from the era of V1-
CRAMADITYA, are to be reckoned from his acces- ©
sion to the throne, in the middle ages of the Chris-

tian era. . et

The third epoch in my list, and in most of the
lists in the eastern parts of India, is that of Suraca,
who was succeeded by his brother Crisuwa, accord-
ing to the Purdwas. He began his reign in the year
191, and was also considered as a VICRAMA‘DITYA,
or rather a Samyarica, or author of a civil period ;
and of him also I took particular notice in my essay
on the Gangetic provinces.

The next period is that of Vicrama’pitya, the

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 145

son of the man with the countenance of anass. He
is called in the list GanpHA-pa’La, or fostered by
anass. This prince is omitted in several copies from
the west; and between Ganpua-pa’La and Vicra-
MA‘DITYA, or VicRAMA-PA‘LA, as he is called in
‘these copies, there intervenes a king called Sa’pat-
pa‘LA. This Vicrama’pirya had two sons, one
called Trraca-cHaNnpra, who reigned only two
years, and was succeeded by his eldest brother, Vi-
CRAMA-SE/NA, or VicRAMA‘DITYA; and this TrLaca-,
CHANDRA appears in the character of Buarrni-
HARI.

The next period is that of Mana’puar-Sri’Man-
Maua’rna sa’, or Munammen the blessed, or fortu-
nate, the great commander of the faithful. In various
copies he is called Mana’Bua’t’a’a’Raca, and Mana-
BHATT A‘RICA. In Mr. Harinerton’s list, the epi-
thet of Paras, answering to SersvLLAu in Arabic,
or the sword of God, is prefixed to his'‘name. In all
the copies from the west of Jndia, he is called Mana
Prema, for Maua-PramMana, the great destroyer ;
and to the names of his four confidential associates,
the epithet of Prema, or Prema’ra, is also added.
Instead of Prema, we should read Prama’ra, or
Parrmara, the destroyer; for, in the Satrujaya-
Mahétmya, a favourite tract of the Jainas, he and
his friends are called the Pancua-ma’RAS, or the
five destroyers. It is said there, that Jina, in his
last incarnation, as Gaurama in the shape of a
white elephant, and therefore denominated Sri-
Hasti-sena, having obtained eternal bliss, then,
three years, eight months, and fifteen days after this
event, there would appear Sacra-Pancua-Manra,
who would put an end to all Dharma, or religion *.

ee ny

* ‘Sacra, or the mighty chief,

144 ESSAY ON

Thus the death of Gavrama happened in Novem-
ber 617 ; and his death, in the Puranas, and according
to the Japanese, is placed either late in the sixth, or
early in the seventh century. Pram’ara, the great

—

destroyer, or Part-m’ara, he who destroys all round, |
is one of the titles of Yama, and very applicable to

MuunamMeEpD. ‘The Hindus, in the. western parts of
India, are well acquainted with the famous Charyari
of the Musulmans, or the four friends and associates

of MunamMep. Some, with a little straining, de- _

rive this name from the Sanscrit; and thus the four

destroyers, with their leader, become the PancHa- ©

Ma’ras, or the five destroyers. Mr. HarineTon’s
list, which was brought from Assam by the late Dr.
Wanpr, seems to have been new modelled by the

Jainas; as GAUTAMA is introduced there, waging

war against a certain Manu.

The next subject of inquiry is the Cumédricé-
Chanda, asection of the Scanda-purana. The copy in
my possession was written in Gegjarat two hundred

and thirty years ago, or in the year of VicramaDI-.
rya 1630, A. D. 1574; and in the year of Vicrama |

1796, or A. D. 1740, it was the property of a learned

Pandit, «ho made several corrections in the margin, —

as usual in India. The owner of that section, 230
years ago, obviously considered it as authentic, and
as making part of one of the canonical books; and
the copies in general use in this part of the country
do not materially differ from it. According to the
context, this Purdn'a must have been written when
the Roman empire, probably in the east, was in the
zenith of its glory; for the author mentions it as the

largest in the world, and says that it consisted of no

less than 18,030,000 villages, or rather parishes, and
he speaks of it as existing in that powerful and ex-
tensive state in hisown time. Six dates only are given
in this section. ‘The first is SupRaca, or SuRaca,

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 145

who was to appear when 8300 years, save 10, of the
Cali-yuga were elapsed in the city of Charchita.

_ The first Vrcrama pDITYa is mentioned in the Cu-
marica-chanda*, in which it is declared, that after
3020 years of the Cali-yuga had elapsed, then would
Vicramarca appear. He reigned fourteen years,
and of course died in the year 3034, when the era
of YupuisuTir ended, and his own began. In the
list of the kings who were to appear in the Cal-yuga,
to be found in the Bhdaguvata, Brahmdnda, Vayu,
and Vishnu-puran‘as, there are two kings, the seven-
teenth and eighteenth in regular succession from
CHanpracurta, who reigned seven years each. The
first is called Vicrama, and the other Mirra; and
they are supposed to have been originally meant for
VicrAMAMITRA; Who, according to some, reigned
fourteen years: and in these lists, the father, or pre-
decessor of Vicrama, is called Guosna-Ra’sa, or
the king of thickets, which is another name for
GANDHARUPA, or GADHA-RAJA in the west. This
looks like an interpolation; and the more so, as it

_ will appear hereafter, that GuosHa-Ra’sa died in
the year 440 of our era.

_ This is the Vicrama’pitya, after whom the pre-
sent Samvat is supposed to be denominated; and it
is the general opinion, that the first year of it is the
next to that in which he died. Yet the Pandits,
who assisted AsuL-Fazit, declared that it was the
first of his reign: it is also the opinion of many re-
spectable Pandits, particularly in the western parts
of India. This is more contormable to a passage
in the Cumédricd-chanda t+, in which it is declared,
that after 3100 years of the Cali-yuga were elapsed,
then would ‘Saca, or ‘Sa‘Liva’HANA, appear. By

-* Paragraph. 42d. + Paragraph. 42d,
Voi. IX. L

146 ESSAY ON

this first year of Sa’LivAHANA, We must not under
stand it, as meant of the first of his eva; but of the
first of his reign, which is unconnected with his

riod, In that case, Vicrama‘rca lived 56 years ;
ia death happened then in the 57, or the first of the
Christian era, the very year in which Sa’Liya‘HANa,
the lord and master of Rome, made his appearance,
and after whom the eva, in use threwgh that empire,
is denominated.

The second Vicrama’pitya is the same with
‘Snri-Carn’a-De'va, called also Supraca and Sura-
cA; and is mentioned in the Ve'tdlapancha-vin'sati,
under the name of VicRAMA-CE'SARI, prime minister
of the Emperor of India, at Pdatali-putra-puram, It
is he, to whom a Bréhmen gave strong hints, to seize
upon the throne, and avail himself of the infirmities
of his master. He is the Vickama‘DITYA mentioned. ©
by Funisura, in his history of, dndia; and whom he
makes contemporary with Saror, king of Persia.
He is also mentioned in the Bhéja-charitra ; for,
when Ra‘sa-Munsa wanted to destroy secretly
young Budsa his nephew, the latter, being apprised
of it, effected his escape, and wrote to him several
couplets, well known to the learned; wherein, re-
proaching him with his dark and base scheme, he
says, “ Sri-Carn‘a-Ra’Ja-ViIcRAMA is no more, and
he carried nothing along with him out of his. immense
treasures; but died like another man.” From that
circumstance, the title Sriféarn’ a-Raya-VICRAMA
was conferred upon Budédsa by posterity. It seems
that he attempted to establish an era of his own, .
which however did not last long. The Pandits, who
waited upon Azut-l'aziL, informedhim, that several
princes had attempted to, set up eras, denominated
after their own names: and this is also asserted by,
many learned men now; but these new eras were,
soon doomed to oblivion,

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. ‘147

The third Vicrama/pitya was the son of Garp-
DABHARUPA, of RASHABHA-SENA, or the man with
the countenance of an ass. That name is pro-
nounced GapHa-RUPA, or GANDHA-RUPA, in the
spoken dialects; and he is called also GADHENDRA,
or the lord of asses, and Guosua-ra‘Ja, or the king

of thickets and bashes.

In the list of the emperors of Jndia, in the annexed
table, he is called Gannv’Ha-pa’La ; and, at Ujjayini,
his name is GANDHA-RUFFSENA, according to Dr.
Hunter of our Society *. A. Recer writes it
VENEROUTFSI, OF GuENEROUTISI: but says, that
it was the name of the sister of Vicrama'DITYA,
who, they insist in the Deccan, was himself the son
of a Brahmen of Benares, called CHANDRA-GUPTA ;
and there is a fulsome account of the birth of this
VicraAMA, in, the first section of the Stnhdsana-
dwatrin'sati, called Vicrama-Upachyana. _“ In Guryj-
Jara-man ‘dalam ave the Sabharamati, and Mahi rivers:
between them is a forest, in which resided Tamra-
LIPTA-RISHI, whose daughter married king TamRa-
S'ENA. ‘They had six male children, and one daugh-
ter, called Mapana-REC HA. The king had two
young lads, called Deva-s arma’ and Hart- SARMA,
whose duty chiefly was to wash, every day, the
clothes of their master, in the waters of the nearest
river. One day, as Dr/vas ARMA’ went, by himself,
for that purpose, he heard a voice saying, tell king
Tamra-SENA to give me his daughter; should he
refuse me, he will repent it. The lad, on his return,
mentioned the whole to his master ; who would not
believe it, and next day sent Harr SARMA’ to the
river, who heard. the same voice also, with the threats
in case of aretusal. The king was astonished ; ; and,
going himself, heard the voice also. On his return,

* Asiat. Research. Vol. 6th. p. 35.
LQ

148° ESSAY ON

he assembled his council; and, after consulting to-
gether, it was agreed, that the king should go again,
and ask him who he was. The supposed spirit, being
questioned, answered, Lam a Gand‘harva, or heavenly
choirister ; whe, having incurred Inpra’s displea-
sure, was doomed to assume the shape of an ass. I
was born in that shape, in the house of a Cumbha-
cara, or potter, in your capital city ; and I am daily
roving about in quest of tood. The king said, that
he was very willing to give him his daughter; but
that he conceived, that such an union was altogether
impossible, whilst he remained in that shape. The.
Ganpuarva said, trouble not yourself abont that ;
comply with my request, and it will be well with

ou. If, says the king, you are so powerful, turn
the walls of my city, and those of the houses, into
brass; and let it be done before sun-rise a

The Gannuarva agreed to it, and the whole was
completed by the appointed time; and the king, of
course, gave him his daughter.” Several learned
Pandits inform me, that this GAND’HARVA’S name
was JayANnTA, the sonof Branma’.. When cursed
by Inpra, he humbled himself; and Inpra, relent-
ing, allowed him to resume his human shape in the
night time; telling him, that the curse should not
y done away, till somebody had burned his ass-like
rame. .

It is said, in the Vicrama-Updchyana, that the
mother of the damsel spied them once in the night ;
and, to her great joy, found that the GanpHarva
dallied with her daughter in a human shape. Re-
joiced at this discovery, she looked for his ass-like
form, and burned it. Early in the morning, the
Ganpuarva looked for this body of his, and found
thatit had been destroyed. He returned immediately
to his wife, informing her of what had happened,
and that his curse being at an end, he was obliged to
return to heaven, and leave her. He informed her

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 149

also, that she was with child by him, and that the
name of the child was to be VicramaDrtya: that
her maid was with child also, and that the name of
the child should be Baarrni-uarr. He then left
his wife, who resolved to die; and, ripping up her
own belly, she took out the child, and intrusted it to
the care of a Malini, or the wife of a gardener, ora
flower woman. ‘Go,’ said she, ‘to some. distant
place, and there remain concealed ; because my father
will attempt to destroy the child. The Mdlini went
to Ujjayini, with the maid; and from the signal pre-
servation of the child, in that city, it was also
called Avanti, from the Sanscrit ava, to preserve.

In the Agni-purdna, the father of the damsel is
called SapasvaseENnA, in the Bhavishya-purdan'a V a-
sup HA’: Ferisuta says that his name was Baspe£o;
whom he represents as emperor of India, and re-
siding at Canouge; but the author of the Vicrama-
Upachyana says that he was a powerful prince, in the
west of Jzdia, and possessed of the countries which
we find, afterwards, constituting the patrimonial
territories of the Balahara, which included Gurjja-
rasht'ra (or Gujarat, ) with some adjacent districts.
In the Ayin-Acberi he is called SupHROWsHENEH,
and at Ujjayini, SunDERSENA, according to Dr.
Hunter, who says that this incarnation took place
in the time of that prince*. This is obviously the
history of Yrsprsirp, son of Banram-Gor, or Bax-
RAM the ass, king of Persia: the grand features are
the same, and the times coincide perfectly. The
amours of Banram-Gér, with an Indian princess,
are famous all over Persia, as well as in India. Ac-
cording to D’uERBELorT, there is still a romance in
Persian, called the amours of BanRam and GuL-
Enpam, the Jndian princess.

A

* Asiat, Researches, Vol, VI. p- 35.
‘LS

150 ESSAY ON

This Vicrama’‘piTya ascended the throne of Ada-
lava, in the year 441, reckoning from the first of
‘Sa'‘tiva‘HANA; and 753 years after the expiation of
CuaNacya, according to the Agni-purdn’a, answer-
ing equally to the year of Curist 441. In the Bha-
wishya-purdn'a, in which the years are omitted, V1-
CRAMADITYA is placed in the same order of regular
succession: conformably also to the list of the em-
perors of India, in the annexed table. Du Fresnoy,
in his Chronological tables*, says, that the first year
of his reign answered to the 441 of the Christian
era; and the authors of the Ancient Universal His-
tory place this event inthe 442d: and surely no greater
degree of precision could be expected f.

This Vicrama was the son of the man with the
countenance of an ass; but his grand father was Ari-
Brauma, in the Ayin-Acheri, and whose father was
Brauma. Now Yezpes rp, called Isp1e¢Ertxs by
the Greeks, was the son of Banram with the nick
name of Gur or the ass. His grand father was
another YEzDEJIRD, called also Varames or BARAM,
with the title of Arnim, and answering to ATI-
- Birmauw; and whose father was called Banram,
the same with Brauma, Brrman, or BAnRAM, as
his name is spelt by TrerFENTHALER, and in many
MSS. lists, The Greeks pronounced it VARAMEs,
and even Baraw, as it is written by THeoPpuyLacr
Simocatra tf. Jayanta, the son of Brana, in-
curred the displeasure of Inpra, king of the elevated —
grounds of Meru, or Turkestan; and was doomed,
by him, to assume the shape of an ass, in the lower
regions. BauraM-Gor, or the ass, likewise incurred
the displeasure of the Khacan, or mortal king of

* Du Fresnoy, Vol. 2d. p. 408.
+ Anc. Univ. History, Vol. 9th. p. 278,
} See Photii Bibliotheca. p. 87.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 151

Aleru. He ascended the throne of Persia ; and,
after having overcome his enemies, he went to India,
in disguise, to the court of a powerful prince of that
country, who took particular notice of him, on ac-
count of his valour and personal merit. The Indian
prince loaded him with caresses and honours; and
gave him his daughter, with an immense fortune ;
when he was recognized by some nobleman, who
had carried the usual tribute to Persia. Being thus
discovered, he returned to his own country, after an
absence of two years. ‘The Hindus assert, that he
refused to take his wite along with him; and that,
im consequence, she killed herself, They shew, to
this day, the place where he lived, about one day’s
march to the north of Saroach, with the ruins of
his palace. In old records, this place i is called Gad-
*hendra-puri, or the town of the lord of asses. The
present name is Goshera, or Ghojara tor Ghosha-rdya
or Ghosha-raa: for, says my Pandit, who is a native
of that country, the inhabitants, being ashamed of
its true name, have softened it into Ghoshera, which
has nomeaning. Baran, the ass, had 12000 danc-
ing women sent to him, from Jndia; and it 1s sup-
posed, that those of that profession, in the same
country, to this day, are descended from them, This
Bauram had been brought up among Christians,
in Arabia; and king Noomay, who had been in-
trusted with his education, died a Christian, But
Bauram abhorred the Christian name, and eruelly
persecuted all those of that profession ; and this was.
the cause of a bloody war with the Roman emperors,
in which the armies-of Bauram were repeatedly
defeated; and-ence forced to plunge into the Ha-
phrates; when above 100,000 men were drowned.
His son inherited all his rancour; but, being be-
loved by his troops, the emperors ‘of Constantinople
were obliged to submit, and to pay a yearly contri-
bution.

L4 i

152 ESSAY ON

‘This Banram, or Vicrama'pitya, the Hindus
claim as their own countr ryman ; for, im the appendix
to the Agni-purdia, he is declared to be Carn‘ansya,
or of the family of ‘Sri-Carna ; which is possible on
the maternal side. ~ )

This is the Vicrama pity A, whose younger brother
was called Buarrrinart; famous for his piety and
learning ; and who succeeded his father, though
the youngest: but being disgusted with the world,
on ‘account of the infidelity of his favourite wife,
he abdicated the throne of J4dlava, and retired to
Benares ; where he ended his days in devout con-
templation: though many are of opinien that he
is still alive. When he left the throne, his brother
was gone to distant countries; and the ‘whole king-
dom being thrown into confusion, was soon over-
run with “demons, the chief of whom had taken
possession of the throne ; and it was with the utmost
difficulty that Vicrama drove him away, by gentle
means, and even conciliated his favour, and there-
by obtained a boon from him, to sit upon the throne
for 100 years.

It is the general opinion, that Vicrama‘piTyA
put his brother Suca’pirya, or Buarrrinart, to.
a most slow and cruel death, by severing his head,
with a knife, both small and ‘bad. His putting
him to death is mentioned by Hotwet1, and Mr.
WiLKINs * |

Buarrrinart, according to the Hindus in general,
withdrew to Chunar near Benares, where he remains
ed some time; when his brother gave him a purganah,
or small district, called to this day Bhartari, and

* Asiat. Researches, Vol. 1st. p. 129.

VICRAMADITYA®* AND SALIVAHANA, 153

Bhittri, after him; and which is to the eastward

of the mouth of the river Gomtt. There are the
remains of a pretty large fort, with the ruins of his

palace. Near it is a stone pillar, with an inscription, —

containing only a few couplets from the Adaha-Bha-
rata: it is however remarkable, on account of the
curious connexions of the letters.

Being obliged to go often to Benares, he raised
an artificial hill, at some distance from the northern
banks of the little river Burn'd, to the north of the
city, exactly in the shape of the hill of Chunar, on

nich he resided. It is a work of great magnitude ;
and near it is a small village, called, from that cir-
cumstance, Pahdar-pur, or Hill-burgh.

In the lists of the kings of Gwalior, both MSS.
and printed, it is declared, that Su’rya-sr'Na, or
Su’RYA-PA'LA, Called also So'Ma-pa‘La, built the fort
of Gwalior, in the year 332 of Vicrama’pitya, by
whom we must understand the son of Banuram-
Go’r ; and thus, the building of this famous citadel
took place in the year. 773; and probably, on ac-
count of the astonishing progress of the Musulman
invaders, on the banks of the Indus. The kings
_of that country resided at a place called Canti or
Cantipura (now Cotwall, nine cos to the north of
Gwalior, according to Lizut. Witson’s information).
The origin of this little kingdom is mentioned in
the prophetic chapters of the Véyu, Brahmanda and
Vishnu-purdivas: but the latter is more explicit, on
this subject, than the others. After the death of
PuLtoMa, in 648, there appeared, in dnu-Gangam,
or the Gangetic provinces, a king, called Vrsvas pHa
TICA, or Vis VA-s PHURIY; who drove away the Brah-
mens and Cshettris, and raised to that dignity persons
of the lowest classes. After him came the Nagas
or Nadcas, who divided among themselves Anu-Gdng-

154 ; ESSAY ON

am, and the countries to the westward : some resided
at Padmdécati (or Patna;) others at Praydga, (or
Allahabad). There was a branch of them who set-
tled at Céanti (now Cotwall near Gwalior,) and
another at Mathura: and there were nine families
of them. There is still a tribe of the Nagas, or
Nacas, on the banks of the Jumnd, about Cailpi.
They seem to form a singular tribe, but I am other-
wise unacquainted with them. }

Thus Su’rya-pa’La, or SOmMA-PA'LA, built this
fortress, in the year 773, and of Vicrama the son
of Bauram-Gu'r 332; which computation is fur-
ther confirmed by another epoch. Asa-pa‘La or
GeBsal, is said by Fertsuta’, to have been assisted
in his wars against Maumunp, by Tanpepa’La king
of Gwalior. There is one Duanpd’HuPA‘LA; in the
Persian list of its kings, and the sixteenth from
its foundation. He was the friend and ally of
Gepat, and their combined forces were defeated
by Maumoop, about the year 1017.

The dynasty of Su’ryara’ta consisted of eighty-
five princes, according to the prediction of Gora~
CHALA the hermit, (calledin the Persian list Gua’
Lipa’;) and ended in the person of Trsa-ca‘Rn’A,
103 years before Gwalior was taken, by Suam-
SEDDIN, or Frroze the 2d; (who ascended the im-
perial throne in 1289;) having lasted above 410
years, which is certainly too little for 85 reigns:
but these inaccuracies are not uncommon with Hindu
chronologers. Lirut. Witson informs me, that a
Bréhmen, in the service of Ca’npu-JEE, has some-
time since written a history of Gwalior, in Sans-
crit, in which he places Su’rya-pALa, or S6ma-
pa‘LA, in the Dwapar age: and the author declares,
that his account is conformable to ancient inscrip-
tions, still existing on the rocks of Gwalior; and:

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 155

that the chief circumstances in his history are entirely
taken from them. If so, neither the inscriptions,
nor the work itself deserve much credit. Banram,
with the epithet of Gfir, in Sanscrit Ganwaad,
or the ass, is the founder of the Garddabhina dy-
nasty, mentioned in the prophetic chapters of the

Purénas. The Hindus say, that when GarppaBia-

withdrew from India, he left his wife and her maid
behind, and that both were with child by him; but
Persian writers assert, that he took bis wife with him
to Persia with her immense fortune. In RagGiuv-
WAT H's list, we find, that the son of GanpuA’-Pa‘La,
or GarppaBua, was VicramMapDitya; who had
two sons TALAcA-CHANDRA, who reigned only two
years, and another called Vicramapitya also,
who succeeded him. According to Persian history,
GarppabBuya had a son called Yesprsirp, who suc-
ceeded him. This prince had two sons Firoze,

the eldest, and Hormuz the youngest, sirnamed_

‘the wise; whom, on account of his wisdom, he
appointed for his successor; and, to Piroze, he gave
the government of Srgistan and Mecran. The ac-
count of these two brothers has much affinity with
what they relate, in Jrdia, of Vierama’pitya and
Buarrrinart. Some say that Vici ama‘pitya put
him to death; others, that he banished him to dis-
tant countrics. Be this as it may, they show the
ruins of his place of abode in Gujjardt’, at Up jpayini,
and near Benares. The dynasty of the Gardabhinas
is probably that of the descendants and successors
of Bauram Gir in Persia. The princes in the
N. W. parts of Jidia were vassals of the Persian
kings, at a very early period; and the father-in-law
of Banam-Gar used to send a yearly tribute to
them. Accdrding to the Hindus, he was not em-
peror of India, but only a powerful king in the
western parts of that country, and his capital city
was lea (or Cambay). It is not improbable

~

156 ESSAY ON”

that Frroze spared the life of his brother, and ba-
nished him to distant countries; and spread a report
of his death to prevent any further commotion in
his favour. Snrrovyen, the son of Knosru Pur-
viz, caused his seventeen brothers to be secretly
conveyed to Jzdia; and it was firmly believed, in
‘the west, that he had put them all to death: yet
there is hardly any doubt, that the kings of Oudy-
poor, and the Afarhattas, are, descended from them
and their followers, as it willappear in the appendix.
In many copies of Racuu-na‘t'H’s list, instead of
GaADHA-PA'LA, we read CsHEMA-PALA, or some
other name. Next to him, a prince is introduced,
called Sapat-pa’La; probably for Sapa‘s'va-Pa‘LA,
the name of the father in-law of Gapua-PALa,
or Banram-Giir.

_ As the famous emperor Buésa is not noticed by
foreign writers, the period in which he lived is in-
volved in much obscurity. In the Ayin-Acberi*,
Buoésa is said to have ascended the throne, in the
year 541 of Vicrama'Ditya’s era; which is im-
possible; for it would place Buésa’s accession to
the throne in the year 982; and, therefore, there
would be noroom, either for his reign, which was
along one, nor for those of his two successors, the
last of whom died in 1000. In the ‘Satrujaya-
mahatmya, we read 477 instead of 541, and this will
place Buosa’s accesssion in the year 918 of Curtsr.
But the author of the above treatise uses another
mode of calculation, which will give a difference
of four years. In the year 466 of the era, says he,
was VicramMaDitTya, who reigned 108° years;
and 477 years after, appeared Sata DiTya, in Asd-
rapura. ‘The era is that of Sa’tiva’Hana, and as

* Vol. 2d. p. 55.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 157

the Jainas reckon ftom the death of Vicra’MADITYA,
the whole will stand thus, 466+79—108+477=914,
for the year of Curist, in which Budésa ascended
the throne. Mayor Macxewzir, in his extracts com-
municated to the Society, says, that in the Dekhin it
is recorded of Buésa, that he reigned fifty years
five months and three days; and that the famous
Ca‘tir-pa’sa lived at his court. Accordingly, Buésa
died in the year 965 or 969, if we place his accession
in the year 918. The author of the ‘Satrujaya-ma-
hatmya places the accession of VicRAMADITYA in
the year of Curist 437, instead of 441; and when
we read, in the Ayin-Acberi, that Buésa ascended
the throne in the year.of Vicrama’piTya 541, this
might possibly be a mistake for that of lis death;
and such mistakes are unfortunately but too frequent
with Hindu writers; and his death would, in this
case, fallin the year 977; or in 982, if we reckon
from the year 441. This account is the most pro-
bable, as it leaves room for the reign of his adopted
son JAYA-NANDA, who died without issue, when
Cuartra-pa'La, or JytTe-pa La of the Zowara tribe,
was raised to the throne. After fighting several un-
succesful battles with Sutran Manumoop, he put
an end to his own life, in the year 1002, and was
succeeded by his son Manenpra Paua. ‘This
CuHAITRA-PALA or CHANDRA-PA‘LA, and in the spo-
ken dialects CHAITRA-PA LA, JYTE-PA LA andGEPAL,
by Musulman writers, is called CoarrRa-CHANDRA
in the Bhavishya; which cannot be explained other-
wise, than by supposing, that the author meant, that
he was called indifferently either CHAITRA-PALA or
Cuanpra-pa'ia.-. He was a most powerful prince,
and his authority was acknowledged all over India ;
and he is mentioned in the Ayin-Acheri*, under the
name of Cuanpra-pa'La: but he is. placed erro-

% * Vol. 2d. p, 55.

\ ‘\

158 ESSAY ON

neously before Ra‘sa’-Buésa. This is the Vicna-
MADbITYA, Who is made to wage war against Ma-
HABHA’T and the Mahébhatédicas, Munammep and
the ALuhammedans. No Hindu prince could have
waged war against MunamMmep; but the whole is
an allusion to the subsequent wars with his followers ;
and in the same manner we must probably consider
the wars of the other Vicramas with ‘Sa‘LivA HANA.
The Hindus have confounded Suttan Manmoop
with MunammMep, whom they claim as their own
countryman, aswell as ‘Sa’Liv a’ HANA, whilst neither
of them ever was in India.

The propensity of the Hindus, to appropriate every
thing to themselves, is well known, We have no-
ticed before their claims to Banram-Gir, and his
descendants; and in the same manner, they insist,
that AcBArwasa Hindu in a formergeneratiou. The
proximity of the time, in which this famous emperor
lived, has forced them, however, to account for
this in the following manner. There was a holy
Brahmen, who wished very much to become em-
peror of India; and the only practicable way for
him was to die first, and be born again. For this
purpose he made a desperate Tapasya, wishing to
remember then every thing he knew in his present
generation. This could not be fully granted; but
he was indulged with writing upon a brass plate,
a few things which he wished more particularly
to remember; then he was directed to bury the
plate, and promised that he would remember the
place im the next generation. Mvcunpa, for such

was his name, went to Allahabad, buried the plate,
and then burned himself, Nine months after he
was born in the character of AcBar, who, as soon as
he ascended the throne, went to ALLAHABAD, and
easily found the spot where the brass plate was
buried. Thus the Hindus claim Munuammep and
Acbar as their own; exactly like the Persians

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 159

ef old, who insisted that ALEXANDER was the
son of one of their kings; so that, after all,
they were forced to submit to their. countrymen
only. But let us return to Maua’suat, or Mu-
HAMMED. ; .
- f

The Hindus say, that the son of a -certain king
of India, being disgusted with the world, turned
pilgrim, and went to Mocsur’swarasiHANA, (or
Mecca). In his way thither, and in Arabia, he
stopped at the house of a Brahmen, who received
him kindly, and ordered his daughter to wait on
him, asusual. Whilst asleep, the cloth, with which |
his loins were covered, was accidentally defiled.
When he awoke, he took it off, and concealed it
in a corner of the house, in some hole, and out of
the sight of the damsel, as he thought. Being from
home, to perform his ablutions, in consequence of
this nocturnal defilement, the damsel came at the
usual hour; and her courses suddenly making their
appearance, she was much distressed, and looking
every where for some cloth, she spied the bundle—
in short, she conceived. He departed for Mecca ;
and some months after, the parents of the damsel,
and herself, were thrown into the greatest con-
fusion, as may be imagined.

The holy man was considered as the author of
their disgrace, though the damsel exculpated him:
yet she could not account for her present si-
‘tuation. She was like Hacar, turned out of the
house, into the wilderness, with her son: where
they were miraculously preserved, both being in-
nocent. Some years after, the holy man returned,
unconscious of his having been the cause of so
much uneasiness to the family of the hospitable |
Bréhmen,

After much abuse, the matter was explained; but

160 ESSAY ON

the son of the damsel could not be ‘admitted to
share with his relatives, or even to remain in their
communion. He was, however, honourably dis-
missed, with his mother, after they had given hith
a suitable education, and rich presents ; | they
advised him to shift for himself, and to se up a
new religion, as he could not be considered as a
member of the old one, on account of his strange
birth, or rather conception. When advanced in
years, he wished to see his paternal relations and
India; and to persuade them to conform to his new
doctrine; but he died in his way thither, at AZedina,
near Candahar. ‘This Medina is Ghazni, called em-
phatically the second Medind, from the great number
of holy men entombed there: and it is obvious,
that the Hindus have confounded MunammeEp with
Suttan-Maumoop, whose sumptuous Mausoleum is
close to that city. Thus we see, that the account
they give of MunamMep is a mere rhapsody,
retaining some of the principal features of the his-
tory of IsHmwa’et, Ha’car, Munammenp himself, -
and Suttan Manmoop. ,

This Samvat, or era, of MAuA’BHAT, Was early in-
troduced into India, and the Hindus were obliged
to use it, as they do now in all their civil trans-
actions; and thus Munammep became at least a
Sambatica or Santica. According to the rules laid
down by the learned in India, MonamMen is cer-
tainly a ‘Saca and ‘Sacéswara, and is entitled to the
epithet of Vicrama. He is a ‘Saca, or mighty
chief; and, like other ‘Sacas, he killed his millions :
he is ‘Sacéswara, or the ruler of a sacred’ period,
still in use in India. For these reasons, the
Pandits who assisted Aput-Fazit, did not scruple
to bestow the title of Vicramapitya upon him;
and even to consider him as the real worthy
of that name; and in order to make the era, or
at least the time of Vicramapirya’s appearance,

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 161

cvincide with the era of Munammen, they have
most shamefully distorted the chreieteae of the

appendix’ to the Agni-purdia.

AGNIPURAN’A,
‘Salivahana
af eeeveceend §4

Naravahana
t 100

Vausi-vali, or Putra-rajas,
that is to say the royal
184

offspring, -
“A‘ditya, eoeceresee oe eee eeon 55
Brahméa-raja, eesceee eeeese 87
At-Brahina, +--+ «seeeess 31

AvIN ACBERI,

‘Sdlivahana, «---+- Lloro
Naravihana,++-+++++ 100
Putra-rajas, ++++++++ 100

200

Atditya, seeseeceeere 86

Birmahraj, «+++ -++++++ 30

At-Birméh, +++++--+s++ 90
Sudhrowsheneh, for
Saddsva-sena, »++++.5 SO

Heymert, +++++++++-100

Sacas‘va,
oe 80 Gundrup, @eeeoees eee 35

‘Harsha Mégha,
Ist. of Vicramaditya,++++++ 437 ; pic atate
Ist. of Vicramdditya, -- 621 7 3

In the MSS. copy of the Ayin Acberi used by
TIEFFENTHALER, the days and months were omit-
ted. In several we find seven months, and three
days once only; and the repetition in other MSS.
is owing probably to the carelessness of transcribers.
Here one year only is allotted to Sa‘LivaHaNa,
and 100 to Nara-va’Hana, who is the same with
‘SALIVA HAN A, to whom one only is allowed, in order,
probably, to keep up his rank and place in the list.
,It is also to be observed, that where we put 0 at
the beginning of a chronological list, the Hindus put
1, as we used to do formerly ; and that year should
be pueated in calculations ; but this precaution is
often neglected, even in Europe.

The first year of Sa’‘tiva‘Hana, but not of his
era, was the 3101 of the Cat-yuga, answering to
the first of the Christian era, according to the Cuma-
ricd-chanda; and consequently, thisVickaMA’DITYA’S
accession, to-th¢ throne, happened 6921 years after

Vou, 1X, M H

162 : ESSAY ON. *

the birth of Curis, according to the MSS. pe-
rused by TiereenruaLer; and 621 years 7 months
and 3 days, according to others: and the Hara
began, when 621 years 6 months and 15 days, of
the Christian era, were clapsed; the difference is
surely trifling. .That the Pandits, who assisted
AevuL-Fazit, pointed to Munammep, under the
name of VicraMma’pitrya, is confirmed also from
two dates in the Ayin Acberi, in which the years,
said to belong to VicramMa’pitTya’s era, are really
to be reckoned from the beginning of the Hejra.
Probably it was meant as a compliment to the be-
nevolent AcBar, whose tolerant spirit could not
fail to endear him to the Hindus. Ever in the time
of Aurrene-ZeseE, the most intolerant of all princes,
when Racuu-n’atua wrote the Vansavali, at his
command, he introduced MunamMen by name, with
the title of ‘Srima’n-Maua’ra sa. In this attempt,
the Pandits, who assisted ApuL-FaziL, most shame-
fully disfigured the chronology of the supplement
to the Agni-purdn’a, Of S's’ Liva’H ana and Nara-
VAHANA, they made two distinct persons; as well
as of Banram, with the title of Gir, in Persian,
and Harman, or the wild ass, in Arabic. Thus
they introduced Harmar or Haymert, and Gir or
Ganpa-rup: to the former they allotted 100, and
to the latter 35 years; and they had the assurance
to teil Asux-Faziz, that it was declared, in their
sacred books, that Harmar having been killed in
battle, his soul passed into the body of Ganpa-
rup *. They were also forced to lengthen the reigns
of the intermediate princes: thus one abyss calls
to another, and a. single lie requires often fifty to
support it.

The accession of Vicrama/‘prrya, the son of
7 iat tata IE OS TRE OTT ATER

* Ayin Acheri, Vol. 2. p. 54

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 163

Banram-Gtir, to the throne, is placed, in the.supple-
ment to the dgni-purdi’a, A. D. 437; and the same
date is given, in the ‘Satrujaya-mahdtmya, as we
have seen before *. ‘This event is placed, however,
in the year 441, or 442, by chronologers in the west;
and in the appendix to the Agni-purdna, the ac-
cession of Apitya is placed in the year of Curisr
185; but, in the Cumaricd-chanda, it is declared
to have taken place in the year 191: the difference
is six years, which added to 437, or rather to 436,
will place the same event in the year 442.

The name of the emperors, called MunamMep,
or Manmoop, is generally written, and pronounced,
by Hindus, Ma’nasnar’, which implies a_ great
warrior: hence he is called also Mana’ Ba’uu,
Vira-Ba Hu, and Mana’-Vira-pa‘uu. It is written
also Mana-suaTtrakAcA, Maua’Buar'r’a’rica, and
Mona-puarrar. In the Vansavali, he is styled
‘Srima‘N-MAHA-RAJA, the prosperous (or on whom
blessing and happiness) the great commander. In
the list of kings, the titles are generally placed after
the proper name: thus Buosa is dignified with the
‘title of Sri-Carn‘a-Ra’ya-Vicrama, in the appendix
to the dgni-purtiva. In the Vansdvdli, as new mo-
delled by the Jainas, the epithet of Parasv is pre-
fixed to his name, and not improperly ; because,
like another Paras'v, he and his successors -lestroyed
the kings of the earth. Paras’‘v signifies a sword,
or scimiter ; and here, perhaps, alludes to the epithets
of Setsullah, (the sword of Gon,) and of Zulfecar,
so famous among his followers.

It is said, in the Vrihat-catha, that he was from
Ananga-désa, or the country of AnanGa, another
name for Ca’mMapEva, and supposed, by Pandits,

* See before, p. 157.
Me

104 . ESSAY ON

to be to the westward of India. In the Vansévdii,
instead of Ananga, ,it is written Benga, or Bengal.
The Ha’mir, or Homan’, introduced as his successor,
in this list, is probably meant for Omar, who, as
early as the year 636, began to’form regular plans,
for the invasion of Jrdia ; and actually sent a large
detachment, by sea, to invade the Delta of the
Indus; or rather, this Hau is the famous Ha’Mix,
general of Moavyrnu *, who waged a long and bloody
war, with the Hindus, in the countries bordering
upon the Delta. Moavyen began his reign in the
year 661, and died in 679; and the wars of Hamir,
with the Hindus, took place about the latter end
of his reign. In the Vansdvali, he is called Ha’Mir-
sinna, and Ha’min-sr’na: but, in many copies,
the first syllable of his name is dropped, and we
read Mir-s'e'na, Dirs’e'na, and even Disena; and,
in some copies, he is said to have been a native of
dnanga.

The title Srima’N-MAHA-RA‘SA was probably be-
stowed upon Maua-suar’, in compliment to Au-
RENG-ZEBE, by whose order the Vansavdli was written.
The fZindus, in general, never speak ill of Munam-
meED; and they think that he was a good man;
but they by no means entertain the same idea of
his disciples.

During the time of Munammen, neither he, nor’
his followers, ever troubled themselves about Jndia :
but soon after his death, and in the year '636,
Oma’r began to devise.means for the invasion of
that country; and the first step he took, was to
build Basrah, or Bussorah. We then sent Maeat-
REH-ABUL Aas, according to the Ayin-Acberi }, who,
setting off from Baharein by sea, invaded the west-
Rag a I ID

* Ayin Acberi, Subah Tatah.
+ Vol. 2d. Agceunt of Sircar Tatah, p. 147.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 163

erm parts of the Delta of the Indus: but meeting
with unexpected resistance, he was defeated, and
fost his life; and as Omar died in 641, this -expedi-
tion must have taken place between these two years,
and probably in 639 or 640. Oruman, his suc-
eessor, attempted an invasion by land; but having
sent people to survey the roads, he was deterred
by their report. Arr, after him, sent a general, .
who effected some trifling conquests, on the borders
of Sind. Moavyen sent twice his general Anxrir,
or Ha’mir; but, after long and bloody conflicts,
he was forced to desist. Under the Caliph Wa‘t1p
the conquest of Sid was at last effected by Munam-
mED-Casim, A. H. 99, or of Curisr 7177.

The rapid conquests of Osrar, and his successors,
through Jran and Turan, and their constant and
unrelenting attempts upon Jndia, though not always
successful, particularly at the beginning, could not
but alarm very much the princes of that country;
who thus soon became acquainted with the Afahd-
bhatadicas, Monam™Men their chief, and the intoler-
ant spirit of their new religion. :

Let us now pass to the second part, from the
first year of Vicrama’pitya, to the death of
Prituwi-rasa, and of Jaya-cuanpra. In this
part, the appendix to the Agni, and also to the
Bhavishya-puranvas, agree pretty well with the dyin-
Acberi, in regard to the number of kings, and the
order of succession. ‘There is, however, in the 4yin-
Acberi, a material difference; for three kings, who
are placed after Buosa, in the two first lists, are
transposed in the Ayin-Acberi, and put before Buo’sa,
and in an inverted order of succession. These are
Ra’MA-CHANDRA, (called there erroneously Kurrum-

* Vol, 2d, Account of Sircar Tatab, p. 147,
M3

166 ESSAY ON :

cunp) CHAnpra-Pa'ta, and MeEneE/NpRA-Pa’La.
The reason of this transposition is, that the Pandits,
who assisted “ApuL-razit, having placed the ac-
cession of Buoys 110 years before the death of
JAYA-CHANDRA, In 1194, that 1s to. say, in the year
of Curist 1084, there was no longer room for these
three kings; and they concluded, that they must
have reigned before Buo’sa, particularly as they
found there a king, called also MAn’ENDRA-PA'LA,
the grand-father of Buo’ya. Another mistake, in
the <Ayin-Acberi, is the introduction, not only of
a collateral dynasty, but the metamorphosing the
place of their residence into a king.

The succession of kings, from Vicrama the son
ef GarpaBna, to JAYA-cHANDRA, stands thus in
the appendix to the Agni-purana.

VicrAMADITYA - - ~- 100 years
CHANDRA-SENA, - - - ° 50
SURYA-SENA, - - - - - 85

CHANDRA-SENA Is omitted in the Ayin-dAcberi,
‘SACTI-SINAA; 3-0-1 2°". 88 | )

In his time the cra of Sa’tivanana prevailed
over that of VicgRAMA’DITYA.
Cwa‘nGA‘sENA, °- - (=) BS

he resided at Ujjayini, .

At that time A’raca, called Va’raca in the Pur-
dnas, reigned at Dhard-nagara, for the space of 190
years, or rather his dynasty. SucHa-SEN A or
Sumuc’u-seNna, and after him CHuapGa-sENnA reign-
ed at Chittracuta (in Bundelcund). ‘The first reign-
ed 88, and the second 86 years; and these appear .
to be collateral dynasties.

Then came Manr’npra-pa'ta, called Visaya-
NANDA in the Ayin-Acheri, and these two epithets
imply a great conqueror. It is said, that he reigned

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAMANA. 167
100 years at Yoguni-pura, or Dilli; but it is a mis-
take, for the ManeNpra-pa‘ta, who reigned in-
that city, lived after Budsa. After his death,
Muna was appointed regent, during the minority of
his son Buosa. He resided at a place called ‘Sonitpura,
and reigned 86 years. After him, Buésa reigned
in the Dekhin, 91 years. He was succeeded by
JAYA-NANDA, sometimes, but erroneously, called
Jaya-cHanpra, and he reigned 89 years. Thus,
the compiler of this list seemingly places the death of
Java- NANDA 1095 years aber the accession of Vi-
craAMA'DITYA, the sonof GarppaBua, tothe throne;
or in the year of Currsr 1480; thus confounding
together this Vicrama’pitya, with the one after
whom the era is supposed to be denominated. In
this manner, he has carried back the first year of
‘Sa‘tiva'HANA, 441 years before Curist; and the
expiation of Cua’nacya and Cuanpracurta, 758
before the same era. His idea however, was, that
JAyA-NANDA died in the year 1095 of Vicrama-
DITY A's era, answering to the year of Cunist 1039:
and as Buésa reigned only 50 years, instead of 91,
a further correction will place the death of Jaya-
NANDA in the year of Curist 998, which is pretty
near the truth. These inconsistencies and contra-
dictions, so fréquent among /Zindw chronologers, are
disgustful i in the last degree, and must greatly 5 retard
the progress of historical research.

H[e was succeeded by Curarrra-pa‘ta, the son
of Ra’Ma-cHANDRA, a powerful zemindar, in the
country of Gauda, in Afdlava, and of the Tomara
tribe. In) the Ayin-Acberi* we read, that, when
Java the son of Buoésa died, there was not found
any one of the Pomara or Powdr tribe, worthy to

* Volk 2d. p56,
M 4

168 ESSAY ON
wear the crown; on which account, Cuyrepa’L, an

eminent zemindar, was chosen king; and he founded
the Tomara dynasty.

In these three lists, we find two. dynasties intro-
duced, the Zomara and the Chauhan: but these were
collateral, at least for some time; as is obvious from
the context of the appendix to the Agni-puran‘a, in
which itis declared, that Jipanawa, called Pritn-
wi-raza in the Ayin-Acheri*, was defeated, and
killed in battle, in the country of Sambhala, by the
Chauhans, who thus became kings of Yégini-pura,
or Dillt. This happened, says Aput-Fazir, in the
year of Vicrama’pirya 848 (it should be 488);
and as the first year of VicramMa‘DITYa is made in °
that section, to correspond with the first of the
HHejra, the death of Jipana’na happened in the
year of Curtst 1110. This is further confirmed by
another passage from the same author}, in which
he says, that the dynasty of BaLta-pzo, or BrLpEo,
the Chauhan, lasted 83 years, and seven months,
that is to say, from the death of Prituwi-Ra‘sA,
who was slain by Bartpxo, to the death of~ Pr-
THAURA, in the year 1192, or of the Hera, 588;
and from the beginning of the Hejra, to the year
1110 of Curist, | there had elapsed exactly 488
Hindu or Lunisolar years t. According gly, these two
dynasties will stand thus:

* Vol. 2d. p. 118. t+ VOl 2d. i 1S OF
t Vol. 2d. p, 118, :

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 169
The TOMA'RA Family.
Rama-Chandra, Zemindar
of Gawda did not reign.
Chaitra-pala his son, emperor
of India, had two sons;

Mahendra-pala, Raya-séna, called also CHAUH‘ANA Family.
emperor Ananga-pala, and Eca-
pala, “builds Dill, A. D.
1050. Bahusali

Rana Badi Visaladcsha
Jidahina, killed in rrert| Séma-déva
by Bala-deva A. D. 1110.i| Bala-déva

had two sons. Naga-déva
| Cirtti-pala
Vigahana, | Sanca-patla, | PRITHWI-RASJA,
withdraws to Cirtti-pala,
Gaudd his native |) Auangapala.|
country. ! | died A. D. 1192.

In the account of Subah Dili, by Aput-Fazr1*,
the list of the Chauhdn princes, who reigned after
the year 1109, is erroneous; but in the account of
Subah AMd/wa}, it agrees with the appendix to the
Agni-purana.

Musulman writers inform us, that after the death
of GrpaL, or Cuait-para, the Balhara kings, in
Gujarat’, became lords paramount, OL.emperors of
India: and, in the deni-puran'a, we find that Cuar-
TRA-PALA had two sons, Mana-cHANDRA-PA‘LA,
or MauEewpra-paLta, who proved at last a weak
and foolish prince, and his brother Rava-s'/NA
carried away his wife, and built D2//, He was
called AnanwcGa-paLa, or befriended: by love, and
Ratipa La, or fostered by Rati, the goddess of
love, and the consort of Ca’wa-bDEva; perhaps in
allusion to the above transaction: hence the foundet
- of Dillt is called by some, ANanGa-pa‘La, and by

* Vol. 2d. p. 113. + Vol, 2d. p. 6g.

170 ESSAY ON

others Raya-senA. He is noticed by Trerrex-
THALER, who calls him Rasewa, ahd says that he
built Diddi*. Asut-Fazix, in his account of Subah
Dilli, places this event in the year of Vicrama-
pITYA 429: and in a former section, he makes the
first year of that era to correspond with the first of
the /Zejrat. It happened then in the year of Curist
1050; and this is confirmed by another passage
from the same authort, in which he places the
building of Didi, or the beginning of the Tomara
dynasty, in that city, 142 years before the death
of Piruavura, in 1192; and this gives the same
result.

After the defeat and death of Pritnwi-pa’La, or
Jipa'HANA, in the year 1110, his son VIGAHANA
returned to Gaud'a, his native country, according to
the 4eni-purana ; but we find still three of his de-
scendants, reigning at Dili, Sanca-pa’La, Crrtri-
pata and AnaNGA-pa'La. In the Agnipurdna it
is said, that Ray-sena conquered the Antar-vedt,
or country between the Jumna and the Ganges; and
also the country about Dili, and settled there.
The Chauhdnas possessed at the same time, Sam-
bhala-desa, or the country of Sambhala, tothe north
o Canouge. .

AwaGa-pata, the last king of Dilli of the Jo-
mara dynasty, being without male issue, adopted
Pritnwi-raya, or Pirnaura’,, the last of the Chau-
han dynasty. ‘This account is to be found in the
history of the wars of Pirrni-raya, or PITHAURA,
in the spoken dialects, part of which is in my pos-

* Beschreibung von Hindustan, p. 111.
+ Soobah Malwa, vol. 2d. p. 61. See above, p. 161, 162.
t Vol, 2. p. 115, 118.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 171

session. There it is declared; that ANANGA-PA‘LA
had no male issue; and that he gave his only
daughter in marriage to the Cuauna’n king of
Sambhala-des'a ; who had by her a son, called Pr-
THAURA. - ANANGA-PA'LA adopted him for his own
son, and appointed him his successor to the throne
of Dili; recommending him, at the same time,
to JAYA-CHANDRA, emperor of India, and residing
at Canouge. This ‘happened, says the author of the
above treatise, in the i20th year of king ANANGA-
PALA’; but more probably of his dynasty, which
lasted 142 years; and accordingly, this adoption
took place in the year 1170 of the Christian era.

It is acknowledged, that the imperial throne be-
longed of right, to the Chohdn family, and that
they were deprived of it by Jaya-cHanprRaA, of
the Rattore tribe; but we are not told the eround
of their claims and pretensions. Be this as it may,
such was the cause of the last great war in Jndia;
for, when JaAya-cHANDRA attempted to perform a
prand sacrifice, at which the presence of all the kings
of Jndia was required, he was told, that he was not
qualified to preside at such a sacrifice, as the empire
belonged to the Chohdn family; and of course, that
it was the province of Pirnaura’, who had absented
himself, because he thought that the usurper would
not allow lim to preside at the sacrifice. A love
affair contributed also to exasperate both parties;
for, when Jaya-cuanpra led an army into Simhdla-
dwipa, or Ceylon, the king of that country sub-
mitted, and made him a present of a most beautiful
and accomplished damsel: but Jaya-cHANDRA,
being advanced in years, adopted her for his own
daughter; and she was soon to have been married
to a powerful king: but she, having heard of Prr-
HAURA’s valour and achievements, fell in love with

172 ESSAY ON

him, and refused her consent. ‘“JAYA-cHANDRA,
enracved at her behaviour, caused her to be confined;
and this was the cause of a most bloody war, in
which the heroes of India fell, by mutual wounds.
Pitnaura’ proved successful, set the young damsel
at liberty, and carried her in triumph to Dili, and
recovered also the imperial throne. But he did-not
enjoy itlong; for SAnEBUDDIN made his appearance
with an army, and JAyA-cHANDRA, entered into a
league with the invader, which soon brought ruin
and destruction on both parties. Prrnavura’ fell
in the plains of S@hdn'u-sar or Thanu-sar ; and it is
said, near a village, called Narayana pura. The
league, between JAYA-cHANDRA and SAHEBUDDIN,
did not last long; and in an engagement, in the
year 1194, between Chandwér and Etawah, Jaya-
CHANDRA Was completely routed, and obliged to fly;
and, in attempting to cross the Ganges, in a small
boat, he was drowned *.

After the’ famous expiation of Cuanacya, which
I mentioned before, in my essay on the Gangetic-
provinces, the author of the appendix to the dgm-
purdna proceeds in the following manner. “ AmBu-
raA’yA, (or the king of the waters surrounding India),
Mana-pati (the great sovereign lord), Buumi-pa‘La,
(the fosterer of the world), reigned a hundred years.
After him came Ra’ma-cHanpra, who reigned
twelve years; and was succeeded by Buarara, who
reigned in Ujjayini, 200 years.”

Ambu-ra‘JA is obviously CoAnDRA-GUPTA, Whose
reign here is made to begin, and not improperly,
immediately after the expiation of CHaw‘acya;
when every thing was settled, and CuanpRA-GuPTA
acknowledged paramount of Jndia.

/

* Ayin Acberi, Vol, 2d. p, 102,

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 173

‘Thus, from that famous expiation, to the’ end
of Bua’rara’s dynasty, there are 312 years, ending
the year preceding the first of the Christian era: but
according to the Cumaricd-chanda, this expiation
took place 310 years B. C. and the difference , is
trifling.

“ Then,” says - the compiler of the appendix to
the dgni-purana, “ at Pratisht‘ana in the Deccan,
- through the mercy of Siva, will appear ‘Sa’tiva-
HANA, Maha-bali, great and mighty; D'’harmatma,
the soul and spirit of righteousness and justice ; Sa
tyavaca,, his word truth itself; Anasiyaca, free from
spite and envy; Rajyam- uttamam- critavan, whose
empire willextend all over the world; Nara-véhana,
the conveyer of souls (to places of eternal bliss):
and he will reign 84 years.”

Nara-vdhana signifies literally the conveyer of
men, which is here the same thing: for the udiom
of the Sanscrit laneuage will hardly admit of our
saying conveyer of souls. Thus Curtst is repre-
sented by the JJanicheans, when they eall him
animarum ‘vector in majore navi, the conveyer of
souls in the larger boat.

“Then will come Nara-va’sana (in the Bha-
wishya purdn'a Nri-stnua) who will reign 100 years.”
Nara-va‘uana and Nri-srnua are two well known
epithets of Sa’trva‘HaNa, and they have been pro-
bably introduced here in order to enable the com-
piler to bring in 100 years to answer his purpose.
What induces me to think so, is the passage imme-
diately following. ‘ Then will appear Nara-
VAHANA and Vansa’vaLl.” In the dyin-Acberi™,

* Subah Malwah,

174 ESSAY ON

in the room of Va'nsavatt, we read in one copy
Vans’a-rAJA, and in another Purra-Ra’ ‘ya, and the
former is retained by TrEFFENTHALER. VANS A-
RAJA, signifies the royal offspring, PUTRA-RA‘JA
the royal children, and Vay’'sa’vatt, offspring
or descendants, and ‘also an account of them. The -
two former are generally pronounced Ra Ja-puTRAs,
and Ra‘sa-vawsa’s; and they are introduced here,
because there are some families of Ra’sa-purs, and
Raya-vansas, who really pretend to be Sa’‘LAVANSAS,
or the offspring of Ha’ta or ‘Sa‘ta-vanana. ‘To
these, very properly, no years are allotted in my copy
of the Agni-purdva; but, in that used by AsutL-
Paziz, 100 years are given to them; and none to
‘Sa'tivana'na, or if you will, one gle only.

Thus in my copy we read,

DA LIVAHANA, = |= - 26 84,
Naravanawna and the Vaiss Birr
Pas ay. 100
or Vansdvilis. «3° a Oe
184
But in the dyin Acberi we have,
BALTIVARANA ou DIRE Ser Ae 1—or—0O
NARA-VAHANA =~ -- a Ae Og On
Vansa-rajas or Putra rdas - - | 100
900

Hence it appears, that originally Saviva Hana
‘and Nara-va’HANA, in this place, were considered
but as one individual.

‘ Then will come ‘Apirya, who will reign 55
years.” His reign began the igsth year of SALiva~—
HANA, and of the Christian era, according to my
copy; but in the year 201, according to the Ayin
Acberi. This is the Vicrama-AbITyA, who was

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 175

contemporary with Savor king of Persea, according
to Fertsura, and reckoned among the several kings
called VICRAMADITYA, in the Sinhdsana dabirin-
shatt. Heis mentioned under the name of Supraca,
or ‘Suraca in the Vrihat-cathé, and under that of
Vicramacesari in the Vetalapanchavinsati, as we
have seen before*; and according to the Cumdricé-
Chanda, began his reign in the year 191 of the
Christian era. After him came BrauMa-Ra‘JA,
who reigned 87 years in Vidharbha-nagari. His
successor was Ari-Lbrauma, who reigned at Uj-
jayint: he went with an army to countries toward
the north, but was defeated and killed after a reign
* .of 31 years.”

“He was succeeded by Sapa'’swa,” called Va-
SUDHA in the Bhawvishya, and BAsDEO by Ferisuta:
* he reigned 84 years.’

In his time appeared Hansua-mEGuA.or Ra-
SHABHA, Called Ganpua-rupa in the 4yin Acberi,
and Banram-Gor in the history of Persia.

His son was VicamapitTya, (in the Bhavishya
two persons are mentioned, Buarrrinart and Sri-
vi. ICRAMA DITYA;) who becan his reign accor dinghy
in the year 441, reckoning from the - first of Sa‘L1-
VAHANA, and answering of course to the same
year, (441,) of the Christian era: and the son of
Basram-Gér ascended the throne in that very
year. ‘Sri-VickAMADITYA is supposed to have
reigned 100 years, and of course he died in the year
541. It is here said that he went and subdued the
Paitinas ; that is to say, the inhabitants of Pdtdna
in the Deccan, but net the Patans, as BernouLut

* Page 107, 146.

176 | ESSAY ON ;

says. His successor was CUANDRA-SEN A, who
reigned 50 years: then came Su’rya-sSena, who
reioned a5, and died of course 135 years after Vi-
CRAM ADITYA. Sukya’-sENAa seems to bea corruption
for Surya’ NSA, OF ‘Sri-suRYA NSA, another name
for Sri-Sa’tivanana, as I shall shew in the next
essay: and, like Sa’Liva‘Hawa’s death, his is placed
exactly in 135th year of Vicrama'Dirya’s era, and
the same number of years after his death, and in
the year 676 of the Christian era. But it does by
no means follow, that there existed at that time a
prince called either ‘SA’ LIVAHANA Or SU’/RYA‘NSA;
but what we can reasonably conclude is, that his era
was introduced at that time, and finally prevailed.
“Then,” says our author, (under the reign of his
successor ‘SSACTI-SINHA, and in the room of VicRaA-
mMarcA, the Saca- bandhi,) “Sa LAV'AHANA will be
chief of the ‘Saca, or sacred period ;” or, m_ other
words, his era will prevail over that of Vicra-
MARCA.

VicramMarca'r param chaiva'‘Saca cartté bhavishyati.
‘Sa LAVA HANA ndmnaiva prasidd ham punar asya tu.

Then, after Vicramarca, SaAtrAvauaNa will be
the maker (ruler) of the S’aca.

The famous Buésa was the son of Ra’sa-sin-
puLa, and born unto him in his eld age. When
he died, his son being a minor, and only eight
years old, his uncle Munya, whose name is often
written Puwga, was therefore intrusted with the
TCVeAcy. | in ry a

Munsa wrote a geographical description, either
of the world, or of Zndia; which still exists, under
the name of Afunj ya-prati- desh-v ‘yavasthd, or state of va-
rious countries, ‘This voluminous work was afterwards

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. LA

corrected and improved, by Ra’3a-Bu6ésa; and this,
new edition is called Bhéja-pratides‘a-vyavastha, and
still exists in Gujjardt.

When Buésa ascended the throne, he found the
famous Sinhdsana, or lion-seat, which had been
buried since the days of Vicrama’piTya, and thereby
became entitled to that epithet, which was con-
firmed to him by Batt, when he visited the infernal
regions. He is also called ‘Sri-Carn’a-ra‘sa-VI-
CRAMA, with the title of Apitya, which last is
used often separately, and was also a title bestowed
upon ‘Sri-Carna-Deva, whom he alluded to in the
stanzas he sent to Munya *, and which afterward,
from that circumstance, was bestowed on_ him.
When he died, the goddess Sarasvari, presiding
over the sciences, wept bitterly, saying “ where shall
I find now a place to dwell in.” Buésa ascended
the throne, as we have seen before, in the year of
Curist 913; and he resided at Dhdrd-nagar, com-
monly called Dhér, in the province of Méadava.
He had an only daughter, called Banumati, whom
he gave in marriage to Jaya-Nanpba, who conquered
all Zndia, and is reckoned as the last of the worthies
dignified with the title of Vicrama‘pitya, though
some reckon JAYA-CHANDRA as the last; and indeed
JAYA-NANDA and Jaya-CHanpra are often mis-
taken the one for the other.

In the appendix to the Agni-purdn'a, the author
concludes with declaring that some hundred years
ago, “‘the gods and men in Jndia, groaning under
the tyranny of foreign tribes, went ina body, with
BrauMa’ at their head, to ‘Sweta-dwipa, or the
White Island in the west, to implore Visunv’s pro-
tection, in their own name, and also in the behalf

* Page 146,
Won. 2X. N

178 “ESSAY ON
of men. Visunu comforted them, as usual, and
promised that he would appear im the character of
CALCI-AVATARA, When he would’ exterminate alt
their enemies.” If so, the Hindus must wait no less
than 429, 917 years for relief. Every Vicrama-
pirya had a certain number of learned men at his
court ; the chief of whom is, in general, called Ca‘-
tipasa. According to the supposed appendix to
the Bhavishya-purada, VicramMapirya the son of
Garpabua had sixteen of them. Ra‘sa-Budésa
had nine, among whom Duanwanrarti and Bara-
rucH1 were the most famous. These two learned
men are called Dtrunpa’t and Beruse in the Ayn-
Acheri. Another Vicrama'‘pitya had only five;
and these learned men were dignified with the title
of Ratna, or jewels, with which the courts of those
emperors were adorned. It is the general opinion,
in the west, that the real Ca'tipasa lived at the
court of king Buésa. This is confirmed by the ex-
tracts communicated to the society, by Major
Mackenztk, and also in the 8th vol. of the Asi-
atic Researches*; and ‘Sa’Liva‘HANA is even sup~
posed’ to have had a poet of that name at his court.
The next list, coming under examination, is from
Gujjardt, and was given to me by a Pandit, a native
of that country. It isentirely confined to the ancient
rulers of that time, and of the adjacent countries ;
and comes down no lower than the year 1309; and
I was happy to find, that it was the same list which
was usec by the Pandits who assisted ABuL-Fazie.
This shews that it existed. above two hundred years
ago; and such as it is, that they had no better do-
cuments at that time. They borrowed from it only
the last dynasty of the king of Gujjardt’, which
began A.D. 746.

* Page 243.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 179
This list, called also Vansévali, contains the
names of the rulers of these countries, under the
title, either of Bala-rdjis, or Réyas, or Mahé-Réjas,
sprung from various tribes, or belonging to different
dynasties. © Many of them were on aly “petty kings,
and vassals to the more fortunate kings of another
tribe, sitting then upon the imperial throne. For
these various tribes were always struggling for su-
preme power; and the imperial dignity was con-
stantly shifting from the one to the other. Un-
fortunately, the compiler has not pointed out. those
who were Rajendras; and there were, of course,
many of these inferior sovereigns, in a collateral suc-
cession with the emperors. ‘The whole is compiled
with the usual negligence and carelessness of the
Hindus, and the author carries the beginning of this
list as far back as the beginning of “the Cali-yuea,
and yet he mentions only thirty-six kings, or rather
nine and twenty, in the list, from that period to the
year of Curist 746. It is customary with Hindu
venealogists to re-ascend to the beginning of the
Cali-yuga, whenever they fancy they « can do it with
propriety; otherwise, these families would be looked
upon as a new race, and their princes as men of
yesterday. But these nine and twenty reigns cannot
carry the origin of the Bala-Rayds bey ond the be-
ginning of the Christian era. This idea, however,
is by no means novel; for, among Musulman writers,
some make Dassurria the first Bala-Réya, con-
temporary with Husnrenk, the second king of the
Pishdadian dynasty in Persia; but, according to
Masoupr, he must have lived a little after ‘the be-
ginning of the Christian era

The title of Bala-Rdja, Bala-Rayd, ov Bala-Rau
in the spoken dialects, signifies the great king, and
is unknown in India, as “beloaging 4 to the ancient
sovereigns of Guijardt According to our compiler,
there were two sorts of these sovereigns, some were

ng

180 ESSAY ON

Raja-Culas, or of royal extraction, such as Vicra-
-ma‘pityA and Buoésa; others were descended from
powerful Zemindars of different tribes, the names of
which were the Cha-uhana or Chauhdna, Chaida
and Goheld, to which we may add, from the context
of the list, the ‘Solanci, and the Badghela tribes.
According to Musulman writers, the first Bala-Raya
was Das-Seuim, Das-Suiim, Di-Satem and Dr-
‘Stam. Theseare strange appellations, and unknown
in India, at least in that shape; and are hardly
reducible to any standard, either Sanscrit or Hindi.
My inquiries, concerning this ancient and famous
king, have proved unsuccessful, unless his real name
were SAILa-De va, according to learned men from
Gujjardt. This ‘Satta-peva, SarLa-peo, Dep-
‘Satta or De-Sarta, was, according to tradition,
a most holy man, of royal extraction; and I find
him, or one of the same family, mentioned in the
Ayin-Acberi, under the name of Syzr-pxo*. The
word Deva is pronounced Des in the eastérn parts
of India, Dro, Dr’ and Di in the western parts of
India ; and, in the present list, such proper names
as end in Deva, or Deo, in the Ayin-Acberi, have
constantly De in the room of it. This word is
seldom prefixed to proper names, yet there are se-
veral instances of it, as in Des-PaL-pEB, a famous
_emperor, mentioned in the imperial grant found at
Monghir, and in Dr'va-Navusua, pronounced D1-
Nisst in the Deccan. In our list, the first Bala-
Raya is called Di-Saca, or De'va-Saca, which
I suppose to be meant for Di-Saa, Di-Saira or
SAIL DEO.

His descendants are known to Musulman writers
under the appellation of Deb-Sdlimat, according to
D’Herpeiort; and their sire is represented as a

* Ayin-Acberi, Vol. 2d. subah Gujjerat, p. 89.
+ See D’Herbelot, Dabschelim and Dabschalimat.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA, 181

most virtuous and powerful prince, and king of the
country of Séma-natha, or Gujarat’. PiLPat was
his prime minister, and at his command, wrote the
famous testament of Husuenk, still existing in
Persian. In the present list, Di-Saca or DE'va-
‘Saca is declared to have been a Yadu by birth, and
of this tribe was Crisuna. Masouni, who wrote
~ about the year 947, and had been in Jndia, throws
some light, in his golden meadows, upon the time in
which De’va-Saita lived,

“The dynasty of Puour, who was overcome by
ALEXANDER, lasted 140 years: then came that of
Dasscnetim, which lasted 120 years. That of
YALITH was next, and lasted 80 years; some say
130.” (YALITH isa strange name, and the nearest
proper name to it in Hindi, is Ja'tiva’, or Ya‘Liya’,
the name of a descendant, or successor, of Dr'va-
Sarita.) “ The next dynasty was that of Couros,”
(a corruption, from either Carn’a, Cura’n or Curu:)
“it lasted 190 years.”

‘Then the Indians divided, and formed several
kingdoms; there was a king in the country of Sind;
one at Canoge ; another in Cashmir; and a fourth
in the city of AZankir, called also the Great Houza;

and the prince, who reigned there, had the title of
Balhara*.”

Now, it is acknowledged, that Drs-Sarim was
the first Balhara emperor, and the founder of that
dynasty; and if so, that emperor and his dynasty,
have been transposed by Masovpr, and erroneously
placed before Courvs, whoever he was. The other

* See accounts and extracts of the MSS, in the library of the
king of France, vol. ist, p. 124.

N3

18¢ ESSAY ON |. .

dynasties of Purv, Yariya’and Curu, lasted ac-
cording to him, either 390 or 350 years. We can-
not fix, with precision, the begining of the dynasty
of Puru; but at all events, the division of India
into fourempires, happened in the first century after
Curist; and according to Arrran, | in his Periplus,
the city of Minnagara or Mankir, was the metropolis
of that part of the country. The city is placed,.
by Protemy, upon the banks of the Narmadd, and
is now called Manhkawer. I have not yet been able
to procure much information about this famous
place, as very few people from that part of India
ever come to Benares: but it is mentioned in the
Aym-Acberi, asa town of some note in the district
of Mandew, in the province of ALalwah. Wiha dt

The, dynasty of Deva-Satrim, in Manhawer,
according to Masovni, lasted 120 years; that is to
say, his descendants were, during that period, lords
paramount of Indic, or at least of that part of it;
and in the ume of Proremy, the metropolis of that
country was no longer J¢anhawer, but the seat of
empire had been transterred to Ujjayini or Ozene; and
he wrote in the beginning of the third century. In
his tine, the Sala-Rayss were no longer lords pa-
ramount of Jndia; but were either vassal, or inde-
pendent kings, residing in some fastnesses among
the mountains, at a place called by him Hippocura ;
and now Pay-gurra or Pawd-gurra. ‘This was,
says he, the piace of abode of the Baler-cures; or
rather the gur, cures, fort or abode, of the Balher
kings. According to the appendix to the dgni-pu-
rand, the supposed dynasty of ‘Sativa Hana lasted
184; but according to the Ayin-Acberi, 200 years.
After it, came A’pirya, of the Pomara tribe, called
also VicraMa’pitysa, Supraca aud Suraca: he
was Visvapati, iat is lord paramount of the world,
or rather of that part of India, According to the

VICRAMADITYA AND SAIIVAHANA. ~ 183
Cumdrica-chanda, he ascended the imperial throne
in the year of the Cali-yuga 3191, and of Curist
191. The appendix to the 4gni-purdn'a places his
accession in the year 1835, and the 4yin-Acberi in the
year £01 of our era, and he reigned at Ujjayini.
‘By Proremy, the king of that famous city, is called
TIASTAN; a strange name, and not reconcileable to
the idiom, either of the Sanscrit, or Hindi languages.
1 strongly suspect however, that it is a a corruption of
Adityasthén, which may have been misunderstood,
by travellers, who knew very little of the country
languages. I suppose that either these travellers, or
Protemy, who conversed with many Hiidus. at
Alexandria, asked what weie the names of the me-
tropolis of that country, and of its king. The
answer was Ujjayini-Raja- Aditya sthan; ‘ Uyjpayint
is the residence of king “Aprvya? which was erro-
neously rendered ‘ Ojené i is the metropolis of king
TYAsTHAN, or Trastnan. In the same manner
he has distigured the name of the Balher kings,
saying that Hzppocuros was the place of residence
of king Barrr-curos, which is obviously a cor-
ruption for Bather-ghur, the fort or place of abode
of king Barner. ‘Thus Srraso, in speaking of the
country of Tej, in Cachha calis it the kingdom of
Tessartostus, thereby implying, that this was’ the
name of the king; whilst 7éssariostus is a corruption
from Tejardshtr, or Teja-rasht, which signifies the
kingdom of Tresa, an ancient king, who built the
town of Teja, to the eastward of the Jrdus. As
king Der’s-Saita, or Dr’-Saiza, is called, in our
list, Di-Saca, or Deva-Saca, which is also one
of the titles of ‘Sa’tiva’nana; this weuld induce
an opinion, that Das-Suetim, or Di-Sauim, is the
same with Satzva’nana. But such is the confusion
and uncertainty of Hindu records, that one is really
afraid of formimg any opinion whatever,

As it is said, that it was by his order, that the
N 4

184 ESSAY ON

famous treatise, called Javidan-khird, or eternal wis-
dom, called also the will or testament of Husuen«,
had been written; he has been probably, from that
circumstance, made contemporary with that ancient
prince, who began his reign 700 years after the
accession of Car1-umursu, to the throne of Persia.
Cai-umuRsH, according to Masoupt, was the son of
Aram, the sonof Suem, who died 502 years after »
the flood.

Masoupr says, that A/anhawer was also called
the great Houza, which, translated into Hindi, is
Burra-Houza, or Burra-Gouza, and has such affinity
with Bary-Gaza, or in Sanscrit Bhrigu-Cach’ha or
BhriguvCula, Bhrigu’s shore or beach, that I strongly
suspect, that Masovpr mistook Baroach for Adan-
hawer ; and that the blunder originated from a want
of knowledge of the Hindi language: Jdanhawer
is also called Mahoura, by other Musulman writers.

Our compiler says, that there were, in all, 36
kings, from Dr'va-Saca, to the year 802 of Vi-
CRAMADITYA, answering to A. D. 746; but we can
make out only 29 from the list; for the five Pra-
maras must be rejected, as they do not belong to
India. They are called in this list, Ch’hdrui-vi-hahda,
which is an expression partly Sanscrit and partly
Hindi, as usual in these lists. It signifies the four
great destroyers, and is an allusion to the famous
Char-yari of the Musulmans; and which as I ob-
served before, is made with a little straining, to sig-
nify, in Sanscrit and Hindi, the four destroyers, in-
stead of the four friends and associates. Several of
their names imply the abhorrence, in which the
Hindus hold them; for one is called Savata, CrER-
BERUS or the infernal dog: another, Prama‘Ra or
PariMa’RA, is here meant for Munammen, and sig-
nifies YAmAor PiuTo, the infernal and universal de-
stroyer. Cu't'arata, he who was fostered by Ma’y.a,,

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA, 185

or worldly illusion, otherwise the impostor, and per-
haps. intended for Moavyru. MvusnaMMED was
originally introduced into this and other lists, be-
cause it was to the Hindus an ever memorable, though
most unfortunate epoch, and from which their con-
querors dated their sacred eva. It is not to be sup-
posed, that he was thus introduced into those lists,
from an idea that he ever was emperor of India. ‘This
was well understood at first; but the case is very
different now, Such is the opinion of those who
reject the legendary tales about Sa‘Liva’HANA and
VicraMADITYA; and this is by no means a new

idea, for it is noticed in the Rdja-Tarangini, which

is a work highly esteemed in dndia, and of some an-
tiquity : for it was presented to the emperor AcBar,
in his first visit to Cashmir, by learned Pandits, who
considered it as containing the most authentic do-
cuments of the history of their country.

_ About the time of Munammen, the descendants
ef Deva-Saixim, who fora long time had lost their
rank of Visva-pati, lords of the world, Rdjendra,
lords of kings, Rajd-rdjds, kings of kings ; began to
lose also their influence and power, even as vassal
kings, and they even finally lost their patrimonial
territories and kingdom, which was usurped by the
_ ‘Solanci tribe. It seems that they retired into the
province of Malwa, in the vicinity of Ujjayini,
where they lived in retirement, and entirely given up
to devout contemplation, still very much esteemed
and respected. There, at Ujjayini, we find one of

them called Sarta-peva; who found, in the wil-

derness, young Vawa-RaJa, and sent him to Rdd-

anpur to be brought up; and this happened in the
year 696; for Vawa-ra’sa, when fifty years of age,
built the town of Narwileh A. D. 746*. In the

* Ayin-Acberi, Vol. 2d. p. 89. 90.

186 ESSAY ON

year 1025, we find another of them, living also in
obscurity, and equally called Deva-Sarza, . or
Darsserra; and who was raised to the throne of
his ancestors, by Suttran Maumup. The list of
the Béla-Rayds, from Vana-Ra‘sa to Rada Car-
‘wa’, was originally the same with that to be found
in the Ayin-Acberi, excepting some variations; for
it is hardly possible. to find two lists in India exactly
alike. ‘The number of kings, in both, is twenty-
three ; and the aggregate sum of their reigns agree
within two years. But the arrangement is some-
what different, and the years of each respective
reign by no means correspond. Some “kings are
transposed, and the names of a few quite disagree;
and each list supplies also deficiencies, which oc-
eur in others. Owing to the uncertainty of Persian
orthography, several names are strangely disfigured,
both in the English and German translations ; which
last is by no means to be neglected, as there are
particulars in it, not to be found, either in the ma-
nuscript list, or in the English translation of the
Ayin-Acberi. Thus, for instance, Ra‘sa-A’piTya
is called Resuapur in the English translation, and
Ra-Scuapar by. TreEFrFENTHALER. VANA-RAJA 18
called Bansrase by the former, and Birs by the
jatter. ‘The summary history of the Hindu princes
of Gujarat’, in the Ayin-Acberi, contams many in-
teresting particulars, not to be found in our list.
VANA-RAJA, according to our list, was of the
Chaud'é tribe, still extant in Gujrat’. Asutr-Fazry.
says, that his father was called SAmawra-SINHA ;
and the werd Samanta implies, that he was a petty
king, probably in Gujrat’; but being of a base and
turbulent disposition, he was put to death, by order
of ‘Sri-Bavapa-pEva, emperor of Canoge; and his
family was plundered, as usual. His wife fled into
the forests, or Vana, where she was delivered of a
son, called, from that circumstance, VANA-RAJA..

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 187

A holy-man, called Saitra-Deva, Deva-Sarita or
DeEs-SatLrm, happening to pass by, on his return,
from Cjjayini, to Rddhana-pura, in the northern
parts of Gujrat’, took compassion on the woman,
and gave the child in charge of one of his disciples,
who coettead him to dé ye -pura,' where he was
brought up. He afterwards associated with a band
of robbers; and at last seized the royal treasure,
which was going to Canoge. Ue then made him-
self independent, and. built the city of Narwareh or
Narwaleh ; and his friend Cuampa, a market man,
says ABuL-Fazit, and of the Bfi/ cast, (a very low
tribe, according to learned Pandits from Gujrat)
built the town of Champa-nagara or Champa-nere.

The next king, noticed by Asur-Fazi1, is ane
other Samant-Sinua; but this could not be his
name, for Samant, as before observed, implies a
petty king in Sanscrit, and vassal princes are thus
denominated. Thus we read, that Priruwi-ra’va‘
had with him one hundred Samantas* or petty
princes, commanding their own quota of troops.
His name was probably Butiap a-DEvA, the imme-
diate predecessor of Muxa-raJa in our list, but the
fourth only in the Ayin-Acberi. He gave his daugh-
ter to ‘Sai-Duunpuaca of the Solanct tribe, atter
whom the town of Dkundhaca, in Gujrat’, is deno-
minated,

King Jamunp, in the Ayin-Acberi, is omitted in
our list, probably because it is a corruption from
Samanta, and a title belonging to Muta-ra’sa. In
his time, SuLTAN | Maumup Guazwevi conquered
Caine ; and, in the year 1025, replaced, upon the

* Avin-Acberi, vol. 2d, p. 118.

188 ESSAY ON

throne of his ancestors, DEB-saiLim, a descendant
of the famous king of that name, who led a re-
tired life, entirely given up to devout contempla-
tion. He is called VaALLaBna in our list, Beyser
and Brpra in various copies of the Ayin-Acberi*. -
Being a weak man, and blind, he reigned only six
months, and was succeeded by the two sons of his
brother, DurtabuHa and Buima’-ra sa’.

Then appeared the famous VisaLa-prvaA, with
the » title of Carwn’a-RaseNpRA, that is to say,
powerful and magnificent like CArn‘s, and lord
paramount over many kings. He is said, in our list,
to be a Chait'urd, that is, of the Chit‘ura tribe, still
extant in Gujrat; and after which the famous
place of Chait‘ur or Chait'or is denominated. He
was therefore a native of Aewdr, now called the
Sircar or province of Chaitér. This induces me to
believe, that he is the same with VisaLa-DEVa,
mentioned in the inscription upon the pillar of F1-
ROZE, at the hunting seat of the emperors near Dilli,
and called Stambhacamandira in the appendix to the
Agni-purdana; that is to say, the palace with the
pillar. There he is said to be king of Sacambhari,
which is probably the town of Cambher or Cambher-
mere, in the province of Alewdr. At all events, it
was certainly in that country, as I shall shew here-
after. His father Ve'Lra-pEvA was originally a
petty king of that country, and his son VisaLa-
DEVA caused that pillar to be erected, in the year
1164, and thus the times coincide. Visa pro-
bably availed himself of the indolence and supine-
ness of the princes of Ghazni, and drove the Miech’-

* Ayin-Acberi, Vol. 2d. p. 91, 95.
+ See Ayin-Acberi, Vol 2d. p. 84. The true name is, I am told,
Chittrore.

VICRAMADITYA AND $ALIVAHANA. 189

has, or Musulmans, out of Arydcarta, or the land
of virtue, thus making it, once more, what it sig-
nifies according to the inscription. <Arydvarta in-
cludes all the north of Jndia, from the snowy moun-
tains, down to the Vindhyan hills. He destroyed
all the princes who refused to submit, and kindl
treated all those who did ; and having visited all the
places of worship, through his extensive domains,
he retired to ‘Sacambhari, to end his days in peace
and rest, exhorting all the kings of Jndia not to
slumber, but to go on with his plans, and follow his
measures. He is mentioned also in the Sérngad’ha-
ra-paddhati, written by Sa’RNGAD’HARA, grandson
of Racuu-peva, spiritual guide of Ha’mira, king
of Mewar, or ‘Sdcambhari-désa, nearly in the samé
words with the inscription, which was written in
the year of VicramaDitTya 1290, answering either
to 1164 or 1154 of Curisr; for in that country
they reckoned the eva of VicramMaDitya ten years
earlier than in the eastern parts of Jndia. He was
succeeded by Jaya-sinna, called also Srppua-
RAJA, SIDDHA-RAJESA, and in the dialect of Gu-
Jarat, SIDDHA-RAJESAUA-DE for Deva. It seems
that VisaLa-peva left no male issue; for no chil-
dren of his are recorded in the above inscription,
which would not probably have been the case had he
left any. Who this Jaya-sinua was, is unknown;
but it seems that CunuWaRr-Pa’LaA, a near relation
of his, was the lawful heir; at least Aput-Fazrzi
says, that the latter, from the dread of losing his
life, lived in obscurity, during JAya-sinHa’s reign ;
after whose death he ascended the throne, but was
poisoned by Aya-pa a, the son of Jaya-sInuHa.

The next is Luc-mura-Ra‘yva, mentioned in the
Ayin-Acheri, but omitted in our list, unless he be the
same with Batu-mura, cr Ba’tuca-muLa, called
Birpmoot in the English, and Harpoun in the

190 ESSAY ON

German translation. ‘They are probably the samé
individual ; for what is asserted of Lucxarot in the
Ayin-Acberi, is affirmed of his supposed successor in
our list; namely, that after his death the nobles
elected a prince of the Bhdgéla tribe, called Brrv-
MOOL in the Ayin-Acheri*, and Buara-Buiwa-prva
in our list: the latter’s name is split into two, and
two princes made of them in the Ayin-Acberi, under
the riames of Brir-peo and Buim-prof. Ee this
as it may, Lacmur-Khaya, whose teal name was
Lacuan-muLa-ra‘va, or simply LacHan-raya,
from the Sanscrit Lacsuan a-Raya, is weil known
to Eastern writers, under the name of LacHam-
Ra‘ya t. He was born of obscure parents, and
raised himself by his own merit, and ultimately be-
came emperor, or Bala-rdya, He governed with
justice and equity: but after a long and prosperous
reign, and when he was above eighty years of age,
he was disturbed in his possessions by Maumv’p-
Bactyar Guirsr general of Sutran ManmuD, who
began his reign in the year 1205, and died in 1209.
In the years 1207 and 1208, that general Was in
Bengal ; and, therefore, he must have invaded Guj-
rat in the year 1209; but the death of the emperor
probably prevented his completing the conquest of
that country. - For though the authors cited by
D’Herseror say tliat he effected the reduction of
the country, yet Asut-FaziL says, that it was a
mere incursion §.

The reigns of Srppua-rasesa, of his cousin
CunHwar-paLa, and of Asa-pa'La, son of the
former, are obviously too lcoug; for they amount to

* Vol. 2, p. 91, 95. + Ayin-Acheri, Vol. 2d. p. 95.
t See DHERBELOT v. LAGHAM-RAYA,
§ AyinAcberi, Vol, 2d. p. 92.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHARA. 19f
73 years in the Ayin-Acheri, and to 113 in my list,
which is hardly possible; and it is not,unlikely that
Lac uan~-rayva was the prince, minister of Visa La-
DEVA, mentioned in the inscription; for he was
above 80 years old at the time of the invasion of
Gujrat, by Maumu'p Bactyar. There is such a
disagreement in the lengths of the respective reigns
of each king, in the various copies, that no certair
inference can be drawn from them; and I noticed
before a few transpositions: we must therefore re-
main satisfied with the grand outlines. Vis ana-
DEVA was not a native of Gwrdt; and thougha
Bala-rdyd, ot lord paramount, he was net king of
that country, but of the Aféwar, or Sdcambhari;
and, of course, his supremacy did not in the least
interfere with the order of succession of the kings of
Gujrat. He belonged to no dynasty, and reigned,
as well as his prime minister, collaterally with Sip-
pDHA-RAJA and his relatives; and after the extinc-
tion of that family, Lacnan-ra‘ya was not only
Bala-rdya, but hecame also king of Gujrat, and re-
sided in the metropolis of that country, both as am
emperor and as a king, during a space of twenty, or
according to some, only eight years.

The last Bala-raya was Canna the Gohilé, who
fled into the Deccan, when Suttan-ALLA-upDis
conquered Gujrat’. This happened, according to
eur list, in the year of Vicramapirya 1363, or
A. D. 1309.

At that time, the famous Ratwa-stnua was king
of the mountainous country of Méwar, and resided
at Chaitér. He was deseended from Kuosru-PrEr-
viz, called also Nusnirva’n ; and his amours with
the beautiful Papmavati or PepmaNi, are the
subject of a poem, both in Hind? and Persian. Her
beauty was the innocent cause of a. bloody war, be-

192 ESSAY ON

tween the Raja and Surran-ALLa-uppin, whicli
ended in the destruction of her lord, and his son-in-
law Rawut-Ansi, a Chauhdn. Hammnira, the son
of the latter, fled from Chaitor, sheltered himself
among the more mountainous parts of AZewar, and
maintained his independence as king of that coun-
try, and made ‘Sdcambhart the metropolis of his
little kingdom. Mewdr is divided into three parts,
Chaitér*, Cambher (or Cambher-nere for Cambher-
nagara) and Mandala (or Mandalica) built by king
Manpa'tica of the Bhil tribe, and who lived about
the year 796. Cambher is probably the same
with ‘Sacambhari, which was certainly situated in
Mewar.

Sutran MuuammMep K’uunt, or the murderer,
gave the government of Chaitor, and Mewar, to
Ma‘ta-peva, a Chauhan, and king of Jalér: but
the latter was unable to reduce Hammira, though
he had defeated him, in a bloody engagement, near
the sea shore, according to the appendix to the
Agni-purana. He then made peace with him, and
gave him his daughter in marriage}; but, after his
death, Hamnira murdered all his sons, and usurped
the kingdom. This happened, according to the ap-
pendix to the Agni-purana, in the year of Vicra-
MA'DITYA 1490, which is impossible; and we must
read 1390, or A. D. 1334; for Sutranw MuHAMMED
began his reign in 1325, and died in 1351. In that
appendix it is declared, that the base murderer was
at last defeated and slain, by the joint forces of -
SEcuNDER, governor of Gdyd, JALALA, gover-
nor of Dilli, and a body of Yavanas (Turcomans
or Mogols) commanded by Utuc’ua’Ga’, perhaps
for UnucuKua’n, a title of honor sometimes

* Ayin-Acberi, Vol. 2. p. 97. + Ibid. p. 98. t Ibid p. 103.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 198

bestowed upon noblemen, by the emperors of India.
In the English translation of the Ayin-Acheri, Ha’m-
MirA is erroneously called Jemeer. The dynasty
of the princes of A/dlwah was a collateral one with
those of the Bala Rayds, though it be placed be-
tween Nripatr and Vana-raJa in our list. Such
mistakes are not unfrequent among Hindu Chrono-
logers: but as VANaA-RaJa’s dynasty began in the
year 746, and that of A/alwah began in the year
191,-and ended about thé year 977, it is obvious
that they were collateral, and I have arranged them
accordingly. In the dynasty of the princes of I/é-
lava, GARDABHA and his son VicraMa‘DITYA re-
appear; and, in the room of Stirva-Sewnay, or S’ri-
Sdarya’'n’sa, we have S‘a’trva’ Hana; which confirms
my former conjecture, that they were but one and
the same individual.

My Pandit observes, that many of the names of
the princes, who reigned before Vana-ra‘sa, are
not proper names of individuals; but belong, either
to tribes, or ancient families, from which they
sprang, or to small districts, or towns, their patri-
monial estates, and with which he is well ac-
quainted; and many of these names are in the
plural form. Thus, Ja’tiya’, the name of a king,
implies only that he was a Ja iya’, or of the Jalm
tribe, which is settled on the banks of the Afahi.
‘Musulman writers say, that the metropolis of
those Baler kings was equally called Balhar, as
well as the mountains among which it is situated*.
It was in a country belonging to the Chauhan tribe,
the chief of which generally resides at Alimohant:
and it became the metropolis, when that tribe

* See D’'HERBELOT’S Bibl. Orient. v. BALWAR.
+ This is also confirmed by ABUL-FaAziIL. See Ayin-Acberi,
Vol. 2d. p. 87. 4
Wor, sbX. e

194 | . . BS$AY ON

usurped the rank and power of Bala-Rayds. It is
declared in our list, that the Chauhdns were, at
some period, rulers of the whole country, as Bala-
Rayds ; but our, author has forgot to point out, in
the list, the princes of that famous and ancient
tribe. | .

In the fifth century, Tamra-nagara, er Cambat,
was the metropolis of the Bala-rdyds ; and perhaps
of the emperors of the west also, when these two
dignities happened to be united in the same person ;
and it was the place of residence of the father-in-+
law of GarpasHa, or Bauram-Gur, called Sa-
DASVA, SADASVA-PALA, VeEsuDHA and Ta’mMRA-
sEN’A, from his metropolis, Zamra-nagara, or
Tamra-pura, signifying the Copper city, whieh is
supposed, accordingly, to have been intirely built
of that metal. It was near Cambat ; but tradition
says that it was swallowed up by the sea; and Cam-
bat was a famous place of worship, called, in the
Puranas, Stambhastha-Tirtha* from a Stambha or
column, close to the sacred pool. Now, a column
is called Camba in the spoken dialects; and from
Cambasta, is derived its present name of Cambdt.
Stambhastha and Tamrapura are called Asta and
Traperd, by the author of the Periplus; but Pro-
LEMY, considering these two places as one only, for
they were close to each other, calls it Astacampra or
Astacapra; and instead of Tamra, which signifies
copper, he writes. Campra or Capra. The reason
why he has carried this place so far inland, on the
banks of the AZahi, is, that either he, or some other
writer, misunderstood the natives, who have no
word for a bay or gulf, and use generally the word
river instead of it, particularly when there is one at
the bottom of the gulf, as in the present case f.

* Cumarica C’handa. + Cola signifies only a Creek.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 195

Osorio, a Portugueze writer, says; that when
Francis D’Aumerpa landed, near Cambét, in the
year 1519, he saw the ruins of sumptuous buildings
and temples, the remains of an ancient city, the
history of which was connected with that of a fo-
reign prince. My Pandit informs me, that such
_Tuins exist to this day, not close to Cambdt, but at
a place called Cavi or Cavi-gauw, to the south of
Cambat, on the Baroach side, and a little to the
southward of a place called Cand, and in the maps
Canwa. ‘There are temples and other buildings, with
statues half buried in the sands, with which this
place was overwhelmed. Its Sanscrit name is Capila-
gram, from which is derived its present one.

The promontory of Asta-Campron, mentioned in the
Periplus, at the entrance of the gulf, appears to me
to be Groapnaught point. It was thus called, because
it was on the side of Stambha, and Tamra, ot Cambat.
Another name for it was Papica, from a place of that
name iti its vicinity. As it is the same place called
Pakidaré by Protemy, the true reading will stand
thus, Bhaucd-dera, Bhauki-derd, Bhaui, or Bhavicd-
derd, that is to say, the house or dwelling place of
Buav or Bravt, an ancient hero of that country,
who built the town of Bhau-nagara, or Bhavi-gauw,
and probably the same with Bhau-ki dera. Beyond
this cape, according to the Periplus, there is an-
other place, toward the north, much exposed to the
waves; and at the entrance of it, that is to say, of
the channel leading to it, isan island called Baiones.
This island is that of Berum, at the entrance of the
channel, leading among shoals to the dwelling place
of Bhauwi, or Bhau-nagara, on the river Bhaui, and
near the point of the same name. There is also a
sand thus called; and the island of Baiones pro-
bably claims the same etymological origin ; and per-
haps, instead of Bazones in the original, we should
read Bavo-nésos, or the island of Bhau or Bhaui.

O04

196 ESSAY ON

This place, says our author, is difficult of access, ow
account of the rapid tides, and because the cables
are liable to be,cut, by sharp rocks at the bottom of
the sea. This island was once the seat of govern-
ment, according to Asur-Faziz, who calls. it
Birum*. Opposite to Bhdvi-gauw, says the author
of the Periplus, and on the right side of the gulf, in
the narrowest part of it, there is a reach, where the
land near the sea appears much broken, and consists:
entirely of clay. It is called Heroné, and there is a
place called Cammoni or Camané. This reach is the
sea coast between the Narmada and the Jambusser river.’
My Pandit observes, that the.country between these
two rivers, and along the sea coast, 1s called to this.
day Canum ; but he does not know of any particular
place so’ called. There is not a single stone to be
seen; and the country is flat, the sea shore much
indented, and there are very few trees: but it is pro-
bable that it was otherwise formerly; and Heroné is
perhaps from the Sanscrit Aran'ya, which signifies a
thick, but not impervious forest.

Protemy has confounded the points of Swalley,
Diu and Jiggat into one, which he calls Badaion,
probably meant for Diu-head, a name given to it by
baa but unknown to the natives; and the
nearest place .of note to it is /Veylanoo in Masor
ReENNELL’s map, from which Balaion or Valaiow
seems to bea corruption. ‘The island ealled by him
Baraké is Dwéaracda, as obvious from its relative po-
sition; and Baraké may be only a mistake for Dwd-
raca. Besides, these two denominations are syno-
nymous, or nearly so, and imply a door or gate-way.
Dwara is properly the opening, and Bhar is the bar,
or barriere, or the leaves of the door, with which
the opening is kept barred or shut; and it is used,

¢ Ayin-Acberi. Vol, 2d. p. 83.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 197

though improperly, for the door itself. It is used
in that sense only in the west of India; yet the
verb derived from it, barna, in the infinitive, and
dar in the imperative mood, is used all over India,
except in the peninsula. Twasnur‘a’, the chief en-
gineer of the gods, having built a palace there, for
Ran‘acuursi or Crisuna, (that is he who fled from
the field of battle,) and Trrcumsi his brother, placed
many of the doors the wrong way; and those that
were properly situated were barred or shut up. When
finished, every body crowded to see it; but were
astonished to find the doors either placed wrong or
barred ; and great was the confusion and the uproar,
some calling out Dwara-chdnh ? where is the door?
and others bawling out Bharco-col, open the door ;
hence the place was ever since denominated Dwa-
vaca ; and this ridiculous etymology is countenanced.
in the Purdn‘as. .

The geography of Proxemy, in this part of India,
is distorted to an astonishing degree; for besides a
few mistakes, which I have mentioned, he supposes
the river J/Zaht to form an elbow, and to run close
to the Narmada, with which it is made to communi-
cate, through a short canal; and then afterwards to
fall into the gulf of Cantha, or Cach’ha. We were
euilty of as gross an error, two centuries ago; for
we made the Zndus to fall into the gulf of Cambat.
The Mahi is a celebrated river, and the daughter of
the earth (Mahi,) and of the sweat (ushna,) that
ran copiously from the body of InpRapyumna,
king of Ujjayin?, and famous in the legends relating
to the white island in the west. The place where
this happened, in consequence of a most fervent
tapasya, was called Ushnmahi and Ushmahi, and is
probably the Aruams or Auxromais mentioned by
Protemy. The author of the Periplus* says, that

* P, 25 and 34,
03

198 ESSAY ON

at the mouth of the Narmada, they used boats, which
they called Trappaga and Cotymba; and we read in
the Ayin-Acberi, thatin Gujarat’ the cargoes of ships
are put into small vessels, called Tahwery, and thus
earried ashore*. My Pandit informs me, that the
true pronunciation is 7Zaberi, and in a derivative
form TZabericad, from which the European sailors made
Trappaga. Cotymba is no longer in use in that
country; but, from derivation, it implies a boat
made of the trunk of a tree, and seems to answer to
the cathimarans on the Coromandel coast. ‘ When,’
says our author, ‘ several of these canoes are put to-
gether, they are then called Sangara, (from the
Sanscrit Sangraha an assemblage ;) but im Gujarat’
they are called Jia, from their being coupled to-
gether. The king of the country about Calydn and
Bombay was called Saracanes; but the true Hindu
name was SARANGA, or SARANGESA. He was very
friendly to the Greeks: but, his kingdom having
_ been conquered by Sanpawnrs, they were no longer
allowed to trade there}. He was king of Ariaké,
the country of the Aryyds ; who were foreigners,
according to the Brahmanda-puran'at, and were de-
nominated Saprnor, according to Proremy, from
the Sanscrit Sddhana, lords and masters, ‘Thus, the
Portugueze were, and are even to this day, styled,
in Bengal, Thacurs. The English, in the spoken
dialects, are called Saheb-légs ; but, by learned men,
Sadhana Engriz; and all these denominations sig-
nify the lords and masters. Thus, the famous Buosa
is generally styled, in the west, Sa‘DHANA, or Sa'p-
HANA Buosa. Such probably is the origin of the
name of Sanpanes, king of the Sadinoi, or Sadha-
nésa. I shall speak more fully, in the next essay,
of these “Aryyds, in whose country was a famous

? Vol. 2d. p. 78. + Arriani Peripl. p. 50.
t Section ef the earth.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 199

city, called by Pronemy Banawdsi. It still exists,
and great was its fame in ancient times; but my
inquiries concerning it have hitherto proved fruit-
less. |

In the eighth century, Vana-ra’za built Nar-
waleh ; and his friend Cuampa butlt also the famous
town of Champd-nere. In the tenth century, accord-
ing to Masoupi, Manhawer became again the me-
tropolis of the Bala-rdyds ; but in the latter end of
the eleventh, and m the beginning of the twelfth
centuries, they returned to Narwaleh or Narwareh ;
and in the year 1029, Surran Manmup passed
through it, and was much delighted with its situa-
tion. The princes of Malwa resided at first at
Ujjayini, but Munsa transferred the seat of Empire
to ‘Son'itpura in the Dekhin, according to the appen-
dix to the Agni-purawa, and now called, after him,
Munja-pattana. It is situated on the banks of the
_Gédavéri ; but whether it be the same with Pattana,
or Pratishtan'a, where Sa iva HANA is supposed to
have resided, is unknown to me; though I suspect
that the latter is a little higher up the river, and is
called Baithana by Protemy, who says, that in his
time it was the metropolis of king Srr1-PoLrmatios,
the nearest denomination to which, in Hindi, is
‘Sri-Putoma, or Sri-Purrma’na. ‘Son'ttpure im-
plies the city of blood, and was thus called, accord-
ing to tradition, because Munsa’s army was defeated
there, with immense slaughter, and himself lost his
life. His being killed in the Deccan is mentioned in
the Ayin-Acberi*. The old city of Benares, north
of the river Burn‘d, and now in ruins, is sometimes
thus called, and tradition variously accounts for it.
Munsa’s successor resided afterward at Dhérd-na-
gara, now Dhar, and called also, according to lexi-

oe a a en AR RI pt SE RE

® Vol. 2d. p. 55.
04

200 ESSAY ON oT

cons, ‘As érapura, Asdra-griha or As ara-gur ; which
is probably the town called Zerogere or Xerogeri by
Provemy, Bammogara, mentioned by the same
author, is probably Bamun-gauw, or Bamun-gur, on
the northern bank of the Narmada, about thirty
miles 8S, W. of Jdandow, and noticed in a route fom
Sultanpoor, on the Zapti, to Ujjayini, |

The immediate predecessor of VANA-RA'SA, | at
least in the corrected list, is styled Nxi-patr, the
lord of men, or the emperor; but there was an in-
terregnum ; for there were, at that time, neither
Béla-Rés yds nor emperors in Gaara’; and the whole
country was subject to the emperors of Canoge ; for
Vawna-raJga’ seized upon the royal treasure, on its
way from Gujarat’ to that met apoiti

In these lists, and also in those from the Puranas,

the names of many kings, posterior to the Christian
era, are hardly th to the Sanscrit standard);
oa most of them seem to be epithets, and ick
names, borrowed from the vulgar dialects; or else
names of persons of low tribes.

_ In our list we read first, “then will appear princes
of the Chayhdna, Chawda and Gohila tribes.”. Dt-
saca, the first emperor was a Yadava, or from the
Yadu tribe. After the eleventh king, called Da-
nina’, “ then will appear the following tribes, the
Cshdlés, Macwanas, Hunas, Bhoanas ; > all names
in a plural form: ad these tribes; except the Hundés,
belong to Gwarit, and are still extant, What the
author meant, by introducing them here, is not
easily conjectured but I suppose that there was an
interregnum, during which, these tribes became in-
dependent in their own districts. “Then. will come
Nicuwsua, the Jdlid,” or of the Jalim tribe. “ His
successor was Tna’ca; when the Ch’harui-vi-haha

b]

appeared ;” in some copies we read ‘Ch’haruada-vi-

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 201

-hahdé, and the first part is to be pronounced nearly
CiW’haruara, answering to the Persian Char-é-aur, or
the four associates.

The third table contains Raeuu-Nna’Pr'Ha’s list, as
current in the eastern parts of Jrdia. It begins with
the Cali-yuga, or yather with the Mahd-Bharata, or
great war: but I have omitted the first part, prior to
the times of Mana’-Batrt, as it has not the least affi-
nity with the lists from the Purdna’s, and throws no
light on that part of the ancient history of India.
MauA-BALI, according to the present list, reigned
forty years and eight months; which is conformable
to the Purdna's, in which he is said to have reigned

_ 40 years, including the 12 years, during which his

sons, the Sumdalyadicas, reigned together, and which
are generally ascribed to him. From the frst of
his accession, to the first year of VicraMma’pitya’s
era, the present list allows 298 years, 6 months and

9 days; to which 56 years being added, it will place
his accession to the imperial throne 355 B. C. which
is very correct, as I have shewn in my essay on
Anu-Gangam. Unfortunately, it is the only correct
part in the whole list. The successor of Mana’=

BALI was CHANDRA-GUPTA, or CHANDRA-PA‘LA,
fostered or concealed by Lunus; and who lies here
concealed under the name of Anmriq-pa’La, for
Lunus is but a mess of Amrit, which Cuanpra-
GUPTA is supposed to have been fed with, during
the time of his concealment ; and a reign of 28 years
is here assigned to him, as in the Purdvas.

From the first of ‘Aprrya’s era, tothe first of ‘Su-
DRACA, there are 347 years, answering to A. D.
291: but in. the Cumdricd-chanda, it is declared,
that he began his reign in the year of the Cali-yuga
3291, or A. D. i91; and other circumstances prove,
that this date is true, or very nearly so, There are,
to fillup that space, only nine kings, whose reigns

992 ESSAY ON

are ut an excessive length; and 100 years exactly
must be struck off. ‘Supnaca is also styled Vicra-
MaA’DITYA; and here is the most material difference,
between the various copies of the Vansdvali: for in
those current in the west, instead of Supraca, we
read Vicrama DiTYA, whose predecessor was Buar-
TRI-HARI, Or SACWANT and SAMUDRAPA'LA his suc-
cessor.

From the first year of ‘Supraca, to the first of
VicraMAaDitya the son of Banram-Gur, there
are 343 years, and only fifteen kings to fill up that
space. He began his reign, A. D. 441, or 442, and
of course we must strike off 100 years more from that
period.

From the first year of this VicramapitTya, to
Mauasuar and the first of the Hera, there elapsed
196 years; which is about 16 years too many. From
this period, to Deva-Dua’ra-stnua or Buésa, 148
years; which is too little by about 200 years; but
by introducing here the 200 years we have struck off

before, it will place either the accession or death of |

Budésa, in the year 970. From Buésa to Trar-
LOCYA-PA'LA, Or JAYA-CHANDRA, 192 years. ‘Su-
DRACA, SurAca, called also ‘Apitya, Sri-Carn’a-
Deva and ‘Sri-Carn’a-Rasa-VicRaMA, Was a fa-
mous conqueror and most powerful emperor. He is
introduced, in the list of the kings of Bengal, as one
of the successors of the famous Bu’aca-Datrta, the
son of Naraca, king of Pragyotisha, in Assam; and
to whom Ca’nrya’ the black, or Crisuna, restored
the kingdom, after he had killed his father.

In that list, he is supposed to have lived 1367

years after the Mahda-Bharata; which will place
him about the beginning of the Christian era; but,
according to the Jaings, who place the beginning of

we

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 205

the Cali-Yuga about 1000 years B. C. this will make
his reign coincide nearly with the period assigned to
it by the Pauranics. |

The last king of Bengal was LacsuMan’yanH, who
was deprived of his kingdom by Munammep Bak-
THYAR, the general of Corus-upp1N, about the year
1207; for, in 1209 the same general was in Gwardt,
and the emperor died also in that year. From the
first of ‘Sri-Carn’a-De'va, or SupRaAca, to 1207,
there elapsed 1017 years, during which reigned 49
kings, at the rate of about 20. 7 years toeach reign.
The last dynasty in this list; consists of seven princes,
who reigned 106 years in all.

The dynasty next ‘to this is remarkable for the
epithet of Pala, which every one of them added
to his own name or title. The first of that dynasty
was Buu’-pata, who was still alive in the year of
VIcRAMADITYA 1083, answering to the year of
Curist, either 1017, or 1027. Bru-pa’ta had two
sons, STHIRA-PALA and VASANTA-PA’LA, who erected
a singular, and at the same time sumptuous monu-
ment, in honor of Bupp’Ha, ata place called Sarnath,
near Benares. This was in the year of Vicrama-
DITYA 1083, as recorded in an inscription found
there some years ago, and inserted in the fifth volume
of the Asiatic Researches. ‘Tradition says, that be-
fore it was completed, it was destroyed by the Musul-
mans ; and there is every reason to believe, that this
was really the case. For the arches and vaults of
the greatest part of the buildings which are now
buried under ground, still retain the supports of sun-
dried bricks, over which the arches were turned. In
the year 1017 Suttran Maumup took Benares, and
the town of Casam, or Cusuma, now Patna, and
went even as far as the country of Ouganam, or Unga,
to the west of the Cossim-bazar river. The next
year, he overrun again these countries, and penetrated

204 ESSAY ON )

as far as Kisraje, or Cachha-Raja, in the northern
parts of Bengal, called Koge by Ferrtsura, and
Couche by European travellers of the 15th and 16th
centuries, (such as R. Fire :) and Cug or Coos- Behar
made part of it. In a manuscript account of Benares,
compiled for me by learned men, about sixteen years
ago, it is said, that according to tradition, this monu-
ment was built by a powerful prinee, called BuppHa-
SENA, an epithet which implies that this king, who-
soever he was, was a zealous follower of Buppua.
He abhorred the Musulman name, and during the
very first invasions, he was summoned to submit, and
pay an yearly tribute, but refused...

The Musulman army advanced, put every body to
the sword, and destroyed the fort and the place ;
and it is obvious from the remains, that neither was
completed. With regard to the date 1083, it was
suggested to me that it may answer either to the year
of Curis? 1027, or 1017; because formerly the era of
VicrRAMADITYA was reckoned ten years earlier than
now ; and this mode of reckoning is still in use in the
south of India. It was in use in Cashmir, at least
some hundred years ago, as appears from the Ra@a-
Tarangint. When this alteration took place, and
whea it was received in the northern parts of India,
is not known. On my asking the reason of this cor-
rection, my learned friends did not appear to under-
stand the subject well: but, from what I could gather
from their conversation, it appears to me, that their
ideas on this subject were, that the years of the erg
of Sa‘tiva’HANnA being Sydereal, are not subject to
any variation. That the years of the era of Vicra~
MADITYA, which are now Luni-Solar, were not so
formerly, and that the lunar years of it, instead of
being regulated by the course of the Sun, and adapted
to it, were formerly regulated by the revolution
of Jupiter, the years of which were believed, at
that early period, to be equal to as many solar

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 2035

years*: for this planet, as seen from the earth,
comes back to the same point in heaven, after a
period of twelve years and five days; and in the
Deccan, they reckon the cycle of Jupiter ten years
earlier than in the northern parts. When the error
was discovered, the years of Vicrama‘piTya were
made Luni-Solar, and they retained no further con-
nection with the revolution of Jupiter. They added,
that several corrections, more or less perfect, obtamed
at different times, and particularly one of fourteen
years ascribed to Buar-rrinart, or rather referred _
to his time; and which was said to have been the
length of his reign.

In that case, the demolition of the monument,
which we are speaking of, took place in the year
1017, during the invasion of Maumup; for from
that period, the Hindus, in this part of India, ve-
mained for along time unmolested by the Musulmans.
Mopup’s invasion, in 1043, was directed toward
the south; and in that direction only, he penetrated’
further than Maumup, as recorded in history.

King Buu-pa‘ta is called also Mani-pva’na, in this
inscription; but these two epithets are synonymous, and
signify he who fosters the earth, or world. Sruira-
pa‘La, called Duir-pa'ia inthe dyin-Acheri, hadason.
called Des-pa'La, or DEVA-PALA; who, in my opi-
nion, is the same who is mentioned in the grant found
at Monghir, and in the inscription upon a pillar at
Buddd. Wis father was Duarma-pa'La, which pro-
bably was the title given to him, when he succeeded
his father Buu’-pa’La, called Gé-pa’ta in the grant.
The Hindus always have two names, one of them
answering to our Christian names, and used in the

* Asiatic Researches, Vol, II. p.216.&c.*

806 ESSAY ON

performance of religious rites. Besides, kings have
at least one title given to them, besides nicknames
occasionally; and it is allowed to make use of sy-
nonymous terms; and thus G6-pa‘La, on ascending
the throne, was indifferently styled Buu’-pa‘La and
and Mani-pa'ta. The son of Sri-Dr'va-Pa’La was
Ra‘sa-pa'La, perfectly synonymous with Buu‘pati--
pa’LA, as he is called in the Ayin-Acberi; for all
Rdjas are equally denominated Bhu-pati.

As the Hunds er Huns, are mentioned in the_
inscription at Buddal, Sri-DEva-Pa‘La must have
lived at a period comparatively. modern; for the
Huns made their first appearance on the borders of |
Persia, the time of Bauram-Gur, who began
his reign in the year 421. In the year 458, Balkh
was their metropolis; and, in the beginning of the
seventh century, they were settled in the Panjab,
according to Cosmas InpicopLEeustrs, who calls
them White Huns; and they are the same, of course,
with.the Abtelis, Abtelites or Enthalites. It is the
opinion of several well informed men, from Cabul.
and the adjacent countries, that the Adbdélis existed,
as a nation or tribe, long before MunamMmerp; and
that the denomination of Abdali is not derived from
the Persian word Abdal, the servant of God. In
that case, they may be a remnant of the ddtalis,
or Abtelites. It was about that time, that the dy-
nasty of the Hunds in India began, and which is
recorded by the Paurdnics. There were thirteen:
kings of them, and eleven more under the name of
Maunas, as it is supposed; but whether in due
succession, or in a collateral: line, or only partially
so, is unknown. We find that their power extended
even into Gujarat’, as I observed before, about:
the era of Munammep; and some think that Mauna
is a contraction from Machwan'a or Mahd-Hun‘as ;
for, in the west of India, they say Jaga, and write

VICKAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 40> 6

Macha, for Maha; and instead of Mu1ammMen,
they say, Macuomar and Mac’HOBHAT, as we
used to do formerly in the west*. ' The Macwanés
are noticed in the Gujarat’ list, and. also in the
lists from the Purdias, in the chapters on futurity.
In the Facsimile of the grant of Aonghir, in the.
first volume of the Asiatick Researches, the date is
plainly 132, mstead of 32; but, had it been as ob-
vious in the original, Mr. Wirxins, and the Pan-
dits, who read it with him could not have beer
mistaken. To decide this, recourse must be had
to the original, which is, I believe, deposited with
the Royal Society. The two Musulman travellers
of Renaupor, in the ninth century, remark, that
the Hindus did not, like the Arabs, use a general
era, but reckoned the years from the accession of
the reigning prince. This is acknowledged by the
learned in Zdia, and that it was the constant prac-
tice, till a period comparatively modern, and the
limits of which it is not easy toascertain. Several
princes have attempted to set up eras of their own,
and these princes, instead of Saca-bandhis, or ‘Sac-
wantas, were styled simply Samvaticas or Santicas.
Thus, Vicrama’pirya’s era was considered as Sac
for the space Of 135 years, and himself was then a
‘Sac-wanta: but his era is now Samvatgira, or
Samvat, and himself only a Semvatica;and the present
‘Sacwanta, or ‘Saca, is Sa tiva'uana. The Pandits,
who assisted Aput-FaziL, took particular notice of
that circumstance, and carefully pointed it out to
himy. As the date in the Monghir grant is within
the 135 years, during which the era of VicraMa-
pitya was S‘aca, it should have been styled thus,
and not Samvat: and hence it may be concluded,
that the date has no connexion with that era.

a

!
-

* See Tamuli dictionary. + Ayin-Acberi Vol. 1. p. S31.

208 ESSAY ON

The reason, why the famous ‘Sri-De'va-Pa’ra
js not mentioned in the lists from the Puran‘as, is,
that he lived in too modern times, for they do not
come so low. After the invasion of Sutran-Man-
muD, in the years 1017 and 1018, the Hindus en-
joyed some respite, till the last A/ahabharat, or great
war, in 1192, when all the heroes of Jndia fell in
the plains of Thaiu-Sar. During that period, Sri-
Deva-Pa’ta might humble those of Dravira and
Gurjarat (that is to say the Bala-réyés), and the
Hunas in the Panjab; for he by no means conquered
them; and he probably humbled them only, by re-
fusing to pay some yearly tribute, and putting on a
bold countenance, at the head of a powerful army.
It seems, however, that he marched through the
Vindhyan hills, to the west of the Jumna, and then
went into the Punjab, as far as the borders of’ the
kingdom of Cdmboja or Ghazni. Tie time in which
this expedition took place, cannot be ascertained,
but within certain limits. After Mopup’s invasion,
in the year 1043, the Hindus recovered some strength
and courage, under the weak reigns of Tocrun
the usurper, and Furruex-Za'p. The enterprising
Ipranim succeeded him; but it was not till the
year 1079 that he was enabled to lead an army
into India; and probably the expedition of Sri-
Deva-pa'La took place between the years 1052
and 1059, during the weak reign of) FurrucK-
Za'p, of whom nothing is recorded. BY

The list of the kings of* Bengal, im the Ayin-
Acberi, was formed by Jainas, who place the be- .

inning of the Cali-yuga only 1078 B. C. but it was
Rrterwaits altered by the followers of Brahma, and
the beginning of it placed 3100 B.C. and the reigns
of every king prodigiously lengthened, in order tomake
the whole coincide with the first year of the Cali-yuga.

The Rajas of Sirinagur pretend to be descended from

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 209

BeRAGA-DATTA, contemporary with Crisuna; but
in their pedigree, communicated by the present
king, to Captain Harpwicker, in the year 1796,
it is acknowledged that for the space of 00 years
after Buaca-Darra, nothing is recorded of his suc-
cessors, not even their names*. If the same correc-
tion be introduced into the list of Bengal princes,
it will place the reign of AnanGa- Buinwa in the
first century before the Christian era, and bring the
whole list, at least, within the bounds of historical
scence:

Throu “8 the uncertainty of Persian orthography,
and the ci doer of transcribers, the names of
these princes are most miserably disfigured; and I
shall only observe here, that the real names of the
three predecessors of Supraca, are SANCARA-SINHA,
Satrusira, and Buttrari-pa’La, or Ra’jJA-PaA’La.
His successor’s name is JAyapraca, called CrisHna
in the Purdn‘as, and said there to have been his
brother, :

I shall now produce another list, which was
brought from Assam by the late Dr. Wape ; and
given by him to Mr. Harineton. It was originally
the same with the Vansa-vali, but it was new mo-
delled, according to the ideas of the Jamas ; though,
I must confess, that it is difficult to say which is the
original one. Be this as it may, it is certainly a
most curious list, and in some instances it affords
useful hints.

. yrs. ms, days.
To YUDHISHTHIRA, - - - - 18808 10
To Mitra sINnHA, - - - - - 9966 9

* Asiatic Researches, Vol. 6. p. 338.
Vou. IX. P

210 | ESSAY ON

yrs. ms. dys.
To: Nai-sinwa, +" +) Hoe <a 30
To Vrisa-Pa La, ~ - =~ - - 834 6 19
To SADASVA-PALA, - - - = 8387 11 Q
To Ha’ Mineo oie! eh oe +e C1 A
To Ma‘DHAVA-SENA, - - + - 107 1:22

To SAILapHa’RA’ or BHOsa, - - 354 7 22
To Rati-pa'ta, + = = p= =) Bah Hie

In this list, Mrrra-stnua is meant for Jrva,
and Nri-sinua for Gavrama; and YuDHISHTHIR
is placed here, by the followers of Jina in the
1881st year of the Cali-yuga of the followers of
Brauma’, but in the beginning of their own, for
which they have two different. reckonings. Ac-
cording to one, the Cali-yuga began 1078, but
according to the other, 1219 B.C. and this last
computation has been adopted here. According to
it, Jina or ‘Saca was born 1907 years* B. C. or
12 years after the Cali-yuga and Crisunat. He
lived 257 years, and died accordingly 950 years B. C.
Those who place the beginning of the Cali-yuga
1078 B.C. say, that Jina was born in the year
1108, and died in 1036. Others, admitting the same
era, say, that he was born in the year 1036, and
died A. D. 950; and’ thus, whether he lived 957
or 77 years, his death equally happened in the same
year before Curisr. |

The next is Nri-stinna or GAUTAMA: Nri-sInNnA
is a well known title of ‘Sa’trvA’HANA, and in the
Gujarat list I mentioned before, SALIvA‘HANA is
introduced in the solar line, in the room of SuGATA
or Gautama. ‘This explains a passage from the

* See Kempfer.
+ Asiatic Researches, Vol. 2d. p, 122 and 15.

~

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 211
Vardha-sanhita, in which it is said, that ‘Sa’tiva’-
HANA, or Saca, the,ruler of the period denominated
after him, appeared when 2526 years of the era
of YupuisuTH1Ra had elapsed; that-is to say, he
was born 574 years B. C. and the year 544 is consi-
dered as that, either of his manifestation to the world
as a legislator, or of his ascension into heaven. The
Jainas, as wellas the followers of Brana’, claim
‘SA'LIVA‘HANA as their own, and suppose that ‘he
manifested himself several times to the world; and
as there are several VicraMa‘pitTyas, there are, of
course, several worthies of the name of Sa‘Liva-
HANA.

Vrisa-pa ca, or Brisa-wa’'ia, is the famous Ma-
HA-BALI; for the kings of AZagadha were thus called,
as I observed in my essay on Anu-Gangam; and this
title was distorted into Birpwat and Berpaut by
Musulman writers. He is placed, erroneously, a
little before the era, of VicramaDiTya, by the
compiler, for reasons which will appear immediately.

From this famous emperor, he passes to Sapa'r-
PA‘LA, or SADASVaA-PA'LA, father-in-law of BAHRAM-
Gur, and who gave him his daughter in marriage,
about the year 426; thus passing over the dynasties
of Supraca and Sa’Liva‘Hana. The last dynasty,
which he supposes to have lasted 500 years, our
compiler has transported and brought down as low
as the invasion of Trmur, in the year 1398. This
famous conqueror is generally called Trmur-LENk,
by Hindus, in their Chronological lists, and also in
an inscription near Byigur.

This account of Sa’tiva’HANa’s dynasty at Dili,
and at so late a period, however strange, is rot en-
tirely groundless. TrEFFENTHALER,. in his account of
Subah Dili, mentions two kings of that name, on
theauthority of some Persian writers, whom he doe

Pa

912 ESSAY ON

not name. I saw the good old man, at Lucknow,
in the year 1784. He was a man of austere manners,
and incapable of deceit. His list of the kings, of
the YLomdra and Chehan tribes at Dilli, has’ cer-
tainly much affinity with those in the Ayin-Acheri*:
and the Kholassey-ul-Towdaric and FERtsuva’s account
of the Subahs of India, are most likely the sources,
from which the good father drew his information ;
but as these tracts are not at present within my reach,
I cannot ascertain this point.

The Bhats, or Bhattics, who live between Dilli
and the Panjdd, insist that they are descended from
a certain king, called Sa’Liva’Hana, who had three
sons Buat, ‘Maya, or Moyer, and ‘THAIMA, or
TuaMma’z. Moye settled at Pattydleh, and either
was a Thanovi or Thawoni, or had a son thus called.
When Amin-Timur invaded India, he found, at Fog-
locpoor, tothe N. W. of Dili, a “ei WE called Soloun
or Salwan, who were Thanovis or Manicheans; and
these he ordered to be massacred, and their town to
be burned tf. ‘Sa’Liva’HANA 1s generally pronounced
‘SSALWAN and ‘SALBAN in the west, and NIEBUHR
calls him SHau-Leway. *

The Manicheans were Christians; and when Fa-
THER Monserrat was at Dili, at the court of
Acar, he was informed, that near that metropolis,
and to the S. W. of it, and of course at Toglockabad,
near the palace of PITHAURA, the usual residence
of the ancient kings of that city, there were certain
tombs, which were asserted to be those of some
ancient princes of Diéili, who were Christians, and
lived a little before the invasion of the Musulmans.
If these tombs really existed, they did not belong
to Hindus, who never erect any: they could hardly

* Vol. 2d. p. 62.
+ Deguignes Histy, of the Huns, Vol. 5. p. 50.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 213°

belong to Musulmans, for it is scarcely possible that
they should be mistaken by Musulmans; since the
tombs of those among them, who fell in battle, or
otherwise died, in the beginning of their invasions,
are looked upon as places of “worship ; and. those.
entombed there are considered, either as martyrs,;
or saints. In speaking of the tombs, and other mo~;
numents or events in Jndia, FATHER MonsERRAT
says, with much candour, ‘I was told so in that
country, or, ‘I was assured of it by respectable
persons ; but whether it be so or not, I cannot fur-
ther say.’ He explains himself in these terms, with
regard to thirteen figures, in basso relievo, upon the
rocks of Gwalior, which he visited in his way from
Surat to Dill, and which were supposed, by Chris-
tians in India, to represent our Saviour and_ his
twelve disciples; one figure in the middle being a
little higher than the rest. Monsen says, that
they were so much defaced, that no inference could
be drawn from them, except their being thirteen in
number*. The foregoing particulars, concerning
the Bhats, Sa’Liva’Hana and his three sons, I ob-
tained from an intelligent native, whom I sent to
survey the countries to the N. W. of Dili. Hewas
employed, on that service, from the year 1786 till
1796; and, in the year 1787, he was inthe country
of the Bhats. His instructions were to inquire par-
ticularly, into the geographical state of these coun-
tries; and, whenever he could find an opportunity,
to make inquiries also into their history and antiqui-
ties. At that time I knew very little about Sa‘Liva’-
HANA, and was still less interested in his history ;
and of course that ancient prince was not mentioned °
to him; and the knowledge which he obtained, con-
cerning him, among the Bhats, was merely accidental,
and by no means in consequence of any previous
directions from me.

1

* P. 164,
P3

e114 ESSAY ON

The Heresy of the Manicheans spread all over the
western parts of India, and into Ceylon, at a very
early period, in consequence of violent persecutions
in Persia, during which the followers of Mawes fled
in great numbers, and at different times, into India:
and it is even highly probable, that Manes remained
a long time concealed in that country in the fort of
Arabin, on the eastern banks of the river Strangha,
now called Chitrangh and Caggar. The Mesopo-
tamia here mentioned by ArcHEtaus the Bishop,
is the five Antarvédis, or Mesopotamias of the Panjab,
commonly called the five Bhéds or Bhedies ; and
StraBo, speaking of the Bhéd or Antarvédi, between
the Chinib and the Jellam, says, “in this Mesopo-
tamia,” and here the pronoun this has an obvious re-
ference to the several Bheds or Mesopotamias of the
Payab. The river Strangha is called Saranges by
Arrian; and the Chitrangh, flowing from the
northern hills, passes to the westward of Sfhan‘u-sar
or Thanu-sar, at some distance from which the water
is absorbed by the sands; yet the vestiges of its
ancient bed may be traced as far as Bacar on the
Indus. The report of my native surveyor concerning
this river, is also confirmed by the report of GENE-
RAL Tuomas in-his Memoirs*. There were Bhats
or Bhattis in that country, long before the arrival of
Manes; for Protemy, in the beginning of the third
century, takes notice in that country of two con-
siderable towns, obviously denominated after them.
The first is Bata-nagra or Bhat-nagara, the town of
the Bhats. Bhatnere is the vulgar pronunciation
-of it; but the present town of Bhatnere is net the
same with the Bhat-nagara of Protemy; which
was to the westward of the river Beyah, and is
probably the town called Bhattyaleh. The other
place noticed by Pronemy is Batan-cai-sara, a com-
pound name; and in the true idiom of the Hind?

-

* Page 104s

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. G15
language, Bhatton-hi-sara, or Bhatton-ca-sara, the
pool of the Bhats. Bhatton is the plural form from
Bhat, and ki or ca the mark of the possessive case ;
and sara is a pool or lake. Bhatton-ca-sara is ac-
cording to the idiom of the dialect about Dilii; but
at Lahore, and in the Panjab, they would say Bhaté-
yan-da-sara ; for as they say there Bhatt: for Bhat,
the plural form is then Bhattyanh with a nasal 2,
and da or di are the usual marks of the possessive
case with them. Bhattyan-da, is also a derivative
form, implying as much as belonging to the Bhattis,
and is synonymous with Bhattyaleh. From the
situation assigned to it by Protemy, I suppose it to
be the same place which is called Bhattinda, to the
N. N. E. of Bhat-nere. The Bhattis ave shepherds,
and various tribes of them are found in the Panjab;
and they also inhabit the high grounds to the east of
the Indus, from the sea to Uch. These tribes are
called Ashambhetty in the Ayin-Acberi ; but several
well informed men, who had long resided in that
country, say that the true pronunciation is Acsham-
Bhatti: which implies the many troops or. bands of
the Bhattis ; because they go by troops selected from
various tribes or families. }

Manes gave himself out as the Curist, and had
also twelve disciples; and, in the character of
Curist, he became ‘Sa’Ltiva’Hana in Jndia. He
had three disciples exalted above the rest, and their
names were Buppa or Appas, Hermas or HErmras,
and THomas; which I conceive to be the same with
Buat, Maya or Moye, and Taaima’z or ToamMaz,
the supposed sons, or rather disciples, of ‘Sa’Liva‘-
HANA. In the seventh century, there were Christians
at Serinda, or Ser-Hind, with a monastery ; and two
monks from that place, at the command of the em-
peror Justinian, carried silk worms, or rather their
eggs, to Constantinople.

| P4

216 - . ESSAY. ON

The compiler of the list, brought from Assam by
the late Dr. Wang, was well informed, with regard
to the last blow given to this dynasty of Manicheans,
by Amir-Timur, in the remains of a feeble tribe of
them, at Yoglock-poor. But it is much more reason-
able, I think, to place the overthrow of that dynasty
in the latter end of the twelfth century.

There was in Egypt a certain Scyrutanus, who
had studied, it seems, at A/ewandria, and visited the
anchorets of Z’hebais, He went by sea to India, ac-
cording to St. Epipuanivs, and brought thence four
books, containing the most extravagant notions :
but he died, before he could preach his new doctrine,
in the latter end of the second century. He was
succeeded by his disciple, called TeEresintHus, who
went into Palestine ; but was obliged to fly to Persia,
where he declared he was another Buppa or BuppHa,
and, like him, born of a virgin, and brought up by
angels, among certain mountains. Perhaps this new
mame was concealed in the old one TEREBINTHUS,
from the Arabic Daru-Botam. Botam in Arabic,
and Butam, or Buthem, in Chaldaic, signify a Tere-
binth in general; but the largest and best sort is
called, in the former language, Daru-botam, which
may possibly have some athnity with the Buddham-
gach’h, or Buddham-Teru of the Ceylanese and Baup-
DHAS in general, and which signifies the tree of
Buppua, for Gaelh in the spoken dialects, and
Teru or Dru, in Sanscrit, signify a tree. For he said,,
when he entered upon his mission, Se non jam TERE-
BINTHUM sed alium Buppam vwecari, that he was no
longer TrREBINTHUs, but another BuppHa*. The
TEREBINTH Is unknown in India, except beyond the
Indus, where I am told that there are forests, of that
sort which produce the Pistachium, or Pistachio,
called Pzsta, in that country, and all over Jndia.

* SaLMAsIUsS de Homonymis, and Alphab. Tib. P. 370.

*

5 “VICRAMADITYA, AND SALIVAHANA. 217

This name was probably given to him, in his in-
fancy, by ScyTHranus, who was conversant with
the notions of the Hindus. Having met with a
strong opposition, from the priesthood in Persia, he
was obliged to conceal himself in the house of a
widow; where, falling from his bed, he broke his
neck, and died. . His writings fell into the hands of
an adopted son of the widow, who became a convert
to his opinions. Crprenus and Suipas say, that
he was. by birth.a Sréhmen: a good musician, aad
an excellent painter. He maintained that he was
the ParacterE, and Curist; and the ignorant
among the Christians, with his disciples, insisted
that he was Buppa or Bupn'na, himself, regene-
rated; and he was afterwards regenerated, in the
same manner with the Lamas, in the person of his
disciple Buppas-Appas, or Apa-MANEs, who,
after maby harrow escapes, was put to a most cruel
death, by the king of Persia. His followers, being
alarmed, left the country; and many, according to
D’HeErsexor, retired to India. This is confirmed
by the testimony of one of Renaupor’s Mohamme-
dan travellers, who went to Ceylon, in the ninth
century; and says, that in that island there were
many Jews, and Manicheans or Thanovians: for thus
they were called in Persia. Prrer the Sicilian, who
lived in the ninth century, says, that a little before
his time, a certain SerGrus asserted, that Tycuicus,
the disciple of Paux the apostle, had been regene-
rated in him; that he was the ParacLerr, anda
bright star descended from heaven. He _ boasted
that-he had preached the Gospel in various countries,
and particularly tothe inhabitants of Lavdikeia, near
the country of the Cynachorite, in the East. The
Gangetic provinces were known, at that time, in
Persia, under the, name of the country of Canacor,
its metropolis : and Laodikeia is probably Lhahé-dac,
or Lhah-dac as suspected by Fatuer Casstano.
This Sexcius, a Manichean, appeared in the character

218 ESSAY ON

of Curist, and of the Paraclete ; and was in India,
and at Lhd-dac, in the ninth century, towards the
latter end of which there appeared another ‘Sa‘t1va‘
HANA, in the country about Dili, (according to the
‘jist brought from Assam, by the late Dr. Wane).
Decuie6nes shows, that Manes propagated his doc-
trine in Tartary, where he was revered as a god.
In the country of C’hegil, in Tartary, often men-
tioned in Persian Romances with Khoten, he erected
several temples, which he adorned with pictures.
His skill, as a painter, is greatly extolled, by Persian
and Arabian writers, as well as his famous collection
of drawings, in a book called Erteng ; and every
collection of pictures is still thus called to this day.
Many authors, both ancient and modern, have la-
boured to find out the etymology of his name Mant;
but it seems that it was his origimal Hindu name,
which signifies a jewel in general, and is not un-
- common, to this day, in compound names, as Ma~
wi-ra MA, Niza-Ma’nr, &c. It was the general
opinion formerly, that Manes was a Hindu, and his
father a Bréhmen. He was also called Cusricus.
Cubri in Hindi signifies a hunchback; and Cubrica,
in a derivative form, signifies, either a man who is
crook-backed, or the son of such a man. His father’s
name was Patrxtius, and Pdéthaca, to this day, is
a very common surname in India, Carossa, the
name of his mother, is more obscure and uncommon.
The Manicheans said, that Curis was the primeval
serpent, who enlightened the minds of Apam and
Eve; the creator, the preserver, and the destroyer ;
the original soul, the preserver of the soul, and the
fabricator of the instrument, with which the salva-
tion of the soul is effected. He was born of the
earth, and, for the redemption of mankind, sus-
pended on every tree: for they saw him crucified on
every tree, among its branches. |

The reader will easily perceive some deviations

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 219

from what I had advanced in my essay on Anu-Gan-
gam, which was already in the press, when I found,
in perusing various tracts, several scattered passages,
which have induced me to make the present cor-
rections and additions. I shall conclude this essay
with a few remarks on the various tribes which ruled
over the countries bordering upon the Lids, and the
Vindhyan mountains, according to the Paurén‘icas.
The Icshwécavas, or children of feshwacu, who ruled
in the countries watered by the Jrdus; and this dy-
nasty consisted of 24 generations. ‘The Abhiras, or
Shepherds, in the upper parts of the Zndus, ten gene-
rations or reigns: then the ‘Sacas, under ten kings,
and probably kings of Persia. Then came eight
Yavana kings, or Greeks of Bactriana ; and fourteen
Tushdran'as, or from Turan; and these belonged
probably to the Parthian dynasty. Then came
seven Garddabhinas, thirteen Morun'das, or Burun'-
das, as many Hun‘a kings, and eleven Afaun‘as.
Many suppose the Morun‘das and Maun'as to be
dynasties of various branches of the Hunas ; but they
produce no authority, and itis of course a mere sur-
mise. Be this as it may, they are acknowledged to
be foreigners. The Garddabhinas are the descend-
ants of GarppagHa, or Banram-Gur, who began
his reign in the year 421. The Hunas are the white
Huns of Cosmas-InpicoPieusteEs, and consequently
the same with the Euthalites, or white Huns, who
were settled in the Panjab, in the seventh century.
The Vindhya-Sacti is a collateral dynasty, descended
from Kosru-Prrviz, and which began between the
years 820 and 830. Their metropolis was Udaya-
pura, and the Paurdnicas have recorded the names
_of seven of them, who reigned all together 90 years.
The Morunde of Protemy are the same with the
Morunda; Burunda, or Burun'ta of the Purdn‘as.
‘Fhey are only mentioned once, in the prophetic chap-
ters; and are supposed, by some Pandits, to be a
tribe ef Huns; but this is a mere surmise, founded

220 ESSAY ON

on their being mentioned with that tribe. They
were foreigners, and according to ProLtemy, in the
beginning of the third century, they were in pos-
session of the countries, lying between the Ganges
and the river Cosa, or Coosy, including North-Behar
and the province of Oude. it seems, that their pos-
sessions extended even to the south of the Ganges:
for Oppran says, that this river flowed through the
country of the AZaraunthes*. The country which»
they possessed constituted afterwards what was called
the country of Canoge, denominated also the king-
dom of Bourou, by the earlier Musulman writers :
and this appellation is perhaps only a corruption from
Burunda. The Burundas were probably thus called,
because they were originally from the country, called
Porout by Decuicnxs, and which seems to have
been the ancient name of Zibot, or Tibet, called also
Barantal, ina derivative form, as Bengal from Beng.
Its metropolis is called Lassa, Barantala and Putala.
Putala, Bootan and Tibot seem to be derived from
Buppua, called, in that country, Bur, Pur, Bor
and Por. ‘The natives of that country understand,
by Bootan the kingdom of Lassa, and by Tibot the
regions to the westward, toward the source of the
Ganges; and this was, it. seems, the country of
Porout ; and the idea seems to be confirmed by Der-
cuicnEs}. The kingdom. of Tibot, according to
Chinese writers, extended as far as the country of
the Brahmens, in the year 589{; and in the year
649, the king of Zibot invaded the inland parts of
India, that is to say, Benares, according to Dr-
Gcuicnes, This account of these western dynasties,
which ruled over the countries bordering upon the
Indus, 1 shall resume, in an essay, both geographi-
cal and historical, on such parts of India as were

* Oppiani Cynegetica, lib, 40, v. 164. i
+ Hist. des Huns, vol. 1, p. 59, t Ditto, p. 164.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 021

traversed by Atexanper. It is nearly finished, ag
well as the map intended to accompany it.

The doctrine of Mawes could not fail of meeting -
with many admirers, in Jndia, where he appeared
in the character of Buppwa, and of Curist, or
‘Sa’‘LIVA'HANA. ‘Transmigration was one of his
tenets; and the rule of life and manners, of his
disciples, was very severe and rigorous. They ab-
stained from flesh, fish, eggs, wine, &c. and the
ruler of every district, and president of their assem-
blies, was considered as Curisr; and, about the
sixth century, they had gained considerable influence
in the east. The Bhattis, in the west, are now
Musulmans; but, as they are of a roving disposition,
some tribes, at various periods, emigrated, and set-
tled in the adjacent countries, particularly to the
eastward of the Ganges. Such an emigration took
place of late years, and they settled near Chandowssey,
in Rohilcund: but, at a much more ancient and un-
known period, they crossed the Ganges, and settled
.in the district of Buddhaown, and there built a fort,
called, after their supposed grand-sire, Céte-Salivd-
hana, or ‘Sdlbahan, the fort of ‘Sa’Liva’Hana, and
which is mentioned in the 4yin-Acheri*; and this
happened, before they had embraced the religion of
Islam: they emigrated probably on account of some
religious persecution; as well as the other descend-
ants or followers of ‘Sa‘Liva’HANa, in the Purganah
of Baisyawara, about three days journey from Luck-
now, and in the district of Khairabad.

These call themselves Vais'yas, or Bais'yas, and

also the Vais‘yas of Saviva’HaNna, Saca-Rdja-vansas
\ ° .

and ‘Saca-Raja-cumaras, that is to say, the royal

* Vol. 2d, Tucsim Jumma, p. 84

208 ESSAY ON

offspring of Saca or Sa‘tiva’wana. All the mem-
bers of this tribe insist, that their chief is really an
incarnation of Virtanen, in the character of ‘Saca
or ‘Sa‘LivaHANA, regenerated like the presidents
and chiefs of the Manicheans. This the chief, with
affected modesty, seems rather unwilling to acknow-
ledge; but in despite of his attected endeavours: to
cohteal his divine origin, peculiar circumstances will
betray him, and which are related, in numerous
and fulsome legends, current through the whole
tribe, and which I shall pass over. ‘There are-also,
in the Peninsula, ‘Saca-vansas or ‘Saca-Réja-vansas,
which signify, and are understood in that country,
to signify, the offspring of Saca, or king'Saca or
Saitvanana;_ and in the east, and also in the west,
the followers of a deity, or some. legislator and in-
stitutor, are often called his offspring*, It is but
lately that I have been acquainted with this singular
tribe of Rdja-Cumdras, who do not differ from
other Hindus of the same class, and have now lost
every vestige of their ancient nan i a fe
name of their institutor,

* Asiatic Researches, Vol. 8. p. 507.

| 7,

293 nag

APPENDIX TO ESSAY IV.

r.

?

Fr OLEMY places Ujjayini about 255 geographical
miles from the mouth of the river AZah?, but the real
distance is not above 200. The different places,
mentioned by that author, between Ujjayini and the
sea, stand thus. From the mouth of the Mahi, to
its supposed communication with the Narmadd, 60
G.M. to Tidgura 50: to Minnagara 50: to Zerogere,
now Dhar or ‘Asdra-gur, 55: and to Ujjayini 40.
‘The two last towns are erroneously placed by him,
on the banks of the Narmada, and I strongly sus-
pect, that it is also the case with the two others.
They are also placed on the left or southern - bank
of that river, which is not the case, unless perhaps
with regard to Tidgura, which might have been si-
tuated to the south, either of the Narmaddé, or some
other river mistaken for the Narmadd. Tidgur is
certainly a true Hind: denomination, and there are
several places thus called, in the more southern parts
of India; yet in this instance, I suspect that it is
a mistake, for Paya-gurra, or Pawa-gur, to the
south of the river D'hdd’hara, mistaken by ProLemy
for the Narmada; because these places were said to
be in the ¢zvam of the last river. Tiram implies only
the country bordering upon the sea, or a river: but
it was misunderstood by travellers, and supposed
by them to imply the banks of the Narmadé. Thus
Payagurra was said to be in the tiram oi the Nar-
madd, which is very true; and to the eastward of a
river that runs by it. The D’hdd’hara river runs
afterwards very near to the Mahi, in the vicinity
of Brodra; and there might have been formerly a

Ze ESSAY ON

communication, either natural or artificial, between
these two rivers; and the nature of the soil, with the
distance, certainly countenances the. possibility of
such acommunication. The town of Nasica, placed
by Protemy on the Narmada, VY strongly suspect
to be out of its place, and to have been originally
meant for Nasica or Nassuck, near the source of the
Goddaveri, and to the N. E. of Bombay. It is also
my opinion, that the Serdonyr mountains are mis-
placed by Pronemy: and indeed such is ‘the con-
struction of his map in that part, that there is no room
for them in their natural place; and I take them to
be those situated’ to the east of Baroche, between
the Narmada and the river Afahi, where to this day
they dig for precious stones. In consequence of
this .erroneous construction, the rivers Paddar,
Sdbhra-mati, and Afahi are confounded, and the
whole peninsula of Gujardt disappears. ‘The reason
I conceive to be, that the shores were not frequented,
en account of the vicious and untractable disposi-
tion of the natives. In the fourth century, mention |
is made of Diw, under the denomination of Didu or
Diou*: its inhabitants were called Divei, Dibeni
and Diveni; and it appears that this denomination
extended to the whole peninsula. Inthe same man-
ner, the Musulmans gave formerly the name of
Soma-natha, to Gujardt, from a famous place of
worship of that name. SASH AL OO

It seems, that the inhabitants of that country
had, by their piracies, greatly offended the Ro-
mans: for we read that they were forced te
send an embassy to Constantinople, and give hos-
tages for their future good behaviour, and the
famous THreopHiLus was one of them. When

* Philostorgius, p. 487. Ammian. Marcellin, lib. 220, Diu is called
Dib in the Ayin-Acberi, Vol. 2d. p, 94.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. G25

we read in Straso, that MenanpEr conquered not
only Patalene, but also the country of Sigertis, and
the kingdom of Tessariostus, there is a strong pre-
sumption, that these countries were contiguous to
each other. Patalene is well known; and Sigertis
. is from the Hindi Seher-des, the country of Seher, or
Sehr, mentioned in the Ayin-Achberi, where it is
called Seerce, and its Raja Seuris, and by others
SrHag™*. Aput-Fazri says, that it was bounded to
the east by Cashmir (read Ajmir) ; to the west by
the river Mehran or Indus. It had the sea to the
south, and to the north the mountains, that is to
say, the black mountains of Uch’h f.

I have met lately with respectable and well in-
formed men {, from that country, who declared to
me, that the country to the west of the Indus, be-
tween the river and the mountains, is called by the
natives Lehr and Lehereh, and its inhabitants Lehe-
rai or Lehrai. In the same manner the country to
the eastward of the Indus, is called Sehr, Sehereh ;
and its inhabitants Sehra or Seherdi. These two
denominations might be written Lehrdhi and Sehra-
hi; but the letter H is not to be sounded, and serves
only to separate the two vowels.

The country of Lehreh or Lehereh, is called Nedheh
or Nedeheh by Esn-Havcar§, and Nodha by Et-
Eprisst. The town of Lehrwun near Hydrabad,
(and both cities are to the west of the Indus,) de-
rives its name from that same-source; but it is gene-

rally valled Nehr-wun or Nehrun, Nirun by Et-

* Ayin-Acberi, Vol. the 2d. p. 146 and 149. — + Do. p. 145.

t One of them was several years in the service of Gholam Mo-
hammed Abassi, ruler of Sind. Abassi signifies a descendant of
Abbas, not an Abyssinian.

§ See Major Ouseley’s translation.

Vou. IX. Q

226 ESSAY ON -

Eprisst, and Brun by Persian authors, because in
that language there is very little difference between
the letters B and N. The whole country of Nedheh,
or Nehrwun, from its capital in former times, is
called Nehrwun or Behrwun, in the Ayin-Acberi ;
but it is omitted in the English translation, owing
probably to some defect in the manuscripts in that
part. Be this as it may, where we read Pergunnahs
separate in the printed copy *, there is in the original
Nehrwun-na-Chand, the districts of Nehrwun, and
Chand. The latter is called Chandu of Bacar by
Asvut-Faziz in another place+, and Sandur by Et-
Eprisst. The famous port of Lehri or Lehrahi-
bunder is thus called, because it is in the country of
Lehreh ; whilst another port, on the eastern branch,
is denominated, from a similar circumstance, Sehri, or
Sehrahi-bunder, tis called Seuhert by OrrER, and is
situated to the westward of an arm of the Jndus, which
~ forms there a spacious lake, in some places seven or
eight miles broad, and is noticed by ALEXANDER’S
historians. It is well known to modern travellers
and pilgrims; and Sekri-bunder at present is always
called’ Bustah-bunder. This salt water lake or bay,
(for its entrance is pretty broad,) was by the Grecks
called Saronist, and Ezrinos, probably for mea
from Sehrwun or Sehrun in a derivative form, as Leh-
run from Lehr or Lehreh. It is called Kirinos by
Arrian in his Periplus of the Erythrean Sea; and
he says that it is hardly discernable at sea; and this
is the reason why it is rot noticed by modern navi-
gators; but it is well known to travellers, who’ m
general are pilgrims, going to worship at Hinglaz,
near Cape Moran, the Hindu name of which is AZu-
dén, wherein the letter D has a mixt sound between

‘

* Ayin-Acberi, Vol. II. Tukseem Jumma, p. 97, 100, and 103, *
+ Vol. Il. p. 142. } Plutarch de flum,

a VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 297

D and R, and signifies a head land*. The entrance
is said to be about two cos broad, or three miles and
ahalf. Vrom Bustah-bunder, to ‘Abdd, ina N. W.
direction, they reckon twelve cos. It is upon the
_ western bank of the main branch of the Indus, and
is called Habath in the history of Maumoop the son
of Sebecteghin, and erroneously Hdjat by Aput-FEDA,
who calls it also Mow, which in Hindi implies a
mart, or place remarkable for some manufactures, or
peculiar traffic. This lake or bay communicates with
the mdin branch of the Indus, called Rishéd and Di-
' shad, through an arm of the river; and the point
of separation is near a place called Pochydri, sup-
posed to be either 16 or 20 miles from the sea.

This lake communicates with the sea, through two
openings, or mouths: the largest of which is close
to Bustah-bunder, and the other to the east is very
small. [East of it is a small place called Lac-put-
bunder in Cach’ha, which owes its origin to king
Lac-pati, the grandfather of the present Raja of
CacWha. These two openings answer to two inlets,
noticed by Mayor Renwett, under the names of
Warrel and Puckar, for Pokydri; thus called from
the place of that name, situated where it branches
out. The appellation of Warrel is unknown to the
natives consulted by me, and they suppose that it
might have been occasionally so called, from being
resorted to by the pirates of the Warrel tribe.

Pilgrims, after having worshipped at Dwdarca, be-

* A legendary tale has been adapted to it, as usual; which is, that
the head of GaNnz’s’A fell there. Hence it is called Ganes dca-mudé,
the head or scull of GANE’sa’; and a few miles inland, is a place of
worship, called Muda-cété GaNnet’sa’, where 5 is supposed to have
fallen, }

Q 2

2¢5 .« ESSAY ON

tween Bate and point Jigat, cross the gulf of Cach’-
ha, land at a place called Masca-Mwdai, in a smalt
island, at the mouth ofa river or creek. The moun-
tains end at a considerable distance, and in the N. E.
To the westward is a point of land, which I take to
be that called J/assada in old maps; and Masca
seems to be the place called Assarpoor in modern
maps. From thence, to that large branch of the
Indus, called Banyani, or Aurunga-bunder, they
reckon three long days march, upon a high sandy
beach; and the road, in general, is several miles
from the sea. ‘Two short days from MJasca-Mudai is
a small river, supposed by some to be an arm of the
Indus, which branches out above Sehwan. ‘They
then proceed to Lacput-bunder, and cross a small
arm of the sea; and then, in their way to Bustah,
they cross ina boat the mouth of the salt water lake,
and proceed to Gheda or Ghainda, about a mile from
the sea, and on the eastern bank of the Bdnydni,
which they consider as the main stream of the Jndus,
called Meran in the dialect of Cachha. Gheda or
Ghaindd, may be pronounced Gherd and Ghainra.
It is a sacred spot, but there is no place of worship
dedicated to Coriswara-Mau’a-prEva, or with ten
millions of Phalli. The Musulmans worship there
the tomb of a saint of their own; and from this
place, the branch of the Indus is also called Ghera
or Ghord. Then they go to Shah-bunder, either by
the way of Abad, or Pokyari: and as Shah-bunder is
now the seat of government, Hindu pilgrims in ge-
neral call it Thathd.

They all insist, that, between AJasca-Mudai and
Ghainda, there are only three creeks, inlets or rivers;
but, as they travelled several miles from the sea, they —
acknowledge, that there may be a few more, but
which do not go farinland. The road is upon a flat
ridge, several miles broad in some places, and con-

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA, 999
siderably higher than the country; and a pilgrim
told me, that he had been informed, that there was
an arm of the dndus running parallel to it, but that
he did not see it. The whole ridge was probably
thrown up by the sea, and is cov ered with a shrub
called Zuni in that country, Jhau on the banks of
the Ganges, and Ghezz in Persian, at least in that
dialect of it, which is used about Candahar and
Ghazni. Hence it is probable, that the eastern
branch of the Jndus is called by Protemy Loni-bare}
from that circumstance. It is three or four feet
high, and delights in very sandy and low places.
Its stalk is very crooked, but its branches and leaves
are somewhat like those of the cypress *.

The various branches of the Jndus, according to
the best information I could procure, stand thus.
First, the small river before mentioned, but which
is not reckoned as a mouth of the Jndus: it is called
Asa, from a place of worship, or rather consecrated
spot, of thatnaine. The second, called Lac-put, or
Pokyari, and Puckar, in a map by Masor RENNELL.
The third, Bustah-bunder, answering to Warrel.
The fourth, Banydni, Ghainda or Gorah. Kaar is
the fifth: then follows the Jwmnd, which is the
Hijjamany of Major Rennetzt. The seventh is
Rishad, or Dishad, called also Divel. The eighth is
the Jowd, written Juhoo in the maps, with a little
village to the west, cailed Nowa-bunder. The infor-
mation which I was able to procure does not go
beyond the Jowd, except concerning a small branch
in the track of the pilgrims, within a few miles of
Cranchi or Crachi, and which, they say, falls either
into that harbour, or into the sea very near it. Ac-
cording to FatHerR Monserrat, who wrote above

—_ SC ho rt

* It is the Tamarix Indica Ken.

3

£30 ESSAY ON |
200 years ago, it falls into the harbour*. Through
this branch, not now navigable, Nearcnus’s fleet
sailed. Its entrance was obstructed by a bar, on
which the sea broke with violence. They cut
through it, and entered the harbour of Corestis,
which is a corruption from Cardchi, Crachi or Cran-
chi. It is more generally called Rambagh. The
town and fort are several miles inland, and the place
is called the fort of Ram by Frazer, in his history
of Naprr-suau. This account of the mouths of the
Indus, has a great agreement with the early maps
by Masor Rennett, but none with his last.

When the Greeks sailed within sight of the land,
they coasted along the Delta, as far as the point of
land before mentioned ; and then crossed the gulf of
Cachha, or Cantha, thus called from a famous town
of that name, still existing. This head land is par-
ticularly noticed by the author of the Periplus f.
The Musulmans, bolder, crossed from the western
mouth of the Jndus, to an island called Avicama,
which is a corruption fer Auca-mandal, a district near
Dwaraca f. oly ee |

The country of Sehreh extends, toward the east,
no further than Lac-put-bunder, on the sea shore;
and there begins the country, called formerly, in
the Puran'as, Su-rashtra or Surasht, but now Gurj-
jara-Rashtra, or the kingdom of the Gurjjaras.
This. compound is pronounced Gurjjar-Rasht'ra,
Gurjja-Rashtra, Garja-rasht, and more generally
Gu-rasht and Guj-rat’. This is the kingdom of
Tessarwstus, conquered by MreNnANDER, according

* The original MSS. of MoNSERRAT’S travels is in my possession,
He speaks here from report only, and he accompanied the Emperor.
ACBAR iti his expedition to Cabul.

+ Arviap. Periplus, p. 23. } See the Nubian Geographer, p. 60.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 931

to Srraso. ReENavupot’s two Musulman travellers,
in the ninth century, take notice of the country of
Haraz, or Geraz, called in the original MSS. Giourz, —
or Gourz ; for they used to write, formerly, Gieuze-
rat for Guzerat. His country was situated upon a
promontory, or in a Peninsula, and there were many
camels, and other cattle. He was a great enemy to
the Arabs, and no prince had a greater aversion to
the religion of Munammep, and he was, at that
time, at war with the Bala-Raya. The Hindi name
of the Peninsula is Gurjara, and Gurjar-Rashtra
signifies the kingdom of Gurjara. The whole coun-
try, from the Indus to Daman, is called Su-Résht'ra,
its inhabitants Su-Rashtran, from which Protemy
has made Syrastrene, which is now pronounced
Soret and Surat. Its metropolis, at a remote period,
was the ancient city of Zéja, in Cach’h, noticed in
Masor RenNELL’s map. Tradition says, that it
was founded by an ancient king, called Trsa, or
Treya-carn’A. There were three brothers descended
from IcsHwacu,—Puru, Bus, or Bos, and Trsa:
the two first are noticed in the Puran‘as, in the pro-
phetic chapters, where Purvu is generally called
Puru-Cacu’ya, and the other Buya-Cacw’Ha.

The Rajds of Cach’ha boast of their independence ;
and pretend, that since the beginning of the world,
they have never been conquered; and, that once
they ruled all over Gujja-rasht. They have forgot
the conquest of their country by MeEnanper, which
is well attested; for unquestionable vestiges of it
remained in the second century, such as temples,
altars, fortified camps, and very large wells of ma-
sonry, with many coins of MrenanpeErR and Apor-
LopoTus ; and these monuments were found as far
south as Baroach*. PiutTarcHt says, that the
nn

* Peripl. Maris Erythrei, p. 24 and 27,
+ Plutarch, de flum. v, Hyphasis, _

a4

232 ESSAY ON

Hyphasis, or Beyah, falls into this lake or bay, and
thence into the sea, Puttosrratus, in his life of
APpoLiontus, asserts, that this river falls into the
sea, through a distinct mouth. This certainly could
never be the case according to our ideas; for there
is an uninterrupted range of mountains, reaching
from Dilli and Agra to Bacar on the Indus: but it
might be otherwise according to the fancifal notions
of the Hindus. We havea similar instance in the
Gangetic provinces, with regard to the Jumnd and
Saresvati ; which fall into the Ganges, at Allahabad,
and the three rivers flow conjointly, but without
mixing their waters, as far as Yribeni, near Nyase-
rah, above Hoogly ; where they divide again: and
the Jumnd, called in Bengal, Jubund, goes to the
left, and falls into the.sea, in the bay or river of
Roymungul. The waters of each river may easily be
known; for those of the Jwmnd are of an azure co-
lour; those of the Saresvati white; whilst those of
the Gangé have a muddy, or yellowish tinge. These
appearances, which are owing to various circum-
stances, such as the depth of the river in some
places, its shallowness in others, the reflection of the
clouds,-or of the sky, are thus accounted for by
Hindus in their own way. Pattalé, Pattalené,
called also Pathalia, seems to derive its name from
a famous place of worship, dedicated to a form of
the deity, with the title of Pat’hd, which, in Hindi,
signifies youthful: and from Pathd comes Pathdla,
as Bengdla from Renga. It is one day’s march to
the south of That’hé, and two to the north of Shah-
bunder ; and not far from the western bank of the
Indus. The Musulmans took ‘possession of it about
five or six hundred years ago, according to tradition ;
and there lies entombed one of their saints, called
Peer-Patha, or the youthful saint. This place is,
of course, resorted to both by Musulmans and
Hindus; but the latter pay their vows only at a dis-
tance, to their own deity. It is on the site of Brak-

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 933

minabad, called also Ménhdwar (and Méhaura, by
Persian authors). Bacar is also called Ménhilewar -
but its true name is Bdnhawar, the Binnagara of
Protemy, and the same, I believe, which is called ,
Paneoura, by Srepuanus, of Byzantium, and Ba-
hauré, or Bahur, by Persian authors*; situated in
lat. 27° 47’, as the lower Mansurd is in lat. 24° 0’
North. It was afterward called Mansura, which ‘is
also the name of another city, lower down the Jndus,
one day’s march from Mdnhawar, and three from
Shah-bunder ; the real and original town of Dazbul,
or Devel, which last was three days from the sea,
The lower Mansoura is now Thatha,

Tk

Ir is asserted in India, that the Mahratas are fo-
reigners; and this they themselves acknowledge.
The Ranas of Udaya-pura, and their tribe, who are
related to the Mahratds, boast of it; and say, that
they are descended from Nusuirvan. The Parsis,
in India, fix the time of their emigration in the time
of Asu- Becr, who reigned only two years, in 632
and 633. That several ¢ emlgr ations from Persia took
place, at different periods, in consequence of the
fanatic zeal of the Musulmans, and their persecuting
spirit, cannot be doubted ; but the emigration of the
children of Nusuirvan is the most ancient. Some
of these emigrants retained their ancient religion,
‘and are called Parsis ; others turned Hindus, and
are called Rénas and Mahratas. Some afterwards
adopted the religion of MuHAMMED, and are called
in the Peninsula Nevetehs, new men or converts.
Though they all agree that they came from Persia,
and are the descendants of Nusuirva’n, yet there

* See ABUL FEDA, in the first vol. of Thevenot’s collection, &c.

234 ESSAY OW

are various accounts concerning the time of their
emigration, the manner in which it was. effected,
and the number of the emigrants. There were pro-
bably several emigrations; the memory of which
has been preservéd only by tradition; and there have
been two powerful princes of Persia, called Nusuir-
van; but we are not told which of them is meant
in these traditions. As they all agree that these
emigrations are posterior to the time of MuHamMMeED,
we may infer that they are descendants of KHosru-
Perviz, who was also sirnamed Nusuirva’'N. This
Jast was the grandson of the great or first Nusnir-.
vA'N; and, in either case, they are certainly the de-
scendants of the latter also: but in my opinion, the
first emigrants were the sons of Kuosru-PErviz,
and the great grandsons of the great Nusuirvan.
Aput-Fazit is the first Persian author who
took notice of these emigrations, on the authority,
it seems, of traditions, and perhaps written records,
in the family of the princes of Udaya-pur. There
are also, in the Peninsula, written accounts, none of
which I have yet seen; but I have conversed with
several well informed men, and of great respectabi-
lity, who had perused them. They were also seen
by the late Nawab Aui-[praniIm-KHAN, first magis-
trate of Benares ; and who, about twenty-five years
ago, wrote a short Persian account on that subject,
which is now in the possession of his son, who lent
it to me. ‘This illustrious descent of the Ra’na of
Udaya-pur is noticed by Dr. HuntER*, and the ori-
gin of the Peshwds trom those princes, and, of
course, from Nusnirva’n, is amply detailed by Brnr-
NOULLI, in his third volume. The descent of the
Parsis, in India, from the same source, is related
by ManpeEts to, and other travellers,

¥

* Asiatic Researebes, Vol. VI. p. 8.

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 23>

The origin of the A/éhratds is also noticed in the
Scanda-purd dna, in the section of the Sahyddri, or
mountains of ‘Sahya, for thus the ghats are denomi-
nated in Sanscrit, and Séhydn or Say ‘ydn, on the Ada-
labar coast. Unfortunately the second part of this
section, in which the origin of the Addhratds was
inserted, is so very scarce, that it is supposed to have
entirely disappeared, and to have been destroyed by
them; as the account given of their origin, was by
no means a very honourable one. With the destruc-
tion of this part only of the Hindu sacred books,
they can fairly be taxed; and the Hindus are, on
the contrary, under the greatest obligations to them
for the preservation of the rest. Wherever the Alah-
ratas go, they buy all Sanscrit books indiscriminately,
and give any price for them; so much so, as to
render them very scarce in every country but their
own. Be this as it may, it is affirmed, that they |
have destroyed the second part of this section, the con-
tents of which are yet by no means forgotten. There
are still living many persons, both respectable and
well informed, who well remember having read that
unlucky paragraph. For this reason, they are branded
with the appellation of JAd/éch’has or barbarians,
by those who have suffered from their tyrannical and
cruel behaviour; which, for a long time past, is at
“Jeast equal to that of any foreign “tribe, that ever
invaded India, with regard to extortions, plunder,
and other acts of cruelty.

Three different dates are given of this emigration ;
the first in the time of Asu-Becr, in the years
631 and 632; the second in the year 651, after the
defeat and death of Yrezprsirp; and the last, when
the descendants of Angas, the uncle of MuHAMMED,
began to prevail in Persia, about the year 749: and
these are probably three different emigrations. The
last has been adopted by the late Nawab Ai-Ipra HIM-

436 ; ESSAY ON ©

KHaA’N. According to some, a prince of the royal
family, in the province of Lar or Laristan, embarked
with 18,000 of his subjects, and landed, at three
different places, near Surat, and in the gulf of Cam-
bat. This prince was a son of Nusnirva’n; and
the emigration took place in consequence of a violent
persecution from ABU-BECR.

Another account states, that they were all secretly
conveyed on board ships, and thus committed to the
sea without pilots; and they all landed safely near
Surat, where they were kindly received by the king
of that country *. These various accounts are current
in the western parts of India; and there is probably
some truth in every one of them.

There are some inaccuracies in these accounts;
first, Apu-Brcr’s conquests never reached beyond
Chaldea ; and of course, he could not by any means,
be the cause of this emigration, during a short reign
of two years. Besides, 18,000 men are certainly too
great a number to come by sea, especially as it is
added, that they had only seven ships. The Hindu
accounts mention only eighteen individuals, including
a camel, from whom a tribe of MJdhrdtds is de-
scended. These seventeen men were flung secretly
into the sea, and were drowned. ‘Their corpses were
wafted to the shores of India, and there brought to
life again, some by Parasu-Ra™a, and others by a
magician: for the Hindus could not handle this his-
torical event, without new modelling it as usual,
after their own way. ‘The first emigration is asserted
in general, to have happened in the beginning of the
seventh century ¢. This induces me to think, that
these seventeen persons were the sons of Kuosru-

* History of the East Indies, by Capt. Cope, p. 244
+ See MANDELSLO and others,

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA, 237

Prrviz, called also Nusnirva’n, who were conveyed
away privately to Jndia, by the order of their brother
“Surrovyen; and having disappeared, were said,
as usual in the east, to have been put to death by
him. Surrovyen has been already acquitted of the
murder of his father, by the venerable and learned
Een-Barrick, Melchite, or orthodox Patriarch of
Alerandria, who was both a divine, and a learned
physician. It is acknowledged by the learned, that
we cannot read too cautiously the accounts of the
wars, between the emperors of Constantinople and the
kings of Persia, either by Persian or Greek his-
torians, but more particularly the latter. Exsn-Ba-
TRICK says, that Kuosru-Prrviz died of the plague,
in confinement; and was soon followed by Sur-
ROVYEH, his sou, who died also of the plague. That -
the latter was a good and just prince; and that
being a Christian, he put to death his brothers, who
_ were heathens.

The history of KuHosru-Perviz has been equally
misrepresented: he was certainly a great man, but of
ungovernable temper ;_ and he has been also acquitted
of the murder of his own father, by respectable
authors. He was either the son-in-law, or the adopted
son of the emperor Mauricr, and was much af-
fected, when he heard, that the emperor had been
basely murdered by the infamous Puocas. He re- —
solved to revenge his death, and place Maurice’s
son, the lawful heir and successor, upon the throne;
and for this purpose, he waged a long and bleody
war. Heracxius, who succeeded Puocas, tried
every means to make peace with Kuosru-PERviz;
but, the only answer he received, was, ‘‘ renounce
the throne in favour of the lawful heir.” Instead
of which he is made to say “‘ renounce thy crucified
God.” This I conceive to be impossible; as his only
¥iew, 1D waging war, wasto replace upon the throne

238 ESSAY ON

a Christian. Whether he was sincere or not, is not
now the question: this was at least his ostensible
pretext. He never forced the Christians, in his own
dominions, to renounce Curist; but he wanted them
all to conform to the opinions of Nestorius, which
he favoured greatly. In short, he has been supposed
to have been a Christian: and certainly he had once
an idea of becoming a convert: for he consulted the
most respectable persons about him on that subject;
but they disapproved of it, for this single reason it
seems, that the Christians in general, were a perfi-
dious and faithless race. When he took Jerusalem,
instead of defiling and destroying the pale of the
true cross, he sent it to his beloved queen, who was
a Christian, under the care of the venerable Zacna-
RIAS, patriarch of Jerusalem, Neither can I believe,
that he sold 90,000 Christians to the Jews; and that
the latter bought them for no other purpose, but to
put them to death next day in cold blood. i

Kuosrv, having taken Heracrius prisoner, made
peace with him,’ and agreed to release him, on his
paying a certain sum of money. ‘ Heractius feigned
that he could not raise that sum, unless he was al-
lowed to go and borrow it. Kuosru set him at
liberty, on his pledging his word that he would re-
turn: but Heracxius never did, and employed that
money in raising another army. All those calumnies
were invented by Herac ius and his adherents, in
order to exasperate his own subjects, against Knosru
and the Persians. |

But let us return to the Mdhratds: According to
the Paurdnics, Parasu’-Rama, having extirpated
the Cshettris, and filled the earth with blood, wanted
to perform a'sacrifice; but could find no Brahmen
to assist, on account of his being defiled with the
effusion of so much human blood. As he was stand-

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA,. 239

ing on the summit of the mountains of Cucan, he
spied fourteen dead bodies, stranded on the adjacent
shores below. These were the corpses of so many
Miéch’chas, who had been flung into the sea, by
their enemies, in distant countries in the west. They
had been wafted by the winds, and were then.in 4
high state of putrefaction, Ra’ma recalled them to
life, imparted knowledge to them, and conferred on
them the Bréhmenical ordination, and then bid them
perform the sacrifice. From these fourteen dead:
- men is descended the Cucanastha tribe of Mdahréatas ;
thus called, because, since that time, they have al-
ways s¢aid and remained in the Cucan.

There were three other individuals, whose corpses
were similarly stranded, more to the northward, to-
ward the gulf of Cambay; and these were brought te
life again bya magician, and from them are de-
scended three tribes, one of which is the Chitpd-
wana; and the Rdnas of Udaya-pur, with the Pesh-
wah’s family, belong to it. The names of the two
other tribes I do not recollect. These are probably
the seventeen sons of NusHirva’N, supposed to have
been put to death by their brother Surrovyen, and
the times coincide within two or three years.

According to the Pauranics, there was also the
dead body of a camel, belonging to the fourteen
brothers : but of him Paras’u-Ra’ma took nonotice.
There was a magician, who wanted to perform cer-
tain magical rites, but could find no Brahmen, that
would assist at these nefarious ceremonies. He took
some of the ribs of the camel, pronounced some
powerful spells, and made men of them, and more-
over conferred on them the sacerdotal cord. From
them is descended the Cardré, another Addhrata
tribe in the Deccan. .

The Peshwa'g family, of the Chitpdwana, wish

2410 ESSAY ON

very much to be considered as belonging to the
Cucanastha tribe, since they reside also in Cucan.
We read in the Ayin-Acheri, that the ancestor of the
Rana family, and a descendant of Nusuirvan, was
styled a Brahmen, not because he was really so, but
because he had been brought up by a Brahmen*.

‘This ancestor of the Rdnas meeting with no en-
couragement in the western parts of India, went
into Berar, and at length became chief of Parndleh.
In the year of Curist 793, according to AxuL-
Fazit, that city was plundered, and many of the
inhabitants perished. During the confusion, Parra,
called by some Banna and Rana, a descendant of
our adventurer, and then an infant, was carried by
his mother to the country of Aeywar, and received.
protection from king Manpatica of the Bhil tribe.
‘He was raised by degrees to the confidence of the
king ; and, after his death, he murdered the four
sons of his benefactor, and usurped the throne f.
He was the founder of the dynasty called in the
Puranas Vindhya-Sactt, the glory and might of the
Vindhyan Nills.. It consisted of nine kings, who
reigned altogether ninety years, during the greatest
part of the ninth, and in the beginning of the tenth
centuries{. There are still some of that family im
‘Berar, who are also called Rdnds, such as the Ze-
mindars of Mdhaur §. |

It is the opinion of the Nawab Att-Inranim-
Kuan, and of the Musulmans in general in
India, that the children of Nusnirnva’n were
driven out of Persia by the Abbasis, whose dy-
nasty began in the year 749; misled probably by
some latter emigration of natives from Persia. To

* Ayin-Acheri, Vol. I. p. 99. + Ayin-Acberi, Vol. II. p. 98.
t Puranas, prophetic chapters, § Ayin-Acberi, Vol. I]. p: 72s

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 941

this account it is generally added, that the dbdbasis
sent them away privately in different ships; but none
of the posterity of Nusnirvaw remained at that time.
Frruz, the son of the last Yezpecrrp, after the death
of his father in 651, fled to Khoten, where he was
kindly recetved; and in 662 was acknowledged king
of Persia, by Kaotsonc Emperor of China, who
made him captain of his body guard. Frruz died
‘soon after, and his son Nawicue was appointed to
succeed him in the throne of Persia. In 683, Nawn-
1cue went toward the frontiers of that country, with
an army, to try his fortune; but meeting with no
success, he returned to China, between the years 710
and 712, and died at Sigan-fu™.

— The Mahratas are called Maha-rasht'ras in Sanscrit:
Maha is great and illustrious, and Rashtra, synony-
mous with Aaja-putra, implies their royal descent ;
and their name also indicates, that they were acknow-
ledged to belong to the second class on their arrival
in Jndia, and of course that they were not Brdhmens.
When they came into Jndia, there was a tribe of Rash-
fras or Raja-putras, called Rators in the vulgar dia-
jects, and Orature by Ptiny: there was also another
tribe, called Su-Rasht'ra, or the illustrious royal off-
spring. ‘These are called Syrastre, and their country
Syrastrene, by Pro.emy and others; and it is called,
‘in the spoken dialects, Surat’ and Sorat’... When our
new adventurers had obtained power and influence,
they assumed the superior title of Alahd-Résht'ras ;
and by striking out such letters as become useless,
when brought to the standard of the spoken dialects,
we have Mahé-rata Mahrata and sometimes Méhra-
tor, as Rator from Rdshtra.. Thus we have Surat’ from
Surashtra, and Gujarat’ from Gurjar-Rasht'ra.

* Deguignes, Hist, des Huns, Vol. I, p. 57.
Vor. IX. 3 “RB

942 ESSA¥ OM

III.
BY SAMUEL DAVIS, ESQ,

ALBUMAZAR, an Arabian astronomer, who lived
at Balkh, informs us, that “the Hindus reckoned from
the flood to. the Hejra 720, 634, 442, 715 days, or
SAT years.”

The astronomical rules of Braumacupra, who
lived in the 7th century, were in use in ALBUMAZARS”
time (see Asiat. Researches, vol. 2. p. 239) and the.
term of BrauMa’’s employment in the creation,
17,064,000 years, to be deducted from the years ex-
pired of the Calpa, is a correction, which has subse-
quently been introduced into the Hindu Astronomy.

To find, therefore, the number of days expired from
the creation, or rather, of days expired of the Calpa,
to the beginning of the last ywga, we must, instead
of proceeding as in vol. 2. p. 273, Aniaes Researches,
proceed as follows:

Years expired of the Calpa to

the end of the Satya yuga - 1,970,784,000
Treta yuga - - -~ - - = = 1,296,000
Dwapar -- - ~ - = = - 864,000

To the Cali-yuga 1,972,944,000 ~

As the years of a Calpa, to the days of a Galas so
the above number of years, to the conse s .
days.

It appears from BranmMacupna’s treatise, which
is still extant, and likewise from the Siddhdnta Siré-
mani, the work of alater author, that thenumber ef

Ms

/

VICRAMADITYA AND SALIVAHANA. 243

Savan, or natural days, contained in a Calpa, was
1,577,916,450,000 instead of 1,577,917,828,000, as
eiven in the Surya-Siddhanta.

In other words, the solar sidereal year, instead of
D B Vv

. D -
containing 305 15 31 31 24°, was estimated to con-
D D

P N;

tain 365 15 30 19 30”; and, therefore, we must mul-
tiply 1,577,916,450, 000, by 1,972,944,000, and divide
by 432,000,000 ; the quotient will be found to agree
exactly with the number of days mentioned by
ALBuMAzAR; that is, it will be 720,634,449,715,
without any fraction. |

It is therefore probable, that the true reading of
the passage quoted should be, “the Hindus reckon,
from the creation to the Cali-yuga (or the flood)
720,634,442,715 days; and from the flood to the
Hejra, 3725 years.”

It may, farther, with confidence be inferred, that

iM. Anquetil du Perron’s conclusion, with respect to

the late introduction of the yugas, which are the
component parts of the Calpa, into the Hindu astro-
nomy, is unfounded ; and that the invention of those
periods, and the application of them to computations,
by the Hindus, must be referred to an antiquity
which has not yet been ascertained.

RQ

944 ‘ACCOUNT OF

IV.
ACCOUNT. OF THE. JAINS,

COLLECTED FROM A PRIEST OF THIS SECT,
AT MUDGERI:

Translated by Cavetty Borra, Brahmen, for Mason C. Mackenzet®..

In former times, the Jains being without a Gurw,
or spiritual director, to guide them in a good course
of life, Vrisoabuanarua Tint’ HACART Was incar-
nate in this terrestrial world; and reformed or cor-
rected their errors ; and made laws, purposely design-
ed for this sect: he took upon himself the office of
Guru of the Jains. At this time there existed five
sects, viz. 1 Sanchya, 2 Saugata, 3 Charvaca, 4 Yoga,
5 Miméansa.

This Guru composed several books, on the laws,
customs, ceremonies and regulations of the Jain re-
ligion, from his profound knowledge, for the use and
benefit of mankind,

The son of this Guru, who was called Buarata
CHacravarri, conquered the terréstrial world, with
all its islands; and ruled, for a considerable time, as
chief sovereign, above all other inferior princes.

* The language of this translation has been corrected ; and some
of the passages transposed: but without altering the sense. The
orthography of Indian words bas been, in general, adapted to the.
system of SiR WiLtiam JonEs: which is usually followed in the
Asiatic Researches; but, in instances of modern names of places and
persons, where the original term has not been known to me, I have-
left the translator’s orthography untouched. H. T. C.

+ In Pracrit, TIvT’HAYaR ; in Canara, Tint’ HU’ Rv’.

THE JAINS. BAS

Before the death. of the'Guru, as he had placed his
son Buarara-Cuacravarri in the government of
the state, he appointed one of-his disciples, in his
own room, to guide and instruct the people of this ~
‘religion, in following his instructions and laws; he
gave him the sacred name of Astra *, and departed
from this world, |

Since that period, the following principal Tirtha-
cars, or pontiffs, were incarnate in this world at
different times.

1 VRISHABHANATHA, 2 Astra, 3 SAMBHAVA,
4 Apnrinanpana, 5 Sumati, 6 PapMAprabua,
7 Supars wa, 8 CHANDRAPRABHA, 9 PUSHPA-DANTA,
10 Sirata, 11 SrEya’nsa, 12 Va'supusya, 13 Vi-
MALA, 14 Ananta, 15 D’narma, 16 Sa‘n11, 17
Cunruu, 18 Ara, 19 Matti, 20 Munisuvrata,
21 Nami, 22 Nei, 23 Parswa, 24 Varp’Ha-
MA'NA.

These were the first Gurus, or pontiffs of this re-
ligion, who, as twenty-four incarnations of their first
Guru, appeared in the beginning of the present age,
or Cali-yuga.

Up to the beginning of the Cali-yuga, the world
was ruled, at twelve different times, by twelve Nara
Chacravartis, or monarchs, among whom are, 1 Bua-
RATA, 2 Sa’Gara, 3 Ma@uavan, 4 SANATCUMARA,
5 ‘Santi, 6 Cuntuu, 7 ArAsuBHuMA f, 8 Jaya-
s—ENA, 9 HarisHE’NA, 10 BranHmMepatTTa. These
sovereigns of the world are said to have been Jains.

* The Jains at Sravana Bélligéla say, that AsJ1TA did not appear
as Guru, until many years after the death of the first Térthtrié. C. M.
+ Should be 7 ArA, 8 SuBHU’MA, 9 PADMA, 10 HARISHE’NA,
11 Jaya, 12 BRAHMEDATTA., H. T. C.
; R. 3 :

O46 ACCOUNT OF

Besides these, nine Ard hachacravartis ruled at
different times ; their names are, 1 AswaGriva, 2 Ta’-
raca, 3 Meruca, 4 Nisunsua, 5 CAITABHA, 6 Batt,
7 PRAHARANA, 8 Ravay’s, 9 JARA‘SAND HA: these
were renowned by the title of Vasudévacula*.

The government of these kings was overthrown by
a race distinguished by the honorable title of Pratz-
wasudéva-cula, viz. 1 Triprisuta, 2 DwirrisHTa,
3 SWAYAMBHU, 4 Purusué6TTraMa, 5 PURUSHAVARA,
6 Punparica, 7 Datta, 8 LacsHMip HARA, 9 Na-
RA YVANA,.

The title of the other inferior kings was Mandaldd’-
hisa, These Narachacravartis and Ard’hachacravartis,
wresting the sovereignty from each other, ruled at
different periods, up to the beginning of the present
age,

Narachacravarti signifies entire sovereign, ruling,
without interruption, the six parts or divisions of the
terrestrial world t. Ard’hachacravarti signifies half
sovereign; or who ruled three C’handas or divisions
of the earth. The Mandaladhisas were Rdjds of
particular divisions: these governed the world, at
different periods, to the expiration of the last age.

In the beginning of this age, during the life of
VarD HAMANA Swami, who was the twenty-fourth
Tirthacar, or pontiff of the Jaz religion, there was
a Mandala@’his‘a, called SkynicA Manara’y. In
his reign, the religion and people of the Jain sect
were protected; he reigned for a considerable time at
Raagrihapur, and departed from this world. After
his death, the kings CoAMUNDARA YA, JANANTARAYA

.* This designation belongs to those named in the subsequent
list; H. T. C.

+ The six Chandas of Bharata varsha.

THE JAINS. 24.7

and other princes (nine Chélarus and nine Balléls*)
governed the dominions of Hindustan, to the time
of Brysatrava, who ruled with renown in the city
‘of Calydna. Atterward, the Dacshin of Hiudustan
was conquered bythe Sabdapramans}, or those who
receive and admit the authority of the Védas. . Next,
the kingdom was ruled by Pratrap-Rupra, Radja of
Vorangall; and, after his death, by the kings of
Biyaynagar, called Rayil; till the time of Crisun’a-
Ra’ya and Ra’Ma-Ra‘'ya; from which period, the
Dacshen fell under different Musulman governments.

The Jains are divided into four classés or casts,
in like manner as the followers of the Védas, viz.
Brahmens, Cshatris, Vaisyas, and Sudras ; the Brah-
mens are the priests, or ministers of religion, for the
other three casts; their duty is to study the Pura-
nas and Sdstras, but they have no Védas. However,
they have the A’gama ‘Sastra, treating of prayers and
other religious duties. ‘They worship the fire, in the
ceremony of marriage, and in that of initiation (Upa-
nayana)t. ‘The Jaws observe the time of mourning
for their deceased relations, according to their casts,
as follows: an -ascetic or Yatt should mourn for the
death of his relations one minute; Brdhmens are to
mourn ten days; Cshatris, five; Vais‘yas, twelve;
‘Sudras, fifteen. Their lower or inferior cast consists
of the Pariyas or Chandalas.

There are four orders of priests among the Jains,
as among Hindus in general, 1 Brahmachari or stu-
dent, 2 Grihastha or householder, 3 Vanaparasta or
hermit, 4 Bhicshuca or mendicant.

* The Balldéis or Balharas, as Sovereigns or Emperors of India,
are mentioned in the relation of two Mahommedan travellers trans-
lated by Renaudot. C. M.

+ So the Jains affect to call the followers of the Védas, as believing
on hearsay, what they cannot know, or demonstrate to be true, from
the evidence ef their senses. C. M.

t This must arise from employing, at those ceremonies, Bréhmens

R 4

248- ACCOUNT OF

There are sixteen ceremonies, which the Jains, as
well as the followers of the Vedas, observe. Among
which are, 1 (Garbdad’ jana) the ceremony at the con-
summation of a marriage, 2 (Simant) adorning a
married woman’s head with flowers, when she is six
months gone with child, 3 ( Jétacarma ) ceremony on
the birth of a child, 4 (Ndmacarma) on naming a
child, 5 ( Annapraséna) when, at six months old, or
within a year, the child is weaned, or first fed with
other sustenance than his mother’s milk, 6 boring the
ear, shaving the head, and placing the sacred thread
round his neck, 7 (Vivdha) the first marriage, or ra-

ther betrothine, 8 (Sastrabhasa) the ceremony ob-—

served when the young lads begin to read theSéstras,
at the age of five years, five months, and five days, 9
they also observe other ceremnionnee together , with |
those of funerals, &c. &c. &c.

They perform the ceremony of Upandyaia, or ini-
tiation, for a boy, between five and nine years of
age; which is the period when children’ begin to
study the books of the law. A student, till he is
married, should tie only a thread round his loins,

with a rag to cover his nakedness: he should carry

constantly in his hand a small staff. This is prac-
tised till his wedding-day ; when, as soon as he is
married, he attains the second rank,.or that of house-
holder: then he may dress properly at his pleasure ;
and should now endeavour, by labour, service, or
trade, to provide for, and subsist his family: he
should act in all respects agreeably to the instructions
-of his preceptor. Besides these duties, there are six
particularly assigned, to be performed in the station
of householder, as follows: 1 Worshiene God ; or
the images of the ancient saints. 2 Venerating spiri-
tual parents. 3 Studying or reading their holy books.
4 (Tapasya) internal or mental dev otion, abstracted
from all thoughts but that of the deity. 5 Making

of the orthodox sect. The Jains, themselves, do not appear to
worship fire. H. T. C.

Pe ee

THE JAINS. 949

and fulfilling of vows for the attainment of wishes.
6 Giving to the poor.

There are three classes of Vatis, or ascetics, among
the Jains, viz. Anucvrata, Manavrata, Niroana. 'To
attain the rank of 4nuvrata, one must forsake his
family, entirely cutting off his hair, throwing away
the sacred thread, holding in his hand a bundle of
peacock’s feathers, and an ‘earthen pot (Caman'dalu ),
and wearing only tawny coloured clothes: he must
reside for some time in one of their temples. He
next proceeds to the second rank Adahévrata; when,
totally abandoning any degree of elezance in his
dress, he uses only a rag to cover his nakedness, as 2
Brahmachari: he still retains the fan and pot; he
must not shave the head with razors, but employs
his disciples to pull out the hair by the roots *. On
the day, on which this operation is performed, he
abstains from food ; at other times he eats only once,
daily, of rice put in the palm of his hand. Having,
for a considerable time, remained in this state of pro-
bation, he attains the third degree of Nirvana ; he
then lays aside even rags, and, being quite naked, he
eats, once every second day, of rice, put by others
in the palm of his hand; carrying about with him
the clay pot and a bundle of peacock’s feathers: it is
the business of his disciples to pull out his hairs; and
he is not to walk, or move about, after the sun sets.
He now is called by the dignified title of Nervan ;
and the Jains worship him as god of their tribe; in
like manner as the images, which they worship in
their temples, of their ancient Nirvéns or Gurus.
Yet they say, that these are not the likeness of God ;
“< because no one knows God, or has seen his likeness,
that he should be able to describe him.” However,
they adore these images of their Nirvana-naths as
gods.

* To the effects of this operation, they attribute the appearance 6n
the heads of the images of their Gurus, which Europeans suppose to
represent curly or woolly hair. C. M.

350 ACCOUNT OF

Agreeably to their laws, the Jains ought to make
three ablutions daily, in the morning, afternoon, and
evening. In the change and vicissitudes of all things,
that degree of strictness is omitted, and they now
wash only once a day before they eat: generally
they eat their food on leaves, and sometimes in brass
vessels ; but that is not practised in this country.

The Cshatris, Vais'yas, and ‘Sidras, among the
Jains, may eat victuals dressed by Jain Brahmens ;
but Brahmens never eat food prepared by any but
their own tribe. ; ,

‘To abstain from slaughter is the highest perfec-
tion; to kill any living creature is sin.” Hence the
Jains abstain from food after sun-set, lest sin be in-
curred by depriving any animal, even the minutest
insect, of its life, in their food; for the same reason,
they never drink water without straining it through
cloth.

‘The principal tenets of their religion, translated
from a stanza of their books, follows: ‘‘ The Jains
should abstain from the following things, viz. eating
at night; slaying any animal; eating the fruit of
those trees that give milk, pumpkins, young bambu

plants; tasting honey, flesh; taking the wealth of

others ; taking by force a married woman; eating
flowers, butter, cheese; and worshipping the gods
of other religions. To abandon entirely the above-
mentioned, is to be a proper Jain.” The Jains ‘even
the young lads) never taste honey, as it would oc-
casion expulsion from their cast. They never taste
intoxicating liquors, nor any other forbidden drink.

A man who neglects to observe due precautions,
that no living creature be exposed to danger, from
the following five domestic occupations*, will not

* See Menu 3, v. 68. The same notion occurs there; but the or-
thodox have sacraments to expiate the involuntary sin, The Jains,

THE JAINS. 951

be admitted to the sacred presence of God. 1 In
splitting firewood, 2 Forming the floor, and smear-
ing it with cow-dung, 3 Cleaning the fire-place,
4 Straining water, 5 Sweeping the house. When
about to perform these offices, he should first be
careful that there be no insect, for it is a mortal sin
to hurt any living being.

The women should marry before their monthly
courses appear; though, owing to changes, and par-
ticularly their poverty and depression, they are now
obliged to put off this ceremony till long after their
proper age, for want of money to defray the ex-
pense. When a woman is unclean, she must stay
at a distance from her relations, in unchanged
clothes, for four days. On the morning of the fifth
day she is permitted to mix with her family, after
ablution.

A Jain woman never marries but once; and, if the
husband dies when she is young, she must remain a
widow as long as she lives, being forbidden to wear
ornaments or delicate apparel, or to use nice food.
In the western quarter, towards Saondha, Caodyal,
&c. when the husband departs from the world, the
widow’s head is shaved in like manner as the Brah-
men Widows of other countries; but this custom has
gone out of use in this country for a considerable
time: a widow never dresses elegantly; and is not
allowed to wear glass rings, or the AMJangalasutra,
(an ornament on the wedding-day, tied round the
neck of the bride by the husband,) nor to use the
yellow and red colours, or paint, by which married
women are particularly distinguished. While the hus-
band lives, they may wear all ornaments allowed by
the law: opulent people of this tribe are still per-
mitted to dress like other Hindus, in all kind of
costly apparel suited to their station.

not admitting the efficiency of religious acts, are content to use pre-
eautions to avoid the sin. H. T.C.

952 ACCOUNT OF

When a man dies, they burn the corpse, and throw
the ashes into water; the rich cast the ashes into
rivers. They never perform other obsequies, as their
law says, “‘ the spirit is separate or distinct from the
body, which is composed of five elements; when,
therefore, the corpse is burnt, the several parts which
composed it, return to their former state: conse-
quently, to the deceased, no ceremony is due.” After
death, as nothing of him remains, therefore’ they

omit to perform the monthly and annual ceremonies,

which other Hindus observe on this occasion; and
they give these reasons in vindication, “A man
should feed himself with the best food, while he
lives in this world, as his body never returns after it
is burnt.” |

They further say, that the foolish people of other
tribes, being deficient in sacred knowledge, spend
money in vain, on account of deceased relations:
for how can a dead man feel satisfaction in ceremo-
nies, and in the feeding of others’ ‘‘ even a lamp
no longer gives light by pouring more oil into it,
after its flame is once extinguished.” Therefore it is
vain to make feasts and ceremonies for the dead ;
and, if it be wished to please relations, it is best to
do so while they are yet living, ‘‘ what a man drink-
eth, giveth, and eateth in this world, is of advan-
tage to him, but be carrieth nothing with him at his

end.”

“A man of sense should believe only what he
seeth with his own eyes; and should never believe
what he heareth from others.” The Jams do not
(like the followers of the Védas) believe, that this
world exists by the supreme power of God; for they
say, that the world is eternal, and that its changes
are natural. They deny, that the world is wholly
subject to destruction, for all things are born by the
power of nature; God only is exempt from Carma,
or the frailties and inconveniencies of nature.

A

THE JAINS. 253

As the Jains profess, not to put faith in oral testi-
mony, and only believe in what is perceptible to
their own organs of sense; therefore, they do not
believe that God is in the heavens above, ‘ because
no one ever saw him,” and they deem it impossible for
others to see him; but they believe in their Tirtha-
cars, as their ancestors have seen and given a full
description of the first prophet or Guru, who attain-
ed the station of Nirvana by his extraordinary per-
fections and actions, to the satisfaction of mankind.
down to the present age. Since his time, they have
images of the several Gurus, who succeeded. him,
and were incarnate as protectors of their religion.
These naked images they werslnp in their temples
with all due ceremonies; they consider them as gods,
or rather as representatives of God, whom they de-
scribe as follows :—*‘ He has a likeness, and no like-
ness ; he may be compared to an image of crystal:
He has eight good qualities, and is exempt from eight
evil qualities. He is all wise; all seeing; the father,
or the origin, of all; enjoying eternal bliss; without
name, without relation, or beginning; infinite; un-
describable.” The eight evil qualities, from which
the nature of God is exempt, are ignorance, mental
blindness, pain incident to nature, the distinction of
name, of tribe, delusion, mortality, dependence. He
who possesses these good qualities, and has overcome
these evils, or is superior to them, is the God of the
Jains, or Jinéswara, being incarnate in the shape or
body of one of their Gurus, or Tir?hacars. There-
fore, the Jains worship the images of their Gurus,
as the means of attaining the following stations :—
1 (Saloca) a station whence God is beheld at a dis-
tance; 2 (Samipa) one in the presence of, or near,
God; 3 (Sarupa) similarity to God; 4 (Saydga)
union with God. According to these several grada-
tions, he belongs either to the order of, Ist, (Gri-
hast’ha) a householder ; 2dly, ( Anworata) the lowest
rank of ascetics; 3dly, (Mahdorata) the second ; or
Athly, (Nirvdna) the highest. :

O54 ACCOUNT OF

But a bad man, who leads an evil course of life, in
contradiction to their sacred laws, departs at his end
to hell, or Naraca.

The Jains of this country never follow any other
trade than merchandise. They wear a cloth round
the loins, a turband on the head, and a jacket to
cover the body; and put a mark with sandal powder
on the middle of their foreheads: some have a small
circlet with red powder, in the centre of the sandal
mark, by way of further decoration.

The following is the formula used by the Jains of
the Carnat'ac, on beginning to perform their cere-
monies.

“ Now in the holy religion of \di-Brahman, of
the philosopher who was created by the supreme
power of God; and in the centre of the three worlds,
in the central world, and in the island of Jambidwipa,
(in which appears the renowed Jambu tree;) south-
ward of the great mountain of Maha-Méru, in the
land of Bharat, on the good soil of the renowned
division of Carndat’aca-Désa, in the village or town of
, and in the part or quarter of the present
age of Cali-yuga; and it being now within the fifth
division of time; according to the Saca of Raja Vi-
cramarca, (as accepted by many great and excellent
people, who observe the gracious laws), and in the

present year of ‘Sa‘Liva’HaNa, and in the present _

year of. the cycle ———— month of ———— fortnight
of ———— and on this holy day, (including also
weeks, stars, signs, hours, and minutes,) I now be-
gin this,” &c. &c. &c.

The preliminary form of addressing letters by the
Jains, to one another, is as follows, viz.

“To him, who possesses all good qualities, who
performs all charities (or bestows alms), according to

A

THE JAINS. 955

the laws, who observes the rules of the Jains, who
has zeal to repair the Jain temples, who perseveres
4n observing the ceremonies of Ashtami and Chatur-
dast, (8th and 14th of each half month ;) he who pu-
rifies his head by the drops of the sandal water, in
which the images of the Jains are bathed, to such I
bow my head,” &c. &Xc.

As the Bréhmens, who follow the Védas, fast on
the day called Ecddasi, (11th of each fortnight ;) in
like manner the Jains fast on the 8th and 14th days.
(Ashtami and Chaturdast), twice a fortnight: they
also worship the serpent Naga, on the festival of
_ Anantachaturdasi, in like manner as other. Hindus,
and tie over their shoulders a red thread.

At this time, the Jains have four Mat’had’hipas,
or chief pontiffs, at the following places, 1 Pénu-

gonda or Pennaconda, 2 Canchi or Conjeveram,
3 Collapur, 4 Delhi.

Their Sannyasis, for a long time back, have resided
in these places, with power over all those professing
their religion ; these pontiffs teach their laws, duties
and customs; and, if they observe any irregularities
among their flocks, punish them according to the
nature of the offence. .

The Jains intermarry with women of other fami-
lies, or Gotrds, and eat with the disciples of their
several priests and casts. But, though the Jams of
all countries are of the same religion, they should
not employ the Gurus of one Maz’ha, or college, to
attend funerals, and perform the ceremonies of an-
other; but they are to behave with respect and civi-
lity to them, on account of their profession and
rank.

Sravana-Bélligola is the principal residence of the
Jain Gurus: even the Jains, below the Ghdis, consider

256 ACCOUNT OF

it as the chief place; but with the permission of the
head pontiff, asit is too distant from them, his dis-
ciples established three subordinate Gurus, in three
different places, below the western Ghats, at Mooda,
Beedeery, Caroocollom, and Soda. Jain Sanny Yasis WOW
reside in these places, to attend to the laws and ce-
remonies of their religion,

There is a famous image, of eighteen times the
height of man, upon a rock near ”Bélligéla, named
GA ESWAR SwA Mi* :

In the books of the Jains, it is mentioned that
there was formerly a golden image, of 500 times
man’s height, at Padmanabh-pur, which was inun-
dated by the sea; and they believe that it can still
be sometimes seen in the water.

_ They generally account modestly for all their
tenets, and conduct themselves with propriety ; and
never assert that their bodies are eternal, and that
there is 20 God; nor do they, like the "Baudhists,
say, ‘‘ After death there is no pain in the flesh, or
feeling: since it feels not pain, nor death, what harm
is there in feeding upon it, when it is Prd vised to
procure health and strength.”

NOTICES OF THE JAINS,
RECEIVED FROM
CHARUCIRTI ACHARYA,
Their Chief Pontiff, at Bélligola, in Mysore.
“ For the information of mankind, be it acy
that the foundation of ages or times is countless ; ‘that ©

the origin of Carma, or passion, is inconceivable ; for
the origin of the soul, or spirit, is too ancient to be.

——
* This image is represented in the annexed drawing. At Kurcul,
near Mangalor, there is also a gigantic image of Gématéswar, C. M.

View taken from the opposite Terrace above .

ee RS oe
SS BSS 1 a > fl : ¢
ae ai =

<7

SS

Saag : ; a
~~ me MG A(SHETT age

View taken in fhe Court below.

ne 2 oy ~

;
wi

Ne ats

lacull or Bellagolla. Tube tty Deol rbox:
&

Statue is.g common feet long, hehce the height of the Statue is estimated at 4 eet at least. The igure

le

AR ,a/ Lp,

GOMUT SW:

?

ga tits Malte of

?
L
¢ A ¢

The foot of the

‘the G

ce

COMO Gd of

iF)

THE JAINS. 25%
known: therefore, we ought to believe, that human
kind is ignorant of the true knowledge of the origin
of things, which is known only to the Almighty or
Apiswara, whose state is without beginning or
end; who has obtained eternal victory over ali the
frailties of nature and worldly affections.

There are two great divisions of time or ages, esta-
blished in the universe by God; called Avasarpini,
and Utsarpini: each of them are reckoned at ten
Croérs, of Crérs of Sdgarépamas*. Utsarpini is di-
vided into six portions, which are named, 1 Atiduc’-
hana, 2 Duchama, 38 Duchama Suchama, 4 Sue-
hama Duchamd, 5 Suchama Suchama, 6 Suchama.
The second age, Avasarpini, is also divided into six
parts, by name, 1 Suchama, 2 Suchama Suchama,
3 Suchama Duchama, & Duchama Suchama, 5
Duchamda, 6 Atiduchama. ‘These two grand ages,
eras, or periods, as well as their divisions, revolve
for ever in the universe, like the course of the fort-
nights, and the increase and decrease of the moon,
in the regions frequented by mankind. ‘The number
of these regions is a hundred and seventy ; ten of
which are distinguished by the names of five Bhara-
‘tas, and: five Airavaias. These divisions are parti-
‘ularly explained in the book called Trilécasataca.

~ Among the ages abovenamed, the revolution of
four Crérs of Crérs of Sdgaréipamas was assigned to
oy y ce) eed L 5

the first, or Suchamd. During that age, men sub-
‘sisted on the produce of ten different Calpacrieshas

5 Pe er i oe
or celestial trees, called Bhdjaninga, Vastranga, Bhi- |
shananga, Malanga, Grihdnga, Racshandanga JSyéti-
ranga, Thrydnga, and Bhéjandiga. Thus men used
to subsist on the spontaneous produce of the trees;
and kines ruled not the earth; all were abundantly

o Ps bad

* Oceans of years. “This measure of time will be subsequently ~
explained, H. TC,

Vionn LX. s

258 ACCOUNT OF

happy; and the people of that age were distinguished
by the name Uttama-bhéga-bhimi-pravartacas, su-
premely happy inhabitants of the earth.

On the commencement of the second age, Suc’ha-
ma Suchamd, which lasted for three Crérs of Crérs
of Sagaroépamas, the miraculous gifts of the heavenly
trees were less than in the former age, though they
still supplied the wants of mankind and their sub-
sistence; but the men of that age were inferior in
complexion, stature, strength, and longevity: hence
they were called Madhyama-bhéga-bhimi-pravcartacas,
moderately happy inhabitants of the earth.

This was followed by the third age, Suchama
Duchama: its measure is two Crérs of Crérs of Sa-
garopamas. During this period, the people were still
more straitened in the produce of the Calpavricshas,
as well as inferior in longevity, color, health and hap-
piness: the people of this age were named Jaghanya-
bhéga-bhimi-pravartacas, or least happy inhabitants
of the earth. |

In these periods there were born, at different times,
fourteen Manus, by name, 1 Praris‘ruti, 2 San-
mati, 3 CsHeMANCARA, 4 CsHEMANDHARA, 5 SRi-
MANCARA, 6 SrRiMANDHARA*, 7 VIMALAVAHANA,
8 CuacsnusuMa’N, 9 YASASWi, 10 ABHICHANDRA,
11 Cuanpra’pHa, 12 Marupeva, 13 PRasaAnna-
gira, and 14 Na’surra‘sa. The last Manu, having
married Marupeya, begot a son, named VRisHAB-
HANATHA TirnTHACAR.

The fourth age, called Duchama Suchamd, is in
measure 42000 years less than the amount of one
Crér of Crérs of Sagarépamas ; and no miraculous
fruits were produced in this age. ‘
nn a pe gr TT

* Or SIMAD’HARA,

THE JAINS. 259
_ Before the commencement of the fourth age of the
Avasarpini, when the time of destruction appeared to
_be nearly approaching to mortals or mankind, through
the disappearance of the Calpavricshas or celestial
trees, VrisHABHANA THA TirnT HACAR was incarnate,
in this world, asson of the fourteenth Afenu, N.A’But-
RAJA, at the city of Ayddhya. By his auspicious
birth (at the prayer of mankind, who were distressed
for food, and were dying ;) and by his instructions,
the knowledge of good and bad, of possible and im-
' possible, and of the means of acquiring the advan-
tages of earth and of heaven, was obtained. | He also,
arranged the various duties of mankind, and allotted
to men the means of subsistence, viz.dsi the sword,
Masi \etters (literally ink), Crishi agriculture, Vanijya
commerce, Pdsupala attendance on cattle. Upon
this arrangement, he became king over all mankind,
and composed the four sacred books, called Pra-
fhamanuyoga, Carananuyoga, Charananuyoga,and Dra-
vyanuyoga. Thus VrisvarnanaTHa TirTHAacar
established the religion of the Jazs, in its four classes,
or casts, of Bréhmens, Cshatris, Vaisyas and Sudras ;
and delivered the charge of those sacred books to
their care. These writings becoming obsolete, and
the language not being understeod by the common
people since that time, the meaning of the original
has been explained, in various works, in the language
of different countries. He also composed several books
on the sciences, for the improvement of mankind.

After he had settled and arranged laws and regula-
tions of all kinds, mankind, from that period, began
to follow his institutions, looking on him, in every
respect, as equal to God; and, upon his departure
from this world, to Adécsha, or the state of the Al-.
mighty, his image was venerated as Jainéswar, or the,
Lord of Jains: as he had early subdued, by his wis-
dom, all worldly affections, and was relieved from
restraints and carnal ties.

$2

260, ACCOUNT OF

Before the departure of Varisuaswana't’Ha Tir-
THACAR, his wives were AsasvaTi and SUNANDADEV{}
by the former he had a son, named. Buarata Cua-
CRAVARTI; and by the latter Goma te’s wana Swa'mi.
The eldest, Buarata CHacravarri, ruled over the
whole of the six divisions of the earth, and named it
Bharatacshétra ; from that period the earth bears his
name. The metropolis of this king was Ayéd hyd
(or Oude). After he had ruled for a considerable
time, he appointed his younger brother, Gomarr’s~
wara Swami, to the government. Then abandon-
ing the ( Carma ) actions or affections of mankind, he
obtained the fruits. of his sacred contemplation, and:
proceeded to Mécsha, or heavenly salvation.

Gomartes ward Swa'mt, after he was charged nitty
the government, ruled for a considerable time, Ink &
town named Padmanabh-pur ; in the end, he attained
(Nirvdna) beatitude in heaven, and depar ted thither.
Since his death, the people worship him,. in all re-
_ spects, as Jinéswara, or God. From that period, twenty-
four TirtHACARS have passed, during. the age of
-Avasarpini, up to the end of the Decdpara-guga.

“According to the Jains, there were born other
twenty-four. Tirt hacars in the world, durimg the first
age, besides the twenty- four from’ the® birth » of
VarisHABUANA THA Swami. Thenames of the 7ir~-
thacars of Atitacala or past times, are as follow,
1 Nirman a*, 2Sa’Gara, 3 Maua’Na‘tTu A Ff, 4 ViMA-
LAHPRA out, 5 Sripitaras, 6 Supanral, 7 AMALA-
PRABHA ¥, 8 Upanra *™, 9 ANGIRA th 10 Suma,

f Ry ifeat

~

_ * Nirv‘ani, in HE’ MACHANDRA’Ss vocabulary. +Manayasas,
H. { Vimana, H. § The Sth is SARVA’NUBHU’Ti, and 6th
’ SRIDHARA, according to HE’'MACHANDRA. || Darra, H. 9 Un-
‘noticed by HE/MACHANDRA. ** Da’mopaRA, H. ++ Unnoticed by
HE‘MACHANDRA, who states, 9th SurE’sA, 10th Swia’ =e and
bith MUNISUVRATA,

THE JAINS. 261

J1 Sinv’Hu*, 12 Cusuma'nsari, 13 SrvaGanea f,

14 Ursa‘ua, 15 Gane’s‘wara, 16 Parame'swara;

17 Vimateswaraf, 18 Yasov'Hara, 19 Crusn-

™ §. 20 Gawnamurtr |, 21 SippHamatt,
2 ‘SrisnapRra GY, 23 Arriconta |, 24 Sawer.

To the Tirthacars, who departed to AM/écsha in the
times of antiquity, the Jains pay a respectful adora-
zation, even more assiduously, and with greater vene-
ration, than to their Tirthacars, who were incarnate,
according to their accounts, in the age, or period of
time, called Utsarpini.

In their prophecies it is said, that the following
are the names of the 7trt’hacars, yet to be incarnate,
in the future or next Utsarpint period : 1 Mana pap-
MA **, 9 ‘SuRADEVA, 3SUPARS WANA + 4ASWAYAM-
PRABIIA, 5SaDATMABHUTI fT, 6 De'vaputTRay, 7Cu-
LAPUTRA |, 8 Upanca]] , 9 Crusra ***, 10 Jay-
Aciztr {{{, 11 Munisuvrata tft, 12 Ara, 13 Ne-
POMPA Wf, 14, NisucasHa’ya, 15 Vipupa’ GA,
16 NrrMaLia, 17 Currracurra, 18 Sama’DHI-
GuPTA |||, 19 Swayam-Buu’ 779, 20 Anuvar-
TAcA**** 91 JavatftT, 22 Vimatta. {ttt
23 Devarata WY, 24 Anayta Virva 79{.

Their ancient Tir@hacars, being endowed with the
gift of prophecy, predicted the future succession of
these Tirt hacars, tor the information of the world.

* Unnoticed sc HE'MACHANDRA. +'SIVAGATT, ‘H. t AniLA, H.
§ Ceria’Rr’ HA, Hi - dl JiNE’'SWARA, H. 4 ‘Sivacarka, H. | SyAn-
DANA, H. :

a” PADMANA®BHA, according to Hr‘MacHanpra. ++ SUPA’RS-
waca,H. tt Sarva NuBHU’TI, H. § Devas RvUTA, H. |||] Upaya,
H. 99 Pev’ua’'ca, H. *** Portiva, H. +++ SaTacirti, H.
ttt Suvrara, H. §§AMAMPaA,H. |il||Sama’ Dur, H. 9 SAMBARA,
H. **** Ya'sop-Hara, H. +ttt Visaya, H. tttt Marra, H-
§§ De’va, H. 999 HeEMACHANDRA, having omitted one of
the preceding(ARra), adds BHADRACRIT as the 24th of these JINAS.

s3

262 ACCOUNT OF

-» Thus it is truth, that time and age gradually re-
volve for ever; yet no decay or destruction arises
hence to the universe, and its various worlds, to the
earth, to spirits, and to souls; but the mortal bodies
of mankind and Dévatds perish, while the Vimdnas*
endure.

HISTORICAL AND LEGENDARY ACCOUNT
oF

BELLIGOLA,

COMMUNICATED BY THE HIGH PRIEST AT THAT STATION.

TN ancient times, an image was at this place, self
formed from earth, under the shape of Gdmat I'swa- |
RA Swai, which Ra’vana, the monarch of the
RacsuasEs, worshipped to obtain happiness. After
many ages were elapsed, and on the access of the
present age, a king of the southern dominions reigned,
named RacHaMALta. His minister of finance was
named Cuamunpa-Ra’ya, who was remarkably de-
vout in the performance of the religious duties of the
Jains. It was reported to him, by a travelling mer-
chant, that there was, in the city of Padmandbh-pura,
an image of GémarT I'swara Swa‘mi. On hearing
this relation, he made a vow, before all the people,
not to drink milk, until he saw the image of Gémat
Iswara. When he retired from the public hall to
his own apartments, he found his mother also dis-
posed to follow the same resolution; and they both

RR TT TE

* The abodes of deities of various classes,

THE JAINS. 263

went immediately into the presence of SINVANANDA
A-cuary a, who was their sacred minister of religion,
and acquainted him with the vow, and obtained his
consent to the journey. Then setting off, with a
moderate retinue of the four descriptions, (horse, foot,
elephants and cars,) towards Padmandbh-pura, he
halted at this village, during a few days, for refresh-
ment; and being informed by the inhabitants, that
there was a sacred temple of the Jain worship on the
summit of Chandragiri, which was founded by Cuan-
pracupTa ManuaRray, he there performed the custo-
mary ceremonies and worship. As he slept there on
that night, the heavenly nymph CusHMaNDAMA
appeared to him in a dream, and recommended to him
to desist from his intended journey to Padmandbh-
pura, as it was too distant; and to worship another
image of GémwatT Iswara Swa’mi, eighteen times
mans height, on the mountain of Indragiri; equal
for miracles to the image that was in height fifty-two
fathoms at Padmanabh-pura. 'To make the discovery,
he was directed to shoot an arrow towards the south,
and follow its fight; by this means he would disco-

ver the image, on the spot where that arrow should
fall.

On the next morning, CuamunpaARa’y acted ac-
cording to the advice given to him in his dream, and
was extremely rejoiced at the discovery of that won-
derful image. He afterwards fixed his residence on
that spot for twenty years; and made the workmen
cut it out into a regular shape, with the utmost ac-
curacy of proportion in all its parts; the several pro-
portions of the body resembling the original likeness
of Gomat Iswara Swa'mi, in profound contempla-
tion, to obtain A/écsha. He also caused several build-
- ings to be constructed, as temples and other edifices,
round the God. On their completion, he established
- the worship of the image, as God, with great cere-

mony and devotion, in the year of the cycle Vibhava,
a S 4 ;

O64 ACCOUNT OF

when 600 years were past of the Cali-Yuga*. After
he had placed the image, CoamuNDARAY granted in
gift, to the God, the lands situated on all sides of the
place; to the value of 19,000 pagodas, for the per-
formance of the daily sacred ceremonies, as well as
those which return periodically.

Afterwards this kingdom was ruled by several
Ragas, from the time of Bata Lray down to Visunu-
Varppuan. In their reigns, the Jais added several
buildings to the former work, and were allowed the
enjoyment of the lands assigned to the God.

The successors of Stnva’‘NANDA A’CHARYA, Who>
was Guru to CHAMUNDARAY, resided here, to manage
the religious affairs of this place, and of other places
of the Jain tribes. The present Guru at Bélligola is
the regular successor, according to the following list
of Gurus, from the last of the ancient twenty-four
Tirthacaras in the fourth age, who was named
VaRDHAMANASWA Mi, and who attained beatitude —
(Mocsha) 2464 years before the year of the cycle
Durmati (or A. D. 1801)f; at the time when Sre-
wica-Manarays, having ruled for the space of a
hundred years, departed to heaven. :

* Masor MACKENZIE remarks the inconsistency of this with the
subsequent computation of 2464 years. The Cali-yuga is not a mode
of reckoning in use among the Juinas, though repeatedly mentioned
in these papers. Perhaps the present or fifth age, according to their
computation. may be here meant: it begins the fourth year after
VARDHAMANA’s demise. H. T. C. .

+ I have been informed by Jeinas in Bengal that they reckon

VARD’HAMA'NA to have lived 580 years before the Era of VicrA-
MA’DITYA. H. T. C. .

66Lt qenbhy yet

Z yroy.wrofey oy buopry y perotfnr ,
| Mennidhio) porfa bop apy

THE JAINS. 965

LIST OF THE NAMES OF THE GURUS,

From the last Tirt‘hacara of Ancient Times, down to the present Guru. -

VARD'HAMANA SWAMI,

The twenty-fourth Tirthacara of the last List.

1. Gautama*, 2SupHarmay, 3JamBina’THA,
4 Virasen Acua’ryat, 5 VrisHaByasen AcHA-
RYA, 6 SipD HASEN ACHARYA, 7 ViRASEN A’cHA-
RYA, 8 SINVANAND Acnarya, 9 CuNDA CUND
A’cHARYA, 10 GripHRAPENCH A’cHARYA, 11 Ma-_
yuraPencu A’cHarya, 12 Dua’rasEN A‘CHA’RYA,
13 Banusenw Acua‘ryA, 14 Ca‘LIPARAME'S'WAR
Swami, 15 Jrnasen A’cHa’ryA, 16 GuNABHADR
Acua nya, 17 AKALONKA SWAMI, 18 VEEKALONKA
Swat, 19 ABHAYACHANDRA SIDDHA‘'NT, 20 SRv-
TAMUNIVATARCA, 21 PusyapapDa, 22 Vipya‘Na-
WHA, 23 JAYASENA, 24 AvirnasEe’na, 25 Lacsumi-
SENABALARCA, 26 CHA‘RUCIRTIPANDIT ACHARYA,
the present priest at Bélligola: his age is 65; and he
arrived at his present rank 30 years ago.

Cuamunparay, after having established the wor-
ship of this image, became proud and elated, at
placing this God, by his own authority, at so vast
an expense of money and labour. Soon after this,
when he performed, in honour of the god, the cere-
mony of Panchamrita Snana, (or washing the image

* Meaning VARD’HAMA‘NA’s eldest disciple, named INDRA-
BHUTI, and surnamed GAUTAMA, because he was of that family or
Gétra. H.T.C.

+ SUD’HARMA was one of VARD’HAMA’NA’s disciples, and the
only one who has left successors. H.T. C.

t The disciple and successor of JAMBUSWAMi, Was PRABHAVA.
The person, who furnished this list, has skipped from Su D’HARMA’s
disciple to some priest, who may have been his remote successor, at
an interval of several hundred degrees. H.T.C.

6G .: ACCOUNT OF .

with five liquids, milk, curds, butter, honey, and su-
gar;) vast quantities of these things were expended,
m many hundred pots: but, through the wonderful
power of the god, the liquor descended not lower than
the navel, to check the pride and vanity of the worship-
per. CHAMuNDARA'Y, not knowing the cause, was filled
with grief, that his intention was frustrated of clean-
ing the image completely with this ablution. While
he was in this situation, the celestial nvmph Pap-
MA'vati, by order of God, having transformed her-
self into the likeness of an aged poor woman, ap-
peared, holding in her hand the five dmritas, in a
Bélliyagola, (or small silver pot,) for washing the sta-
tue: and signified her intention to CHAMUNDARAY,
who laughed at the absurdity of this proposal for
accomplishing what it had not been in his power to
effect. Out of curiosity, however, he permitted her
to attempt it: when, to the great surprize of the
beholders, she washed the image with the liquor
brought in the little silver vase. CnAMUNDARAYY, re-
penting his sinful arrogance, performed a second
time, with profound respect, his ablution, on which
they had formerly wasted so much valuable liquids ;
and washed completely the body of the image.

From that time, this place is named after the silver
vase (or Bélliyagola) which was held in PapMa‘vati’s
hand. Sravana (Sramana) is the title of a Jain San-
mydsi ; and, as this place is the principal residence of
these Sannydsis, the people call it Sravan-Bélligola.

Many years after this period, a king, named Buat-
TAVARD HAN, reigned at Dwaratipattan ; which the
people now call generally by the name of Doragul,
or Dorasamudram. It is said, that he wanted a fin-
ger. One day, as he sat with his concubine (who was
of the Vaishnava sect) upon the terrace of his palace,
she observed, in the public street, a Jain Sannyasé
passing; who avoided conversing with any person,

THE JAINS. 267

and was under a holy vow of abstaining from taking
food in the house of any person who was lame, or
deficient in any of the members of his body. Upon
hearing of the vow which he had made, she asked
the king, from motives of curiosity, ‘‘ Behold your
Guru! will he, at your request, eat food with your”
The Raa, not recollecting the customs of the Gurus,
replied ‘* Why not ? will he not come to the house of
his own disciple? if he refuse at my request, I will
abandon my sect, and bind myself to your command;
but, if he comply, contrary to your expectation,
you must conform to my sentiments.” Then the
Raja, descending from the terrace, advanced to the
Guru, and asked him to take food, walking, at the
same time, round him, with closed hands, and pro-
nouncing, three times successively, the following sa-
cred form of words, according to the rules of their
religion. ‘‘O Lord! reverence be to you! stay !—
for Bramara YAu's sake—comply !”—After he had
used this prayer, he took water into his hands, to
give to him, with the following form. ‘‘ Adcration!
O Lord !—Adoration! do purify this water!” But
the Swami, without speaking, retired to the temple;
where he resolved to fast that day, as an expiation
for being invited to eat by a maimed man.

. Busatravarn yan, following his Guru to the
temple, upon inquiry was informed of its being for-
bidden by their law: he then explained to the Guru,
what had passed between him and his beloved mis-
tress, and earnestly intreated the priest to comply
with his request; declaring, that if it were refused,
he must join the other sect, whence great misfortunes
would befal their religion: the Swdmi replied, that he
would suffer death, or any other misfortune, rather
than for the king’s favor do what was contrary to
the law.

Upon this refusal, BHaATTAVARD'HAN, agreeably

268 ACCOUNT OF

to the commands of his mistress, whom he loved,
joined her sect, which was that of the Vaishnavas ;
and, from that time, his name was changed from
BiuATTAVARD HAN, to VisHNUVARD HAN. ‘This
country was ruled, for many years, by his descend-
ants. On the Max titel of that dynasty of princes,
their dominions were conquered by the kings of
Bijayanagar.

After the Rajas of Mysore liad obtained possession
of this country, under the Anégondi kings, they
granted lands, of the amount of 1000 pagodas annu-
ally, to the ood ; and of the amount of 120 pagodas,
to the college of Sanni ydsis. While their power lasted,
they protected the Jains without permitting the in-
tolerant spirit of other sects to disturb their religious
ceremonies and duties. In the reign of Cuicca-Dr-

VARA‘JA VADEYAR, a Jain, named “AN NAYA CHETTY,
constructed, at this place, the tank named Calyani.

Formerly Ra’ma'nusa, the famous Vaishnava re-
former, under the encouragement of the confusion
which then prevailed in the government, came hither,
with the vain desire of disputing with the Jains,
about their laws and religion. After his conference
with them, he had it proclaimed, that he had worsted
the Jains, in their disputations on religion and law;
and erected here a pillar, on which were inscribed
the symbols of the Sanc’ha and Chacra ; and, cutting
off a small piece of the finger of the Jeft hand ed
Goémat I'swar Swa’mi, he departed.

Bélligola is the most revered place of the Tain wor-
ship above the Ghdts. Here are two mountains; one
called Indragiri, and the other, Chandragiri: the
former is situated on the nor th-west, adjoining to the
village : on its summit stands their famous image of
Gomar Iswar Swa‘ut * , of the height of eighteen

a ie

* Plate 2,

THE JAINS. 269
fathoms, inclosed within a strong wall, with many
small temples and other buildings. Here were, nt
former times, seventy-two well ‘shaped images; of
which there now remain, in good condition, only
forty-two, placed in a gallery, “under a portico, sup-
ported by pillars, which is carried inside, along the
wall. They say, that these are images of their Tu-
thacars, of the last, present, and future ages, The
great image, being of too great height to be covered,
is in the open air; appearing like a column on the
hill, when viewed as far as eight cés on all sides.

On the other hill, called Chandragiri, close to the
village, are several sacred temples; there are also
many temples in the town. The Sannydst resides in
a Matha within the town; where are some images.
of stone and metal, for his domestic Worship: in
other places, he employ s people to perform worshi Pp
to them regularly. Inthe government of the AZysore
Raas, and of Harper Navac, certain villages were
granted, in Jagir, to the god and the college. ‘There
are not any families of any other principal casts, €X-
cepting Jains, in the village of Bélligola.

At this place they used to celebrate, once a year, a
ereat festival to the god. Two months before its
commencement, the head of the Alatha used to send
a written notice over the country, to announce the
festival to all Srdvacs or Jains. On the receipt of
this paper, great numbers of this sect, even from
Ffindustan, caine to attend the ceremony, and worship
the god. "Phis festival was neglected, f. Y SLX’ Or Se-
ven years, through the oppression of the late govern-
ment; and has hot yet been renewed ; because their
lands have been resumed, and included in the lands
‘of government.

270 ACCOUNT OF

Translation of an Inscription, cut on a Stone, upon the
Hill of Bélligola, in front of the Image.

‘BE GOOD FOR ALL.’

BE success to the famous Ra’Manusa * who is
lord above the lords of Atit’his or Sannydsis ; who,
like the mighty fire from the face of Vadavdnala, dis-
perses or dries up the water of ‘the ocean of Pashan'-
das, or infidels; who is chief among the slaves of the
Lily feet of Srirangardja; who allows a passage
through Vicunta, ornamented with many edifices of
precious stones.

In the year of the Saca 1290 f, in the Cilaca year
of the cycle, on Thursday, the 10th of the month
of Bhadrapad, be success and glory to the honour-
able monarch, the sovereign and destroyer of envious
princes, lord of foreign kings, whose name is Bucca-
rAyA. During his reign, on account of the disputes
of the Jains and Bhactas, the principal citizens of
the new city, or Hasépattan, of Anégéndi, of Pénu-
gondd, of Caléhatti pattan, and of other places, re-
presented to the prince the injustice committed by
the Bhactas: he assembled a court, composed of the
following people: Coyira Tinamata, Peru Co-
vita TiruMALA Rayana, and other chief dcharyas,
judges, inhabitants, and other followers of the Z7aru-
man and Térubadi marks, and the head people or
chief officers of districts, and the Vaishnavas of T7-
rucul and Jambavacul ; in which it was determined, —
that there was no real cause of difference between

* Ra‘MA'NUSA, the famous author of the Sri-bhashya, and re-
former of the ‘Suiva doctrine, was born A.D, 1008. The invoca-
tion to him shows, that the inscription was placed with the consent
of government, C, M,

+ A.D. 1367.

THE JAINS. o7 1

the Jains and Vaishnavas. The Maharaja, putting
the hands of the Jains into the hands of the Vaisk-
navas, ordered that the Jazs be permitted to use
“their former and usual great drums, as well as the
Calahans-nada, which had been taken away by the
Bhactas ; and, for the performance of this, he or-
dered it to be made public, by inscriptions carved
upon stones, in the Ja: temples, all over the empire,
that no distinction, or contradiction, appeared be-
tween the religion of the Jains and Vaishnavcas:
therefore the Vaishnavas should agree to protect them,
while the sun and moon endure. Ter’RumAtTIA, and
the other chief people, then resolved, in token of
their good will, that all the Jams, who are inha-
bitants of the different divisions of the world, should
contribute annually, at the rate of one fanam for
each family, to defray the ceremonies of their god
at Bélligola Tirth, and to repair the buildings of the
Jindlayas, or temples of Jina.

‘By continuing the above yearly gift for this pur-
pose, while the sun and moon remain, will be ob-
tained the advantage of great reputation and grace.
If any person refuse its execution, he shall go to the
hell of those who betray their kings and holy reli-
gion; and he, who prevents this charity, shall incur
the sin of killing a cow, or a Brahmen, on the bank
of the Ganga river. 4

“Whoever resumes gifts, in money or lands, grant-
ed by himself or others, shall be born as an insect in
dung, for sixty thousand years.”

272 ACCOUNT OF

EXTRACTS OF A JOURNAL, _

BY MAJOR C. MACKENZIE,

Fev. 24, 1797. NEAR Calyani. On arriving at Mud-
giri several appearances, indicated a change in the
country, viz. the style of building of the pagodas ;
as we here found them of the mosque kind, with
domes and pillars in front ; others in which the Zin-
gam was worshipped of a large'size: in the Déwal
of Ramalingam, one of them was a groupe of five
Lingams*, and a great number of stones were placed
round the temple, covered with sculptures. At a
temple of Hanuman (the only one seen since we
came into the Canara country,) were several sculp-
tures, also placed round the building; in one, a god
or hero carried a cocoa tree; another was drawing a
bow ; a hand, in one place, covers a horseman ; and
an inscription, in two columns, was surmounted by
the sun, moon, Lingam, &c.

But that which most attracted my attention,
was, close to the mud wall, a round temple of blue
stone, with a portico of four pillars, curiously carved
and ornamented: in the portal within, facing the
north, was a figure, sitting cross-legged, naked, his
head covered with curls, like the figure of Bupp u ;
the nose was defaced, and a fracture run through the
figure, ‘The annexed sketch will give some idea of
itt. A poor woman, near, said it was “‘ the image
of Chindeo, or Jain-deo.” Without was a greater
figure of the same kind, also apparently defaced

* The five Lingams, signifying the powers of nature united in its
five component elements, are sometimes seen in this form. C. M.
+ Plate 4,

‘el 50TAht aug iid

ys 13

, Z SEE TET ;
qe QLEZLLLLLLLEELLE

THE JAINS. 373

and neglected: and particularly, the several heads
of snakes, which as a group shaded it, were muti-
lated. I could obtain no further information re-
specting it.

In consequence of notices received at Ongole, I
determined to call at 4mrésvaram to see the antiqui-
_ ties lately discovered there, as the piace is near the

banks of the Crishna, and we could reach the place
whither our tents were to be sent early in the day.
I. therefore, dispatched my interpreter Borra, ac-
companied by some Brahmens and two Sepahis, in the
evening to Amrésvaram, with directions to make
some previous inquiries into the history of the place:
and to conciliate the inhabitants; particularly the
Brdhmens, who are apt to be alarmed on these oc-
casions.

Inthe morning before day, we left Jbrampattan
by moon-light, and passed along the north bank of
the Crishua. We observed, a few miles off, a dry
but deep calava, or canal, leading off from the river,
~ probably intended for the purpose of cultivation. At
day-light, we were in the sandy bed of the river,

which seems to be nearly two miles wide, including
the islands; and contains no water at present. We
ascended the shallow bank to Amrésvaram. The
temples appear to be new, and are said to have been
recently built by the Chintapelli Rad, who has fixed
his chief residence here, since Lacshimipuram was
occupied by our troops. A high mud square wall
encloses the temples and his houses; ard the rest of
the place is daid in regular streets, at right angles,
in the same manner with his other places ot Lacshmi-
puram, &c. A street, going south from a gate of the
temple, seems to be 200 feet wide; and an open
choultry stands in the intersection of four principal
streets. [ found Borra ready to receive me, attended
by some Brahmens ; who said, that the people here

Vor. IX. T

274 ACCOUNT OF

were rather surprised and alarmed at the approach’of
Europeans and Sepahis, until he assured them that
our object was merely to view the lately discovered
ruins. We were then conducted to those remains of~
antiquity. We found a circular trench, about 10
feet wide, dug about 12 feet deep, into a mass of
masonry, composed of bricks of 16 inches square,
and 4 inches thick. It is probable, that this body
of masonry did not extend to a greater depth. The
central area was still untouched; and a mass of rub-
bish was thrown outside of the ditch, which prevented
any observation of its original state; but I conjecture
that the whole had, previous to its opening, formed
a solid circular mound. In this ditch, a white slab
Jay broken, which still exhibited some figures in re-
hevo, of which Mr. Sypenyam took a sketch.
Against the outside of the trench, were placed three
or four slabs, of the same colour, standing, but in-
clining inwards; on the inside, where these were un-
covered, they had no figures, except where the top
of one rose above the earth. Without, some sculp-
tures appeared, which lead me to conclude that these
sculptures were exposed on that side to view. From
the inquiries of my Brahmens, ¥ could obtain no other
account, than that this place was called Dipdl-dinna,
or the hill of lamps. The Rad, about a year ago,
had given orders to remove a large stone, to be
carried to the new pagoda, which he was building,
when they discovered the brick work, which induced
them to dig up the rest for the buildings. The white
stones were then brought to light, and unfortunately
broken ; at least we could perceive few of them; and
though it was said that some were carried into the
temple*, the Brahmen, who was admitted, had per-
ceived only some broken pieces. The sculptured
stones observed, were as follows: :

_™ Some of these have been discovered lately (1804) by Mr.
WILLIAM BrowN, containing sculptures, inscriptions, &c. of whick
it is probable, that copies may be procured. C,M.

! THE JAINS. 275
_ A broken piece*, still lying in the ditch, or exca-
vated foundation, on which appeared something like
a Lingam, or a pillar, rising through what seemed
shaped like adesk, but was ‘probably designed for an
altar; a male figure stood on the left, with its arms
disposed as if pouring something on it; but as the
upper part, and what he held, were broken ‘off, this
seems dombtful. Near him stood a female, holding
a Chambi, or pot on her head, in the Hindu style.
My Brdhmen naturally enough concluded, that this
represented a female carrying water to assist in the
offering to the Lingam. The feet of two figures re-
mained on the right, which probably had appertained
to two figures in the same attitude on that side. ‘The
stone was.a white marble, called by the natives Pdl-
rayi, or milk stone.

Near it. stood three slabs, inclining inwards against
the masonry, which had been dug out. On the side
on which they were viewed, no “figures were seen ;
and they were rough and unpolished: it is probable
‘that they have sculptures on the side still covered
with earth; and I have already mentioned, that some
designs appeared at the top of one. If the whole
of the circle was faced with these slabs, it is to be
regretted, that this treasure of antiquity did not fall
into better hands.

On the rubbish above, near these, and belonging
to some unfortunately broken, were two pieces” of
the same white stone; one of these seemed divided
into two compartments, by a border, on which three
wild hogs running were sculptured: the outline is
well desioned. The leg of a figure sitting, and the
hind leg of a horse appear above, remaining of the
original design. Below the border, the plane was
inclined to a lower border: and in the space of about
6 inches, two lines of ite ety were carved: on

* Plate 4, a, -
rg

276 ACCOUNT OF

cleaning off the dust, the first line appeared very
legibly. I have to regret, that the approaching heat
prevented my remaining, to copy this inscription in
fac-simile. Some of the characters are, however, as
I believe, faithfully given in the annexed attempt’;
and I left a Brahmen to transcribe the whole, but
his copy was not satisfactory. In the place. marked
cc, some of the letters seem to resemble those of
the Ceylon inscription. ‘The other piece contained
the head of a horse, and some defaced heads and
prominent ornaments f.

Near the gate of the temple lay a slab, grey with
the crust of ages; but of the same white marble.
On it, five or six figures appeared, sitting in various
attitudes, on what at first sight seemed to be Lin-
gams: but upon close examination, their seats re-
sembled our chairs, |

The most curious and most complete piece of
sculpture, we found as we returned along the high
mud wall of the temple; laid as a roof, over a small
_ temple of Lingam, of the same materials. It repre-
sented the attack and escalade of a fortified place.
The principal figure, on an elephant (with the usual
attendants, the driver and the fanner,) seemed issuing
orders: before him, a pedestrian figure, witha round
shield, seemed prostrating himself: a graceful figure
at full length, stood close to the gate of a tower,
fronting them. The tower, which was octangular,
was surmounted by a rounded roof on pillars, of the
shape of an Ambari ; under which an archer was re-
presented, in theact of drawing his bow, and.shooting
at an assailant, who covers himself with his shield,
while mounting the rampart by a ladder: another
figure, from behind the rampart, appeared peeping
over, and covered by some defensive arms: several
horsemen, and a man mounted on a bullock, seemed

* Plate 4, b, cc, bbb. + Ibid, d.

THE JAINS. | 277
to support the attack. The town and rampart seem
to be of stone, from the lines drawn obliquely to
represent the perspective, which, however awkwardly
done, was the first attempt of the kind I had observed
in Indian sculpture. ‘To whatever age this is to be
attributed, we here find an escalade, defence by
flanking towers, and their use, and the mode of
attack and defence, illustrated by a Hindu sculpture.

When mention of these sculptures was first made
to me at Ongole, it was hinted, that they contained
marks of the worship of the Jains*; but nothing of
the kind appeared here. Without my mentioning
the subject, I found that the same idea prevailed at
this place, though my Brdéhmen could give me no
good reason for it; and the account which he
received of the Jains, was very obscure: it was said
that they were formerly a powerful people, who con-
tested the sway with the Brahmens.

On the lower part of the same slab, and divided
by a border containing figures of animals, were
sculptured four figures of men sitting on chairs, and
reclining, in attitudes different from each other, but
all significant of a graceful negligence, indicating
careless ease. One of them had his hand disposed
on his breast, or in the chain which hung from it;
another!seemed: to incline to one side, leaning against
his chair, with one leg and thigh thrown over the
other; and wanted nothing but a hooka to be placed
in his hand, to give a complete idea of that languid |
attitude, in which we sometimes see an Indian throw
himself, when satiated with these fragrant steams
that overpower and gratify the sense. The chairs
were circular, of -a cylindrical form, and the back
forming half a circle. A number of small lines
divided them longitudinally, and seemed to represent
cane work. The thrones or seats represented in

* A figure cross legged has been since discovered on some of the
sculptures found there, C. M.

ne

278 ACCOUNT OF

other Hindu sculptures, I had never observed be-
fore with backs; so that these seem to have another
origin. The fioures were too small to admit of dis-
tineuishing onnnnientel: the head. dress.was round,
and not raised so high as Miobe Come Ay represented
on stones.

On another stone, but uncertain whether belonging
to these, was represented the remains of a god, or
chief, sitting on a chair, and fanned by a female,
holding a choury ‘y. It is well known, that Hindu
princes, sitting in state, were generally thus attended.
So Crispna Raa’ is described, sitting on his royal
throne, attended, by two beautiful A er fanning
him according to royal usage.

A horse on another stone, is preceded bya human
figure in a flying attitude, remarkable fur its grace-
ful outline; butthe upper part of both is destroyed.

The legs of all the figures are more slender and
gracefully disposed, than I have observed in any
other Hindu figures; nor have they that drapery,
which usually marks with rigid observance their cos-
tume. Another remarkable trait is the vast number
of rings about the feet, resembling those worn by the
lombadi or benjari: women. Nona are observed on
the toes or arms. ia

After ‘all, though this.differ widely from the carv-
ings observed on Hindu. buildings, it would be rash
to draw any conclusion, until.an opportunity offers
of observing more sculptures collected. A correct
drawing of the complete slab, over the temple of
Mahadéo, would be extremely desirable, and a com-
plete section across the area of Dipdl-dinna would
perhaps exhibit more: remains.

I was disappointed in not finding any thing like
the figure of Jaindeo, which I had seen at Calyanz.

gan ee Ne

iv

Hin,

Be

|

Wi

WaSSSSSS Si
————————— FZ
SSESSS55 z

“SRAVAN GO ODY,

(characters unknown)

S eee eh m - 3 ae | October 1601. z *
eh: Bs ‘ are oe ee + ; :

Wasa Jain Pagoda was here ona é is probable these Inscriptions feed may ;
have some conneceion with the rege:

> ahs
ort oe,
, “ . :

{Oo :

THE JAINS. 97

PARTICULARS OF THE JAINS.

EXTRACTED FROM A JOURNAL
BY DOCTOR F. BUCHANAN,

During Travels in Canara.

H AVING invited Panpita ‘AcHA’RYA Swa’Mi,
the Guru of the Jains, to visit me, he came, attended
by his most intelligent disciples, and gave me the
following account of his sect.

The proper name of the sect is drhata; and they
acknowledge that they are one of the twenty-one
sects, considered as heretical by SancAaRA “ACHA'RYA.
Like other Hindus, they are divided into Brahmen,
Cshatriya, Vaisya, and Sidra. ‘These casts cannot
intermarry together; but a man of high cast is not
disgraced by having connection with a woman of a
lower one, provided she be of pure descent. A similar
indulgence is not granted to the women of the higher
casts. The men are allowed a plurality of wives,
which they must marry before the age of puberty.
The man and woman must not be of the same family.
in the male line. Widows ought not to burn them-
selves with the bodies of their husbands ; but those
of the ‘Sudra only are permitted to take a second
husband. The Brahmens and Vaisyas in Tulava, and
every, cast above the Ghdts, consider their own chil-
dren as their heirs; but the Rdjds and Sédras of
Tulava, being possessors of land, follow the custom
of the country; and their heirs are their sister's
children. Not even the Sédras are permitted to eat
animal food, or to drink spirituous liquors: nor is it
lawful for any one to kill an animal, except for the
Cshatriya when engaged in war. They all burn the
dead.

: T 4

.

280 ACCOUNT OF

The A’rhatas reject the Védas and eighteen Pura-
nas of the other Brahmens, as heretical. They say,
that these books were composed by a Rishi named
Vyasa, whom the other Brdhmens consider as an
incarnation of the deity. The chief book, of which
the doctrine is followed by the A’rhatas, is named
Yoga. It is written in the Sanscrit language, and
character of Carndta; and is explained by twenty-
four Purdi‘as, all written by its author, who was
named VrisHaBHa SAYANA, a Rishi, who had ob-
tained a knowledge of divine things, by long con-
tinued prayer. They admit, that all Brahmens are
by birth of equal rank; and are willing to show their
books to the Braéhmens who heretically follow the
doctrine of the Védas; but they will not allow
any of the lower classes to look upon their sacred
writings.

_ The gods of the d’rhatas are the spirits of perfect
men; who, owing to their great virtue, have become
exempt from all change and misfortune; and are all
of equal rank and power. They are called collec-
tively by various titles, such as Jinéswara, Arhat,
and Stdd’ha ; but each is called by a partieular name,
or names; for many of them have above a thotisand
appellations. These Sidd’has reside in a heaven,
called Mécsha; and it is by their wortship only, that
future happiness can bé obtained. ‘The first person,
who by his virtue arrived at this elevated station,
was A’DIPARAMESWARA; and by worshipping him,
the favour of all the Stdd’*has may be procured.
has a thousand and eight names, the most common
of which, amongst his adorers, is Jinéswara, or God.

The servants of the Sidd’has are Dévatds, or the
spirits of good and great men; who, although not
so perfect as to obtain an exemption from all future
change, yet live in an inferior heaven, called Swarga ;
where, for a certain length of time, they enjoy great

THE JAINS. 281

power and happiness; according to the merit of the
good works, which they performed, when living as
men. Swarga is situated higher in the regions of the
air than the summit of Mount AZéru, and its inhabi-
tants ought to be worshipped by men, as they possess
the power of bestowmg temporal blessings. Con-
cerning the great gods of the Védas, the A’rhatas say,
that Visunu was a Rad, who having performed ¢er-
tain good works, was again born a R@d, of the name
of Rama. At first he was a great hero and conqueror;
but afterwards he retired from the pleasures of the
world, became a Sannyds?, and lived a life of such pu-
rity, that he obtained S¢dd’hi (beatitude,) under the
name of Jina, which he had assumed, when he gave
up his earthly kingdom*. Mane’swara or Siva, and
BrauMA, are at present Dévatds ; but are inferior in
rank and power to InprRa, who is the chief of all
the happy beings, that reside in Swarga. In this
heaven are sixteen stages, containing so many differ-
_ ent kinds of Dévatas, who live in a degree of bliss in
proportion to their elevation. An inferior kind of
Dévatas, called Vyantaras, live on mount Méme;. but
their power and happiness are greatly inferior to those
of the Dévataés of Swarga. The various ‘Sactis, are
Vyantaras, living on Maha-Méru; but they are of a
malevolent disposition.

Below Maha-Meéru, and the earth, is situated Bhu-
vana, or hell; the residence of the spirits of wicked
men. These are called Racshas and Asuras, and are
miserable, although endowed with great power. Bhu-
vana is divided into ten places of punishment, which
are severe in proportion to the crimes of their respec-
tive inhabitants.

_ * Tam informed, that the Jains have a legendary history of Ra’-
MACHANDRA, which is termed Padmapurdna, and is quite distinct
from the Purdna received under that title by the orthodox Hindus.
H.T. G

282 ACCOUNT OF
The heavens and earth in general, including JZahé-
Meéru and Bhuvana, are supposed never to have been
created, and to be eternal; but this portion of the
earth, Arya or Bharata, is liable to destruction and
renovation. It is destroyed by a poisonous wind,
that kills every thing; after which a shower of fire
consumes the whole Canda. It is again restored by
a shower of butter, followed by one of milk, and that
by one of the juice of sugar-cane. Men and animals
. then come from the other five Candas of the earth,
and inhabit the new d’rya or Bharatacanda. The
books of the A’rhatas mention many Dwipas, sur-
rounding Maha-Méru, of which the one we inhabit
is called Jambu Dwipa. People from this can go as
far as Manushéttara, 2 mountain in the middle of
Pushcara-Dwipa, between which and Jambu-Dwipa
are two seas, and an island named Dhatuci. Jambi-
Dwipa is divided into six Candas, and not into nine,
as is done by the Brahmens who follow the Védas.
+The inhabitants of. five of the Candas are called
Wléchhas or barbarians. A’rya or Bharatacanda is
divided into fifty-six Désas or provinces *, as is done
by the other Brahmens. As Arabia and China form
two of these Désas, A’rya would seem to include all
the world, that was tolerably known to the Arhatas,
_ who composed the books of this sect.

Every animal, from Inpra down to the meanest
insect, or the most wicked Racsha, has existed from
all eternity ; and will continue to undergo changes,
from a higher to a lower rank, or from a lower to a
higher dignity, according to the nature of its actions,
till at length it becomes perfect, and obtains a place
among the Stdd’has, A Sidra must be born as one of
the three higher casts, before he can hope for this
exemption from evil ; but, in order to become a Brah-

* Perhaps the 56 Antara-dwipas are meant. H. T.C.

THE JAINS. 985

men, it is not necessary, that he should be purified by
being born of a cow, as many of the followers of the
Védas pretend. The d’rhatas, however allow, that
to kill an animal of the cow kind is equally sinful
with the murder of one of the human species. The
death of any other animal, although a crime, is not
of so atrocious a nature. The A’rhatas, of course,
never offer sacrifice. but worship the gods and Déva-
tas, by prayer, and offerings of flowers, fruits, and
incense.

The A’rhatas are frequently confounded, by the
Brahmens who follow the Védas, with the Sau-
gatas, or worshippers of Bupp’ka; but this arises
from the pride of ignorance. So far are. the 4rhatas
from acknowledging Bupn’na as their teacher, that
they do not think he is now even a Dévata; but
allege, that he is undergoing various low metamor-
phoses, as a punishment for his errors. Their doc-
trine, however, it must be observed, has in many
points a strong resemblance to that taught by the
followers of Bupp’Ha. |

The Jain Brahmens are all Vaidya, and dress like
the others, who follow the doctrine of the Védas.
They have Gurus, who are all Sannydsis ; that is to
say, have relinquished the world, and all carnal plea-
sures. These Gurus, in general, acknowledge, as
their superior, the one who lives at Sravana Bélligola,
near Seringapatam*: but Panpira A’cHarya Swa-
Mi pretends to be at least hisequal. In each Matha
there is only one Sannydst ; who, when he is neay
death gives the proper instruction to one of his fol-
lowers, who must relinquish the world and all its
enjoyments, except perhaps an indulgence in the
pride of devotion. ‘The oftice is not confined to the

* Within four miles of Chinrdy-patten.

284 ACCOUNT OF |
Bréhmens ; none but the ‘Sédras are excluded from
this highest of dignities; for all the Sannyasts, after
death, are supposed to become Sidd’ha ; and of course
do not worship the Dévatds, who are greatly their
inferiors. |The Sannydsis never shave, but pull out
all their hair by the roots. They never wear a tur-
ban; and are allowed to eat and drink but once a
day. In fact, they are very abstemious; and the old
Swa’mi, who, from his infirmities, expected soon to
become a god, mortified the flesh exceedingly. -The
Gurus have the power of fining all their followers,
who cheat or lie, or who commit murder and adultery.
The fines are given to the god; that is to his priest.
These Gurus excommunicate all those who eat animal
food, or fornicate with persons who are not Jams ;
which, of course, are looked upon as greater crimes
than those that are only punished by fine. ‘The mar-
ried Brdahmens act as priests for the gods, and as
Purbhitas for the inferior casts. The follower may
choose any Brahmen he pleases, for his Purodhita.
The Brahmen receives alms ; and reads prayers on the
occasion ; as he does also at the marriages, funerals,
and commemorations of the deceased ancestors of his
fotlowers. |

The Jains are spread all over India ; but at present
are not numerous any where, except in T'ulava. They
alledge, that formerly they extended over the whole
of A’rya or Bharatacanda ; and that all those, who had
any just pretensions to be of Cshatriya descent, were
of their sect. It no doubt appears clear, that, in the
south of India, many powerful princes were their
followers, till the time of Ra’ma’nusa A‘CHA’RYA.
They say, that, formerly they were very numerous in
Arabia; but that, about 2500 years ago, a terrible
persecution took place, at Mecca, by orders of a king
named Pa’rswa Buarra’Raca, which forced great
numbers to come to this country. Their ideas of
history and chronology, however, as usual with Brah-

THE JAINS. 9385

mens, are so very confused, that they suppose Pa’rswa
Buarraraca to have been the founder of the Mu-
hammedan faith. None of them have the smallest
trace of the Arabian features; but are in every respect
entirely Hindus.

There are two kinds of temples among the Jains ;
one covered with a roof, and called Basti ; and the
other an open area surrounded by a wall, and called
Bettu, which signifies a hill. The temples of Sty and
VisHnu, the great gods of the followers of the Védas,
are called here Gadies. In the Bastis are here wor-
shipped the images of twenty-four persons, who have
obtained Sid@’hi, or become gods. These images are
all naked, and exactly of the same form; but they
are called by different names, according to the person,
whom they are meant to represent. These idols are
in the form of a man sitting. -In the temples called
Bettu, the only image of a Sidd’ha, is that of a person
called G6mata Rasa, who, while on earth, was a
powerful king. The images of Gomata Raga are
naked, and always of a colossal size. That, whieh
is at Kurcul*, 1s made of one piece of granite, the
extreme dimensions of which, above ground, are 38
feet in height, 101 feet in breadth, and 10 feet in
thickness. How much is below ground, I cannot say ;
but it is probably sunk at least three feet, as it has no
lateral support. According to an inscription on the
stone itself, it was made by Vira-Panpia, son of
BHAIRAVENDRA, 369 years ago.

The Jains deny the creation of man, as well as of
the world. They allow, that Brauma’ was the son
of a king, and that he is a Dévata ; and the favourite
servant of G6mata Ra’ya; but they altogether deny
his creative power. Brauma’, and the other Dévatds,
are worshipped, as I have said, by the Jains, who

* €ercal, RENNEL’s map, (U. 1)

286 ACCOUNT OF THE JAINS.

have not become Sannyasis ; but all the images of
these supposed beings, that are to be found in the
Bastis, or Betius, are represented in a posture of ado-
ration, worshipping the Siddha to whom the temple
is dedicated. These images, however, of the Dévatas,
are not objects of worship, but merely ornamental ;
and the deity has not been induced to reside in the
stone by the powerful invocations of a Brahmen.
When a Jain wishes to adore one of these’ inferior
spirits, he goes to the temple dedicated to its peculiar
worship. Ra’ma is never represented by an idol in a
Basti, although he is acknowledged to be a Siddha:
and, although Gan‘Eesa and Hanuma’n are acknow-
_ledged to be Dévatas, these favourites of the followers
of the Védas have no images in the temples of the
A'rhatas. |

The Jains have no tradition of a great deluge, that
destroyed a large proportion of the inhabitants of the
earth; but they believe, that occasionally most of
the people of d’rya are destroyed by a shower of fire.
Some have always escaped to the other Candas, and
have returned to re-people their native country, after
it has been renovated by showers of butter, milk,
and the juice of the sugar-cane. The accounts of
the world, and the various changes, -which the Jazts
suppose it to have undergone, are contained ina book
called Léca Swarupa. An account of G6matTa-Rayva
is given in a book called Gémata Raya Cheritra.
The Camunda Raya Purdéna contains a history | of
the twenty-four Stdd’has worshipped in the Baséis.

S As

287

ae

OBSERVATIONS ON THE SECT OF JAINS,

:

BY H. T. COLEBROOKE, ESQ,

THE information collected by Masor Macken-
Z1E, concerning a religious sect hitherto so imperfectly
known, as that of the Jainas, and which has been
even confounded with one more numerous and more
widely spread (the sect ef Bupp’Ha), may furnish
the ground of further researches, from which an exact
knowledge of the tenets and practice of a very re-
markable order of people, may be ultimately expected.
What Masor Mackenzie has communicated to the
society, comes from a most authentic source; the de-
clarations of two principal priests of the Jainas them-
selves. It is supported by similar information, pro-
cured from a like source, by Dr. F. Bucuanan,
during his journey in Mysore, in the year following
the reduction of Seringapatam. Having the permis-
sion of Dr. BucHaNnan, to use the extracts, which I
had his leave to make from the journal kept by him
during that journey; I have inserted, in the preced-
ing article, the information received by him from
priests of the Jaina sect.

I am enabled to corroborate both statements, from
conversation with Jaina priests, and from books, in
my possession, written by authors of the Jaina per-
suasion. Some of those volumes were procured for
me at Benares ; others were obtained from the pre-
sent Jagat-S‘r'T, at Morshedabad, who, having
changed his religion, to adopt the worship of Visu-

288 OBSERVATIONS ON

nu, forwarded to me, at my request, such books of
his former faith, as were yet within his reach.

It appears, from the concurrent result of all the
inquiries which have been made, that the Jaznas con-
stitute a sect of Hindus, differing, indeed, from the
rest, in some very important tenets; but following,
in other respects, a similar practice, and maintaining
like opinions and observances.

The essential character of the Hindu institutions is
the distribution of the people into four great tribes.
This is considered by themselves to be the marked
point which separates them from Mléch’has or Bar-
barians. The Jainas, it is found, admit the same
division into four tribes, and perform like religious
ceremonies, termed Sanscaras, from the birth of a
male to his marriage. They observe similar fasts,
and practise, still more strictly, the received maxims
for refraining from injury to any sentient being.
They appear to recognise, as subordinate deities,
some, if not all, of the gods of the prevailing sects ;
but do not worship, in particular, the five principal
gods of those sects; or any one of them by prefer-
ence; nor address prayers, or perform sacrifice, to
the sun, or to fire: and they differ from the rest of
the Hindus, in assigning the highest place to certain
deified saints, who, according to their creed, have
successively become superior gods. Another point,
in which they materially disagree, is the rejection of -
the Védas, the divine authority of which they deny ;
condemning, at the same time, the practice of sacri-
fices, and the other ceremonies, which the followers
of the Védas perform, to obtain specific promised
consequences, in this world, or in the next.

In this respect, the Jainas resemble the Baudd has
or Saugatas, who equally deny the divine authority
of the Védas ; and who similarly worship certain pre-
eminent saints, admitting likewise, as subordinate dei-

THE JAINS, 289
ties, nearly the whole pantheon of the orthodox
Hindus. They differ, indeed, in regard to the history
of the personages, whom they have deified; and it
may be hence concluded, that they have had distinct
founders ; but the original notion seems to have been
the same. In fact, this remarkable tenet, from which
the Jainas and Baudd’has derive their most conspicu-
ous peculiarities, is not entirely unknown to the or-
thodox Hindus. The followers of the Védas, accord-
ing to the theology, which is explained in the Vé-
danta, considering the human soul as a portion of the
divine and universal mind, believe, that it is capable
of perfect union with the divine essence: and the
writers on the /’édanta not only aflirm, that this union
and identity are attained through a knowledge of
Gop, as by them taught;_ but have hinted, that by
such means the particular soul becomes God, even to
the actual attainment of supremacy *.

So far the followers of the Védas do not virtually
disagree with the Jaimas and Bauddhas. But they
have not, like those sects, framed a mythology upon
the supposed history of the persons, who have suc-
cessively attained divinity; nor have they taken
these for the objects of national worship. All three
sects agree in their belief of transmigration. But the
Jainas are distinguished from the rest by their ad-
mission of no opinions, as they themselves affirm,
which are not founded on perception, or on erage
drawn from that, or from testimony.

It does not, however, appear, that they really with-
hold belief from pretended revelations : and the doc-
trines, which characterise the sect, are not confined
to a single tenet; but form an assemblage of mytholo-

* Vrihad éran‘yaca Upanishad.
Vor. IX. U

eo

290 OBSERVATIONS ON

gical and metaphysical ideas found among other sects,
joined to many visionary and fantastic notions of
their own.

Their belief in the eternity of matter, and perpetu-
ity of the world, is common to the Sdne’hya philosophy,
from which it was perhaps immediately taken. ‘Their
description of the world has much analogy to that
which is given in the Purdnas, or Indian theogonies:
but the scheme has been rendered still more extrava-
gant. Their precaution to avoid injuring any being
is a practice inculcated in the orthodox religion, but
which has been carried by them to a ludicrous ex-
treme *.

In their notions of the soul, and of its union with
body, and of retribution for good and evil, some ana-
logy is likewise observable. The Jainas conceive the
soul (Jiva) to have been eternally united to a very
subtil material body, or rather to two such bodies,
one of which is invariable, and consists (if I rightly
apprehend their metaphysical notions). of the powers
of the mind ; the other is variable, and is composed
of its passions and affections: (this, at least, is what
I understand them to mean by the Tayasa and Car-
mana Sariras). The soul, so embodied, becomes, in
its successive transmigrations, united with a grosser
body denominated Auddrica, which retains a definite
form, as man and other mundane beings; or it is
joined with a purer essence varying in its appearance
at pleasure, as the gods and genii. This last is termed
Vacarica. ‘They distinguish a fifth sort of body, un-
der the name of ‘dhdrica, which they explain as a
minute form, issuing from the head of a meditative
sage, to consult an omniscient saint; and returning
with the desired information to the person whence

* Jaina Priests usually bear a broom adapted to sweep insects out
of their way; lest they should tread on the minutest being.

THE JAINS. 291
that form issued, or rather from which it was elon-

gated; for they suppose the communication not to
have been interrupted.

- The soul is never completely separated from mat-
ter, until it obtain a final release from corporeal
‘sufferance, by deification, through a perfect disen-
gagement from good and evil, in the person of a>
beatified saint. Intermediately it receives retribu-
tion for the benefits or injuries ascribable to it in its
actual or precedent state, according to a strict prin-
ciple of retaliation, receiving pleasure or pain from
the same individual, who, in a present or former
state, was either benefited or aggrieved.

Masor Mackenztes information confirms that,
which I had also received, concerning the distribu-
‘tion of these sectaries into clergy and laity. In
Hindustan the Jainas are usually called Syauras ; but
distinguish themselves into ‘Srdvacas and Yatis. The
laity (termed ‘Srdvaca) includes persons of various
tribes, as indeed is the case with Hindus of other
sects: but, on this side of India, the Jainas are mostly
of the Vaisya class*. The orthodox Hindus have a
secular, as well as a regular, clergy: a Brdahman‘a,
following the practice of officiating at the ceremonies
of his religion, without quitting the order of a house-
holder, may be considered as belonging to the secu-
lar clergy; one who follows a worldly profession,
(that of husbandry for example,) appertains to the
laity ; and so do people of other tribes: but persons,
who have passed into the several orders of devotion,
may be reckoned to constitute the regular clergy.
The Jainas have, in like manner, priests who have
entered into an order of devotion; and also employ

*{ understand that their Vais‘ya class includes eight+-four tribes:
‘of whom the most common are those denominated O'swé/, Agarwél,
Pariwir, and C’handéwdl.

v2

292 OBSERVATIONS ON

Bréhmanas at their ceremonies; and, for want. of
Brahmanas of their own faith, ‘they. even have re-
course to the secular clergy of the orthodox sect.

This subject is sufficiently explained by Masor Mac-
KENZIE and Dr. Bucnanan; I shall, however, add,

for the sake of a subsequent remar k, ‘that the Jainas
apply the terms Vati and ‘Sramana, (in Prdcrit and
Hindi written Samana,) to a person who has devoted
himself to religious contemplation and austerity; and
the sect of Bupp’Ha uses the word ‘Sraman’a for the
same meaning. It cannot be doubted, that the Som-
monacodom of Siam is merely a corruption of the
words ‘Sraman'a Gautama, the holy am BanA or
Bupp’HA*.

do viue been here led toa comparison of the Indian
sects which follow the precepts of the Védas, witly
those which reject their authority, I judge it neces-
sary to notice an opinion, which has been advanced,
on the relative antiquity of those religions ; and
especially the asserted priority of the Baudd has be-
fore the Brahmanas.

In the first place, it may be proper to remark, that
the earliest accounts of India, by the Greeks who
visited the country, describe its inhabitants as dis-
tributed into separate tribest. Consequently a sect
which, like the modern Baudd’has, has no distinction
of cast, could not have been then the most prevalent
in India. |

It is indeed possible that the followers of Bupp’na
may, like the Jainas, have retained the distribution
into four tribes, so long as they continued in Hindustan.

* See As. Res. vol. 7, p. 415.
+ Seven tribes are enumerated: but it is not difficult to reconcile
the distinctions which are stated by ARRIAN and STRABO, with the
present distribution into four classes,

THE JAINS. 293

But in that case, they must have been a sect of
Hindus ; and the question, which is most ancient, the
Bréhmana or the Baudd’ha, becomes a solecism.

‘Tf it be admitted that the Baudd'has are originally
a sect of Hindus, it may be next questioned whether
that, or any of the religious systems now established,
be the most ancient. I have, on a former occasion*,
indicated the notions which I entertain on this point.
According to the hypothesis which I then hinted, the
earliest Indian sect, of which we have any present
distinct knowledge, is that of the followers of the
practical Védas, who worshipped the sun, fire, and the
elements; and who believed the efficacy of sacrifices,
for the accomplishment of present and of future pur-
poses. It may be supposed that the refined doctrine
of the Védantis, or followers of the theological and
argumentative part of the Védas, is of later date: and
it does not seem improbable that the sects of Jina
and of Buddha are still more modern. But I appre-
‘ hend that the Vaishnavas, meaning particularly the
worshippers of Ra’ma and of Crisonat, may be

_ * As, Res. vol. 8, p. 474.

+ In explanation of a remark contained in a former essay (As. Res.
vol. 8, p. 475), I take this occasion of adding, that the mere mention
of Ra’MA or of CRISHN’A, in a passage of the Védas, without any
indication of peculiar reverence, would not authorize a presumption
against the genuineness of that passage, on my hypothesis; nor, ad-
mitting its authenticity, furnish an argument against that system. I
suppose both heroes to have been known characters in ancient fabulous
history; but conjecture, that, on the same basis, new fables have
been constructed, elevating those personages to the rank of gods.
On this supposition, the simple mention of them in genuine portions
of the Védas, particularly in that part of it which is entitled Brah-
man‘a, would not appear surprising. Accordingly, CRISHN’A, son
of Dr'vaci, is actually named in the Ch’handogya Upanishad (to-
wards the close of the 3d Chapter,) as having received theological in-
formation from GHORA a descendant of ANGIRAs. This passage,
which had escaped my notice, was indicated to me by Mr. SPEKE,
from the Persian translation of the Upanishad. :

eee

O94 OBSERVATIONS: ON

subsequent to those sects, and that the ‘Sgivas alse,
are of more recent date. ,

I state it as an hypothesis, because I am not at
present able to support the whole of this position on
grounds which may appear quite satisfactory to others;
nor by evidence which may entirely convince them.
Some arguments will, however, be advanced, to show
that the supposition is not gratuitous,

The long sought history of Cashmir, which, in the
original Sanscrit, was presented to the emperor Ac-
BER, as related by ABuL-razix in the Ayin Acheri*,
and of which a Persian translation exists, more ample
than Asut-raziv’s brief abstract, has been at length
recovered in the original language y. A fuller ac-
count of this book will be hereafter submitted to the
society : the present occasion for the mention of it,
is a passage which was cited by Dr. Bucuawan f,
from the English translation of the dyin Acber?, for
an import which is not supported by the Persian or
Sanscrit text.

The author, after briefly noticing the colony esta-.
blished in Cdshmir by Casyara, and hinting a
succession of kings to the time of the Curus and
Péndavas, opens his detailed history, and list of
princes, with Gonawpa, a contemporary of Yup’
HISHTHIRA. He describes Aséca (who was 12th
in succession from Génawpa,) and his son JaLoca,
and grandson Damépara, as devout worshippers of
Siva; and Jaxéca, in particular, as a conqueror of
the Mlechhas, or barbarians. Damépara, accord-
ing to this history, was succeeded by three kings of

*'Vol..2: (Bs 178,
+ The copy which I possess, belonged to a Bréhmana who died
some months ago (1805) in Calcutta. 1 obtained it from his heirs,
t As. Res. Vol. VI. p. 165.

THE JAINS. — 295

the race of Turushca ; and they were followed by a
Bod hisatwa, who wrested the empire from them by
the aid of S'‘a-cyastnua, and introduced the religion of
Bupp’na into Cashmir. He reigned a hundred years ;
and the next sovereign was ABHIMANYA, who de-
stroyed the Baudd’has, and re-established the doc-
trines of the Nilapurana. This account is so far
from proving the priority of the Baudd’has, that it
directly avers the contrary.

From the legendary tales concerning the last -
BHhupD HA, current in all the countries, in which his
sect now flourishes*; and upon the authority of a
life of Bupp’Ha in the Sanscrit language, under the
title of Lalita purana, which was procured by Masor
iKwox, during his public mission in Wépdl, it can be
affirmed, that the story of Gaurama Bupp’Ha has
been engrafted on the heroic history of the lunar
and solar races, received by the orthodox Hindus:
an evident sign, that his sect is subsequent to that,
in which this fabulous history is original.

The same remark is applicable to the Jainas, with
whom the legendary story of their saints also seems
to be engrafted on the Pauranic tales of the orthodox
sect. Sufficient indication of this will appear, in the
passages which will be subsequently cited from the
writings of the Jainas.

Considerable weight might be allowed to an argu-
ment deduced from the aggravated extravagance of
the fictions admitted by the sects.of Jina and Bup-
puA. The mythology of the orthodox Hidus, their
present chronology adapted to astronomical periods,
their legendary tales, their mystical allegories, are
abundantly extravagant. But the Jamas and

* Relation d’un voyage. Tachayd. Laloubere, Royaume de Stam.

U 4

296 - ' OBSERVATIONS ON

Baudd@’has surpass them in monstrous exaggerations
of the same kind. In this rivalship of absurd fiction,
it would not be unreasonable to pronounce that to be
most modern, which has outgone the rest.

The greater antiquity of the religion of the Védas
is also rendered probable, from the prevalence of a
similar worship of the sun and of fire in ancient
Persia. Nothing forbids the supposition, that a re-
ligious worship, which was there established in times
of antiquity, may have also existed from a remote

period in the country between the Ganges and the
Indus.

The testimony of the Greeks preponderates greatly
for the early prevalence of the sect, from which the
present orthodox Hindus are derived. ARRIAN,
having said that the Brachmanes were the sages or
learned among the Indians *, mentions them under
the latter designation (cogisas) as a distinct tribe,
‘which, though inferior to the others in number, is
superior in rank and estimation: bound to no bodily
work, nor contributing any thing from labour to the
public use: in short, no duty is imposed on that
tribe, but that of sacrificing to the gods for the com-
mon benefit of the Indians; and, when any one ce-
lebrates a private sacrifice, a person of that class
becomes his guide; as if the sacrifices would not else
be acceptable to the gods t.’

Here, as well as in the sequei of the passage, the
priests of a religion consonant to the Védas, are well
described: and what is said, is suitable to them; but

* Kal roy Beeypcvev os On copisat vols Ivdois zrcty. x. Te As lib. 6.
T Neveylas of wevles Tydol els inl parce yeveces ey py align of
Lodirat est, x. 7 A Arrian in Indicis,

THE JAINS. 297

to no other sect, which is known to have at any
time prevailed in India.

A similar description is more succinctly given by
Srraso. ‘It is said, that the Indian multitude is
divided into seven classes ; and that the philosophers
are first in rank, but fewest in number. They are em-
ployed, respectively, for private benefit, by those
who are sacrificing or worshipping, &c*.’

In another place he states, on the authority of
MecAstHENES, ‘ two classes of philosophers or
priests; the Brachmanes and Germanes: but the
Brachmanes are best esteemed, because they are most
consistent in their doctrine f.”. The author then pro-
ceeds to describe. their manners and opinions: the
whole passage is highly deserving of attention, and
will be found, on consideration, to be more suitable
to the orthodox Hindus, than to the Bauddhas or
Jainas: particularly towards the close of his account
of the Brachmanes, where he says, ‘ In many things
they agree with the Greeks ; for they affirm, that the
world was produced and is perishable; and that it is
spherical: that God, governing it as well as framing
it, pervades the whole: that the principles of all
things are various; but water is the principle of the
- construction of the world: that, besides the four ele-
-ments, there is a fifth nature, whence heaven and

the stars: that the earth is placed in the centre of
all. Such and many other things are affirmed of re-
production, and of the soul. Like Piaro, they de-
vise fables concerning the immortality of the soul,

* yol On vd rev Today TAUbos sis Egle been dunena Des, nar mpoles pep
FIs PircroPous elves. x. 7. A lib, 15.

+ "Arany OF Dicigecw movers weph twv Dirocdpav, S60 yevn Pacuwy, ay
a5 udv Boayudvas xarel, THs OL Tepucvas, x. t A lib. 15.

298 | OBSERVATIONS ON

and the judgment in the infernal regions; and other
similar notions. These things are said of the Brach-
enanes. |

StrraBo notices likewise another order of people,
opposed to the Brachmanes, and called Pramne: he
characterises them as ‘ contentious cavillers, who ri-
diculed the Brachmanes for their study of physiology
and astronomy *. ;

PuiLostratus, in the life of APoLtonius, speaks
of the Brachmanes as worshipping the sun. ‘ By
day they pray to the sun respecting the seasons,
which he governs, that he would send them in due
time; and that Jndia might thrive: and, in the even-
ing, they intreat the solar ray not to be impatient of
night, and to remain as conducted from them f,’

Pury and Sorrnus ¢ also describe the Gymnoso-
phists contemplating the sun: and HrEeRoces, as
cited by StepHanus of Byzantium§, expressly de-
clares the Brachmanes to be particularly devoted to
the sun.

This worship, which distinguishes the orthodox
Hindus, does not seem to have been at any time prac-
tised by the rival sects of Jrva and Bupp’Ha.

Porpuyrivs, treating of a class of religious men,
among the Indians, whom the Greeks were accus-

* DirorsQurs TB Tois Bpaxpaowy cv TiOvcepisvrce} Tpapvas Episixous was not
zAgyxtinous. x Tt. A lib. 15.
+ MsD ayépay pev o&y nArov bwte lav wow. x. Tr. A lib. 3, cap. 4.

t Pliny, lib. 7. c. 2. Solin. 1. 52.
§ To Bpaxpavay Qiaroy cvdpay PirccoPuy, nas Bevis Pirwy, nai oF PLAN ty 3
xabwcwutrwy, Step. de Urbibus, ad vocem Brachmanes,

‘THE JAINS. 299

tomed to call Gymnosophists, mentions two orders of
them; ‘ one, the Brachmanes ; the other, the Sama-
neans: the Brachmanes receive religious knowledge,
like the priesthood, in right of birth; but the Sama-
n@ans are select, and consist of persons choosing to
prosecute divine studies.’ He adds, on the authority
of BarpEsaANeEs, that ‘ all the Brachmanes are of one
race ; for they are all descended from one father and
one mother. But the Samaneans are not of their
race; being selected from the whole nation of In-
dians, as before mentioned. The Brachman is sub-
ject to no domination; and contributes nothing to
others *.’

In this passage, the Brachman, as an hereditary
order of priesthood, is contrasted with another reli-
gious order; to which persons of various tribes were
admissible : and the Samaneans, who are obviously
the same with the Germanes of Strago, were doubt-
less Sannydsis ; but may have belonged to any of the
sects of Hindus. The name seems to bear some afti-
nity to the ‘Sraman‘as, or ascetics of the Jainas and
Baudd has.

CLEMENS ALEXANDRINUs does indeed hint, that
all the Brachmanes revered their wise men as deities};
and in another place, he describes them as worship-
ping Hercutes and Panf{ But the following pas-
sage from CLEMENS is most in point. Having said,
that philosophy flourished anciently among the bar-
barians, and afterwards was introduced among the
Greeks ; he instances the prophets of the Egyptians,
the Chaldees of the Assyrians; the Druids of the
Gauls (Galate); the Samaneans of the Bactrians ;

* Porph. de Abstinentia, lib. 4.
} Kas por doxscw, &c. Strom. lib. 1,
} Strom. lib. 3, &c,

300 OBSERVATIONS ON

the philosophers of the Celts ; the Magi of the Per-
stans ; the Gymnosophists of the Jndians: and. pro-
ceeds thus.—They are of two kinds, some called
Sarmanes, other Braéchmanes. Among the Sarmanes,
those called Alobu*, neither inhabit towns, nor
have houses ; they are clad with the bark of trees,
and eat acorns, and drink water with their hands.
They know not marriage, nor procreation of chil-
dren; like those now called Encratetai (chaste).
There are likewise, among the Indians, persons obey-
ing the precepts of Burra, whom they worship as a
god, on account of his extreme venerableness f.’

Here, to my apprehension, the followers of Bup-
p'HA are clearly distinguished from the Brachmanes
and Sarmanes{. The latter, called Germanes, by
STRABO, and Samaneans, by Porpnyrivs, are the
ascetics of a different religion; and may have: be-
longed to the sect of Jina, or to another. The
Brachmanes are apparently those, who are described
by Puiiostratus and Hrerocies, as worshipping
the sun; and, by Srraso and by Arrian, as per-
forming sacrifices for the common benefit of the na-
tion, as well as for individuals. The religion, which
they practised, was so far conformable with the pre-
cepts of the Védas: and their doctrine and observ-
ances, their manners and opinions, as noticed by the
authors above cited, agree with no other religious
institutions known in Jndia, but the orthodox sect.

* Same with the Hylobii of Strabo. C.

$F Astley 8 raroy 1d yevos, of per Lagpcvas, avrar. of OF Bpayycras
eeheevos, noel Fav Lapuccvaiv of AAACLsos mpoccyopevonevos, He woAcis oinBorr,
are rlyees Exsow, Okvdpwv OF auPiévvevras PArosolc, nak aupsdpua oirdyre,
nat Ddwp rais xepoh wweoi & yapor, & mraidomoiay tout, womep of viv
' Eynparnlat xareuevos. trot OF tiv Iwdav of trols Bote mebuevor-mapary-
fApoow' bv Oi barepCorny cepvornr@ ig Ody rerinhxace. Strom. lib. 1.

} The passage has been interpreted differently ; as if CLEMENS said,
that the Allobii were those who worshipped BuTTa: (See MoRERI
Art. Sammanéens.) The text is ambiguous,

THE JAINS. 30}

In short, the Bréhmanes are distinctly mentioned by
Greek authors, as the first of the tribes or casts, into
which the Indian nation was then, as now, divided. .
They are expressly discriminated from the sect of
Bupp’Ha by one ancient author, and from the Sar-
manes, or Samaneans, (ascetics of various tribes,) by

others. They are described by more than one autho-

rity, as worshipping the sun, as performing sacrifices,

and as denying the eternity of the world, and main- .
taining other tenets incompatible with the supposi-

tion, that the sects of Bupp’Ha or Jina, could be

meant. Their manners and doctrine, as described
by these authors, are quite conformable with the no-

tions and practice of the orthodox Hindus. It may

therefore be confidently inferred, that the followers .
of the Védas flourished in India, when it was visited |
by the Greeks under ALEXANDER: and continued ta
flourish from the time of MrcGasTHENES, who de-
scribed them in the fourth century before Curisr, to
that of Porpuyrius, who speaks of them, on later
authority, in the third century after Curist.

I have thus stated, as briefly as the nature of the
subject permitted, a few of the facts and reasons ~
by which the opinion, that the religion and institu- -
tions of the orthodox Hindus are more modern than
the doctrines of Jina and of Bupp'Ha, may, as I
think, be successfully resisted. I have not under-
taken a formal refutation of it, and have, therefore,
passed, unnoticed, objections which are founded on
misapprehension. -

It is only necessary to remark, that the past pre-
valence of either of those sects in particular places,
with its subsequent persecution there by the wor-
shippers of ‘Siva, or of Visunu, is no proof of its
general priority. Hindustan proper was the early seat
of the Hindu religion ; and the acknowledged cradle
of both the sectsin question. ‘They were foreigners _

- in the Peninsula of India; and admitting, as a. fact,

$02 OBSERVATIONS ON

(what need not, however, be conceded,) that the ors
thodox Hindus had not been previously settled in the
Carndtaca and other districts, in which the Jainas
or the Baudd’has have flourished, it cannot be thence
concluded, that the followers of the Védas did not
precede them in other provinces.

It may be proper to add, that the establishment of
particlar sects, among the Hindus who acknowledge
the Védas, does not affect the general question of re-
lative antiquity. The special doctrines introduced by
‘Sancans-A‘cuarya, by Ra‘ma'nusa, and by Ma’p-
HAVACHARYA, and of course the origin of the sects
which receive those doctrines, may be referred, with
precision, to the periods when their authors lived :
but the religion, in which they are sectaries, has un-
doubtedly a much earlier origin.

To revert to the immediate object of these observa-
tions; which is that of explaining and supporting the
information communicated by Masor MACKENZIE:
I shall, for that purpose, state the substance of a few
passages from a work of great authority, among the
Jainas, entitled Calpa-Sttra, and from a vocabulary
of the Sanscrit language by an author of the Jazna
sect,

The Abhid’ hana Chintdmeni, a vocabulary of syno-
nymous terms, by Hr'MACHANDRA A‘CHA‘RYA, Is di-
vided into six chapters (Cdndas,) the contents of
which are thus stated in the author’s preface. ‘ The |
superior deities (Dévdd’hidévas) are noticed in the
first chapter; the gods (Dévas) in the second; men
in the third; beings furnished with one or more
senses in the fourth; the infernal regions in the fifth ;
and terms of general use in the sixth. ‘ The earth,’
observes this author, ‘ water, fire, air, and trees, have
a single organ or sense (indriya) ; worms, ants, spi-
ders, and the like, have two, three, or four senses ;
elephants, peacocks, fish, and other beings moving

THE JAINS. 303.

on the earth, in the sky, or in water, are furnished
with five senses: and so are gods and men, and the
inhabitants of hell.’

The first chapter begins with the synonyma of a
Jina or deified saint: among which the most common
are Arhat, Jinéswara, Tirthancara or Tirthacara:
others, viz. Jina, Sarvajnya, and Bhagavat, occur
also in the dictionary of AmeERa as terms for a Jina
or Buddha ; but it is deserving of remark, that nei-
ther Budd’ha, nor Sugata, is stated by HEMacuan-
DRA among these synonyma. In the subsequent
chapter, however, on the subject of inferior gods,
after noticing the gods of Hindu mythology, (InpRra
and the rest, including Brauma, &c.) he states the
synonymaof a Buddha, Sugata, or Béd@hisatwa ; and
afterwards specifies seven such, viz. Virasyi, Sic’Hi,
Viswanna, CucucH HaNDA, Ca’ncuana, and Ca’s-
YAPA™, expressly mentioning as the seventh Bupp’-
HA, SA‘CYASINHA, also named SerRVARTHASIDD HA,
son of Supp’ HOpDANA and Maya’, a kinsman of the
sun, from the race of GauTaMma. |

In the first chapter, after stating the general terms
for a Jina or Arhat ; the author proceeds to enume-
rate twenty-four Arhats, who have appeared in the
present Avasarpini age: and afterwards observes, that
excepting Munisuvrata and Nei, who sprung
from the race of Harr, the remaining twenty-two
Jinas were born in the line of Icsuw'acut. The
fathers and mothers of the several Jinas are then men-
tioned ; their attendants; their standards or charac-

* Two of these names occur in Captain MAHONY’s and Mr. Jorn-
VILLE’s lists of five BuppD’HAs. As. Res. vol. 7, p.32 and 414.

+I understand that the JaAtNAs have a mythological poem en-
titled Harivansé purdnd, different from the Harivansé of the ortho-
dox. Their IscHwacu, likewise, is a different person; and the name
is said to be a title of their first JINA, RISHABA DRVA.

304 OBSERVATIONS ON

teristics; and the complexions with which they are
figured or described. ; j

The author next enumerates twenty-four Jinas who
have appeared in the past Utsarpint period; and
twenty-four others who will appear in the future age:
and, through the remainder of the first book, explains
terms relative to the Jaina religion.

The names of the Jimas are specified in Mayor
MACKENZIE’s communication. Wherever those names
agree with He’mMacuanpra's enumeration, I have add-
ed no remark; but where a difference occurs I have
noticed it*, adding in the margin the name exhibited
in the Sanscrit text.

I shall here subjoin the information gathered from
He’Macuanpra’s vocabulary, and from the Calpa
Sutra and other authorities, relative to the Jinas be-
longing to the present period. They appear to be
the deified saints, who are now worshipped by the
Jaina sect. They are all figured in the same con-
templative posture, with little variation in their ap-
pearance, besides a difference of complexion: but
the several Jinas have distinguishing marks or charac-
teristic signs, which are usually engraved on the pe-
destals of their images, to discriminate them.

1. RisHasna, or VrisHasua, Of the race of Icsu-
wa’cu, was son of Na’sur by Marupe'va’: he is fi-
gured of a yellow or golden complexion ; and has a
bull for his characteristic. His stature, as is pretend-
ed, was 500 poles (dhanush); and the duration of his
life, 8,400,000 great years (pirva-varsha). According
to the Calpa Stra, as interpreted by the commentator,
he was born at Césala or Ayéd’hya (whence he is named

* See pages 260, 261, 262, ~

THE JAINS. 305

Causalica), towards the latter part of the third age.
He was the first king, first anchoret, and first saint;

and is therefore entitled Prat’hama Rija, Prat’ hama
Bhicshacara,, Prathama Jina, and Prathama Tir-
Chancara. At the time of his inauguration as king,
his age was 2,000,000 years.. He reigned 6,300,000
years; and then resigned his empire to his sons:
and, having employed 100.000 years in passing
through the several stages of austerity and sanctity,

depar ted from this world on the summit of a moun-
tain, named Asht'apada. The date of his.apotheosis
was 3 years and 81 months before the end of the
third age, at the precise interval of one whole age
before the deification of the last Jina.

2. Asyira was son of Jita’satru by Visaya’:
of the same race with the first Jina, and represented
as of the like complexion; with an elephant for his
distinguishing mark. His stature was 4.50 poles;
and his life extended to 7,200,000 great years. His
deification touk place, in the fourth age, when fifty
elacshas of crérs of oceans of years had elapsed out of
the tenth crér of crérs *.

3. Sa’‘mBHAvVA was son of Jira‘rt by Sena’; of
the same race and complexion with the preceding ;
distinguished by a horse; his stature was 400 poles ;
he lived 6,000;000 years; and he was deified 30 dac-
shas of crérs of Sdgaras atter the second Jina.

A. Et aemakh was son of Sampara by SipD*-
HART HA’: he has an ape for his peculiar sign. His
stature was 300 poles; and his life reached to
5,000,000 years. His apotheosis was later by 10 lac-
shas of crérs of Sdgaras than the foregoing.

* The divisions of time have been noticed by Major hit ce abo
41E, p. 257, and will be further explained,

Vo1. IX. x

506 OBSERVATIONS ON

5. Susratr was son of Mecua by Maneat'a: he
has a curlew for his characteristic. His life endured
4,000,000 years, and his deification was nine lacshas
of crors of Sagaras after the fourth Jina.

6. PapMAPRABHA was son of Srip’Hara by Su-
sima ; of the same race with the preceding, but de-
scribed of a red complexion. He has a lotos for his
mark: and lived 3,000,000 years, being 200 poles in.
stature. He was deified 90,000 crérs of Sdgaras after
the fifth Jina.

7. Supa’rs’wa was sonof Pratisuta by Prit’awi;
of the same line with the foregoing ; but represented
with a golden complexion: his sign is the figure
called Swastica. —— He lived 2,000,000 years ;
and was deified cath ted 9,000 crérs of Sagaras sub-
sequent to the | paar Jina,

8. CiiaNDRAPRABHA Was sonof Mana’sENa by
LacsHMAN’A’; of the same race with the last, but
figured with a fair complexion: his sign is the moon;
his stature was 150 poles, and he lived 1,000,000
years: aud his apotheosis took place 900 crérs o
Sdgaras later than the seventh Jina. |

9. PusHpapantTa, also named Suvfp'H#I, was son
of Supriya by Rama’: of the same line with the
preening: and described of a similar complexion :
his mark is a marine monster (Afacara): his stature
was 100 poles, and the duration of his life 200,000
years. He was deified 90 crérs of Sdgaras after the
eighth Jina.

10, Sirata was son of Dri‘p’HAratTHA by Nan-
pA’: of the same race, and represented with a golden
complexion: his characteristic is the mark called

THE JAINS. 307

‘Srivatsa. His stature was 90 poles; and
his life 100,000 great years; his dei-
fication dates 9 crérs of Sagaras later
than the preceding.

11. ‘Sreyan (Sre’vas) or ‘SREyYA'NSA, was son
of Visunu by Visuwna’; of the same race, and with
a similar complexion; having a rhinoceros for his
sign. He was 80 poles in stature, and lived 8,400,000
common years. His apotheosis took place more than
100 Sdgaras of years before the close of the fourth
age.

12. Va‘supusya wasson of Vasupisya by Jaya’:
of the same race, and represented with a red com-
plexion, having a buffalo for his mark: and he was
70 poles high, lived 7,200,000 years, and was dei-
fied later by 54 Sdgaras than the eleventh Jina.

13. Vimava was son of CriraAvaRMAN by ‘Sya’Ma 3
of the same race; described of a golden complexion,
_ having a boar for his characteristic; he was 60 poles
high, lived 6,000,000 years, and was deified 30 Sd-
garas later than the twelfth Jina.

14. ANANTA, also named ANANTAJIT, was son
of StnnaseNa by Suyas‘a’. He has a falcon for his
sign; his stature was 50 poles, the duration of his
life 3,000,000 years, and his apotheosis 9 Sdégaras
after the preceding.

15. D’'warma was son of Bua'nu by Suvrata;
characterised by the thunderbolt: 45 poles in stature,
and lived 1,000,000 years: deified 4 Sdgaras later
than the foregoing.

16. Santi was son of Vis'waseNa by AcurIRA,
having an antelope for ‘ sign; he was 40 poles
py

308 OBSERVATIONS ON
high, lived 100,000 years, and was deified 2 Sdgaras
subsequent to. the last mentioned *.

- 17. Cunt’uu was son of Stra, by Sri; he has a
goat for his mark ; his height was 35 poles, and his
life 95,000 years. His apotheosis is dated in the last
palya of the fourth age. |

18. Ara was son of Suparsa’na by Devi: cha-
racterised by the figure called Nandavarta :

his stature was 30 poles, his life $4,000 years, and
his deification 1000 crors of years before the next
Jina.

19, Marr was son of Cumsua by PraBsna vali;
of the same race with the preceding; and represented
of a blue complexion; having a jar for his character-
istic ; he was 25 poles high, and lived 55,000 years ;
and was deified 6,584,000 years before the close of
the fourth age.

20. Munisuvrata, also named SuvraTa, or
Monr, was son of Sumirra by Papma, sprung
from the race-called Harivans'a; represented with

* The life of this Jing isthe subject of a separate work entitled
‘Séntipurdna, .

THE JAINS. 309.

a black complexion, having a tortoise for his sign :
his height was 20 poles, and his. life extended to
30,000. years. His apotheosis is, dated 1,184,000
years before the end of the fourth age.

21. Nami was son of Visaya by, Vipra’; of the
race of Icsuwa‘cu: figured witha golden complexion;
having for his mark a a blue water- -lily (Nilétpala) ; his,
statore was 15 poles; his life 10,000 years: and his,
deification took place 584,000 years before the ex-
piration of the fourth age.

92. Nem, also called ArIsHTANEMI, was son of
the king Sumuprasayva by Siva’; of the line deno-
minated Harivansa ; described as of a black com-
plexion, having a conch for his sign. According to
the Caipa stra, he was born at Sériyapura ; and,
when 300 years of age, entered on the practice of |
austerity. He em ployed 700 years in passing through
the several stages of sanctity; and, having attained
the age of 1000 years, departed from this world at
Uy Tijinta, which is described as the peak of a mountain,
the same, according to the commentator, with Girg-
néra®*. The date of this event is 84,000 years before
the close of the fourth age.

23. Pa’rs'wa (or Pa’kswanaT HA) was son of the
king As'wasewa by Va'ma,, or Bama’pe'vi; of the
race of Ic'suwa’ eu: fioured with a blue complexion,
having a serpent for his characteristic. The life of
- this celebrated Jina, who was perhaps the real
founder of the sect, is the subject of a poem entitled
Parswanat ha charitra. According to the Calpa

* I understand this to be a mountain situated in the west of Indi;
and much visited by pilgrims.

x3

$10 OBSERVATIONS ON

stitra, he was born at Bdndrasi*, and commenced
his series of religious austerities at thirty years of
age; and having completed them in 70 years, and
having consequently attained the age of 100 years,
he died on Mount Samméya or Samét}. This hap-
pened precisely 250 years before the apotheosis of
the next Jina: being stated by the author of the
kc sktra at 1230 years before the date of that
ook.

94. VaARD'HAMANA, also named Vira, Mana-
vrra, &c. and surnamed Charama-tirthacrit, or last
of the Jinas: emphatically called Sraman’‘a, or the
saint. He is reckoned son of Sipp’Ha‘RTHa by TRi-
saxa’; and is described of a golden complexion,
having a lion for his standard.

The subject of the Calpa sutra before cited is the
life and institutions of this Jina. I shall here state
an abstract of his history as there given, premising
that the work, like other religious books of the
Jainas, is composed in the Pracrit called Magad ‘hi ;
and that the Sanscrit language is used by the Jaias
for translations, or for commentaries, on account of
the great obscurity of the Pracrit tongue {.

* Bhélipuré, in the suburbs of Benares, is esteemed holy, as the
place of his nativity.

+ Samét stc’hara, called in Major Rennel’s map Parsonaut, is si-
tuated among the hills between Bihér and Bengal. Its holiness is
great in the estimation of the Jainas: and it is said to be visited by
pilgrims from the remotest provinces of India.

t This Prdcrit, which does not differ from the language introduced
by dramatic poets into their writings, and assigned by them to the
female persons in their dramas, is formed from Sanscrit. 1 once
conjectured it to have been formerly the colloquial dialect of the
Séraswota Bréhmens (As. Res. vol. 7, p. 219;) but this conjecture
has not been confirmed by further researches. I believe it to be the
same language with the Péli of Ceylon, =

THE JAINS. $11

According to this authority, the last Tirt’hancara,
quitting the state of a deity, and relinquishing the
longevity of a god, toobtain immortality as a saint,
_ was incarnate towards the close of the fourth age,
- (now past,) when 75 years and 81 months of it re-

mained. He was at first conceived by Dr'va'NANDaA,
wife of RisuaBHaDAaTTA, a Brdhmdana inhabiting
Brahmanacundagrama, a city of Bhdératavarsha, in
Jambudwipa. The conception was announced to her
-by dreams. Inpra*, or Sacra, who is the pre-
siding deity on the south of Meru, and abides in the
first range of celestial regions, called Saud’ harma,
being apprized of Mauna vira’s incarnation, prostrated
himself, and worshipped the future saint; but re-
flecting that no great personage was ever born in an
indigent and mendicant family, as that of a Brah-
mant, Inpra commanded his chief attendant Hart-
NAIGUMESHI, to remove the fetus from the womb of
Deva'Nanva’ to that of TrisaLa, wife of S1pp’-
HA'RTHA, a prince of the race of Tesawa’ cu, and
of the Casyapa family. This was accordingly ex-
ecuted; and the new conception was announced to
TRIsALA’ by dreams; which were expounded by
soothsayers, as foreboding the birth of a future Jina.
In due time, he was born; and his birth celebrated
with great rejoicings.

His father gave him the name of Varp’HAMANA.
But he is also known by two other names; SraMANA
and Mana’vira. His father has similarly three ap-
pellations, Srpp’Ha’RT HA, SReva‘nsa, and Yas aswi;
and his mother likewise has three titles, TRISALA,
VipEHADINNA, and Pritica‘RIn’s. His paternal
uncle was Supa‘rs wa, his elder brother, Nanpi-

* The Jainas admit numerous INDRAS; but some of the attri-
butes, stated in this place by the Calpasitra, belong to the INDRA’
of the Indian mythology.

x 4

312 OBSERVATIONS ON

Varp’HANA, his’ sister (mother of Jama'x1) Supar-
sana. His wife was Yasopa’, by, whem he had. a
deughter, (who became wife of Jama‘t1,) named
Axéssaand Priyaparsana. His grand-daughter
was called ‘Se’suHavamTi and JasovatTi. , °)

His father and mother died when he was 28 years
of age; and he afterwards continued two years with
his elver brother: after the second year he renounced
wordly pursuits, and departed amidst the applauses
of gods and men, to practise austerities. The pro-
gress of iis Cevout exercises, and of his attainment
of divine knowledge, is related at great length.
Finaliy, be became an Annat, or Jina, being
worthy of universal adoration, and having subdued
all passions*; being likewise omniscient and. all-
seeing: and thus, at the age of 72 years, he became
exempt from all pain for ever. This event is stated
to have happened at the court of king Hasriea ta,
in the city of Pawapuri, or Papépuri}; and is dated
3 years and 82 months before the close of the fourth
age, (calied Duehama suchama) in the great: period
named @vasarpini. ‘Vhe author of the Calpasutra
mentions, in several places, that, when he wrote,
980 years had elapsed since this apotheosis. Ac-
cording to tradition, the death of the last Jina hap-
pened more than two thousand four hundred years

* So the commentator expounds both terms.

+ Near Réjagriha, in Bihdr. Itis accordingly a place of sandtity.

Other holy places, which have been mentioned to me, are Champéd-
piri, near Bhigalpir, Chandrévati distant ten miles from Benares.
and the ancient city Hastindpura, in Hindustan: also Satrunjaya,
said to be situated in the west of India.

t Samanassa Bhagavau Mana‘BIRASSA Java duhkha Hinassa
Navabasa Sayain Bicwantdin dasamassaya Basa sayassa ayam Asi imé
sambach’hare Calé gach’hai. Nine hundred years have passed since
the adorable Mana’si’RA became exempt from pain; and, of the
tenth century of years, eighty are the time which is now elapsed.

}

THE JAINS. 319
since; and the Calpasitra appears therefore to lave
been composed about fifteen hundred years ago *.

The several Jinas are. described as attended by nu-
merous followers, distributed into classes, under a
few, chief disciples, entitled Ganad'haras, or Gana-
@hipas. The last Jina had nine such classes of fol-
lowers, under eleven disciples. INpDRABHUTI, Ac-
NIBHUTI, Va’ yusuuti, Vyacta, SuDHARMA, Man-
DIcAPUTRA, MauryarutTra, ACAMPITA, ACHALA-
BurRAwTA, MevTarya, Prasua’sa. Nine of these
disciples died with Maua‘vira; and two of them,
InprRABHOTI and Sup uARMA, survived him, and
subsequently attained beatitude. The Calpasiira
adds, that all ascetics, or candidates for holiness,
were pupils in succession from SuDHARMa, none of
the others having left successors. The author then
proceeds to trace the succession from SuDHARMA to
the different Sac’has, or orders of priests, many of
which appear still to exist. This enumeration dis-
proves the list communicated to Mason MackENZIE
by the head pi of Belligola.

The ages and periods, which have been more than
once alluded to in the foregoing account of the Jainas,
are briefly explained in He’ MACHANDRA’S vocabulary.
In the second chapter, which relates to the heavens
and the gods, &c. the author, speaking of time,
observes, that it is distinguished into Avasarpini and
Utsarpint, adding that the whole period is com-
pleted by twenty cétis of cétis of Sagaras ; or
2,000,000,000,000,000 oceans of years. I do. not
find, that he any where explains the space of time

* The most ancient copy in my possession, and the oldest one
which I have seen, is dated in 1614 samvat: it is nearly 250 years
eld,

S14 OBSERVATIONS ON

denominated Sdgara, or ocean. But I understand it
to be an extravagant estimate of the time, which
would elapse, before a vast cavity, filled with chop-
ped hairs, could be emptied, at the rate of one piece
of hair in a century: the time requisite to empty
such a cavity, measured by a ydjana every way, is a
Palya ; and that repeated ten cétis of cotis of times*,
is a Sagara.

Each of the periods, above-mentioned, is stated
by He'macnanpra, as comprizing six Aras; the
names and duration of which agree with the inform-
ation communicated to Masor Mackenzie: In the
one, or the declining period, they pass from extreme
felicity (ecdntasuhcha) through intermediate grada-

tions, to extreme misery (ecdnta duhcha). In the

other, or rising period, they ascend, in the ‘same
order, from misery to felicity. During the three
first ages of one period, mortals lived for one, two,
or three Palyas; their stature was one, two, or three
leagues (Gavyutis); and they subsisted on the fruit
of miraculous trees; which yielded spontaneously
food, apparel, ornaments, garlands, habitation, nur-
ture, light, musical instruments, and household uten-
sils. In the fourth age, men lived ten millions of
years; and their stature was 500 poles (Dhanush):
in the fifth age, the life of man is a hundred years:
and the limit of his stature, seven cubits: in the
sixth, he is reduced to sixteen years, and the height
of one cubit. In the next period, this succession of
ages is reversed, and afterwards they recommence as
before.

Here we cannot but observe, that the Jainas are
still more extravagant in their inventions, than the

* 4,000,000.000.000,000 palyas= one sdgara, or sagaropama.

THE JAINS. S15

prevailing sects of Hindus, absurd as these are in
their fables.

In his third chapter, Hraacnanpra, having
stated the terms for paramouut and_ tributary
princes, mentions.the twelve Chacravartis, and adds
the patronymics and origin of them. Buararta is
surnamed A‘RSHABHI, or son of RisHaBHA; MacGua-
VAN is son of Visaya; and Sanatcuma’ra, of As-
WASENA. Sa/ntT1, CunTuu and Ara are the Jinas
sonamed. SacGara is described as son of SumiTRa« ;
Saputma is entitled Cartavirya; PanpmMa is satd
to be son of PapmMérrara; Harisuena of Harr;
Jaya of Visaya; BrauMapatTra of BRAHME; and
all are declared to have sprung from the race of
IcsHwa’‘cu.

A list follows, which, like the preceding, agrees
nearly with the information communicated to Masor
Mackenzir. It consists of nine persons, entitled
Vasudévas, and Crishnas. Here Triprisnt’a is men-
tioned with the patronymic Pra‘sa’patya; Dwi-
PRISHTA is sail to have sprung from BraumMeE;
SwaYAMBHU is expressly called a son of Rupra;
and PurusuétTama, of Séma, or the moon. Pv-
RUSHASINHA 1s surnamed Satvi, or sonof Siva; Pu-
RUSHAPUNDARICA, is said to have sprung from Ma-
Ha’stRAS. Datta is termed son of AGNISINHA;
Na’ra’yawa has the patronymic Da’saraTut (which
belongs to Ra’MacHanpRA): and “Crisuna is. de-
scribed as sprung from VasupDEVa. .

Nine other persons are next mentioned, under the
designation of Swcla Balas, viz. 1 Achala. 2 Vijaya.
3 Bhadra. 4 Suprabha. 5 Sudarsana. 6 Ananda.
7 Nanda. 8 Padma. 9 Rama.

They are followed by a list of nine foes of Visuwv:
it corresponds nearly with one of the lists noticed by
Mason Mackenzix, viz. 1 Aswaariva, 2 Ta‘raca,

~

$16 OBSERVATIONS ON p

3 Mr’raca, 4 Mav’nu, 5 Nisumpna, 6 Bart, 7
Pranrapa. 8 The king of Lancé (Ra VAN A). 9
The king of Magadha (Fara SAND HA).

It is observed, that,,with the Jinas, these com-
plete the number “of sixty-three enninent personages,
viz. 24 Jinas, 12 Chacravartis, 9 Vasudévas, 9 Bala-
dévas, and 9 Prativdasudévas.

It appears, from the information procured by Ma-
yor Macxkenzik, that all these appertain to the he-
roic history of the Jainz writers. Most of them are
also weil known to the orthodox Hindus: and are
the principal personages in the Purdr‘as.

Hr’MACHANDRA subsequently notices many names
of princes, familiar to the Hindus of other sects.
He begins with Prir’nu son of Vu'na, whom he
terms the first king: and goes on to Mannv’Ha’Ta,
HariscHANDRA; Buarata sonof DusuyanTa, &c.
Towards the end of his enumeration of conspicuous
princes, he mentions Carwa, king of Champa and
Anga; WHa'ta or Sa’Lava'HANA; and CuMA‘RAPA’ LA,
suinamed CHAULUCY.A, a royal saint, who seems,
from the title of Paramdrhata, to have been a Jaina,
and apparently the only one in that enumeration.

In a subsequent part of the same chapter, Hema-
€HANDRA, (who was himself a theologian of his sect,
and author of hymns to Jina *,) mentions and dis- .
criminates the various sects; viz. Ist, A’rhatas, or
Jainas. Qndly, Saugatas, or Baudd’has, and, 3dly,
six philosophical schools, viz. 1st. Naiydyica ; od.

‘Oga ; 3d. Ca’PILAS Séne’ hya; Ath. Vais'éshica; 5th.

‘

ee

* A commentary on these hymns is dated in Saca 1214 (A. D.
1292); but how much earlier HE’/MACHANDBA lived, is not yet
ascertained.

THE JAINS. 317
Varhaspatya, or Nastica; and 6th. Chdarvdca, or
Lécdyata. The two last are reputed atheistical, as
denying a future state and a providence. -If those
be omitted, and the two AZimansas inserted, we have
the six schemes of Philosophy familiar to the Indian
circle of the sciences. |

The fourth chapter of He macuanpra’s vocabu-
lary relates to earth and animals. Here the author
mentions the distinctions of countries which appear
to be adopted by the Jainas ; viz. the regions (Var-
sha) named Bharata, Airdvata, and Vidéha, to which
he adds Cwru ; noticing also other distinctions fami-
liar to the Hindus’ of other sects, but explaining
some of them according to the ideas of the Jamas.
: Aryavarta, he observes, ‘is the native land of
Jinas, Chacris, and Ard@hachacris, situated between
the Vind’ hya and Himédri mountains.’ This remark
confines the theatre of Jaina history, religious and
heroic, within the limits of Hindustan proper.

A passage, in Bua’scara’s treatise on the sphere,
will suggest further observations concerning the opi-
nions of the Jainas, on the divisions of the earth.
Having noticed, for the purpose of confuting it, a
notion maintained by the Baudd’has, (whom some of
the commentators, as usual among orthodox Hindus,
confound with the Jaias;) respecting the descent
or fall of the earth in space; he says*, ‘ the naked
sectaries and the rest affirni, that two suns, two
moons, and two sets of stars, appear alternately;
against them L allege this reasoning. How absurd is
the notion which you have formed of duplicate suns,
moons, and stars; when you see the revolution of
the polar fish f.’

* Golédhydya. §. 3. v. 8 & 10,

+ Ursa minor.

\ !

318 OBSERVATIONS ON

The commentators * agree that the Jainas are here
meant: and one of them remarks, that they are de-
scribed as ‘ naked sectariés, &c.’ Because the class
of Digambaras is a principal one among these people.

It is true that the Jatnas do entertain the prepos-
terous notion here attributed to them: and it is also
true, that the Digambaras, among the Jainas, are
distinguished from the Séclambaras, not merely by
the white dress of the one, and the nakedness (or
else the tawny apparel) of the other; but also by
some particular tenets and diversity of doctrine.—
However, both concur in the same ideas regarding
the earth and planets, which shall be forthwith
stated, from the authority of Jaina books ; after re-
marking, by the way, that ascetics of the orthodox
sect, in the last stage of exaltation, when they be-
come Paramahansa, also disuse clothing.

The world, which according to the Jainas, is eter-
nal, is figured by them as a spindle resting on half
of another; or, as they describe it, three cups, of
which the lowest is inverted; and the uppermost
meets at its circumference the middle one. ‘They also
represent the world by comparison to a woman with
~ her arms akimbot. Her waist, or according to the
description first mentioned, the meeting of the lower
cups, is the earth. The spindle above, answering to
the superior portion of the woman’s person, is the
abode of the gods; and the inferior part of the figure
comprehends the infernal regions. The earth, which
they suppose to be a flat surface, is bounded by a
circle, of which the diameter is one rajut. ‘The

ni

* LacsuMi’'pDa’sa, Muni‘s’'warA, and the Vdsandébhdshya.
+ The Sangrahant ratna and Lécandb sitra, both in Prdcrit,
are the authorities here used.
$ This is explained to be a measure of space, through which the

THE JAINS. 319

lower spindle comprises seven tiers of inferior earths
or hells, at the distance of a raju from each other,
and its base is measured by seven rqjus. These seven
hells are Ratna prabha, Sancara prabha, Bdluca
prabha, Panca prabhé, Dhiiman prabha, Tama prabha,
Lamatama prabha. The upper spindle is also seven
rajus high; and its greatest breadth is five rajus.
Its summit, which is 4,500,000 Véjanas wide, is the
abode of the deified saints : beneath that are five V7-
gmdnas, or abodes of gods: of which the centre one
is named Sarvdrthasidd’ha: it is encompassed by the
regions Aparajita, Jayanta, Vaijayanta, and Vijaya.
Next, at the distance of one raju from the summit,
follow nine tiers of worlds, representing a necklace
(graivéyaca,) and inhabited by gods, denominated,
from their conceited pretensions to supremacy, Aha-
mindra. ‘These nine regions are, Aditya, Pritincara,
Sémanasa, Sumanasa, Suvisdla, Sarvatébhadra, Ma-
norama, Supravaddha, and Sudars‘ana.

Under these regions are twelve (the Digambaras
say sixteen) other regions, in eight tiers, from one
to five rajus above the earth. They are filled with
Vimdanas, or abodes of various classes of gods, called
by the general name of Calpavasis. ‘These worlds,
reckoning from that nearest the earth; are, Saud’ha-
ma and I's‘ana; Sanatcumdraand Mahéndra; Brahme ;
Lantaca; Sucra; Sahasrara; Anata and Pranata;
Arana and Achyuta.

The sect of Jina distinguish four classes of deities,
the Vaidnicas, Bhuvanapatis, Jibtishis, and Vyan-
taras. ‘The last comprises eight orders of demigods,
- er spirits, admitted by the Hindus in general, as the

gods are able to travel in six months, at the rate of 2,057,152 Ydje-
sas, (of 2000 erésa each,) in the twinkling of an eye.

320 OBSERVATIONS ON

Racshasas, Pisachas, Cinnaras, &c. supposed to range
over the earth. The preceding class (Jyétishis),
comprehends five orders of luminaries; suns, moons,
planets, constellations and stars, of which more
hereafter. The Vaimanicas belong to the various V2-
manas, in, the twelve regions, or worlds, inhabited
by gods. The class of Bhuvanapati includes ten or-
ders, entitled Asuracumara, Nagacumara, &c.; each
governed by two Jndras. All these gods are mortal,
except, perhaps, the luminaries. any

The earth consists of numerous distinct continents,
in concentric circles, separated by seas forming rings
between them. The first circle is Jambuédwipa, with
the mountain Sudars‘a Méru in the centre. It is en-
compassed by a ring containing the salt ocean ; be-
yond which is the zone, named Dhdtucidwipa ; simi-
larly surrounded by a: black ocean. This again is
encircled by. Pushcaradwipa ; of which only the first _
half is accessible to mankind: being separated from
the remoter half, by an impassable range of moun-
tains, denominated Mdénushéttara Parvata, Dihd-
tustdwipa contains two mountains, similar to Swméru,
named Vijanga and Achala; and Pushcara contains
two others, called Mandira and Vidyunmal.

The diameter of Jambudwipa being 100,000 great.
Yoéjanas*, if the 190th part be taken, or 526-6. we
have the breadth of Bharata varsha, which occupies
the southern segment of the circle. Airdvata is a
similar northern segment. A band (336484, Véjanas
wide) across the circle, with Sudarsia Méru in the mid-
dle of it, is Vidéha varsha, divided by Méru (or by four
peaks like elephant’s teeth, at the four corners of that

a en, TE a On LL i ne a

* Each great Yéjana contains 2000 cés, )

THE JAINS, ; 321

vaft_ mountain) into eaft and weft Vidéha. These
three regions, Bharata, Airdvata, and Vidcha, are ine
habited by men who practise religious duties. They
are denominated Carmachimi, and appear to be fur~
nished with distincts sets of Tirthancaras or saints en-
‘titled Jina. The intermediate regions, north and south
of Méru, are bounded by four chains of mountains ;
and intersected by two others: in such a manner, that
the ranges of mountains, and the intermediate vallies,
increase in breadth progressively. Thus Himavas is

twice as broad as Bharata varsha (or 1052 a ; The
valley beyond it is double its breadth (2105 5)3 the
mountain Mahihimavat, is twice as much (4210 a &
its valley isagain double (8421 ;;); and the mountain

Nishad’ha has twice that breadth (16842 5). The val-
lies between these mountains, and between similar
ranges reckoned from Airavata (viz: Sichari, Racmi,
and Nila), are inhabited by giants ( Yuga/z), and are
denominated Bhégabhim:. From either extremity of
the two ranges of mountains named Himavat and
Sichari, a pair of tusks project over the sea; each die
vided into seven countries denominated dutara-dwipas.
There are consequently fifty-six such; which are called
Cubhigakhimi, being the abode of evil doers. None
of these regions suffer a periodical destruction ; except
Bharaig and irae which are depopulated, and
again peopled, at the close of the great periods beforse
mentioned. go

We come now to the immediate purpase, for which
these notions of. the Jaimas have been here explained,
They conceive the setting and rising of stars and pla-
mets to be caused by the mountain Swafrx: and sup-
pose three times the period of a planet’s appearance to
be requisite for it to pass round Swméru, and return to
the place whence it emerges. Accordingly they allog.

Vor. IX, ¥ |

322 @BSERVATIONS ON THE JAINS.

two suns, as many moons, and an equal number of
each planet, star, and constellation, to Jambiuidwipa ;
and imagine that these appear, on alternate days, south
and north of Méru. ‘They similarly allot twice that
number to the salt ocean; six times as. many to Dhdtuci
dwipa ; 21 times as many, or 42 of each, to the Ci/o-
dad hi; and 72 of each to Pushcara dwipa.

Ir is this notion, apptied to the earth which we inha+
bit, that Bu’sscara refutes. His argument is thus-
explained by his commentators.

‘ The star close to the north pole, with those near it
tc the east and west, form a constellation figured by the
Indian astronomers as a fish. ‘In the beginning of the
night (supposing the sun to be near Bherans or
Musca), the fish's tail is towards the west, and his head
towards the east; but at the close of the night, the
fish’s tail, having made half a revolution, is towards the
east, and his head towards the west : and since the sun,
when rising and setting, is in a line with the fish’s tail,
there is but one sun; not two.’ ‘This explanation is
given by Munfs’wara and Lacsumipa’sa. But the
Visané Bhashya reverses the fish; placing his head
towards the west at sun set, when the sun ig near
Bharani. ah

yi
me |

VI.

On the Inp1taw and Arazwian Divisions of the
ZODIACK.

RY H. T. COLEBROOKE, ESa,

Od ark researches, of which the result is here laid be-
fore the Asiatick Society, were undertaken for the pur-
pose of ascertaining correctly the particular stars, which
give names to the Indian divisions of the Zodiack. The
inquiry has at intervals been relinquished and resumed ;
it was indeed attended with considerable difficulties,
None of the native astronomers, whom I consulted,
were able to point out, in the heavens, all the asterisms
for which they had names: it became, therefore, ne-
cessary to recur to their books, in which the positions
of the principal stars are given. Herea fresh difficulty
arose from the real or the seeming disagreement of the
place of a star, with the division of the Zodiack, to
which it was referred : and I was led from the considera-
tion of this and of other apparent contradictions, to
compare carefully the places assigned by the Hindus to
their nacshatras, with the positions of the lunar man-
sions, as determined by the Arabzan astronomers. After
repeated examination of this subject, with the aid af-
forded by the labours of those, who have preceded me
in the same inquiry, I now venture to offerto the pe-
rusal of the Asiatick Society the following remarks,
with the hope, that they will be found to contain a cor-
rect ascertainment of the stars by which the Hindus
have been long accustomed to trace the moon’s path,

‘Tue question, which I proposed to myself for inyesti-
gation, appeared to me important, and deserving of
the labour bestowed upon it, as obvioufly effential to-
wards a knowledge of Indian astronomy, and as tend-
ing to determine another question: namely, whether
the Indian and Arabian divisions of the Zodiack had
@ common origin. Sir Wittiam Joyes thought,

¥ 2

\

324 ON THE*INDIAN, &c.

that they had not: I incline to the'contraty opinion. _

The co-incidence appears to me too exact, in most in-
stances, to be the effect of chance: in others, the.
differences are only such, as to authorize the remark,
that the nation, which borrowed from the other, has
not copied with servility. I apprehend, that it must
have been the Arabs who adopted (with slight varia-
tions) a division of the Zodiack familiar tothe Hindus.
This, at least, seems to be more probable than the
supposition, that the Indians received their system from
the Arabians: we know, that the Hindus have pre-
served the memory of a former situation of the Colures,
‘compared to constellations, which mark divisions of
the Zodiack in their astronomy; but. no similar trace
remains of the use of the lunar mansions, as divisions of
the Zodiack, among the Arabs, in so very remote
times.

Ir will be found, that I differ much from Sir Wit-
L1AM Jones in regard to the stars constituting the
asterisms of Indian astronomy. On this, it may be
sufficient to remind the reader, that Srr Wituiam
Jones stated only a coniecture founded on a considera-
tion of the figure of the nacshatra and the number of
its stars, compared with those actually situated near the
division of the ecliptick, to which the nacshatra gives
name. He was not apprized, that the Hindus them-
selves place some of these constellations far out of the
jimitsofthe Zodiack, CAEL

T stax examine the several maec’shatras and lunar
mansions in, their order; previously quoting from the
Hindu astronomers, the positions assigned to the prin-
cipal star, termed the yégatdré. This, according to
Braumecuera, (as cited by Lacsumipa’sa in his
commentary on the Sirdman‘t,) or according to the
Brahmesiddhanta (cited by Buu’b’Hara), is the
brightest star of each cluster. But the Suryasidd’ hinta
specifies the relative situation,of the Yégatdra in respect

h

Table of Nacshatras or Asterisms marking the Moon’s Path.

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 sath

U. ‘ ,
fi TR | ea ; P. Beas a ati | vidacthe, |Anurad’-| Jyéshe’- U. . |e, |D'banith P. U.
Names of the Nucshatras, - - - Critica. | Rohini. | Mrigesi-) Ardra. | \,.,, | Pushya. Phalguni Phalguni! Hasta, | Chitra. | Swati. |Visic’ha, es oe Méla, |, vy Lege yp | Abbie |Sravana] Bhadra-/ Bhadra-| Révati
ade Ashad’ha] Ashad’ha vha. pada. pada,
- é| ‘
een a j The Varnas-| The |The Pi- - Arra- {Savitri or] Twasu- cr Inpra N “ 4 :
Presid lig Met occa of each } Paasd- | con, Rupnra. | Apitr. parr, |Serpents.| #ris, Bhaga, Sra icra cae Ai. | and fire, | Mrtra.| Inpra. ERAGE The Vis-| Brauma,| Visunv. Bey Peer

wédévas,

|

A figure
with a }| A couch
double | or bed.

face.

A couch
or bed- | A bed. | A hand.| A pearl.
stead

A wheel-| An an-
ed Car- | telope’s | A gem. | A house.
riage. | head.

A Xs <
ane A trian-| Three | A drum

raoth gular nut|tootsteps,| or tabor,

The figures of the Nacshatras ac- A coral] A fes- |A row of

A lion’s
bead. toon, |oblations

tail,

A ring. A couch, A circle. A tabor.

cording to Sntparr, &c. 5

An ele-

A tem- A cres-
ple*. cent,*

A gem.*
A pearl. +}

Their figures according to other ?

‘ Avcouch, A figure
authors. = - - - = = =

with two
or bed. faces. f

A lamp.t+ A bed}. A trian-| A tri-

gle.t | dent+.

pati, &C, = - - = = = = 3

Other numbers assigned by different )
authorities, - - - - - - §

E. N. E. Middle. Middle. | Middle.

star; according to the Sarya
Sidd’hénta, - - - = - -

Relative situation of the principal a
)

N. Brightest} Middle, | W. Brightest

‘-)

ile End of P.|EndofU] Third
quartero:

Nanate| Ashéwha,|dshéd'ha,| the last.

Place of the star in 6ths of degrees
from the origin of the Nacshatra;
according tothe same, - -

oe

Its place, in degrees, from the origin } 3°
of the Ecliptic. - - - - -

49° 30° = 63° 67°20' 93° 106° 260° 266°40' |280 359° 50’

155° 70 180° 199° 213°

Its distance from the Ecliptic..- - 5°S, |10°S, 9°S. 6°N, N. 13°N. |11°S, 2S. |87°N. 1° 30'S. ” §, N.
Place of the star in degrees, mea- ?)
sured on the Ecliptic, according 19° 28’ 63° 67° 93° 106° 155° 170° 183° 199° 212° 5! 241° 260 265° 278° 360°
to BRAHMEGUPTA, - - - = 5 .
Distance from the Ecliptic. - - 4°31'N,| 4°39'S, |10°S, 13°N. }11°S, 2S, |37°N. 1°238!S; 8° 30'S, 5° S, /62°N. [30° N. N.
Place in degrees measured on the
Ecliptic, according to the Sidd’- 19°28 |63° 155° 170° 183° 199° 219° 5' 241° 260° 265° 278° 60°
hanta Siromani, - - - - - 5
Distance from the Ecliptic. - - 10°S. 19°N. 11°, 1° 45'S. [87° N, 1° 20'S. | 1945'S, } 3°S0’S,} 8°30'S.} 5°20'S,] 5° S,|62°Ny 30 N. N.

‘

Place in degrees measured on the
Ecliptic, according to the Graha
laghava. ee a

183° 198° 212° 255° 261° 268° 275° 286°

Distance from the Ecliptic. - - oN.

S.| 5° S./62°N. |30°N. [36° N.

True longitude, according to the Pie
Sidd’hénta Sdroabhaumae << ¢\t2"40

61° 1°

94° 53°

142° 48’ 175° 13’ |188°50' |182° 24’ |219°36' 248° 36’ Jo54° 34’

260° 21’ |269°10' 280° 3' |294° 1% 1319° 15’ |$35° 8°

10° 50’ N.]12°55'N.| 4°44’N.} 4°40’ S.]10° 19'S,

True latitude. - - - - - = -

12°42’ N,J13955’N,

1° 52'S. |41° 5’N.] 1°95’S, S. ]62°14'N.|30° 5° (26° 25'N.| 0 45'S. }26° 8’ N.

Pn te ee Virgi- ; yoru 7 2 :
to =. Aldeba- }* Orionis.] =Orionis, mes =Bootis.| 4 or« -_ | 3 Sagit-| + Sagit- : Del- 5 Pis-
Star supposed to be meant, « . Gaia Arcturus.| Libre, pore arte tari, | “L9T®. |* Aquila. phini cium.

* Vasisur'wa. + Sicatra, I Muhirta chintéman.

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. $25

ef the other stars ; and that does not always agree with
the position of the most conspicuous star. |

- Tue number of stars in each asterism, and the figure

under which the asterism is represented, are specified.

by Hindu astronomers: particularly by Sripars in the
Rotnamdla. ‘These, with the positions-of the stars re-
latively to the ecliptick, are exhibited in the annexed
table. It contains the whole purport of many obscure
and almost enigmatical verses, of which a verbal trans-
lation would be nearly as unintelligible to the English
reader, as the original text.

Tue authorities, on which I have chiefly relied,
- because they are universally received by Indian astro-
nomers, are the Szryasidd’hanta, Sirérani, and Graha-
lighava, ‘They have been carefully examined, com-
paring at the same time several commentaries. The
Ratnamala of Sripattr is cited for the figures of the
asterisms ; and the same passage had been noticed by
Siz Wriiiam Jones (As. Res, vol. 2. p. 294). It
agrees nearly with the text of VAsisn?’HA cited by
Munis’wara, and is confirmed in most instances, by
the Muhirta Chintimeni. The same authority, con-
firmed with rare exceptions by Vasisu’T’Ha,Sa’caLya,
and the 4 bharan’a is quoted for the number of stars in
each asterism. The worksof BRaumMeEcupra have not
been accessible to me: but the Marichi, an excellent
commentary .on the Sid@hdnta siréman'i, by Munis’-
waArRA, adduces from that author a statement of the
positions of the stars; and remarks, that it is founded
on the Brahmesidd hinta, contained in the Vishnud hers
mattara*. Accordingly, I have found the same pas-

‘( * Another Brahmesidd’ hdnta is entitled the Sdcalyasanhita. The
at of the Marichi, therefore, distinguishes the one to which he
refers.

¥3

326 @N THE INDIAN, &c.

sage in the Brahmesidd hanta, and verified it by the
gloss entitled Vasand ; and I, therefore, use the quota~
tion without distrust. Later authorities, whose state-
tents coincide exactly with some of the preceding (as,
CaMAxa’cara in the Tatwavivéca) would be need-
lessly inserted: but one (Mun‘iswara in the Sid@hanta
sérvabhauma), exhibiting the position of the. stars
differently, is quoted in the annexed table. aie a

Tue manner of observing the places of the stars is
not explained in the original works first cited. The
Siryasidd hénta only hints briefly, that ‘ they astrono-
mer should frame a sphere, and examine the apparent
longitude and latitude *.’ Commentators}, remarking.
on this passage, describe the manner of the observation :
and the same description occurs, with little variation,
in commentaries on the “Szroman'it, They direct a
spherical instrument (Go/ayantra) to, be constructed,
according to instructions contained in a subsequent part
of the text. This, as will be hereafter shewn, is pre-
cisely an armillary sphere. An additional circle gradu-
ated for degrees and minutes, is directed to be suspended
on the pins of the axis as aie It is named Véd ha-
valaya or intersecting circle, and appears to be a circle
of declination. After noticing this addition to the in-
strument, the instructions proceed to the rectifying of
the Golayantra or armillary sphere, which is to be
placed, so that the axts shall point to the pole, and the
horizon be true by a water level. ;

Tue instrument being thus placed, the observer is
instructed to look at the star Aéva/# through a sight
fitted to an orifice at the centre of the sphere; and

eae hope -weereeeen ee Se st ee eee _.
* Sphutavicshépa and Sphutddhruvaca ; which will be explained
further on. ;

+ Rancawat’ua and PuHup’Hara.

{ Inthe Vasandbhishya and in the Marichi.

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 327

haying found the star, to adjust by it the end of the
sign Pisces on the ecliptick. ‘The observer is then to.
Jook, through the sight, at the yoga star of As'wini, or
of some other proposed object ; and to bring the. move-
able circle of declination over it. ‘The distance in de-
grees, from the intersection of this circle and ecliptick,
to the end of Mina or Pisces, isits longitude (d’hruvaca)
in degrees: and the number of degrees on the moyea-
ble circle of declination, from the same intersection to
the place of the star, is its latitude (vicshepa) North or
South *,

THE commentators + further remark, that ‘ the la-
titude, so found, is (sphut’a) apparent, being the place
intercepted between the star and the ecliptick, on a
circle passing through the poles; but the true latitude
(asphuta) is found on a circle hung upon the poles of
the celestial sphere, as directed in another place.’ ‘The
Jongitude, found as above directed, is, in like manner,
the space intercepted between the origin of the ecliptick
and a circle of declination passing through the star :
differing, consequently, from the true longitude. The
same commentators add; that the longitudes and lati-
tudes, exhibitedin the text, are of the description thus
explained: and those, which are stated in the Surya
sidd’ hanta, are expressly affirmed to be adapted to the
time when the equinox did not differ from the origin of
the ecliptick in the beginning of Mesha.

Ir is obvious, that, if the commentators have rightly

* Father Perau, and, after him, Bai.iiy, for reasons stated by
them (Uranol. Dissert. 2,2, Ast. Anc. p. 428.), are of opipion,
that the ancient astronomers referred stars to the Equator; aud that
Eupoxvs and Hirrarcuus must be so understood, when speaking
of the longitudes of stars. Perhaps the Greek astronoiiers, like
the Hindus, reckoned longitudes upon the ecliptick intersected by
aircles of declination, in the manner, which has been explained;

+ Buup’uana is the most explicit on this point

¥4

528 ON THEINDIAN, &c.

understood the text of their authors, the latitudes and
fongitudes, there given, require correction. It wilt
indeed appear, in the progress of this inquiry, that the
positions of stars distant from the ecliptick, as there
given, donot exactly correspond with the true latitudes
and longitudes of the stars supposed to be intended :
and the disagreement may be accounted for, by the
ciretimstance of the observations having been made in
tlie manner above described. : :

ANoTHER mode of observation is taught in the
Sidd’hanta sundara cited and expounded by the author
of the Sidd’hanta sérvabhauma. ‘ A tube, adapted to
the summit of a gnomon, is directed towards the star on
the meridian: and the line of the tube, pointed to the
star, is prolonged by a thread tothe ground. ‘The line
from the summit of the gnomon to the base is the hy-
pothenuse ; the height of the gnomon is the perpendi-
cular; and its distance from the extremity of the thread
is the base of thetriangle. ‘Therefore, as the hypothe-
nuse is to its base, sois the radius to a base, from which
the line of the angle, and consequently the angle itself,
are known. [If it exceed the latitude, the declination is
south; or, if the contrary, it is north. The right
ascension of the star is ascertained by calculation from
the hour of the night, and from the right ascension of
the sun for that ttme. ‘The declination of the corres-
ponding point of the ecliptick being found, the sum or
difference of the declinations, according as they are of
the same orof different denominations, is the distance
of the star from the ecliptick. The longitude of the
same point is computed ; and from these elements, with
the actual precession of the equinox, may be calculated |
the true longitude of the star; as also its latitude on a
circle passing through the poles of the ecliptick,”

Sucu, if I have rightly comprehended the meaning
in asingle and not very accurate copy of the text, is
the purport of the directions given in the Si@hdnta

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. - $29 -

sarvabhauma : the only work, in which the true lati-
tudes and longitudes of the stars are attempted to be
given. All the rest exhibit the longitude of the star’s
circle of declination, and its distance from the Ecliptick
measured on that circle. ony

I supposes the original observations, of which the
result is copied from Branmecupta and the Surya
sid@’ hanta, with little variation, by successive authors,
to have been made about the time, when the vernal
equinox was near the first degree of Mésha*. The
pole then was nearly seventeen degrees and a quarter
from its present position, and stood alittle beyond the
star near the ear of the Camelopard. On this supposi-
tion, it will be accordingly found, that the assigned
places of the Nacshatras are easily reconcileable to the
positions of stars likely ta be meant, a

“IT snaut here remark, that the notion of a polar star, _
common to the Indian and Grecian celestial spheres,
implies considerable antiquity. It cannot haye been
taken from our present pole-star (@ Urse minoris),
which, as Mons. Baitty has observed (Astronomie
Ancienne, p. 511), was remote from the pole, when
Evpoxus described the sphere ; at which time, ac-
cording to the quotation of Hirpparcuus, there was a
star situated at the pole of the world-++. Barty con-
jectures, as the intermediate stars of the sixth magni-
tude are too small to have designated the pole, that x
Draconis was the star meant by Evpoxus, which had.

* BrauMecuptTa wrote soon after that period: and the Sirya
Sidd'hanta is probably a work of nearly the same age. Mr. Ber
LEY considers it as more modern (As. Res. vol. 0.) : it certainly
cannot be more ancient; for the equinox must have past the bes
ginning of Méesha, or haye been near it, when that work was cotn-
Posed. + ey
a Hirrancuys. Comment. on Aratus, Lib. 1. p. 179.

330. "ON THE INDIAN, &c.

been at its greatest approximation) tothe pole, little
more than four degrees from it, about 1236 years before
Curist. It must have been distant, between seven and
eight degrees of a great circle, when Evpoxus wrote.
Possibly the great star in- the Dragon ( Draconis),
which is situated very near to the circle described by
the north pole round the pole of the ecliptick, had
been previously designated as the polar star. It was
within one degree of the north pole about 2836 years
before Curist. As we know, that the idea could not
be taken, from the star in the tail of Ursa minor, we
are forced to choose between BarLiy’s conjecture or
the supposition of a still greater antiquity. I should,

therefore, be inclined ‘to extend to the Indian sphere, —

his conjecture respecting that of Eupoxus, ©).

J sHALL now proceed to compare the Nagshaitras
with the Manzils of the moon, or lunar mansions, _
at e tAsiz2. |

I. As’wini, now the first Nacshaira, but anciently
the last but one, probably obtained its present situation
‘at the head of the Indian asterisms, when the beginning
of the Zodiack was referred to the first degree of
Mésha, or the Ram, on the Hindu sphere. As mea-
suring a portion of the Zodiack, it occupies the first
13° 20° of Mésha: and its beginning follows immedi-
ately after the principal star in the last Nacshatra (Re-
wati), reckoned, by some exactly, by others’ nearly,
Opposite to the very conspicuous one, which forms the
fourteenth asterism. Considered as a constellation,
As’wini compresses three stars figured as a horse's
head; and the principal, which is also the northern
one, is stated by all ancient authorities, in 10° N. and
So E. from the beginning of Mesau, hat

‘Tue first Manzi, or lunar mansion according to
the Arabs, is entitled Sheruf’ax, (by the Persians cor-

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 331

fuptly called, as in the oblique case, Sheratain), and
comprises two stars of the third magnitude on the
head of Aries, in lat. 6° 36’, and 7° 51’, N. and long.
26° 13’, and 27° 7’. (Hype’s ULucH BEG, p. 58).
With the addition of a third, also in the head of the
Ram, the asterism isdenominated Ashrdt. The bright
star of the 2d or 3d magnitude which is out of the fi-
gure of the Ram, according to ULuGu Bee, but onthe
nose according to Hipparcuus cited by this author
from Pronemy, is determined Ndsih: it is placed in
Lat. 9° 30’ N. and Long, 1s 0° 43’, and is apparently
the same with the principal star in the Indian asterism ;
for MunamMe_Ep of Tizin, in his table of declination
and right ascension, expressly terms it the first star of
the Shera/ain, (Hypx’s Com. on Utven Bee's tables,
p: 97).

Many Pandits, consulted by me, have concurred
in pointing to the three bright stars in the head of Aries
(« @ and vy), for the Indian constellation As’win. The
first star of Aries («) was also shewn to Dr. Hunrer,
at Ujjayini, for the principal one in this asterism; and
Mr. Davis (As. Res. vol. 2: p. 226.) states the other
two, as those which were pointed out to him by a skil-
ful native astronomer, for the stars that distinguish
As'wini. The same three stars, but with the addition
of three others, were indicated to Lz Grentit, for this
constellation (Mem. Acad. Scien.,1772.P. II. p. 209).
I entertain therefore no doubt, that Str W. Jones
(As. Res. vol. 2. p. 298.) was right in placing the
three stars of 4s’mmi in, and near, the head of the
Ram; and it is evident, that the first Nacshatra of the
Hindus is here rightly determined, in exact conformity
with the first Lunar mansion of the Arabs; although
the longitude of « Arietis exceed, by half a degree,
that which is deduced, for the end of As’wini, from
the supposed situation of the Virgin’s spike opposite to

332 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

the beginning of this Nacshatra; and although. its cir-
ele-of declination be 13° instead of 8° from the Bent

pal star in Révaii.

YW. -Bhara’i, the second Indian asterism, comprises
three stars figured by the Yous or pudendum muliebre :
and’all ancient authorities concur in placing the prin-
cipal and southern star of this Nacshatra in’ Y2° N.
The second Manzil, entitled Butain, is placed by
Uvex Bre (Hyde, p. 61.) in Lat. 1° 12” and 3° 12°5
and this cannot possibly be reconciled with the Hindu
constellation. But Muhammed of Tizin (See Hype’s
Commentary, p. 97), assigns to the bright star of
Butain a declination of 23° N. exceeding by nearly
2° the declination allotted by him to Niulih, or his firse
star in Sheratain. This agrees with the difference be-
tween the principal stars of .4s’wini and Bharan'i; and
it may be inferred, that some among the Muhammedan
astronomers have concurred with the Hindus, in’ ire-
ferring the second constellation to stars that form Musca.
There were no: good grounds for supposing Bharan’ to
correspond with three stars on the tail of the Ram (As.
Res. vol. 2. p. 298); and I have no doubt, ‘that the
stars, which compose this Nacshatra, have been rightly
indicated to me, as three in Musca, forming a triangle
almost equilateral: their brightness, and their equal
distance from the first and third asterisms, corroborate
this opinion, which will be confirmed by shewing, as
will be done in the progress of this comparison, that
the Naeshatrgs are not restnictee to the aa hai the
Bouek

THI. Cri#tticd, now the third, but kai’ mv fii
Nacshatra, consists of six stars figured as a knife or
razor, and the principal and southern star is placed in
47° or 5° N. and in 65 sixths of degrees for es 50°)

iY
¥

hen)

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 338

from its own commencement, according to the Surya
Sidd’hanta, or 37° 28’ to 38° from the beginning of
Mésha, according to the S:d@hanta siromani, and
Grahalaghava, respectively. This longitude of the
circle of declination corresponds nearly with that of the
bright star in the Pleiades, which is 40° of longitude
distant from the principal star of Révati.

Tue stars, indicated by Utucnu nee for Thurayyd,
also correspond exactly with the Pleiades; and these
were pointed out to the Jesuit missionaries *, as they
have since been to every other inquirer, for the third
Nacshatra. If any doubt existed, Mythology might
assist in determining the question; for the Crictieds are
six nymphs, who nursed Scanpa, the God of war,
named from these, his foster mothers, Ca’RTICE’YA or
SHA’NMA'TURA.

IV. Ws retain on our celestial globes the Arabick
name of the fourth lunar mansion Debardn (or with the
article, Aldebaran): applied by us, however, exclu-
sively to the bright star called the Bull’s-eye; and
which is unquestionably the same-with the principal
and eastern star of Rofun'z, placed in 43° or 5° S. and
4o4° E. by the Hindu writers on Astronomy- This
Nacshatra, figured as a wheeled carriage, comprises
five stars, out of the seven which the Greeks named
the Hyades, The Arabs, however, like the Hindus,
reckon five stars only in the asterism; and Sir W.
Jones rightly supposed them to be. in the head and
neck of the Bull; they probably are ‘ap ye Tauri,
agreeably to Mons. <hetrehe s conjecture (Ast. Ind. p-

129).

* Costard’s Hist. of Ast.p.51. Bailly Ast. Ind. p..134.

33A ON THE INDIAN, &c.

Hindu astronomers define a point in this constella-
tion, of some importance in their fanciful astrology.
According to the Surya sid@hanta, when a planet is in
the 7th degree of Vrisha (Taurus) and has mere than
two degrees of south latitude, or, as commentators ex-
pound the passage, 2° 40’; the planet is said to cut —
the cart of Rohini. This is denominated sacatf‘abhéia.
or the section of the wain. Laxia and the Graha-
féghava give nearly the same definition; and it is
added in the work last mentioned, that, when Mars,
Saturn and the Moon are in that position (which oc-
curs, in regard to the moon, when the node is eight
nacshalras distant from Punarvasu, and might:happen
in regard to the rest during another Yuga), the world 1s
involved in great calamity. Accordingly, the Puranas
contain a legendary story of Dasaratha’s dissuading
Saturn from so traversing the constellation Rohinz.

V. Mrigdsiras the fifth Nacshatra, represented by
an antelope’s head, contains three stars; the same
which constitute the fifth lunar mansion Hakdés; for
the distance of 10° S. assigned to the northern star of
this Nacshaira, will agree with no other but one of the
three in the head of Orion. The difference of longi-
tude (24° to 254°) from Cri//ica corresponds with suf-
ficient exactness; and so does the longitude of its. cir-
cle of declination (62° to 63°) from the end of Reva:
since the true longitude of a Orionis, from the princi-
pal star in Reva (¢ Piscium), is 633°. It was a mis-
take to suppose this asterism to comprise stars in the
feet of Gemini, or in the Galaxy (As. Res. vol. 2. p.

208). )

VI. A’rdra, the sixth Nacshatra, consists of a single
bright star, described as a gem, and placed in Qo S, by
one authority, but in 11° by others, and at the distance
of 43° to 4° in longitude from the last asterism. ‘This
indicates the star in the shoulder of Orion (« Orionis) ;

- DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 335

“not, as was conjectured by Sir Wirixram Jongs, the
star in the knee of Pollux (As. Res. 2. p. 298).

Tue sixth lunar mansion is named by the Arabs,
Hanah ; and comprises two stars in the feet of the se-
cond twin, according to ULucH BEG, though others
make it to be his shoulder (Elyprz, Com. p.7. and 44).
MuuamMe_ep of Jizin allots five stars to this constella-
tion; and the Kamus, among various meanings of
Hanah, says, that it is a name for five stars in the left
arm of Orion; remarking, also, that the lunar mansion
is named Tahayi, comprising three stars called Tahyat.
Either way however, the Indian and Arabian asterisms
appear in this instance irreconcileable.

VII. Tue seventh Nacshatra, entitled Punarvasu,
and represented by a house, or, according toa Sauscrit
work cited by Sir Wixtiiam Jones (As, Res. v. 2. p.
295), a bow, is stated by astronomers as including
four stars, among which the principal and eastern one
is 30ce or 32° from the fifth asterism ; but placed by all
authorities in 6° N. ‘This agrees with (2 Geminorum)
One of the two stars inthe heads of the twins, which
together constitute the seventh lunar mansion Ziraa,
according to MunamMep of Jus: and MunAamMep of
Tizin and other Arabian authorities (Hype on ULucu
REG, p. 43).

Ir appears from a rule of Sunserit grammar *, that
Punarvasu, asa name for a constellation, is properly
dual, implying, as it may he supposed, two stars. On
this ground, a conjecture may be raised, that Punurvase
originally comprised two stars, though. four are now
assigned to it. Accordingly, that number is retained in
the Sacalya sanhita.

ed

* Paniny }-1i. 63.

336 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

‘Ir may be further observed, that the seventh lunar
mansion of the Arabs is named Zirad ul ased accord ng
to Juhari and others cited by Hype (Com. on ULucH
BEG, p. 44); and that the Kamus makes this term to
be the name of eight stars in the form of a bow.

Urown the whole, the agreement of the Indian and
Arabian constellations is here apparent, notwithstand-
ing a variation in the number of the stars; and I con-
clude, that Punarvasu comprises, conformably with
Sin WiLi1amMJoneEs’s supposition (As. Res. vol. 2. p.
299), stars in the heads of the twins; viz, «, @, Gemi-
norum ; and which were indicated to Dr. Hunter by
a Hindu astronomer at Ujjayin; to which, perhaps,
§ and z may be added to complete the number of four.

VIN. Pushya, the eighth asterism, is described as an
arrow ; ard consists of three stars, the chief of which,
being alsothe middlemost, has no latitude, and is 120 or~-
13° Hakat from the seventh asterism, being placed. by
Flindu astronomers in 106° of longitude. ‘This is evi-
dently Cancri; and does not differ widely from the
eighth lunar mansion Ne/hrah, which, according
to Uxtvueu see and others (Hype’s Com. p. 45),
consists of two stars, including the nebula of Cancer,
The Indian constellation comprises two other stars, be-
sides ? Cancri, which are perhaps y and © of the same
constellation; and Sir Wiixiram JongEs’s conjecture,
that it consists of stars in the body and claws of Cancer,
was not far from the truth. ik

IX, Tye ninth asterism, ’s‘/ésha, contains five stars
figured as a potter’s wheel, and of which the principal
or eastern one is placed in 7°S. and, according to dif-
ferent tables, 107°, 108°, or 104°, E, ‘This appears
to be intended for the bright star in the southern
elaw of Cancer (a Cancri,) and cannot be re-
conciled with the lunar mansion Tarf or Tarfah,

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 337

which comprises two stars (Hypr’s Com. p. 8.) near
the lion’s eye; the northernmost being laced by Mv-
HAMMED of Jizin in 24° of N. declination (Hypr’s
Com. p. 101). The Jesuit missionaries, if rightly
quoted by Costarp (Hist. of Astr. p. 51) made s’-
léshé correspond with the bright stars in the heads of
Castor and Pollux, together with Procyon.” ‘This is
evidently erroneous. Sir WiLLiAM JoNEs’s supposi-
tion, that 4s’/éshé might answer to the face and name
of Leo, nearly concurs with the Arabian determination
of this lunar mansion, but disagrees with the place
assigned to the stars by Hindu astronomers. Baitiy
committed the same mistake, when he affirmed, that
As lésha is the Lion’s head. (Astr. Ind. p. 328).

X. Tue tenth asterism Mag*he contains, like the
last, five stars; but which are figured asa house. The
principal or southern one has no latitude, and, accora-
ing to all authorities, has 129° longitude. This i.

evidently Regulus (+ Leonis): which is exactly 129;
distant from the last star in Reva/s.

Accorpine to the Jesuits cited by Cosrarp,
Mag’ha answers to the lion’s mane and heart ; and the
tenth lunar mansion of the Arabians, Jebhak, comprises
three (some say four) stars, nearly in the longitude of
the Lion’s heart (Hype’s Utucu Bec, p. 74. and
Com. p. 46). In this instance, therefore, the Indian ~
and Arabian divisions of the Zodiack coincide: and it
is owing to an oversight, that Str WitiiAMm JonEs.
states the Nacshaira as composed of stars jn the Lion’s
leg and haunch. It appears to consist of 2 y fy andy
Leonis.

XI. Two stars, constituting the eleventh Nacshatra,
or preceding P/ialeuni, which is represented by a couch
or bedstead, are determined ve the place of the chief
star (the northernmost according to the Surya sidd's

«Vou ix. x

-338 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

hanta).in 12° N. and 144° E. or, according to Bran-
MeEcuptA, the Siréman'i and the Grahalag’hava 147° or
148° E. They are probably ¢ and @ Leonis; the same
which form the lunzr mansion Zubrak or Khertan

(H1ypx’s ULucu Bee, p. 76. and Com. p. 47).

Ir may be conjectured, that BraumMecuprTa and
Bua’scara selected the southern for the principal stars
while the Surya sida’hanta took the northern: hence
the latitude, stated by those several Hmdu authorities,
is the mean between both stars; and the difference of
longitude, compared to the preceding and subsequent
asterisims, may be exactly reconciled upon this suppa-
sition.

XII. Two other stars, constituting the twelfth Nae>
shaira, or following P’halgunt, whichis likewise figured
as a bed, are ascertained by the place of one of them
(the northernmost) in 13° N. and 155° BE. This indi-
cates 2 Leonis; the same which singly constitutes the
Arabian lunar mansion S’erfah (Hypr’s ULuecu Bee,
p. 78. and Com. p. 47.), though Munammep of
Tizin seems to hint that it consists of more than one
star (Hyper, p. 102). By an error regarding the
origin of the ecliptick on the Indian sphere, Sir WiL-
L1AM JuNnEs refers to the preceding Nacshatra, the
principal star of this asterism.

é

XIII. Hasta, the thirteenth Nacshatra, has the
name and figure of a hand; and is suitably made to
contain five stars. The principal one, towards the west,
next to the north-western star, 1s placed according to all
authorities in 11°S,and 170°. This can only belong
to the constellation Corvus; and accordingly five stars
in that constellation (« @ y¢« Corvi), have been pointed
out to. me by Hind» astronomers for this Naeshatra,

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK,. 339

. A

_ Awwa, the thirteenth lunar mansion of the Arabs, is
described as containing the same number of stars, si-
tuated under Virgo, and so disposed as to resemble the
letter Alif, They are placed by ULucu Bre in the
wing (Hype’s ULuGu Beg, p. 80),

In this instance the Indian and Arabian divisions of
the Zodiack have nothing in common but the nuinber
of stars and their agreement of longitude, It appears,
however, from a passage cited from Suri by Hypg
(Com. p. 82), that the Arabs have also considered the
constellation of Corvus ag a mansion of the mgon.)

XIV. The fourteenth Nagshatra, figured asa pear},
is a single star named Cii/ra. It 1s placed by the Suryq
sidd hanta in 2° S. and 180° E ; and by BraumMecuprta,
the. Sirémani and Graha Lag’hava, i: 12° or 2°S. and
183° E. ‘This agrees with the virgin’s spike (« Vire
- gimis ;) and Hindu astronomers have always pointed out
that star for Chitra. The same star constitutes the
fourteenth lunar mansion of the Arabs, named from it
Simac ul adzil. Le Genrit’s conjecture *, that the
fourteenth nacshaira comprises the two stars dand ¢ Vir-
ginis was entirely erroneaus, And Mons. Bariry wag
equally incorrect in placing 9 Virginis jn the middle of
this asterism (Astr. Ind, p. 227).

KV. AwnorTuer single star constitutes the fifteenth
Nacshatra. Swati, represented by a coral bead. The
Surya siddhanta, BrauMeEcuera, the Siromani and
Graha lag’ hava, concur in placing it in 37° N, They
differ one degree in the longitude of its circle of decli-
nation; three of these authorities making it 1992, and
the other 198°, }

“Fue only conspicuous star, nearly in the situation.
thus assioned to Swati, ‘and the Indian astronomers

er

* Barrpy Aat, lads p, 227:
Z 2,

a ee

x:

340 on THE INDIAN, &te -

/

would hardly travel so far from the Zodiack to seek ah
obscure star;) is Arcturus, 33° N. of the ecliptick in
the circle of declination, and 198° J. from the princi-
pal star of Révati. 1am therefore disposed to believe,
that Swati has been rightly indicated to me by a native
astronomer who pointed out Arcturus for this Nacshatra.
The longitude, stated by Mun’ts’'wara (viz. 12° less
than Chitra), indicates the same star: but, if greater’
reliance be placed on his latitudes, the star intended may
be « Boolis. At all events, Mons. Baritny mistook,
when he asserted, on the authority of Lz Gentrr, that
the fifteenth Nacshatra is marked by & Virginis; and
that this star is situated at the beginning of the Nac-
shatra (Ast. Ind. p. 139 and 227). . .!

‘Tue Indian asterism totally disagrees with the lunar
mansion Gha/r, consisting of three stars in the Virgin’s .
foot, according to Unucu Bee (Hype, p. 82. and
Com. p. 50); butin, or near, the balance, according
to others (ibid).

XVI. Visac’ha, the sixteenth Nacshatra, consists of
four stars described as a festoon. Authorities differ
little as to the situation of the principal and northern-.
most star: placing it in }°, 1° 20%, or 1° 30’ S. and in.,
2y°, 212° 5’ or 213° EK. . The latitude seems to indi- .
cate the bright star in the southern scale (# Libra),
though the longitude disagree ; for this. suggests a re-
note star (possibly x Librae). I apprehend the first to
be nearest the truth; and hence conclude the four stars
to be a vs Libra and y Scorpil.

Tre sixteenth lunar mansion named Zubanah or
Zubaniveh, 1s according to MunamMep of Tjzin-
(Hiypr, Com. .04), the bright star in the northern
scale (@ Libre), which Sir Wriiram Jones supposed
to be the fifteenth Nacshatra. we

Farner Sovcrer, by whom Corona Borealis is

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. ‘341

stated for the asterism /isacha, is censured by Sir
W. Jones, under an impression, that all the Nacsha-
tras must be sought within the Zodiack. The informa-
tion, received by Father Soucixt, does appear to have
been erroneous; but the same mistake was committed
by a native astronomer. who showed to me the same
constellation for Visichéd; and the Nacshatras are
certainly not restricted to the neighbourhood of the
ecliptick.

XVII. Four stars, (or, according to a differen,
reading, three,) described as a row of oblations, that
is, in aright line, constitute the seventeenth Nacshatra
named Anurdd hd. Here also, authorities differ little
as to the situation of the chief and middlemost star +
which is placed in 3°, or 2°, or 1°45’ S. and in 224° or
224° 5’ E. This must intend the star near the head of
the scorpion (# Scorpionis) ; and the asterism probably
comprises ¢ ? = and p Scorpionis.

Tue seventeenth lunar mansion of the Arabs called
Ichi or Iclikejebhah, contains four (some say three, and
others six*,) stars lying in a straight line. Those,
assigned by Utueu Bec (Hype, p. $7.) for this
mansion, are @ ¢v + Scorpionis.

Here the Indian and Arabian divisions appear to
concur exactly ; and Sir W. Jones (As. Res. 2. p. 200),
as well as the Missionaries cited by Cosrarp (Uist.
Astr. p. 51), have apparently understood the sane
stars; though the latter extend the Nacsha/ra to the
constellation Serpentarius.

XVII. Spés'hf ha, the eighteenth Nucshatra, com-
prises three stars figured as a ring. In regard to this,

~—

* Hyne’s Com, p. 51. -
Zé

342 ON THE INDIAN, &ce

also, authorities are nearly agreed in the position of the
principal and. middlemost star, placed in 4°, 349, or .
3° S. and in 229°, 229° 5’, or 230° E.. This position
clearly indicates Antares or the Scorpion’s heart (a Scor-
pionis) ; ; which is also the eighteenth Junar mansion
named Kalb or Kalbulckrab. The three stars of the
Indian asterism may be « ¢ & Scorpiohiss

XIX. Tue nineteenth asterism, Mila, represented |
by a Lion's tail, contains eleven stars, of which the
characteristick one, the easternmost, is placed in Q°,

2° or 8° S. and in 241° or 242° B,. Although the
latitude of » Scorpionis be five degrees too great, there
seers litile doubt, that either that, or the star east of
it marked », must be intended; and this determination
agrees with the 18th lunar mansion of the Arabs called
Shaulah, consisting of two stars near the scorpion’s
sting. The Hindu asterism probably includes all the
stars placed by us in the Scorpion’s tail, viz.e¢ O05
x Ay and » Scorpionis.

XX. Tue twentieth Nucshatra, entitled yiveceding
A' shad ha, figured as an elephant’s tooth, or as a couch,
cossists of two stars, of which the most northern one 1s
placed 1 in 53° 53° or 5°S. and 254° or 255° E. This
suits with d Sagittaril, which is also one of the stars of
the twentieth lunar mansion. called dais oT consists
of four, or, according to some authorities, of eight;
stars. ‘The Indian asterism seemingly comprises ¢ & « Sa-
gittaril. |

XXI. ‘Two stars constitute the twenty-first asterism,
named the subsequent ’shad’ha, which is represented
by a couch or by an elephant’s tooth. ‘The principal
star, which also is the most northerly one, is placed in
5° S. and 260°, or 261° H. ‘This agrees with a star in
the body of Sagittarius (x Sagittarm), and the other star
is perhaps the one marked ¢, Ys

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 343

_ Tue twenty-first lunar mansion of the Arabians,
named Baldah, comprises six stars, two of which are.
placed by Munammep of Vizin in Declination 21° &
16°. One of these must be a star in the head of Sagit-
tarius. Some authors, on the contrary, describe the
lunar mansion as destitute of stars (Hyper, Com. on
Unueu Bee, p. 9.) At all events, the Hindu and
Arabian divisions appear, in this instance, to be but,
imperfectly reconcileable.

“XXII. Tureestars, figured as a triangle, or as the.
nut of the floating Trapa, form the twenty-second aster-.
ism, named db£yit ; which, in the modern Indian astro-
nomy, does not occupy an equal portion of the echip-
tick with the other Nicshkatras, but is carved out of the
contiguous divisions. Its place (meaning that of its_
brightest star) is very remote from the Zodiack; being
in 60° or 62° N. ‘The longitude of its circle of decli-
nation, according to different authorities, is 265°, 206*
AO’, or 268°. Probably the bright star in the Lyre is
meant. It was shown to Dr. Hunter, at Ujjayini tor
the chief star in 4b/7i¢ ; and the same was pointed out
to me, forthe asterism, by a Hindu astronomer at this
place.

Tue Arabian lunar mansion Zdédih, consists of two
stars (some reckon four *) in the horns of Capricorn,
totally disagreeing with the Indian Nacshatra.

XXIM. S’ravan'’d, the twenty-third Nacshatra, re~
presented by three footsteps, contains three stars, of’
which one, the middlemost, is by all authorities placed
in 30° N. but they differ as to its longitude ; the Surya
sidd’ hanta placing it in 280°; BranmxEcuprta and the
Sirémani, in 278%; and the Grahalag'hava in 2750

—ee

——

* Uxueu Bec, p. 94. and Hxpr’s Com, 54.
ZA

344 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

The assigned latitude indicates the bright star in the
eagle, whence the three may ue inferred to be « p and
y Aguile.

Tue twenty-third mansion of the moon, called by
the Arabs Ba/é. consists of two stars in the left hand
of Aquarius. Consequently the Arabian and Hindu
divisions are here at variance.

XXIV. Dhanisi’ Phd, the twenty-fourth asterism, is
represented bya drum ortabor. It comprises four stars,
one of which (the westernmost) is placed in 360 N.
and, according to the Surya sidd’ hanta, BRAHMEGUPTA
and the Sirémai’1, in 290° E. though the Grahalig’ hava
state 286° only. This longitude of the circle of decli-
nation, and the distance of the star on it ftom the eclip-
tick, indicate the Dolphin; and the four stars probab!
are « Gy and? Delphini. ‘The same constellation is °
mentioned by the Jesuit missionaries as corresponding
to Dhanish'?ha (Cosrarp, p. 51): and there can be
little doubt, that’ the ascertainment is correct. The
longitude, stated by Mun’rs’wara, (viz. 294° 12’)
supports the conclusion, though his latitude (26° 25°) be
too small. To determine accurately the position of this-
Nacshatra is important, as the solstitial colure, accord-
ing to the ancient astronomers, passed through the ex~
tremity of it, and through the middle of As‘léshd. _

Tue twenty-fourth mansion, called by the Aiea
Saud, comprises two stars in Aquarius (@ and & Aquarii)
totally disagreeing with the Hindu division.

— XXV. Satabhishd, the twenty-fifth Nacshatra, isa

cluster of a hundred stars figured by acircle. The
principal! one, or brightest, has no latitude ; or only a
third, or at the utmost half, a degree of south latitude ;
and all the tables concur in placing it in long. 320°,

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 345

This will suit best with 4 Aquarii., These hundred
stars may be sought in the stream from the Jar, where
Sir WiriiaAm Jones placesthe Nacshatra ; and in the
night leg of Aquarius. .

Akhbyah, the twenty-fifth lunar mansion, is stated
to consist of three stars only, which seem to be the
three in the wrist of the right hand of Aquarius (Hypp’s
Com. p.55). However, it appears from Unuen Bre’s
tables, as well as from MunammMepn of Tizin’s, that
four stars are assigned to this mansion (Hype, p. 99.
and Com. p. 95.) :

Tue Hindu and Arabian asterisms differ, here less
widely, than in the instances lately noticed: and a
passage, cited by Hype from Firozagpani, even in-
timates the circular figure of the constellation (Com.

p. 10).

XXVI. Tue twenty-sixth of the Indian asterisms,:
called the preceding Bhadrapada, consists of two stars
represented. by a couch or bed, or else by a double
_ headed figure ; one of which is placed by Hindu astro-
_ nomers in 24o N. and 325° or 326° E. The only con-
spicuous star, nearly in that situation, is the bright
star in Pegasus (o Pegasi) ; andthe other may be the
nearest consideration (¢ Pegasi). I should have consi-
dered @ Pegasi to be the second star of this Naeshatra,
were not its yéga or chief star expressly said to be the
most northerly. Adukaddim, the 26th Junar mansion,
. consists of the two brightest stars in Pegasus (# and 6 *);
and thus the two divisions of the Zodiack nearly con-
cur, ‘

XXVIT. Two other stars constitute the 27th
Junar mansion named the subsequent Bhadrapada.
They are figured as a twin, or person with a dou-

i i, i ne ere,

* Hypr's Utecn Bec, p. 53, and Com. p. 34,
P Pp

RE) ON THE INDIAN, &c.

ble face, or else as a couch. ‘Lhe position of one of
them (the most northerly) is stated in 260 or 27° N.
and 337° E. I suppose the bright star in the head of
Andromeda to be meant; and the otber star to be the
one in the extremity of the wing of Pegasus (y Pegasi).
This agrees exactly with the 27th lunar mansion of the
Arabians, called Muakkher. For Utuen Bae assigns
those stars to it (Hype, p. 53. Com. p. 34. and 35.)

* XXVIN. Tue last of the twenty-eight asterisms is
named Revati, and comprises thirty-two stars figured as
atabor. All authorities agree, that the principal star,
which should be the southernmost, has no latitude,
and two of them assert no longitude; but some make
it ten minutes short of the origin of the ecliptick, viz.
359° 50’... This clearly marks the star on the ecliptick
in the string of the fishes (¢ Piscium) ; and the ascer-
tainment of it is important in regard to the adjustment

of the Hindu sphere.

Tue Arabick name of the 28th mansion, Risha, sig~’
nifying a cord, seems to indicate a star nearly in the
same position. But the constellation, as described by
Junarr cited by Gotrus, consists of a multitude of
stars in the shape of a fish, and termed Be/nw’/hut; in
the navel of which is the lunar mansion : and Munam-.
MED of Tizin, with some others, also makes this lunar
mansion to be the same with Be/nw'lhut, which appears,
however, to be the bright star in the girdle of Andro~
meda (@ Andromede}; though others describe it as
the northern fish, extending, however, to the horns
of the ram (Hyper’s Com. p. 10, 35, and 96). The
lunar mansion and Indian asterism are, therefore, not
reconcileable in this last instance.

Tue result of the comparison shows, I hope satis-
factorily, that the Todian asterisms,; which mark the
divisions of the ecliptick, generally consist of nearly
the same stars, which constitute the lunar mansions of

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 347

the Arabians: but, in a few instances, they essentially
differ. ‘he Hindus have likewise adopted the division
of the Ecliptick and Zodiack into twelve signs or con-
stellations, agreeing in figure and designation with
those of the Greeks; and differing merely in the place
of the constellations, which are carried on the Indian .
sphere a few degrees further west than on the Grecian,
That the Hindus took the hint of this mode of dividing
the ecliptick from the Greeks, is not perhaps altogether
improbable : but, if such be the origin of it, they have
‘not implicitly received the arrangement suggested to
them, but have reconciled and adapted it to their own
ancient distribution of the ecliptick into twenty-seven
parts *.

In like manner, they may have either received or
given the hint of an armillary sphere as an instrument
for astronomical observation: but certainly they have
not copied the instrument which was described by
Protemy ; forthe construction differs considerably.

- In the Arabick Epitome of the Almagest entitled
_ Tahrirw Imejestit, the armillary sphere (Zat ul halk)
is thus described. ‘* Two equal circles are placed. at
tight angles; the one representing the ecliptick, the
other the solstitial colure. ‘Two pins pass through the
poles of the ecliptick ; and two other pins are placed on
the poles of the equator. On the two first pins, are
suspended a couple of circles, moving the one within,

nee ee ~~

* According to the longitude of the three brightest stars of Aries,
as stated by Protemy, viz. 10° 40’, 7° 40’ and 6° 40’, (I quote
from an Arabick epitome of the Almagest); the origin of the
ecliptick, in the Greek book which is most likely to have become
known in India, is 6° 20’ from the star which the Hindus have se«
lected to mark the commencement of the ecliptick.

+ By the celebrated Nasrruppin Tus1; from the Arabick yer-

sion of I’ aak Bin Hunen, which was revised by Tuasir.

348 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

the other without, the first mentioned circles, and
representing two secondaries of the ecliptick. On the
two other pins acircle is placed, which encompasses the
whole instrument, and within which the different circles
turn: it represents the meridian, Within the inner
secondary of the ecliptick a circle is fitted to it, in the
same plane, and turning in it. This is adapted to
measure latitudes. ‘To this internal circle, two aper-
tures, or sights, opposite to each other, and without its
plane, are adapted, like the sights of an instrument for
altitudes. The armillary sphere is complete when con~
sisting of these six circles. The ecliptick and seconda-.
ries are to be graduated as minutely as may be practica-~

le. Itis best te place both secondaries, as by some
directed, within the ecliptick, (instead of placing one
ef them without it,) that the complete revolution of
the outer secondary may not be obstructed by the pins
at the poles of the equator. The Meridian, likewise,
should be doubled, or made to consist of two circles;
the external one graduated, and the internal onesmoving
within it. Thus the pole may be adjusted at its proper
elevation above the horizon of any place. , The instru-
ment so constructed consists of seyen circles.

‘* Tr is remarked, that when the circle, representing
the meridian, is placed in the plane of the true meridian,
so that it cuts the plane of the horizon at right angles,
and one of the poles of the equator is elevated above
the horizon conformably with the latitude of the place ;
then the motions of all the circles rqund the poles re-
present the motions of the universe. ‘

“ Arter rectifying the meridian, if it be wished to
observe the sun and moon together, the outer secondary
of the ecliptick must be made to intersect the ecliptick
at the sun’s place for that time: and the solstitial
colure must be moved until the place of intersection be
opposite tothe sun. Both circles are thus adjusted
to their true places; or if any other object, but the

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 349

-san, be observed, the colure is turned, until the object
be seen in its proper place, on that secondary referred
to the ecliptick ; the circle representing the ecliptick,

being at the same time in the plane of the true ecliptick
and in its proper situation. Afterwards, the inner se-
condary is turned towards the moon (or to any star
intended to be observed), and the smaller circle within
it, bearing the two sights, is turned, until the moon
{or to any star intended to be observed), and the smaller
circle within it, bearing the two sights, is turned, until
the moon be seen in the line of the apertures. The
antersection of the secondary circle and ecliptick is the
place of the moon in longitude; and the arc of the’
secondary, between the aperture and the ecliptick, is
the latitude of the moon on either side (North or
South).”

THE same instrument, as described by Monrucra
from the text of Proremy (lI. 3. c. 2m", consists of
six circles: first, a large circle representing the meri-
dian ; next, four circles united together, representing
the equator, ecliptick and two colures, and turning”
within the first circle on the poles of the equator; lastly,
a circle turning on the poles of the ecliptick, furnished
with sights and nearly touching, on its concave side,
the circumference of the ecliptick.

Tue armillary sphere, described by the Arabian
epitomiser, differs, therefore, from Pronumy’s, in omit-
ming the equator and equinoctial colure, and adding an
inner secondary of the ecliptick, which, as well as the

meridian, is doubled.

Accorpine to Latanps, the astrolabe of Pro-
LEMY, from which ‘Yycuo Branr derived -his-equa-
torial armillary, consisted only of four circles: two
placed at right angles to represent the ecliptick and

a en rr 2

* Hist. des Matbem. 1. p. 301.

a onckeeiieeel

350 ON THE INDIAN, &c..

solstitial colure; a third turning on the poles ofthe
ecliptick and serving to mark longitudes ; and a fourth,
within the other three, furnished with sights to observe
celestial objects and measure their latitudes and Jongi-
tudes *.

Wueruer the ancient Greeks had any more com-
plicated instrument formed on similar principles, and
applicable to astronomical observations, is perhaps un-
certain. We have no detailed description of the instru-
ment, which ArcHIMEDEs is said to have devised to
represent the phenomena and motions of the heavenly
bodies; nor any sufficient hint of its coustruction + ;.
nor does CrcgKo’s account of the sphere exhibited by
Postponius ¢ suggest a distinct notion of its structure

Amone the Arabs, no addition is at present known
to have been made to the Armillary sphere, between the
period when the Almagest was translated §, and the
time of ALuAzEN, who wrote a treatise of optics, in

« Larawpe Astron. J. 13. (§ 2279).

+ If Claudian's epigram an the subject of it was fopnded upon
any authority, the instrument must haye been a sort of orrery, en«
closed in glass. _*

Vide Claud. epig. Cicero. Tusc. Ques. J. ] Nat. Deo. 2. 35.

t Cic. Nat. Deo. 2. 34.

§ Jn the H¢jira year 212, or A. D. 827, by ALHAZEN BEN YusrR-
with the aid of Sercyus (Montructa, 2. p. 304); or rather by
JsHax BEN Honen, whose death is placed about the Hejira year 260
(D'Hersevor, p. 45§). Aceordipg to the Cashfuleun, Isnax’s -
version was epitomised by Hazar pen Yussr, by Tuapir pen .
Kangra, and by Nasrruppin Tusi. Other versions, however,
are mentioned: particylarly, one by HasAx, said to haye been cor-
rected first by Hunen pen Ispag, and afterwards by THasyT; ano-
ther by ‘Tnaxir himself; and a third by Muni sex yarnyan, A
different acccunt is likewise given of the earliest translation of the
Almagest, which is ascribed to Any His4n and Satman, who are
gaid to baye completed it, after the failure of othex learned men,
who had previously artempied the translation, Mention is alee

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK, 351

‘which a more complicated instrument, than that of
Proxemy, is described. ALHAzen’s armillary sphere
is stated to have been the prototype of T'ycuo
Brane’s *; but neither the original treatise, nor the
Latin translation of it, are here procurable; and I am
therefore unable to ascertain whether the sphere, men-
tioned by the Arabian author, resembled that described
by Indian astronomers. At all events, he is more mo-
dern +, than the oldest of the Hindu writers whom I
shall proceed to quote ¢.

‘

Tue construction of the Armillary sphere is briefly
‘and rather obscurely taught in the Surya sidd’hanta’
The following is a literal translation.

‘“« Ler the astronomer frame the surprising structure
of the terrestrial and celestial spheres.

“ Havine caused a wooden globe to be made, [of
such size] as he pleases, to represent the earth; with
a staff for the axis, passing through the center, and

er a ee

rg an ent Sere ce ee de

made of a version by Ispaauim BEN SALAT, revised by Husen,
But none of these transJations are anterior to the gth century of the
Christian era.
-® Adhibuit (Tycho) Armillare quoddam instrumentum, quod
tamen compyri ego positum, et adhibitum olim fuisse ante Tycho-
nem ab Alhazeno, lib. 7. cpt. C. 1. prop. 15 et a Vitell. lib. 10,
propos. 49. cujus instrumenu astronomice col!ocatt, ope, atqhe usu,
(vide instrumentum multiplex armiilare apud Tycho, in Mechanicis
Asronomim) eandem elevationem falsam 9 scrupulorum inyenit,
quam per alia, duo diversa instrumenta, compererat.
Bestini Apiaria,
1 He wrote his treatise on opticks and other works about the
year 1190. Biog. Dict...
t Buascara flourished in the middle of the twelfth century;
being born, as he himself inf-rms us, in the Seca year 1063, an
swering to A.D. 1114. But the Sura Sid@hanta is more ancicat.

352 ON THEINDIAN, &c.

exceeding the globe at both ends; let him place the
supporting hoops *, as also the equinoctial cirele.

‘Ture circles must be prepared, (divided for
signs and degrees,) the radius of which must agree
with the respective diurnal circles, in proportion to the
equinoctial : the three circles should be placed for the
Ram and following signs, respectively, at the proper
declination in degrees, N. or S.; the same answer con-
trariwise for the Crab and other signs. In like manner,
three circles are placed in the southern hemisphere,
for the Balance and the rest, and contrariwise for Ca»
pricorn and the remaining signs. Circles are similarly
placed on both hoops for the asterisms in both hemi-
spheres, as also for 4b/ijit; and for the seven Lishijs,
sAgastya, Brahme and other stars.

‘© I~ the middle of all these circles is placed the
-equinoctial. At the intersection of that and the sup-
‘ porting hoops, and distant from each other half the
signs, the two equinoxes should be determined ; and:
the two solstices, at the degrees of obliquity from the
equinoctial; and the places of the Ram and the rest,
in the order of the signs, should be adjusted by the
strings of the curve. Another circle, thus passing
from equinox to equinox, is named the ecliptick ;
and by this path, the sun, illuminating worlds, for ever
travels. ‘The moon and the other planets are seen devi-
ating from their nodes in the ecliptick, to the extent of
their respective greatest latitudes [ within the Zodiack].”

Tux author proceeds to notice the relation of the
ereat circles before mentioned to the horizon; and ob-
serves, that, whatever place be assumed for the apex
of the sphere, the middle of the heavens for that.

ee ee

ee a a

¢ They are the Colures,

_DIVISIons OF THE ZODTACK. $53
placéiis its horizon. “He concludes by showing, ‘that the
instrument may be made torevolve with regularity; by
means of a current water ; and hints, that the appear-
ance: of spontaneous motion may be given, by a con-
cealed mechanism; for which: quicksilver i is to be em:
ployed.» The manner of using this instrument for
astronomical igs a aoe ie been already explained
(Pr8A6)o0

:

More alle instructions for framing an armillary
sphere are delivered in the Sidd”hania s‘iréman'i.. The
passage is too long for insertion in this place; and I
reserve it for a separate article, on account of the ex-
planations. which it requires, and because it leads ta
the considerations of other topicks *, which cannot be
sufficiently discussed in the present essay. A brief ab-
stract of BHa‘’scara’s description may here suffice.
In the center he places a small globe to represent the
earth encompassed with circles for the orbits of the
panel arranged like the curved lines in a spider's
web. “On an axis passing thréugh the poles of the
earth, and ‘prolonged on both sides, a sphere, or as-
semblage of circles, issuspended, by means of rings or
tubes adapted to the axis, so that the sphere may move
freely on it. This-assemblage of circles comprises a
horizon and equator adjusted for the place, with a.
prime vertical meridian, and two intermediate verticals
(intersecting the horizon at the N. E. and S. W. and
N. W. and S.E points) ; asalso the equinoctial colure.

eae ee

* Among others, that of the precession of’ the equinoxes ; re-
specting which different opinions are stated by Buascara. ' It ap-
pears from what is said by him, that the notion of a libration of
the equinoxes has not universally prevailed among Higdu astrono-
mers. The correcter opinion of a revolution of «the equinoctial
points was advanced by some authors, but has not obtained the
general suffrage of Hindu writers on astronomy.

Voi. IX. 2A

s S. Rousseau, Printer, Wood Street, Spa Fields.

354 _.. ON THE INDIAN, &c.., .

Another circle is suspended within this:sphese on the

poles of the horizon, apparently intended to measure
the altitude and, amplitude.of an object... .°

AnorHeER> sphere or assemblage of: circles’ is in like
manner suspended on the pole of the equator. It con-

sists of .both colures, and the :equinoctial, with the
ecliptick adjusted to it ; and six circles for the plane-
tary orbits adjusted to the ecliptick ; as also six diurnal
circles parallel to the equinoctial, and passing through
the extremities of the several signs.

Tis, though-not.a complete description of Bua’ S-
CARA’S armillary, sphere, will | convey a sufficient : notion
of the instrument for the purpose of the present compa- °
rison ; and will justify the remark, that its constructi ion
differs greatly from that of the instrument Peas by
Protemy.

- In the. description ois the ascniltary mn ni cited, aia
the Siirya sidd’hénta, mention is made of several stars
not included i in the asterisms which mark. the divisions
of the ecliptick. ‘The. following table exhibits the po-
sitions of those, and of the few other stars which have.
been particularly noticed by Hinds astronomers. _

Brahme sidd?’ hanta Grahka 8:
and Stromani. _ Ldg*hava. |

Lat. |Long.| Lat. | Long.
fe ef

Agastya,, - 77° 8.187% 16S. , 180°

TS

Co eee

Lubahaca,

i? ° die
or the Bae SAIS S.|86° = |4o S. 81

Agni -- - 8° Ne 153°

Brahmehridaya 31° N.146° ‘

brajdpatt . ¢ ° °

or Brahma 39° N.i6t

Apdmvatsa 3° N. 41839 . ‘
Apas i

t The S calya sanhité and Tatwa veveca agree with the Sirya-
sidd'hénta as to the positions of the first four stars. They omit the
other three.

4m J 7
/

nd

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 355

- | According’ to the
The seven Rishis - + - | 2

Sacalya Sanhita,

Lat.
Cratu 4 ? ‘ ; . 55° N,
PULAHA ; ’ é 4 ; 50° N.
PuULASTYA . 4 ; * A 50° N.
ATRI ‘ Wee : ° 56° N.
ANGIRAS . , ; M é 57° .N.
VASISHT’HA ; f : ; 60° N.

Maricur. . . : " 60° N.

Here Agastya is evidently Canopus; as Luba’ hace
is Sirius. Brahmeridaya seems to be Capella, which
was shown, under that Indian name, to Dr. Hunter
at Ujjayini. Agni may be the bright star in the northern
horn of the-bull (@ Tauri): Prajdpati is perhaps the
star on the head of the waggoner (2 Auriga). The
distances of the three last mentioned stars from the
ecliptick do not exactly agree with the places stated ;
but no conspicuous stars are found nearer to the as-
signed positions: and it may be remarked, that they
are all nearly in the longitude of the Nacshatra Mriga-
s‘iras corresponding to the head of Orion ; and that the
latitude, assigned to them by Hindu astronomers, is as
much too small, as that of Mrigas‘iras is too great.

Tue star, mentioned in the Sirya sidd’hanta under
the name of 4’pas or water, is doubtless 3 Virginis ;
and Apamvatse comprises the nebulous stars in the same
constellation, marked b }. 2. 3. 123

AsTRONOMERS gives rules for computing the heliacal

rising and setting of the star Agastya, on account of

* certain religious ceremonies to be performed when that

“Star appears. Vard’HA Minira says, “ Agastya is
2A2

356 _ ON THE INDIAN, &c..,

visible at Ujjayini, when the sun is 7° short of the sign
Virgo.” Buthe afterwards adds, that ‘the Ps ecomes
visible, when: the sun reaches Hasta, and. disappears
when the sun arrives at Rohini.’ His commentator re-
marks, that the author has here followed earlier writers ;
and quotes Para’sara-saying, ‘When the sun is in
. Hastay the: star rises; and it sets when the suns in
Rohini*.”.. Buatréreaua cites from the five, Sid-
dD hint igsa rule of computation, analogous to that, Rach
will be forthwith quoted from the Bhéswatt; and re-
marks, that three periods of - 4gastya’s heliacal rising
are observed, viz. 8th and 15th of 4s’wina and sth of
Cirtica. ae ath,
.. Tue, Bhaswaié directs, the <day of Agastya’s rising
for any particular latitude to be fouud by the following
tule.. ‘The length, of the shadow of a gnomon -} at
a particular. latitude, on the day of the equinox, is mul-
tiplied by 25; and to the product goo are added ; the
sum, divided by 225, gives. in signs and degrees.the
place of the sun, on the day, when Agastya rises or
appears in the south, at the close of night.’ . The,com-
mentator adds, that ‘the day of the stars setting may
- be computed by deducting. the sum found. "ashabove,
from 1350 ; the difference reduced to signs and degrees,
is the place of the sun}, on the day, when Agastya sets
in the-southwest.’ According, to these rules, Agastya
in latitude 26° 34’, rises when, the sun is in AS 20° and
sets when the sun is in 1° 10%
wean
The Grahalé Msn teaches another method | of
calculation. The length of the shadow of ithe
gnomon is multiplied, by 8, and the product is

Ai nat eatgmne ane 7

f In duodecimaF parts...

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 357

added to 98 for the sun’s place in degrees, on the day
when 4gastya rises; or is deducted from 78, to find
the sun’s place when that star sets. “By this rule, the
star should rise, in latitude 260 34’, when the sun is at
the 26th degree of the lion, and should set when the
sun ‘quits the ram. Accordingly, the Bhavishya and
the Brahmevaivarta Purénas ordain oblations for Agas#-
ya three days before the sun reaches the Zodiacal sign
Virgo; though the inhabitants of the province of Geura,
as observed in the last mentioned Purana, perform this
ceremony three days earlier. a |
In regard to the passages above quoted, it may be
remarked, that the rule, stated in the Bhéswatz, im-
- plies the distance of three signs, from the beginning of
Aries, to Agastya, and supposes the star to become vi-
sible when distant one sign from the sun. But the
tule, deliveredin the Grahalag hava, places the star at
the distance of 88° from the beginning of Mésha, and
supposes it visible in the right sphere, when 10° distant
from the sun. According to the quotation from Pa-
RA’SARA, the right ascension of the star must have
been, in his time, not less than 100° reckoned from
the beginning of Mésha; and the star, rising cosmi-
cally, became visible in the oblique sphere, at the dis-
tance of 60° from the sun; and disappeared, setting
achronically, when within that distance. Making al-
lowance therefore for the star’s proper motion, and
‘change of declination and right ascension, it remains
probable, that Para’sara’s rule was framed for the
north of India, at a period when the solstitial points
were, as stated by that author, in the middle of Aslesha
and beginning of Dhanishtha*.

I uAveE purposely reserved for separate consideration
the seven Rishis, who give name to seven stars in Ursa

—

" # As. Regpyol, 2. ps 393.

2A

358 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

major ; not only because their positions are not stated
by Braumecurta, Bua’scara, and the Stryasid-
d’hanta, but also’ because the authors, who give their
positions, ascribe to them a particular motion, or va~
riation of longitude, different from other stars, and
apparently unconnected with the precession of the equi-
noxes. »

Vara’Ha Mrutra hasa chapter in the Varéhisanhitd
expressly on the subject of this supposed motion of the
Rishis.. He begins by announcing the intention of
stating their revolution conformably with the doctrine
of VripD’HA Gare, and proceeds as follows: ‘‘ When
king Yup’uist’Hrra ruled the earth, the Munis were
in Maghd, and the period of the era of that king is
2526 years. They remain for a hundred years in each
asterism,. being connected with that particular Nacsha-
tra, to which, when it rises in the east, the line of
their rising is directed *.”

THE commentator, Buarrérraa, supports the
text of his author by quotations from Vripp’HA GARGA
and Ca’syapa., ‘¢ At the junction of the Cali and
Dwépar ages, says Ganca, “the virtuous sages, who
delight in protecting the people, s stood at the asterism,
over which the Pitris preside.” That is at Maghd.
one mighty sages,” says Ca’s'yApA, ‘abide during

+ ayaa: Tale F a ae: A cite
ea Ba OU
Manaus gAgin Il aTOITAl|
ATASGAl sMTIIGACUAAaA Ml:

According toa different reading noticed by the commentator, the
concluding hemistich signifies ‘* they constantly rise in the north-
east; together with Arunp’HATi,’’

AMT ALANA RAAT AER:

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 859.
a hundred years in each asterism, attended by the vir-

20

tuous ARUNDHATI.

‘Tue author next states the relative situation of the
seven Rishis, with ARUND’HATi near her husband
Vasisut’HA: and the remainder of the Chapter is
devoted to astrology.

THE revolution of the seven Rishis, and its periods,
. . , . - >
are noticedin Purdnas, ‘The following passage is from
‘the Sri Bhigavata *. ,

“From your birth (Partcsnrr. is addressed by
Su’ca) to the inauguration of Nanpa, 1115 years
will elapse.

** Ow the seven Aishis, two are first perceived, rising
in the sky; and the asterism, which is observed to be
at night even with the middle of those stars, is that,
with which the fishis are united, and they remain so
during a hundred years of men. In your time, and at
this moment, they are situated in Magha.

“<Wuen the splendor of Visunu, named Crisuna,
departed for heaven, then did the Ca/i age, during
which men delight in sin, invade the world. So long
as he continued to touch the earth with his holy feet ;
so long the Ca/: age was unable to subdue the world.

“* WueEwn the seven Rishis were in Maghd, the Cal
age comprising 1200 [divine] years-+ began; and
when, from Maghd, they shall reach Purvishid ha,
then will this Ce/ age attain its growth under NANDA
and his successors.”

eS ——— 0 SS a gee

* Book 12. C. 2.
T 432000 common years.
2ZAA

). ) ON PHE IN DEAN, & Coy 5

‘Tue, commentator Sri’p’HaRA, Swa/mt remarks,
that the constellation, consisting of .seven Stars, is in,
the form of a wheeled carriage. Marr’ cHI, he observes,
is at the extremity ; and next. to him, VAsisHT’HA) in
the arched part of the yoke ;,and, beyond. him ANGIRAs:
next to whom are four stars in a quadrangle; Ariat
the northeast corner: south of him PunasryA; next,
to whom is Puntaua; and Craru is north of the last.
Such being their relative position, the two stars, which
rise first, are Puraua and Craru;. and whichever
asterism, is in a line south from the middle of those
stars, is that with which the seven Rishis are united ;
and they so remain for 100 ath sich

HOY) Wow he
969 OR, { ‘we
A SIMILAR passage is found in he ae Purdnd®y
and a similar exposition of it is given by the commenta-
tor Rarnacarsua: but the period, there stated to
elapse between the birth of Parrcswit and. the inau-

guration of Nanna, is 1015 ci ere
id 1) bby ?
‘Tue Matsya Puréna containsa passage to pi like
effect ; but allows 1050. years from the birth of Pa-
RICSHIT to the inauguration of Maua’papMa : and
the seven Risks are stated as being in a line with the
constellation sacred to fire (that is Critticd), nae af are
later, in the time of the Andhra kings. | |
: ‘ :
In the Brahme siddhdnta of Sa’carya, ea
minated from its reputed author Sdcalya sanhita, the
supposed motion of the seven Réshis is thus no-
ticed -{: ** At the commencemeat of the yuga, Crary
was near the star sacred to Visnnu (Sravand), at
the beginning of the asterism. ‘Three degrees east of
him, was Purana; and Punastya, atten degrees

_

ee

4 tne

Part 4. Ch. 23: v.32) kc:
% Prasna 2. ch. 2,

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 361

from this; Arri followed at three degrees from the
last; and Anesras, at cight degrees from him; next
came VAs’isur’HA, at the distance of seven degrees;
and lastly Maricur at ten. ‘Their motion is eight
liptas (minutes) in a year. Their distances from the
ecliptick, north, were respectively 55°, 50°, 50°, 56°,
57°, GO°, and 60°. For, moying in the north into dif
ferent positions, the sages employ 2700 years in revolv-
ing through the assemblage of asterisms: and hence

their positions may be easily known at any particular
time.”

“Latta, cited by Munfs’wara in his gloss on the
Sirémanj, says “If the number of years of the Ca// age,
less fourteen, be divided by 100, the quotient, as the
wise declare, shows the asterisms traversed by Manicur

and other celestial sages, beginning from the asterism
of Viranchi (BRAHMA).”

Here Lara is generally understood to mean Réhini,
which is sacred to Prajapatz (or Brahma). But Mv-
Nis’wARA has remarked, in another place, that Lanua
may intend Abhijit which is sacred to Vid’ hi or Brahma ;
and consequently may mean S‘ravan'd, of which Abhijit
forms a part : and thus Lanza and Sa’catya may be
reconciled.

Most of the commentators on the Surya sidd’ hinta
and Sirémani are silent on the subject of the seven
Rishis. Bat Nrisinua, in his Virtica to the Visané
Bhéshya or gloss on the Siréman's, quotes and expounds
the Sécalya Sanhité, and rejects Vara’Ha’s rule of
computation, as disagreeing with Purdn’as. Munis‘-
waAra, in his commentary onthe S7réman‘i, cites some
of the passages above noticed, and remarks, that
Bua’scara has omitted this topick on account of con-
tradictory opinions concerning it, and because it is of
no great use. iia

362 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

Tue same author, in his own compilation entitled
Sidd’ hanta Sdarvabhauma, has entered more fully into
this subject. He observes, that the seyen Rishis are
not, like other stars, attached by spikes to the solid.
ring of the ecliptick, but revolve in small circles round
the northern pole of the ecliptick, moving by their
own power in the etherial sphere above Saturn, but
below the sphere of the stars. He places the Rishis in
the same relative positions, which Sa’caxya had as-
signed to them; states in other terms the same dis-_
tances from theecliptick, and the same annual motion ;
and direets their place to be computed by deducti
600 from the years of the Ca/i age, doubling the re-
mainder and dividing by fifteen; the quotient, in de-
grees, 1s divided by 30, to reduce it into signs. -Mu-
Nis‘WARA supports this mode of calculation on the au-
thority of Sa’cALya, against VARA’HA MIHIRA and.
Lata; andaffirms, that it agrees with the phenomena,
as observable at the period of his compilation, It ap-
pears, however, to be acorrection of Sa’catya’s rule,

CAMALA’cARA, in the Tatwavivéca, notices the
opinion delivered in the Sid@’ hanta Sérvabhauma 5 but
observes, that no such motion of the stars 1s percepti-
ble. Remarking, however, that the authority of the
Purér’as and Sanhités, which affirm their revolution,
is incontrovertible, he reconciles faith and experience
by saying, that the stars themselves are fixed; but the
seven Rishis are invisible deities, who perform the
stated revolution in the period specified, ,

Ir CAMALA’cARA’S notion be adopted, no difficulty
remains : yet it can hardly be supposed, that Vara’HA
MininA and Laxua intended to describe revolutions of
invisible beings. If then it be allowed, that they have
attributed to the stars themselves an imaginary revolu-
tion grounded on an erroneous theory, a probable in-
ference may be thence drawn as tu the period when
those authors lived, provided one position be cons

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 363

ceded: namely, that the rules, stated by them, gavea
result not grossly wrong at the respective periods when
they wrote. Indeed it can scarcely be supposed, that
authors, who, like the celebrated astronomers in ques-
tion, were not mere compilers and transcribers, shoul
have exhibited rules of computation, which did not ap-
proach tothe truth, at the very period when they were
proposed.

~ Ir this reasoning be admitted, it would follow, that
Vara‘’HA MIHIRA composed the /rahi sanhité about
2800 years after the period assigned by him to the com-
mencement of the reign of YUDHISHT’HIRA, oF near
the close of the third century after the expiration of
YupDHIsHT’HIRA’s era as defined by him. For the
circle of declination passing between Craru and Pu-
LAHA (the two first of the seven Rishis), and cutting
the ecliptick only 2° short of the beginning of Maghd,
was the solstitial colure, when the equinox was near the
beginning of Cri/ticé ; and such probably was the rea-
son of that line being noticed by ancient Hindu astro-
nomers. It agrees with the solistitial colure on the
sphere of Evpoxus, as described by H1pparcuus *.
A similar circle of declination, passing between the same
stars, intersected the ecliptick at the beginning of

ee ae

* Hiprarcuus tells us, that Eupoxus drew the colure of the
solstices, through the middle of the Great Bear; and the middle of
Cancer; and the neck of Hydrus; and the star between the poop
and mast of Argo; and the tail of the South Fish ; and through the
middle of Capricorn, and of Sagitta; and through the neck and
right-wing of the Swan; and the left-hand of Cepheus: and that
he drew the equinoctial colure through the left-hand of Arctophy-
Jax ; and along the middle of his body; and cross the middle of
Chele; and through the right-hand and fore-knee of the Centaur ;
and through the flexure of Eridanus and head ef Cetus; and the
back of Aries across, and through the head and right-band of Per-
seus.” Sin I, Newron’s Chronology, §. 29. Hipparch. ad Phenom,
in Petavi Uranologia, p. 207, 208. Batury, Ast. Ane, p- 500.
CosTarD, p. 130,

364 ON THE INDIAN, &ei Vid

Maghé when the’ ‘solstitial colure was at the Smidalevet
Asléshé; and alike ‘circle passed through the next as-
terism,' when the: equinox corresponded. with the first
Po oinbof Méshaio Nn astronomer tof ‘that. period, if he
ere apptized of the position assigned to the same stars
by'Garcea reputed to have been the priest of CrisHna
and the Péndus; might conclude with VARA’HA M1-
HIRA, that one revolution had been completed, and
that the stars had passed through one Naeshaira of the.
gecond revolution. In corroboration of this inference
Tespecting the age of VARA’HA MIHIRA’S astrological
treatise, it may ‘be added, that he is cited by name in |
the Pancha tantra, the original of the fables of Pilpay,
which were translated for Nusuirva’n more than 1209
years ago *. Ag iy Peal
Tre theory being wholly unfounded, Vana’ HA
‘M1HIRA’Ss rule of computation soon ceased to agree with
the phenomena, and other rules have been successively
introduced by different authors, as Latna, Sa‘caLya
and lastly Munis’wara ; whose rule, devised less than
two hundred years ago, does not yet grossly betray its
insufficiency. iui!
Gers r
Tuts pretended revolution of the sthevor Ursa Major
is connected with two remarkable epochasin Indian
chronology ; the commencement of the Cali yuga, or
sinful age, in the reign of Yup’HISHT’HIRA ; and its
prev alence, on the failure of the succession of Cihairve
princes, and establishment of a different dynasty, 1015 -
years after the birth of Parrcsnir,’ according to the
Vishnu Puréna; or 1115 years, according: to the
Bhigavaia; but 1498 years, if a correction, which
has been proposed by Srip’Hara Swami and some
other commentators, be admitted. This subject, has

—

* Prerace to the Sanscrit edition of the Hit/padesa. p. xi.

. DIVISIONS OF THE ZODLACK. 365 ’

been u already noticed by Capt. Winvorp, in his essay
on VicRAMA’DITY! 3 and it is, therefore, UAPREEAly
tc enlarge upon it in this place.

It has been noticed, towards. the beginning of the
present essay, | that the principal star of each Na cshatray
iS denominated Yogatéré. Perhaps it may not be su-
perfluous to caution the reader against confounding
these yoga stars with the yogas, of w ‘hich a list is inserted
in Sir W. Jones’s Treatise on the Indian Zodiack *.
They are mentioned by him as divisions of the eclip-
tick : but it will presently appear, that they cannot in
strictness be so denominated. Their principal purpose
regards astrology ; but they are also employed in regu-
lating certain moveable feasts ; and they are of such
frequent. use, that every Indian Almanack contains a

column specifying the yoga for each day, with the hour
of i its! termination.

THE yoga is nothing else than a mode of indicatins:
the sum of the is nohing of the sun and moon. The
rule for its, computation, as given in the Szrya Sid-
ad hénta, Bhéswati and Graha lig’ hava, directs, that the
longitude of the sun be added to the longitude of the
moon; and the sum, reduced to minutes, is to be
divided by 800 (the number of. minutes in 13° 20’) :

the quotient exhibits the elapsed yogas, counted from
Vishcumbha +. It is obvious therefore, that the yogas
are twenty-seven divisions of 300° of a great circle, mea-

2

“ As. Res. vol. 2, p. 302, he

+ 1 Vishcumbha. 2 Priti. 3 Ayushmat. 4 Saubhdgya. 5
Sébhana, 6 Atiganda. 7 Sucarman. 8: Dhriti. 9g Sdla. 10
Ganda. 11 Vridd’hi. 12 Dhruva. 13 Vy4ghata. 44 Hershana.
15 Vajra. 16 Sidd’hi. 17 Vyatipata. 18 Variyas. 19 Parigha.
20 Siva. 21 Sidd’ha. 22 Sddhya. 23 Subha. 24 Sucla. 25
Brahman. 26 Ajindra. 27 Vaidhriti,

566 ON THE INDIAN, &c¢,

sured upon the ecliptick. But, if they be represented
ona circle, it must be a moveable)one in the plane of
the ecliptick,

Astorocens also reckon twenty-eight yogas, which
correspond to the twenty-eight Nacshatras or divisions
of the moon’s path; varying, however, according to
the day of the week. As the Indian Almanacks some-
times appropriate a column to the moon’s yoga for each
day, I shall insert in a note a list of these JOgas, with
the rule by which they are determined me |

«

i? t

* 1 Ananda. 2 Céladanda. 3 Dhimra. 4 Prajapati. 3
Saumya. 6 Dhwancsha. 7 Dhwaja. 8 Srivatsa. @ Vajra.
Mudgara. 11 Ch’hatra. 12 Maitra. 13 Maénasa. 14° Padina,
15 Lambuca. 16 Utpata. 17 Mrityu. 18 Cana. 19 Sidd’hi.
20 Subha.© 21 Amrita. 22 Musula, 23 Gada. 24 Métanga.
25 Racshasa. 26 Chara. 27 St’hira. 28 Pravard’ha.

Tue foregoing list is extracted from the Ratnamdld of Sripart.
He adds the rule by which the yigas are regulated, On a Sunday,
the Nacshatras answer to the yigas, in their natural order ; viz.
Aswini to Ananda, Bharani to Célandanda, &c. But, on a Monday,
the first yoga (Ananda) corresponds to Mrigasiras, the sesond to
Ardra, and so forth. Ona Tuesday, the Nacshaira, which answers
to the first yoga, is Aslesha ; on Wednesday, Hasta; on Thursc ay,
* Anuradha; on Friday, Uttarishéd’da; and on Saturday, Satabhithi.

. Armanacks usually contain another set of astrological ditisions
of the lunar month, which it may be proper to explain. They are
denominated Carana; and consist of seven variable and i inva~
riable, as in the subjoined list. ;

Variable Caranas. Invariable Caranas.
1 Bava. 1 Sacuni.
2 Balava. 2 Chatushpad. ©
3 Caulava. 3 Naga
4 Taitila. 4 Cintughna.
5 Gara.
Oo Vani}. s
7 Vishti. indian

DIVISIONS OF THE RODIACK. 367

-Awnornuer topick, relative to the Zodiack, and con-
nected with astrology, remains to be noticed. I al-
lude to the Dréshcanas answering to the Decani of Eu-
ropean Astrologers. The Hindus, like the Egyptians
and Babylonians, from whom that vain science passed
to the Greeks and Romans, divide each sign into three
parts, and allot to every such part a regent exercising
planetary influence under the particular planet whom
he there represents.

Tre description of the 36 Dréshcands is given to-
wards the close of Vara’HAMIHIRA’s treatise on the
casting of nativities, entitled /rihat Jataca. It is here
translated conformably with the gloss of Buarrérpa-
LA? omitting, however, some variations in the reading
of the text, which are noticed by him ; but which can
be of no.use, unless occasion should arise for reference
to them in comparing the description of the Dréshcanas
with some amulet or ancient monument in which the
Decani may be supposed to be figured. Even for that
purpose, the following description will probably suffice. —

1. [Mars] A man with red eyes, girt round the
waist, with a white cloth, of a black complexion, as
formidable as able to protect, holds a raised battle-axe,

9. [Tue Sun] A female clad in red apparel,
with her mind fixed on wearing ornauients, having
a mare’s head, and a belly like a jar, thirsty and

a

os

They answer successively to halfa J:'thi orlunar day; Cintughna
being always assigned to the first half of the first 72’tii; and the
variable Caranas afterwards succeeding each other regularly, through >
eight repetitions: they are followed by the three remaining invaria-
ble Caranar, which conclude the month; Chatuhpdd and Néga ap-
pertaining ty Amdvasyé or the new moon, and Sacum being appru-
priated to the latter half of the preceding Ti’Ai.

368 ON THE INDIAN, &c..

resting on one foot, is exhibited by Yavawa as the fi-
gure of the Dréshcdna in the middle of Mésha*,: |) 0°

\“ Mid Os tas?
3. [Jurrver]. A fierce and wrathful man, iarerr

sant with arts, of a tawny complexion, solicitous of
action, but unsteady i in his resolves, holds i in his hands
a raised stick, and wears red clothes... He i 1S the third
in the tripatite division of Mésha. Te sie hiag

| Venus] A woman vile hair clipped aie Buried:

a re shaped like a jar, her clothes burnt, herself
thirsty , disposed to eat, and fond of ornaments : : : such
is the figure of the first i in Vrishabha. Heine Socinian

5. [Mercury } A man with the head ofa beiniiane
a shoulder like a bull. clothed in dirty apparel, skilful
in regard to the plough andthe cart, acquainted with
field, grain, house, and kine, conversant with arts 5

+e he
ey

and, in disposition, voracious. | © pIOD EST:
bad Yr; AT

6. [Sarurn] A man with a boi vast as an: ele-.

phant’ s, and feet great as a Sarabha’s ry with white

teeth and a tawny body, his mind busied upon the wool

of wild sheep, occupies the extremity of the sign Taurus.

J2ia vi

“a [Mercury] Such as are aie eens sub-
ject, declare the first in-the tripartite partition of the
third sign, to be a woman fond of working with the
needle, beautiful, delighting in ornaments, eich
amorous, and with her arms elevated. ap

8. [Venus] In the middle _ of the
sign Gemini is a man, with the face

—

Huq Fosa ayaaaae sn | Beis!

TOTPALA ai this “ declared by YaAvawcHaRyYa”

aang: Har | bia

+ A monster with eight legs, who destroys elephants.

DIVISIGNS OF THE ZODIACK. 869

ofa Garud'a*, standing in a grove: he is an archer
clad in armour, and holds a bow, he meditates on sport,
his children, ornaments, and wealth.

' g. [Saturn] At the end of the sign Gemini is a man
decorated with ornaments, haying as many gems as the
ocean contains; clad in armour and furnished with bow
and quiver; skilled in dance, musick, and song, and
“practising poetry.

10. [THe Moon] The wise declare the first in Can-

cer to be an animal with the body of an elephant, the -

feet of a Sarabha, a boar’s head and horse’s neck, stand-

- ing in a grove under a Sandal-wood tree-, and up-
holding leaves, root, and fruit.

11. [Mars] Inthe middle of the sign Cancer, a
woman, in prime of youth, with blossoms of lotos on
her head, attended by a serpent, cries, while standing
in a forest, resting against the branch of a Paldsa ¢ tree.

12. |Juprrer] Lastin Cancér is a man with his head
inclined; he is decorated with golden ornaments, and,
embarking on a vessel and encompassed by serpents
[twined round him,]| he traverses the ocean to seek or-
naments for his wife. |

13. [Tae Sun] A vulture and shakal stand on a
cotton tree 4: a dog is near: and a man, in a squalid
dress, laments for his father and mother: this repre-
sentation is pronounced to be the first of the Lion.

14. [Jupiter] A man formed like a horse, bearing
on his head a garland of yellowish white flowers, wears
a leather dress: unconquered like a Lion ; armed with

eS.

2 - 2
* Aneagle: or else a gigantick crane, Perhaps a vulture.
+ Santalum Album sive Sirium myrtifglium,
_} Butea frondosa.
~ §-Bombax heptaphyllum.

Vou. IX, 2B

370 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

a bow; and distinguished by a bogie nose, he 1S
asia in the middle of Leo.

5. [Mars] The third in the teepanties division of
tas is aman having the head of a bear, witha long
beard and curled hair ; in disposition similar to an ape 5
and holding a staff, fruits, and flesh.

10. iVesacussd A damsel, bearing a jar filled with
blossoms, (her person clothed in apparel soiled with
‘dirt, ) solicitous for the union of dress with opulence,
is going towards the family of her spiritual parent : —
1s ‘the first of Vi irgo.

17. [Satur “ei A man of a dark complexion, er

a cloth on his head, holds 2 pen, and is casting up ac-

counts of receipts and disbursements ; he bears a large

bow, and his body is covered with hair : he is placed
in the middle of the sign.

18. [Venus] A woman of a fair complexion, dressed
in bleached silk, tall, holding in her hand a jar and
ladle ; is devoutly going towards a temple of the gods :
the wise pronounce this to be the last of Virgo.

19. [Venus] A man is proceeding along the mid-
dle of a highway; holding a balance, and having
weights in his hand; he is skilled in measuring and
meting, and meditates on commodities and their prices.
The Yavanas declare this form to be first of Libra *.

90. [Sarurw] A man with the head of a vulture,
carrying a water pot, is anxious to proceed, being bun-
gry and thirsty ; in thought, he visits his wife and son.
He is middlemost of the balance-bearer (Libra.)

* antaciaaaar WAAAMAT: Thismight

signify «* Yavawna declares ;” for the plural is used in Sanscrit re-

spectfully : and Bhattotpala has before expounded rae as in-

tending YavyanacHarya: but a different explanation eccursa little
lower.

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK, 37 \

21. [Mercury] A man, in figure like an ape,
adorned with gems, bearing a golden quiver and armour,
and carrying fruits and flesh, is scaring deer, in a fo-
rest: such is the figure exhibited by the Yavanas *,

22. [Mars| A woman, without clothes or orna-
ments, comes from the great ocean, to the shore; she
has fallen from her place ;, round her feet are serpents
entwined ; but sheis pleasing. Such is the first of the
sign Scorpio. |

23. [Jurirer| A woman, with a body like a tor-
toise and a jar, and with serpents entwined round her
person, is solicitous to prepare local comforts for her
husband. This figure the wise pronounce to be the
middle one of Scorpio.

24. [Tue Moon] The last of the Scorpion isa lion
with a large and stooping head resembling that of a
tortoise ; he guards the place where Sandal-wood grows,
terrifying dogs, deer, boars, and shakals.

25. [Juerrer]| An animal with the body of a horse
and head of a man, holding a large bow, stands near a
hermitage and devoutly guards the implements of sa-
crifice : such is the first of the three divisions of the
bow (Sagittarius.) |

26. [Mars] A pleasing female, of golden com-
plexion like the Champacat, moderately handsome,
sitson a throne, distributing marine gems. This is de-
scribed as the middle division of the bow.

27. [Tue Sun] A man witha long beard, of a com-

=

so
* Ara Acer: Which Buarrotrata expounds * de-
clared by the ancient Vavilvas.” Quaryaa:

+ Michelia Champaca.
232

372 ON THE INDIAN, &c. .

plexion yellow like the Chamtpaca, is sitting on a throne
with a staff in his hand: he wears silk raiment and a
deer’s skin. Such is the third figure of the ninth sign.

28. [Saturn] A man, ofa terribleaspect, with the
body of a hog, hairy, having tusks likea Macara*,
holds a yoke, anet, and fetters. He is first of Capri-
corn.

ag. [Venus] In the middle of Macara is a woman
skilled in musick, with eyes large like the petals of the
lotos, and with a dark complexion. She seeks various
things: she is decorated with jewels; and wears metal-
lick ornaments in her ears. |

30. [Mercury] A man, shaped like a Cynara +,
clothed in a woolen cloth, and furnished with quiver,
‘bow, and armour, bears on his shoulder a jar adorned
with gems: he is last of the sign Macara, 3

31. [Tae Sun] The first of the jar (Aquarius)
is a man with the head of a vulture, clothed ir silk and
wearing an antolope’s hide with a woolen cloth: his
mind is busied in obtaining oil, ardent spirits, water,
and food. | | :

32. [Mercury] Ina burnt carriage, a woman clad
in soiled apparel, bearing vessels on her head, is col-
Jecting metals in a forest containing cotton trees.

33. |Venvs| A man-of a dark complexion, with
hairy. ears, adorned with a diadem, carries and tran-
sports vases with articles of metal, and with bark, leaves,
gum, and fruit. He is last of Cumbha. > ~~
———— ee
* A sea monster, Perhaps the Narwhal may be iatended.

+ A human figure with the head of a horse.

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK. 373

_ .84. [Jurirer] The first of the fish [Pisces] navi-
gates the sea in search of ornaments for his wife: he
has jewels, and his hands are full of vessels used in sa-
crifice, together with pearls, gems, and shells,

35. [THe Moon] A woman, surpassing in com>
plexion the blossom of the Champaca, ascends a ship
with Jofty masts and flags; and approaches the shore
of the sea, accompanied by her retinue. This is de-
clared by sages to be the second in the tripartite division
of Mina.

36. [Mars] Near a cavern, in a forest, a naked
man, with serpents entwined round his body, and tor-
mented by robbers and fire, laments. He is the last

of the fish.

ARABIAN astronomers in like manner divide each
sign of the Zodiack into three parts, denominateg
Wajeh (sq) or in the plural Wajuh (og .3), which
severally belong to the different planets * thence called
Rab ul wajeh. ‘The proper import of the term dx 4 is
face or countenance ; agreeing with the Greek Meocarov,
which is similarly employed in this acceptation, ao.

Tue near correspondence of the Darésh’can’as with
the Decani of Roman authors and d:xavos of Grecian
writers will be evident from the following passage of
Manitivs, supported by quotations from other au-
thors, which I shall insert on the faith of Saumaise +;
the original works, from which they are taken, not
being here procurable. }

* In the following order, beginning from Aries: viz. Mars, the
Sun, Venus, Mercury, the Moon, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, the Sun,
&e. dkhewinu'l Safa.

+ Firmici Mathesis seu Astron. vide infra. ;

+ Salmasii Plinianze Exercitationes, p, 052.

2B3

374 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

Manliuivs says *

Quam partem decimam dixére Decania gentes ;
A numero nomen positum est, quod partibus astra
Condita tricenis propria sub sorte feruntur,

Et tribuunt denas in se coeuntibus astris,

Inque vicem terris habitantur sidera Signis.

HeEpH £sTIon expressly declares +}, that ‘‘ each sign
of the Zodiack is divided into three Decani comprising
ten degrees each: the first division of Aries is named
Chontare ; the second Chontachre, and the third Sicet.”

Frraicvus differs in the names, and does not allow
ten complete degrees to each Decanus. ‘Thus, in the
sign Aries, the three first degrees are, according to
him, unappropriated ; the five next belong to the first
Decanus Asitan, the next nine are vacant ; and the four
follawing appertain to the second Decanus Senacher :
five degrees are again unoccupied; and the four last
belong to the third Decanus Senfacher i.

We learn from Psrutius{ that the several Decani
were figured with different attributes and dresses ; and,
from DeMorui us and Frruicus || that they repre-
sented the planets, ‘The first appertained to Mars ;

* Lib. 4, 298—302.

+ Kai éclv o wiv TeWwTas aovlagey 6 de devrepos, 0 TeITOS omer.

} Salmasii Plin. Exerc. p. 053. .

§ Evol yap ev cxasw trav Codiov speis nailereymevos dexsvor
TOMMbACLOPMOly 6 LEV HATER WY TEAEKUY, OD EIS GAA Ts ETH HAK~
TIOUEVOS EMaT Ue. wy Eh TH EON % TH oXAMOlE duxturtev
eyyavpers ogevdoueis amotporaia dewav Qavncerai, Taura
(4 EY Ouy 6 Teuxpos “ar EXELVOV wepstlos Th JAETEWO He Ohat gf

|| Primum weocw7oy est is planeta cujus signum est + secundum
wpocwrov planeta sequens: et sic deinceps. Aries est Martis pri-
mum wpogwrov, secundum Solis, tertium Veneris, juxta serien

errantium. ‘This agrees precisely with the Arabian aw 4

DIVISIONS OF THE ZODIACK, 37a

the second to the Sun; and the third to Venus (the
Hindu author says J upiter).

Tuts astrological notion was confessedly received
from foreign nations. The doctrine seems to be as-
cribed by Frirmicus to Nexepso king of Egypt*;
and PsExuus cites a Babylonian author, whom he calls
Trucer; and who is also noticed by Porrpuyrius :
besides, the names of the Decani, stated by Heruase
ion and Firmicus, are decidedly barbarous. It was
not, therefore, without reason, that SaumaisE and
KCiRCHER sought a derivation of the word Decanus it-
self from a foreign language. It cannot be deduced,
‘as SCALIGER proposes, from the similar term for an
inferior officer commanding ten men -{; since this of-
fice and its designation were first introduced later than
the time of Manrxivs, by whom the astrological term
is employed; and PorrHyRivs expressly affirms that
the word was used by those whom he denominates
‘fancients ¢.”. Huet, not concurring in either of the
opinions abovementioned, supposes the term to have
been corruptly formed by the astrologers of Alexandria
from the Greek numeral with a Latin termination §.
If this be admitted, it still remains not improbable that
some affinity of sound, in the Egyptian or in the Chal-
daick name, may have suggested the formation of this

cotrupt word. °

Tue Sanscrit name apparently comes from the same
source. I do not suppose it to be originally Sanscrit ;
since, in that language, it bears no etymological sig-
nification. For the same reason, it is likely, that the
astrological doctrine itself may be exotick in India.

mn

* Sicet Nekepso A’gypti justissimus Imperator, et Astrologus
-walde bonus, peripsos Decanos omnia vitia valetudinesque collegit,
_ostendens quam valetudinem quis Decanus efficeret, &c.

_ t Erant Decani den's militibus propositi. Veget. 2. 8.

t ‘Ous tives exarerav denavous os WHALE.

§ Huetii animadversiones ad Manilium. Lib, iv. y. 108.

2BA

376 ON THE INDIAN, &c.

Qne branch of astrology, entitled Téjaca, has beer
confessedly borrowed from the Arabians :. eee em
nical terms used in it, are, as I am informed b ai a
astrologers, Arabick. The easti:g of nativities, th ugh
its practice is of more ancient date in India, may also
have been received from Western astrologers; Hgyp-
tians, Chaldeans, or even Greeks. If so, it is likely,

that the Hindus may have received astronomical hints
at the same time. :

By their own acknowledgment *, they have culti-
vated astronomy for the sake of astrology; and they
may have done so, with the aid of hints received from
the same quarter, from which their Aiioey is derived.
In the present instance Vara’HA minira himself, as
interpreted by his commentator, quotes the Yavanas
(meaning perhaps Grecian authors), in a manner which

indicates, that the description of the Dréshednas is
borrowed from them.

Tue name of YAvana’cuaA’RyA, who is cited by
Buarrorpeata, would not be alone decisive. He is
frequently quoted by Hindu astronomers: and it is
possible, though by no means certain, that, under this
name, a Grecian or an Arabian author may be intended.
To determine that point, it will be requisite (unless
the work attributed to him be recovered) to collect all
the passages, in which YAvAN’acua’RYA is cited by
Sanscrit authors ; and to compare the doctrines ascribed .
to him with those of the Grecian and Arabian writers
on A:tronomy. Not being prepared for such a disquisi-
tion, I shall dismiss this subject, for the present, with-

out offering any positive opinion on the question, which
has been here proposed.

—- ———

* Buascara expressly says, “ By ancient astronomers, the pur-
pose of the science is declared to be judicial astrology; and that,

indeed, depends on the influence of configurations ; and these, on
the apparent places oi the planets.’” .

Gilid’ hydya, 1. v. 6.

VIL.

On OLIBANUM or FRANKINCENSE.

BY H. T. COLEBROOKE, ESQ.

i, is generally agreed, that the Gum- resin, called
Olibanum, is the Teinkincense which was used by the

Ancients in their religious ceremonies. But there is
not the same agreement as to the plant supposed to pro-
duce it. Linn aus has referred it to a species of Ju-
niper * : and accordingly botanists of his school +, and
the Chemical writers {, concur in affirming, that Oli-
banum isthe produce of the Lycian Juniper. But this.
tree is a native of the south of France, as well asthe
Levant and Siberia: and the French Botanists deny,
that it yields the resinous Gum in question 4; and re-
mark, that Linn £us made the assertion without proof.
Their remark is, I believe, well founded. No proof
appears to have been alledged ; and both Niservur
and Bruce considered it as an undecided question,
which ees endeavoured, though unsuccessfully, to in-
I therefore apprehended, that the evidence,

ee ee

* His pupil Gann, in a treatise on officinal plants, written and
published i in 1753, and inserted in Fund. Bot. yol. 2, has so stated
it, without specifying the species. This was probably grounded on
the Materia Medica of Linn xus publishedin 1749. Murraycites
that work of Linnzus, forthe observation, that it is yet uncertain
whether Olibanum be produced from the Juniperus Lycia. Appar.
. Medic. Ti be p. 55.

i Martyn’s Botan. Dict.

t Fourcroy, Syst. Chim. T. 8. p. 30. Piero. 4, p. 344,

§ Les botanistes ignorent quel est l’arbre d’ot découle cette ré«
sine précieuse, Linneus aavancé, sans preuve, qu’elle étoit pro-
duite par une espéce de genevrier.

Dict: D’ Hist. Nat. published in 1803.

| Nresunwe says, ** We could learn nothing of the tree, from
which incense distils 5 and Mr. Forskat does not mention it. I
know, that it is to be found in a part of Hadramaut, where it is

called Oliban,” (Eng. Trans}. vol. 2. p. 350.)

378 ON OLIBANUM

which will be adduced for a different tree, is not op-
posed to any arguments of strength in favour of the Ly-
cian Juniper. . |

A ereat degree of obscurity has always hungover this
subject. We learn from THeorurastus and from
Purny *, that the Greek writers differed in their de-
scription of the tree; Prrny adds, that the information
contained in the volume addressed by King Juna to C.
Cxzsar, grandson and adopted son of Augustus, was
inconsistent with other accounts; and further remarks,
that the Ambassadors, who came to Rome from Arabia
in his own time, had rendered the whole matter more
uncertain than ever. The information, obtained in
modern times from Arabia, ‘is not more satisfactory.

De a

Oxvipanum is nained Luban and Cundur by the
Arabs. But, Benzoin having been introduced into
general use, as incense, in place of Olibanum, the name
of Lubén has been appropriated to that fragrant balsam,
and the Muhammedan writers of India, on Materia
Medica, apply only the term Cundur to Olibanum.
The author of the Mekhzenuladviyeh, under this head,
states Cundur as Arabick, or according to other opinions
Persian,and equivalent to theSyriack Labiniyé (Log)
He describes the drug as the gum of'a thorny plant, a
yard high, with leaves and seed resembling the myrtle.
It grows, he says, on the mountains of Shahar and Ye-
men. He, however, adds, that the plant is said to be
found in some parts of India. ‘The Lohfut ul muminin
gives a similar description (excepting the remark last
quoted ;) and so does the Arabian author ABULFaADLI
cited by the French translator of PLiny +. -

i?

a
.

* Pliny, 12.14, Theophrastus Hist. Plant. 9. 2.
7 Poinsinet. Paris 1771. tom, 4. p. 532.

OR FRANKINCENSE. 379.

From the Hebrew Lebonah or Arabick Lubin, the
Greeks obtained their names for the tree and the gum,
Libanos and Libanotos. 'They seem likewise to have
been acquainted with the term of Cundur, from which
x0vd¢@> 1s probably derived. t

Tue Hindu writers on Materia Medica notice a fra-
grant resinous gum, under the name of Cunduru, which
their grammarians consider as a Sanscrit word, and ac-
cordingly state an etymology of it from a Sanscrit root.
They concur in declaring it to be the produce of the
Sallaci, a tree which they affirm to be vulgarly called
Salat, The tree, which is known by that name, was
examined by Dr. Hunter on his journey to Ujayini ;
and by me ona journey to Négpur: and it has been
figured and described by Dr. Roxzpureu, who has
named it Boswellia Serrata. His description follows.

BosweE xtra Serrata, Roxb. .

Gen. Char. Calyx bencath, 5—toothed. Corol 5
petaled. Nectary a crenulated, fleshy cup, sur-
rounding the lower part of the germ, with stamens
inserted on its outside. Capsule 2—sided, 3—celled;
3—valved. Seeds solitary, membrane-winged.

Spec. Char. Leaves pinnate ; leaflets serrate, downy.
Racemes simple, axillary. Petalsovate. Filaments
inserted on the exterior margin of the nectary.

A large tree, a native of the mountains of India. A
most fragrant resin is collected from wounds made in
_the bark, &c.

Leaves crowded about the extremities of the branchlets,
pinnate with a single terminal one.

Leaflets sessile, sometimes opposite, sometimes alter-
nate, in general about 10 pair, obliquely-oyate,
oblong, obtuse, serrate, villous; length about an
jo@, or an inchand a half.

380 - ON OLIBANUM

Petioles round, downy.

Racemes axillary, simple, shorter than the leaves,
downy. 7

‘A. i :
Bracts minute. ‘

Flowers numerous, very pale pink, small.
Calyx five lobed *, downy.

Corol, petals five, oblong, expanding, downy on the
_ outside, and considerably longer than the stamens.

Nectary, a fleshy crenulated cup-+, surrounding the
» lower two-thirds of the germ. ;

Stamens: Filaments ten, alternately shorter , inserted
on the outer edge of the mouth of the nectary.
Anthers oblong.

‘Pistil. Germ above, ovate. Style cylindric. Stigma
of three pretty large lobes.

Pericarp: Capsule oblong, three-sided, three-celled,
three-valved, size of an olive, smooth.

- Seed solitary, winged, broad-cordate, at the base deeply
- emarginate, point long and slender, and_by it. in-
serted into the apex of the valve of the Capsule to
which it belongs. 4
Tux foregoing description is by Dr. Roxguren. I
have merely added in the margin a few inconsiderable
variations taken from Dr. Hunrer’s notes or from my
own. eee
Tue fructification is remarkably diversified on the
same plant. I have found, even on the same raceme,
flowers in which the teeth or lobes of the Calyx

* <o Dr. Roxsurcu. But Perianth 1-leaved, 5-toothed ; ace
cording to Dr. Huwrex’s observations and my own.
+ Coloured and adhering to the Calyx.
‘4

¢ Subulate and alternately slender. ae J

OR FRANKINCENSE. 381

varied from 4 to 10. The number was generally 5,
sometimes 6, rarely'7, more rarely 4, and very rarely
10. Petals.as many as the divisions of the Calyx.
Stamens twice as many. Capsule generally 3. sided,
sometimes 4, rarely 5, sided; with as many cells: and
as many valves. Seeds generally solitary: the dissec-
tion of germ does indeed exhibit a few in each cell;
but only one is usually matured.

Tue tree is frequent in the forest between the Sdne
and Nagpir ; on the route by which I travelled to Berar
in 1798. The gum, which exudes from it, was no-
ticed by Mr, D. Turnsuxt, who was then Surgeon to
the residency at Nagpir. He judged it to be Oliba-
num; and so did several intelligent natives who accom-
panied us. But the notion, prevalent among botanists,
that Olibanum is the produce of a species of juniper,
left room for doubt. I now learn from Mr. Turneutt,
that, since his return to his station at Mirzdpir, he
has procured considerable quantities of the gum of the
Séfai, which he has sent to Europe at different times ;
first without assigning the name of Olibanum ; and,
more lately, under that designation. It was in England
recognised for Olibanum, though offered for sale as a
different gum; and annual consignments of it have

been since regularly sold at the Hast India Company’s
gales.

THE experience of several years at a market such as
that of London, where a mistake (had any been com-
mitted) would have been soon discovered, seems to be
conclusive. Imight, however, add to it the testimony
of medical gentlemen at this place, by whom specimens
of the Gums furnished by Mr. Turnezuut have been
inspected, and who concur in opinion, that the Gum
appears ta he the same with the Olibanum of the shops.

382 . ON OLIBANUM.

_ Upon this evidence so corroborated, I shall venture
to propose the following statement of Sy nonyma both
for the tree and the Gum. |
Boswellia Serrata *.

Sansc. Sallaci or Sillacf, Cunduruci-} or Cundurf, Su-
rabhi +, Suvaha, &c.

Hind. Salai, Salé, Sala or Sila, Sajiwan.

Gr. Libanos.

Lat. Libanus.

The Gum. Sansc. Cunduru, Cunda, Mucunda, &c.
Ar. & Pers. Cundur (anciently Luban.) Syr. Labu-
niya. Heb. Lebonah. ,

Gr. Libanotos or Libanos. JZa¢. Libanus. Mod. Las.
Olibanum, (quasi Oleum libani).

* If the genus had not already received a botanical name; it might
have been suitably denominated from the tesinous Gum, afforded
by this tree; and the generick and trivial names of the ce
‘might be Libanus thurifera.

+ Producing Conduru.

$ Fragrant.

VIII.
REMARKS on the Species of PErren, whick aré

found on PRINCE OF W aves’s ISLAND.

RY WILLIAM HUNTER, ESQ. M. De

ae had an opportunity, during a residence of
some months at Prince of Wales's Island, to ascertain,
partly by observation and partly by inquiry, some par-
ticulars which I conceive to be new respecting tlie cul-
ture and preparation of black pepper, the principal
staple of that island, I am induced to lay the fruit of
my researches before the Asiatick Society. ‘To these l
have added a few remarks on the other species which
are found on the Island. I judged it would not be
without utility to add the oriental names of each spe~
cies; andin this partof my task, as far as regards the
Sanscrit and its derivative, I am indebted to the liberal
assistance of Mr. COLEBROOKE.

1. Piper nigrum. Lin. sp. 40. Syst. 74. Reich. 1. 75.

_ Willden. 159. Fl. Zeylan. 26. Mat. Med. p. 41.
Woody. Med. Bot. 513. t. 187. Camelli de plantis
Philip. in Phil. Trans. vol. 24. p. 1773. Loureir :
Cochinch. 30. Miller iJlust. Plenck icon. Miller’s
Dict. No. 1.

Black Pepper. Leaves ovate, accuminate, five to seven
nerved, smooth; petioles short.

Piper rotundum nigrum. Pluk: almag. p. 207. t. 437.
i

Piper rotund ifolium nigrum. Bauhin. pin. 411. Mo-
rison hist. pl. 3. p. 602. f. 15. t. 1. f. 1. Blackwell
t. 848. Ray. Hist. 1341. Burm. Zeyl. 193.

Lada, aliis molanga s. Piper mas. Piso Mant. Arom.
p- 18V. cum icon.

Molago Codi. ort. Malab. v. 7p. 23. t. 12.
Pepper-plant, Marsden Sumat. p. 105, & seq.

884 REMARKS ON THE SPECIES OF PEPPER.
Gr. - Memeps

Sans. Maricha, Maricha.

Hind. Mirch, Golmirch, Célimirch.

Arab. Fulful, Filfil.

Pers. Pilpil.

Malay. Ladda.

Tue Greek name of this species, from which~ the
name of the genus is taken, has been said to be derived —
from [ealw, because it is supposed to promote digesti-
on’. But we have it on the authority of Hippocrates
that the Greeks received this term from the Persians? ;
and these undoubtedly, had it from the Indians 3, from
whose country they imported the drug itself. In fact,
the Persian and Arabick, as well as the Greek and Latin
names, are derived from Pippali, the Sanscrit denomi-
nation of LongPepper. ‘The ancients in general, with
the single exception of Tuzopurasrus, supposed the
-black, the white, and the long pepper to be the produce
of one plant.. Hence, they might naturally enough ap-
ply to one species the Indian name of another. Sax-
MAsIUS, who notices this+, has fallen, in common
with other modern writers5, into the opposite error,
by supposing the black and white peppers to grow
on different plants. Piso appears to be the first

t Scapule Lexic. invoce, Alex. Aphr. in pref. 1.1, probl.

2 Dé Morb. Mulier: ed. Fees. p. 672. 1. 14. LS laa

3 Salmas. Plinian. Exercit. in Solin. (Paris 1629. fol.) 'P- 1026. C.
4 Ibid. :

5 Garcias Hist. Arom. apud. Clus. exot. p. 182.

FOUND ON PRINCE OF WALESSISLAND. 385

who corrected this mistake®; and his statement is con-
firmed by RuzEpE?7, Lovurerros, and Marspen 9.

Turs plant has been so fully described, that I have
nothing to add onthat head. But as it is the most im-
portant article of produce on Prince of Wales’s Island,
the manner of cultivation pursued there merits a parti-
cular detail.

4 .

Ir is propagated by cuttings, or suckers. They are
generally planted at the distance of about 74 feet ; that
is 100 plants in an U’rlong, which is a measure of 80
yards square, nearly equal to 11-3 Acre. But some
experienced cultivators think that the distance should
be greater; perhaps nine feet; as the roots would be

better nourished, and the produce more abundant.

WueEw a plantation is to be commenced, the large
timber is cut down by Malays, at the rate of five Dol-
lars per U’rlong. ‘The remaining labour is performed
_by Chinese, who dig out the roots, burn them and the
trunks, pulverise and level the soil, plant the pepper
vines and the trees which are to support them. It is
usual to contract with them for making the plantation
in this manner, and taking care of it for three years, at
the end of which time it isin bearing, at the rate of
225 Dollars for 100 plants. ‘The sum is liquidated by
instalments, as the contractor requires it to pay his ©
workmen. Something more than one-third is paid

6 Mantissa Aromatica.
7H. M. y.7. p. 23.

. 8 FJ. Coch. 30.

- 9 Hist. Sum. 106, 117.

Vorw%. 2¢

‘

386 <REMARKSON THE SPECIES OF PEPPER,

in the first year, because the labour is then ereatest 3
but about one-fourth of the whole is generally reserved,
till the contract is completed, and the plantation deli-
vered over. ‘This does not include the price of the
plants, or cuttings, which are furnished by the: pro-
prietor of the plantation.

Tue vine is first made to climb on a pole! At’ the
end of ten or twelve months, it is detached from the
pole, to undergo the process called laying down. A
circular hole, about eighteen inches in diameter, is dug
at one side of the plant. At the bottom of this the
plant is carried round in a circle, and the end of it is
brought to the tree which is in future to form its sup-

ort. The depth of the hole, in which the vines are
Pd down, varies, according to the situation and nature
of the soil; and much judgement, to be acquired by
practice, is requisite, to adapt it to these circum-
stances. In high and dry situations, the depth must
be considerably greater than in those which are low and
moist. ‘oo little depth in the former would expose the
roots to be parched in dry seasons; and too much in
the latter would occasion them to rot, from excess of
moisture. 2433

Tue trees used for supporting the pepper vines on
Prince of Wales's Island are the Morinda Citrifolia
(Mankiido) and the Erythrina Corallo dendron ( Dadap).
The Chinese planters ailedge, that the pepper sup-
ported by the Erythrina thrives better, and lasts longer
than that supported by the Morinda. One instance I
heard quoted in proof of this assertion, was a planta-
tion which had been long neglected, and overgrown
with weeds. When it came to be examined, the
vines which had grown on the Morinda were all dead ; —
while those on the Evythrina were still strong and
productive. The reason assigned by the planters, |

FOUND ON PRINCE OF WALES SISLAND. 387

- for this difference, is, that the roots of the Erythring
do not spread so much, or penetrate so deep, as those
of the Morinda; whence they interfere less with the
pepper, and do not draw so much nourishment from
the earth.

Tue Morinda was formerly made to grow with one
stem, but this was not found to afford sufficient spread
for the vines. ‘Therefore, when that tree is used, the
practice now is to break off the principal stem, at the
height of about two feet from the ground. . This obliges
the. trees to put out lateral branches at that height.
When these have attained the length of about a foot
or fifteen inches, they are cut off. From their ends
arise erect shoots, each of which forms.a stem, so that
the vine has four or five stems to climb on, instead of
one.

Tue vines, at three years of age, begin to produce,
and they are reckoned to be in full bearing at five or six.
They, continue nearly in the same state for eight years,
more, or till they are. fourteen years old. From. that.
period they are reckoned on the decline; but the,
planters on Prince of Wales's Island cannot yet judge
from experience, at what rate, or in how long a time
they decay. Some Chinese, who have cultivated the’
plant on the Mad/ay coast, say the vines have not ar-.
rived at their point of greatest produce till they are
fourteen years old; and that from this, gradually de-
clining, ‘they continue bearing till near thirty.

. Tupofirst year of bearing, or at three years old, the:
vines, do not yield more than half a catt# each. But
plants kept in good order, when in their prime,
will produce three cat/is**. A plantation of 3000

LL LT eT need

10 A cat! is 14 Ib.
7 2c 2

388 REMARKS ON THE SPECIES OF PEPPER,

vines at Sing? Chian'', now in its eleventh year, hat
been let for three yeats at seventy picols yearly, or at
the rate of 23 caftis each plant. It must. therefore pro-
duce as much more as will pay the tenant for his labour
and risk. They are generally let, for the first five
years of bearing, or from three to eight years old, at
160 picols per laksha (10,000) or at 160 ¢atlis for 100
vines. ) |

Tue vines yield two crops yearly. ‘The first gather+
ing commences at December, after the heavy rains are
over; and at the same time, the vines have put out
new flowers. This first collection may be finished in
February. The flowers which spread in December
have ripened their seeds in April or May. ‘The second
collection then begins, and ends in July. During this
time, blossoms have expanded, which are to furnish
the crop of next December. But, with the most care-
ful cultivators, who gather only the bunches which are
fully ripe, these two harvests run so nearly into one
another, that the collection is in a manner continued
without interruption, from December till August; so
that there is only an interval of four months in the
year, which is the season of the heavy rains.

Tue bunches are plucked off entire, taking care to
pull only those that are ripe. They are thrown into
baskets, and allowed to remain fora day. They are af-
terwards spread on mats, and trodden with the feet,
to separate the fruit from the stalk. The grain is
next winnowed, to clear it from the stalks and the
lighter grains; and the good heavy grains are
spread on mats, in the sun, to dry, for three days.
It is calculated that one hundred catlis of green
pepper, with the stalks, yield thirty-five catézs of clean
and dry pepper. The collection of one day from

_U_A district-near the southern extremity of the island, of which
the soil is found peculiarly favourable to the cultivation of pepper.
The oldest vines are in this district. (cain he

FOUND ON PRINCB OF WALES S ISLAND. 389

46,000 plants of three years old, was 500 cattis of
green, or 175 of dry pepper.

Ir is usual, as was before noticed, when the plan-
tation is delivered over to the proprietor, at the end of
three years, to let it to a Chinese farmer, for five years
more ; as the proprietor is hereby less liable to impo-
sition, the only precaution necessary being to see that
the tenant is careful of the vines during the last year,
and leaves them in good condition at the expiration of
the lease. ‘This is the only way in which a very exten-
sive plantation, or one whereon the proprietor cannot
bestow his whole attention, can be managed to advan-
tage. But, if the proprietor has time, and is. careful
and acute, he may render it something more productive,
by keeping it in hisown hands. ‘The labour of clean=
ing the vines, throwing up earth about the roots, and
collecting the produce of the plantation aboyemen-
tioned, of 46,000 plants, was performed by sixteen
Chinese workmen, } ae

Tuer Table at the end of this paper exhibits a calcu-
lation of the profits that may be expected in twelve
years from a given space of ground planted with pep-
per; supposing it to sell at ten dollars a pico]; which
was the price on the field when I was on the Island ,
and then esteemed very moderate. ButI understand
it has lately fallen to something between eight and nine
Dollars.

Tue whole quantity of pepper produced in that year
on the Island, was estimsted at something between six-
teen and twenty thousand pico/s. Taking the medium
quantity at 12 Dollars, which was the selling price,
this article must have amounted to 216,000 Dollars,

aan 5

12 Tn 1802.
2 Cua

390 REMARKS ON THE SPECIES OF PEPPER,

The island pepper is more esteemed than that which
comes from the Ma/ay continent and ‘Sumatra; and it
sells for about one Dollar more per picol. The dif-
ference is occasioned by the haste of the Malays to
gather the fruit before it 1s sufficiently Tipe.

2. Piper Betle: Lin, sp. 40. Syst. aA, Reich. 1.75.
»» Willd. 159., Fl. Zeyl. n. 27... Loureir. Cochinch.
31. -Burman. Zeyl. (93. t.'83. f.. 2.. Moris. Hist.
3.603. Miller's Dict. No. 2. Leaves obliquely
cordate, acuminate, waving, seven-nerved, smooth,

Betele Tambul sive Betre. Burm. Zeyl. 46,

Beire, Betelle, Betele, Betle. Bauh, Hist.-i. p. 437.
Ray. Hist. 1913. Acost. Arom..c. 10. Clus, exot.
176. t..176. Dale pharm: 313.

Beetla Codi. Rheede Mal. 7. p. 29. te 5: Bolat
wela. Herm. Zey!l. 34. 36.66. © ° }

Sans. Tambuli, Parn alata, Néagavalli.
Hind. Tambul, Tamil, Nagb?l, gs
Tamul. Vetillay-Chuddi.

Malay. Siri,

SauMAISE has shown at length, and with considera-
ble strength of argument, that the ancient Greek writers
meant this leaf by Malabathrum, rather than the leaves
of Laurus Cassia, or Tex-pat. The Arabick and
Persian Languages have no names for this plant.
‘Tambol is borrowed from the Hindi by Persian Authors,
who name the leaf Bergitambol. It is called Pam in
Hindj, from the Sa sci Parna, a leaf in general ; in
the same manner as it was known to the Romans under
the name of folium 4, The Indian writers enumerate

43 Salmas. Exer: Plin. p. 1070.
4 Id. ib. p. 1071, 1072.

FOUND ON PRINCE OF WALES'S ISLAND. 391

" several varieties of this plant, distinguished by the size;

shape, and flavour of the leaf?s.

Tse Malays reckon five varieties, among which aré
these three, Siri Malayo, Siri-China, Siri U’dang. The
specimen of which the leaf is above described was the
Siri China. The Siri U’dang they say has the petioles
and nerves red. |

CuntivAtep, but in no great quantity. A larger
quantity is imported from the neighbouring coast.

3. Piper Siriboa. Lin. sp. 41. Reich, 1.76, Willd,
161. Flor. Zeyl. 29. Swartz. obs. 19.° Miller
Dict. No. 10.

| Siriboa Rumph. Amb. 5. 340. t. 117.

Belela quem Sirii boa vovant. Bont. Jav. gl, t. 91;
Ray. Hist. 1913.

Malay Baci. |
THE fruit is nearly as long as a finger, and tastes

like the Betel leaf; and hence the name; doa signify-

ing fruit in the Ma/ay language. It is used as a,sub-
stitute for Betel, especially at sea, where the fresh
leaves cannot be procured.

3. Piper Chaba. H. Leaves alternate, petioled,
lance-ovate, oblique at the base, with veins oppo-

site: Spikes leaf-opposed, peduncled, somewhat.

conical, compact.

15 The Mekhzen tl Adviyeh, a treatise on Materia Medica,
composed by Muyammep Husain, brother to the Nawaz Mu-
uUMMED Reza Kuan, enumerates the following five kinds, Maghi,
Cangiri, Cafiri, Sdnchi, Bengld. He thus describes the method of
treating the leaves, by which they are made tender and acquire a
whitish colour.—A quantity of the leaves newly gathered is putinto
a bag, an earthen pot, or a basket, covered with straw, and placed
ina hole dug in the ground.—The straw is set on fire, and allowed
to burn till the leaves are heated to a certain degree. The fire is
then taken. away, and the basket left for twenty-four hours in the
hole, witha weight laid on it, to press the leaves gently together,
It is afterwards exposed to the dews at night in the summer, or in
winter kept ina warm place, till the leaves become white and tender.

2CA4

$62 REMARKS ON THE SPECIES OF PEPPER,

iper Longum Tsjabe. Rumph. Amb. 5. p- 333. t.
vond0. £. 1. 3 =

Malay. Chabatédi.

Tus species has been generally confounded with
Piper Longum; but a comparison of the figure above
quoted from Rumpuivs, with that of Rugepe’s Catiu-
tirpah. FH. M.7. p. 27. t. 14. will clearly evince them
to be different.

- Tue Piper Longum is called in Sanscrit Pippali, in
Hindi Pipe/, and in Persian Pilpili derdz. ‘The species
now under consideration appears to be the same that is .
called in Sanscrit Chavicé and in Hindi Chab. All the
Sanscrit medical writers, as well as vocabularies of that
language, concur in stating the produce of this plant
to be Gaja pippal or Gaj pipel. This name was how-
ever assigned to a very different plant examined by Sir
Witiiam Jonus ®, the Tetranthera Apetala of Dr.
Roxxzuren 7. And the fruit of a plant, very diffe-
rent from both, is sold under that name by the native
druggists in Calcutta.

5. Piper Latifolium ?

Fruit like the former. Leaves alternate, deeply
cordate, obtuse, nine-nerved. .

Mal. Gédié or Gadikh.
Tue leaves are used asa pot-herb. -

Havine seen only a small specimen, without fructi-
fication, which I know merely by description, I cannot
speak with certainty of this species.

ee

¥6 Asiat. Res. v. 4, p. 303,
17 Pl. Corom. No, 147.

FOUND ON PRINCE OF WALES'S ISLAND.

303

Table exhibiting an Estimate of the expence and produce, in 12 years, of
100 Urlongs, planted with Pepper.

ast Year, Clearing of heavy Timber by
Malays, at 5 Drs. per Urlung, -
To the Chinese Contractor, in the
course of 3 years, when he
engages to deliver the planta-
tion in full bearing, at 225
Drs. per 1000 plants, - 22,500

Of thisin the first year, - 8437 50

2d Year, Farther payment to
contractor, - - 4218 75

Interest of Ist year, at 12
per cent,

- - - - - -~ =

3d Year, In full tocontractor, 9843 75

22,500

—

Interest in the 3d year, - =

4th Year, Interest, - 28 = = -

Supposing the plantation to be let,
during the first 5 years of bearing,
at 160 picols per Lacsha, this will
be 1600 picols 5; which may be sold,
on the ground, at 10 Drs.

sth Year, Interest, Ne dhe 1?
sth year’s crop,

= - - -

6th Year, Interest, - - - - - -
6th year’s crop, - - - - - -

/
7th Yeaf, Interest, - -
7th year’scrop, - - - ~ = -

4
i]

8th Year, Interest, -
8th year’s crop, - - - - =

oth Year, Interest,

’ : ; t
The plants being now in full vigour,||

‘may be let for four years more at
2 cattis each plant, or 2co0 picols ;
Which isp == = en

yoth Year, Interest, -'- - .:- '-
roth year’s crop, - - =

rith Wear,’ Interest, + sie - -
x1th year’s crop,

Prey earyitritenest. i 0
a2thyearscrop, - - - + +.

Dr. Cr. Balance.
Penna aac VER |NRNEE
Sp.Drs/P |\Sp.Drs/P {Sp. Drs. | Pp.
8437|50]) — 8937] so Dr
—-—|—
4218/75|| —— —— |———
1072|50)]| —— 14,228) 75 Dr
9843)75]} —— -——- |-~——

17,575)50
20,000'—

25,779] 95 Dr

12,873) 54 Dr

See am ee

1581} 64 Cr.

ieee

175771) 44 Cr

a

353904 oO Cr

—-

56,212) 49 Cr

~———

saad 99 Cr

112,912 gs5 Cr

| a oat anes

es pat Ap Bale

146,462| so Cr

—_—— ae ee

184,038, — Cr

Description of an wnproved AYGROMETER,
- . ‘ ih
‘BY LIEUTENANT HENRY KATER,
Of His Majesty's 12th Regiment.

Six ncE I had the honor of laying before the Asiatick
Society “fa description of a very sensible Hygrometer,”

I have attended much to the improvement of the in-
strument, and am induced to think that some further
account of it may not be deemed wholly unacceptable,

‘Tne principal objection to the Hygrometer described
in my former paper, arose from the necessity of short-
ening the beard of the oobeena hooloo *, in order to re-
duce the scale, toa convenient length ; this was to be
obviated, only by giving the instrument a circular form,
and inventing some mode of ascertaining without di fii-
culty the number of revolutions made by the index,

- ABCD (fig. 1) 1s a frame, made of smalli square bars
of brass or silver ; this plate is soldered to a square plate
BIi, the edges of which are turned up, as represented
by the dotted lines, to secure the index from injury ;
_on the face of the plate is engraved a circle (see fig. 4)

which is divided into one hundred equal parts. Three
holes, a,b, c, are made through the frame and plate in
the samie eecuen. the holes a &b, are of a conical
form as represented by the dotted lines, and are highly
polished to Jessen friction; the hole at ¢ receives a screw,
one end of which is tapered, and has a xotch cut in it
with a fine saw, which may be closed by means of the

sliding ring d.

Tue avis € f, is made of silver wire, very smooth and
straight, and of the sizeof a large knitting needle; on
the axis, @ screw is formed, by twisting a smaller silver

me ee

. atpeses Contortus.

,
if
iq
——
——————
———
ss

IATA

cn if

Vol IE fage 3, 2

: i |
a
| aA ,
cial i i

4g
al
le

ih in il ti a

DESCRIPTION OF AN IMPROVED HYGROMETER. 395

wire tightly around it from Jeft to right: this screw
should be fourteen or fifteen threads in length ; the end
of the axis, f, isdivided, and is to be closed by a small
sliding ring. As this is the most important part of the
Hygrometer, fig. 2 represents iton an enlarged scale.

A loop and drop (fig. 3) is made of fine gold wire,
of such a size as that when suspended on the screw, it
may slide along it with perfect freedom by means of the

revolution of the axis, but not escape from one interval
to another by any other motion: should the loop, on
trial, be found too large (as indeed it ought to be) it
may be easily closed a little, by placing it on the screw,
and pulling it gently by the drop; it will then assume
an elliptical form, as in the figure. This loop is 1n-
tended to register the number of revolutions made by
the index, as it hangs freely from the axis, and adyances
one interval between the threads of the screw, foreach
Tevolution.

Tue Index, gh, is made of fine wire, accurately
- balanced, and as light as possible; it fits on the end of
the axis e, and is to be placed at right angles with the
commencement of the screw. (See fig. 2.)

Tue beard of the sobeexa hoolvo is represented at f d,
(fig. 1.) The top of it, which is crooked, betng cut
off, it is first secured between the cheeks of the axis,
at f, by means of the small sliding rng; the axis Is
then turned round till the gold loop is brought to the
fifth or sixth inferval of the screw, counting from the
dial plate; the screw at c is then advanced, so as to
- receive the lower or thick extremity of the beard of the

arene hooloo in the notch, where it is also confined by
the sliding ring d. |

306 DESCRIPTION OF AN IMPROVED HYGROMETER.

Tuer extremes of dryness and moisture are determined
in the following manner. ‘The Hygrometer is placed
in a newearthen pot, which has never been wetted, and
exposed for a considerable time to as great a heat as
the grass can bear without injury: when the sdewx is
perfectly steady, the Hygrometer is to be taken out of
the vessel, and the screw at c, turned round with a pair
of pincers, so as to bring the gold loop to the first mmter-
val of the screw on the axis, counting as before from
’ the dial plate, (which is to be placed to the left hand)
and the index to.100 or zero. The Hygrometer must
now be suffered to cool gradually, during which, ifthe
atmosphere be in a mean state of moisture, the index.
will make four or five revolutions ; the oobeena hooloo
_is then to be continually wetted with a hair pencil and

water, till the index is again perfectly steady. This
will require some time, as it moves very slowly when
within a few degrees of extreme moisture. ‘The degree.
at which the index stands is now to be noted, and the,
number of intervals counted between the dial plate and,
gold loop, and this number prefixed to the observed
degrees will give the extent of the scale. |

All observations made with this Hygrometer, are to
be reduced to what they would have been had the scale
consisted of 1000 parts, or ten revolutions of the index..
This is most convenient, as it facilitates the comparison
of observations made with different Hygrometers. An
example may not be thought superfluous. Suppose
the scale of the Hygrometer to be 1145, or eleven in-
tervals and forty-five parts ; and that at the time of ob-
servation, there are four intervals, between the dial plate
and gold loop, and 50 parts shown by the indew; this
would be written 450. Then, as 1145 : 1000: :
ASO : 393 nearly, the number of degrees to be regis-
tered.

DESCRIPTION OF AN IMPROVED HYGROMETER. 307

Ir two of these Hygrometers, in which the extremes
of dryness and moisture are well determined, be com-
pared together, they will seldom differ fen divisiois
from each other, which is.as near a coincidence as can
be expected.

Tue eobeena hooloo or Andropogon Contortus is found
in every part of the country, in the month of January,
when it should be gathered, and thoroughly dried in
the sun, before it is used.

Tuis grass appears to be far superior to any other
hygroscopic substance, hitherto discovered. In the
Encyclopedia Britannica, the scale of Saussure’s
Hygrometer is said to consist of 400 degrees, or ra-
ther more than ove revolution of the index; the Hy-
grometer here described makes e/even or twelve tevo-
lutions; it possesses also the advantage of being per-
fectly portable, cannot easily be deranged, and may be
much reduced in size, if,thought necessary, without
affecting the extent of the scale.

se

On Ancient Monuments, containing SANScKIT

INSCRIPTIONS,
BY H. T. COLEBROOKE, ESQ.

if the scarcity of authentic materials for the ancient,
and even for the modern, history of the Hindu race,
importance is justly attached to all genuine monuments,
and especially inscriptions on stone and metal, which
are occasionally discovered through various accidents.
If these be carefully preserved and diligently examined ;

and the facts, asceftained from them, be judiciously
employed towards elucidating the scattered informa-
tion, which can be yet collected from the remains of
Indian literature, a satisfactory progress may be finally
made in investigating the history of the Hindus. ‘That
the dynasties of princes, wh have reigned paramount
in India, or the line of chieftains, who have ruled over
particular tracts, will be verified ; or that the events of
war or the effects of policy, during a series of ages,
will be developed ; is an expectation, which I neither
entertain, nor wish to excite. But the state of man-
ners, and the prevalence of particular doctrines, at dif-
ferent periods, may be deduced from a diligent perusal
of the writings of authors, whose age is ascertained :
and the contrast of different results, for various and
distant periods, may furnish a distinct outline of the
progress of opinions. A brief history of the nation it-
self, rather than of its government, will be thus
sketched: but if unable to revive the memory of
great political events, we may at least be content
to know what has been the state of arts, of sci-
ences, of manners, in remote ages, among this
very ancient and early civilized people; and to learn

ON ANCIENT MONUMENTSe 309

what has been the succession of doctrines, religious and
philosophical, which have prevailed in a nation ingeni-
ous yet prone to superstition.

UNFORTUNATELY, writers have seldom given the
dates of their compositions: and the Hindu's love of
fable, and distaste for sober narrative, have been as un-
friendly to the biography ef authors, as to the history
of princes. The lives of few celebrated persons have
been written, and those, which have been composed,
exhibit the same fondness for improbable fiction, which
pervades the mythological works of the Himdus. The
age of an author must be therefore sought from circum-
stances mentioned in his writings: and none more fre-
quently affords the desired information, than the au-
thor’s notice of his patron; who generally is either the
sovereign of the country, or some person standing in
such relation to the court, as gives occasion to mention
the name of the reigning prince. ‘Thus every ancient
monument, which fixes the date of a reign, or deter-
mines the period of a particular dynasty, tends to the
ascertainment of the age of writers who fiourished in
that reign or under that dynasty: and, conversely,
wherever dates can be with confidence deduced imme-
diately from an author’s works, these may furnish his-
torical information and assist the explanation of ancient
monuments.

Own this account the preservation and study of old
inscriptions may be earnestly recommended. Jt is not
on a first or cursory examination, that the utility of
any particular monument for the illustration of the civil
or literary history of the country can be certainly de-
termined. Even those, which at first sight appear un-
interesting, may be afterwards found to bear strongly on
an important point. Instances might be brought from
the few inscriptions, which have been already published.

400 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS.

But it is not my present purpose to enter on an exami-
nation of published monuments, but to urge the com-
munication of every inscription which may be hereafter
discovered ; at the same time, that I lay before the
Society copies and translations of those which have been
recently communicated from various parts of India.

Ir isa subject for regret, that the originals, of which
versions have before been made publick, are not depo-
sited where they might be accessible to persons engaged
in researches into Indian literature and antiquities: but
much more so, that ancient monuments, which there
is reason to consider as important, have been remoyed
to Europe, before they had been sufficiently examined,
or before they were accurately copied and translated.
{ may specify, with particular regret, the plate of cop-
per found at Benares, and noticed by Capt. WiLForpD
in the present volume of Asiatick Researches (p. 108.) ;
and still more a plate which has been mentioned to me
by a learned Pandit, (who assured me that he was em-
ployed in decyphering it) *, and which appears, from
“a copy in his possession, to have contained a grant of
land by the celebrated JAyaAcHANDRA, when a young
prince associated to the empire of his father : from this
information it seems to have been particularly valuable
on account of the genealogy comprised in it.

Transiarions might indeed be made from the Pan-
dit’s copyof the fast mentioned plate, and from one taken
by alearned native inCapt. WiLForp’sservice, from the
plate discovered at Benares. But my experience of the
necessity of collating the copies made by the best Pandits,

—_—_

— 3 eee
— -

* Servoru Trivepi ; the same who assisted me in decyphering
the copy of an inscription on Firoz Suaun’s pillar at De/hi, As.

Res. vol. 7- p. 180.

CTT
. ea
a : : a } )
=

f—} te
Siename

ra,

FMSAATACARA HA TN AAS9 GR SlNAaAsee Taq
KAA MAT CYT tH WME ATA Ay Aas
> NCH. (8) AE UCB (TE ACABALA NH (cq 19 MEHISAI
SAUTIAG AN TUA12 THRE (2 (LH AAG a.

7
5

A SMAIRWATR ATAUVSAE AT VARIA

9 RBESASIRNEGSTG OBS ASSAAIAS22 TINS

: CMAALT 7 91% (TASS ONG (s Sigurt & Sana
phn SE ERC COE UEC {58
| Vom AA aoa g 3a ANBIA {HAA
ATA (AAA H ABCA S Hr namie dees bane
CHG AU AZIZ 2 el 1 FIO STA A AUB 9° Teas

AFARIS(ASBACHAMNG A AGU SA AAcTNS AD |

MG Ae WAS? 19 Vasa gqagar ys |

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 401

fram inscriptions in ancient or unusual character, dis
courages me from placing implicit confidence in their
‘transcripts: and’the originals are at present beyond
reach of reference, having been conveyed to Europe to
be there buried in some publick museum or private col=
lection. :

Tue only amends, which could be now made for, the
reinoval of those interesting monuments, would be the
publication of copies correctly made1in fac simile. From
such transcripts, provided they be executed with great
care, the text may be decyphered and translated. An
exact copy of the Sanscrit inscription on the stone at
Cintra in Portugal, enabled. Mr. Wi xK1Ns to ascertain
the date and scope of that inscription ; as well as the
names, which it contains *. Similar copies of other
inscriptions would in like manner furnish oriental scho-
lars with the means of ascertaining their purport; and
the publication of fac similes may, for this purpose, be
recommended to those who are in passes*ion of the ori+
ginals, - | .

I now proceed to describe, and, so far as I have
_ succeeded in decyphering them, to explain, the severat
inscriptions on ancient monuments in stone and copper,
which have been lately presented tq the Astatick Society.
‘ Si
i Inscriptions ona Plate of Copper found in the dishrict
| cof Treva.

Towarps the end of 1803, a plate of copper was
discoyered in digging earth for the repair of the high-

a eR AS Re ISIS SET

* Murpny’s Travels in Portugal, p. 277.

Vout. IX. a

402. ' ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

way through the Manamati hills in the district of
Tipura. It was carried to Mr. Eniot, Magistrate of
the district; and by him communicated to the Asiatick
Society. Onexamination, it has been found to contain
an inscription declaratory of a grant of land, dated
near 600 years ago.

Tue plate measures 11 inchesin height and g in
breadth ; and is engraved on one surface only. The
sides have a gentle curvature ; and, at top, is an abrupt
bend allowing room to a figure coarsely delineated and
apparently intended to represent a temple. The cha-
racter agrees nearly with that now in use in Bengal:
but some of the letters bear a closer resemblance to the
writing of Tirhut *.

Tue following is an exact copy of the inscription in
Nagari \etters, as decyphered by the aid of several
Pandits. A literal translation 1s subjoined ; and a fae
simile of the original is exhibited in the annexed en-
graving,

* There is reason to suppose the writing, as well as the language
of Bengal to be originally the same with the Tirhitiya: altered, in
course of time, since the separation which has been the consequence
af a colony of Canyacubya Brahmens settling in Bengal.

403)

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS.

<7»
eens cs s3 Si eee»
2 » fa} 5 *

DJSPRIE EAL WDB eb Wicle PPB S| ETP NL tuna Un la e Bp Indie
haesig i Ayoub heh hye bib alte [bjrieen 2B ble eR PE InIK
‘RRBs wie BUSSES Deshyte Drawer Ml delufit bh dle YU) co he Ne sie

pa

BERD pba RPP Sees LINE H wr Serie Sa: lent bul abst bal >

Web yajokt tebe Mab r-fPolS MPT> Volto WS HPLyinbD blebicfer Bite Ih k2
eisesealte uy upa ES WS wvcb eS up mrnen haN WAP IIe ea

til Ue HR Beha bbb hb eS MbiLibiiPRs| Deis HRs L neers
aT sys eS eh i esses BL REAR

“~

D

. ON ANCIENT (MONUMENTS |.»

AQA .

a Heda iene gS

nt dapikcexincennanel ep ein erm ras
lea. byebiches bliss ues} te let? bid) SR
Jaicwp una ere th I nani ays
pfu) SIS bln Beles irinkeS 8 Wo Wein
It blE HBINb opps veal Ji| hed a SISB B ujineh yer | USIP a
Rimi) b Oa b IRS BS Sie nH ebehbihwRbIeS fl as Pwlidd-dae
Ebjinla) PIAS I rine Wik Eee Re YRS PEALE mB A NBD Lb i)
ter al Je die | inl S| Dk b|/ PREVA L Id Dit plhisigl | NopiegitineiaiByejaunwse.
hRopirlte iby SJhieh| dp) ePID Rede? Ws } mie SE wie READ Dicu

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 405
TRANSLATION.

2, In that * eminent and spotless family, was born,
an ornament of the learned, renowned throughout the
world, endowed with science, and practising ‘good
deeds, the celebrated, happy, and venerable Hx’p’1 +;

in whose pure mind, virtue ever ranges, like a swan in
the limpid lake.

2. From him sprung the happy chief of ministers,
who exhibits the joys of unsullied glory ; a spotless
moon, among mortals, and at sight of whom the hare-
spotted luminary { appears swoln [with envy,] and
distempered with alternate increase and wane.

3. Tuar venerable officer §, ever relying on holy
virtues ||, is eminently conversant with well guided
morals, and conspicuous for the observance of practical

duties. ;

4, HrMseELr an ocean of generosity and meditation,

——=- — ———

ee es

* This use of the pronoun indicates the conspicuousness of the
object ; as if sufficiently known without further designation.

+ Here. as well as with the subsequent names, the particle ev
is subjoined without changing the preceding vowel. This is con-
trary to the rules of the language, and emendations have been ac-
cordingly proposed: but I shall not disturb the text.

t+ The moon is named Sason, from a fancied resemblance of its
spots to a leveret. Pandits, to whom I showed maps of the moon,
copied from Hevettius and Ricciotus, fixed upon the Losa Paludova
and Mons Porphyrites, or Kerztexvs and ArisTarcnus, for the
spots, which, they think, exhibit the similitude of a hare,

§ The term is 4swanihgad’hica, which the Pandits are disposed to
explain as signifying ‘a general commanding cavalry.’’» Other
interpretations may be suggested : the word is an unusual one.

|| This, as indeed the whole of the verse, is obscure, and ad=
mits of various interpretations. In this place, more than one reads
ing has been proposed.

2D3

400 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS |

yet thirsting to taste, by ‘practice of aildeady, that
which alone confines the fleeting thoughts * ; sympa-
thising with other living beings, an unrivalled theatre
of virtue, practising good deeds, and, in private, only
a contemplative saint, this. auspicious D'nap’ manne
rose, as a. lucpinany of joy above the earth.

om Siiehiog to the world. was the delight, of this
pre-eminent sovereign of the earth, the happy. Rana-
BANCA MALLA, whose oficest he was ; for the deity,
who has a hundred,eyes , is obscured, even in his
own abode, by the dazzling glories of that [monarch],
which traverse the three worlds, in all directions. lt

6. ‘May the twenty drénas § of land, in the village*
of Hachanda, granted to him by that generous prince,
continue. as long as. sun and moon endure, yielding
the ample harvest of unsullied praise ; for it is land se-
cure from invasion, delightful, like a pleasant painting,
and appears like a crest in the assemblage of cities.

7. * Turis land, with definite boundaries. has Sie
given by the liberal prince himself, the-range of whose
glory therefore extends, as is fit, in all directions.
U
‘O ruTure kings; understand this inscription
on coMee by which that officer || humbly 1 ase solicits
ness Mm

Pts, MR

* Here again the sense is obscure ; and more bests one reading
may, be proposed, The praise is evidently grounded on the union
of practical virtues, with religious contemplation. Bim 2)"

+ Aswaniband hica. ie aakd open l

~ IwpRA, et

§ A measiite of land, still used in the eastern patts of | Bengal 3
originally as fauch as might be sown with one Drona of seed: fora
Drona is a measure of capacity. (As. Res. vol, 5..p. 96.) ‘The

rona, vulgarly called Din, varies‘in different districts: Jt may,
however, be reckoned wes, i ann to eight maw an ‘ot two
acres and two thirds, wivsy tog

|| Aswaniband’ hica. 1 coodemel 2

Et eA

oy

ae
be

| 202 fp ale Shnea tn PRGh EA i ine
_SRERERE woz BE Lela PE? I Bye nelek hs mu cie KB) ere,
py en wb Brvls be beleyets ieee Aor i wrk by
ye ce 2yske & Pweap sk PPh’ fe P
“papren Fy bib by ZBL PS MB bss2n 2: rete kis ba Ns lioie
: Tekh a ok ee bas aa eines Bat ti
2
Rewiekn L ebry bel Bhd Fang Gas iente nt

A ree 2]

LS
. Bese pepe bP Pae ene casera la eye
brayP ry Pe kl: Ferih UPS
ee Brie bes Welbeese brig,

ele Rn ®: tes sie IaBieh ny
ie ie pez PUP j Wierd

a Praise
on Per 2s J2P, P< Ih?

Se

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 407

‘you: this land should be preserved ; nor is the per-
manence of the realm consistent with the slightest in-
“jury.: ashame on avarice !) That iand is, as it were, a
widow, the sovereign of which is despised Ln his
_covetousness. | Fee

oe Autnoven this excellence of the descendants
[of that prince, | which is guarded by their natural
Miodp 2 be sufficient! 2 apparent, yet does Mer’pini,

urged’ if ‘the multitude of the good qualities of that
unsu , race, thus make it known *. | |

xian expired of the See king 1141) 4 dated
in. the seventeenth year of RANABANCA Matta,

Sriv “at Hartrea’La De’ vAt,/or expressed in nu-
merals, Samvat \, ve on nthe 2 2th of Hie Sun’s being

in the balance.’ ON Bi at ibe Bw |
AY, F roe ee (x4 f~-4
Hl. Inscription on a Pines of Copper found it the a trict
bak “ of Gonaxaun, nieve, ie

2 oe a

% - |

“A piate of copper, containing an Seeeaiion in
the Sanscrit language, declaratory of a-grant of land,
but without date, was lately. found<in the district of
Gorakhpur, near the river called the little Gand hac.
Tt was Paent to Mr. Jonn ‘mebet Magistrate of

~~

ones

¢

e This inscription appears not to be. a grant a Zhe! sovereign ; 3
but a memorial of the grant recor ded by the possessor, who must ©
have been the heir of the grantee, and who seems to acknowledge :
in this plaee the liberality of the grantor’s S sUCcessors, ‘evntinuing
the land to him. at ao : ;
+ Corresponding to A.D. 1210. ee
t This prince is probably a PRES EES from the grantor
“named in the fifth verse. - ~~
§ Here Samvat is used for the year ofthe kings feigny’ Sée re=
"marks, towards the closeiof this ba gi an inscription found at
b ib fal in Dini pur aaa a a é
2. DA ao we ~ Ca: 7 .

f 7 re
ev Be ae lp
- o j

408 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

the district, and by him communicated to
Witrorp, who has presented it to the Asia

ciety.

Tue plate, which is 162 inches long, and 122 broad,
is engraved on one face only. The lines, of which
there are 94, run in the length of the plate; and on
the left side is a curvature, on which a semi-circular ap-
pendage is riveted, containing a flat button representing
the impression of a seal. ‘The figure is very imperfect,
but seems to be intended for some animal.

Wiru the plate itself, Captain Witrorp Communi.
cated a copy of its contents as decyphered by a a
in his service. On carefully comparing it with the ori-
ginal, I found all the essential passages, as well as the
names, correctly given: a few alterations, which this
comparison showed to be necessary, have been made
with the concurrence of several Pandits from Tirhut,
who assisted me in collating it. I preferred the aid of
Pandits of that province, because the peculiarities

of the characters, where they differ widely, as they
do in many instances, from common Déve nagari,
make a nearer approach to the Tiriviliya letters than

to any other now in use. The whole inscription is ~
indeed remarkable for the uncommon form of the con-
sonants, and the very unusual manner in which the ~
vowels are marked. On this account, an exact copy 7
of the original in fac simile will be subjoined ; as well

as a correct transcript in modern Déva négart letters,
The following version is a3 literal as the difference of

idiom permits. _..

TRANSLATION. 4

‘Saturation to the God, who is manifested i in
esis forms, from earth to the performer of a SACTix ©

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 4AOQ

fice *, ‘who is an universal soul, to be apprehended only
by contemplation of saints; and who pervades all.

2. ‘SanuTarion to the unborn God ». who makes
the world’s production, its continuance, and ultimate
destruction ; and the recollection of whom serves as 2
vessel of transport across the ocean of mundane ills.

3. ‘SatuTatTion be to the husband of Lacsumi;
to him who reposes on Se’sHa as on a couch ; to him
who is Visunvu extracting the thorns of the three
worlds ; to him who appears in every shape *.

A. ‘Saturation be to the blessed foot of Pa’r-
vati§, which destroyed the demon Manisua, by
whom al} had been overcome ; and whtich gives felicity
to the world.

5. ‘SurrounDED by groves of lofty canes ||, in-
accessible through the range of edifices on the hill’s

, summit encompassed by a deep ditch in which foun-
tains spring, secure by impassable defence from

6. dread of foes, a royal abode there is named Vijeya-
pura **, which is. situated on the declivity of the

_* Siva, manifested in eight material forins : viz. Earth, Waters
Fire, Air, Ether, the Sun, the Moon, and the person who per-
forms a sacrifice,

+ Brauma the creator, himself not created, and therefore
termed unborn.

_ } Visuwv, whoreposes on the serpent 4nanta or Sesha; and who
has been incarnate in various shapes to relieve the world from op-
pressors. :

_§ Buawani or Durca slew Manisuasura, The legend is well
known.

|| Bamboos (Bambusa Arundinacea and other species),

** The place here described may be Vijey-pur, on the northern
declivity of the Vind’hya hills, a few miles from the temple of
Vind hyd-vasini near Mirzdpur on the Ganges. It is the ancient
esidence of a family, which claims descent from the former sove+
reigns of . enares; and is still the abode of the head of that family.

ut the terms of the text, Uttaragiri catace, rather seem to signity
‘declivity of the northern mountain,’ than ‘northern declivity of
the mountain ;’ and that interpretation points to the range of snowy

ag instead of Vind’ hya which is reckoned a tropical range

)

$10 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS ;

northern mountain, where the pain of regret is un-
‘known, and every gratification is found. __
5 Oe ¢ ; P
7. ‘Tere reigned the fortunate D’Harma’-
pityaA, lke another Bod’ hisatwa, a mighty and
prosperous prince, whose glory spread over the four
-8.seas. Hissonwas Jaya’pitya *, adorable like the
moon, the fortune of the world, like the tree which
bears every desired fruit, and satisfying thirst like a
g. deep lake: humble, though a king ; though young,
prudent and averse from amorous passion; though
liberally bestowing all, yet ever receiving the best
result of all.
* :

10. ‘ His minister, learned, intelligent, and
vanquisher of foes, the son of a mighty chieftain
and counsellor Criracirti, was the fortunate

i1. Mapa’tr +, whose pleasing counsels obtained a
ready hearing, and who was by nature eager for the
reduction of enemies f. ,

he

ee — =
ih} - ’

* The name of JayvapiTya, is known as the patron of certain
authors, who flourished at Casi; and who are considered as ancient
writers. He is mentioned in the title of the Vamaxa Cuasted, and
even termed the author of that grammatical work. I shall not un-
dertake to determine whether this be the same person. __

+ The names, being uncommon, are, in this instance, doubtful.
Srimaddli is clearly given as the name of the ministe) and either
the whole of it may be his name; or it may be resolved into Srimat
Ali, ot into Sri Madéli. The latter is most agreeable to the preyail-
ing practice of prefixing Sri toa proper name. In this inscription,,
the auspicious syllable is prefixed to the names of the two kings
first mentioned ; but is not-added to the names of the writers of it,
who are noticed towards the close, (v.20 & 22.) .

Critacirti may signify ‘ of established fame:’ but, if taken as an
epithet, it leaves no other term which can be assumed as. the name
of the minister’s father. f

t The text exhibits Pracriti parabaddhacecsho, Though a yery
‘unsatisfactory reading it is here preserved, and has been translated
in the most probable sense, which I am able to suggest for it.

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. ADJ1

12. ‘Tue village of Dummadumé *, obtained
by him from the royal favor, and rich in tillage,
dwellings and cattle, has been assigned by him-to

Durea’ +.

13, ‘THe opulence-of the good, who put theit
trust in the great, is indeed beneficial to others :
the clouds gather water from the sea, and shower

14, it dowh on the growing crop. Rare indeed are
those liberal persons, who distinguish not between
their own dependants and strangers : how many are
the all-productive trees even in the celestial grove +?

15. ‘Do not imagine, father, that, in the sinful
age, a general equality prevails: the sovereign de-
fends the earth, but a weak individual guards not

16. even his house §. Birth and death, success and
misfortune, are perpetually passing : why not,
therefore, protect another’s glory like one’s own?

17. He, who bestows fertile land furnished with the
means of agriculture, mounts a celestial vehicle,
and ascends to heaven, gladdening his progenitors.

18. But he, who foolishly resumes land allotted to. gods
or priests, assuredly causes his ancestors to fall to
hell, even though they had previously attained
heaven.

r 7 . ee ee ee ere

te | village of this name is situated } én the district of Allahabad,
within n twenty miles of Bijeypur on the Ganges. But the name is
not uncommon ; and may belong to some place nearer to the northern.
mountains.

+ Jayapirya’s minister, Mapatt, appears to have assigned this.
village for general charitable uses, by consecrating it to’ the goddess
Durea. Such at least seem to be the most consistent reading and
interpretation of the text.

t Innxa’s garden called Nandana; in which five celestial trees
are placed, termed Ca/padruma, Parijita, &c. The Calpadruma
yields, as its fruit, eyery thing which is desired.

§ The intention of this. and the following lines is to ad eye
the resumption of the grant.

Al? ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS >

19. ‘Sprune from 2 very pure race, respectful
towards gods, priests, spiritual parents and the
29. king, a generous founder of temples. whovhas dug
many ponds; by the tenderness of his disposition
an image of Swgata t, a treasure of virtues, with
subdued organs, wise, and averse from unpleasing
21. discourse : such was the Céyast’ha Nagadatla. By
him was composed with great devoutness, this
praise of the minister; in apt measure and pleasing
verse, elegant * and apposite. vn ” me
22. <The last three verses were written by his
younger brother Vipya’parra;, for, he himself
was fearful of proclaiming his own virtues. __.

23. Ricu and fertile is the village, “obtained
through the king’s favour as an endowment for
subsistence; and still more productive is this other

village for virtuous men +.’ eee SF
he “ia
oli a UVa Toggeeert

t From this comparison to Sugate or Budd’ha, as. well asa pre-
vious comparison to a Bodhisatwa, it may be inferred, that the au-
thor, if not himself a follower of the sect of Budd ha was at least
more amicably disposed towards that sect, than modern orthodox
Hindus appear to be. MOTE SH,

It is hardly necessary to inform the reader, that the last Budd’ he
was conspicuous for his tender, compassionate disposition. The my-
thology of the sect of Budd’ha peoples heaven with Bodhisatwas :
and, from this class of beings, the Budd’ has are selected. Gatrama
Bupp’na was a Bod hisatwa under the name of Sweracpru, before

. > : e ; ait ae)
he was incarnate as Sipp’HakT’HA son of SUDD'HODANA.

* The text exhibits Surna critassbha; which must be amended by
reading either Swarna or Suvarna. he last is preferable as giving
the mast correct metre: either way the meaning is rendered ‘ ele-
gant, as gold,’ or by ‘ well selected words ;’ for Suvaraa or Swarng
or Swarna signifies gold; and may be resolyed into words, Su well,
and varna or arna a letter or syllable. conte

+ The last line is very obscure. If it have been rightly decy-
phered and explained, it may allude tosome other grant held by the
Rijd's mmister, for his own subsistence,

A13°

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS,

Raab econ Iles ll ‘DeDitees Fo Hsiue debuale Ys | bite hos fk

DBL HBR TREE He | bSbagsht wz. eed ud iii i hy

snbwl jie Ew 3 eb ZeleyoP ee elS 2 lb bua) ie [iS kb) pp
Ableeblvew: Bue 2 aut th Il BIE BIN BESS Bafa Nine si | fP > Sup

Jud BY LbEIBLATL A II gee van tal b ibe h | eb) 2 Se a liak

2

eee) rT x ll phy REcbledablel buiBay IB | lth ts iB [PPD

ibe Wei: snepuid au eyed doe | pele Saya by ute bus iets rT

Lh{TOB ball Lee ike ieee | Ie maby Erbe Eb iets bf nila} Wskepdransl

ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS: «

ALA,

uj obiphie sel

e

| meppkiyaphaiiie | im I: wNiDbL paanoueenyD

Du wb iid Sfa)uSdj rb r a II Lb Lei LepbjikSho aoe
Bay Prele db Rbpluindnd ESS I bef bre: ete Deeotelenre ie Lohse
tame buh AD Jute w Wd I £ Qublurtbltonebuu)s2 bbe |b
Iaob ED tytbie bh Se > VY Il Upp Yorlta Bio BYALje | wliebpiis
nlp eh De Seah | > I PEP Mel be sud bre: wets fe Bas)
t}elesnbtl hla fil Jah) bu [Erin 8-Ba Dhlt'enbd t IBD ete

415

CONTAINING S5ANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS.

MAb: ey AAva PAY) Bb ees | WPRAL SPE
SESERIR ED ak ey Sell neh LE TBP bie | IDI LU a)abiblEI RES
AdidehemS Ye | mafebebin hie hw 2% || kW es wh des
Buel) k embbIS tek Mul de> yelod issdnb PoLbDile] eiaplio iy Help hPL
aviob? nvlbuS ft Well Wome bypassed Ruble | wave ule be VE
Hele? ihioPSS bese || we Ieee shavlewheeelh| ye yh Roses
ible ble ® sigejlause Bhs led Uelee 22 te RebplD mibeleis Bt bids,

i

416 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS >

III. Inscription on three Platesof Brass found at
€

CHITRADURG, a

ied

A eran of land, engraved on three plates of brass,
which were found at Chitradurg in the year 1800, and
a fac simile of a similar grant found at the same place,
have been presented by Major Ce Mackenzie to the
Asiatick Society. * ee

Tue plates, which appear to be very similar in both
grants, may be described from that, of which the ori-
ginal has been received. ‘They are nearly seven inches
wide and as many high; but surmounted by an arch of
two inches in height. The two exterior plates have
been engraved on the inner side only : the middle one
is so on both faces. At the edge isa rim, half a line
thick, by which the inscription is secured from being
effaced by the rubbing of the plates. “They are held
together by a brass ring, cn which isa seal of the same
metal representing a boar.. The engraved surfaces have
some appearance of having been once gilt.

Tue language is Sanseri/, excepting the description
of the lands, which is in the Canara dialect. The
whole inscription is in Déva-nagari characters: but
some of the letters are formed in a very unusual man~
ner. It contains a grant by the king of Vidydnagar
(pronounced Bijdnagar,) formerly the capital of Carna/-
aea; and is dated little mere than four hundred years
ago. Grants, by kings of this dynasty, are not uncom-
mon in the Dekhin; and may be of use in determining
the dates of their several reigns. These pringes were
enlightened patrons of science ; especially Hartma’ra
and Bucca Ra’sa sons of Sancama the founder of

the dynasty,

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. Al7

Masor Mackenzie forwarded atranslation of this
inscription made by his interpreter Caventy Bortra.
The original is, in some instances, read differently by
‘the Pandits whom J have consulted : not however mak-
ing any change in the purport, ner in any material pas-
sage. The following translation is conformable to their
interpretation: and the copy, which is subjoined, ex-
hibits the text as read by them.

TRANSLATION.

|. © Saturation to Gane’s’a. I bow to Sam-
BHu, graced with the beautiful moon crowning bis
lofty head; himself the pillar, which upholds the
2, origin of the three worlds*. May he, whose head
is like an elephant’s, the son of Hara +, the cause
of uninterrupted supremacy, the giver of boons, and
the Juminary which dispels darkness ¢, preserve us.
3. May the auspicious primeval boar§, by whom

ee

* Siva, or Mananeva, is figured with the moon as a crest,
According to mythology, he upholds the creator.

This, and the two following stanzas, seem to be the same which
are found, but in a differeut order, at the beginning of the inscrip-
tion on the plates preserved at the templ= of Conjeveram: (As. Res.
vol. 3. p. 39.) with some diilerence, hawever, in the reading and
interpretation. .

+ Ganesa, figured with an elephant’s head, reckoned son o
Hara or Manapeva and of his wife Parvary. ,

t The original is here inaccurate: it exhibits Turas tivra timira

gir which means nothing, and in which a syllable is deficieny

or the metre. In the fac simile of another grant, the same passage
is correctly written Varad.zs tivra timira mihiro,

§ The incarnation of Visunv, as a boar, who upheld the earth
submerged by the ocean, is well known to all who are conyersant
with Indian mythology,

Vor. IX. 25

,

AN8 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS.

closely embraced, the earth exults, grant us vast —
prosperity. | a
e

4, ‘Tur ambrosial moon, brother of the goddess —
Ramé, is the offspring of the milky ocean*, having

a common origin with the gem Caustubha, the all-
5. productive tree and the ever beneficent cow. In the
lunar race was born aking named Yapu +, by ade-
scendant of whom [Crishna] son of VasupE’va,
6.the earth has been protected. In his line arose a
king named Saneama {, who abounded in weighty —
virtues, and shunned the society of the wicked.

*.©Tnis king had [five] sons, Hanrinara,
Campa, Buccara’ya who was sovereign of the
earth §, Ma’rara and Mupeapa. tall

s. * Amone these five graceful princes, the most
celebrated was Butca sovereign of the earth, con-
spicuous for valor, as Arjuna aniong the Pa’npa-

g.vas. Therefore, did Buccara’ya, fierce in bat-
tle, become a fortunate poe apply ‘his left.
a A

et

a

: +
( : 4,

* The story of the churning of the ocean is familiar to every one.

+ Yapu, the celebrated ancestor of Crisuna, was of the lunar
face. : :

{ The pretensions of Sancama to be descended from the lunar —
line of Cshatriyas or Chandravansis are here asserted. :

§ The names of three of these princes, as well as of their father,
o¢ecur in the writings of Man’ HAVA-ACHARYA, and of his brother
SaAyANa-ACHARYA, who were priests and counsellors of those mo-
narchs. Lael

Harrwara Rasa, and Buecana Rasa or Bucca RAYA, are named —

in Mav’Hava’s commentary on the /¢das, and Campa is mentioned
in his grammatical works. 3 ie

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS, A1lQ.

~ shoulder * to uphold the burden of the mighty
elephants posted at the quarters of the world.

10. When his army, in warlike array, performed evolu-
tions on the frontier of his dominions, the Turash-
cas felt their mouths parched; the Céncan’a, terri-
fied, apprehended impending death; the And’ hras
fled, in consternation, to the caverns; the Gurjgras
trembled; the Cambdjas lost their firmness; and
the Calingas were quickly discomfited +.

11. § He was aconspicuous monarch, splendid,
and a supreme ruler of kings, but acting towards
disobedient princes, as the king of birds towards

12.serpents; embraced by the concubines of kings,
destroying hostile chiefs, defending the heroes of
Hindi Raya, endowed with knowledge and other
qualities }.

RA a

SS oe - -

* The text appears to. exhibit the negative of Dacshina right.

At the eight principal points of the compass, elephants uphold
the world.

+ This verse is extremely inaccurate in the original: it has been
corrected with the aid of the fac simile of another grant beforemen-
tioned. It begins Yasyodd’ haya yudd he yudd’ ha range, which is un-
meaning and contains too many syllables for the metre. It should
be, asin the other inscription, Yasyodyad yudd’harange. A sylla-
ble is wanting in Turushcah, written Tushcib. "Two were deficient
in Bhaya bhara bharitah expressed Bhava bharitah. Both ‘inscrip-
tions write Cambojah for Cambojah. In one, Sapari is erroneously
put for S2padi. why

- All the names of nations, which occur in this place, have been re-
peatédly explained,

+ ‘These stanzas are very obscure : and I am not confident, that
they are rightly translated. Hinduraya seems to be similar to the
Hindipati of Bundelkhand: for so the government of that country
was denominated under the chiefs, who ruled it in the last and jn
the preceding century. |

The stanzas appear to be similar to two in the.grant preserved at .

fgyjeveram: viz. ‘25th and 26,h. (As. Res. vol. 3. p.47). But
‘€: is some d.fference in reading as well as in interpretation,

2EL

420 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

_* 43. © By that victorious king was Vidydnagari
made a permanent metropolis; a fortunate city,
which is adapted to promote universal conquest *.

By

14. ‘Gavra’mBica’ became his queen ; a prin-
cess respectable fur her virtues; as Rama the be-
loved wife of Crisna; as Gauri of S’1va; as
15.S’acui, of Inpra; as Saraswati, of BRAHMa’;
16. as CH’HA‘’yA’, of Su’rya-++. By the charmsof her
graceful gaiety, she obscured T1n6Trama }; by
her happy fidelity to her husband, she excited the

envy of Anasu’ya’ §.

17. ‘Tuts liberal prince, pre-eminentamong kings,
begot, on that divine princess {, a son named Hartr-
18.HARA: who is become a protector of the good
and punisher of the wicked; who has obtained his

* Vidydnagari signifies the city of science. FerrisHTan was mis-
taken, when he alflirmed, that it was founded by Ras, Bettat peo
and named after his son Bisa KAY. (Scorr’s History of Dekhan,
Intr. p. xi.) It is believed to have been founded by the wwe bro-

thers Haripara and Bucea Raya, :

+ The Gods and Goddesses, to whom this happy couple is here
compared, are mentioned in the text by titles, some of which
are uncommon; and have been therefore changed, in the transla-
tion, to others more generally known. Rama is probably intended

for Kapma as a representative of Lacsumr. és

Yn the original, Saraswart is called Vani; but the fac simile of
the other inscription exhibits Savitri. Sagat is, in the original,
erroneously written Sacu1; and jimz occurs at the beginning of
the verse for zama. :

{ Trtrorrama is thename of a nymph celebrated for her beauty.

§ Anasuya is wife of Atri, and distinguished for conjugal af-
fection. The name signifies unenvious. ee

q The princess is here termed Gaurt, which is a title of Per-
vati; and which conveys an allusion to her own name Cava
BICA<

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. AQ

wish, with the wife; who is enviable, and is de-
voted tothe god Hanrrnara..

19. ‘ THe tree of virtue thrives by water poured
with his donations*; while he shines with the
splendid glory of sixteen kinds of gift -.

20. ‘Inthe year 1317 {3 and, of the cycle,

| Dhdata; in the month. of Migha and light forte
21; night; on the day of full moon; under the asterism
sacred to the Pitris (Magha;) on Sunday; upon
the bank of the river Tuneabhadrd, which is
22.adorned by the mountain Hemacut‘a; in the pre-
23. sence of the auspicious deity, Viru’pa’csHa 4; the
valiant Harinara 4, revered among mortals, li-
beral in his gifts of land, and especially attentive to
24.venerable priests, has graciously given, with gold
22.and with a libation of water, to the auspicious de-
23. scendant of Bua’rapwa’sa and follower of the Rig-
veda, the wife VisHnupvicsuita Pat’r’aparpui,
24.son of Va’cHESPATI surnamed Buixa; and to the
learned A’nanrapicsuita sonof Ra’mMaBuar’r’A,

a descendant of VasisuT’Ha and follower of
25. A’pasta’MBA’S Yajurveda, inhabitant of uchang;
28. (a place known to have been visited by the Piinda-
vas,) the fertile and all productive village of Adi-
25. denahalli, also named Hariharapura, situated in the
26. midst of Bhilichedra, east of the village called
29, Arisicer, south of Gandicehalli, west of Paljq-
— vacatd, and north of Bhudihalli, a place to

cae es em et

ote Se

** Solemn donations are ratified by pouring water into the hand
of the dgnee. ;
+ Sixteen meritorious gifts are enumerated in treatiseson dona-
tion. 4
-t Corresponding to A. D, 1395.
4 A title of Siya. :
€| The difference of idiom makes it necessary to transpose, jn the
translation, some ef the verses of the original.
2E3

422 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

29. be honoured by all; marked on the four sides by
distinct boundaries ; together with its treasures, and
hidden deposites, its stones and every thing which it

30.does. or may contain; abounding with objects
pleasing to the eye; fic to be enjoyed by two per-
sons; graced with clegant trees 3 furnished with
wells, cisterns, ponds and banks ; to be successively

31. possessed by the sons, grandsons and other descend-
ants [of the grantees], as long as the sun and

32, moon endure, subject to be mortgaged, sold or any
way disposed of; a village visited by assiduous and
gentle priests and attendants, and by various wise
persons, who are conversant with holy rites, and
surpass in voice melodious birds *.’

A PARTICULAR description of the bounds of the vil-
lage, and its land marks, is next inserted in the Canara
language. After which the patent proceeds thus.

‘ Txrs patent is of the king Harrmara, the sole un-
alterable tree of beneficence, magnanimous, and whose
sweet strains compose this royal grant. By his com.
mand this patent has been framed, expressed in due
form, in the sacred tongue +.

‘Tue boundaries of the village on all sides, have
been stated in the provincial dialect,

‘ Or original gift or confirmation of it, confir-
mation is superior to gift; by generous grants
a man obtains heaven; by confirmation of them,

* Some parts of this long passage are obscure and doubtful. The
last stanza, with two preceding, omitting one, (that is the 29th,
30th, and 32nd) appears to be the saine with three which occur in
the grant preserved at Conjeveram, viz. 43d, 44th, and 46th. (As.
Res. yol. 3. p. 51.) But there are some variations between the
reading ot them in this inscription, and in the copy of the Conjeves
ram plates, from which Sir W. Jones made his yersion of that
grant: and, in a few instances, the interpretation, which 1 have.
adopted, differs from his.

+ This passage may indicate the artist’s name, Vénideya,

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 433

an unperishable abode; for the confirmation of ano-
ther’s donation is twice as meritorious asa gift made by
himself; and his own munificence is rendered fruitless
by resumption of another’s grants. He, who resumes
land, whether bestowed by himself or by another, is
born an insect in ordure for sixty thousand years. In
this world is only one sister of all kings, namely land,
which has been conferred on priests *: she must not .
be enjoyed nor espoused-~. ‘This general maxim of
duty for kings, should be strictly observed by: you in all
times : so RaMACHANDRA earnestly conjures ai] future
sovereigns ft.”

‘ Sr? Virtipécsha ; or the auspicious deity with un-
even eyes §.’

mt ee ee
3 te ;

* The terms may signify <‘ fully granted away, or properly bez
stowed.” : ,

++ In mythology, as well as in figurative language, the earth is
wite of the sovereign. With an allusion to this idea, land, which
has been granted away, is here called the king’s sister: and hig
seizure of such land is pronounced incestuous,

The expression, which has been translated espoused, (caragrahyé,
literally, to be taken by the hand), will also signity subjected to
taxation: for cara signifies tax as well as hand,

¢ This appears to bea quotation from some poem (a Purdaa or
Ramayana). The whole of the concluding part of the inscription
(comprised in five stanzas) seems to be the same with the close of
grant on plates of copper preserved at Conjeveram. See As, Reg,
vol. 3. p. 53, |

§ This signature is in Canara letters,

—

iD
td
he.

ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS. >

mu) IYER B@n Idyll ne LR vlnuetlls bd OSE Dee beusid PIN
ORYRS 2 Ms I re Betbtaliusbsdih:be init 6 1 Als [| Lhe BBrwitreubre tied Bae
En oI VOWED DUIS b BS bi | Wel ee or Soles YEUELD uc [I II:
Deki $d Savy)? euple in? ur Biers ee ke Ih Il) Pete b?@ip
ee Pevelih Il wba we BeRe yh? | {Ril bind dad Bem Back
tui ||: BAS As Sw eSiplis WE Ul eee RUMI Dpumne I BBEGL
rel se Dp? we deeyie [| RH se Eb DDS) PNB rb |] see PN Ube. UE wei
tI I bhubbilsDNite) DuebbIbe, I BYby bib SERIE | Mane | enh} lows

AQIS:

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS.

dm bubboieds eee liwkiPelp A walBibh else! Me ll buanes
ROSIEb rae wold pBeIGe bib DDipiare 2b o 1 As I usdiperd Hes bibs mire
Debeiee I wiz Thos Able MenbPedanieby (8S Hl andes De prenlic ee HI Jerk
rbibeb abl (dy Ibe eo Wsebel be! pie baie? Fee db 23] I] :}Shubd>
bnlfe mined WI! Boubpins fe ini ipl {) ye ebbe weRiPewle
prued Wes I] HAS LE nk bras dneSker BB cI we Bee Deri bee
RB PRBUA Yd Bw SLR sie Bie eddie RBs Y bh Sub SwEE

ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

426

TOS MT wBJbblomes| Dow bw Ss 3 hud Hl Lhlintelrinbe ve intisk tree Ble eS entan

(SuPs JeReltkl ee 3b puke See DM Phlue bb YS H snaaten 2 ble B

a-~ ~

WT Ne ~~ SY we

RP MUbE nh ale BE |} A ine b ebb Bh 2 Babi |) ebylRbalud

—

Bo Biehl |] Ve ll sb PibAbe Ss Pa MABuel? | Enh ds peje? sly

~~ aw ws— ww

Dietklue tenLen toh | Om ee plle [Ve Hl Bebb eb ne bela SHG ey

Nettle I Del ‘SAYEMSNOIEG nS RUNES [fsb euehl bibl as Be pipes} ae ial

Oke yb Rat wirels yep eRe ff pe nate Ibs bine te Ss [f fin

A27

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS.

Bdeb ULE ldyPhlweejors ke RERINRLA H seem EY ep buidh IVE Nee
blibshs bibl ebh bebe || woe EBs Pio Rens PEED NY (ues dn] Ee Bu
iSubBibie | bE BhIpup re sso{udndegicll We Mle bbs IAS a) wish bp rele)
Gl Be HdkcuBvinls fkemmpa |! al bluaiddpetinwlls® ye ll hyla=
Sa )SysfPritdene ws ll ove fl peed eb ps De Bie S pli rte Hy ke bite & Iie

We OES Bie te IPS ead Duns) > winyyESs: she Muwe dd lay] Pia ie

typ Wn I pRAnyiis biblernuchi|ty. i klip SES Ep Ye (ipsne 3a ae

ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

428

ll: ER EbubIRIGH BALI Le lbs Raw I dub hipLenbewsipine f

We
3 Ser R2I un I Woes bie Yale Libs tht Il chp kina Nebel bea I ch}

a www ws

| Suh ieypiaeaedp eal ul pe Spurs Ip ABLE 2 dbs IB. BBY eb bith ; ‘fyb BEY

| aDb>tn I pibibDl »baend SOO pe > I Zeek > ihe bee bs LeBbai aeBin

ig Se Ryine Bh 1? Il ke{eftenti ds > ual >] ate pitriete Nhe Wap Papsje bem) |

ADDRIINE DIA Il pidelbide dade Rese BOe | mete heh be Dube

BURIED I] tb bib [ud O02 Ae eau d Bayes |

[defeip b Bibb.

“BDIBIGb BY) Be EY | eb we AS REE Bh Il ete bibpeb jhe Fy [By } a}

~

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 429

LV. Another and similar Inscription found at the same
place.

Wrrn a fac simile of the foregoing inscription, Ma-
jor MackeNziz. communicated the copy of another
inscription found also at Chitradurg and in the same
year. The whole of the introductory part, containing
the name of the prince, and his genealogy, 1s word for
word the same in both grants: excepting a few places,
where the variations are eyidently owing to mistakes of
the artist, by whom the plates were engraved. I have
consequently derived much assistance from this fac si
mile in decyphering the original inscription before de-
scribed. :

Tue grant, here noticed, is by the same prince, and
dated in Saca 1213; only four years anterior to the one
before translated. I think it, therefore, unnecessary,
to complete the decyphering of it, or to insert a copy
or translation merely for the name and description of the
lands granted, or the designations of the persons on
whom they were bestowed. oe s

ConcerninG the similarity of the grants, 1t may be
remarked, that this circumstance is not a sufficient
ground of distrust; for it cannot be thought extraordi-
nary, that a set form of introduction to patents should

-have been in use; or that grants, made within the space
_of four years, by the same person, should be alike. [
must acknowledge, however, that the inaccuracies of
the original have impressed me with some doubt of the.
genuineness of the preceding grant. I do not, how- -
ever, suspect it to be a modern forgery : but I appre-
hend, that it may have been fabricated while the up-
per Curndt’aca continued under the sole domination of
FAlindu princes. Still it may not be without its use, as
an historical monument: since it may be fairly pre-
sumed, that the introductory part is copied froma more.
ancient monument; perhaps from that, with which it
has been now collated. | e-

430 © ONANCIENT MONUMENTS.

V. Inscription: on-a stone foundat Curv6épe in the
district of Avon *.

"ANOTHER ancient monument, for the communica-
tion of which the Asiatick Society i is indebted to the
same gentleman, whose zeal for literary research, and
indefatigable industry in the prosecution of inquiries,.
cannot be too much praised, was found by him in the
uppet Carnd?‘aca in 1801, and has been presented to
the Asiatick Society, with the following account of its
discovery: and of the inscription which it contains. m

‘ THE accompanying stone was found at Kurugode,
‘fourteen. miles north of Aalléri, not far from the Tung-
bhadré, among the ruins of the ancient town at the
foot of the Durg ; and was removed thence, in March,
1801, with the consent of thé principal inhabitants,
under the impression, that this specimen of ancient
characters, with which it is covered, would be a de-
sirable acquisition to gentlemen who cultivate the atid
a Hindu igrature.

‘THE inscription is chiefly written in the ancient
Céinaré language much mixed with Sanscrit, of which.
some of the S/écas or stanzas are exclusively composed.
It commences with the invocation of Sampuu {(S1va),
and after introducing the grant, date, and description of
the lands, concludes with several S/écas usually added
asa rnin in confirmation of such donations. —

A Few of the stanzas, said to be written in the Pra-
crit language, could not be understood by the Séséris
and Pandits at Triplicane, who explained the greatest
part of the inscription to my Brahmens: by their

* Adavani.

=?

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. A31

united eftortsand knowledge, the accompanying trans-
lation was given, in which I have every confidence af-
ter the experience I have had of the fidelity of other
translations by the same hands (some of which are al-
zeady communicated).

‘ Tue inscription is useful as an historical record, if
the Raja RacsHAMALLA, mentioned here, be the same
with the sovereign of the same name mentioned in a
history of Adysere, whe flourished about the eighth

century ; thus agreeing in date nearly with the monus
‘ment. ;

‘ Tue beauty of the character was also a strong mo-
tive for removing it, asan appropriate offering toa Sa-
ciety, whose labors have been so successfully employed
in illustrating the interesting remains of Hindu anti-
quity ; and a permanent specimen of a character which
appears hitherto to haye escaped much notice.

‘Tue common Céanara language and character are
used by the natives of all those countries extending
from Coimbatore *, north to Balkee-+ near Beder, and
within the parallels from the eastern Ghdts to the
western, comprehending the modern provinces of My-
sore {, Sera ||, upper Bednore §, Soonda , Goa, Adoni,
Rachore ++, Canoul<*, the Duab of the Kishna and
Tung-bhadra, and a considerable part of the modern
Subahs of Beder and Bijapur, as far as the source of
the Kishna at least. Its limits and point of junction
with the Mahrattas may be yet ascertained with more
precision; but in 1797, I had the opportunity of ob-
serving, that the junction of the three languages, Te+

linga, Mahratta, and Canara, took place somewhere
about Beder.

=

* Ciyamutir, + Phalaci. t Mehisér, ~ |} Sird.
§- Bed vir. | Sunda, tt Richur. tt Candanur.

439 > ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

* Besipes the common-character and language, ano-
‘ther appears to have been used, denominated at pre-
sent the Halla or ancient Canara, in which this inscrip-
‘tion is written: it has gone so much into disuse, that
it was with some difficultyI could get people to read
it. An alphabet will be yet communicated ; as several
books and ancient inscriptions are written in this cha-
racter: and the remaining literature of the Jams in
Baligha!’, appearing to be preserved in it, affords ad~
ditional motives for pointing it out to the attention of
the learned, as probably aftording means of extending
the field of knowledge of Hindu literature.

‘ Some of the inscriptions, at Canara and Sa/set, ap-
pear to be written in this character; and many monu-
ments of the kind, dispersed over the upper Carnatic,
hold out the prospect of further information.

‘Amone several manuscripts in Cdnara, five, re-
lating to the Jain religion and customs, are in my pos-
session, .

‘THe name of Cavetzy Borta, a Brahmen, who
was highly instrumental in forwarding and facilitating
the investigations carried on in Mysore andthe Nizam’s
dominions, is inscribed on the edge of this stone, as a
small tribute to the zeal and fidelity of a native who
evinced a genius superior to the common prejudices of
the natives. He first suggested the idea of removing
the stone to some place where it could be useful ta Lu-
ropean literature ; and, by his conciliatory manner, ob-
tained the concurrence and assistance of the natives for
that purpose.’

THE stone, sent by Major Macxenzig, with the
foregoing account of the discovery of it, is nearly five
fect high, and three wide, and about ten inches thick.
The front 1s covered with writing in large characters,
above which is a representation of the Linga in the form

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. A33

usual in temples; it is surmounted by a sun and cres-
cent ; and near it stands a bull, intended perhaps for
the bull called Nandi, a constant attendant of S’1va:
this is followed by the figure of a smaller animal, of
similar form. The back of the stone is half covered
with writing.

_ Tue translation, mentioned by Major MacKkenzig,
is here subjoined. Not being acquainted with the cha-
racter, in which the original is written, I have not
collated the version ; and have therefore used no free-
‘dom with it, except that of substituting, in many
places, English words for Senscrit, which the transla-
tor had preserved.

TRANSLATION.

ADORATION 2e to the auspicious SwAYAMBHU’
Na’r’Ha or SELP-EXISTENT Protector.

1. ‘I prostraTE myself before Sémbhu: whose
glorious head is adorned with the resplendent moon;
and who is the chief prop of the foundation of the three
worlds *, —

2. ‘ May SwayampBuu be propitious : he, who won
immortal renown; who grants the wishes of those that
earnestly jntreat him: who pervades the universe; the
Sovereign Lord of Deities; who destroyed the state
and arrogance of the demons; who enjoyed the de-
lightfal embraces of Pa’rvati, to whom the learned
prostrate themselves : the God above all gods.

3. ‘IT prostrate myself before Sameuu’; whose
unquenchable blaze consumed the magnificent T7i-

es ee

* This is the same stanza, which begins the two inscriptions
found at Chitradurg, and which likewise occurs in a grant in the
possession of a Brihmen at Nandizul; and in that presetved at Cun

‘ ;everam.

Vor. IX. : 2F

ASE ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

-pura; whose food is the nectar dropping from the
beams of the moon; who rejoiced in the sacrifice of
heads by the Lord of Rédcshasas*; whose face is
adorned with smiles, when he enjoys the embraces of
Gauri.

(Tue foregoing Sanscrit: the fourth, which is Pré-
crit, isunexplained. ‘hose which follow, are in Cé-~
nara.) :

‘By the consort of Der’v1, whose divinity is
sah the spouse of Pa’rvari, resplendent with the
glorious light of gems reflected from the crowns of the
Lords of Gods and demons whose heads lay prostrate at
his feet; with a face ever lighted up with smiles ; he is
the self existent deity: may the wealth, and the sta-
tions of is saints, be ever granted to us.

‘Tue beams of whose light, like the frequent
waving of the /o/us flower, flashes reflected from the
numerous crowns of glorious Kings, of the chief of
Gods, of the King of Kings, and of the Lord of De-
mons 3 who exists in all things, in all elements, in wa-
ter, air, earth, ether, and fire, in thesun and moon:
the renowned deity manifested in eight forms; Sam-
BHU ; may he grant our ardent prayers.

7. § CuezrFutty I bow to Sampuvu’ in the /o/us
of the heart; to him who increases and gives life to
ul; who Rates supreme command over all; who,
through his three divine attributes, created arid ani-
mated fourteen worlds; who ever resides in the minds
_ of his saints.’

(Tue two next stanzas have not been explained.
The following is in Halla Canara.)

i eon a tn a
\

* RAVANA.

CONTAINING,SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 435

10, ‘ For ever be propitious to Sémés’wara Dévadi,
the son of the fortunate Buuvana Marua Vira, the
protector of the world, the chief Sovereign of Kings,
the pre-eminent monarch, a man of superior virtue, a
distinguished personage of the noble race, the, orna-
ment of the Cha/uca tribe, whose state be increased
progressively in this world, so long as the sun and.
moon endure; who reigns in the city of Calyén, en-
joying every happiness and good fortune, with the con-
verse of good men and every other pleasure. In this
country of Cuntaladésa *, a land renowned for beauty
and for manly strength over all the sea-girt earth, is
situated Condavipatian, placed as the beauty spot on
the human face; a city favoured by the goddess of
prosperity ; asa nosegay of elegant flowers adorning
the tresses of the beauteous goddess of the earth.

11. ‘ How is this favored land? In its towns are
numerous groves of mangoe ; plantations of luxuriant
betle and fields of rice: in every town are channels of
water, and wells, opulent men and beautiful women :
in eyery town are temples of the Gods and of the
saints: in every town are men blessed with vigor and

every virtue.

12. ‘Iw its centre, is the mighty hill of Curugéde-
durg, like the fastnesses -} of heaven, ever famed, rear-
ing aloft its top crowned with fortresses. In height
and compass surpassing all the strong hills on the right
or left. ,

a

_ —* Cuntala Desa, the ancient name of the province in which
Curgode is situated; part of the Badlirt or Adoni District. M.

+ The poet indulges his fancy in describing this favored Durg ;
but in fact it is only about 250 teet high, and no ways remarkable
for strength, M, .

2F2

436 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

13. *Tnis Curugéde was established as the capital
of his dominions by the king of Cuntala, who was the

foe of the king Ché/a*; who terrified the Gurjara ;

who is the instrument to destroy the plants of Madru ;
who put Pandya to flight. Is it possible for the king
of snakes, though possessed of a thousand tongues, to
praise sufficiently the beauty of this city?

14. ‘Whar is the description of the delightful
gardens that encompass the city? They are gardens
wherein are found the Ti/ac, the Tamadl, the palm, the
plantain, the Mimusops, the trumpet flewer, - the
tremulous fig-tree, the citron, the Oleander, Mesua,
and Cassia, the cotton-tree, the Carambola and Peederia,
the mangoe, Butea and fragrant Nelicé ; and various
trees, that flourish and produce through all seasons as

in the garden Nandan: these surrounded . this city -of
Curogéde.’

(Tue fifteenth stanza is unexplained.)

16. ‘Iw the city of Curugéde, the residence of the
goddess of prosperity, where are numerous temples ef
worship, ‘fertile lands, happy spouses, friendly inter-
course, a favorable government, every sacred decora-
tion and zealous devotion in the service of S’1va ;

17. ‘THe Lofd of that city, a warrior unrivalled,
whose name was RAcCSHA’MALLA, whose breast ts
tinged with the saffron communicated from the bosom

of beauty, whose renown is ever praised over the whole
world.’

* Chila Disa, . . . The modern Tanjore country.
Gurjara, Ps, Sti
Maarz, . .« «Madara and Trichinopoly.

Pandya, . . ™“ Marawar and Tinevelly. Wf,

a

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS, A37

(Tse eighteenth stanza.is in Précrit, and not ex-
plained.)

19. ‘This Raja Racsua’Mauta, prince of the
earth, born of so renowned a race of sovereigns, was
happily possessed of valor, of victory, and of wealth. |

20. § For the king Racsua’matia, who was lord
of riches and a deyout worshipper of Siva, had for his
consort SOMALDE’ vi’ and begot a son named Ne’nun-
GALA Ra’sa’, husband to the goddess of renown, the
bestower of wealth on the distressed, on the learned,
and on the unfortunate, to the utmost extent of their
wishes.

21. ‘To Ne’runeata Ra’sa’ and to his wife
-PacsHALa’-DE vi (the source of all virtues), were hap-
pily born two sons named Ima’p1 RacsuHa’mMAtta and
SOMABHU PA’LA, whose renown, like the sky, over-
spread the whole earth.

22. ‘ Wuar is the description of the eldest of these
princes ? Imddi (or the second) RacsHa’Ma.ta Ra’sa’,
the successor of the former, seated on the excellent
throne, attended by many mighty elephants, in colour
like the Chamari*, ruled the whole kingdom under.
one umbrella, possessing the wonderful power, like
CHINNA GOVINDA, of feeding tigers and sheep in the
same fold, aay

23, §Tue king Racsua‘MALLa acquired great
power: his mighty splendor and good fortune were such
as drew the applause of the wholeadmiring world. The
globe was filled with the light of his reputation. The
beauty of his person is worthy of the praise even of Cu-

ee

* Bos Grunniens.
2563

438 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

pid, the God famed for beauty. He was the destroyer
of sin; eminent above foreign kings, and in battle he
was as VISHNU. }

24. §May Mrirv [Siva] eraciously bestow eternal
wealth and prosperity of empire, on the king Racsna’-
MALLA, among all his chief saints...

YT
Ms

‘Durtne the gradual increase of the empire of
RacsHa’MALLA extending fram the north, all around,
even to the north, his servant and worshipper, a de-
scendant of CAsyapa’s race, manager of the affairs of
Taucoara’ Amani, invested with full authority ; equal
in knowledge to YuGAND’HaR, the sun to enlighten
the caste of Vajinasa [as the sun enlightens,the sky ; |
chief of ministers, born by the blessing of the god
SwAYAMBHU’, the source of wealth, was A‘BARA’IU

hornet 2 wd wIiod ving,

(SeveRat lines follow giving’ am account of the
ancestors of Ba’para’su’, which hayenot been trans-
yore | 5h ofl) 2t PAR VY *..e¢

‘Such is Ba’para’su, who built a tertiple to the
God Swayamsuv’ De'vi', while he was managing
the affairs of his sovereign lord, the eee king, the
great Racswa’waLLA, whose god was the self-existent
deity.’ J iprtrnasea BF aan

‘ Tue praise of the priests of the temple, a

‘Tury were learnéd in the sacred ceremonies of
holy devotion, self-restraint, in austere fast, appropriate
studies, alms, remembrance, silence, religious practice,
and the worship of S’iva. | fone? iy

; si 4V

‘Tuxy were devout in performing the ceremonies of
the worship of the gods of the family. Among them,
was one named Ba’Lastva A’cHAR YA unequalled for a

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 430,

good or happy genius. To this famous Ba’ua’siva
A’cha’rya was oranted this gift with water poured into
his hands. |

‘Tue charitable donation of lands given-to the good
SwAyamBuu’ inthe year of Sdé/ivéhan 1095 * in thé
Vijaya year of the cycle and on the oth of the month
_ Margasira, on Monday in the time of an eclipse of the
sun.’ oto

(Ir appears unnecessary to insert the description of
the lands.)

* Also Cuinwa Govinpa Sirara Gunn, king of
the city of Bhégavaii, equal to the sovereign of Bhar'-
#4], who was acknowledged for ever by the excellent
Viraca’tipeva’ the mighty king of the earth named
Ima’p1 RacsHA’MALLADEVA. In the year of Sé/ivd-
han 1103, of the cycle P/ava, and-on the 15th of
Cartica, on Monday, in the gracious time of the
moon’s eclipse, at the time when he made over in alms
Tripura Agraharam, granted under Da’ra’pu’RBACc to
Ba’tasiva De’va, who repaired all the buildings of
SwAYAMBHU DEVA whois distinguished for knowledge
of the pure Védas, and of other religious institutions
and customs of the worshippers of S’tva, and for cha-
rity in feeding the poor,

(The sequel of the inscription is likewise omitted :
it relates to afurther grant made by the widow of Ba’-
BARA’sU, at the time of her burnirig hers-lf with the
corpse of her husband. ‘The concluding part of it was
Jeft untranslated, being stated to be illegible.) v

Tue eclipses, mentioned in these grants, do not ap-
pear reconcileable with their dates. According to the ta-

eT

* Answering to A.D. 1173. + Corresvonding to A. D. pisn. |
& 4 8
FA

AAO ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

ble of eclipses calculated by Prnere*, the solar eclipses,
which occurred in 1172 and 1173, fell on 27th Janu-
ary and 23d June, 1172, and 12th June, 1173; and
the lunar eclipses in 1180 and 1181, were on the 13th
February and 7th August 1180, and 22d December,
1181. None of these approach to the dates of Marga-
sira or Agrahayana 1095 and Cértica 1103. Unless,
then, the era of Sévdhana have been counted dif-
ferently in the peninsula of India, from the mode in
which it is now reckoned, and on which the compa-
rison of it with the Christian era is grounded, it seems
difficult to account for this disagreement of the dates
and eclipses, in any other way, than by impeaching
the inscription, the authenticity of which there is not
otherwise any reason to question.

VI. Inscription on a Stone found at Kurran.

Havine learnt from Captain C. Stewart, (a
Member of this Society), that an inscription had been -
remarked by him in the gateway of the Fort of Kurrah
(Kharé), 1 obtained, through the assistance of Major
Lennon, then stationed in the vicinity of that place,
the stone itself which contains the inscription. It now
belongs to the Asiatick Society. * eee

Tue inscription is very short ; contains the date 1093
Samvat, the name of the prince, as also names of several
places ; and is written in a very legible character: yet
all my endeavours to arrive at any explanation of it have

‘been unsuccessful. Whether, it be only a fragment of

—_—_——_

eee =

* Published in L’art de verifier les dates ; and inserted in Pray-
Fatn’s System of Chrono'ogy.

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 44}

an inscription (for the stone is very narrow *,) or the in-
scription have been inaccurately engraved (and this also
iscountenanced by its appearance), I shall not take upon
myself to determine. At present, I can only translate
the first six, out of sixteen lines, which run thus:
** Samvat 1093-f, on the first day of the light fort-
night of As‘ha@ha. ‘This day, at thisauspicious Café,
the great and eminent prince Yas’apHa’La ft, in the
realm of Causdémba, and village of Payahdsa, com-
“mands, that 4

SLVR = FaaT A
smmeae qe TaTUS TR

Sm Tin
sgeatime sodan———
AMIS | - eta Ssf}-——-—_-—
AIT —————
MAAS aT az
VaRRT AA
| Seana y frag
Bee anNy
Tsaugea
MIS eAy AAT
ZT LSTA
RTMAIMTR |
4 Its height is 4 feet g inches, but it is only 9 inches Wiles s2
+ Corresponding to A. D. 1037.
t It may be worth remarking, that the inscription, discovered at
Sérandt’ha near Benares, dated 10 years antecedent to this, relates

‘to a family of princes whose names had a similar termination:
fisiatick Researches, vol. 5. p. 138.

AA2 _ ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS,

WRithe

VII. Lascription on a Plate of Copper found
district of Dina’spuR.

In the beginning of the present year (1806,) a plate
of copper was found at Amgéch’hi in Sultdmpur, by a
peasant, digging earth for the repair of a road near his
cottage. He delivered it to the nearest police, officer,

by whom it was conveyed to.the Magistrate, Mr, Js,

Parte: and by him forwarded for communication
to the Asiatick Society. .d’mgdch’hi, though now a
smal] village, is described-as exhibitihg the appearance
of having formerly been a considerable place. Re-
mains of old masonry are found theré ; and humerous
ponds are remarked in the vicinity of that and of the
adjacent villages. It ig situated at the distanicé of about
fourteen miles from Buddl; where an ancient pillar
stands, of which a description (as well as the inscrip-
tion, which is read on it), was published in the 4st
volume of Asiatick Researches, (p. 131.) ©
ey.

3 We
Tue plate is very large, being 14 inches high and
13 broad. It is surmounted by a highly wrought or-
nament of brass, fixed on the upper part, and advaneed
some distance on the plate so as to occasion a consider;
able break in the upper lines. ‘The superior surface is

covered with writing in yery close lines and crowded:

characters. The inscription is completed on the infe-
rior surface, which contains 16 lines (the upper sur-
face having noless than 33). ‘The character is ancient
Dévandégari; and the language Sanserit: but so great
a part of the inscription is obliterated, (some portion of
every line being illegible,) that it is difficult to
discover the purport of the inscription. After wast-
ing much time in endeavouring to decypher the whole
of it, Ihave been able only to ascertain the name
of the grantor, and a part of his genealogy; with,

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. A4A3

the date of the grant, which unfortunately is reckoned
only by the reign, without any reference to a known
era. |

Tue ornament, affixed to the plate, and represent=
ing a seal, contains a single line of writing, which is
distinctly read, Sri Vreranara’rApe’va. ‘This name,
as of the grantor, is found at the close of the inscrip-
tion ; and it occurs more than once in the body of the
ne Among his ancestors and predecessors, the
ollowing names are distinctly legible,

Tue first prince mentioned is Lé6capa’ta, and after
him Duarmara’za, The next name has not been de-
Cyphered : but the following one is Jayapa’La, suc-
ceeded by De’vara’ta. ‘Two or three subsequent
names are yet undecyphered *: they are followed by
Ra‘sar’ ALA,——Pa’‘La pe‘vA, and subsequently Ma-
nie a’ LA DE’vA, Nayapa’LA and again ViGRAHAPA’ La
DEVA.

So far as a glympse has been yet obtained of i
purport of the inscription, it seems to be a grant by
VIGRAHAPA‘LA DEVA, in the making of which
Nayapa’ta likewise appears to have had some
share. It is dated Samvat~ 12, on the gth day
Chaitra..

Tue use of the word Samrat (w hich properly signi-
fies a year) to denote the year of the king’s reign, and,
not that of VicrAma’pITyYA’s era, merits particular
notice. In the inscription on the plates found at

came TL. Uy es
* One seems to be Narayana; perhaps NARAYANAPALA.

t The original seems to exhibit Samat: but this must be ins
tended fer Sambat or Samvat.

AgA ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS”

Mongir *, containing a. grant of land by a prince who
appears to be of the same family, the date was read by
Mr. Witkins, Samvat 33; which was supposed both
by him and by Sir W. Jones to intend the era of Vr-
CRAMA’DITYA “>. I Have always entertained doubts of
_ that interpretation: and, among other reasons for he-
sitating, one has been the improbability, which to my
apprehension exists, that the era should have been in
use, and denoted by the same abbreviated term, so
early after the time at which it commences. Eras, by
which nations-have continued to reckon for a series of
‘ages, have not usually been introduced until a consi-
derable time after the event from which they are count-
ed: and, when first introduced, have been designated
by some more definite term than one merely signifying
ayear. But the word Semvat (abbreviated from Sam-
vatsara a year,) being in that inscription prefixed toa
low numeral, and not expressly restricted, as is usual
where VicraMA’pITYA’s era is meant, was more likely
to intend the year of the reigning king (though Sir W,
Jones thought otherwise ¢,) than that of a period
reckoned from the birth, or the accession, or the de-
mise, of another monarch. It appeared to me likewise,
as to Captain WiLForD, on examining the fac simile
of the inscription in question §, that the character,
which stands in the place of the ¢ of Samvat, resembled
more nearly the numeral 1. The date might there-
fore be 133 instead of 33. I inclined, however,
to believe the lower number to have been rightly
read by Mr. Witxins on the original plate :
Uhre

ee ee ee

” As. R@s,,vol. 1. .p.123.

+ Ibid. p. 130.

t Ibid. p. 142.

-§ Plates 1 and 2 in the ist vol. of As, Res.

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. AAS

and consequently supposed it to be the date of the
reign of Dx’va’paLa the prince who made the grant.
The date of the d’mgdch'hi plate, which must be re-
ferred to the reign of the grantor ViGRAHBPA’LA, seems
strongly to corroborate this opinion.

Tue present inscription, though yet imperfectly de-.
cyphered, appears to be useful towards ascertaining the
age of the Mongir grant. The names of DHERMaPaA’-
LA and Dr’vApa’La occur in both inscriptions; as
that of Ra’sapa’La.does, onthe pillar at Buddl, as
well as on the -/’mgdch'hi plate. Some of these names
are also found in the list of princes enumerated in the
Ayin acberi * as having reigned in Benga/ before Bat-
LALASENA. ‘The authority of ABU’LFazL, on Hindu
history, isindeed not great: but the inscription on the
statue of Bupp’Ha, which was found at Sérana¢ha,
near Benares-}, proves, that a family of princes, whose
names terminated in Pd/a, did reign over. Gaud’a in
Bengal, near eight hundred years ago: and this is
consistent with the period to which that dynasty is
brought down by ABu’LFAzL:; namely the middle of
the eleventh century of the christian era. It appears
also, from the same inscription found at Séranatha,
that these princes were worshippers of Bupp’Ha, a
circumstance which agrees with the indications of that
‘faith in the Mongir grant, as translated by Mr. Wit-
Kins. The name of Manipa’a, mentioned as king
of Gaud’a in the Sdrandtha inscription, occurs like-
wise in the dA mgdch'hi plate; and if it be reason-
able to believe, that the same person is intended
in both instances, it will be right to infer, that
the grant contained on the plate found at A’mgach'hi -
is nearly eight hundred years old; and that the plate

_—_—- —

* Vol..2.-p. 26. _ *
+ As. Res, vol. 5. p. 133. a

AAG . » ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

found at Mongir is more ancient by two or three cen-
turies. ‘This reduces the age of the Mongir grant to
the eighth or ninth century of the christian era ; which
T cannot but think more probable, than the opinion of
its being anterior to the birth of Christ.

peeNe

VIN. = Inscriptions on Plates of Copper at NipiGAt
and GousDA.

To the foregoing description of several monuments,
which have been presented to the Asiatick Soc
shall add a brief notice of two other inscrip pti ion
which copies have been received. ny

Mention has been already made of a grant of land,
inscribed on five plates of copper, seen at Nidigal, in
the year 1801. It was in the possession of a Brahmana
residing at that place: and a copy of it was taken by
Major Macxernziz, which has been communicated
by re to tbe Society. The grant appears to be fo
the second Bucca Ra’sa’, who was third in succession
from the first prince of that name, and grandson of the
king by whom the grants beforementioned were made.
If the date have been correctly decyphered from the
copy of this inscription, it is of the year 1331 Saca,
corresponding to A. D. 14009.

ANOTHER inscription, communicated by Major
Mackenzie, purports to be agrant by JANAMEBJAYA,
the celebrated monarch who reigned in India at the
commencement of the present age or Calyuga. Iti is.
in the hands of the Bra/mens or priests of Goujda Agra-
haram in Bédmir; and was, with some reluctance,
entrusted by hee to Major NE LOR EHO who him-’
self took from it a copy in fac simile, the exact- ”
ness of which is demonstrated by the facility with ~
which the inscription may be decyphered from that
copy. The original is described as contained in

bi

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 4A7

three plates of copper, fastened together by a ring, on
which is the representation of a seal, bearing the figure

of a boar with a sun andcrescent. ‘The purport of the
inscription, for I think it needless to make a complete
version of it, is that ‘JanameE'JAYA, sonof ParicsuiT,
a monarch reigning at Hastindpura, made a progress to
the south, and to other quarters, for the purpose of re-
ducing all countries under his domination; and per-
formed a sacrifice for the destruction of serpents, in
presence of the god (or idol) Harinara, at the con-
fluence of the rivers Tungabhadré and Haridé, at the
time of a partial eclipse of the sun, which fell ona
Sunday i in the month of Chai/raz, when the sun was
entering the northern hemisphere ; the moon being in

the Nacshatra A’swin*.

'Havine completed the sacrifice, the king bestowed
gold and lands on certain Bréhmanas of Gautamagrdma:
whose names and designations are stated at full length,
with the description and limits of the lands granted.
The inscription concludes with two verses; the same
with two of these which occur in the plates found at
Chitradurg + ; and in those preserved at Conjeveramt.

oo

» * Such is the deduction from the text, which states a half eclipse
of the sun in C/aitra, on the sun’s entrance into the Uitardyana, or
northern path, at the moment of Vyatipiia (which imports new
on on a Sunday in any one of the undermentioned Nacshatras,
3 Aswini, Sravani, Dhanishtha, Ardra, Astisha, and Mrigasiras:
the first of which is the only one compatible with the month). The
‘words of the text are Chaitramasé crishna |should be crishna) pacshé

4

dvd SEES ieee carana uate iray BAA SAN, 3/00 ine cotbliatieie watipata nimitte

eri

7 Sve page 420-of this yolume.

ft As. Res, vol: 3. p.52s) The verses are those numbered 50
& 54,

AA8 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

Ir teliance might be placed on this as an ancient and
authentick mounment, its importance, in theconfirma-
tion of a leading point of Indian history, would be ob-
vious and great. Major Mackenzie, in communicating
the copy of it, expresses a doubt of its authenticity ;
but remarks, that it can be no modern forgery, for the
people themselves cannot read the inscription. I con-
cur with Major Mackenzie both in distrusting the
genuineness of this monument; and in thinking, that
it is no recent fabrication.

Numerous and gross errors of grammar and ortho-
graphy *, which can neither be explained by a gradual
change of language, nor be referred to the mistakes of
a transcriber or engraver, but are the evident fruit of
ignorance in the person who first penned the inscription
in Négari characters, would furnish reason for discre-
diting this monument, were it otherwise liable to no
suspicion. But, when to this circumstance are added
the improbability of the copper plates having been pre-
served during several thousand years, and the distrust

with which any ancient monument must be received,

where its present possessor, or his ancestor, may have
had claims under the grant recorded in it, there can be
little hesitation in'considering this grant of JANAMEJAYA

‘ ? i ;
* For example Samaé fcr Samayé ( MHL for gag ) apalpa-

ble error obyiously arising from the blunder of an ignorant amanu-
ensis writing from dictation. ‘The mistake occurs more than once ;
and can be accounted for, inno other manner: the syllables ¢ and
yé being alike in sound, though dissimilar in form; and the blunder
being such, as no person, acquainted with the rudiments of the
Sanicrit janguage, could have committed. Other instances have
been re:inarked, a most equally strong: as Paricshiti for Paricshit ;
Chacravrariti for Chacravartti. Short’ vowels for long, and vice
versa, in repeated instances; the dental for the palatial s; and nu;
merous other errors ef spelling; besides faults of grammar aad
style,

a

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 449

_ @s unauthentick: independently of any argument de-
duced from the character, which is not perhaps suffi-
ciently antique; or from the astronomical data in this
inscription, which, however consistent with Indian
notions of astronomy and chronology, wall hardly bear
the test of a critical examination.

IX. A grant of Land by Javacuanpra, Rijé of Cany, -

Ir may be proper to notice further, in this place,
the inscription of which mention was made at the be-
ginning of this essay, as having been decyphered by a
Pandit {Serv6ru Trive’ri) who communicated to me
a copy of it, with the information, that the original
has beea conveyed to England by the gentleman in
whose possessien it was seen by him. According to
that copy, the genealogy of the prince, who mage the
grant recorded in the inscriptions, is as follows : :

» Sripa’La, a prince of the solar race.
2. His son ManicHannRka.

3. S’ricHanDRA DE’ vA, son of the last mentioned ;
acquired, by his own strength, the realm of -Géd'hi-
pura or Canyacukja (Cany ;) visited Casi and other holy
places; and repeatedly gave away in alms his own
weight in gold. He appears to have been the first
king of Canoj, in this family.

4. Mapanapa’na Deva, son and successor of
S’RICHANDRA.

5. G6vINDA CHANDRA, son of MADANAPA‘’LA,

6. VIJAYA CHANDRA D‘EVA, (the same with Jaya
CHAND,) son of G6vinpA CHANDRA; is stated in the
inscription as — his commands to all publick
officers and to the inhabitants of © Néguli ‘assembled

Vor, IX. 26

A5O ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

at Devapallipatan’d, enjoining them to observe dnd —
obey his patent: which is recited as a grant of land to
two Brdhmanas, conferred by him, on the day of full
moon in Mdagha 1220*, subsequently to his inaugura-
tion as Yuva réja or designated successor. and associate
in the empire. The inscription concludes by quoting,
from a Puréna, four stanzas to deprecate the resump-
tion of the grant: and by a signature importing * thig
copper was engraved by JAyApa‘La.”*

Wirnovut haying having the seen the original, na
opinion can be offered on the probable genuineness of
this monument. But it will be observed, that the in-
scription is consistent with chronology: for Jaya
eHann, whois described, in the yu acbheri t, as su-
preme monarch of India, having the seat of his empire
at Canoj, is there, mentioned as the ally of SHena’-
BUDDiN in the war with Prir’'Hav{ rA‘sa or PiT HORA’,
about the year of the Hejira 558, or A. D, 1192+
twenty-eight years after the date of this grant.

REMARKS.
ete fh "

A rew observations on the general subject under
consideration, will terminate this essay.

Most of the ancient monuments, which have been
yet discovered, contain royal grants of land; framed,
commonly, in exact conformity to the rules delivered
by Hindu writers who have treated of this subject {.
‘That durable memorials have been usually framed to

ee ge + oe

* Correspoding to A. D. 1164.
y Giapwin’s Translation, vol, 2. p. 119.
t As, Res. vol. 3. p.50. Digest of Hindu law, vol. 2. p. 278.

:

4

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 4A5Yr°

record other events 6r circumstances, there is no rea-
son to suppose; and this consideration is sufficient to
explain the comparative frequency of monuments
which recite royal grants. It was the interest, too, of
persons holding possession under such grants, to be’
careful in the preservation of the evidence of their right.
But this circumstance, while it accounts for the greater
_ frequency of monuments of this description, suggests 2°
reason for particular caution inadmitting their genuine-
ness. Grants may have been forged in support of an
occupant’s right, or of a claimant’s pretensions. It

will be, therefore, proper to bring a considerable por-

tion of distrust and jealousy to the examination of any
inscription on stone or metal, alledged to be ancient,
and now possessed by persons who have any claims or

‘pretensions under the grant which it contains. But no

such cause of jealousy exists, where the monument in
question favours no one’s pretensions, and especially
where it is accidentally discovered after being long bu-
ried. It is indeed possible, that such a monument,
though new casually found, may have been originally a
forgery. But even where that may be suspected, the
historical uses of a monument fabricated so much neare+
to the times to which it assumes to belong, will not be
entirely superseded. The necessity of rendering the
forged grant credible, would compel a fabricator, to
adhere to history and conform to established notions :
and the tradition, which prevailed in his time, and by
which he must be guided, would prebably be so much
the nearer to the truth, as it was less remote from the
period which it concerned.

In the present state of researches into dudian antiqui-
ties, the caution here suggested appears to be that
which it is most requisite to observe. Whena greater
number of monuments shall have been examined and

) = ee

—

452 ON ANCIENT MONUMENTS

compared, more rules of criticism may be devised ;

and will, at the same time, become particularly requi-

site, should the practice arise of purchasing ancient

- monuments; or of giving rewards for the discovery of.
them. At present no temptation exists for modern fa-

‘brications, and little caution is therefore necessary ta
¢yoid imposition,

CONTAINING SANSCRIT INSCRIPTIONS. 453

NOTE 10 Vol. 7. Page 180.

A passaGE in the preface of the Sarngadhara padd’«
hati, and another in thé body of that work, which were
first indicated by Capt. W1LForp *, show, that a term,
contained in the inscription on the column at Delhi,
for which I proposed to substitute, with the advice of
the Pandit who assisted me, the word ‘ Bahujata’ as a
conjectural emendation, must be read ‘ Chahzimana,’ or
‘ Chahavana; being the name of the tribe to which
the prince, there mentioned, belonged, and which is
well known at this day under the appellation of Chauhan.
In the preface, Sa’naGAp’HARA describes himself as
second in descent from RKaGHUDE’VA, a priest attend-
ing on Hammie king of S‘acambhari, of the tribe of
Chauhan, Chahuvan, or Bahuvana (for the name is va-
riously spelt in different copies.) The work itself is a
compilation of miscellaneous poetry arranged under
distinct heads; and one chapter (the 73d) is devoted to
the admission of stanzas concerning individual princes.
Among them two stanzas occur, which are there cited
as an inscription on a royal column of stone erected as
a sacrificial pillar-+; and which on comparison, aré
found to be the same with the two first of the stanzas
on the pillar at Defhis Several copies of the Sarngad-
hara padd halt have been collated: in all of which, thé
term in question is written Bahuvana. Comparing this
with the preface of the same compilation, and with the
inscription itself, we may be allowed to conjecture, that
Chahuvana is the correct feading: the Nagar lettets

@q and XY being very liable to be tonfounded.

Ce a a rt eee

* Page 189 of this volume.
* Ba QaPAATMYATA|T FRA s If
263

Ou the Gra’mas or Mustcau Scauss of the Hinpus.

BY J. D. PATERSON, Ese.

W urn music was first reduced to a scence, it is
probable, that it was confined to the few scientific men,
whose edwcation and studies fitted them to understand
its, principles; and that the first efforts of the science
were displayed in hymns to the deities: each being ad-
dressed in a peculiar mode, digress and se asap

Accorpine to Praro*, the Egyplians were re-
stricted by their laws to certain fixed melodies, which
they were not permitted to alter; he says, that the
lawgivets of Leypt appear to have laid it down as a
principle, that ‘“* Young men incities should be ac-
customed to beautiful figures and beautiful melodies,
and that it was one of their institutions to exhibit in
their temples what these were, and what the qualities
which they possessed ; ; and besides these it was not
lawful either for painters or other artificers to introduce
any that were new, or even to think of-any other than
those belonging to their country.” He adds, ‘ Nor
isit lawful at present to do this either in these particu-
lars or in the whole of music. If you observe, thire-
fore, you will find, that paintings and sculptures there,
which were executed ten thousand years ago, as.if they
were not of such great antiquity, are neither more beau-

cithiiomre

ap
* On Legislation. Dialogue =,

fee

OF THE MUSICAL SCALES OF THE WINDUS. 455

tiful nor more deformed than the paintings or carvings
of the present day, but ate fashioned by just thé same
art.”” mi

Wuen Crrnias observes, that he spoke of a won-
derful circumstance, he replies, “It is, however, a
circumstance pertaining to law and politics in a tran-
scendent degree, you will likewise find other things
there of a trifling nature, but this respecting music is true
and deserves attention, because the legislator could
fimly give laws about things of this kind and with con-
fidence introduce such melodies as possessed a natural
rectitude : but this must be the work of a God, or of
some divine person; just as they say there, that their
melodies, which have been preserved for such a length
of time, are the Poems of Isis.”

Pxato considers this restriction as propet and ne=
cessary to prevent the introduction of sensual licentious-
-_ ness and effeminacy. ‘There appears to have been. somé

such idea of restriction, amongst the antient Hindus,
by the confinement of their music to thirty-six melo-
dies: viz. the six Regas and thirty Raginis: the forty-
eight Pufras are melodies, which seem to have been
introduced in after times, when the discipline, alluded

to by Prato, had begun to be relaxed:
\

Bur the Jndian Ragas and Raginis are fixed re-
spectively to particular seasons of the year and times of
the night or day. ‘This is a circumstance particularly
deserving remark, asit is probably peculiar tothe Hindu
music, |

Ir is hkely, that these melodies were in former times
appropriated to the service of diiterent deities. In such
case, the Ragas or Raginis would derive. their appro-
priation to particular times and seasons, from the times

264 /

A450 OF THE MUSICAL SCALES

and seasons allotted by the Hindu ritual for the perform-
ance of the services, to which they weré respectively
appropriated.. Phis appears probable: but whateyer
might have been the original cause of this apparent
‘singularity, it has become se completely engrafted on
the ideas of music amongst the natives of Jvdia, that
they cannot at this day divest their minds of the pre-
judice. ‘lhe muslemans have universally adopted it ;
and a performer, who should sing a Raga out of its ap-
propriated season, or an hour sooner or later than the
time appointed, would be considered as an ignorant |
pretender to the character of a musician, This restraint
npen their music, which Europeans would think insup-
poriable, the Jdian considers as absolutely necessary
to give a true relish tothe melody. ‘The origin of this
custom seems lost in antiquity. No Lindu, with whom
I have conversed, has been able to account for it. We
may, therefore, suppose it probable, that it originated,
as I have observed before, in the religious restrarnts to
which music appears to have been subjected, wher
first reduced to fixed principles as a science.

i |
Musre must have been cultivated in very early ages.
by the Hindus; as the abridged names of the seven
notes, ViZ. sa, 72, ga, ma, pa, dha, ni, are said to occur
in the Rama Veda; and in their present order. Their
names at length are as follow :

Shadja pronounced == Sarja or Kharja.
Rishabha pronounced &ikhabh.

Gand hara.

Madhyama,

Panchama,

Dharvata. |
Nishada pronounced — Nikhad.

‘@F THE HINDUS. | AB’

‘Hence we find, that the abovementioned abbrevi-
ated names of these notes, which are used in what we
call Solfaing or Solmization, are the first syllables of
their names, viz. sa, ri, ga, ma, pa, dha, ni. The
conplete scale is called Swaragrama or assemblage of
tones ; it is likewise called Septac or heptachord, as con-
taining, or consisting of, seven notes. |

Tue Findus place the seven notes under the pro-
tection of seven Ad hisht hatri Dévatas, or saperintend-
ing divinities, as follow :

\

Shadja, under the protection of Acwnz.
Rishabha, of BrauMa.
Gindhira, of SARASVATI.
Mad’ hyama, of Maua’pe’va.
Panchama, of Sri or Lacsumit.
Dhaivata, of Gan’r’s’a.

WNishada, of Su’nya.

re

Op these notes, there are four descriptions: ist the
Badi, which is the Aus’a or key note; and is described
as the Adjd@ on whom all the rest depend; the 2d is
Banbadi which is considered as the Mlznfrt or principal
minister of the Réja; the 3d are Anubddi, described as
subjects attached to their Lord ;,4th Bibddi, mentioned
as inimical to him *.

ee eee eee ee mee,
ae =

_* The three last distinctions seem to corresp@nd to the Homop/o-
ta, Paraphonia, and Antiphonia of the Greets. Gaurim-civs, in
his Harmonick Intreduction, explains Parephonia, a mean vetween
consonance and dissonanee; where the sound, to the ear, apreers
cogsonant. H. T. ae

458 ° OF THE MUSICAL SCALES

Tue Hindus divide the octave into twenty-two inter-
vals, which are called S’ruti, by allotting four S’ruti to
represent the interval which we call a major tone, three
to describe a minor tone, and twothe semi-tone: not °
as being mathematically just, but as means of repre-
senting to the eye, and to the understanding, the sup-
posed relations which these intervals bear to each other ;
merely to show, that a semi-tone is half a major tone,
and that the minor tone isa medium between the major
and semi-tone, being less than the former and greater
than the latter. Mathematical calculation is out of the
question.

Peruaps they were induced to make this division of
the octave, by considering the minor tone as not divi- ~
sible by two, without a fraction; and therefore made
the whole number three, to represent it: for, if we
divide the octave into twelve semistones, this will give
twenty-four quarter tones or S’ruéi; but by allowing
three to represent each of the two minor tones, stead
of four, there will remain only twenty-two, the n
ber of S’ruti admitted. sii Dn

Tue S‘rutis aie personified as so many nymphs; 33
and, in the Sangita Reetndcara, are thus named and

arranged +. : ?
To Shadja or To Rishabha or Le
Sa 2.o.. 4 ( Tibra Ri ..... 3 {Dayavate
—_——- } Cumudvati ————- ——< Renjani
Munda ( Retica
| Chandovya ———

+ The names, exhibited in the Sangita Ddmidara, are quite dif-
ferent. They seldom occur except in the writings of authors treats
ingon music, H,T,C.

OF THE HINDUS. | 459

To Gindhara or To Diaivataor ™
Gas... 2) Rudri Dhay. oie VT Madanti
-—— — | Cridhéi = ————_—-— —¢ Rohini
— — (Ramya
ee
To Madhyama or .
Ma.... ACRG&jica To Mshada or
———_—__-_——__—- J Prasaram ING ste es 24 Upta
Pr ith a2 — | Cahir
—

To Panchama or
wee teens AT Cir
anuoie Simpl Rapes
| Dipari
L Ahipini

Tue Hindus have three Gramas or scales: viz.
Shadja-Gréma, Madhyama-Grama, and Géndhéra-Gréma.
The foregoing arrangement of the S’ru/: is that of the
Shadja Grama, which consists of two disjunct, but per-
fectly similar, Tetrachords, separated by a major tone.
The Madhyama- Grama is formed from this, by a trans
position of the major tone between Pa and Dha, and
of the minor tone between Dha and Ni; thus the
technical language of Hindu music, Dha takes one
S'ruti from Pa, ‘ard becomes thus possessed of four,
leaving three to Pa.

'THe two Gramas may be thus represented.

Tetracherd,. ; Tetracherd.

Sa Ri Ga Ma Pa Dha Ni Sa
i Ta a Oy Re OETA | I ita Pa ee “ae wey
Pine pA “HY eae Jee is 1, 2.224) rR 2 Soe 1.2, 3,/1. 2, |
Sh Mb pd) ce Joon c aa bane ees IE Loa |
2 RR IT OS eee WE Eee Sew eneneeeeeee OY eT Me Nome = fee

= = a = es =< e

Po oS 3 ae rely om |

cg a bee e 3 g a

7 ed 7

5! mi od o o 3 ee

= =] 5 Ss 5 3 st

. 2 ° GS ea _ x

‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ 1 t 4

re a2 SS ce Dee Oo w

Grime,

is
Madhyama ’

A460 OF THE MUSICAL SCALES

sii Ri Ga ‘Ma Pa Dha Ni
aes aol ee Dae pas, 5. 4.1/0
Lit ii a Gi i Hae |
< s Sa = sf S
&. 5 5 = = &
= iS iat ¢ S Si
: J
e S S S e 2
5 2 P & a §
4 ’ 1 1
o oa Ss i oo a

Wuen the change of key requires a different modu-
Jation, the changes in the disposition of the S$’ruéi are
called Vicrit: they reckon twelve such.

Wen a note is to be rendered graver or deeper,
they say that such a note takes one or more S'ru/z from
the note immediately below it, as in the example of
the change from the Shadja Grama to the Madhyama
Grama, where Dia is made one Sruti flatter than in the

former scale. ie,

Ir a note is to be raised, the expression is, that such
a note gives one or more S’ruéz to the note immediately
below it; which operation renders the note propor-
uonally sharper, as its distance from the note immedi-
ately below it is consequently increased; and, to that
immediately above it, the distance is in the same pro-

portion diminished.

Tur Gandhara Grama is formed from the Madhyama
Grama; and, in the construction of it, the Sangi/a
Darpana points out three changes in the scale.

Ist. Gand hara takes one Sruti from Rishabha, and
becomes of three, i.e. by rendering the third note Ga
flat, the interval between Ri and Ga is reduced to 3

OF THE HINDUS. 46}

semi-tone, and that between Ga and Ma becomes a
minor tone. ?

2d. Panchama loses one Sruti to Gandhara.

I am at aloss to know how this can take place; {
sather suspect an error in the text, and would propose
to substitute D/a the sixth note instead of Gandhara.
The three S’ruti of Panchama make the interval between
the 5th and 6th: by losing one, it is reduced toa
semi-tone; but it cannot lose this one to Gandhara,
which is the third note. There are but two methods of
reducing this interval to a semi-tone: one by raising
the fifth note; the other by rendering the sixth flat,
But here the interval between the 4th and 5th remains
unaltered. It must in this case be done by making
Pha the 6th note flat; or, in the language of Hindu
music, by giving one of Panchama’s S‘rutis to Dhai-
vata.

3d. Suddhaswara gives one S'ruti to Nishada. Here
Nishada is rendered one S‘ruti flat. Suddhaswara is
not the name of a note ; but is explained to me tobea
term applied to a note possessing its full compliment of
S'rutis. It may, therefore, be applied, in this case, to
Dhaivata; for, although it may give one S’ruti to
Nishada, yet it gains one from Panchama, and still re-
tains four complete S’rviis.

Ir these conjectures are admitted, and we compare
it with the Madhyama Grama (to which these changes
evidently refer), it will stand thus:

A62 OF THE MUSICAL SCALES

Sa Ris, ¥Ga Maso 12m iiihesae Ni ons
4 ae pe A, ~ Saee: 4.

Madhyama ) | | | 4 |
Grawia, Sent | ri beer Tr
Ma Pa Dha Ni Sa

2. A. 3.
Gandhéra vial | | |
Grima, Ae = a: hs 8 i ed ,
5 S
La Toren we re bie ia mz
S) Big eed Bid Baw ae
we = ieee >) ° 5 ° Ss:
® 3 ® : Heil
s o % 7 ®

Tuar the Hindus probably, by this division of the
octave, meant nothing more than what I hatte before
‘supposed, map appear from the following table, in
which the intervals, between each note and the note
above it, are taken from Mr. Matcoum’s series of the
octave in the two modes (as given by Mr. CHAMBERS
under the article scale). This I have done, in order to ~
compare those intervals with the S’ru#z of the Hindz:,

and to show the difference.

1
—_
9

A63

Matcotm’s series of the octave.
5

5

Q
or
Gdndhara Grama.

4
Minor Mode

3

1

2

8
15

OF THE HINDUS. >
f tbe octave.

or
Madhyama Grama.

8 series O
Major Mode

3

Marcorm’

PS ee ae ee ae ait
What they are as stated by the Hindus. | oy N | oe) ~ | N |
{——____-___-— 4{—4 4 tt

What they ought to be if the scale was di- | ag A | ales

vv N

Proportion of the intervals between each =lo | 4)2 | -12 | -j2 | ais
note, and the note above it. =“ = ‘

et tee

vided into 22 paats or the whole string into 44.

he

DI on | 62199 oe ie) OID
The difference between. es) 23 a ws) 0 a) a
—_ + {aie pole et one eos lo |
Soe eS eee Tale fae | eles |
| What they are as stated by the Hindus. | st SP) at + | a |
- oo pe? —4{ + = toe =
What they ought to be if the scale was di- | ola ws “je oles ng es Pag = nls |
vided into 22 parts or the whole stringinto44a,| “A | a
roportion of the intervals between each | [5 eS ae ag P| e | ae
| note, and the note above it. “12 | =f I= 12 | Is It
a 5 =e Scots Saks = Lo OE —-
r Vaio +p oe po oe sg
The difference between. vs B oS |
= Lalo Se ' at =. i 2 be

PRE Le aes ae. Sake See eS Ais DE le eel

be

Se

ADA OF THE MUSICAL SCALES

Ir we revert to the Shadja Grama, we shall find it
composed of two disjunct, but perfectly similar Zefra-
chords, separated by a major tone: both Te/rachords
are expressed by the name numbers 4. 3.2; and, if
we reject the fractions of the first Tetrachord in the fore-
going table, we have the same number: and, as they
considered the 2d Tetrachord as perfectly similar to the
first, they probably made use of the same numbers té
express that similtude.

Turns are three kinds of characteristic melody for
the structure of Ragas, either by the use of all, or the
exclusion of one, or two, particular notes. ‘Those
Ragas, in which the whole seven notes are employed,
ure called Hanuir, Auran. Those, which exclude one
particular note, and only use the remaining six, are
called Cadhir, Those, which exclude two particular
notes, and only reserve five, are called Orav. There
isa passage in Dr. Burney’s history of music, and one
in the British Encyclopaedia (speaking of the Gueha
Rolta*, or the broken pillar lying in the Campus Mar-
dius at Rome,) by which it-appears, that there 1s on this
pillar or obelisk the figure of a musical instrument with
two strings and with a neck; that, by the means of its
meck, this instrument was capable, with only two strings,
of producing a great number of notes ; that these two
strings, if tuned fourths to each other, would furnish
that series of sounds called by the antients Hep/a-
chord, which consists of a conjunct Yetrachurd as
B.C. D.E; E. F. G. As if tuned in fifths, they
would produce an octave, or two disjunct Tetrachords.

* A fragment of an Egyptian obelisk of the highest antiquity,
which had been brought to Rome under Aveusrus. It is covergd
with Bieroglyshics.

at

of THE HINDUS. 405

This may possibly opie the principle of the con-
struction of the Shadja Grama of the Hindus ; and there
is asimilar instrument still in use, called Dawié/antri,
which I have often seenand heard; and, as far as [ re-
‘member, it is tuned in fifths. It consists of a wooden
body, hollowed out and covered with parchment; it has
a neck and two strings, and is struck with a plectrum.

Tue Madhyama Grama is evidently our major mode $
and, if am right, that of Gaudhdra 1s our minor mode.

THE extent of the Hindu scale is three Septacas ;
which are thus fancifully described: the lowest or first
Septaca, called Mundra sthana, is derived or produced
from the navel, extending upwards to the chest; the
second Madhyasthina, from the chest to the throat ;
the third Tarasthana, from the throat to the brain.

Tue scale is denominated Grama, (literally village, )
because there is in it the assemblage of all the notes,
S'rutis and Mirchhands, arranged in their proper places,
as mankind assemble in towns and villages, and theré
assuine their different degrees and stations.

In considering the names given to the three Gramas,
_ ‘it appears to me, that the Shadja Grama takes its name
from the lowest note inthat scale, as being the founda-
tion of the first Tefrachord; the second Tetrachord
being apparently formed from the first by fifths: in
which case the Oth must necessarily be more aczfe than
in the Diatonic scale; and the interval between the 5th
_and 6th is therefore represented by four S’rutis ‘to sig-
nify, that Dha bears the same proportion to Pa, that £4
Vot. IX, A

; nah a
406 ON THE MUSICAL SCALES

Goes to Sz. The intervals af the Shadja Gréma may
be represented as follow :

fela}3]2}i6}s]1y”
I—|—I-|-I- 1-1-1
(go | 5 [4 ].3 [27] tf 2 |
Sa ri ga ma pa dha m sa

Tue modulation of the Madhyama Grama probably
took its rise from making Madhyama the Sth note in
the scale : in which case you will have

Ni sa ri ga ima pa_ dha,
ana 2%
Si ut re mi fa sot la

Turis is precisely the diatonic scale of the Greeks ;
and here it became necessary to render Dia a comma
lower in the scale, which the Hindus express by making
Dha receive one Send from Pa. ‘he alteration, thus
suggested, they adopted; and with it formed their 2d
scale from the Shadja Grama, giving it the name of |
Madhyama, cisely to denote; its origin.

Tur Géndhéra Grima appears to have a similar
origin; by making Gdndhéra the sth, ‘This will pro-
duce. |

Dha ni sa re ga ma pa
oR
La si ut re m fa sol.

Wuicuis the natural minor mode La: but keeping
Sa as their first note, the Vicrits, or changes before
mentioned, became necéssary, to give it the same
modulation; and it was probably called Gandhira
Grama to denote its origin, |

OF THE HINDUS. A67

Or the notes and S$’ru/is I have spoken above. I
shall now endeavour to explain what these Marchhanas
are; or rather what I conceive them to be. Each
Grama is said to contain seven Aftirchhanas : hence they
‘reckon twenty-one in all.

>

Sir W. Jones says they appear to be no more than
seven pieces of diapascn multiplied by three, accord-
ing to the difference of pitch in the compass of three
octaves *. But the Mirchhanas are described to be the
seven notes, each arranged in its proper station in the
scale, which renders them fit to be applied in the com-
position of the Ragas, &c. It appears to me therefore,
that they are the intervals of each Grama, which I
would arrange as follows. | |

Tue Shadja Grama is composed of two disjunct but
perfectly similar Zetrachoras. separated by a major
sone, and both Vetrachords have a major third; the
Miirchhanas of this Grama I suppose to be

ist. from Sa to Ri ) Ist. 2d.
ad-* ——- Sa'ta Ga "4 ist. 3d.
3d. -——— Sa to Ma Ji ‘ist. <-athi

»

4th. from Pa to Dha) 2d. 2d.

5th. —— Pa to Ni r2d. ad.
6th. —— Pato Sa j 2d: 4th.
7th. —— Pa to Sa 8 octave.

a 8 Oa ee

* In citing a passage from the Evick Poem on the death of Sisu-
PALA, whicd is entilded Megha, Sin W. Jones translated Mursh-
hana, ‘‘ musical interval.’’ (See As. Res. vol. Ist. p. 265.) He
atterwaids gave a different interpretation of it, (vol. 3d. p. 71,) as
stated in the text. In his version of that passage, Sir W. Jones
mistook the-a.eaning of the term Sruti, (which is there translated
ear, instead of quarter tone,) but he has rightly explained it in his

* treatise on the musical modes of the Hindus, H.T.C.

408 ON THE MUSICAL SCALES

True Murchhands of Madhyama Grama ;

gd. from. Sato Ri. . ~- nuee iat
3d. —— Sa to Ga, greater third.

“Ath. —— Sa to: Ma.. aa t,
4th. Sa to Pa, ores". :
6th. —— Sa to Dha, greater sixth.

4th. —— Sa to Ni.
8th. —-—— Ga to Sa.

Mirchhané of Gindhara Gréma s

Sa to Rt.

Sa to Ga, minor third.
Sa to Ma.

Sa to Pa.

Sato Dha, minor fixth.
Sa to Ni.

Sa to Sa.

Tue Mirchhands are all personified, and. diftine
guifhed by names *, viz. .

Tuose of the Shadja Grama, are x. :

Aft. Utiara mundé.

2d. Ultarayita,
8d. Réchani.

Ath. SuP haprajaya.

5th. Sancita.

a ee ee ee

* This lift is apparently from the Sangita Retnacara. Thé per-
sanifted Murch’ hanas have other names in the ss Sis Damodara-.
H. SRA Se

/

ehh OP THE HINDUS. Abg
6th. Chacranta.

Tuose of Madhyama Grama, are:

Ist. Saubiri.

2d. Harina.

3d. Culopanté.
4th. Sudha madhya.
5th. Marghi.

Oth. Purvi.

7th. Rishica.

Tuose of Gaudhara Grama, are:

Ist. Mandré.

2d. Vis’dla.

3d.- Sumue hi.

Ath. Chitra.

5th. Rohini or Chitravati.
6th. Sucha.

qth. Alapa.

THE use of these Mirchhanas is, in my opinion, te
teach the learner to rise an octave by tones and semi-
tones; and ta descend again by the same notes; and to
rise and fall by greater intervals, directly, by omitting
the intermediate netes; in fhort the practice of solmi~
sation.

ie - MY

‘eutMin ann

APPENDIX.

ON ily institution of the Asiatick Society, it was
determined, that, in publishing the Researches of the
Society, mere translations of considerable length should
not be admitted, except of such unpublished essays or
treatises as might be transmitted by native authors.

Ix modification of this rule, it was agreed, at a meet-

ing held on 2d July, 1806, that the Society do pub-

~ lish, from time to time, in volumes distinct from the

Asiatick Researches, translations of fhort works in the

Asiatick languages, and extracts and deseriptiveaccounts

of books of greater length, which may be offered to
the Society and appear deserving of publication.

As this publication may be expected gradually to ex-
tend to all dsiatick books, of which copies may be de-
posited in the library of the Society, and even to all
works extant in the languages of sia, the series of
volumes will be entitled Bibliotheca Asiatica, or a de-
scriptive Catalogue of Asiatick books with extracts and
translations.

OnteEnTAL scholars are mvited to communicate te
the Society such translations and descriptive accounts
of Asiatick books, as they may be disposed to give to.
the learned world through this channel of publication.

at
“y
P >
-
oy
‘Sa
4 ;
W'
J ,
\ A
é
Vile hae
'

i t isi ee beri 3 if
“Mo 'egnaes hacladslatjanis tas

ihe pat — a
ie ae BN EG my DN Ae
+ OE sn te iy 9 s7OK, Ries |
GG: Of Bato 08 vip mes!
ety moe 0 seth 1

wot ac es nigy * aes
me oh 4 1 eT PNGOD: ‘Vehhie
ay teen, ih hO%! FIND Ye op Oe
aR Usttae: eds ehh:
Pipi ght egy cape hs eg re
2 eh Kk Tye i

o he iii se k Evil eee ai
Ac aia riety ethe cock Serr
a seo bg i Li ib al de

-
pt? Mew 5. Rovseray, P Bde |
i ‘@ es mead Street, ‘Spa Field aa
( ae : , hes | 4 ® Vets

Bas

7 . ws
; oe er ay

‘5 4

—_—

DIRECTIONS TO THE BINDER
FOR PLACING THE

_ TABLES AND PLATES.

«Table of Experiments-on Refraction, to front -+'++++++++0+
,-Plate ofa Hygrometer, -+------ allel) a: aie), 6 1\0 ni 9 le Jdjeun'e scenes
‘ Table of the Kings Of Magad’ha, sess eeveveceessceees
, Plate II. Image of GoMAT ISWAR, ++++++ +00 ee beeceee
Plate Ib. Images at Conjeveram and Toojncoor, +++++ oe eeeee
* Plate IV. Image of JAIN-DEO, ++ ++ esse ee cece econ eee :

Plate V. Sculpture and Inscription at Sravangoody, teeeeees
iTable of Nacshatras, viajeiay ee se 0 eae Det e eee eeenneeeeees

Figure of Boswk LLIA. SERRATA, sere eeeee Se ee

«Figure of an improved Hygrometer, r++ +sseee cece sseces
..Fac-simile of Inscription found at Tipura, +-+++++++++++e+
__Pac-simile of an Inscription found in the district of Gorakhpér

PAGE
12
27

116
256
2604
272
278
323:
sr
394
401
407

’
‘
. .
) o - e
. Pa
‘ oi ote bh at ee
‘ rs \- art Sh al
« : oF, ?
; BU ae OR
pe Ne 4 4 pak? a
A oS
7
.
Sd
Va *
,/ 4 +
Ma “et ’ ‘
en é h oe* >

Fm
: aa 4 *
a] vs . e
. ‘ oy Ee
- fre en 0
- . a rr:
7)
- ee
or ee i /
“= |
’ .
‘ ,
ole ;
ae , '
e a
5 =
vy i
«4
+ * s
“.! be 3
4 .
~~ '
’ .
i ~
*
-
:
5»
. o 4
, ‘ S
> “_—
. “%
~ is ft are
,

7

om "Ve? et Paes

iy i i

+

a

mee

ey Tew emer rns comnnrenee ioe mers